《Naruto: Dream To Immortality》


 Chapter -1 - Yamis First Life... Story

    WELL SINCE YOU DON''T LIKE YAMI TO HAVE FLASHBACKS DURING THE STORY. HERE IT IS HIS FIRST LIFE STORY SUMMED UP.


    ¡ñMC''s FIRST LIFE STORY SUMMED UP.


    1-11 (Yami was born to two poor parents. At 9 years old he now has a baby brother... he promised that he would protect him no matter what. When his father saw this he just smiled...


    Even during the his younger years had a dark manipulative streak that he could make anyone give candy and by trading YUGIOH cards he even got a little pocket change, the environment he grew up had corrupted him. But he was a nice kid in general...He was a friend to everyone. The place he lived at wasn''t a bad place. But he knew that everyone had a soft part on them. He also had a moto he took from his mother.


    "Be good and good things will happen to you." he took this as a motivation to help people.)


    12- At this age tragedy struck his Father Died (Yami is in denial and sad), while in sadness Yami is taken advantage of by a female teacher and molested. The teacher then is Killed in a car accident while the MC saw her while waving at him. And *BAM*... she is crushed by the car so hard that her finger flies in front of Yami''s feet. (Yami is shocked and since then gains a tendency to like being in control he became a control freak though he hid it from other. Even something as basic like when one of his family members went to buy something... he already planned how he would act or what he would do if they died... he hated himself for this) During this time while searching on the internet to... release his dispersion somwhere... he sees an anime and¡­ he hides this new hoby of his from everyone.


    13- His uncle who after his father died was nice to him and tried to not make him feel left out, took him everywhere together with his son. Then the Uncle is bitten by a rat¡­. One week later he dies. (The MC understands how fragile human life can be.)


    14- His grandparents die of old age. His grandmother becomes sick. While his grandfather dies because of old age¡­miserable. Having his two children and wife die before him.


    (Yami understands that death is inevitable. He starts becoming paranoid and scared of death so much that even while walking down the road he thinks of 100 ways that he could die. He had a thought of trying to become immortal then he would be able to experience everything this world have to offer. But that thought is squashed since that would be impossible but also... he has a family he loves why would he even want to become immortal)


    15- Because of poverty... him, his mother & little brother all move away from where he grew up searching for a better life. They go in another, nicer city... in here he thrives. He uses this chance to build a nice guy persona and wearing a mask everywhere he goes. He gets top grades in high school.


    16- He gets a reputation as a nice guy. Though his family is still poor and his mother is still trying to get a job¡­


    17- He starts studying harder to try to get a scholarship.


    18- His family is still poor¡­ they are not a perfect family¡­ but he loves them¡­ but he will finally be able to help them. He just got a scholarship offered from one of the best colleges in the country. Finally his hard work is paying off¡­ he will finally be able to help his family out of poverty¡­.


    Yami then dies run over by a car¡­ he is full of regrets¡­ he can feel darkness consume him¡­ even while trying to get out of being born in a bad place¡­ he was never able to choose his fate¡­ he never fell into drugs or anything like that but¡­ he still died¡­ full of pains and regrets... worried about his family... never able to achive his dream... he even gave up his dream to immortality... he was doing it all for his family now so they won''t have to suffer in poverty anymore... he never did anything bad to anyone... ''why do I have to die...'' were his last thoughts...


    DEAD...

 Chapter -2 - Yami Inuzuka

    YAMI INUZUKA


    Age: 18


    Elemental Nature: Wind, Water, Earth, Fire, Lightning (He has the Earth Grudge Fear.)


    Nicknames: Red Fang, Sky Slayer, Demon Child Yami.


    Rank: Jounin (S rank)


    Net Worth: ~ 6 billion Ryo


    Bounty: 127 mill


    Missions Record:


    S-31


    A-123


    B-63


    C-93


    D-86


    ¡ñAGE: 18


    Str: S (SSS- With Strength Technique)


    Vit: SS (SSS With Creation Rebirth)


    Chakra: S+ (SS+ With 100 Strength Seal)


    Chakra Control: SS+


    ¡ñSAGE ARTS: SS


    Sage Style Taijutsu: S


    Sage Style Ninjutsu: SS-


    Bat Sage Style Genjutsu: SSS-


    ¡ñTAIJUTSU: A


    Inuzuka Taijutsu Style: A


    ¡ñGENJUTSU: A (S+ w/sharingan)


    ¡ñMADICAL NINJUTSU: SS-


    Healing: S+


    Medical Technique Mastery: SS-


    Poison Dispelling: S-


    Surgery: A+


    ¡ñFUINJUTSU: SS-


    Sealing Seals: SS-


    Barrier Seals: A+


    ¡ñNINJUTSU: SS-


    Wind Style Jutsus: SS-


    Fire Style Jutsus: S+


    Water Style Jutsus: S+


    Earth Style Jutsus: S+


    Lightning Style Jutsus: A+


    ¡ñSENSOR: 1000 meters (naturally)


    (3000 meters and can sense malicious intent with using the power of the zero tails. If he uses his Mosquito summons he can spy up to unlimited distance)


    ¡öOVERALL STRENGTH: SS-


    ¡ñReputation (Konoha): As far as the everyday ninja or resident of Konoha is concerned Yami Inuzuka is a Hero of Konoha. He ended the battle against Sand Village and helped end the battle against Mist Village during the Second Ninja War. He helped his clan rise in position. He has many extraordinary feats during the Second Ninja War. One amongst them is fighting the 3rd Raikage. After the war he is knows for making his Clan the Ric.h.e.s.t Clan in Konoha... the Konoha people admire him as an Intelligent and Strong man both Personally and Politically. It is rumoured that even the Daimyo listens to him. If that is true or not it is still unknown to the average Ninja... His image to the public of Konoha is perfect... too perfect...


    ¡öHe knows a lot of ninjutsu but amongst them there are some he uses most often:


    ? Silver Sealing Chains (S)


    ? Wind Style: Chakra Scapels (S)


    ? Creation Rebirth (S+)


    ? Tsunade''s Strength Technique (A -> S)


    ? Paralysis Jutsu: Dog Holding (B+)


    ? Chakra Stealing Touch (A)


    ? Flying Thunder God (SS)


    ??????????????????? (secret) (B-> SS+)

 Chapter 1 - Reborn as average

    I don''t know when it started but I have been stuck in this void for a long time.


    -Flashback-


    "LOOK OUT"


    -Flashback End-


    I got run over by not being careful.


    I look around this pit of darkness. Then I think I see something mooving , there are some hands made out of darkness . '' I don''t know what they are but they are freaky '' .


    So I move the opposite side I don''t look behind me. I just keep moving. I keep thinking : '' You got to move '' Got to keep moving I keep moving untill I see a light .


    I run towards the light . After I reach it I black out. Next time I wake up I hear someone speaking . I can''t move at all .


    -Time Skip -


    I woke up again and this time I try to open my eyes but I can''t . I only hear


    ??? : "It''s a boy Misune -san"


    Misune : "He is so cute you have your fathers eyes and my hair"


    I assess the situation I have read rough fanfics to know what and where I am.


    Me: "UAAAAUAAAUAAA"


    It''s quite easy to cry as a baby. ''I don''t know where or when I am so I got to act as a baby to not be suspicious or they could at the best outcome brand me as genious or the worst outcome brand me as baby possessed by a demon.''


    Misune : "His name will be Yami"


    -Time Skip- (3 months)


    After some time I confirm something I am


    in an anime I knew from my previous life


    -Time Skip- (Age 1 year old)


    I started crawling at 5 months old which is not weird considering that chakra makes babies develop faster.


    I said my first word at 6 months it was mama


    my mother cried when I said it.


    I started walking at 8 months.


    ''I now also know which clan I am from I am from the Inuzuka clan. I was a little disappointed that I wasn''t from the Uchiha or Senju. That would have helped me in my plans a lot. But no use cruying over spilled milk.''


    ''I didn''t really connect with my new mother and I didn''t really care about her but I act like I do , I act like a kid , I play with other kids if there is one thing I have is patience. I didn''t act special. Now that I have seen my self in the mirror I have an average face with black pupiless eyes and brown slightly spiky hair. During this time I also tried to sense my chakra which I did and seemed normal chakra I don''t know the quantity because I don''t have to compare it to. I also developed a new teachnique I dont know if you could call it that but I tried to sense someone''s chakra of course I couldn''t but if I touch someone I can tell their chakra amount I have tried this with my mother I have the same amount as her maybe a little smaller.


    My birthday wasn''t something special there were a couple of mom''s friends over with some of their kids a little bit older than me and nothing else. When I tried my sensing technique on the kids I had higher chakra than them. Then I also discovered that I had chakra bigger than average. But not that big since my mom who I think has biger chakra than me is a civilian. It''s either that or she is a medic ninja. I don''t think that since at my birthday there were only civilian people and a couple of inuzuka ninja.


    -Time Skip- (Age 2 year old)


    I also started training my chakra control with the leaf sticking exercise from a couple of leafs from our small backyard. I was sure nobody was watching me, as I was doing the exercise in the bathroom.I can stick up to five leafs in my forehead.


    One day out of curiosity I asked my mother.


    Me: "Mommy where is my daddy everyone else has a daddy why don''t I have a daddy"


    Misune:"Well honey ...

 Chapter 2 - Your father is .....

    I could see it she looks nervous. She sits down on the couch , makes a sad smile and says.


    Misune : "Well honey your father was a ninja"


    Me:"Wow that sounds cool, what''s a ninja mommy"


    I acted like I didn''t know.


    She looked uncomfortable.


    Misune:"Well a ninja is a great hero who protects the village".


    Me:"Was dady a strong hero"


    She still isn''t giving me the information I want.


    Misune:"Yes he was strong he was a chunin his name was Yami Inuzuka you were named after your father who died to protect the village"


    When she said that it was hard to keep the disapointment out of my face.


    I was hoping for him to at least be a jonin or something but he is just a chunin who probably died in a mision gone wrong


    Me:"Wow I also want to be a ninja like dad it souns so cool"


    ''I need her to get adjusted to the idea of me being a ninja so she doesn''t forbid me from going to the academy''


    Misune:"I will allow you to go to the academy if you manage to impress me"


    Me:"Yay thanks mom"


    -Time Skip-(one week later)


    ''I heard that the clan head has a daughter. We all went to the birth party. There I saw a lot of civilian Inuzuka and ninja Inuzuka with their dogs.There were at least 500 people in the restaurant. A huge difference from my first birthday party who at max had 20 people.


    Then as this party got boring I was trying to hear anything useful I heard the clan head talking with somebody who I could see was trying to flatter him, the guy was a kiss*ss prety much.''


    ???:"What a cute baby girl you have there Inuzuka -sama I feel she will become a great ninja what''s her name".


    The clan head looked annoyed.


    Clan Head:"Her name is Tsume. Now can you go away I don''t want my daughter to be around beta males like you."


    ''Ah I see se that little baby was Tsume the mother of Kiba well that''s quite interesting it seems like I have some time before the third and fourth ninja wars. I am not quite sure if the second ninja war has started I don''t remember if Tsume was born at the time before or after the second ninja war started.


    Well it dosen''t matter I will learn about it in the academy.''


    -Time Skip- (Age 3 years old)


    ''I have trained in chakra control now I can stick leafs all over my face and my arms.


    My chakra amount has also advanced becouse I keep doing the leaf sticking exercise untill I only have around 5% of my chakra. If I go any lower I start feeling lightheaded.Now that i am 3 years old I have started joging, chakra really makes miracles.''


    -Time Skip- (Age 4 years old)


    Now I have started doing pushups and exercising in the monkey bars in the park.


    My agility and stamina have increased to something that should be impossible for a modern earth man.


    I tried doing the tree walking exercise in my bathroom walls I have the right chakra controll but not the body strength.


    -Time Skip- (Age 5 years old)


    I am now able to do the tree walking exercise.


    I have convinced my mother quite easily to let me go to the academy by telling her that I want to become strong so I can protect her and the village.


    Which I could care less about her and the village.


    I just want to become strong to complete my plan.

 Chapter 3 - Academy time

    Age 6 years old


    Now I can go to the Ninja Academy.


    I am quite proud of the progress I have made I can now do water walking. My stamina, strength and agility have advanced to another level.


    My chakra now surpasses my mothers by miles.


    Now if i concentrate I can sense chakra 5 meters around me.


    The clan caretakers have also called me to come pick a ninken a ninja dog now that I am gonig to the academy.


    When I went there I was called by the ninja guarding it.


    When I get close to him I try to sense how much chakra he has...


    We have around the same amount. I was surprised this guy should be a chunin. Because these ninken are quite important to the clan. Important enough to not let a genin guard it but not quite important to let a jounin to guard them. Now I have a frame of referance to judge peoples strength.


    Of course not jinchuriki but normal ninja.


    Guard:"Come on why are you spacing out get inside"


    I smile


    Me: "Sorry, Sorry guard -san. I just am so excited to finally get my ninken."


    The guard smiles


    Guard:"I used to be like you I was so excited I could not sleep."


    Me:"Ahahahahah I am going in now thanks mister."


    When I go inside the stables I see so many puppies of all kind of colors red, blue, white, black, orange etc..


    I start looking for a dog trying to find the strongest puppy. Then I have an idea and use my chakra sense and try to sense the one with most chakra.


    After some time I sense one with strong chakra it was a wite fur with red eyes. I went to pet him and he licked my hand.


    Me:"Well your name will be Shiro"


    Well I was never good at nameing se i just named him after his fur color.


    After going outside and registering my dog with the guard.


    As I got clouse I see my small one story house.


    -Time Skip- (Academy entrence)


    I wake up in the morning. Go to the bathroom look in the mirror I look with black sligtly spiky hair like Kiba and black pupiless eyes and formed with a little of baby fat face. I wear a hoodie and black ambu pants. And normal ninja sandals.


    I was acompanied by my mother to the academy which was quite far away from my home in the Inuzuka district. My mother looks quite sad to acompany me here, then she says.


    Misune:"Don''t worry honey even if you decide that beeing a ninja is not for you, you must know that there are a lot of careers out there."


    Me:"Dont worry mom I am going to be a strong ninja so I can protect you"


    She looks a little bit sad.


    Misune:"Of course honey, of course you will."


    Me:"Bye mom."


    Then the 3rd hokage comes in a shunshin at the teachers side.


    Then he makes a speech about the will of fire.


    Which impressed the kids.


    Then we are assigned to different classroom.


    I am in 1-A for clan and civilian kids with potential. We go to the classroom I sit by the window and look around and don''t see anyone notable from the show.


    Then the techer comes in.


    Teacher:"Hello everybody look to you right look to your left , everyone you see here is your comrade in arms he might save your life one day and you might call him one day


    a brother in all but blood


    Allright then lets start the introduction state your name and dream."


    There were only two other clan kids in the classroom they were twins from the Sarutobi clan.


    Asutori:"Hi my name is Asutori Sarutobi and my dream is to be hokage."


    The children looked impressed like they saw the next hokage or something. I sensed his chakra and he only has academy student amount. What a dumbass.


    He probably doesn''t train and is arrogant becouse the current hokage is a sarutobi.


    Then his sisters turn came.


    Asume:"Hi my name is Asume Sarutobi, and my dream is to help my brother achive his dream."


    ''What a sheep she probably has no dream and just follous her brother around.''


    Then my turn comes. I smile and answer.


    Me:"Hi my name is Yami Inuzuka my dream is to be a strong ninja so I can protect the village that I love."


    ''Yeah right my dream as if I care about this village''


    After all the introductions is lunch break.


    So I go in the yard , then I see someone I recognise from the anime. I smile time to put the game face on.


    Me:"Hello there can I sit next to you"

 Chapter 4 - Academy Time part 2

    Me:"Hello there can I sit next to you"


    I see him siting on the ground while eating a boxed lunch.


    Minato:"Yeah sure there is no problem."


    Me:"Thank you I don''t know anyone in this academy and I saw you alone and thought hey that guy looks friendly."


    Minato:"Ahahaha thanks? I was actually waiting for my friends.Ohhh there they are."


    I turn around and see three guys coming toward us.


    Inoichi:"Sorry to make you wait Minato, Chouza got hungry again and we had to buy him food."


    Chouza:"Sorry." *munch*


    Just then Shiro smelled food and poped hei head out of my hoodie and barked towards Chouza.


    Shiro:*bark*


    Chouza:"Hey there little guy are you hungry."


    Chouza gives him some ch.i.p.s which the dog takes. I take this as my moment to introduce myself.


    Me:"Hi my name is Yami Inuzuka and this is my ninken Shiro."


    Inoichi:"Hi my name is Inoichi Yamanaka."


    Shikaku:"I am Shikaku Nara and the guy eating is Chouza Akimichi."


    Chouza:"Hello."


    Minato:"My name is Minato Namikaze."


    Me:"So which class are you guys."


    Minato:"We are second year 2A class."


    Then we talked about lessons,dreams and aspirations untill the bell rang.As we were talking I cheked their chakra levels they were


    Shikaku Nara high academy level chakra,


    Inoichi Yamanaka high academy level chakra,


    Chouza Akimichi low genin level chakra.


    When I went home that day mom said to me that a ninja from the Inuzuka clan has called me to the Inuzuka clan training grounds.


    After I ate some food I went to the trainig ground there I met the guy who guarded the ninken. He was taned had a goate and had a konoha headband in his forehead that covers his hair.


    Guard:"Hey there little pup."


    Me:"Hey there guard -san."


    Guard:"My name is Gaku you little squirt."


    Me:"So why did you call me here guard -san."


    Gaku:"MY NAME IS GAKU BRAT..*sigh* anyway I was requested to teach you the Inuzuka clan taijutsu and ninjutsu. You will come here every day after the academy and we will train the clan techniques untill you get them."


    Me:"Oh ok. When will we start."


    Gaku:"Well first we will have to up your body strength, agility and stamina.Ok now run around the edges of the trainig field as long as you can as fast as you can."


    Me:"Ok, Shiro run along with me also."


    I started running at max speed and I ran for about 5 hours then I fell face down on the ground. Shiro fell after 3 hours in the race.


    Gaku:"You know I was expecting you to run at max for an hour, you are ready for the official trainig tomorrow you don''t need to train your body anymore for the basic Inuzuka techniques. Your physical stats are already at genin level."


    Me:"We will still do normal body training right?"


    Gaku:"Not with me do it by your self , I am


    only here to teach you the techniques.Well then see you tomorrow. By the way don''t forget your ninken for training tomorrow."


    He then shunshined away. After reasting for a bit I went home and slept.


    -Time Skip- (3 weeks later)


    I learned a lot of taijutsu and inuzuka ninjutsu the four leged techniques. Also every day at lunch break I would hang out with Minato and his friends. I heard a lot of things from Shikaku his father is the head of intelligence and Shikaku told me that konoha is attacking a village called Dragonfly village. And then I knew the situation around the world is tense.


    I am pretty shure that the 2nd great ninja war is going to start soon. Well anyway today is taijutsu sparing class.


    Teacher:" Well then class today we are going to have a sparing class. I have explained the basics of taijutsu in these 3 weeks. You dont have to be afraid I will match you fairly."


    He then explained the rules of the spar which were no ninjutsu or genjutsu only taijutsu and when one of us is down or out of the circle we lose.


    The matches begin and civilians get matched against each other exept Asume she fought against another civilian girl and she won easily.


    I was paired against Asutori Sarutobi.


    He went into the circle as if he won already.


    Asutori:"You dont have to worry Yami I will not fight you at my full power as a Sarutobi we are after all comrades."


    Me: ....


    ''THIS TRASH HAS THE GUTS TO BRAG LIKE THAT WHEN HE ONLY HAS THAT AMOUNT OF MICROSCOPIC POWER....ok breath in and out no need to get angry what if this was the ninja war must always stay calm this could have been a fatal mistake. Remember you are not an anime protagonist you don''t get strong by being angry , anger only dulls your senses.


    Ok now I am ready.


    Teacher:"Ok guys do the unison sign."


    I get into the ring do the unison sign and then the teacher says.


    Teacher:"Begin."


    As soon as the theacher says that I strengthen my leg muscles with chakra I run towards Asutori I am in front of him before he can blink I kick forward with the leg on the ground I cancel the strengthening on it and concentrate the chakra on the groung to make me stick to it I then kick forward with all my strength I can see his eyes widen he doesn''t have time to block so i kick him in the stomach he spits blood and flyes out of the circle and crashes on the groud 20 meeters away. All of the students are shocked.His sister looks ready to kill me. Teacher stops her with a hand in her sholder.


    The teacher then goes to the side of Asutori sudenly shunshins with him away and then comes back withought him.


    The teacher looks at me with a little bit of anger and killing intent.


    Teacher:"Why did you use so much power against Asutori."


    ''Well time to play innocent'' I think. I make a shocked and sad face and say.


    Me:"Sorry sensei I didn''t mean to use so much strength against him.I have never spared against someone before I just used all my strength. I am sorry."


    When the teacher hears this he lightens up a bit and says


    Teacher:"I understand but don'' use this much strength against a classmate anymore. Am I understood."


    Me:"Yes sensei."


    -Time Skip- (Age 7 years old)


    The 2nd great ninja war has started.


    I am not planing to graduate for at least another year untill I am ready. Becouse I know I will be going into war immediately as soon as I graduate. During this year I have trained my body to the ground have learned most Inuzuka techniques.I have mastered the 3 academy jutsus especially the replacement jutsu , I trained it untill i could do it without handseals after all it is a life saveing jutsu.


    I also can now do a physical transformation jutsu not just the illusion one.


    Also Asutori was stuck at the hospital for about a week.


    He keeps challenging me every sparring sesion which is once a month, even though he hasn''t won even once.


    Minato has graduated early at 8 years old.


    His teacher Jiraya.


    Now I am stuck with only the ino-shika-cho trio they havent graduated yet.


    -Time Skip- (Age 8 years old)


    Now this time I am graduating even though there is a war going on. After all if I can''t survive this war where the strongest is a Kage level shinobi how will I survive the 4th ninja war where kage level ninjas are cannon fodder. I have been studying a little medical jutsus now that I have free time from the Inuzuka techniques becouse I matered them.


    Even though I still cant use medical palm I am training my chakra controll with it.


    When I got in my classroom I sat down and waited for the other people to come.


    The classroom filled up I was surprised to see two familiar people and then the teacher came.


    Teacher:"Ok students today you graduate let''s call the team placements.


    Team one .....


    Team three Yami Inuzuka , Asume Sarutobi and Asutori Sarutobi."


    I was affraid of this Asutori has been concentrateing on training and hasen''t studied for the exam and in the Academy he only concentrated on beating me so his written test results were probably bad.


    Teacher:"Your team jonin sensei will be .....

 Chapter 5 - A future Sanin

    Teacher:"Your team''s jonin sensei will be Tsunde Senju.She said for you guys to meet her at the hospital."


    We get our headbands and go.


    As me and my team leave the classroom it got pretty awkward. Even though this is unfortunate I need these guys at least not to kill me in my sleep after all it is war ,quite an easy way to kill somebody withought blame.


    Me:"I am glad to at least have you guys on my team."


    Asutori looked quite scared of me even though he hides behind a mask of confidance he is probably traumatised from our first fight.


    Asume:"What''s that supposed to mean."


    Ah so the sheep finally got some backbone probably from me beating her brother.


    Me:"You guys are better than all those guys in the room all together.Even though I beat Asutori in every taijutsu match he still improves by leaps and bounds."


    Well that is a lie, in all these years his taijutsu is only about high genin and chakra amount average genin and his genjutsu is probably nonexistant.


    But abought genjutsu even I only know some useless ones that are tought in the academy like to change the color of a flower, the Inuzukas do not really have any genjutsu techniques.The academy library does not really have any genjutsu or ninjutsu only medical,poison,flower arranging,seduction knowledge.


    As about Asume she only has low level genin tajtsu and medium genin chakra amount.


    I am not quite sure about their ninjutsu arsenal but they might know some fire style ninjtsu.


    Asutori:"Uhhh thanks?"


    Even though he looks unsure I can tell he is hapy to get a compliment like every kid.


    Me:"And Asume you are the strongest konuichi in the classroom that exeles at everything she does."


    Then I start to talk about how our teacher is going to be.If she is a medical ninja or is sick and staying in the hospital and so on.The sanin are not really famously known yet at this time.


    Then I see a ninja about 20 years old waiting at the front of the hospital.


    ???:"Hey excuse me are you team 3?"


    I walk in front of my team to subconciously make me their leader.


    I smile and ask.


    Me:"Yes we are sir."


    ???:"Oh ok can you follow me I will esxort you to Tsunade -sama."


    We follow hin. I analyse him a bit. He has genin chakra amount. He does not have a team. And is doing chore missions.He is not a medic nin becouse they have to much value in war to be used as a chore boy. He is probably a genin from the genin corps.


    We reach a door and open it.Inside there are a simple woden table one simple wooden chair had two windows, a bookshelf with medical knowledge and there she is, sitting in the chair reding some medical reports probably.


    Then she looks up and then throws a small scroll to the genin choreboy


    Tsunade:"You finished your mission ninja you can retrive yoor pay in the mission building."


    The genin goes away and closes the door.


    Tsunade:"Ok now I don''t have a lot of time. So go say your names,likes,dislikes and dreams."


    Asutori:"My name is Asutori Sarutobi, I like my sister and Barbeque meat, I dislike smoke from cigars, my dream is to become hokage" then he looks at me "but first i have to surpass a certain someone."


    Tsunade looks at him with frwned eyebrows and says


    Tsunade:"Dumb."


    Asutori looks like he wants to say something but is stoped by his sister when she steped on his foot.


    Asume:"My name is Asume Sarutobi, I like my brother and tea ceremonies, I dislike a certain someone and cigarete smoke, and my dream is to help my brother acomplish his dream."


    Tsunade:"Next."


    Me:"My name is Yami Inuzuka, I like my ninken Shiro and my clan and mother,I dislike arrogant people and my dream is to becone a strong ninja to protect Konoha and those I love."


    Well a good ninja would not give any important information or a weakness.


    I didn''t give neither becouse I don''t really care about the family I have here in this world or Konoha.


    Tsunade looks at me and says.


    Tsunade:"Interesting."


    She probably sensed my chakra. I dont know if she is able to tell my body strength by just looking at it by her large medical knowledge and experience. I am never underestemating a soon to be sanin.


    Tsunade:"Well tomorrow we will hold the real genin test.We will see if you are able to pass or not."


    Asume:"We already did the genin test."


    Tsunade:"Yes you did but not the real genin test to see whether you go back to the academy, go to genin corps or get a jounin teacher.Now scram."


    Tsunade: "Oh I allmost forgot."


    And throws three small square papers at us.


    Tsunade:"These are chakra papers they test your chakra affinity which helps you learn ninjutsu faster and spend less chakra on it for that element.This is my gift to you even if you go to the genin corps."


    She then explains what each element does and demonstrates by using a chakra paper and it wrinkels.


    Then we go outside and I say goodbye to my teammates and while walking and thinking this piece of papre will determine my future path then I put the paper in my hand and pass chakra into it


    Then the paper ....

 Chapter 6 - Genin test

    I then open up my hands and see what happened. I look down and see that the paper has a cut in it. So my chakra affinity is wind.


    I am a little disappointed


    I was hoping to have lightning affinity or two affinities but at least I didn''t have water affinity I mean where are you going to find any good water ninjutsu in fire country.


    I am gonig to have to prepare for tomorrow and think of a plan I am pretty sure what the test is going to be so I will plan for it. If it is not the bell test I will still be prepared.


    -Change POV- Tsunade


    As I see the kids go out of ths door I think about their answers.


    (The twins have straight black hair, short hair is the guy and long hair is the girl they both have brown eyes and oval faces. )


    The Sarutobi boy he is a dreamer and


    not skilled enough to have that kind of dream just like Nawaki. As I think of my brother who died in a mission before the war I almost cry.*sigh*


    The Sarutobi girl she is average and only has dreams of helping her brother.


    I saw a little hate in the girl against the Inuzuka kid that might be her downfall in the war and in the genin test tomorrow.


    Then there is the Inuzuka kid. The kid is not a Jinchuriki, to have the chakra of a average jounin and the control of a low leveled jonin by the stability in his chakra that kid is a monster even his body is strong but he doesn''t have experience. But the way he walks is inexperience. Most chunin level and higher ninja have a certain way of walking to not be able to tell their body strength by a medic nin.


    After all in ninja battles, it is best to not give away even the smallest amount of information. Anyway his body strength


    is around chunin level. That kid really is something even his wolf puppy is high genin level.


    I only took this team in favor of Sarutobi -sensei. Also I am the only one of his students who hasn''t had a genin team yet. But now it looks like it will be interesting having genin students.


    Well I should get going now don''t want to keep my new friend Dan waiting.


    -Time Skip-( tomorrow )


    ( Tsunade POV )


    Me and Dan really had a nice date yeterday.


    I think as I get up.


    I wake up, shower, wear my jounin uniform and go to the hospital and tell the nurses there to tell my genins if they see them to tell them to go to trainig ground 3.


    Anyway I am waiting for those kids to show up I am hiding from them to see if they have any spacial awareness. I still have my chakra not hiden and I am not really completely hiden.


    I see the Sarutobi kids coming 30 mintes before the appointed time and the Inuzuka coming 5 minutes before the appointed time. Then I hear them talking.


    Asume:" Hey you are late what if the teacher was here you would have failed immediately."


    Yami:"A black cat crossed my way so I took the long road. And I am still 5 minutes earlier than the appointed time. Plus if the teacher had a problem with it she would have already told me"


    Yami:" Right Tsunade -sensei."


    Well the Inuzuka are not a tracking clan for nothing.


    I then shunshin in front of them.


    Tsunde:"All right then genins I will explain the test see these two bells the one to get one before lunch passes that means that one of you or all of you will have to go back to the academy or will have to join the genin corps.Now begin."


    The two Sarutobi go into hiding. The Inuzuka still has not moved from his place.


    Tsunade:"What are you waiting for."


    He looks at her, puts the puppy down nods at him, and says to Tsunade.


    Yami:"I want to see for myself the distance between us."[Four legged technique].


    His eyes become slits, his fingernails become claw like and his canines teeth lengthen.


    ''This guy is quite arrogant.'' thinks Tsunade.


    He quickly runs towards her in all fours


    At about low jounin speed. She sees this and scoffs as he is in about arms leength away from her she punches him in the stomach and he craches in a tree.


    ''That should teach him a lesson.''


    thought Tsunade


    When she looks at the tree there is only a log.


    ''Substitution'' thinks Tsunade. Then she hears a wind cuting sound and sees kunais and shuriken being thrown at her from a tree. She doges them all and then she sees the one who threw them is it the Inuzuka kid. He runs at her in all fours and as he is about an arms lingth away and she is about to punch him. She feels somethig behind her and she kicks it instinctively in the stomach , it blocks with one hand and it jumps to lessen the impact. And then the one infront of her jumps back also and transforms into a ninken.She then looks behind her and sees the Inuzuka kid and his swollen left arm then she says.


    Tsunade:"That was quite reckless of you."


    He then looks at me and points two fingers in my direction with two bells attached to two chakra strings from each finger.


    Yami:"Yes but it was quite worth it."


    ''He had the ninken act as him and throw projectiles at me and he transformed in to a kunai and waited for the right moment what a brilliant mind. But lets see your character now.'' thought Tsunade


    Tsunade:"Well now you got two bells one for yourself and one for one of them chose which one you want to pass you have time untill lunch."


    ''Let''s see now will you chose one of them or none of them.'' thought Tsunade.


    She then looks at a tree and says.


    Tsunade:" You guys can come out now."


    The twins jump down from the tree.


    They both have shocked and worried faces. They propably couldn''t even see the fight clearly and it all ended in around 5 seconds. They both have kunai in their hands and are looking at the Inuzuka kid. They are probably going to fight him for the bells what a disappointment.


    Then I look at the kid he looks at the bells and throws the bells at ths Sarutobi twins and says.


    Yami:" I don''t want to see us, a team fight, you guys can pass I will just wait another year."


    This shocked me. What a selfless kid.


    ''Is this the will of fire that sensei talks about ''. thinks Tsunade.


    Tsunade:" Well you guys all pass, and from now on YOU ARE NINJA OF KONOHA."


    Then I look at them go to heal the kids arm and whispers to the kid.


    Tsunade:"You will make a great ninja one day."


    Then after healing him I says.


    Tsunade:"We will meet here tomorrow to start the training. So taday you can all go home and rest."


    Tsunade POV end

 Chapter 7 - Team Bonding

    (From now on it is MC POV)


    When I got home I kept looking at my left hand. She barely tuched my hand and it was still swollen. If I had gotten hit by that kick directly I would have died. Thank god she held back agains me, even though that last kick should be at her full power. And this is the monter that madara toyed with.


    I had it all planed but not quite the last part didn''t go as planed the plan was I would have gotten the bells with the chakra strings and I would have jumped back immediately not harmed at all while Shiro distracted her.


    I also bought some explosive tags, I am glad I didn''t have to go for plan C.


    Well at least I put on a good act in front of them, the twins at least won''t kill me in my sleep now.


    I went home took a shower and went too sleep.


    -Time Skip- (tomorrow)


    I got up went to wear my clothes and took my ninken and we ate a full breakfast. And we went out to the trainig ground.


    The siblings are here again early I wait in a tree untill it is exactly the meeting time. I walk as if I just arrived.


    Asume:"Hey you are late."


    Me:"I saw an old man on the road and I had to help him. Plus I am not late I am exactly on time."


    She just pouts and turns her head away.


    Then I start talking what sensei is going to teach us today and she lightens up and we start talking with Asutori exaggerating the things that she might teach us today.


    After 3 minutes Tsunade shows up.


    Then immediately she says.


    Tsunade:"Today is the only day that I am able to tech you directly I am busy in the hospital, so for a week you will be taught by my clone after that we are going to the land of rivers to the front lines against the village hidden in the Sand."


    Asutori:"Why are we going to the land of rivers if we are going to fight the Sand village."


    Tsunade then looked at him as of he was dumb.


    Tsunade:"Why would a great village fight in their own lands when they could fight in the land of a minor village in the middle of them. Its not like a minor village is going to hold two great villages at bay."*sigh*


    Tsunade:" Well anyway first I will get you a scroll from the library of a jutsu


    of C rank from your elemental affinity. So tell me your chakra nature and I will get a jutsu that you know about."


    Me:"Wind style great breakthrough."


    Asurori:"Fire style great fireball."


    Asume:"Fire style Phoenix Flower."


    Tsunde nods then does a hand sign and a shadowclone pops up.


    Tsunade:"Go get me the jutsu scrolls from the chunin library."


    The clone nods and shunshins away.


    Tsunade:"Okay then lets start with chakra control Asurori, Asume you come with me to the pond. Yami you start with chakra strings try to make them longer, make more of them and try to lift havier things with them."


    I keep doing that for about 30 minutes.I can make my 2 strings about 3 inches longer. Tsunades clone comes back gives me my scroll and goes to give the twins their scrolls. Then I think it is Tsunades clone comes back. Then she says.


    Tsunade(clone): "Well then lets start I will supervise your progres."


    Me:"Actually sensei can we talk about medical ninjutsu I feel that this is more beneficial for me."


    She looks at me and fowns


    Tsunade(clone):"Why, do you think you can do the chakra control even alone."


    I put my innocent face on and say


    Me:"No, No, No I just want to know more medical jutsu what if someone important to me gets hurt."


    Tsunade(clone):"Ok I hope you don''t regret this later."


    We then talk about medical knowledge and the theoretical knowledge of the mystical palm technique and chakra scapel technique, how to detoxify poison etc... We train about 9 hours and then the twins who looked exhausted and the real Tsunade comes back and she dispels the clone her eyes widen a bit and then she says.


    Tsunade:"C''mon I am going to


    treat you all to some food as today I have a free day."


    As we are walking I ask the twins.


    Me:"So how was your progress today guys."


    Asutori:"Well Asume was able to do it but I always lose concentration when I walk too deep. This is just like the tree walking exercise that our clan tought us she did it first."


    I smile and say.


    Me:"Don''t worry too much I know you will be able to do it."


    Asutori:"Yeah you are right I shouldn''t worry abought things like this I am going to be hokage after all."


    Then we have some small talk and make jokes at eachother. At the corner of my eye I see Tsunade looking at us and smiling.


    Then we arrive at the restaurant it is one of the expensive ones around.


    I guess Tsunade hasn''t wasted all her money and her inheritance by gambling yet.


    Tsunade:"C''mon inside now, this restaurant has my favorite sake."


    Well she already has her drunken habit.


    We go inside in a private opening with a teable for four. Tsunde orders sake and chicken b.r.e.a.s.t, I and Asume order sushi she also orders tea with it, Asutori orders barbecue meat. And Shiro got some steak and dog food.


    We wait a little bit for our food to come


    we genins make some small talk about our favorite foods our least favorite and at one time even Tsunade joins in and says that her least favorite food is liver sashimi. She looked happy. Then now that she relaxed it is time to advance my little plan and ask her something.


    Me:"Hey Tsunade -sensei what was that clone technique that you used."


    Tsunade:"Oh that is the shadow clone technique."


    Me:"Can you teach it to me."


    She then looks at me and seems to think for a little and said.


    Tsunade:"Sure but don''t overuse it don''t make more than 8 clones or you will fall into chakra exhaustion. By the way no you two can not use it you don''t have the chakra."


    She then explains to me the working of the shadow clone she says that when the shadow clone is used it takes 50% of the chakra. But if the clone pops its self it returns some of the chakra. How much it returns it depends on how long its been active or if it has unsed any jutsu.


    If the clone is destroyed it does not return any chakra.She showed me the handsigns. She then told me to be careful with my trainig. After we ate.


    She then invited us all to a bathhouse to relax.


    As we were walking to the bathhouse I thought.


    ''I am not sure if she intentionally left out the returning memory or not. But from what she says it, every time I use the shadow clone technique it takes 50% of my chakra so if I create 5 at once each will take about 10% of my chakra. If I try to create 20 clones and my 50% is not enough to make them, so they will take from my other 50% and I will suffer extreme chakra exhaustion and might even cripple myself by halfing my original chakra amount. Ahhhh I wish I had a giant fox in my belly to not worry abought that.''


    Asutori:"Hey push me up the wall I wanna get a peek."


    The idiot probably disn''t think walking up the wall with chakra, well anyway


    it does sound fun but I don''t want to get punched by Tsunade so I will find another way of entertainment.


    I look at him like he is trash and say.


    Me:"You want to peek at your own sister you creep."


    Asutori:" WHAT! NO! I MENT PEEK AT TSUNADE."


    Then the wall crashes and an angry Tsunade comes through with only a towel around her and punches him


    repeatedly. I only enjoy the view for a couple of seconds before making a stealthy tactical retreat.


    Then I go home and learn the shadow clone jutsu and go to sleep.


    -Time Skip- (One week later)


    This weak I trained to the maximum about 16 hours a day plus my shadow clones I made 5 each day and they had their own tasks:


    Clone 1- Train the great breakthrough jutsu untill I could do it without handsigns I couldn''t do it but I got it from 5 handsigns to 3.


    Clone 2- He trained the shunshin technique that I got from the genin library. I mastered it by Tsunades guidance ,get it to use only used for short distance travel. But I did get an idea for jutsu which I will try when I have time.


    Clone 3- This one trained chakra strings it was able to get one for each finger to 2 meters(6"5'') and it got my chakra control up.


    Clone 4-Learned medical ninjutsu from Tsunades clone and was able to use the Mystical Palms to heal small cuts and scr.a.p.es.


    Clone 5-Trained my ninken to low chunin level.


    I always dispelled them in the evening one by one.


    And finally I was doing the wall walking while holding a boulder bigger than me up a mountain which increased all my aspects. My trainig speed was mosterous with shadow clones.


    As for my teammates.


    Asutori now is low chunin taijutsu, high genin chakra and learned both the Fireball and Phoenix Flower jutsu and water walking.


    Asume also has the same stats as her brother exept taijutsu is high genin and chakra control is better than his she also learned both fire jutsus.


    They didn''t train even as half as hard as me and I had shadow clones so I left an unsurpassable distance betwen us.


    Then Tsunade came to congratulate us in a well spent trainig week and told us.


    Tsunade:"You have all come very far during this week."


    She took a glance at me. Then continued.


    Tsunade:" But you must pass one last trial before going to the frontlines of the war."

 Chapter 8 - A death battle

    After Tsunade said that she told us to follow her. We followed her and we went towads the T&I department building. We go there the anbu in front nods towards Tsunade and opens the door we go in and take the stairs and go down. When we go to the last level we hear screaming.


    ?:" HELP US."


    ??:" PLEASE GET US OUT."


    ???:" I ALREADY TOLD YOU EVERYTHING PLEASE LET ME GO."


    And other stuff some were angery, some sad, some were begging. The twins get pale faced. Even I am not used to this.


    But I just keep thinking about the trial that Tsunade -sensei told us I think I know what it is going to be. Tsunade leads us toward a cell there seem to be 3 people with tied and broken limbs even their mouths were covered they had tears in their eyes. Tsunade looks at them with a coold face and says.


    Tsunade:"We would have done a bandit extermination but we are at war so we can''t exactly waste our ninja like that. These guys were genin from the Cloud village. They were spies in a cravan and they were caught."


    She gives each one of us a kunai and says.


    Tsunade:"Kill them."


    The twins froze, but I did it and went towards one of them and sliced the guys throat with a swipe of the kunai, efficient and withought pain.


    I looked at his face, I wasn''t even seeing him clearly, what I saw was my self with the cut throat.''NO, NO WAY AM I LETTING MYSELF DIE. My view clears again and I see him dead lying there lifeless, I see my reflection in his eyes and look at my own cold face and black soules eyes. Then Taunade -sensei looks at me and says.


    Tsunade:"You can go home if you want.


    But don''t forget tomorrow we will go to the frontline meet us at the village gate at 7 o''clock."


    Me:"Ok."


    I don''t directly go home I go to the weapon shops and they let me buy exclusive ninja weapons when they see my headband I spend almost all my money and savings in buying different weapons like: paper bombs , more kunai , more shuriken, a gass mask, 2 storage scrolls, one of them for food and basic medical stuff just to be safe and the other one full of extra weapons.


    I go home and greet my mother talk with her a bit and go to sleep.


    -Time Skip- (Tomorrow)


    When I wake up I go to the bathroom take a shower, eat breakfast, my mother looks worried for me, she is probably afraid that I will die in the war. I go outside give mother a hug and start walking out of my house. She waves at me with tears in her eyes I also wave back and start going toward the gate. I arrive there about 5 minutes earlier and see that the twins are already there with black rings under their eyes like they didn''t sleep at all last night they don''t even say anythig to me. We wait for Tsunade to show up.She shows up at the right time she nods at us and we start going towards the land of rivers.


    Around the middle of the way I start making conversation with my teamates and discussing formations when we fight enemies to lighten the mood.


    Then Shiro who is in the hood of my hoodie barks to me that is a sign that he smells enemies nearby, by the way the other signs are a lick which means that we are being followed or a lot of licks which means that we are surrounded.


    I tell Tsunade -sensei this and she says.


    Tsunade:"You guys fight them to test your teamwork. If there is any jonin I will take care of them."


    We nod and make ready an ambush the plan is after they pass by us me and Asutori make a combination jutsu.


    As I see them I sense them there are four of them with Sand Village headband probably scouts and they have chunin chakra but I will still be ready about any surprise. I give Shiro a thums up to signal him to look out for any sneak attacks behind me. After all I could still die by a kunai at the back of my skull. I still don''t have enough experience or instinct to know that about a kunai behind my back. If he sees one I will know, Inuzukas have that kind of special conection with their ninken.


    As they pass us I get out of my hiding place in a tree. And aim my jutsu on their running figures. [Wind Style Great Breakthrough].


    One of them senses something and tourns around.[Earth Style Earth Wall]


    He has been in war before and has grater experience in battles than me.


    Well then time to get serious. I get in the ground in all fours Shiro jumps in my back [Inuzuka Style Rare Beast Transformation: Double-Headed Wolf]


    We transform in a giant two headed beast.


    I then on top of it use


    [Four Legged Technique]


    My claws get longer and my fangs more defined. And it raised my agility high even though I have a big body.


    The 4 chunin look at me surprised. Then I use some chakra to strengthen my body and suddenly dissapear from their view and appear behind them behind the ninja with the fan and swipe my claws at him and one shot him then the two ninjutsu guys use [Earth Style Earth Gun] at me I don''t even attempt to block I just simply doge use a Substitution jutsu with a giant log and appear behing them swipe at the pupet guy kill him and then bite at the two other ninjas who used sand Substitution and both do a [Earth Style Earth Wall] and try to trap me inside an earth dome. Ahh this is the weakness of a big body against 1 on 1 it is an ultimate technique but in group fights it becomes a burden. The ninjas look tired I cancel my justsu and then immediately me and Shiro do the [Wolf Fang Technique] we spin in high speeds towards them and I injure my target havily but the other guy dodges Shiros attack. I immediately use [Four Legged Technique] again to get begind the guy and with a kunai stab it behind his skull.


    He falls dead on the ground. I am still on guard.


    I feel something behind me and immediately swing my kunai behind me then someone catches my hand by the wrist.


    Tsunade:"Relax Yami. 003."


    I look at my chakra and see I have about 80% left. The substitution took about 10%, Great Breakthrough about 6% and the others about 4%. The Inuzuka techniques are not really chakra intensive after all a genin Kiba was able to use them.


    Though I look back at the stupid decisions that I made back there and think that if I was more clearheded I could have made better decisions. If I used my taijutsu and ninjutsu correctly I could have taken them out with the half the chakra I used.


    Tsunade looks at me and says.


    Tsunade:"You did well on your first death fight. So don''t beat yourself over the mistakes you made you would have normally had to fight againd bandits for your first death fight but you went way and beyond against 4 chunin."


    Then Tsunade looks at the twins and goes to them and slaps both of them.


    Tsunade:"KNOCK IT OUT YOU TWO, YOU NEED TO GET THE YOUR HEAD ON REALITY YOUR TEAMMATE COULD''VE DIED BECAUSE OF YOU. IF YOU DO THIS AGAIN SAY YOUR CARERS AS NINJA GOODBYE.


    Then we keep going towards the land of rivers nobody says anything. We stop for the night and go to sleep Tsunade takes the first watch and I take the second we don''t let the twins stay watch because they are sleep deprived


    and useless at the job. After I wake up the twins ,they apologised to me with tears in their eyes. And me putting on a smiling face and accept the apology, even though in the inside I held myself back from killing them if that was the battlefield I wouldn''t be alive becouse of their incompetence.


    Then the rest of the journey is normal withought disturbance. We arrive at the konoha camp and I see hundred of tents


    Then I see the camp leader Sakumo come and talk to sensei.


    Sakumo:"Tsunade I am glad you arrived safely, we need you to help us, that old hag Chiyo is making new poisons. Also the Ichbi jinchuriki has joined the battlefield I can hold him back easily but I can never kill him becouse of that Chiyo. There are also rumors from our spies that the 3rd Kazakage together with Ebizo are holding the borders against the Stone Village that is all the new information from our boreder sience you have been gone."


    Then he looks at us and says.


    Sakumo:"So this is your team huh."


    Tsunade:"Yes the twins need some adjusting. But the Inuzuka is ready for war."


    Sakumo then looks at me directly and says.


    Sakumo:" Where did you find such a kid Tsunade."


    Tsunade:" I didn''t find him he found me.


    But anyway I will leave him to you Sakumo."


    Sakumo:" I have intel that two days from now Sand Village will attack so you should rest kid."

 Chapter 9 - Taste of the battlefield

    -Time Skip- (The day of the battle)


    I spent yesterday learning the Earth Style Earth Wall technique from a senior ninja and together with all my clones and the ninjas advice was able to get it from 4 handsingns to 2. I also keep thinking strategies for the battele tomorrow.


    I had to wear the konoha uniform that every jounin wears to not get hit by friendly fire but I asked for a special big poket in the back of my uniform for Shiro, they agreed. They said if there is a ninja trying to kill you even if he is a konoha ninja kill him he might be a spy or a transformed Sand ninja. They even made me learn a secret code which changes everyday to be able to tell the ninjas apart. They also gave us antidotes that Tsunade -sensei had made


    Anyway right now I am in the middle of around 700 Konoha ninja advancing towards the battlefield, I was there to not be in a place which is first attacked. Of the 700 konoha ninja there are 200 genin most of them from the genin corps, 450 chinin and and around 50 jounin. Thay say we used to have more ninja but they got poisoned or killed in battle.


    Anyway as we got in a clearing we can see some enemy ninja there were a lot of them there .


    Sakumo went ahead and killed about 20 ninjas in 2 seconds with his sword, before sand came towards him which he cut it in two and jimped back away from the battlefield wich the jinchuriki covered in a sand dome with an eye above followed. He probably didn''t want to kill his comrades in the crosfire.


    Then as if by a signal all kinds of jutsus were trown around earth and water dragons, water balls, wind bullets and all kinds of jutsu. I just made an earth wall and stayed behind it I am not going to lie I am scared. After about 30 seconds of calming my mind and reminding Shiro which is in my specially made back pocket to be careful of sneak attacks. I take a kunai in my hand and use [Four Legged Technique]


    Then I sense a big chakra amount heading towards me. As soon as I go out I see an Earth Dragon jutsu heading my way I make a big [Earth Style Earth Wall], jump on top of it use it to jump over the jutsu and then the earth dragon jutsu destroys it and I keep gonig.


    [Wind Style Great Breakthrough]


    to make the fire strtonger which destroys the earth wall, 4 of them look injured. I throw 4 kunai at them but they are blocked by the two others.


    Then the kunai which were bloked and on the ground explode becouse I had wr.a.p.ed explosive tags around the handle it kills 5 of them 1 survives heavily injured in his knees so I throw a kunai at his head and it sinks into his eye and he dies.


    Just then I feel the earth under me shifting and withought thinking I jump back. I then use a paper bomb and throw it, to the now hands sticking out of the ground. It explodes and kills whomever that was.


    Just then Shiro warns me and I duck down and a sword pases where my head would have been. I jump forward and turn around I see a Sand ninja useing a katana and he runs towards me.


    I take out a kunai and block his sword I act as if my kunai slipped out of my hand from his swing and is thrown back , then I jump back where the kunai is under my feet and use chakra to make it stick to my foot and then take out another kunai out and block another one of his swins this time I act as if my arms are being pushed back and use the kunai sticking to my feet to stab him in the leg he screams and jumps back with his other leg as he is in the air I signal Shiro and he gets down from my pocket. I tossed my kunai upwards and then used


    [Wind Style Great Breakthrough]


    After that I grab the kunai which I tossed upward. I sensed that the one on the air is not the real one. I sense a chakra signature coming towards me from my left then I just threw a kunai at it and I hear the sound of metal cl.i.c.k.i.n.g, which means he blocked it and see the sword guy now holding a kunai runing towards me. Just as he is an arms length away from me he gets hit on the right by a [Wolf Fang] by Shiro. The Sand ninja is holding his left side as it is bleeding quite bad. I take this chance and throw a kunai at his head and he dies and his body falls down.


    I then make an earth wall to just take a breather but just then a puppet with 6 arms and 2 legs comes out of the sand and it flies towards me I immediately use


    [Earth Style Earth Wall] and the blades get stuck in to it and then I sense a ninja come out of the Sand 20 meters (65"7'') away and look at him.


    He has another pupet who looks like a shield with 4 limbs close to him. Even though he has chunin chakra levels he is definitely a jounin. He looks at me, smiles and says.


    ???:" Well don''t we have a little genius treehugger here."


    While he is talking I give a signal to Shiro to attack him stealthly. As Shiro is about to attack him I also attack him with


    [Wind Style Great Breakthrough] which he blocks with the shield puppet and as Shiro also attacks at the same time from the other side, he is stabed with another joint blade of the first puppet with poison.


    He whimpers and falls to the goround


    with blood around him.

 Chapter 10 - The truths about war

    The puppeteer looks at me with a sadistic smirk only to get shocked by my calmness he thought I was some angry kid but I am not going to die for Shiro.


    I look at him and see the shield puppet he has in conntrol with one of his hands


    and the other hand controls some puppet parts with blades covered in poison. This is going to be hard I only have around 35% of my chakra. Just as I was thinking that a guy comes out of the earth with a sword and cuts the puppeteers arm off.


    Puppeteer:" Ahhhhhhh."


    I look at him and he is a Konoha ninja and has jounin chakra amount and he taunts the puppeteer.


    ???:" You Sand ninja sure are good ninja, to not be aware of your surroundings."


    He stabs the sword on the ground and then he does a jutsu.


    [Fire Style Fire Missile]


    The puppeteer puts the shield puppet in front and it gets destroyed but it gave him enough time to use Substitution.


    I go towards Shiro [Earth Style Earth Wall] put up an earth wall around us and give him the antidote that Tsunade made. He starts to get better, I then pull out the blade and start sewing his wound. Then also make a [Shadow Clone] to use [Mystical Palm] to try to fix the internal damage this is the first time that I have tried this. And I keep lookout just then I hear a giant explosion and look towards it and see a giant tanuki about 3 km (1.8 miles) away and as soon as I see it. Its arm falls of as if its been cut.


    Just then at the back edge of the battlefield where the Sand ninja are guarding their medical ninja and wounded.


    A gigantic slug appears and and spits a giant blob of acid at them killing all the wounded, medical ninja and the ninja protecting them and then the slug halves in siza and spills out more smaller but still big slugs which go towards the konoha ninja in the battlefield and heals and helps them.


    Then I see 5 puppets flying toward the Ichibi and after that the gigantic tanuki dissolved into sand completely and I see them carrying an old man out of the battlefield and the Sand ninja using a signal to retreat. After that the jounin who followed the puppeteer returns back to me with a severed head and a slug around his body. The severd head belongs to the puppeteer. He looks at me, then at the giant slug on the other side of the battlefield and says.


    ???:"So the plan was a success."


    When I heard that I was a little surprised but I should have thought of it konoha had a plan to cripple the Sand forces it was probably a plan only konown to the jounin.


    The slug around his body slithers down and goes to my ninken Shiro and starts healing him. I nod at my clone to dispel and he does so it also teturns some of my chakra. Now my chakra reserves are at 15%. Ahhhh I am so tired. After that there is still some fighting done with the Sand ninja staying behind to buy some time for their comrades escape. But I stay close to the slug no way am I risking it. By the way my chakra sense seems to have gotten beter now I don''t need to concentrate to keep it active I can feel 15 m (49"2'') around me.


    If concentrate I feel around 30 m (98"4'').


    As we are returning to camp I stay in the middle of the group in case of a sneak attack and even have the slug wrapped around me while she is still healing Shiro. Even though it is unlikely for an attack to happen it is never good to let your gard guard down. After we get to the camp some genin calls me and says.


    Genin:" Hey you, excuse me a jounin is calling you to met him at the jounin tents."


    I go there and see the jounin who helped me against the puppeteer. He waves over to me. Walks over and says.


    Jounin:" Hey can I take some of your time. Of course I can I helped you after all. So anyway I am not going to be unfair to you. The ninja that we killed has a 10.000.000 yen bounty so I will give you 20% of the reward becouse I am in a good mood."


    That should be 2.000.000 ryo as my cut of the money. I could buy a medium seized apartment in konoha with that.


    Me:" I will give you my part of the money if you teach me some fire jutsu that you know."


    Jounin:*sigh* " My name is Chaku kid and I will only take half of your reward.


    I will teach you all C rank fire jutsus I know and some wind jutsu, if you are able to impress me I might even put a B rank in there. By the way kid you are bad at haggling."


    I wasn''t even trying to haggle.


    I don''t really care about money, if it ensures my survival I will burn all off it.


    He then gives me a check of 1.000.000 ryo to cash in when I go to konoha.


    Chaku:" Well since I am in a good mood I will explain how things work around here."


    He then starts explaining things such as battles like yesterday don''t happen very often it only happens once in two or three months and now that the Sand suffered so many loses it might take even longer, most of the battles are skirmishes between scouts trying to cut supply lines. And if such a big attack force moves even if they are ninja we will notice them from spies, the summons placed around or even the scouts.


    So most battles are fought between scouts wich are usually chunin or a jounin leading a chunin squad.


    Genin usually only take part in the big battles as canon fodder, usually they do chores around the camp for D rank missions and around 1.000-5.000 ryo pay a chore. He even explained the bounties to me


    5 million - 15 million ryo is jounin


    15 million - 50 million ryo is elite jounin


    50 million and higher is S class ninja.


    Tsunade -sensei has a 57 mil ryo bounty which will probably be raised after the fight with Hanzo, her nickname is Slug Princess Tsunade.


    He even joked that he himself had a 13 milion ryo bounty and wished he could get that money. After the war he said he is going to cash in all the jonin he kills in this war and is planning on starting a family.


    -Time Skip- (1 month later)


    After that first meeting with Chaku I meet with him almost every day for the last month I learned all of his C rank fire jutsu in 18 days with shadow clones and cut down almost all of their handsigns to two after all in battle speed is essential.


    He even taught me his


    Fire Style Fire Missile Jutsu becouse I impressing him. I also learned about 3 C rank wind ninjutsu from him I also cut down their handsigns to 1.


    Shiro my ninken has healed and recovered nicely even though I didn''t react when he was hurt he is still loyal to me obviously, after all a dog is always loyal and I did save him.


    Anyway, right now I got a mesge from a genin I am being called to the jonin meting tent.


    As I arrive there and see the big tent I get inside. I see about 35 jounin 10 had died at the battle and 5 died this month in the skirmishes. I see at the head of the group is Sakumo, Tsunade and another female jounin I didn''t know about.


    She had a bored look in her eyes.


    Tsunade has a proud look in her eyes.


    Sakumo:" By the order of the Hokage Yami Inuzuka genin of the village hidden in the leafs is here by promoted to chunin."


    And then I am escorted out by Tsunade who has a smile in her face and says.


    Tsunade:" Well I am quite proud of you kid. You were supposed to be promoted after the battle but you had been a genin for only a week and a half so they postponed it. Ok now that you are a chunin I will give you something that you wish, within reason of course."


    I at first wanted to ask for slugs summoning but there was only one slug and we were in a time of war with a lot of battles going on so I didn''t ask. I then remembered that Mito Uzumaki is Tsunades grandmother. I then put on a fake exited smile and asked with a childish voice.


    Me:" Ok then do you have a super duper strong explosive tag."


    Tsunade thought for a bit pulled out a storage scroll and poofed out a single explosive tag and then looked at me and said.


    Tsunade:" This is a stronger explosive tag made by my grandmother the wife of the first hokage it is an instant explosive one which is activated when you put chakta in it and do a one handed tiger sign. Be very carful and far away when you use it."


    Well time to act like a kid and try to become her favorite student so she will teach me her secret medical ninjutsu that she will develope later. I hug her and say.


    Me:" Thank you Tsunade -sensei."


    -Time Skip- (1 month later)


    This month I just keept training Shunshin technique untill I could get it battle ready. I think its going to be almost impossible to use it like Shisui after all I don''t have the sharingan to see where I am going, but I did make it kinda battle ready I have my ninken smell a certain smell and then I follow the smell and Shunshin to my dog so I gues it is a good escape technique after all Substitution needs 1 second to be completed even withought handsigns but shunshin without handsigns is instantaneous. I am able to use it without handsigns but after doing the technique I get a bit disorientated about 2-3 seconds.


    -Time Skip- (1 month later)


    The past month I have been studying genjutsu to ease my curiosity a bit I learned a few and also was able to make my own version of [Demonic Illusion: Tree Binding Death] called [Demonic Illusion: Dog Binding] wich shows the illusion of dogs holding you in place with their bites just like Kakashi did Zabuza. The original genjutsu was B rank but I am not quite able to use that yet so I made my own C rank genjutsu even though it is not as strong as the original. I think it is the only inuzuka genjutsu.


    Anyway now I have started going on my own scoutings and even have my original team and two onther chunin with me I didn''t want to take them but Tsunade-sensei asked me to for them to get some experience they also heve become stronger Asutori chunin level and Asume low level chunin I have seen some suna chunin this month and I took care of them quite easily. The team has also started getting along better.


    -Time Skip- (1 month later)


    Tsunade -sensei has been called to the land of rain battlefield because we have suffered heafy losses there becouse of Hanzo the Salamander.


    Anyway now I am going in a usual mission with my now usual team to get some supplies for the camp from a confidential merchant.


    As soon as I get there the guy greets me.


    Meechant:" Hey guys back for another haul."


    I smile and nod and get close to him as soon as I do, I take a kunai and swipe at his throat and as he bleeds he transforms into a Sand ninja. He was supposed to say a code.


    Just then I sense 23 chakra signatures appear in the trees in front of us.


    They throw projectiles at us I grab Asutori and Asume who were closer to me from their shirts and jump back. The two other chunin get killed by the projectiles before they can react.


    From their chakra signatures our enemies have 6 jounin and 17 chunin.

 Chapter 11 - Art is an Explosion

    I sensed there were 6 jonin and 17 chunin.


    I signal my ninken to hide. I am not even 100% percent sure I will be able to kill one jounin in a direct battle and definitely not 6 of them together.


    I must plan and act very carfully or I might die.


    Now that I think back on it I extremely regret not asking Tsunade -sensei about the slug summoning. Well no use crying over spilled milk. I must concentrate to the max.


    Among the jounin there are 2 puppeteers one with a round pupet with a head and four short limbs it is able to shoot poisoned senbon from the holes in his round body he also has a c.o.c.kroach lookind puppet as big as his body.


    The other one has a shield pupet and a round pupet like the first guy.


    About the others 2 are fan users and the last of them one of them uses a sword and the last one is probably a ninjutsu oriented


    ninja becouse he doesn''t have anything in his hands but that might be deception soo I will be ready. The chunin are also mixed with different type of ninjas some puppeteers some with swords etc.


    I then say.


    Me:" FORMATION 1"


    Asutori did a [Fire Style Fire Ball] and I did a [Wind Style Great Breakthrough]


    towards the enemy''s direction then the jounin which I suspected is jutsu orientated comes foreward and does


    [Earth Style Mud Wall] which is the upgrade of the earth wall jutsu to B rank that makes a gigantic earth wall that blocks our jutsu completely then Asutori looks at me and Asume says.


    Asutori:" Guys you run away leave me behind I will hold them back."


    Just as Asutori looks in our dicection the Sand ninjas take this moment to trow projectiles so I use [Earth Style Earth Wall] and grab them buth by the back of their shirts and jump into a tree and throw Asume behind me and with the same hand grab something out of my kunai pouch and put it under Asutori''s shirt he doesn''t notice.


    I then think ''Oh I would gladly leave you buddy but you won''t be able to hold them back for even a second. So I just say to Asume.''


    Me:"Asume you go and inform the camp we will hold them back."


    Asume:"Okay. Don''t die guys or I will beat up your ghosts to death."


    Asutori:" Don''t worry sis I will become hokage one day so I can''t die now."


    I hope a jounin follows her to stop her from gonig to the camp so I can get at least have less presure.


    Then I hear a jounin say.


    ???:" Aki, Bora , Teta kill her and come back immediately."


    Three chunin follow her I am disappointed a jonin didn''t follow her but I was hoping for far too much what person in their right mind would send a jonin to kill a low leveled chunin when you have plenty of chunin around you. Asutori is about to stop them but I say.


    Me:" Don''t worry they will probably meet a konoha scout and they will help her and Asume is a strong girl trust in her. We need to concentrate here."


    He then nods with hope in his eyes.


    I then think ''That was a lie she has a low chance of surviving against 3 chunin and an even more impossible chance to meet any konoha ninja they don''t patrol this way almost at all. This is way to far from the battlefield and they don''t want to leave any traces for the Sand village to find our supplies merchant.''


    Then 5 chunin surround us


    and try to attack us. I use [Four Legged Technique]. I have the body strength of a low jounin and agility of average jounin because of my age I am unable to raise it higher but after the technique I have average jounin body strength and my agility at high jonin. I take out a kunai and quickly strike at their necks and kill 4 of them and one of them puts his puppet


    in front of him and lets it get cut to save himself and jumpes back. I then throw my kunai towards him and it hits him in the throat. I took them off guard they didn''t expect this from a kid now there are 9 chunin left and 6 jounin. I quickly jump on the ground and Asutori follows me.


    They are not underestimating us any more and I am immediately serounded by 3 jonin around me and 3 others around Asutori as I see this I run away from Asutori''s direction he is too concentated to notice this then the 3 jounin who were after me and 5 chunin follow me. As I am a relatively safe distance away I make a half tiger seal the jounin in front of me think I am going to use a jutsu so the the fan and the sword jounin get behind the guy with the shield puppet who now has the shield puppet in front of him and the round one behind the shield puppet just to be safe. The chunin jump back and cast use 3 [Earth Style Earth Wall Jutsu] in front of the shield pupet, they are really on guard now and the chunin are really tense now and they just wasted chakra and they weren''t even sure what kind of jutsu I was going to use. So I just look towards Asutori who is now stabed by the other jounins puppets senbon and wait for a chance when the other jounins are close to him. Then they immediately get around 3 meters close to Asutori to finish him. Then I say.


    Me:" KATSU" *BOOOM*


    And a gigant explosion happens.

 Chapter 12 - A Tragedy of Battle

    -Flash Back-


    ..then with the same hand I take something out of my kunai pouch and put it under Asutori''s shirt...


    -Flash Back END -


    Yes I did put the stronger explosive tag given to me by Tsunade in my frinds back. Do I regret it? No I do not, it was to save muself and I would do it all over again if I had to. But nobody must know what happened in here so I will have to kill all the ninja here. The ninjas are all in shock so I go toward their left side oposite of the wreckage that they are looking towards and use [Fire Style Fire Missile Jutsu].The pupet guy has the fastest reaction and defens them with the shields pupet and also drags the 2 jounin and 3 chunin behind it with his chakra strings the 2 left out. The shield puppet gets destroyed and the 2 chunin unprotected by it die, the debris is stoped from hitting them by the round pupet.


    I am quite surprised that even the jounin were distracted so much. I guess they had good friends that died in that explosion tag which had the power of a B rank jutsu at point blank.


    Then I see the sword jounin coming


    towards me with an angry face then the fan jounin calls out to him.


    Fan jounin:" STOP DON''T GO IN ALONE HE IS A TRICKY OPPONENT."


    Sword jounin:" He killed my brother I am going to chop him to pieces."


    Then as he is coming to me and he is fast at around high jounin speed.


    As soon as I jump the fan jounin does a joutsu at me


    [Wind Release: Great Task of the Dragon] and then a tornado is coming towads me and the puppet guy shoots poisoned senbon at the tornado.


    [Combination Jutsu: Great Poison Senbon Dragon] and as soon as I step on a tree a dragon made out of senbon comes towards me. I then make a signal to Shiro my ninken. I then use Shunshin and apear beside my dog and behind the puppeteer and wind jounin tell my dog to hide behind the puppeteer. I then make 2 shadow clones and one hides close to the 3 chunin for them to not interfere and one goes to attack the wind jounin from behind but he blocks it with his fan. The fan jounin then looks at my clone and says.


    Fan jounin:" That was the wrong move kid."


    And then I see the sword jounin coming behing him. Then the sword pinted behind the clone ready to stab him as soon as the clone is stabbed I go behind the sword jounin and try to kill him immediately but as soon as I am about to stab him he puts the katana right where my kunai was going to cut and stops the kunai I immediately use shunshin and leave the kunai there.


    As soon as I appeared where my dog was behind the puppeteer. The kunai I had left behind exploded becouse of the explosive tag around the handle and then even though I am disorientated I use [Fire Style Gire Missile Jutsu] toward the puppeteer who is surprised and tries to block my jutsu with the round puppet but the puppet exploded and he got thrown back some debris and some senbon from the puppet stabbed into him. And I think he is knocked out but I can''t afford to check it. My clone also uses [Fire Style fire Missile jutsu] on the chunin they try to block it with [Earth Style Warth Wall] jutsu but they couldn''t and all got burned to death.


    But I don''t have time to be worried about that anymore I look towads the Fan jounin and Sword jounins place with the Fan jounin trying to stop the bleeding of Sword jounin which has his sword wielding hand exploded and had some grievous wounds in his back. And I am low on chakra I cancel my [Four Legged Technique] and I call my ninken he jumps on my back and we use [Double Headed Wolf] and we transform in a gigant two headed wolf I then again use [Four Legged Technique].


    Becouse now it doesn''t use just my chakra but also my ninkens chakra and he has the chakra of an average chunin.


    And then I run towards the fan jounin when he notices us he takes his fan and uses a [Wind Style Great Breakthrough] through the fan as the jutsu is coming towards me I jump sideways and dodge the jutsu and then I get close to the Fan jounin and the other jounin which is laying on the ground. The fan jounin tries to block my paw coming towrds him becouse if he doesn''t I will kill the sword jounin but I still push the fan jounin on the ground and break his ribcage and he spits out a glob of blood. Jut to be sure I stab my claw trough his c.h.e.s.t and repeat this with the sword jounin and the puppeteer jounin who both die. Then I try to sense anyone else around before I cancel the jutsu and then I surprisingly feel two chunin chakra and go toward them they were towards the paper tag explosion site. I then see two chunin who were probably the farthest from the explosion one of them was without an arm and leg the other was withought legs. I then killed them both and I cancelled the jutsu.


    Then went to the 3 jounin cut their heads off and stab a senbon in their brain just to be sure I am quite positive the Yamaka can''t read the memories of dead people but just to be sure. I was super low on chakra I had about 9% left I got all the bodied together took out my storage scroll got some alcohol for disinfecting wounds poured it on their bodies and did a C rank ninjutsu to burn any trace of them. To stop anybody from using the Edo Tensei on them. Made sure that there wasn''t any body pieces at the explosion site, of course there wasn''t.


    I relly don''t want anyone learning I killed my teammate even though I went overboard to take measures against it better safe than sorry.


    I then opened the emergency food sroll and pulled out a cooling bag with a bunch of ice in it put the heads in and close it and put it back on the scroll. I was in need of some money when I go back to konoha for a plan of mine. I now have 5% of my chakra. I take the sword of the jounin and put it in my weapons scroll. I then call my ninken he nods then he transforms into me, and carries me on his back towards the direction of the camp then we stop after we get out of the battlefield zone and jump on trees and wait for the chunin which followed Asume to return and I make redy an ambush an put almost all my explosive tags around leaving only 5 on me I don''t really have the chakra to deal with them and I am tired. So while waiting I sew my torso wound I am afraid if I use any more chakra I might pass out.


    So I wait for them to return then I see the 3 chunin returning one of them has a horribly crushed arm. They are not really on guard. They walk right into my trap even after they notice the trap and try to jump back they are caught in the masive explosion and die.


    I then walk towards the camp I see the dead body of Asume in the way. She has a kunai at the back of the scull and a crushed hand then I remember the other chunins horribly smashed arm.


    I tell my ninken to carry her body when he is transformed as me. He soes so and while walking toward the camp I keep thenking. Did Tsunade try to teach the super strength technique to Asume but she hadn''t learned it yet so she just used it in a desperate situation. I think why would Tsunade teach her that and then everything clicks into place Asume reminded her of herself. Her brother want''s to be hokage, pervert teammate that she compered to Jiraya and my supposed genius to Orichimaru.


    Then I see the camp and use a medical jutsu to knock me out and make me look even more exausted and I have my dog to carry me to the camp. Even though unlikely if the Yamaka try to search his memory he has only been observing my battles and they can''t check mine becouse I am wounded and knocked out. After all they can''t check the memories of a comrade without asking.

 Chapter 13 - Acting 101 with Yami -sensei

    I then woke up slowly the first thing I see is a female medical ninja is cheking on me and says.


    ???:" Call Sakumo -sama."


    I woke up and then as soon as I do the medical ninja says.


    ???:" Please stay down Hatake -sama


    will come ask about the ditails and how you got injured. By the way your dog refused to leave your side."


    ???:" Your torso might feel a little numb from the wound I am sorry but we couldn''t heal it to leave no scar."


    I looked at my bandaged torso and look around and act like I am confused


    And ask.


    Me:" Where am I."


    ???:" You are in the hospital."


    Then I widen my eyes and act shocked cover my eyes with my hand and start crying. Damn this used to be easier when I was yunger and say.


    Me:" DAMN IT I WAS TOO WEAK. TO WEAK TO EVEN PROTECT THOSE I CARE ABOUT. WHY THE HELL DID I EVEN BECOME A NINJA IF I CAN''T PROTECT THOSE I LOVE."


    ???:" It was not your fault. A child shouldn''t take responsibility for the actions of an a.d.u.l.t."


    I then look at who said that and see it was Sakumo. He then looks at the medic nin and tells her to leave.


    Sakumo:" It was our fault we were not able to secure a territory to not let an enemy pass. When you feel ready you can tell me what happened."


    And he starts to walk away I say.


    Me:" Wait I am ready right now I don''t want anyone else to die becouse I didn''t say this information."


    He looks impressed and nods. Then I start talking a story I had made up after all I was expecting this question.


    I tell him a story of how we met the ninja when they had killed and impersonated the merchant how me and Asutori were planing to hold the ninja back while Asume gets reinforcment but some ninja followed her stealthy and we didn''t notice.


    Of how Asutori killed 3 jounin with a suicide type jutsu and I killed 2 jounin and all of the chunin with my explosive tag from Tsunade and how a jounin survived I fought him to the death and won but got injured and tired so I surround my resting place with explosive tags and how coincidentally the chunin ran into my trap. Seeing this, I returning to the camp saw Asumes body and pased out in front of the camp.


    I then start fake crying again.


    He looks at me sadly and says.


    Sakumo:" You had good teammates ready to sacrifice themselves for you and I am sure they are glad they had you as a teammate. They wouldn''t want you to be sad so be happy. They are always watching over you."


    Wow this guy is a great motivational speaker. Anyway I look at him make a sad smile and say.


    Me:" I guess so."


    The with some new found fake determined eyes I say.


    Me:" I will become a Legendary ninja a ninja so strong that I won''t ever lose anyone that is a promise to myself and them."


    He looks at me and nods and then gets a serious look in his eyes and says.


    Sakumo:" The Sand ninja were probably send to make traps and kill our scouts to weaken us we also have news that in a week and 4 days the Sand ninja will attack us with Chiyo of the White Troupe leading them. But this time we will attack them first in a weeks time."


    I look at him and nod. This time after this battle I am going to ask for a short leave to go to konoha. I won''t ask right now because it would be probably refused. Any way I need to train harder this week and need to learn more wind ninjutsu and wind nature transformation. I check my reserves and they are 60% full I then start using the Mystical Palm technique to get rid of the numb feeling then I look for my things I find them in a counter close to me look at my dog. Then he nods at me. That means that they haven''t checked my memories then I look at my hand there are no bite scars I also told my dog to bite me really hard at my arm to leave a scar if they are going to check his memory and they then erased it I see nothing in my hand neither do I feel the numb feeling that comes with healing and using my Medical knowledge to see if they tried to ease the feeling.


    I guess I was too paranoid. They wouldn''t really suspect a child to do what I did and the Yamaka are more focused on dealing with enemy ninja information.


    Anyway I get dressed and I put Shiro in my head and go towards the jounin tents look around


    Chaku:" Hey come on marry me please I plan to start a family when I return to konoha."


    ???:" What the hell Chaku you have been asking every female jounin like this for the past months you already asked me 4 times."


    Chaku:" Pleeeeaaasssseee."


    ???:" I SAID STOP IT DAMN IT."


    Then the other jounin steps on his face and starts kicking him. And then she walks away.


    This is really embarrassing to even watch, how can a jounin be so pathetic.


    Anyway I get close to him and am about to ask him something but he interrupts.


    Chaku:" Ahhhh Yami my favourite student."


    Me:" I am your only student."


    Chaku:" I need you to be with me next time I ask a girl out, your childish charms may help me."


    Me:" No way am I helping you with that.


    Anyway i will give you 1 million ryo if you teach me all that you know about kenjutsu."


    When he helped me against the puppeteer ninja in the war he used a sword so I thought he might be skilled at using it.


    Chaku:" Yes I will help you but you don''t need to pay me. Do I look like the kind of guy that would take money from kid? "


    Me:".....Yes."


    He then squats to the ground depressed drawing circels on it and with tears coming out of his eyes.


    ''What a mentally unstable jounin.'' I think.


    -Time Skip- ( One week later)


    I have gotten quite skilled at using a sword but not quite at Chaku''s level even with shadow clones. He told me not to worry about it and that you get way more training and experience by using it on the battlefield. Thats where I am going right now we are going to attack the suna camp immediately even though they might know by now we are attacking them they might not know because in our camp the others got word today in the morning that we are attacking Suna camp and only the jounin knew sience a week ago and me who is a jounin in all but name. I also have the sword jounins sword in my back it was a chakra metal sword that lets you chanel chakra easier in it. It is good becouse I have a short reach because of my age.


    Even though I feel uncomfortable I am in front of the formation of the formation as a jounin strength ninja it is my duty but I am sure I can look out for myself now. I then see the Sand ninja army in the field.


    Well then time to go to war and make a name for myself.

 Chapter 14 - A look at the progress

    I see the Suna ninja in a little of a disarray they probably prepeared in a hurry. Then as the rest of the jounin go


    forward I go forward in a slower speed and then I see a mud dragon coming toward my direction. I then sense some of the rookie chunin get behind me for me to protect them I act like I don''t notice them signal my dog to stay a little far away from the main skirmishes and to be careful of an attack. I have him seperate from me in case of an emergency I can shunshin to him my sense of smell is quite good and I also can even turn it off with my medical jutsu not to be like kiba who got defeated by a fart. Them the mud dragon was getting closer I just simply did a Substitution after all it was from the other side of the battlefield.


    I then see some Suna chunin in a group workin together and I use [Fire Style Fire Ball Jutsu] and while I am spewing fire off my mouth I do the [Wind Style Great Breakthrough] and the fire cuts of and is pushed by wind, the chunin all get burned. Then I look towards the Suna forces and use [Fire Style Dragon Flame Bomb] towards them and 40 chunin and genin get caught off guard and are killed.


    I then take out my sword and pump my chakra sense to the maximum and use [Four Legged Technique] and now my senses are at maximum capacity I jump in the middle of a field of chunin and start cutting up. I need to make a name for my self for my short leave to be allowed they don''t allow just anybody to take a leave.


    I then see four chunin in a row and swing my sword towards them. One of them tries to block it with a kunai but just before they clash I use wind chakra and cut through the kunai and the 4 chunin I sense a guy behind me I sidestep to dodge and then cut his head off two people are coming towards me from both sides but then I sense something underground and I jump two hands come from the groun pull my knes to my c.h.e.s.t and kick both the ninjas from my sides and stab the sword in the ground. I feel the wind cutting sound behind me I tilt sideways to dodge grab the kunai and throw it at the throat of someone. Then some ninja come towards me with a kunai and swords as soon as they are in my range I cut their throat and then some ninja throw projectiles at me and I use one of their bodies as a shield and jump back a ninja again comes towards me with a puppet I go past the puppet grab a paper bomb from my puch and stick it on the puppeteer and kick him towards a group of ninjas and then he explodes. I grab some explosive kunai from my kunai puch spin and throw kunai in 8 directions and then they explode I then look at the carnage around me. I then look at the ground and see all kind of swords I grab one in my other hand then I have an idea I put the sword in my mouth and then grab another sword and use my right now self made technique at least its against genin and chunin so even if I have a screw up it won''t be fatal. I then use the wolf fang technique with my 3 swords and use


    [Three Sword Style: Wolf Fang] I spin around really fast and go towards ninjas and start butchering in about 10 minutes I had killed about 100 chunin and genin. I cancel my technique and look at my swords they are covered in blood and throw away the two swords I picked up. 5 jounin notice my killing spree and come towards me. I sense them and look at them 1 puppeteer 2 fan and 1 jutsu nin and 1 swordsman and use [Wind Style: Vacuum Bullet] then one of them uses [Earth Style: Earth Wall] my jutsu gets blocked but the wall gets destroyed and some dust blocks their vision I then make a shadow clone have him store a bunch of explosive tags under his shirt and use Substitution to get behind them, my clone then makes a panicked face and throws a fire ball jutsu at them they block it again and one of them says.


    ???:" He is panicking and is just wasting his chakra, at this point he is going to run dry. He probably hasn''t had a jounin after him yet."


    I get behind the puppeteer and put the tip of my sword behind his scull. The other jounin notice me I then attack one of the fan jounin immediately he tries to block it with his fan but as soon as my sword is about to touch the fan I use wind chakra to cut through the fan and the jounin. I then immediately jump back and use [Fire Style Dragon Flame Bomb] at them and the ninustsu jounin is about to do a mud wall to block it my clone behind them, goes toward the jutsu nin who is about to use the mud wall jutsu with his wind coated sword The 1 fan jounin and 1 swordsman nin goes to block him but as soon as they do the clone explodes and kills them and heavily injuring the ninjutsu ninja and then my jutsu kills him. I was expecting some more to survive killing jounin is getting easier and easier I think it is becouse my planning and fighting experience growing but also becuse they always underestimate me.


    Wow being a kid is so useful.


    I alone gave the Sand forces a heavy blow I have taken 11 jounin out of their forces and that is a lot they used to have a jounin number advantage but now they don''t. I look towards Sakumo who is fighting Chijo and Ichibi jinchuriki which has covered both of himself and Chiyo with sand. Sakumo can''t quite get close to them with the sand and puppets.


    I look at this fight and think '' I have a plan what is a better way to get my name out than fighting legends. I have 45% chakra that shadow clone got me low but I am sure of my chances in escaping.''

 Chapter 16 - Fight against S -Class ninja

    ............


    I saw Sakumo getting close to the duo in the sand sphere and cutting through the sand being thrown at him and some projectiles thrown at him by the 10 puppets which belong to Chiyo. Two puppets look towards me and come towards me the two touch one of their hands together with the others hand and when they separate their hands and are coming towards me . As soon as I see that I use Substitution to appear some place behind the sand sphere. Even though I couldn''t see it from the distance where I was from I am sure that they had wire between their hands that could cut through thick wood like it is nothing, I remember this from the anime. Then I go towards the sand sphere. The two puppets appear in front of me again and they go in a close distance to me and one throws a punch an me I dodge sideways, swing my sword at his joint the other puppet catches my sword and I run wind chakra through it and I cut its fingers and am about to cut the other puppets hand he swings the same fist at my stomach and I block with my edge and his fist gets cut to his wrist my sword is stuck I don''t have enough wind chakra control to cut something probably a strong metal at the wrist of the puppet and the other puppet kicks at me as the kick connects with my left hand I put a paper tag on its leg and I get thrown back by it,I left my sword behind. As soon as my feet touch the ground,*Boom* I explode the paper tag and then the two puppets come out of the dust unharmed towards me I then feel something below my feet and I jump back and use


    [Fire Style: Fire Ball Jutsu] at the two puppets coming towards me. They jump sideways and are sill coming towards me. Then the puppet gets out of the earth and comes towards me also and I use [Earth Style: Earth Wall] and use transformation to blend with the side of the wall and take out a kunai and then two come from both sides of the wall and one from above. They look around and don''t see anyone and I take that moment go behind one puppet and cut, not at the puppet but at the chakra string behind it with my kunai with wind chakra. I throw the kunai in the ground without a paper bomb because I am running out of those I only have some left. Then grab the puppet by the hand and use [Wind Style: Great Breakthrough] to throw it far away and then I look at the two other puppets and use [Fire Style: Fire Ball Jutsu] and while fire is running from my mouth I use [Wind Style: Great Breakthrough] and the fire cuts of from my mouth and gets pushed by the wind towards the two puppets. I then run towards the puppet I threw and when I get to it I take out the weapons scroll make a shadow clone and he puts the puppet in. I am keeping watch I am not letting my guard down against an S rank ninja. I then look back and see the 2 charred puppets going back around to the sand sphere. Then some puppets around the sand sphere they throw some projectiles against Sakumo and while he is blocking them something gets out of the sand sphere and comes towards me Sakumo tries to stop it but a wave of sand stops him. I then I look at the figure out of the sand sphere and I see it is Chiyo. She land in the ground in front of me about 30 meters (98"4'') away. She then looks at me and says.


    Chiyo:"Kid this is not a place where you are supposed to be."


    I look at her and analyse the situation and come up with a plan.


    I give a signal to my clone who then goes in the direction of my dog.


    I don''t answer her and just immediately rush at her. Her 9 puppets block the way and they come in close combat to me I take out 2 kunai one in each hand and as I get close to them I am about to swipe at one of them. Then I sense something behind me and I jump sideways but then I am again


    surrounded by three puppets they are about to punch me I block 2 of them with my 2 kunai and the other with the soles of my feet. Then they open their mouths and spit out senbon I have just enough time to position my body to not hit anything vital. But still, I have senbon sticking out of my body and I think that they are obviously poisoned. I then jump up from the fist of the puppet and do a Substitution, immediately after it my substitution is skewered by projectiles then Chiyo looks at me and says.


    Chiyo:" Kid just return the puppet and I will let you live."


    I obviously didn''t trust her if I gave her the puppet she would become stronger and I am not sure she would keep her word. Even if I knew her from the anime this is war so I absolutely don''t trust her.I first take out the senbon out of me then I take out from my belt an antidote from Tsunade and inject it. Chiyo looks at me and says.


    Chiyo:" Kid that is not a poison from the one mas produced for the Suna army. It is a special poison made by me with some rare ingredients in about a minute you will start throwing up your own guts.


    Give me the puppet and I will give you the antidote."


    I look at her and say.


    Me:" How about you give me the antidote first then I give you the puppet."


    Chiyo:" Okay kid but no tricks."


    She then throws me a vial. I catch it and just open the lid and go on as if about to drink it but I put chakra in my nose to make my sense of smell even stronger then I take a sniff without her noticing and I cover the vial with my hand and act as if I drunk it. I also made it look real with some genjutsu. I already know what was in it from my medical knowledge, just more anti pain with paralysis poison to make me feel like I am getting better but in reality I am getting paralysed. I then throw the empty looking vial covered in genjutsu in the ground and act more relaxed. Take out an empty useless scroll from my front jounin jackets pockets and walk towards her with a kunai in the other hand and say.


    Me:" Okay but I don''t want any puppets close to me."


    I then start walking towards her and the puppets start backing of I act as if my body is more rigid but as if I don''t notice it and I smile and say while walking towards her.


    Me;" You know you are a nice person, even though we are enemies after the war is over I would like you to meet my grandma. She is supper nice also."


    She just has a cold face on but I could see in her eyes the complicated feelings she has about me being a kid. Good let your guard down old hag. But I still keep a small reminiscent smile on my face.


    I then am in front of her I extend my hand toward with the scroll. She also extends her hand and that is the moment I strike towards her.

 Chapter 17 - Medical Expertise

    I swipe at her, that moment she notices something is wrong and jumps back a little and tries to pull the extended hand back but I am not about to leave with nothing and channel wind chakra in my kunai and swipe at her right hand it goes flying to the ground. She immediately throws kunai at me with the other hand but I immediately jump back and dodge and immediately do the substitution. The kunai explode they probably had explosive paper wrapped around their handle. I sense my clone and dog. Then 5 puppets immediately surround my substitution and sprout different weapons and shot projectiles at it and then they get close to it and hit him with different weapons.


    I then immediately use shunshin and appear at the side of my dog and my clone is there too. This is a little far from the battlefield. I look at them and then say to my clone and dog.


    Me:" Make earth walls all around me. Shiro you keep watch around it and stay hidden and kill anyone who comes close."


    They nod and while my clone is doing his job I take some anti venom to give me more time against the poison.


    After my clone does so I dispel him to get some chakra back and then make another clone.


    He knows what to do. I give him the scroll with medical supplies in it he opens it and summons all the medical supplies in it and and he puts a sleeping bag on the ground I lie in it he opens a bottle and puts the liquid in a bucket he fills about 10 buckets with that kind of liquid there are bottles all around the ground he brings the 10 buckets close to me he makes hand signs and then uses [Chakra Scalpel Technique] on two of his fingers and he starts to make cuts above my heart, stomach, kidneys and one small cut at my intestines. He then stabs a senbon on my neck to temporarily stop all feeling from my neck and down. Then he puts the hands on the a bucket with liquid and pulls out a blob of liquid and starts putting it inside my body through the cuts after some seconds he pulls out the liquid with some brown spots on it. It was the poison he keeps doing this about 8 times and 8 buckets are now with used liquids with poison. He pulls out the senbon and I feel kind of sluggish he then uses [Mystical Palm] to ease it. I get up and pull out the food scroll and summon water bottles and start drinking them. I then dispel the clone pack my stuff back and go outside the dome and see my dog fighting a chunin and my dog seems to be wining. But I interrupt the fight and get behind the chunin and with a swipe of my kunai i cut his neck and he dies. I also see another body on the ground he looks to be a genin he has a chunk of his neck missing. I look at my ninken and tell him to follow me.


    I go back to the battlefield and go towards the battle of Sakumo and the ichibi jinchuriki while going there I killed couple of sand chunin and genin with pure taijutsu. I don''t have the leisure of wasting chakra on them as I get close to their battle I signal my dog to go behind the jinchuriki and stay hidden there. When I arrive there I also see Chiyo but she now has a puppet arm and she is not accustomed enough with it to use chakra strings from the puppet arm, so right now she is only controlling 5 puppets in the fight against Sakumo I get in the battle by throwing a kunai with an explosive tag towards her, a puppet comes in front of her and blocks it. She then comes behind he puppet withought any harm and the puppet is also okay and she tells me.


    Chiyo:" Kid you are going to die now I won''t make the same mistake again. Banpuku throw some sand towards the kid."


    But nobody answers and she says again.


    Chiyo:" Banpuku we are at war we don''t have the luxury to go easy on enemies especially on the kid."


    Then jinchuriki uses [Sand Tsunami]. As soon as I feel the mas amount of chakra on the sand around and the jinchurikis large drooping in chakra level I was ready to retreat immediately. But then it all goes towards Sakumo which cuts the tsunami in half but he still gets pushed far away. Then an old bald man with a long beard comes out of the sand sphere and says.


    Banpaku:" No matter what I wont kill a kid. Even if the order comes from the kazekage himself. My deal with the kazekage was that I must hold Sakumo Hatake back not become a child killer. And I am not a killer like you Chiyo I am a monk."


    Chiyo looks at him and then frowns and says.


    Chiyo:" How about just capturing him with me I promise I wont kill him."


    He seems to think a bit. Then I look at both of them and think '' I am going to execute the plan and if it fails I will immediately escape.''


    As the jinchuriki is thinking I use substitution and appear in a tree and throw shuriken and kunai with all the explosion tags I have at them the jinchuriki gets out of thinking and the projectiles are blocked all by sand but that is the view blocker and noise I needed and I also notice something small but significant. ''He needed to concentrate to use the sand.'' I use shunshin and appear beside my dog and behind them and throw senbon at the jinchurikis neck.''Lets see if my theory is correct if he does or doesn''t have the sand that protects him automatically like Gara. As the senbon are thrown at his neck they don''t make much wind cutting noise, but that is their speciality but they are also not lethal if you don''t have good aim and don''t know lethal points in the human body.'' Then the senbon.....

 Chapter 18 - Taking a Beast off Guard

    The senbon pierce his neck and he is knocked out and in a fake death state.


    Chiyo sees and looks at me with anger and she is about to get close to the jinchuriki to get the senbon out of his neck and I am about to stop her but then I sense someone with enormous chakra get in front of the jonchuriki. It was Sakumo Hatake. Chiyo sees this, backs of and runs away in the back of her puppets. Smart, if she had styed she would have gotten killed or captured by Sakumo. As she is retreating she gives out a signal for all the sand ninjas to retreat.


    Sakumo makes a shadow clone gives it a paper and then says to me.


    Sakumo:" I am going to take care of some Suna ninja look after the jinchuriki."


    He then runs of, to probably try to save as much konoha ninja as he can. He really is dedicated to his comrades.


    His clone lolks at me and says.


    Sakumo(clone):" You know kid you helped me a lot today. We just gave Suna a devastating blow. Not only did we take one of their elite soldiers Banpaku but also their tailed beast."


    I then look at him and act like I feel the same also and say.


    Me:" I am just glad that I could help my comrades."


    He looks at me with a kind smile and says.


    Sakumo(clone):" You did more than just help. My battles sience after the first battle in the war that I fought against the 3rd kazekage and it ended in a stalemate. But konoha suffered against Ebizo. Chiyo''s brother that killed hundreds of our shunobi.


    Tsunade held against Chiyo at that time."*sigh*


    He then continiues.


    Sakumo:" After that battle every battle that came after that, the ichibi jinchuriki held me back even when I was about to kill him he would get saved by Chiyo. By the way I was surprised seeing that old hag with a cut arm I thought she killed you, but you were able to take her arm off."


    I then looked at the ground seemingly distracted but I was actually in full alert and had my dog close to me. I then said.


    Me:" What is going to happen to the ichibi and its jinchuriki."


    He seems to think a little and says.


    Sakumo:" Ichibi will propably be sealed in somebody from konoha and the jinchuriki will die."


    That would change the naruto plot quite a lot. Well I will just have to do a small adjustment to my plan. After all it doesn''t relly matter in the end. Naruto and Sasuke taking care of Kaguya is only


    my plan C on how to get rid of her.


    Well whatever. In about 20 minutes the battlefield becomes quiet except for some groning from the injured and some screams from time to time. During this time the jinchuriki got a little riled up with some heavy ichibi chakra about to wake him up and some sand about to surround him but the Sakumo clone just slapped a paper in his forehead and it calmed down.


    I look at the paper curiously the clone sees this and says.


    Sakumo(clone):" It was made by Mito -sama, if we incapacitate any jinchuriki.


    She is the best fuinjutsu master in konoha and probably the world."


    I look at the seal.''Well then, I can''t wait for the war to finish I have so much to learn.


    Sakumo:" Konoha ninja we have given the Sand village the heaviest blow they have taken in this war we have taken their strongest weapon the one tailed beast."


    The konoha ninja are excited and yelling Sakumo''s name.


    They are really yelling, how unninja like.


    Well whatever I am about to return to my tent but I am stopped by Sakumo who comes towards me and puts a hand in my shoulder and says.


    Sakumo:" I am not responsible for the capture of the ichibi. This young ninja a true talent of konoha didn''t want to see his comrades die and made a reckless almost suicidal attack on the jinchuriki and it worked. His name is Yami Inuzuka a true hero that saved hundreds of lives today and thousands that would have followed."


    The ninja around me grab me and throw me in the air. What a bother, I wasn''t even risking my life I had so many ways to escape it wasn''t even funny. Anyway I make a childish smile and act like a child.


    Then after some time. Sakumo called me to the meting tent. Well then this should be a perfect time to ask for the break.


    I go inside and see about 20 jounin and Sakumo who has a scroll in his hand. He looks at me and says.


    Sakumo:" I need you to send this to konoha and deliver it to the hokage it explains the situation here and the last battle situation. I send this every month and after every battle it is usually sent by chunin, but this time you with 3 other jounin will send it becouse the Sand might try to intercept it. You will go tomorrow after you have recuperated."


    Me:" After this mission can I take a small break I haven''t seen my family in a long time."


    Sakumo looks at me and nods.


    Sakumo:" Of course you will get a one month break I don''t belive the Sand will attack us for a long time now that they don''t have a jinchuriki."


    I nod at him and get out of the tent.


    -Time Skip- (tomorrow)


    I look at my team 2 of them look like hyuga with headbands in their foreheads they are probably branch members probably for look out


    and the last one migh be an uchiha I am not sure but he does have black hair and pupil less black eyes.


    Me:" Okay guys lets introdce ourselves. My name is Yami Inuzuka."

 Chapter 19 - The Reunion

    They look at me and they say.


    ???:" My name is Kimiri Uchiha of the Uchiha clan."


    ??:" My name is Himi Hyuga."


    Then the last one had a smile in his face.


    That was kind of unusual because he was a Hyuga.


    ?:" Hi hero -san my name is Taki Hyuga. The most smiley Hyuga ever."


    He jokes. Even though they don''t say it, they seem kind of not sure if I have the experience to lead this expedition and they are right I am not very experienced in leading a team of ninja in a journey of different terrain with possible enemies. So I just look at them, smile and say.


    Me:" Ok then I have a thing to tell you guys. I am not really experienced in leading a team of ninja but I want to learn to do so. So will you give me advice on what I can do better along the way."


    They all nod seriously with impressed faces after all a genius child asking for help instead of being arrogant or overconfident but instead is not letting all the praise go to his head is quite surprising.


    Then we start our jurney then I tell them.


    Me:"By the way guys do you know any bounty outpost."


    Then the uchiha takes out a scroll from his jounin vest pocket and throws it to me. I open the scroll and it has the fire country map with various points in it and says.


    Kimiri:" There all the points are bounty outposts but you have got to look for something that can hide the smell of bodies to specifically pinpoint it so it usually is a bathroom, meat shop or an animal farm. You can also turn in bounties at konoha."


    I nod at him and then as we are going on the road and make some small talk we talk about if the meat shops bountie outpost also sell meat. The answer of which is yes because if there is a meat shop who doesn''t sell meat is suspicious and they might even sell meat cheaper becouse they don''t really care for the miniscule amount of money they make from it.


    Interestingly we didn''t encounter any Sand ninja. They probably couldn''t get too deep in fire country because they will get killed or captured after all Sakumo took measures against it sience the first time it happened.


    Anyway we arrive at konoha relatively fast in 30 hours and we made no stops because the mesage is so important.


    When we go inside after some checks that we are not transformed and not mising nin we are allowed in and go to the hokage tower and with the urgent battlefield report excuse we went in immediately to the hokages office.


    When we go inside there is the 3rd hokage and 2 members of the konoha council. At least Danzo isn''t here he probably is doing something immoral and fishy or trying to eliminate someone that is against the interests of konoha not like I relly care as long as he doesn''t do anything against my interests. The hokage sees us and the 3 jonin bow immediately and I bow after I put the scroll in his table. He reads it and says.


    Hiruzen:"I will contact the kazekage and see if we can come to a mutual agreement. You have done well ninja I will put 1 B rank mission in all you records, and 2 S rank, 5 A rank, 3 B rank and 30 C rank in your record Yami Inuzuka. You will be payed 1 million ryo for your mission services. Dismissed."


    I then walk out of the hokage office after he has given me a check. In war times ninja don''t get payed much or


    none at all for missions they make most of their money from bounties if this was peace time I, do some quick math in my head, I would have gotten paid around 5 million ryo at minimum for all those missions. By the way missions pay like this:


    C-rank missions pay between 30,000 to 100,000 ryo.


    B-rank missions pay between 80,000 to 200,000 ryo.


    A-rank missions pay between 150,000 to 1.000.000 ryo


    S-rank missions pay at least 1 mill ryo.


    If the village payed missions like it did in piece time it would go bankrupt in no time becouse clients are not paying these missions and it has to come from the village. By the way it was a dumb decision by the hokage to want to negotiate with the kazekage I already know what will happen and really, he will probably give back ichibi for a price or deal for ceasefire. But still to give away a weapon for mass destruction even though the ichibi is not as strong as the nine tails it gives its jinchuriki the ability to manipulate sand. That is pretty much an S rank ninja guaranteed for a lot of generations. He thinks like a pacifist like Hashirama but he can''t just give a weapon like that away he is not Hashirama. Hashirama did so because he had the kind of power that any beast below the nine tails was nothing to him.


    Anyway enough about politics I can finally start my main plan tomorrow. I go to my house and greet my mother.


    Me:" Hello mother I am back."


    She was watering a flower when I did so. When she hears my voice she drops the watering can and looks at me she then tears up and comes and hugs me while crying and says.


    Misune:" MY BABY, MY LITTLE BABY HE IS FINALLY BACK HOME I WAS WORRIED SICK ABOUT YOU."


    I look at her, wipe her tears with my fingers and say.


    Me:" Don''t cry mother I am here now am I not."


    She nods at me while crying and we sit on the small porch of our small house and I tell her some stories, of course not me fighting and killing kind of stories, but me learning new jutsu, meeting new people and being taught by Tsunade, talks with Sakumo, the beauty of the rivers and different biomes. I lead the conversation arount and making her almost forget I was in a battlefield killing and massacring, making her think that it might not be so bad as the gossips say.


    While I am talking I look at her and think sinisterly. How she would react if I told her I took over her baby''s body while he was still in the w.o.m.b. She would try to kill me, get my mind read and even torture me. That is why I will never care about her because if she knew the truth she would hate me with all her heart, that is the best scenario possible and in the worst scenario well.... never underestimate humanity''s potential for evil and cruelty. Well its not like I am ever going to tell anybody about my deepest secret I am taking it to the gra...no my eternal life.


    Tomorrow is the first step of my plan.

 Chapter 20 - A Show of Superiority

    -Time Skip- (tomorrow)


    I wake up, go to the bathroom and take a shower, hadn''t had one of these in a long time. I then look at myself in the mirror.


    I have short dark slightly spiky hair, an oval face with dark pupil less eyes and 2 red upside down triangles on my cheeks these are my inuzuka tattoos, they are not permanent and I can easily get rid of them. I used to have brown hair but as I got older it got darker and darker untill it became black.


    Anyway I wear my anbu pants my sandals and my green hoodie and put Shiro in my hood.


    Then I go to the kitchen and see my mother making breakfast for me, well that is good, in the war I mostly ate ration bars which tasted like cardboard,


    when I got bored of them I ate something from my emergency food scroll, not a lot, just enough to at least get my taste buds working. We usually didn''t hunt because the meat of the animal could have been poisoned or it has a paper tag in it and as soon as you got close it would explode and it could be an ambush etc. Ninjas give a new meaning to dirty war.


    Anyway I go to the table, eat breakfast and make some small talk with Misune(my mother). After that I ask her if she knows if the clan head is around she says yes. I then tell her I am going to go for a walk as I haven''t been in Konoha in a long time. But I just walk towards the clan heads house. As I am walking I think in my progress these last few months. My physical stats haven''t grown, my chakra reserves only grew a little and my chakra control grew to be able to use Mystival Palm properly. The thing I got from this war was experience and my ninjutsu amount has grown by a lot and my sensory abilities have skyrocketed. I can now sense up to 50 meters(164") withought concentration, and 100 meters(328") when I concentrate. It''s really surprising I got way more progress in 4 months than in all my life, but to be honest I really wasn''t training it and only used it to feel people''s chakra levels. In the war it was always at maximum alert and always on full concentration.


    As I am thinking this I go to the clan heads house. He is a jounin. The only jounin in our clan, the other members most are chunin and some special jounin specialised in tracking. Also our clan only has about 70 people and 50 or more of them are civilians. We are not like the uchiha who have around 300 members and about 100 of them are ninjas they also have a lot of jounin in their numbers it is the clan with the most jounin. But they have to be a lot to be in the war and in the police force and to have confidence to pull a Coup D''¨¦tat against the entire village.


    To be able to kill all of the clansmen even though probably most of them were silent assassinations it shows his talent and willpower to kill family and he did it all silently no one knowing what he had done untill later. But that might have also been influenced by root.


    If I went to kill the Inuzuka clan right now I could do it silently with poison and stuff but comparing inuzuka with uchiha is like comparing an elephan with an ant.


    The other clans that has more members than us there is the hyuga around 100 members but if I am not mistaken they will be cut down heavily during and after the 3rd shinobi war.


    Sarutobi clan members around 70-80 not many members, but most of them are ninja or retired around 50 ninja I believe they also got a lot of benefits from being the clan of the hokage and one of the first to join konoha, they also have a very strong loyalty to konoha and as some people say it they have the will of fire.


    Then the other clans like Hatake clan more like Hatake family, Shimura like Hatake also, ino-shika-cho aliance is quite good and has a lot of influence especially becouse Akimichi foodpills, Yamanaka mind reading which gives invlaluble information and Nara intelligence and medicine.


    Also the Aburame clan around 80 members most are ninja except the ones who married in the clan. The clan is also our superior in tracking becouse of their techniques


    like the female insect can be left on a target, which then can be tracked by smell by the male insect, or scout insects can be sent out and return to tell the host information about the area. For this reason, Aburame clan members are experts in espionage; they can communicate with the insects, and the insects specialise in stealth because they make no noise or motion during combat.


    And on top of it the clan is a noble clan in konoha one of the four in it together with Akimichi, Hyuga and Uchiha. There are also some clans that aren''t even worth mentioning becouse of their small numbers and also their non big name shinobi.


    So yeah our clan is really trashy.


    But then there is also the Senju clan it was the gratest clan in konoha on its glory days but now I can count its members in one hand and by the time canon comes with one finger. There were a lot of Senju deaths on the 1st war and a lot of assassinations on them as soon as Hashirama died. They didn''t want the power of a man who was able to capture the tailed beast to be passed on. After all what Hashirama did was shocking at the time so the Uchiha were overlooked even though Madara fought Hashirama, Madara had the ninetails and he still lost so the Senju were primary tagets during any mission.


    Anyway I now am in front of clan leaders house a big house with a big yard. I go through the gate inside withought knocking and go to the frond door and say.


    Me:" I am coming in."


    I then go towards the chakras that I am sensing one jounin and 3 high chunin. And go towards an oppen area looks like a sparing dojo like area and there is the clan head surrounded by 3 big wolves which probably are his ninken he seems to be relaxing on top of them and reading a book. When I arrive there the 3 ninken open their eyes and look at me. But I ignore them and look directly at the clan head and say.


    Me:" I am here to become the new clan head."


    And I immediately start concentrating chakra in my throat after that and start to prepare something.


    His body jolts he drops the book down and looks at me gets up and the wolves get up and start growling at me. The clan head looks at me and looks angry and starts growling and says.


    Clan head:" YOU ARE QUITE ARROGANT LITTLE BRAT, YOU THINK THAT YOU CAN JUST BARGE IN AND SAY THINGS LIKE THAT. I GUESS I WILL HAVE TO TEACH A LESSON TO A PUP WHO BECAME ARROGANT JUST BECOUSE HE MADE A NAME FOR HIMSELF."


    Well the inuzuka clan are a bit more primal than the other clans and a clan member can take the clan head position by challenging him if anyone has a problem they have to just sort it through violence though killings are not allowed. That is how the current clan head took his title he even took the previous ones daghter. Truly a clan of savages and unintelligent people.


    As he looks ready to pounce at me but as he is about to do so I release the technique in my throat and it comes out as a loud growl of a beast.


    And as soon as that happens the clan heads eyes become unfocused and he stays in his place even the dogs seem out of it I then just appear behind him and kick the back of his knee to get him in my level and take a kunai and point it at his artery and draw a little bit of blood from it.


    He then uses [KAI] and gets out of it but when he sees his current position he gets nervous. I even put out some killing intent and amplified it with a small genjutsu to make it more sinister he wont notice in the panick.


    He was really easy to beat, probably because he is more of a tracker plus he was probably focused in only learning the Inuzuka techniques and didn''t think he needed any other and took pride in his talent and clan.


    And I charged my genjutsu which wouldn''t be possible in a battlefield. By the way my genjutsu is transmitted by the sound of my growl. I realease him from my hold and just say to him. He falls to his knees and is gasping for air like he saw a monster or something.


    Me:" Time to get to business."


    After all even though the Inuzuka clan is a middle-low class clan in konoha I am still going to use their resources and founding to start the next stage of the main plan.


    I then look at the book he put down and it is Bingo book it looks pretty new so he probably got the updated one recently. My curiosity got the better of me and I took the book casualy and skiped all the pages of it and finally came to a stop and I see a child with red markings and black pupil less eyes, its me. I then look at my nickname and bounty.....

 Chapter 21 - Using force to get things, is faster.

    YAMI INUZUKA


    Code Name: RED FANG


    AGE: 8


    BOUNTY: 13.000.000 Ryo


    Rank: B class ninja


    Proficient in taijutsu, has large amount of chakra for his age and his strong point is ninjutsu.


    Be aware the ninja is a scheming type ninja who uses his young age to do sneak attacks and misdirection. He usualy strikes when the enemy think they have got him.


    Best known for taking out Ichibi Jinchuriki. Wanted in by Wind Coutry for his part in the capture of the jinchuriki and multiple kill counts of Sand ninja .....


    -----------------------------


    The bingo books require information to fill a page. It usually puts your most noteworthy actions in there but I don''t have that many so they just put my academy graduation age, my usual clothing etc. If you really want more information you got to go find an info broker.


    By the way the nickname is truly unoriginal Red Fang it kind of makes sense Inuzuka and all but they probably did it becouse I fought beside Sakumo the White Fang. Well anyway I could still get a new nickname from another country like Kakashi did copy ninja Kakashi and Kakashi of the Sharingan.


    By the way the bounties are not put up by the village but by the country.


    Anyway I look at the clan head now he is standing. And I then ask.


    Me:" How much money is in the clan bank account."


    He looks at me unsure and I just immediately realise my killing intent.


    And then he stands more straight.


    Clan Head:" There are 53 million ryo in the clan account it is all the clan heads savings plus the 10% we take from every inuzuka individuals mission."


    I nod at him. Its true every mission you do 10% is taken by the village from the payer and 10% from the clan if you are in any. The clan budget is of course for maintaining the clam stables, roads etc.


    Me:" Ok then. Where is your office where you keep all your paperwork."


    The clan head tells me the directions and I make a clone and it nods at me and goes away. I then look at the clan head withought saying nothing. He starts getting nervous and then looks uncertain and finally asks.


    Clan Head:" Are you going to take my daughter as your wife. If you are I guarantee you your children will be strong especially with the [Inuzuka Secret Breeding Technique] that was how Tsume was concived."


    I just norrow my eyes, signal my dog to get down from my hodie and do something and I then say.


    Me:" The best your daughter can be is a concubine of mine. After all if I am going to marry someone its going to be a political marriage, not some weaklings daughter."


    He looks angry and just grinds his teth together and immediately uses [Four Legged Technique] his brown long spiky hair stand up his claws lengthen and his fangs become more defined.


    I just look at him and simply use [Shunshin] and appear beside my dog and behind him I also use [Four Legged Technique]. And just simply jump up catch the back of his head with my hand and smash it down on the floor and the floor cracks he is unconscious and I cancel my technique and I then use medical ninjutsu to wake him up he wakes up and looks around confused.


    I then say too him.


    Me:" Did you see now, you lost without even knowing how. If this was a real battle you would have been dead."


    He looks afraid and unsure of something. Well then I need to get rid of hin fast and silently or he will become a thorn on my side. After all a pack doesn''t need two leaders.


    I keep acting like the definition of an alpha of the pack and he still is unsure about something.


    Well anyways I then tell him.


    Me:" Show me the way to the clanheads library."


    He nods fearfully. Just then the clone comes in with a 1 finger thick stack of papers. I take it and put it under my hoodie to check later the status of the clan and how to make it better then the clone dispels. Then I tell the previous clan head to lead me to the clanheads library immediately. He does so and as we are walking I think. He has gotten really submissive all of a sudden. Probably when he ''saw'' our difference in strength. He probably thinks of me as a monster or something. But who cares I will get rid of him silently in the coming days and make up a story about it. Anyway as I go into the ''library'' I see only a shelf in a small room I go inside and then I say.


    Me:" From now on I will be living in this house."


    Previous head:" What! No you can''t do that where will me and my daughter live."


    Me:" I don''t truly care. But since I am merciful you can stay here with your daughter. I am not cruel to do like what you did to the clan head before you."


    ''Because I am way crueller.''


    I then look at him and ask.


    Me:" By the way what''s your name."


    He looks perplexed and then says.


    Akira:" You didn''t know your clan heads name. My name is Akira by the way."


    Me:" Huh I never really cared about it. Anyway Akira spend 25 million ryo from the clans money in building me a medical lab in the dojo thing."


    I then take out a paper and write everything that I need on it.


    Me:" If you need more take it from the clans money by the way if I see you are stealing money from me."


    I again use


    [Demonic Illusion: Dog Binding]


    and he is in the genjutsu again this time he gets out of it in 5 seconds. While he was in that I used some useless genjutsu I learned in the academy to make my eyes shine red and then I say.


    Me:" I will kill you."

 Chapter 22 - Manipulation 101 with Yami -sensei

    His face pales.


    Me:"Anyway for the things I need to buy you could send someone to go do the chore themselves."


    Then I tell him.


    Me:" By the way where is your daughter."


    Akira:" Well. Uhhh she is learning the inuzuka techniques in the Inuzuka training ground."


    Me:" Ok then anyway I am going to bring my stuff in this house."


    I then make a clone and tell it to bring my stuff here. Well then time for some manipulation.


    Me:" You know what, don''t tell anyone that I am now the clan leader."


    Akira:" And why would I do that."


    I just look at him and narrow my eyes.


    Me:" Do you know why I don''t want the glory of being the youngest clan head. And that I took down one of the strongest people in the village."


    He now looks confused. And flattered.


    What a dumbass.


    Me:" When I took you down I didn''t do it to take the clan head title from you, even if I barged in like that. I did it to prove to you that I am able to do so. Now do you know what the other clans would do with that knowledge."


    He still looks even more confused.


    What an unintelligent person.


    Me:" They would rip us apart try to make us fight each other. We must keep this a secret after all me and you we could rise this clan to the top. No dream can be to big with the two of us working together you as the light and me as the darkness. We will be making history together."


    He looks proud and happy for the future


    he has a anticipating face like he can''t wait for the future to come.


    Then I put the final nail in the coffin to my little scheme.


    Me:" You could just say that I am your successor to any person who asks about me. And the most important of all we are family no matter what don''t forget that. After all, even if you are erased from history, or shuned the only ones who will stay forever truthfull to you is family."


    He nods. He really is an idiot. And really easy to manipulate. He might not even notice it yet but he already sees me as his leader after all I just used force to make him submit and then flattery and fake promises to make him feel important, also to make him think that after all is over we are still going to be family and a strong one at that.


    Anyway my clone comes back and I then dispel it. I get some memories from it. It was me explaining my mother that the clan head told me that he will train me to be the clan head. She looked super happy and told me to come visit her sometimes. I really need this rumour to spread out as much as I can. I need to be known as the successor after Akira dies.


    And then I go to his office and break the wall that connects to the next room with a punch to make a passage to it. It''s not really a strong wall its made out of cheap wood. I then tell him.


    Me:" I will be taking the room next to the office bring a bed in here and I or a clone of mine will manage the clan.


    By the way I don''t believe I have to tell you but don''t talk to anyone about me in a bad light because they will use it against us. Not even your daughter or she might tell someone."


    Akira:" Ok don''t worry I will become a great figurehead for the clan."


    He seemed happy probably that he won''t have to do paperwork and he is getting rewarded and is going to get praised by doing nothing.


    I then sit on the office chair and say.


    Me:" By the way be careful of everyone, trust no one, think of all the people as your enemies and think of every outcome possible, think about everything, never show any weakness to anyone."


    Akira:" Of course I will."


    I didn''t relly try to warn him. I said that to make him paranoid and not trust anyone.


    Sometimes I wonder how I would have faired if I was reborn in Game of Thrones universe.


    Akira went to order the items I told him ahead of time.


    Anyaway after bringing a bed in my room and now I am sitting in my office papers on the table but I have clan secret technique books that I am reading together with my clones. You know my nonexistenct respect for the inuzuka is going down to negative numbers. What''s up with these useless techniques.


    The were only 2 slightly useful ones were Inuzuka Secret Breeding Forbidden Technique in which 2 partners breed in their wolf forms and when the child is born it is a child with higher instincts and better affinity for the inuzuka techniques.


    But there is also a drawback like for every forbidden technique the mother has a 70% chance to die on child birth. That was how Tsume was conceived.


    And then there was the fast growing ninken technique it helps grow your ninken fast and make it become bigger than average but it shortens their lifespan.


    Anyway I sense someone with high academy level chakra coming in the territory. It opens the front door and comes inside and says.


    ???:" Father I am home."


    I get up and go in the hallway where I see her. She truly looks wild with her naturally slit eyes and wild hair she looks like when she was grown up exept she is now a miniature version of her grown self.


    This might also be another drawback of the Technique to look more wild. But that doesn''t matter I just smile and tell her.


    Me:" Hey there you must be Tsume."


    She immediately is on guard when she sees me. What a good little ninja.


    Tsume:" Who are you, what are you doing here."


    I smile and put up a friendly face.


    Me:" Hey no need to be on guard, I am your fathers disciple."


    Then make a face like a kid and then wisper to her from far away like its a secret.


    Me:" I might even be his successor."


    Tsume:" WHAT NO WAY, HIS SUCCESSOR IS ME."


    I then just pull out the bingo book out of my hoodie inside pocket and open it and point at my picture.


    Tsume:" No way. You are in the bingo book, and you are so yung."


    She seems to be thinking something then looks at me. Then she blushes.


    She is probably thinking that her father plans to have us married. As if that is going to happen little girl, there are benefits to be made by my marriage. Even if there weren''t any gains from it, there are a lot of hotter girls to chose from than her in this world.


    Then she looks more relaxed and she asked my name, age, hobbies, dreams. I of course answered with what she liked to hear like dreams of a big family with a loyal and strong Inuzuka wife. Anyway after some time Akira came in and I then say.


    Me:" Akira -senesi did you finish the thing that you said you were going to do."


    He looks confused then looks at Tsume and then remembers and says.


    Akire:" Yeah, y-yeah I finished it."


    He really is a bad actor that can''t think on the moment. It''s really surprising how he became a jounin.


    Me:" Really sensei how long is it going to take."


    Now that he is no longer surprised by my childishness he answers more clearly.


    Akira:" Well for everything its going to take about a weak to do the installment and refurnishing it."


    Me:" Ah okay. I hope its worth the cost."


    He looks confused again, after I make a circle with my thumb and pointing finger, then he gets the meaning.


    Akira:" Ah yeah it was in the budget I even hired a group of professionals to put it up fast that''s why its getting done in a week."


    Tsume looks confused by all this. Ok then time to train I will leave the paperwork to one of my shadow clones but before I do that I say to Tsume.


    Me:" You have to get strong to catch up to me little girl."


    Tsume:" You are yung yourself also only 8 years old and I am 6. Just wait I will definitely catch up to you."


    I smile at her. And get ready to train hard with shadow clones.

 Chapter 23 - Understanding Only in Death

    -Time Skip- (one week)


    In this week a lot has been going on.


    My medical lab is fully furnished and everything is ready. I have had 6 clones everyday 1 does the paperwork for our clan. And I have found out what most civilian Inuzuka do. They are dog carers, dog handlers, dog trainers, dog food makers. Pretty much 85% of them have dog related kind of jobs, the other 15% have normal jobs like clerks, waiters etc..


    Anyways this week I have been feeding the clan head poison that weakens the heart it is odourless so his dogs can''t smell it even though the poison is slow. It is a medical drug that helps to treating dangerous diseases but it also weakens the heart. I mixed it with some other ingredients to make it dangerous but that is the main ingredient.


    Two of my clones have been learning new stuff about technology and 3 others have been studying Chiyo''s puppet that I have.


    -Time Skip- (one week)


    My clones are still training and I have opened a dog fight arena in the inuzuka clan for dog fights for civilians to come watch. It is to bring a new form of entertainment for people and a distraction against the war that is going on. Of course the fights are all fake like wrestling it looks dangerous but its not really we don''t really want to hurt our dogs after all we don''t want to spend all the money we earn in medical fees.


    I have also been keeping tabs on the news from the Rain village because I want it to align with my plan perfectly


    the clan head has been getting some pain from his left side but they are small so he thinks it''s nothing.


    After finishing technology installment and learning how to put technologicial parts together. Technology here is so weird by the way and surprisingly, I learned some new things about it.


    Clones sure are convenient except the head pains I get sometimes when I pop the ones with a lot of complicated information they are nothing just temporary memory overload.


    from C rank and D rank. I learned one that I got really interested on the Paralysis Jutsu the same jutsu that orochimaru used in Sasuke on the chunin exam. Also the same genjutsu Itachi used on Orochimaru. Its a C rank genjutsu that if you add your own twist to it like Itachi did with the stakes that hold him down it could go potentially A rank.


    I put dogs in it to raise it to B rank genjutsu now my Dog Binding jutsu just got upgraded. I learned genjutsu to get it to become useful to me in battles. Even though I don''t have the sharingan I am pretty good at genjutsu.


    -Time Skip- (one week)


    Now the clan head keeps getting worse and worse heart pains he doesn''t tell anyone not even me. He just keeps training more he thinks that it is from not doing enough training these last years and even if it isn''t he hopes it goes away. He now even has dark circles under his eyes when I ask him about it he just says it''s nothing. Before he says anything to anyone I give him some pain killers also mixed together in the food to make him feel better and some sleeping medicine in dinner to make him sleep. He even brightened up for a couple of days.


    Good I don''t need him to go talking about it to anyone.


    -Time Skip- (one week)


    Well then I have 2 news one is ''Bad'' and one is Good news.


    Let''s start with the good news the 3 now called Sanin fought against Hanzo the Salamander it came out a draw from Konohas propaganda presentation,


    when in reality he let them go. The Sanin now have also started working as a team and taking on a lot of S rank missions that keep getting the residents of Konoha pumped up. Also most of the missions are being made public after completion with confidential details hidden to keep the morale up.


    I even studied the basics for fuijutsu of what different seals mean. This is truly complicated even with my clone after a week of studying I can''t make even a good explosive tag. I can only make a firework explosive tag which is prety much for pranks and it is an E rank seal.


    And now the ''Bad'' news the clan head Akira has died in his bed his daughter was there when he died. I remember it like it was yester day.


    -Flashback- (to his day of death)


    Akira POV (clan head)


    How, I can''t move, DAMN it. I thought I started getting better. Then my daughter comes in the room because I was not down for breakfast and sees me in pain and clutching my c.h.e.s.t and not moving.


    The pain is truly unbearable.


    She seems panicked and does the first thing that cimes to mind.


    Tsume:" YAMI, YAMI COME HERE FATHER IS NOT FEELING GOOD."


    I hear him say.


    Yami:" Ok come with me to him you might be able to help me."


    Then I feel a feeling of relief wash over me even through the pain, after all he is the student of a famous medical konuichi which is the first hokages granddaughter. I am thankful that he doesn''t want to be in the light or I would have been seen as a weakling if everyone knew I was defeated by a child. I even had a bad feeling about him at first.


    He really is a true family when I beat the old clan head I couldn''t wait for him to die. Now that I think about it, the pains they started immediately after Yami came to live with us.


    Then as if hit by a 1 ton brick in the head everything falls into place.


    THIS, THIS CAN''T BE TRUE, YAMI HE DID THIS DIDN''T HE, THAT DISHONORABLE SC.U.M. Ok ....I need to calm down first maybe it was someone else. Then I hear my daughter come in and I look at her then at Yami behind her. I just look at his eyes and I immediately knew it was him. Even though he has a worried look in his face when I look at his eyes my instincts scream at me. I don''t even look at my daughter and try to say.


    Akira:" T -t -tsume b -be


    Tsume:" Yes father what is it."


    Tham as I keep my eyes on Yami as he catches on what I am about to say. I see even his mask go away and he just has a cold look on his face and the only thing I can think about is. Ahhhhh how unlucky of me to meet this kind of scary monster.


    So before I die I want to tell my daughter the truth but I know he will kill her if I do. I can feel it in my bones.


    So I just tell her.


    Akira:" b -be safe Tsume."

 Chapter 24 - The Truth of having a Dream.

    -MC POV-


    After he died I made sure he was dead and even to be sure I stabed a senbon inside his mouth, down his throat and to touch his brain he is definitely dead now I also made sure he didn''t leave a secret message or anything.


    Tsume was crying next to him I then took him to the hospital to the emergency ward. Normally people would be asking questions about his death and I had a lot of made up answers. But as he was in the hospital


    1 hour later the news of the making of the Sanin came. I didn''t know the exact date of it but I planed it to be around the same time as the death of Akira like a day or two before the Sanin but to be in the same day I really lucked out on this.


    Now everyone is distracted by the Sanin.


    The Inuzuka are about to have the funeral the same day and I am ready to go and report it to the hokage''s office with Tsume behind . But someone stops me at the hokage office door he has jounin chakra and says.


    ???:" Sorry but the hokage is in an important meeting."


    Me:" I am sorry but the hokage must know this, a clan head has died."


    His eyes widen and he says.


    ???:" As I see from your face markings it must be the Inuzuka. My condolences but I am sorry but I really can''t allow you in there, the meeting is super important."


    Tsume then says.


    Tsume:" WHY YO-"


    Me:" I am sorry for her behaviour. She has had a bad day and I understand your dilemma good day to you."


    I then take Tsume back even though she struggles a bit I take her out of the hokage''s tower. After we are outside I take my hand of her mouth and she immediately says.


    Tasume:" How dare they do that to one of the strongest clan in konoha. Why did you stop me."


    And there comes the dumb Inuzuka pride and delusion.


    Well time to make a little manipulation.


    Me:" I didn''t have a choice but to do so. You would have gotten our clan in trouble. Don''t you know that the village doesn''t respect our clan enough to let your behaviour slide."


    Tsume:" What the hell are you talking about our clan is one of the strongest clans in konoha."


    Me:" Get over your pride we are one of the weakest clans in konoha and at best we are in the middle of the power range."


    Tsume:" Shut the hell up what do you know about Inuzuka clan when you are an inuzuka civilian born."


    Me:" Then tell me a weaker clan than ours. We only have a handful of special jounin in tracking and all the other ninjas in the clan are chunin or lower. That was what me and your father were trying to fix."


    She seems to think about it a bit and she becomes sad. After all when a clan head dies it is expected of the Hokage to be in the funeral and the hokage not being able to come is another bonus to me to convince my clan to help me become their leader after all even though the Inuzuka fight a lot against each other, when someone from outside interfere and when they have a common enemy they will come together and support each other like a wolf pack.


    I will pick at their pride and make them trust me and follow me. But I must not go overboard or the Inuzuka might end up like the Uchiha did in canon. Even though it wouldn''t happen immediately because we are at war.


    I then say.


    Me:" Lets go to the funeral, at least we have to pay respects to the clan head.


    And don''t worry about anything I will take care of the Inuzuka clan."


    I put up a determined face and go to the Inuzuka clan compound and then we go to the gathering place and we go towards all the Inuzuka clan heads graveyards with a new hole oppened next to it. I also paid 1 mill ryo from my own pockets for the grave to be special and beautiful after all every Inuzuka clan head had an expensive grave.


    Then as he was being put on the ground we all had a moment of silence Tsume was tryong to be strong but tears were coming out of her eyes and she was holding my hand. I just keept my head down and didn''t do anything. When I looked at the people around me despairing becouse the only jounin in the clan died and sad becouse they liked him as a clan head, he was good to his people. I didn''t know what to feel. I was also almost overcome by some unknown feeling that I had buried a long time ago. But then I look at the grave and think. No way am I giving up my dream becouse of some stupid thing like making other people feel despair.


    I will do whatever it takes, I will follow the plan after all for every person I kill I am killing a son, brother, father, uncle, daughter, mother etc.. I understand that.


    BUT I AM NOT GOING TO LET THAT HINDER ME IN MY DREAM I DON''T CARE WHAT HAPPENS TO THESE PEOPLE, THESE KILLERS THESE BARBARIANS, EVEN THOSE INNOCENT. After all the completion of ones dream is the process on stepping in the dreams of others, the bigger the dream the more steps you need to take.


    There doesn''t exist anything like a free meal in this world.


    Others will just try to hold you down like weights they can''t wait for you to be their stepping stone.


    After the funeral ends I just go home and take Tsume with me.


    In the funeral there were only Inuzuka no other clans at all. What a strong clan indeed.(sarcasm)


    -Flash back- END


    After that there were some clans that came to visit to offer their condolences.


    Only the Nara, Akimichi, Yamanaka and Aburame clan came. There also came an ambu to offer consolences from hokage and tell me for me to meet him in front of the Konoha gates tomorrow for the negotiations with the Sand. The Sand requested this.


    I spend a lot of money buying ninja tools today.


    Before I left I told the clan to wait for me to determine the clan head. They agreed after I told them my mission. And I then told some motivational or coded speech it depends on how you interpret it. What I sais was: '' The lone wolf dies, while the pack survives.''


    Now they will deffinatly wait for me after all I said something that sounded so cryptic and a message to them.


    Whatever they think they understood was probably wrong what I really wanted was for them to wait for me before they hold the election.


    I really don''t want to beat another Inuzuka clan head and manipulate him it is really time consuming to do so.


    -Time Skip- (tomorrow)


    I am in front of the gates in the morning.


    I then see hokage come with his fighting outfit and 5 anbu around him I sense another 5 on the trees. After all the Sand are still our enemies.


    I have a couple ideas why the Sand requested me. But I was ready even if Konoha wanted to sell me to the Sand


    I had a lot of escape ways as soon as I see something suspicious. Even though it is unlikely for Konoha to do that because:


    1- Konoha doesn''t give up its ninja


    2- I am the student of Tsunade


    4- I am well known


    5- If it did so the morale would go down


    Etc, etc there are many reasons but it doesn''t hurt to be prepared.


    Anyway then we start going towards the land of Rivers and as we are going in about 10 minutes in the road Hiruzen says.


    Hiruzen:" My condolences about the Clan Heads death I am sorry I couldn''t be there."


    I look at the ground to seem sad.


    Me:" No need to worry Hokage -sama.


    You had to deal with the Sanin situation


    and the peace talks with the Sand Village."


    The hokage then sighs in relief. He looks at me and says.


    Hiruzen:" Thank you for your understanding. By the way how did the Clan Head die."

 Chapter 25 - The Professors Power

    I look around and see the anbu.


    I even see the one anbu with a cocoon of paper and a sealing tag on it with lines all acros the cocoon the Ichibi jinchuriki is there.


    I then look sad like almost crying and say.


    Me:*sigh* " It was an internal disease he didn''t tell anybody except me. The reason he trained me was because he wanted me to succeed him. But there is also another reason, he wanted me to try to cure his disease. He did so because he didn''t want to appear weak he even built a whole laboratory in his house to assist me on the procedure.


    I started trying to make a cure for his disease but it started getting worse the pain was unbearable some time he couldn''t sleep all night. I finally figured a way to prolong his life. Then I told him it''s better if he went to a hospital."


    Some tears started to fall from my eyes.


    Me:" But he didn''t listen and it got worse untill he died."


    I then wiped the tears out of my eyes and turned to the hokage and said.


    Me:" Sorry for that behaviour hokage."


    I put up a front of a kid trying to be tough by hiding my feelings.


    Plus would you suspect the doctor of the one who died assassinated him.


    Who would suspect an 8 year old kid to do that.


    And who would build somebody they suspect would kill them a laboratory.


    Hiruzen:" Don''t worry Yami crying when someone close to you died is normal. I know that this war has toughened a lot of kids.


    But Yami let me tell you something. Konoaha wasn''t a place made for children to die and be sad.


    Konoha is an ideal Hashirama -sensei had to not see children die younger and younger each war that happens.


    He wanted to build a utopia a place where he and people like him could protect those close to him."


    I look at the hokage calmly and nod.


    After walking for a bit more I said.


    Me:" Thank you for the advice and wisdom Hokage -sama."


    He just looks at me and makes a small smile and says.


    Hiruzen:" That is the least I could do after all you have been through.


    Akira -san must of have died happily to know that there is you to look after his family."


    If only you knew, if only you knew.


    I look down and seem sad and say.


    Me:" I really hope so. I hope that he is looking over the Inuzuka."


    I then make a small sad smile and say.


    Me:" After all he can''t expect a kid to do all that work without supervision now can he."


    Hiruzen looks at me sadly and just makes a sad *sigh* and says.


    Hiruzen:" He was proud of you also, because of you we might be able to stop the war with Sand then we could concentrate on the other nations."


    I look at him hopefully and say.


    Me:" I really hope it ends.


    I hope this war ends soon, it took so many things from me."


    He just looks at me and says.


    Hiruzen:" I knew your teammates Asutori ans Asume. He wanted to be hokage and she wanted to help him be so. He would always get in trouble and play pranks on the other kids and Asume would alsways reprimand him."


    Then we keept talking about different things and we stop for the night amd make camp we are still in Fire country. We camped besides a lake called fire lake and we set up camp there. The anbu were taking turns keeping watch but I still kept my dog up I even make a shadow clone to keep watch over my tent.


    Then as I am sleeping my clone tuches me on the shoulder. I wake up immediately and have my senses on full alert I then sense 19 jounin chakra around our camp. We are surrounded.


    I signal my dog to stay out of the battlefield and I dospel my clone.


    And as soon as I go outside I see a barrage of projectiles being thrown at us some even had paper Bombs attached to them then I see the hokage go in front and use [Earth Style Earth Dome] and a dome of earth surrounds our camp and all I then hear explosions all around us.


    Sarutobi then undoes the jutsu and all the jounin surround us they all have sand ninja headbands. Sarutobi just looks at them and says.


    Hiruzen:" You know as jounin of the villade hidden in the Rocks you are really bad at impersonating Sand ninja."


    Some of them widen their eyes. And then 10 of them get in the back and start making handsigns 8 of them use


    Hiruzen:" Stay close to me and don''t fight to the death against them. I can take care of them withought losing anyone."


    We go around him and he uses.


    [Earth Style Mobile Core] and a platform rises us into the air like a pillar.


    Then the anbu throw some fire jutsu towards the enemies but they block with


    Earth Walls.


    Then we hear the 10 ninjas that have been using handsigns and concentrating chakra untill now use.


    [Earth Style Earth Golem Jutsu] and a gigantic golem appears and their chakra drop to about 85%. Then one of them says.


    ???:" Hokage -sama if you want to keep your life, give up, I promise we will give you back to konoha after they have surrendered."


    Hokage just looks at them frowns his brows and uses.


    then Hiruzen simply says.


    Hiruzen:"Enma Adamantine Staff."


    Then the Earth golem immediately attacks.


    Hiruzen:" Lengthen."


    Then the staff lengthens and pierces through the stone golem.


    Hiruzen:" Widen."


    Then the staff widens and compleatly destroys the Earth Golem an S rank jutsu gone just like that. 10 jounin died they were crushed by the debris and the staff just like that the other 9 see this and immediately throw some jutsu at us the anbu use earth wall to block it but after it clears out it seems they used that as a diversion to try to escape.


    The hokage sees this and then uses [Shadow Clone] 9 clones are made Hiruzen throws a scroll at them then they nod and give chase immediately.


    Then we finally have some time to take a breather. 3 minutes later a clone returns with a scroll on his hands and gives it to the hokage. Probably a storage scroll with all their bodies.


    Hiruzen:" Lets get out of here our tents were destroyed anyway, lets just keep going at the meeting point."


    After that there were no more interruptions in our journey. The hokage and me made some small talk about stuff, then he went into full professor mode and started teaching me how he knew they were Stone ninja etc...


    We than arrived at the konoha camp.


    I haven''t been here in quite some time.


    Sakumo comes to greet us and then sees me and says.


    Sakumo:" Hey kid how was your vecation."


    I just look down and seem sad and don''t say anything. An anbu then does some handsigns to explain what happened. Then Sakumo looks sad at me and says.


    Sakumo:" My condolences for your loss.


    I am here if you need someone to talk to."


    Then we go to the battlefield and there we see 1 big tent with Sand ninja in one side and Konoha ninja on the other ready for war at any time.


    Then me, Sakumo and the hokage go inside in there and the konoha ninja stand aside and open a path for us to go in the tent.


    Then two konoha ninja oppen the tents entrance flap


    And inside I see...

 Chapter 26 - Haggling the Hag

    I look inside and I see Chiyo with the 3rd Kazekage sitting in chairs with their hands on the desk that they have their with a map of the all 5 nations.


    Then the we look at them and we sit in our chairs. Hokage in the middle Sakumo inthe right and I in the left.


    The the kazekage looks at me with cold eyes and says.


    Kazekage:" So you are the brat that was able to take out our ichibi. You sure don''t look like much."


    I see what he is trying to do. I just smile and say.


    Me:" Hahahahah thanks Kazekage -sama. That was what Chiyo thought before I cut her arm of."


    Then I make a vile smile and continue saying.


    Me:" That is also what your jinchuriki thought before I took him out. Of course some other Sand jounin had the same idea as them, but of curse they had it... how should I say it ...more critical."


    The kazekage looks angrily at me and releasees his chakra with killing in tent towards me but then the hokage releases his before it gets to me and says.


    Hiruzen:" You know Kazekage attempting to attack a ninja of a Village you are trying to make peace with doesn''t send the message of peace quite clearly."


    Chiyo looks at the Kazekage with dissappointed eyes becouse he just got angry and led on by a kid.


    Sakumo looks at Kazekage and frowns.


    I just look at them with my usual smile like I didn''t notice anything.


    They already were in a lower position than us by being the weaker village they had to wait for us so that puts them lower and with what I did right now they got even lower the only people in the room who get this are Chiyo and Hokage the others aren''t quite experienced in politics. Even I am not quite like them in political knowledge.


    Hiruzen:" C''mon now we are going to be allies soon no need to bicker amongst each other."


    The Kazekage sees this and follows.


    Kazekage:" Ok but for us to singn this treaty I need the puppet that the kid took from Chiyo and the Jinchuriki."


    Hiruzen:" I can give you the Jinchuriki for 500 mill ryo after all this is cheap the 1st Hokage sold the one tail for 1 billion ryo per tail for tailed beasts."


    Then they started negotiating for it with the end price 100 mil ryo.


    Wow the hokage really is a bad negotiator that is where his wish for peace weakened him and lowered the price exponentially. They also signed a 5 year piece treaty if they want to continue it they will meet again in 5 years. They can''t exactly break this contract because it was signed by the two Daimyo.


    Then Chiyo looks at me and says.


    Chiyo:" Ok kid now that we are allies


    return the puppet you took from me."


    Yeah right you old hag as if I will do that. I know that I can''t keep it becouse these puppets are precious to Suna but there is no way I am giving those for free. I then smile and say.


    Me:" Sorry Chiyo -san but I can''t exactly turn it in for free I am studying it.


    You can come take it after the war is over."


    She looks at me frowns her eyebrows and says.


    Chiyo:" Well I will give you 1 mill ryo for


    it."


    Me:" I will accept of you give me 20 million."


    Chiyo:" Are you crazy kid I can make 2 of those with that amount of money."


    Me:" Yeah but the ingredients aren''t quite easy to come by, especially in a war time."


    And I know that those puppets were made by the first puppeteer from the anime if they were so easy to make suna would have more of them.


    Chiyo:" I will give you 5 mill for it."


    Me:" Since we are allies I will give it to you for 17 million."


    Chiyo:" Kid don''t joke with me 7 mill is the final price."


    Me:" Then you will have to pay me when the war is over."


    Chiyo is sweating a bit and the says.


    Chiyo:" 9 MILLION...."


    I act like I am fed up with this and say.


    Me:" Ok, Ok no need to beg for it I will give it to you for 9,500,000."


    Chiyo looks at me angry and then says with grinding teeth and a vein in her forehead.


    Chiyo:" Y -YOU *sigh*.


    Chiyo:"....ok."


    The others in the room had surprised faces after all seeing a 8 year old kid negotiating with a veteran and coming out on top is surprising.


    Then after some more planing by the Hokage and Kazekage on how to put some more pressure on


    Iwahakure(Rock Village) then we leave the tent. Then the hokage tells Sakumo.


    Hiruzen:" Sakumo you have to go to the Lightning coutry borders, I am coming also we have to slow down the 3rd Raikage. From the information from Root they are in the land of hot water they are almost in our borders so we will slow them down."


    Then we go in our meeting tent there are only me, Sakumo and the Hokage.


    Sakumo seems kind of nervous and says.


    Sakumo:" It''s going to be hard to stop him even with us together.


    The 3rd Raikage is known as the Almighty A."


    Hokage:" Don''t worry too much Danzo will have Root disguised as Mist ninja and attack the Village Hidden in the Clouds directly. If the plan works we will only have to only hold him for a bit."


    Hiruzen then looks at me and says.


    Hirizen:" What about you Yami will you join us."

 Chapter 27 - Becoming The Clan Head

    Yeah right as if I am going in a battle against the third Raikage that even


    Kyuubi chakra Naruto couldn''t beat without the clue from eight tails. Plus he was weakened by Edo Tensei. So yeah no thank you.


    I just put up a face like I am thinking.


    Me:" I am sorry Hokage -sama,


    Sakumo -sama but I have to look after my clan for a bit because of our recent tragedy.


    And me taking down 1 tails jinchuriki has used all the luck I have.


    I am too weak to help Hokage -sama."


    Hokage looks at me and says.


    Hiruzen:" Ok kid look out for yourself on the road. By the way Yami you have a talent at haggling if you weren''t an amazing ninja I would think you were a scheming merchant."


    I smile and scrach the cack of my head and say.


    Me:" Yeah I would like to think I would make a good merchant. But I had to think all the jurney from konoha to here just to say that and what I was going to say."


    That''s a lie even though I had minimal experience in marketing in my last life that didn''t mean I couldn''t act like I did.


    I have acted my whole new life and and most of my last, combining that with some shows in my last life, I made myself act like a professional in this when really I am not.


    The hokage has a small laugh and says.


    Hokage:" Yeah but I think that is still talent in the job, you could give someone a week to think about it and they wouldn''t come up with anything half decent.


    Take care of your self Yami, I have high hopes for you."


    I look at him sadly and say.


    Me:" You too please be careful


    Hokage -sama... ahhhh I can''t wait for this war to end I am just so tired of it."


    I then go towards a medical tent to just sleep I am way to tired. But as I turn around the Hokage says.


    Hokeage:" Oh yeah I almost forgot Yami for captureing Ichibi you get 30% of the money in the deal."


    He just throws a scroll at me I open it and its a letter to konoha''s bank with the hokages seal and signature.


    Oh so I get 30.000.000. I thought the hokage wouldn''t give me anything because we are at war time but hey more money will help advance my plan after the war ends.


    -Time Skip- (Tomorrow)


    I woke up, told Sakumo that I am going back to Konoha and went on immediately.


    I didn''t have any truble in the road and went top speed towards konoha I arrived in a day and a half. I immediately went to a hotel to wash up and go to the market get some new clothes to wear that look like the ones I already have but hey they are new. I then slept to be completely focused and then go towards the Inuzuka clan compound.


    So then lets get this scheme into action so I can start the mext part of my plan.


    I then go into the clan compound and concentrate on my sensing and sense all of the ninja members of the clan were here and most of the civilian ones this is good.


    Well then I make a clone and tell everyone to meet me at the clan head house.


    ,


    -10 Minutes Later-


    Everyone of the ninja side of the clan are here and even some civilians.


    Then I go inside the others follow me and go towards the big dinner and meting rooom then I stand before the door and point with my hand inside.


    Subconsciously guide them and get am advantage.


    They follow and everyone ninja and nonninja that came sit down on the big tables the room is terrible it doesn''t have any decoration just 5 rectangular big tables and a platform for speeches.


    Me:" Ladies and gentlemen you can you sit down please."


    They all sit down after they do so I sit down last. Another show of superiority by me, they really don''t understand the language of subtlety.


    Then after I sit down I immediately say.


    Me:" I have something to say to all of you. I WILL BECOME THE CLAN HEAD."


    I look at them all challenging them to speak I saw Tsume with the head down all sience she sat down finally look at me with something like approval in her eyes. So all that manipulation during the time we were living under the same roof wasn''t in vain, the girl probably has a crush on me.


    Then some Inuzuka says.


    ???:" WHY SHOULD WE LISTEN TO YOU KID. A BRAT THAT ISN''T DONE SMELLING OF HIS MOTHER''S MILK YET."


    He has chunin chakra level.


    I just look at him and use [Paralysis Jutsu] and he is like stuck in a place in fear then I just keep looking at him and say.


    Me:" Sit down, I didn''t give you permission to speak yet."


    He just sits down with a scared expression and full of sweat, and I just say.


    Me:" From what I know the Strongest Inuzuka is the clan head.


    So to not waste my time and your time I have decided to challenge all of you in battle. All of you against me."


    ???:" Arrogant prick."


    ??:" Who does he think he is."


    Some of them were annoyed when I said so. Actually there were less people annoyed by this than I expected.


    But really though it isn''t exactly really hard to take them out. None of them have the battlefield experience that I have, most of them are trackers to find any enemy that has crossed into the Fire Country and that is rare and for them to fight it is even rarer.


    Anyway I get up from my chair and go infront of the room and tell my dog to stay hidden the opposite of me and that is behind anybody that challenges me.


    I then say.


    Me:" C''mon you have to get up I am getting old jut waiting for you."


    All of the Inuzuka ninja get up and one of them says.


    ???:" How about we go outside no need to ruin the house."


    Me:" No need you guys won''t be able to even blink when I am finished."


    With an angry face all of them attack me immediately withought saying anything


    I probably pised them off enough. I then signal my clones they all throw senbon at them fast for no civilians to notice and it hits them all in the neck and as soon as I see this I use shunshin and go through them and to the side of my dog behind them. The people only saw me going through like a flash and all the ninja falling down. I then turn to all of them and say.


    Me:" FROM NOW ON I AM THE INUZUKA CLAN HEAD. DOES ANYONE ELSE HAVE A PROBLEM WITH IT."


    They don''t say anything they just look at me with fear and clap uncertainly. Then I take the Senbon out of the ninjas necks and say to them.


    Me:" I AM GOING TO MAKE THIS CLAN THE GREATEST CLAN THE 5 NATIONS HAVE EVER SEEN.


    ARE YOU ALL WITH ME? DO YOU WANT TO SEE OUR CLAN OUR FAMILY TO THE TOP OF THE WORLD."


    First step of my plan completed.


    -Time Skip- (3 days later)


    As I was going around Konoha I kept thinking of the ways I can improve the individual strength of every Inuzuka njinja clan member. I have some ideas and some experimental techniques that I could try on them. I could make the techniques usable even for me, in theory they should work. But no way in hell am I testing them on myself. Better test them on some Inuzuka ninja first.


    I plan on how to convince them.


    I guess I will just use power and glory manipulation technique to pull them towards me even though cliche it is the best one after all every one wants power and most want glory. And it is more convenient this way after all if an Inuzuka went missing suddenly it would be difficult to explain, we do have a small amount of ninja clansmen. But him volunteering is the best way possible. Anyway on to the little stuff.


    I leave my shadow clones to do paperwork and improve the economic side. Now I just need some materials to start my experiment I had my clone do that.


    Then as I am walking I see a ramen stand. Ahhhh that is the Ichiraku Ramen. It is really small ramen stand it probably jut opened I see a teenager working there and I see 2 familiar people eating in there one of them I know from the academy and one from the anime. I smile and go to talk to them.


    Me:" Hey....

 Chapter 28 - Meeting old Friends, Making new Friends

    Me:" Heyyyy Minato long time no see."


    He looks in my direction and I wave and start jogging towards him and when I am close I sit in a chair to the left of him and he sees me, smiles and says.


    Minato:" Hey Yami long time no see.


    So you graduated early also huh."


    Me:" Yeah I was to the Sand battlefield also. Have you been in any missions I heard that your jonin sensei and my jounin sensei were teammates."


    He just smiles at me and says.


    Minato:" Really that is cool my jounin sensei talked about his teammates when he drinks a lot. So which one is your jounin sensey Tsunade or Orochimaru."


    Me:" Tsunade, she is a medic ninja. Anyway have you been in the battlefield."


    Minato:" Yeah I was in the mist country battlefield but when Jiraya -sensei went to the land of rain to fight there he send me back to konoha with my teammates."


    I act a little sad and like I am trying to hide it.


    Me:" Really so do you do any D rank missions with them anymore."


    Minato:" Yeah we do, usually 3 D ranks a week.


    Because we are training most of the time we don''t do any more."


    Yeah and in war time genin can''t go out of the village without permission or being escorted by someone of a higher rank into the battlefield because they could meet any chunin or jounin spy that would kill them or kidnap them. The area around fire country is patrolled a lot but any ninja could slip in, and its dagerous. So you need to be chunin or jounin to go outside of the village. So genin if they are not canon fodder they are choreboys in time of war.


    I make a ridiculing smirk at him and say.


    Me:" Did you know that I have no D ranks in my record."


    Minato:" Oh good for you. You have no idea how boring they get after some time."


    I just look at him and think. I was trying to anoy him a bit, any normal 9 year old would have been anoyed.


    He really doesn''t have an evil bone in his body. Well that is an expression becouse I am pretty sure he has killed.


    Then I notice the girl that was next to him that had somehow eaten 6 bowls of ramen by herself get anoyed at being ignored by us and says.


    Kushina:" HEY WHO ARE YOU KID. YOU ARE BEING DISRESPECTFUL."


    I just look at her and make an apologetic face and say.


    Me:" Sorry, sorry I didn''t mean to do that senpai."


    Then I look at her and say.


    Me:" By the way you are a kid also."


    Kushina:" WHAT DID YOU SAY I AM A GENIN SO IT DOESN''T MATTER IF I AM A KID."


    I just look at her with a mocking smile and say.


    Me:" Well I am already a Chunin so that means I am your senior already."


    She just looks at me in anger her hair is floating behind her head. Ahh so my mocking smile does work.


    Minato just looks shocked at me then he looks at Kishina and says.


    Minato:" Kushina please calm down and Yami stop pushing her buttons."


    I then have a small laugh and say.


    Me:" Sorry, sorry Kushina -san I was just kidding arond."


    Then after some seconds she takes a deap breath and calms down and says.


    Kushina:" Ok I will forgive you if you treat me to ramen."


    Me:" So by your red hair I guess that you are an Uzumaki. Then I will buy you ramen only if you.....


    I give her a cold look. She gulps a little.


    I then make a bright smile and say.


    Me:" Teach me Fuijutsu."


    She looks at me with a pissed off face and says.


    Kushina:" WHAT THE HELL YOU ANTICLIMACTIC LITTLE SH*T."


    After she noticed what she said she had a small embarrassed blush. When I notice that I say.


    Me:" What do you mean I was going to have you teach me Fuijutsu because the Uzumaki were well known for it."


    Kushina:*sigh*" Ok every day 2 oclock here at this stand 5 bowls of ramen Minato will also come because I have the same deal with him also."


    I then make a serious face and say.


    Me:" Ok Kushina -sensei."


    She blushes a little when I call her that.


    The we make some small talk after that a younger Fuichi comes and joins the conversation while also cooking.


    Wow its so easy to make friends with Kushina she is super friendly when you get to know her. Then after some time we get up each of us going back to their houses Kushina towards the Senju compound going to Mito to learn from her and to visit her. Minato towards his rented apartment that is in the same road that is towards my clan compound. As we are walking I say to Minato.


    Me:" Sooooo what''s the deal between you and her."


    Minato:" Well we have the same deal as you do with her."


    Me:" You know that''s not what I am talking about."


    Minato:" Well she teaches me some beginner Fuijutsu because I am interested in it."


    I just give him a side glance and say.


    Me:" If I am not wrong your jounin techer Jiraya knows some Fuijutsu why didn''t he teach you."


    He has a good mask but he is still to young to hide his panic from me.


    Minato:" Well he is at war he can''t and doesn''t have the time for it."


    Me:" He could have left some notes for his young and promising student. Or maybe he did leave some."


    He frowns, looks at me and says.


    Minato:" What are you trying to say."


    Me:" I am saying that Minato Namikaze


    is not a kid who wastes money needlessly."


    Minato:" If I am not wrong Tsunade -sama''s grandmother is a master at Fuijutsu and an Uzumaki. Why don''t you learn from her."


    Me:" Well I don''t want to be a bother to an old lady trying to enjoy her last years on earth."


    Well that is a lie I am afraid if she can sense emotions like Karin could I don''t really know if that is true or not from the anime so I am staying away from her. Then I say again.


    Me:" By the way I know you are trying to change the subject, so let''s get right into it again."


    He then looks at me, snorts and says.


    Minato:" Then what is your conclusion Yami the guy who knows everything about everyone."


    Me:" Well my conclusion is that you like her."


    He stops and looks at me with a shocked face and a small blush and says meekly.


    Minato:" W -w -what I don''t know what you''re talking about."


    Me:" Ohhhhh I think I do my friend, I think I do."


    Then his shoulders slump down and he says.


    Minato:" Ok, ok you got it right but please don''t tell anyone. You are the only one who knows."


    Me:" Ok, ok no need to be so nervous I wasn''t going to tell anybody."


    Then I look him in the eyes with a small smirk and say.


    Me:" Because we are friends after all aren''t we."


    Minato:*sigh*" You are right we are friends I shouldn''t have been worried so much about something like this."


    Me:" But I still want something."


    He looks at me with wide eyes I make a small smile and say.


    Me:" What I need is....

 Chapter 29 - Experiments

    Me:" What I need is.... a spar with you."


    Minato then looks at me and says.


    Minato:*sigh*" You could have asked me normally I would have accepted anyway."


    I just smirk at him and say.


    Me:" I know, I know I am just feeling dramatic today. Anyway we will spar tomorrow after Fuijutsu studies with Kushina."


    He looks at me and says.


    Minato:" Ok."


    We then make some useless small talk untill we part ways then I go into my house and see my clones training in the backyard I just go immediately in my lab to make sure everything is okay then do some exercises to keep in shape and go to sleep.


    -Tomorrow-


    I just wake up take a shower wear my usual type of clothes and then sense the closest chunin, go outside and go towards him in about 2 minutes I see him in the training ground training with his ninken then I look at him he looks around 19 years old so I just say.


    Me:" Hey there. I see that you are training very hard."


    He turns and looks at me and says.


    ???:" Good morning Yami -sama."


    He bows a little.'' You know the Inuzuka really are eazy to manipulate and control with power. Even though it''s a trashy clan, there are not many internal schemes so that is good.''


    I then look at him in the eye and say with a determined face.


    Me:" I saw you training hard in here. And I have developed a secret technique that makes Inuzukas stronger and I would like to reward you for your hard work by using it on you.


    You will become the first Inuzuka that I will use this technique on, so that means when I start using it on others you will have to teach them. WILL YOU ACCEPT THIS REWARD AND RESPONSIBILITY FOR US TO MAKE THE INUZUKA CLAN THE GREATEST."


    You know if this was my old world looking at a kid like that in the middle of nowhere would be suspicious.


    He then says.


    ???:" Yes Inuzuka -sama."


    I look at his eyes and say.


    Me:"Ok then we are going to my house for you to learn it and I will have to activate it."


    He and his ninken come towards my house when we are walking I tell him to introduce himself like Tsunade did to us, likes, dislikes and hobbies. I wasn''t really interested in them what I really needed was his name I don''t want him to think that he was just chosen randomly because he was the closest ninja to my home,


    but because I was impressed by him. By the way his name is Akimaru Inuzuka. Then we arrive at my home


    we get into the lab and then I tell him to lie down on the table. When he does so, I pick up his ninken and tell him that it he shouldn''t be so close and stealthy knock him out after all it might feel his owner in danger and interfere I also put him in the hallway tie it up not to move and have my dog watch the door when I close it, for no one to interrupt me.


    I also put up the sign in the door that says doing something critical don''t come in so I won''t be interrupted by Tsume.


    I then put 2 thin tubes his nose and he is immediately unconscious. Well not really this is one of the things I had my clone buy a kind of drug that you can''t move and you are knocked out but it keeps the chakra activity normal like you are awake its expensive because of its rarity. I bought a lot of different things my clone spend about 1 mill ryo buying different things.


    And this first experiment is not dangerous.


    The worst he can get is memory loss or something trivial like that. I can just bash his head on a tree and leave him there on the training ground and most would think that he got injured while training.


    I wrap him in the table tight with belts and ropes all over his body and the table leaving only the upper part of his head open and above his heart.


    Then I took out an extra thin senbon like needle run chakra through it and stabed it into his brain. His body jolted a little after the stab, I immediately took it out. I just punctured a hole into the first gate, gate of opening. I run a full scan on his body, his body didn''t have any injuries the punctured hole in the gate closed and gave him a small increase on strength and speed for 3 seconds.


    That experiment was just to check if the gates can be punctured by someone else from outside.


    Now starts the big experiment.


    If he dies I will have to make it seem like a training acident or assassinations or something, but its not really that important nobody is going to thoroughly investigate a chunin death in war time well the head of the clan might make further investigations but I am the clan head soooo yeah.


    I take another needle like the first one and run chakra through it. Then I look towards his heart and I make a small hole in it, his body immediately starts heating up and now he is jolting violently. I then immediately pull out the needle the hole on the gate is not closing itself but its starting to become bigger.


    Well that is within expectation I just use my chakra to forcefully close the small hole but it only stops expanding and it doesn''t close so then stab him again in that hole and use healing chakra through the needle while taking it out. It then heals.


    I wish I had a dojutsu to be able to see what is going on there. But I don''t have one so I have to fully 100% concentrate my chakra sensing in his heart and have different machines to be able to help me with the job and even then its not even 80% accurate.


    I then run a scan through his body, its definitely taken a toll on his body. It even took some lifespan not a lot but still not a technique I would use on myself. It did raise his original chakra amount a little and his original body strength a little from the destroyed muscles. So it has an abbility to raise body strength and chakra temporarily and even raise it a little of it forever after every usage, but it''s really like giving lifespan to get stronger.


    Anyway I think I got the results I wanted and it was within speculation. I now can raise the strength of my clan. I could make a curse mark on top of their hearts to open and close the small hole I will make for them and keep the hole from expanding. I really need to be a master in Fuijutsu to be able to do that.


    Of course I also definitely will put a kill switch in the curse mark. I am not Orochimaru to let my Pawns kill the King themselves.


    Then I wake the guy up and dose him on pain relievers to not feel the pain that his body is in.


    He seems confused and tired. I tell him that now I will call him after some time to get the final treatment. I even give him 500.000 ryo and tell him to go get something to eat and not to push himself. Then he goes away.


    After some time of putting everything back in place and writing this method in a book of course I wrote it in English not in the same language as the naruto world I think it''s Japanese.


    I don''t want anyone to be able to read it.


    After some rest it is time to go to Kushina''s lessons and after that... I can''t wait to fight Minato. To truly see his talent and how much he has grown

 Chapter 30 - Fuijutsu

    After all he does have the chakra level of a peak chunin a step away from jounin level not really surprising because of his talent he experienced a metamorphosis from advanced chakra exercises even thought to grow his chakra so fast in just a year and a half sience graduation.


    Of course don''t compare his chakra levels with mine which is almost high jounin I have been training chakra sience I was 2 years old and I even had higher that average chakra at birth.


    The higher the chakra level gets the harder it gets to train it, I think his speed will slow down expenoncialy when he goes to jounin level and it will be Turtle speed when you get the chakra to the level of kage.


    There is also the problem of chakra limit, everyone has a chakra limit. It is how much their chakra can grow. Of course there are some methods to extend that limit. I still haven''t reached my limit so I don''t have worry about it yet.


    But anyways you can''t really base chakra level to strength with njinja like Minato I bet he is alredy at a minimum of low jounin in strength even though he is only 9 years old.


    By the way he really is m.a.t.u.r.e for his age with his actions and ethic. Not the kind of m.a.t.u.r.e I have, but the kind of m.a.t.u.r.e natural geniuses have.


    Then as I am walking I go to ichiraku ramen and I see Kushina already there I am 5 minutes earlier than the set time I don''t really want to test the limits of her nerves by being late, then I sit down and tell her.


    Me:" Hi Kushina. How are you doing?"


    Kushina:" Hi and what''s up with that generic question."


    Me:*sigh*" I am kind of bored soo.... do we have to wait for Minato or can we start."


    She then puts her head on the table and says.


    Kushina:" Well we can''t really start but you can show me how much you know about seals."


    I make an embarrassed face and tell her.


    Me:" I am not really that good at it I just want to learn it... I only know some firework seals."


    Kushina just looks at me and then covers her mouth trying to stop the laughter and says.


    Kushina:"...pft....ha....hahahhahahah


    You want to learn fuijutsu like that."


    After some laughter about 1 minute of it Kushina looks at my face which is completely serious and kind of angry. I am not really angry after all she is just a kid so I am just acting. Then I tell her.


    Me:" I have been learning Fuijutsu for only a short time I am just interested in it."


    She looks at me and smiles and says.


    Kushina:" No need to be so angry.. "


    She thet pulls out a scroll and summons something out of it. Its a book she gives it to me and I read the title and it says


    ''Uzumaki Beginner Fuijutsu'' I immediately start reading it and its amazing it has all kinds of seals in it. It has from the Finger Carving seal which Jiraya used to draw the code on the back of the toad, when he died, this is the introduction to fuijutsu in this book. And at the end of the book is the Three Barrier Seal which is Similar to the Five Seal Barrier technique, instead the user places three sealing tags around their location. If any one manages to enter through a secret entrance of the protected hideout, a deep mist is created and the only way to get rid of it is remove the tags around the protected area.


    This is so good, this is a gold mine.


    If I am able to learn all the Fuijutsu Kushina is able to teach me I will become one of the best Fuijutsu masters in konoha or possibly the 5 nations when canon starts after all the Uzumaki at that time are almost all exterminated and almost all their knowledge is lost.


    In the beginner fuijutsu in konoha library they taught Firework Seal as an introduction to Fuijutsu and the Small Explosion Seal at the end which its not really good against ninja because of its long fuse time and small explosion.


    This Uzumaki book introduces the normal explosive seals that ninjas use on the battlefield in the beginner version I can''t wait about the advanced version. Finally something new and exiting.


    Anyway as I am reading this book I sense Minato coming towards us and I then look towards him, and say to him hello and then Kushina starts explaining and teaching him the Intermediate book that they have started to learn and Kushina explains him while eating ramen, that I and Minato bought her.


    Two hours later we finish our studying I even learned the Finger Carving seal to use in 1 finger.


    Them as we get up I put the Uzumaki book in my scroll and I tell Kushina.


    Me:" Hey Kushina wanna be our referee me and Minato are going to have a spar."


    She seems a little conflicted but she said.


    Kushina:" Ok sure."


    Then we start walking towards the training ground and as we arrive there Minato and I stay opposite of each other about 20 meters (65"7''), I give my ninken to Kushina then she says because I am not going to show them everything I know.


    Kushina:" BEGIN."

 Chapter 31 - Fight with Minato

    And Kushina immediately jumps back far away to view the battle and not interrupt.


    As soon as she does so Minato does a


    [Fire Style Fire Ball Jutsu] I then use


    [Earth Style Earth Wall] to block it but I immediately jump back because I sensed a shadow clone behind Minato and I am sure he was about to use a wind jutsu to power up his Fire Jutsu.


    But he doesn''t use the jutsu he just keeps looking at me then he smirks and says.


    Minato:" So you are a sensor ..."


    Me:" You are also a sensor right."


    Minato:" You are right I am a sensor ..."


    I think ''Yeah he is a sensor but from the manga I know he is the opposite of me, he is a long range sensor which can sense chakra further than me and more clearly from far away but from close the chakra sense is more turbulent and he has to concentrate to sense clearer up close.


    But I know in the anime he learned a technique to sense chakra nearby I don''t think he has learned that technique yet.''


    Then Minato comes to me in a Taijutsu fight up close and we are warming up fighting leisurely while talking. I still keep an eye on his clone also.


    Minato:" You knew when I sensed your chakra when we first met it was quite surprising seeing a kid yunger that me with more chakra, the only other person my age that has more chakra than me is Kushina."


    He is right Kushina has about the same amount of chakra as me maybe a little higher but I know that when she becomes a Jinchuriki she will leave me behind a lot by chakra amount after all being a jinchuriki on top of an Uzumaki you are asking for a monstrous amount of chakra.


    Anyway as we are fighting in Taijutsu I get serious as he is about to punch me I activate [Four Legged Technique] swipe his hand sideways and then swipe his legs under him and kick him in the stomach and he flies away. As he is flying away I see him do handsigns and I immediately jump backwards and as soon as I step in the ground I feel the ground moving I jump up and throw a kunai when a hand comes out of the earth and it pops in a smoke cloud that obscures my vision. I also sense that Minato''s chakra has disappeared but I can still smell him but he was somehow able to suppress his chakra.


    Then I smell him and kick behind me he blocks with a kunai pointed at my foot but I still kick him away, my sandals are after all ninja sandals with light metal inside the core of it.


    I just look at him and ask him.


    Me:" How were you able to suppress your chakra like that."


    He looks at me and smirks.


    Minato:" It was from a seal you will learn in the Intermediate Uzumaki Fuinjutsu book. But it has a drawback you can''t use ninjutsu while you have it on you."


    Minato:" How about you, how were able to find me."


    I just point towards my nose.


    Minato:" Ahhhh I see I didn''t take that in account I forgot about it."


    He then uses.


    [Lightning Style: Spider Net]


    And a lightning spider net starts spreading on the ground I jump back on a tree. Then Minato looks at me and throws a kunai. I see the kunai heading towards me then as I dodge the kunai, Minato apears from it he used ''Substitution'' with the kunai then I kick back immediately he positions his body mid air and dodges and still kicks me towards my face which I block with my hand. And throw him agains the tree hard but then it turns out it was a log and he is behind me with a kunai about to stab at me I immediately use substitution.


    He stabs the genjutsu on the log that looks like me lightly in the shoulder not to hurt me but then it poofs out and it turns onto a log.


    Then I am behind him with a Kunai at his neck.


    He puts his hands up and says.


    Minato:" I give up."


    I look at him smile and say.


    Me:" That was close if this was a real battle I am not sure I would have won."


    Not really because I didn''t have my dog and I didn''t really use my full strength.


    If this was a real battle he would have died in the first Taijutsu fight I would have thrown an explosive kunai at him when I kicked him away.


    But I am sure he also didn''t use his full power to try and kill me. And I am not going to get a big head just because I beat the 4th hokage when he was 9.


    Well me and Kushina have some laughs about our battle and how Minato was beaten by someone yunger than him. Minato just has a smile and says he didn''t summon toads in this fight or he would have won.


    We have some laughs about that and make jokes at each other.


    Well that is true but I don''t think he would be able to summon big toads like Gamabunta without having at least Jounin chakra.


    The Flying Thunder God technique is strong but what makes it overpowered is Minato. After all if you gave someone random the abbility to teleport to a kunai but he could teleport to a kunai and get a projectile in his scull thrown by a random ninja. Minato beat 1000 ninja like that and he didn''t do even the slightest mistake with it or he would have died.


    But I still won because I had a kunai at his throat and could have killed before he could react.


    (AUTHOR HERE:


    NEXT CHAPTER SOMETHING SPECIAL HAPPENS AND A TIME SKIP I COULDN''T PUT IT HERE AS A CLIFF SOOOO YEAH.)

 Chapter 32 - Time Passes... and Talent

    -Time Skip- (some months later Age 9)


    I am in the shower right now as I am thinking of what happened in the past months.


    In the war side of things Hiruzen and Sakumo were able to hold the 3rd Raikage back. Then of course Kumogakure (Cloud Village) was mysteriously attacked by ''Mist'' ninja


    which were actually Danzo''s Root they also died in that mission so Raikage had to return back to his Village. But the same plan won''t work again because now the 3rd Raikage left Blue B the current 8 tail Jinchuriki to defend Kumogakure.


    So now the Raikage is currently attacking towards land of Fire again he probably discovered they were from Konoha. But it will be a long time before he succeeds because now he doesn''t have the same momentum as before, because the Hokage and Sakumo are there to fight him. I haven''t been to the battlefield anymore because of me being the clan leader and using that as an excuse I don''t know how long that excuse will work but I will use it untill it doesn''t work anymore.


    Also I had my birthday I celebrated it by eating ramen with Kushina and Minato.


    I learned all the seals in the Basic Uzumaki Fuinjutsu and I am now in the in the Intermediate book which the introduction seal is the Paralysis Seal that is a B-rank, Supplementary Fuinjutsu technique.


    The user writes a seal on a scroll, or somthing comparable to a scroll, but the seal itself is a trap. As soon as a person looks upon this seal, the technique activates and sends the target into paralysis. This technique''s weakness is that the paralysis can only hold for a short period of time and so long as the target is looking at the seal; If the seal is removed from the target''s line of sigh, then the paralysis is broken; If a certain amount of time passes, the seal itself will collapse and release the target.


    Yeah Fuinjutsu is OP as hell, well the Uzumaki one anyway then the end of the book seal is The Chakra Draining Seal,


    the user places a seal on a person that will drain the latter''s chakra, so that the user can use it for themselves.


    Well I have almost finished the Intermediate book but I know that Kushina won''t teach me or Minato more than the Intermediate book because only the Uzumaki are allowed to learn the Advanced and Master books of Uzumaki Fuijutsu.


    Even though Minato still buys her ramen and hangs out with us while Kushina teaches me Fuijutsu. Poor guy he sucks at seducing a girl. Kushina has totally friend zoned him. I even saw him once reading a book on love or something like that about girls feelings etc.


    I then get out of the shower and go towards my room.


    I remember how shocked Kushina was when I learned


    Beginner Uzumaki Fuinjutsu in a month and a half. She called me a genius like her in Fuinjutsu.


    Minato learned it in 1 month she told me he would be a genius amongst geniuses even by the Uzumaki standards.


    I then open the door to my room wich has a no entry sign in it. I look inside my room and think.


    ''Genius huh.''


    There are pages with seals everywhere in walls, in the ground, in my tabble even in my bed... and 4 clones studying seals in there. I would like to think Minato also used this method also but at most he could make 1 to 3 shadow clones with his chakra when he was learning Fuinjutsu.


    I wear some clothes and go outside towards Ichiraku ramen. I haven''t been concentrating only on Fuinjutsu I also learned a lot of B rank wind jutsu using my sla... clan members which are special jounin to get me some of those jutsus for me because they are not full jounin they have only 1 element to chose from the jounin library. I had them bring me different Earth, Water, Fire and Wind Jutsus of B rank, the C rank ones I could get myself.


    I learned jutsus like


    [Earth Style: Iron Skin] it makes my skin stronger I think its a jutsu Kakuzu used.


    I also learned a lot of B rank jutsu like:


    Fire Style: Big Flame Bullet,


    Water Style: Water Trumpet,


    Wind Style: Pressure Damage,


    Wind Style: Vacuum Sphere that is like tubes of wind that cut you Danzo used that in the anime,


    Wind Style: Vacuum Wave etc...


    So I learned some B rank jutsu and a lot of C rank ones so my power rose a lot these last few months. Yeah I am now Yami of the 1001 jutsu or something like that I still think that Red Fang wasn''t the best name for me. Well no use crying over spilled milk.


    By the way I didn''t learn any lightning justsu because my element is Wind and Lightning is kind of its oposite different affinities have some type of other affinity that ist their opposite amd its hard to learn it and it uses way more chakra then normal. For example Kakashi with a lightning element he knew a lot of jutsu but I never remember him using a Wind Style jutsu.


    Or Hiruzen the Professor I belive he has Fire affinity it is said he knows all jutsu in konoha but I never remember him useing water jutsu in the anime.


    Anyway I see the ramen stand there with Kushina like usual already there but this time she was eating alone and from what I noticed she seems to be crying.


    Then I sense her chakra and I am surprised....

 Chapter 33 - A Look Into The Past

    When I sense her chakra I am surprised this... this is the highest chakra amount that I have ever sensed she probably became a jinchuriki already and that is just her chakra amplified by the jinchuriki ritual not when she releases the Kyubi and as her friend I go close to her and touch her shoulder and she turns around to look at me with tears in her eyes. I then make a worried face and tell her.


    Me:" Hey Kushina why are you crying."


    She then starts crying more and says.


    Kushina:" G -G -Grandma Mito is dead."


    Tears keep falling from her eyes like a waterfall.


    So I just give her a hug and say.


    Me:" It''s ok, you have me here and I think that Mito -sama would want you to be happy and not be sad. After all I think that she still lives."


    I point towards her heart and say.


    Me:" Right here."


    She then looks at me rubs her tears and snot away with her sleves and says.


    Kushina:" You are right."


    I see her blushing. Ehhhh I gues she now has a crush on me. Well this could get my plans to advance faster I really want those Fuijutsu books and I don''t really care about the anime canon timeline sience I have plan A,B and C on how to be able to beat Kaguya. Sasuke and Naruto now are my plan D on how to deal with Kaguya.


    Anyway I don''t really care about the story as long as I get what I want.


    If the story goes canon its ok if Naruto or Sasuke aren''t born I don''t really care that much either.


    But there is also that I don''t really like kids in that way, I am into grown women, and a.d.u.l.t Kushina isn''t the kind of girl I would keep more than a week just so I could have s.e.x with her and I know I would get bored of her pretty fast because she has an overbearing, violent and nosy personality.


    I mean the only think she has going on is her pretty and exotic appearance, her personality is not really complex or unexpected for it to be interesting plus she doesn''t have a scheming or super intelligent mind to be interesting or amusing to me.


    She could be hiding all that and I will be in guard anyway but that is my assumption of her. Plus I don''t care about love the only thing I care is IMMORTALITY.


    Than after some talking me and her for a couple of minutes Minato arrives and comes towards us and his face is normal when he sees Kushina I guess he sensed the changes in her from far away even better than he can now probably.


    He then greets us and we have a small chat Kushina explains what happens to her and Minato consoles her but it doesn''t have the same impact as my speech did. But she was grateful and happy to have someone else to relay on.


    I still keep my head in the book about Intermediate Seals and while I am memorizing some of them I think back to my first life and the first death I experienced I still remember that day so clearly.


    I was in my room reading a school book, specifically it was the biology book.


    Then I hear my father say.


    Father:" Hey Andy wana come fishing with me."


    He loves fishing he grew up in a fishing village and now he goes fishing for old times sake and he loves fishing.


    I also like it a bit becuse when we get bored of it we go for a swim in the lake.


    But I still have homework and a lot to learn I want to be a doctor.


    I want to go to medical school like my mom.


    She has a medical degree but she doesn''t work because father works as the head menager at a close by big store and has a good and big wage. When I was younger we used to have money problems because I always got sick all of the time but not anymore we even have a nice house now.


    And our family has a new 4 year old kid to take care of and my mother is very protective of us she won''t let any nanny take care of her little baby boy she doesn''t trust them.


    Father:" Heyyyyyy Andy did you hear me I said do you want to come fishing with me."


    He than pauses a little bit and then says to me.


    Father:" When I didn''t hear you answer I thought you were masterbating or something... you know.. nothing to be ashamed of I used to do it too when I was your age."


    I then turn away from my book and look at him, smirk and say.


    Me:" Yeah, used to old man couse your thing doesn''t work anymore."


    He than looks at me and says.


    Father:" You don''t know brat but when I was yung I had a lot of girlfriends. I even once had 3 at a time... untill they discovered each other and I moved out of town then..."


    Me:*Sigh*" You have already told me that story 100 times... but I still won''t believe it until you say it infront of mom. Maybe I should tell her that."


    He looks at me, smirks and says.


    Father:" Yeah tell her that and I will tell everyone about that girl you have a crush on... What was her name again Ema no no, was it Elisssa no that''s not it, aha I remember now her name is Elizabeth."


    I than get a blush why did I ask love advice from him.... I then tell him.


    Me:" Ahhhhhhh.... old man you are annoying as hell and I won''t be coming to fish because I am going to finish a school project I have."


    Father:" Sure, sure lover boy."


    Ahhh that was embarrassing. Well it doesn''t really matter he probably won''t tell anyone.... ok maybe he will... oh yeah he will definitely tell that to someone as a joke.


    -Time Skip- (2 weeks later)


    My father has been mising for 2 weeks now sience his fishing trip.


    The day after he went missing there was a big storm. We were really worried.


    My mother sent me to my cousins for a little to get my mind of things.


    I was currently sitting in a car returning home, with my cousin driving when he says.


    Cousin:" Do you have your fathers ID."


    Me:" Yeah."


    I keep that because I am going to return it to him, cause he forgot his wallet that day.


    He then looks at me sadly with almost tears that I back then didn''t notice and he says.


    Cousin:" Then you should keep it safe."


    I smiled a little and was happy when he said that. So he was probably cought by the police for getting pushed away by the storm to the restricted no fishing area that is where his boat was found.


    Then we get in my neighbourhood and stop in front of my one story house and I notice there were cars parked all along our neighbourhood roeads, more than usual... actually way more than usual.


    Then we stop in front of my house well not exactly there, we stoped next to my house where a gigantic tent was put up at the used to be flat ground. I know that land is owned by one of our relatives but he is an old man and he doesn''t do anything with it. But then I see people in black funeral clothes and think.


    ''Huh someone must have died.''


    Then I see my 1st uncle crying which I didn''t notice back then coming outside.


    Me:" Hey good morning uncle."


    He doesn''t say anything and just grabs me by the arm and says.


    Uncle:" You have to say your goodbyes to him."


    My brain was working in full capacity to figure out what is happening and it does so before my eyes look at the body layed in the middle of the tent in a coffin with my mother crying in a chair at the side of the tent and a lot of people doing the same. After all the person in it was very loved by this community he always helped people and was fun to be around.


    I then hyperventilate when I see the person in it tears won''t stop coming from my eyes.


    Me:"*Heavy brathing* AHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH."

 Chapter 34 - Monsters arent Born... They are Made

    -Flashback End-


    Was that the first time I became obsessed with immortality?... I don''t think so.. it wasn''t then... That was just the beginning of my fall into madness and the beginning of my story?... nah calling it a tragedy would fit better.


    After all monsters aren''t born they are made.... I used to think that I was cursed or something because of how bad my life was going. I really loved my father and my first family, I would give my life for them. I wouldn''t care if the whole world was destroyed as long as they lived. THAT IS WHY I WON''T BETRAY THEIR MEMORY BY LOVING ANOTHER FAMILY IN A WORLD OF KILLERS, THAT IS LIKE SPITTING IN THEIR FACES AND THEIR MEMORY....


    The people who would do that don''t really love their real families, now do they.. they just want a perfect family in another world to feel better. A family is not about being perfect it''s about being... just a normal arguing, making up, loving, supportive, shoulder to cry on, accepting family.


    I remember sience that tragic day I didn''t want to ever be unprepared or cought of guard about something. Even later in my life when my little brother was late to coming back from school I was thinking the worst when my mother was a little late from work because of trafic I was thinking of what might have happened to her and made 100 plans on how to react against a situation. I didn''t like thinking of something bad happening to them it hurt just to think like that, but I also didn''t want to be unprepared or cought of guard about something.


    I also became really worried, controlling and protective of them.


    I was noticing myself falling into madness but I hid it really well, we didn''t really have the money for a therapist and we even had to sell our


    old home and move away so mom could find a job... I..I...I really miss them... my family that was the only thing that mattered to me, they were my pillar from my corroding mental health.


    But I don''t have them now and they are safer in the other world and have a good life which will be be better after my death when they get the life insurance money...


    But I guess this is a story for another time... the story of how a monster was made and... a story untill its death.... which is followed by a new life.


    SO NOW IN THIS SECOND LIFE I WILL FOLLOW MY DREAM WITHOUT REST.


    .....Yes I am truly self aware I am considered a psychopath by the normal person....


    Then I come back into reality Minato and Kushina were eating ramen now.


    She looks towards me makes a small smile and says.


    Kushina:" Hey Yami why are you making such a face come and eat some ramen it''s really good the new miso ramen Teuichi makes is a heavenly food.... Plus Minato said he is paying."


    Minato chokes and coughs while eating ramen when Kushina said that. She really got him wrapped around her finger.


    I just smile towards her and say.


    Me:" Well who am I to refuse my best friends request."


    Kushina then immediately stutters a little and blushes and says.


    Kushina:" R -R -Relly are we really friends."


    ''Of course we are not Kushina'' - I thought.


    Me:" Of course we are not just normal friends Kushina... me, you and Minato we are best friends right?."


    She just shyly nods.


    Then after some chit chat I learn from Kushina that Mito''s granddaughter is coming to vizit her grave to pay respects and to get to know her successor, Kushina a little better.


    Well by her granddaughter she probably means Tsunade, so she will be coming to visit huh. Well then I beter prepare for it.


    - TIme Skip- (3 weeks later)


    Well then it has been made public that one of the sanin is returning to konoha to protect it in this time of war while the Hokage is fighting the Raikage.


    Well there are probably other reasons for her visit exept what the public knows, she is here to visit Mito''s graveyard, and to help at the hospital probably... now that we aren''t at war with suna anymore we need Tsunade to to help ninja especially jounin heal faster and more correctly so they can return to the battlefield faster and she might even to be able to heal some crippled ninja.


    The end of the war with suna has freed 2 out of our most valuable ninja: Tsunade and Sakumo to help other borders.


    Well anyways during this 3 weeks I also was productive I made more experiments on the Inuzuka clan eight special jounin this time and also my first test subject Akimaru they all became low level jounin they just need to get used to their bodies and chakra now.


    But I also noticed a side effect because Akimaru needed more boosts to become a jounin from a chunin while the other test subjects were special jounin. I noticed some of his hair starting to gray after that I did no more ''treatments'' on him I didn''t want people to notice and I also did more ''treatments'' on him than the others.


    After all the 8th gate is no joke even when slightly punctured he probably has around 20 years left of lifespan lefy and he is only 19 right now.


    Well anyways more importantly the Inuzuka now has 9 new jounin level ninja, even though right now they are low leveled untill they get a better handle on thair bodies.


    Then they will become average jounin or some might even become high jounin level.


    Right now I am in the front of the village gate waiting for Tsunade to show up, after all if I didn''t welcome her it might seem suspicious.


    Then after some time I notice a ninja land on a tree in front of me.... it is Tsunade Senju one of the Sanin she then looks at me. Then she.....

 Chapter 35 - Tsunade Senju

    (AUTHOR NOTE: YESTERDAY''S CHAPTER DIDN''T LOAD FOR SOME PEOPLE MYSELF INCLUDED I DON''T KNOW WHY YOU CAN READ THE CHAPTER FROM GOOGLE JUST SEARCH WEBNOVEL DREAM TO IMMORTALITY)


    The first thing I notice is the rhombus shaped seal in her forhead.


    She just looks at me, jumps towards me and hughs me. I must say her b.r.e.a.s.ts are definitely big I can feel them even under the konoha jounin armor.


    She then starts tearing up and says.


    Tsunade:" Yami .. Yami I am sorry for letting you bear that burden... it was all my fault I shouldn''t have let you stay in the battlefield."


    I am surprised why is she blaming herself.... aha I get it now the lie I told about me learning medical ninjutsu to not let my comrades die. I then sob a little and say.


    Me: *sob* " I am sorry Tsunade -sensei I couldn''t protect them." *sob*


    This was unexpected.


    Then she takes my head into her hands and says.


    Tsunade:" It wasn''t your fault... I promise I will protect you from now on.... in their memory."


    Ok -Ok this just took an unpredictable turn. I need to readjust my schemes a little then.


    Then after some heart felt reunion Tsunade goes to her grandmother''s grave and pays her respects then she is going to the Sarutobi twins clan to pay respects I tell her that I can''t go because I am not ready to face the guilt of my actions and that I will go when I am ready. In reality it''s just going to be a waste of time. Currently I need all the time I can get to become stronger after all there is a war going on.


    I then go home to my lab... I think I need to go to the battlefields to get more test subjects after all I can''t really take konoha citizens because now that we are at war and a citizen goes missing they are definitely going to investigate and I am not strong yet to live freely outside of konoha.


    I then draw seals all around my lab to not let anyone come inside and if people try to use force it will self destroy the lab of course I have taken care of all the evidence in the lab but you can never be to sure. By the way I also burned the heads of the 3 sand jounin I had in my cool box I don''t really need the money because I have a small fortune.... now there is no evidence left of what really happened that day from the peace meeting with suna.


    -Time Skip- ( Tomorrow )


    Tsunade has finished paying respects, now she is emotionally calmer than yesterday and finished all her work for today also. So there she is sitting in my backyard laying down in the grass in casual clothing: a short white kimono and black gym short pants


    she just looks at me and says.


    Tsunade:" You know we are at war and I might die one day.... So I want you to be my successor."


    I look at her... this was within expectation... so the sanin already had the emotional talk about successors.


    She then says.


    Tsunade:" Do you know my trick to my massive strength."


    Yes I do from the anime but I will act like I don''t. I make a thinking pose and say.


    Me:" Well I guess it is kind of like the tree walking exercise where you put to much chakra in your leg and the place in the tree explodes."


    Tsunade:" You are right it is kind of like that but..."


    She gets up and punches the air I felt something weird then she says.


    Tsunade:" I did use my technique right now but nothing happened to the air like a current or small explosion."


    Aha I see so that is how it woks I get it now.


    I smirk towards her and say.


    Me:" I think your technique has 3 parts to it...


    1- When you punch, it uses chakra control to strengthen your self so that means you aren''t using the only the chakra explosion but also chakra strengthening.


    2- You also cause a ripple effect when you punch to spread your explosion and make higher widespread damage and the chakra explosion is unnoticeable.


    3- You also use some chakra to protect your limb from getting completely crushed from the pressure on it."


    ''Her eyes widened to be able to tell this much just from close to no hints is a genius at observation almost like the sharingan.'' That is what you are thinking isn''t it Tsunade-sensei.


    When I explain the process like that it sounds simple but it is nowhere near as simple as it sounds.


    To do even half of that requires extreme... no perfect chakra controll and she can use it in all her limbs.


    In the anime there were people who said Sakura could surpass Tsunade.


    That is absolute madness Tsunade had the talent to come up with such a strengthening technique plus even though she is a medic ninja and has perfect chakra control, her chakra amount is not small after all she is part senju and uzumaki to get this kind of chakra controll with her almost S rank chakra amount is nothing but a monstrous feat. She can even crush rocks with only her natural muscular strength. Her Stamina is also monstrous she fought with Madara for a whole day and could still after the battle and getting cut in two mass heal the shinobi alliance.


    The Tsunade we see in the anime is a woman in her mid 50s who spent the last couple of decades drinking and gambling and doing 0 amount of training.


    Anyaway I look at her, she also just looks at me with her widened eyes and says.


    Tsunade:" Are you sure you are not an Uchiha in disguise or something."


    I have a small laugh and say.


    Me:" I wish I was Tsunade -sensei, that would make learning things so much easier but alas some things just aren''t meant to be."


    Tsunade: *sigh* " There was no need for such a long answer you talk like an old man."


    I just smirk and jokingly say.


    Me:" And you like an old hag."


    Then a tic mark apeard in her forehead she frowns and then says while cracking her fingers.


    Tsunade:" Careful lately you are getting cheeky Yami."


    I then ...

 Chapter 36 - Tsunade has Gotten Stronger

    I then... stop smiling and look at her with cold eyes...


    I then immediately bow down and say.


    Me:" Sorry Tsunade -sensei you are the most beautiful, gentle, strongest konuichi in the world and I would never get cheeky with you."


    She just looks at me smiles, comes towards me and pets my head gently then suddenly she squeezes my skull.


    Me:" Aw Aw Aw Tsunade -sensei why."


    Tsunade:" You should stop acting so ridiculous."


    Then she lets go of my head. Wow what monstrous strength. But anyway that was so I could lighten the mood a bit.


    And I need them to think this is my way of dealing with depression after all every ninja has their own way of doing it, that is why most elite ninja have a quirky personality.


    Me:" Ok now ... sooo Tsunade-sensei what will you teach me."


    She then looks at me and says.


    Tsunade:" Ok I just need you to sit in a meditative position."


    Me:" Ok."


    Then I do so and then she does the same.


    The then takes a bottle of inkand a brush from her kimono. Then she says.


    Tsunade:" Take off your headband. By the way what color is your favourite?"


    I do so then I look at her seriously and say.


    Me:" Well I don''t care eather way but I like the colour red."


    She just looks at me and says.


    Tsunade:" That was a rhetorical question I only have black ink right now."


    I look weirdly at her and say.


    Me:" Why would you even ask that if you only have black ink, and by the way that was not a rhetorical question."


    She looks at me and raises her eyebrow and says.


    Tsunade:" If you hate the black ink so much go and buy your own coloured ink."


    Me: *sigh* " Can we just go on with this now I don''t care either way."


    Tsunade: *EXHALE* " What a disappointing disciple, I always said you should have patience my pupil. Especially now because having patience is the key of this technique I am about to teach you."


    I look at her and say. Hmmmm How should I have some fun while she is dodging the answer I want. Then I come up with an idea.


    Me:" Why are you acting like a wise teacher all of a suden."


    Then I look at her make a serious face and say, while secretly preparing to use Substitution.


    Me:" Do you want to have a forbidden relationship with me or something."


    Tsunade then stops in shock and is frozen in place but I just continue.


    Me:" I understand you want to have the forbidden fruit. After all the forbidden is more exciting and tastier."


    Then I still ramble on while Tsunade is still in shock and say.


    Me: *blush* " I -I -I am also okay with this Tsunade -sensei, a -after all if I am going in the battlefield I also want to try the forbidden fruit don''t worry I won''t tell anyone about this I will take this to the grave."


    Me:" This can be our little secret."


    As soon as I say that she gets an enraged face and punches me in the face while saying.


    Tsunade:" I SAID DON''T BE SO SC.U.MMY YOU BRAT."


    Then my figure crashes into a tree.


    After the dust clears out there is a log where I was supposed to be.


    Then I come out from behind a tree and say.


    Me:" Ahhhhh Tsunade -sensei if only you were 10 years younger I like strong willed women like you."


    She then looks even more pissed and says.


    Tsunade:" What''s that supposed to mean brat that I am too old or something."


    It''s so easy controling the flow of the conversation after you know someone as well as I do Tsunade, from both the anime and in reality, I should have become a politician in my last life.


    I then make a tragic face and say.


    Me:" Tsunade sensei it''s quite hard for me to say this but I must say it...


    If you wanna go on a date we should do it after training."


    Tsunade then sighs and looks at me calmly.


    ''Oho so she noticed I was leading her by the nose, how admirable she calmed down.''


    She just looks at me and says.


    Tsunade:" You know kid you would make a great hokage with your way of getting into people''s heads and politicking."


    I then shrug my shoulders and say.


    Me: *sigh* " There you go again with the complements. You must have fallen really hard for me sensei for you to tell me I can be the greatest hokage."


    Tsunade: *sigh* " You do know I have a boyfriend right."


    She smirks a little.


    She probably expected me to be distraught or at least back away but I am just having some fun.


    I just make a normal face and say in a completely uninterested voice.


    Me:" Oh is that so... When is our date going to be again."


    Tsunade: *sigh* "You know you are really shameless."


    Then I make a serious face and say.


    Me:" So what are you going to tech me Tsunade."


    She notices I didn''t use the sensei term but she doesn''t say anything.


    Phase 1 of the plan to get Flying Thunder God BEGINS NOW.


    Tsunade:" You know before we fought with Hanzo I think I had a subconscious arrogance... I don''t know when it started but I stoped improving...


    Then I thought back on a special seal that grandma Mito used to siphon the leaking unused chakra of a certain being sealed in her and was able to use it for herself... I know you are going to ask, but no I can''t tell you what it was.


    It''s an S rank secret."


    She is probably talking about the Kyuubi.


    Tsunade:" I then thought why can''t I use this seal to siphon my chakra when I am not doing anything to get some of that stored up that I don''t use."


    Well this an obvious but smart idea of her.


    Tsunade:" It was quite hard I had to learn my grand uncle''s mind palace technique that he got from the Yamaka''s


    and then make a place for the chakra and all that it took me 6 months to fill this seal while holding the chakra control even while sleeping and fighting and it was hard to find the specific amount of chakra siphoning because I could get tired fast or suffer chakra exhaustion. Ahhhh it used to be so hard but now it has becone an automatic proces."


    Then she makes a angry face and says.


    Tsunade: "If I fought Hanzo now well... he would be in for a big surprise."


    Then she smiles and says.


    Tsunade: " The selfmade technique I will teach you, the technique that has made me the strongest Sanin at the moment is named .....

 Chapter 37 - The Date

    Tsunade: " The selfmade technique I will teach you, the technique that has made me the strongest Sanin at the moment is named Creation Rebirth."


    Then she starts explaining how it works and how forces cell division and the risk it has of using your lifespan to work.


    Yeeeeaaaah I am not using that technique, unless I am at deaths door


    which I won''t be cause I would sacrifice everyone around me to not use even an ounce of lifespan that sounds like a better deal to me.


    I also would reather use Kabuto''s [Yin Healing Wound Destruction] which the user analyses an opponent''s facial expression, movements, and the properties of their jutsu to anticipate where and how he will be attacked. He then gathers chakra to the area of his body where the attack will strike, preemptively starting medical treatment in order to minimise the damage he''ll receive. The more extensive the damage, the more chakra it takes to heal; the damage from Rasengan is so great that Kabuto lacks enough chakra to fully recover.


    But I will be able to pass that weakness with Tsunade''s seal.


    Kabuto''s healing technique is really like a miracle it uses the ability to activate and reproduce cells with chakra to heal, of course it''s harder to use than Tsunade''s but for a healing technique it''s in the same category in healing speed with Creation Rebirth. Of course we are not comparing it with [Ninja Art Creation Rebirth ¡ª Strength of a Hundred Technique] that makes you pretty much immortal in the battlefield. I don''t think Tsunade has developed that yet. It''s true that the Creation Rebirth helps you regenerate withought handsign and heals you from kunai cuts or sword stabs... But [Ninja Art Creation Rebirth ¡ª Strength of a Hundred Technique] you could get stabed by susanoo sword and you will regenerate quickly, you get cut in half and you will still survive but it cuts down heavily in lifespan.


    Then Tsunade explains


    to me some minor details and gives me the scroll to learn how to make a mind palace wich is pretty much a construct in your mind, all kind of constructs can be made there, after all it is your mind, but it has a limit of course. But it helps to counteract mind reading for a while.


    For example you can protect memories from someone by you build a door surrounded by chains to keep memories safe... but there is also the limitation that you can''t cuild something like a door that is indestructible and that doesn''t open.


    Anyway this is really useful to me.


    -Time Skip- (one month later)


    Well I advanced a lot during this last month I mastered the Intermediate Uzumaki Fuinjutsu book and I now don''t see Kushina or Minato too much and I use the excuse of me being busy with Tsunade -senseis training. They are not really useful to me at the moment... of course I am not going to ostracise them I am just using my time better.


    I also learned the Creatin Rebirth seal I now have a diamond shaped tattoo in my forehead and I am really low on chakra reserves right now at almost all times. I have used that to my advantage and learned quite fast, in only one weak Tsunade''s Super Strength technique, and I must say it is really powerful.


    I will probably have to keep the controll for up to 5 months to construct my seal in my forehead.


    I also have in the backyard of my horror castle, built the place where my extra chakra will stay.


    By the way, today Tsunade -sensei is treating me to lunch for learning her super strength technique.


    As I am going to the expnsive restaurant where we are going I think about my plans and schemes.


    Ahhhh I have soooo many Techniques I want to learn but I don''t have the time to.


    I could ''create'' the rasengan jutsu or learn Summoning jutsu, or experiment on my Clan members. I have soooo much I want to do but I have so little time.


    I then keep thinking about my plan to make Kushina give me the advanced and master scrolls of Uzumaki Fuinjutsu. But I need to wait a little more for the opportunity to present itself and for everything to be in place.


    I keep supplying 80% of my chakra to the seal everyday. But I don''t have Tsunade''s chakra amount who was able to do it in 6 months in the middle of the battlefield where chakra usage was at max everyday.


    With this pace I have I should be done in 5 months. Pretty much the same as Tsunade -sensei but I am in the village and don''t have to fight and waste chakra everyday.


    Then I arrive at the restaurant open the door and I see Tsunade in a table waiting for me.


    I then have a genious idea. I smirk go outside again and make a shadow clone. Ok for today I can''t make anymore shadow clones, but if this works it will deffinatly be worth it.


    Then I go towards Tsunade sit down order my food, then smirk at her and say.


    Me:" Well hello there beautiful."


    She just looks at me bored playing with her drink with a straw and says.


    Tsunade:" Where did you read that in some cheesy ''How to pick up Girls'' book."


    I still keep smiling and say.


    Me:" There it goes again my hard work doesn''t pay off."


    She then smirks herself and says.


    Tsunade:" Yeah sometimes it really doesn''t pay off."


    Me:" What is bothering you Sensei."


    She then sighs and rubs her forehead and says.


    Tsunade: *sigh* " It''s nothing really just the usual, my ideas getting refused and all that."


    I then make a smile and say.


    Me:" Ok then tell me the idea."


    Then she looks unsure and says.


    Tsunade:" Well....."


    She then starts explaining of having a medic ninja in the squad will help increase the survivability. The least she is asking is to have someone with medical knowledge on the team.


    I just smiled and noded seriously.


    Then suddenly an old woman comes to our table and says.


    ???:" Well hello there yunglings. I can see that you are on a date together.


    Ahhhh how romantic it reminds me when I was yunger.


    You are simply made for each other by the way young lass you should nail him down and keep him. Cute guys like him are keepers."


    Then.....

 Chapter 38 - Dinner with Tsunade

    Tsunade looks at the old woman and tells her.


    Tsunade:" Hey old grandma you need to check your eyes they might be deceiving you at your age."


    Then the old woman gets close to Tsunade and wispers just so Tsunade can hear of course I was a ninja and an Inuzuka on top of it so of course I heard it also.


    ???: *whisper* " Aha I understand now you don''t want him to know yet. Don''t worry at my age I know those things I know that you like him and I am sure he likes you, after all if he didn''t he wouldn''t have come in a date with you."


    Tsunade then sighs and massages her forehead in frustration. Then she says.


    Tsunade:" You know you are a really meddling hag."


    Then the old woman looks sad and just says.


    ???:" Ahhh the youngsters these days have no respect. When I was young I also fell in love with a younger man but I didn''t pursue... and I have been miserable sience then."


    She then tuches Tsunade''s shoulder and Tsunade almost punches her out of instinct. Wow she is really on edge from being in the battlefield for se long.


    Then the old woman says.


    ???:" When I saw you I didn''t want you to end up like me."


    Tsunade:" Yeah, yeah whatever you say old hag."


    Then the old woman smiles and and walks away while saying.


    ???:" Remember my words young lady even though you dismiss them so quickly. When the time comes always follow your heart."


    Then the old woman goes outside


    -OLD WOMAN POV-


    ???:" Mam you left without ordering anything did any waiter upset you."


    I then smile and say


    Old Woman:" Ah no, no I just went to the wrong place to meet my grandson."


    Then the waitress looks worried and says.


    ???:" Do you want me to help you find him or anything."


    Old Woman:" No I know where he is don''t worry young lady."


    Then she waves and I go in an ally and undo my transformation and then a young boy with Inuzuka tattoos comes out of the transformation and dispels himself. Proving that he is a shadow clone.


    -OLD WOMAN POV END-


    -MC POV-


    Then Tsunde looks at me. I look back at her with a serious face and say.


    Me:" I think you should listen to her Tsunade."


    She then gets angry immediately and says.


    Tsunade:" You know you are becoming more annoying each day."


    I then smirk and say.


    Me:" And you love it right."


    Tsunade then sighs and then after some more small talk the food comes when we are eating I can''t help but stare at her c.h.e.s.t when she doesn''t notice.


    I then keep thinking how did she get from a flat c.h.e.s.t from her childhood to this 106 cm (3"4'') c.h.e.s.t.


    I am quite curious does she store the chakra from the 100 Strength Seal in her c.h.e.s.t and Sakura in her forehead is that why Tsunade has such a big rack and Sakura such a big forehead.


    Anyway as me and Tsunade are eating we make some small talk and I ask her.


    Me:" Tsunade -sensei are you going to go to the battlefield soon."


    She just looks at me and says.


    Tsunade:" No not really, I am going to be here for at least 3 months."


    I smile at her and say.


    Me:" That''s good we have a lot of time to catch up."


    Tsunade looks at me suspiciously like I am planning something and says.


    Tsunade:" What''s that supposed to mean kid, I dont know whether you want to spend time with your beautiful teacher or are you scheming something."


    Me: *sigh* " Can''t a student miss his teacher. Why are you so suspicious."


    ''But I do want to learn all your clan has to offer.''


    Tsunade then looks at me and says.


    Tsunade:" Maybe because you are trying to seduce your own teacher."


    I then tell her in a ridiculous poetic voice.


    Me:" What no, no I am not going to seduce you.... I am going to make you fall in love. And we are already on our first date so I am very effective."


    She then she finishes her chiken b.r.e.a.s.t and looks at me and says.


    Tsunade: *sigh* " Ok then I will humor you brat. Kid you are young... you don''t know what love is. You don''t even know anything about me."


    Oh I beg to differ Tsunade I even know your future.


    I smile at her and say.


    Me:" Well we could get to know eachother that is what dates are for."


    Tsunade:" No what dates are for is a.d.u.l.ts. Not 9 year old kids who just had their first crush."


    I then look at her and say.


    Me:" Ahhhh the cruel sensei as always, what did I do to deserve this."


    Then I turn serious with a light smile and say.


    Me:" Well anyway the best moment to learn about eachother is in a date so Tsunade -sensei how are your pets doing."


    I make a handsigns for battle. As what I am actually asking is how are the frontlines. Tsunade catches on to this after all the war info I have as a chunin is minimal. I do have quite some info as the clan head but it''s most patrolls from my clan in the land of fire. This is the best place to ask after all it is forbidden for ninja to say stuff about the war situation as it might discourage some soon to be canon fodder.


    Tsunade:" Well they are good but sometimes when I go to sleep they bark at the window sometimes even at the door."


    (Meaning) ''So we are getting attacked by all sides exept sand as we have peace with them.''


    Me:" Ah so they seem quite scary. I shouldn''t vizit for some time."


    (Meaning)''I shouldn''t go to the battlefields at the moment as they are dangerous.''


    Tsunade:" Yeah they have been quite angry lately the only way to calm them is by letting them swim in the pond, in my backyard."


    (Meaning) ''Yes they are but amongst them the land of water battlefield is the calmest.''


    I then just shrug and say.


    Me: *sigh* " Well some dogs have their own quirks like some like light and some like to play in the mud."


    (Meaning)''So which one of the battlefields is the most dangerous.''


    Tsunade:" Well they hate the lights in the house cause we have them so bright I am going to have someone to fix them."


    (Meaning)'' The land of lighting is the most dangerous because they have the Raikage in the front lines, but we also have someone holding him back.''


    Me:" What about them playing in the yard outside like normal animals in the dirt."


    She then smiles and says.


    Tsunade:" Well yeah they play happily in there but do you know something interesting, sometimes I see a squirrel just sitting in the fence watching the dogs."


    My eyes widen at what she just said.


    (Meaning) ''There have been rumours from our spies that The Fence Sitter Onoki is going to join the battlefield.''


    Me:" Aha ok then, by the way I can come fix your pond to make it more pleasant for the dogs."


    (Meaning) ''Is it good to go to the mist battlefield''


    Then I make a flirtatious face and continue.


    Me:" Maybe you could join me for a swim."


    (Meaning) ''Are you going to be there.''


    She just looks at me while drinking a cup of sake and says.


    Tsunade:" Well I will just be watching from far. If I want to go swim I will go alone."


    (Meaning) '' Yes I will be there but I will be healing and hitting the important points alone. Don''t worry though I will keep an eye on you.''


    Then I smile and say.


    Me:" Oh if you will be looking at me swimming then I must visit your pond."


    (Meaning) ''Well if you are there I will feel much safer.''


    She then makes a mocking smile and says.


    Tsunade:" Yeah but I hope you know how to swim and don''t drown."


    (Meaning) ''Why would you take a risk to go there you might die.''


    Then I answer seriously.


    Me:"Don''t worry I am an amazing swimmer. And well... I want to help your dogs. And I am an Inuzuka I will help any dog in need."


    (Meaning) ''Don''t worry about me I can take care of myself.


    I want to help konoha lessen the number of casualties. And I will help any Konoha ninja.''


    Tsunade:" Yeah but why would you go through all that work you know that I won''t pay you right."


    (Meaning) Yeah but, you know you are not going to get paid for your efforts.''


    Then I make a face, fold my arms and say.


    Me:" Stingy Tsunade.... but I don''t need pay I just want every dog in konoha to know my power and awesomeness."


    (Meaning) '' I don''t care about money I just want everyone to know of my power and reputation.''


    Tsunade then looks anxious as if she knows what I will say next but she asks anyway with a shadowed face.


    Tsunade:" And why would that be useful in any way."


    (Meaning) ''And why would you go through all that trouble.''


    I then smile and say to an anxious Tsunade.


    Me:" Well of course I want to become their leader."


    Then Tsunade breaks the sake cup in her hand.

 Chapter 39 - Dream to be Hokage

    I then smile and say to an anxious Tsunade.


    Me:" Well of course I want to become their leader."


    Then Tsunade breaks the sake cup in her hand. Then she angrily stands, bangs on the table and says.


    Tsunade:" Are you kidding me brat, you think that it''s that easy to become hokage, that you can just waltz up and say that. Squirts like you always die young."


    Well then we just broke any secrecy we had. And some people are even looking towards us. I then just smile and tell her.


    Me:" Of course Tsunade, who will fulfil your ideas if not your lovely student."


    Then she looks angry and sad at the same time and then just gets up from the table, walks away and gets out of the restaurant.


    I just look at her back and think.


    Well she got angrier than expected, I guess I reminded her to much of her brother. Well anyway my plan didn''t go to much of rails. But I don''t like surprises so I will just have to make my plans more efficient next time.


    Then the waitress comes and I pay .....


    What an expensive meal holy sh*t Tsunade might be way richer than I thought just one meal cost 30000 ryo, that is crazy. I know the food is really good and all that and most of the customers here are nobles that come to visit Konoha but still, this expensive are you kidding me.


    That is like around 3000$ for a meal for two. Anyway I go home and go to sleep after taking a shower.


    -Time Skip- (1 month later)


    Well Tsunade didn''t talk to me for 3 days after that encounter and even then we didn''t talk about it anymore.


    I mean Dan probably already expressed his wish to be hokage. But she thinks that he is an a.d.u.l.t and Tsunade probably thinks he has the power to survive having that dream. Huuum also Asuntori''s death might have made her become more against the types of kids wanting to be hokage... I mean both him and Nawaki died. She might think it''s my turn.


    This month I was learning Rasengan and I almost have it mastered, I believe this week I will master it.


    It took me so long cause I don''t make shadow clones to master it faster and


    I am learning to make it with one hand, I also didn''t have anything new to do after I wasted almost all my chakra, so I just started making explosive tags and different seals for when I go to the battlefield.


    My and Tsunade''s relationship hasn''t developed any more... but I don''t regret what I said in the restaurant. I need her to take me seriously like an a.d.u.l.t, sure that won''t make her see me as an a.d.u.l.t immediately, but you know what they say the 1000 mile journey starts with the first step.


    The Rasengan is the first A rank jusu I will learn. Tsunade has offered me to give me the summoning contract for Katsyu but I refused. I know Katsyu is a top rank summoning but I don''t think she is the right for me, sure I would get a gigantic summoning and be able to fight stronger opponents. She is also able to heal others, but I don''t really care to heal others, what I want is a stronger summoning that can help me in the fight even against something like perfect sausano.


    Obviously not to fight with the perfect susano directly but give me support.


    I want the kind of summoning that even to someone with end game Naruto power, it will be useful to them.


    -Time Skip- (1 month latter)


    Tsunade is trying to convince me to not become hokage by saying stuff like all the paperwork I will have to do, long meetings and all that.


    But she doesn''t understand me, imagine all the forbidden techniques you will be able to learn without sneaking around.


    By the way my stealth is way better than academy Naruto.... but I am 99% sure that it isn''t that easy to take a forbidden scroll. It has to be harder, Naruto made it look so easy. If it was so easy everyone would know those techniques and every spy would give his life to get them.


    Did an Uzumaki make the security seals around it and allowed people with the Uzumaki blood to be able to get in? Or is it because Naruto is a previous hokage''s kid and the seals maybe allow a hokage''s family to get in.... well no use worrying about it, in no way am I going to risk it for some techniques that I can''t even use well, and most of them I can''t even use.


    In the anime when Sakura was learning 100 Strength Seal technique her power didn''t really drop drastically like me because she didn''t have big reserves and it took her 3 years to complete it.... and you can''t really get weaker than Sakura at that time.


    Still have 4 months left to complete the technique.


    I am keeping an eye on Kushina because my plan to get the final Uzumaki books is at the most important phase right now. If I can''t get them now I don''t know if I will be able to get the chance again.


    Then I pet my ninken Shiro who is sleeping in my l.a.p and think...


    time for you to grow bigger little guy.


    Then as I am in my backyard petting Shiro and watching Tsume training, by the way she is 7 years old now, still in the academy, she wants to graduate faster so she can show her strength on the war but I sternly ''advised'' her against that, after all I am already aware of some butterflies I am making in the world and she could die out there together with her ninken, I think she has the same ninken as canon... even though I think I have a pretty good memory I am not sure if she had 1 or 3 ninken...


    the one with the 3 ninken might have been her daughter Hana.


    It seems I am forgetting some insignificant information about Naruto, but it doesn''t matter after all the things I need to know are the main plot and the characters powers, I am sure I won''t forget that.


    I am not writing anything down about my future knowledge or anything about my first life. After all Kabuto deciphered something that is only readable with the sharingan and Mongekyo sharingan. To read it completely I believe you need to have the Rinnegan, what I am talking about is the Uchiha stone tablet,


    I won''t underestimate anyone in this world, I will fight and think of everyone smarter and stronger than me. If I let my guard down in the slightest I would be killed by someone.


    I am going to be honest with my self I am afraid... that if I love and trust someone in this world one day the one I love and trust would be put under a genjutsu like Kotoamatsukami and would stab me in the back. Ahhhh everything used to be so much simple and safer in my last life I would just surround myself with my ''friends'' put up a dumb leader figurehead in my group of ''friends'' and just climb higher in the society ladder. After all I was always a true underdog in my last life not like anime ''underdog'' with Naruto *cough* has a 9 tailed fox, Izuku Midoria *boom* One for All... it''s just so ridiculous.


    For a true underdog to raise higher it is impossible without getting his hands dirty. Anyone who says they got at the top clean is a liar.


    Ahh I had so much plans in my last life to get to the top...


    Ah look at me I am getting nostalgic...


    But it would also be a lie if I told you I hate this world... it makes it possible for me to achieve a dream I had buried deep in my heart.


    And... and it''s so exciting sometimes it is so unpredictable, unfathomable I kind of hate it, but I also like the adventure.


    AUTHOR: NEXT CHAPTER IT IS A LONG TIME SKIP AND HIS PLAN WITH KUSHINA UNFOLDS.

 Chapter 40 - Kushina in Danger?!

    -Time Skip- (Age 10 years old)


    I am now 10 years old, I celebrated my birthday by inviting all of my clan members to my house, as the clan head I am expected to do at least that. I spent about 2 million ryo in the party and I got to say... it was boring.


    Only my family and friends were there, Kushina like always was congratulating me with a bubbly personality. I didn''t really recive any useful gift.


    Tsunade -sensei went to the battlefield again so she wasn''t in konoha for my birthday. Sakumo was in konoha for some time but he then went back to the battlefield again, we didn''t really meet, after all we are just acquaintances.


    He was probably here for Kakashi''s birth even though that is probably a secret . After all we don''t want the spies in Konoha to know the White Fang''s weakness.


    I also finished constructing the


    Strength of a Hundred Seal and also learned Cteation Rebirth, I am going to try to create a more efficient technique from it.


    My body has had time to grow a little so I trained it again at its full capacity and I still train every day to keep it that way, my chakra also grew by quite a bit, and now that I have the stored chakra in my seal I have quite a lot of chakra available to me.


    I still haven''t got the wind control technique down yet, but I can feel it, I am close to doing so.


    In the battlefield side, Konoha and Cloud are in a stalemate. In the Rock side the battle is happening in the land of Rain the main fighters on Konoha''s side are Dan, Jiraya and Orochimaru. Tsunade is in the Mist battlefield but she might also move to the land of rain to fight against Rock, Hanzo is just fighting both Konoha and Rock village that are fighting in his country. But there is just one of him, and there are probably a lot of massacres of his people going on in the land of Rain.


    By the way Mist is being very passive they might try for piece... or they are planning something.


    I am going to bet that they are planning something. Anyway I am not going to the battlefield at the moment I still keep observing Kushina waiting for my moment to strike.


    -Time Skip- (5 months later)


    As I am going to the meeting place that me, Kushina and Minato were supposed to go I think back on the progress I made during these last months. I mastered the wind control exercise, of course I don''t have the chakra to use Rasenshuriken but I can now coat my weapons in wind chakra and I am even able to throw them with wind chakra still being on them.


    I am now also able to cover my claws in wind chakra now to make them able to rip through people like tofu. So yeah now I am very dangerous to fight in close combat.


    I have also been storing a lot of chakra in my seal I have about 10 times my normal chakra in my seal, so yeah it''s like having 11 low elite jounin chakra in one person, which is a lot.


    Then as I arrive at the meeting place which is in a training ground, then I see something in the ground... my eyes widen and I think... FINALLY.


    Well then time to start the plan. I then sense all around me and stay in there just holding the hair for about 15 seconds and then Minato comes and then he says.


    Minato:" Hey Yami where is Kushina, it''s not like her to be late."


    I just look at him and show him the hair.


    He just looks at it confused and says.


    Minato:" Kushina''s hair?"


    Then I point in another direction, in which there is another patch of hair he takes it in his hands and then I say.


    Me:" Why would she leave her hair like this.... ".


    Then my eyes widen and I say.


    Me:" Impossible.... Minato follow me."


    I then tell him my ''speculation'' that something happened to her and then we keep following the trail for hours untill we are in the land of hot water which is betwen the the land of fiere and the land of Frost. In the land of Frost is where the battlefield between Konoha and Kumo(cloud) Village.


    It takes us some hours to catch up to the ninja it even becomes nighttime, but me and Minato just keep following the trail then we see the 3 Cloud ninjas just walking with Kushina also walking tied with a rope around her upper body


    ... they think they are in the safe right now.


    They didn''t notice that Kushina left a trail of hair for any enemy ninja to follow.


    I sense their chakra and tell with handsigns to Minato that they are Anbu level.


    Then me and Minato put on a chakra suppressing seal and attack them immediately Minato takes out one with a chop to the neck and I take mine out by slicing a kunai behind his neck the last one notices and jumps back.


    I immediately undo the chakra suppressing seal.


    Me: *GROWL* [Demonic Illusion: Paralysis Dog Binding]


    His eyes then get unfocused. I just throw my kunai towards him with wind chakra and it pases right through his throat and spine.


    Me/Minato:" Are you hurt Kushina? We came to save you."


    Then she looks at us and she smiles before starting to fall down.


    Me and Minato catch her and untie the ropes.


    I smile towards her and tell her.


    Me:" You will be alright now."


    Then I nudge Minato. Who blushes a little but carries her like a princess. Then Kushina comes to her senses and says.


    Kushina:" Hey wait a minute."


    Them Minato jumps up, and Kushina looks at Minato''s hand and sees her hair.


    Kushina:" T -That''s..."


    Minato:"Your hair is beautiful. So I noticed it right away."


    I also jump right behind them and then think... ahhhh this is so weird seeing kids doing that Romeo and Juliet thing.


    Then Kushina looks away with red cheeks and says.


    Kushina:" But you always ignored me."


    She is probably talking about him not helping her with the bullies in the academy.


    Minato:" Because I knew you were strong, in body and spirit."


    Then he lands on the top of a tree I laso land on top of a tree next to them. Minato then says.


    Minato:" But this is a fight between villages. It''s different from your other fights so..."


    Kushina while looking at his face says.


    Kushina:" So?"


    Minato:" I didn''t wanna lose you.."


    Kushina blushes and says.


    Kushina:" Even if I am an outsider"


    Minato:" Why do you say that. You live in Konoha so you are one of us."


    Yeah this got boring real fast better do something useful.


    Then I put all the bodies in a scroll and after some time we started returning to Konoha.


    When we arrived in Konoha we got questioned a lot by the konoha council, then we showed them the evidence of 3 Clous ninja and they checked the bingo books one was worth 14 mill Ryo another 2 mill ryo and the last 17 mill ryo. The 2 million ryo guy was probably some hiddn agent or spy because he definitely was stronger than 2 million ryo.


    The council which the members are Homura, Koharu and Danzo all gave us the ninjas bounties and told us to decide amongst ourselves how to split it.


    Then we go outside of the hokage tower and we split it 11 mill for each even though Kushina didn''t want to accept her part so I said.


    Me:" Kushina we are friends right."


    She nods shyly.


    Then I smile and say.


    Me:" Then I want you to have it... imagine, you could buy so much ramen with that money. Now are you really sure you want to give that up."


    She seems tempted but says.


    Kushina:" Yes I am sure I want you guys to have it."


    I then look at her seriously and say.


    Me:" I will throw it in the garbage or burn the money that you give me."


    She looks determined and says.


    Kushina:" I don''t care, you can do whatever you want with it."


    How god dam headstrong can she be...


    Well then I will show you.


    She then gives me her bag of ryo I then take it, put it in the ground and start doing handsigns. [Fire Style: Fir-


    Then as I am about to use a fire jutsu she takes the money from the ground very fast, she then looks at me angrily and says.


    Kushina:" WHAT THE HELL. ARE YOU CRAZY, ARE YOU OUT OF YOUR MIND."


    I just smirk and say.


    Me:" Well then will you accept the money now."


    Kushina: " Yes I will accept it."


    Minato just laughs while looking at our interaction.


    We then look at him also and have a small laugh together.


    -Time Skip- ( 1 week and 3 days later)


    (Morning)


    I hear a knock on the door while I am reading the advanced Uzumaki Fuinjutsu Book that Kushina gave me because we are ''family'' and ''friends'' she also gave it to Minato and probably didn''t want to make me feel left out after I just saved her plus she trusts me.


    Now I also know why this book is not given to outsiders... 90% of the book is filled with curse seals.


    *Knock* *Knock* *Knock* *Knock*


    I then sigh and go to my front door open it and see a genin corp guy then he looks at me and says.


    ???:" Inuzuka -sama you are being summoned by Danzo -sama.....

 Chapter 41 - Becoming a Missing Nin!?

    ???:" Inuzuka -sama you are being summoned by Danzo -sama, to the hokage tower."


    I just smile and tell him.


    Me:" Yeah I will be there immediately, just let me get ready ok."


    He then looks at me and says.


    ???:" Ok I was just supposed to deliver the message."


    He then goes away.


    I then think ''Why the hell would Danzo even call me... is he going to offer me to join Root... no I am a clan head and to high profile to join Root... Anyway I am not sending myself in a tigers mouth, I am not a Chinese protagonist. I then activete Strength of a 100 seal and use Shadow Clone. I used Strength of a 100 Seal because I made a shadow clone with the exact same chakra amount as me. Then I sent him to meet Danzo... I then pack all my things, if Danzo is planning to kill me or something I am running... it doesn''t matter if I become a missing nin.


    It''s a shame cause I accomplished a lot in Konoha and I went through all that trouble to get in a position of power. I also had a lot of plans in Konoha. I make another clone to stay in my house as my double. I then go to the edge of Konoha sensing barrier and I am ready to bail out as soon as my clone pops himself if something troublesome happened.


    I need to completely rearrange my plans then if I become a missing nin.... I am not going to create my own village like Orochimaru it''s to much work and very little reward.... but I am going to need money to do my experiments.


    Well first I will need to grow stronger, then I will impersonate a kage, I guess I will go with the hidden grass village an unimportant villge and well hidden, and it still has enough riches. Or maybe go to the land of snow and take over after all that is quite far and as the war is going on none of the 5 great nations is going to notice and after the war ends it will be to late because I will have 8 gates suicide pawns, that I will manipulate to work for me, or if I can''t do that threaten them with their families from far away while my clone leads them.... then I would join akatsuki with a different persona...


    I would also need a byakugan if I am going to always be followed or attacked.


    I will take a main branch mook, or if I can''t find one which is unlikely, I will wait untill canon and rip Hinata''s eyes, she is weak and on top of it has a weak jounin sensei.


    (30 minutes later.)


    It has been half an hour... did they use a special method to not let me receive memories from my clone I then am about to create another clone to go for scoutings but then.....


    Oh the clone in my house poped the other clone came and told me to come back to the house. I am still suspicious so I make another clone and tell him to go to the house while I follow him.


    I then go to the house my clone that was waiting sees my other clone which he thinks is the real me and he then pops himself. I get some memories. Aha I see so I was paranoid about nothing... false alarm then... I laugh a little at myself.


    But still always be prepared that is my moto, I made that up while in this world.


    Then I think back to the conversation.


    - Flashback- (Clone Pov)


    I go inside the hokage''s office I see Danzo and the other female council member the last one seems to be somewhere else.


    I then look at them and I say.


    Me:" Good morning Council Members may I know the reason I was called here."


    I was going to call them by name each but except Danzo, I didn''t really care to remember or know the other members names.


    Danzo looks at me in his serious face and says.


    Danzo:" Yami Inuzuka I see that you haven''t been taking C rank or higher missions or going to the battlefield for a couple of years now."


    A.hole why haven''t you been to the battlefield also retard that is what I though. But on the outside I just looked guilty and said.


    Me:" S -sir I wanted to fight all this time but because I became the clan head and I had to stabilise my clan then


    Tsunade -sensei came and I became weakened for a period of time."


    He seems unimpressed, probably because he thinks I would put my clan before Konoha.


    Danzo:" I understand but I need you for an important mission. Right now we are short on man power and aren''t exactly on the best situation on the war side."


    He then clears his throat and activates a seal and a sealing array is around the room I recognise it as a anti spy and silence seal, and then he says.


    Danzo:" The village hidden in the Sky has rosen to challenge the 5 great ninja villages. I need you to go there and spy on them and relay their military strength and if you see them as a danger I need you to hold them back with whatever means necessary. I will also give you 20 genin from the genin corps and 72 anbu from my own Root division they are around chunin level."


    He then looks at me directly.


    Me:" I understand Danzo -sama I will complete the mission withought failure and I will try to slow them down as much as possible."


    He nods and also adds.


    Danzo:" You will be the leader of this mission and the only ''known'' ninja that will take the mission. My Root members will remain nameless and the genin don''t even know where they are going they think it is going to be a simple B rank missions. Also if you complete this mission you will be rewarded 2 S rank missions pay and they will be added to your record."


    I then look at him and say.


    Me:" I understand Danzo -sama."


    Danzo: *sigh* " I wish I had more forces to spare, but this must be done with out most emergency."


    Then he explaines me the routes I can take and how to go through the Mist''s territory to be able to go to the land of sky which is quite far away.


    -Flash Back END-


    -MC POV-


    I get it now hahahahaha. That means that I got another little pawn on my chess game. The Sky Village huh. Well then things just got quite exciting. I need a plan on how to deal with the Sky village...


    AUTHOR: NEXT TIME THE BATTLE WITH THE SKY VILLAGE, AND THE MC MEETS TWO CHARACTERS FROM THE ANIME.

 Chapter 42 - The Journey To War

    Tomorrow we are going to the Land of the sky to fight against the Sky village.


    I bought a lot of weapons for myself I even bought a jian type sword.


    Danzo also gave me a scroll full of other weapons. But those were for the other shinobi.


    Then the scammer in me pops his head out... you know I could sell these weapons to them at a higher price.


    But I belive the root ninja aren''t payed much or even any at all. And the genin aren''t known to be rich either.


    I then return home from shopping, and go to bed.


    I can''t help but think back on my childhood... hahhahaha those were the times.


    - Small Flash Back- (1st life age around 7 years old)


    You know there are 3 types of kids in my school.


    1. The wimps/nerds grown happy have a normal family.


    3. The people who are wimps but act tough, but everyone can tell they are wimps.


    Then there is me the abnormality who stayed with the nerds at school and the bullies at afternoon. Recently the nerds have started buying something called YU GI OH cards. And the bullies always take it from them just so they can have it.


    Nothing interesting there... untill some bullies started using them as currency while playing poker or some other gambling games... you know what they say like father like son, they are picking their parents bad habits.


    I have a ''friend'' with the bullies squad, of course I stay with the nerds also, they are the ones with more chances of accomplishing something in their lifes.


    Anyway my friends name is Ady, his story is that his father registered him as a mentally challenged kid to get some money to pay for his alcoholism.


    -Flash Back END-


    So yeah I got some yugioh cards and started cheating at every gambling card game I played, it was sooo easy to cheat against those kids they were soo dumb.


    Then I sold most of the cards to the nerds 10 cards for 1$ then the bullies took the cards again and the cycle continued. I was making a little money, untill out of curiosity I started watching yugioh and that is the time I started knowing the rare cards and started selling them to the highest bidder.


    I was making a lot of cash at that time. Then I started duelling with the nerds the winner gets the others deck.. I got them addicted to it.


    I wonder what happened to Ady, last I heard about him was in highschool,


    the news was that he got into drugs and had an overdose. Eh I had more important thinks at that time like how to deal with my stalker... I mean we only flirted once, that doesn''t mean I love you.


    -Time Skip- (Tomorrow)


    I make sure everything is ready and I go to the meting place.


    The journey to the land of skies is going to take around 3 days.


    Then after some time I arrived there I arrived about 20 minutes early and I only saw 3 ninja 2 which looked emotionless probably root ninja and...


    The last was a character I recognised... it was Might Duy the father of Might Guy... this is really surprising... he isn''t really useful to me except his 8 gates technique which he probably won''t tell me about.


    But he is the father of someone who will be a great ninja, a true underdog rising.


    He is warming up while trying to socialise with the Root ninja... which they weirdly enough are replying to him, and trying to understand him and they are being very polite.


    Me:" Hey good morning my name is Yami Inuzuka I will be your leader for this mission."


    Then they introduced themselves. When the others arrived I told them I was the leader. The Root chunin were emotionless so they weren''t weirded out when a kid was giving them orders and the genin they were all from the genin corps and I had a higher position than them... plus in this time of war if someone questions the orders of their commanding superior... well a trip to the T&I department on suspicion of desertion or spying will maybe make them think better, they know that, they know I know that, so we are all good.


    Then we start the journey.


    -Time Skip- (3 days later)


    In the journey nothing remarkable happened. We took the way I made to reach the land of the sky it goes to the land of waves. There I find a big boat that could fit us all, and order the root ninja to kill all the sailors even the captain.


    We take the big boat to also not alarm any mist ninja that might be patrolling and because most ninja might not be able to waterwalk if any big wave hits.


    Then we go to the land of whirlpool to ''rest'' and check if everything is okay.


    I leave a clone with a lot of chakra there to check for any hidden treasure, of course I do so withought anyone noticing. Then we take the boat and started sailing towards the land of the sky which took about two days. Aaannnddd we landed right now


    I ordered the earth Style users to make camp for us underground. I also gave codes and fake codes to stop any spying.


    -Time Skip- (6 days later)


    Ok we found the Sky Village, annnd yes it is flying just like the anime sooo it is going to be hard to get there.


    I then think of a plan on how to get up there om then I will do this at night I will go there alone cause no one else will be able to follow me.


    I go to camp and organise 2 chunin to stay guard the Genin who maintain the camp. The others will be patrolling and by that I mean stealthly massacring every village they come across. We need to get those sky ninja in the ground.


    Even though they will know of our arrival when we start massacres but it doesn''t matter at that point. Because I will be in the Sky Village killing them from the inside.

 Chapter 43 - To The Sky We Go

    -Evening-


    I gave orders to all af them on how things should be handled. I also gave them protocols on if they are discovered. I also took Shiro my ninken with me.


    I stealthily go towards the Sky Village alone. Then I put a lot of boulders in my storage wrist bands which were full of projectiles and explosive tags I still have pouches with kunai and shuriken but I keep most weapons in my wristbands.


    I made them myself.


    I then go just below the flyind Sky Village. Its flying around 37 meters (121 feet) so yeah not exactly low but also not high like above the clouds. I then prepere and get up on a tree pump my legs with chakra and together with my super strength technique I jump high and destroy the tree I was standing on. I jump about half way then I summon a boulder below my feet, and jump again. I am almost there and then use chakra strings to attach myself there.


    As soon as I my feet touched the structure I stuck to it... this is weird I am upside down on a flying city. Well anyway I put about 56 explosive tags at the bottom of the city I mede these myself and made them stronger than normal. I also hid all of them well, like in cracks and places where no one will notice. I then put my ninken under my hoodie so no one will notice. I transform into a normal looking person and just to be sure I make a shadow clone which will transform as someone else and follow me in case I am followed.


    I then get in the city and look around.


    There seem to be a lot of civilians living here. I just wander around first and make a mental map. I then went towards the red light district which wasn''t weird now couse I was transformed into an a.d.u.l.t.


    After going in there I call the most beautiful looking lady over and I make a sc.u.mbag perverted face.


    Me:" Hey there whore, wanna have some fun. Don''t worry I will pay you handsomely."


    I wake her up and she sees me with the torture tools she looks surprisingly calm but I can tell she is terrified well this is mostly an intimidating method after all I don''t belive I have to torture her becuse she isn''t a ninja trained to withstand torture.


    ???:" Are you some creap or something, you know if you leave a scar in my body, the ninja will kill you, I am their favourite."


    I then make a serious face and say.


    Me:" Oho aren''t you a brave little whore.


    I don''t really care about the ninja but I promise you that I will not leave a scar in your body or hurt you if you tell me what I want to know."


    She looks at me with calm eyes... but I can tell from her body language that she is relieved but still suspicious.


    ???:" How do I know you will keep your word."


    I make a cold face and say.


    Me:" Listen lady the only thing that is mine in this life are my balls and my word... I am not willing to break neither of them."


    ???:" You know you are just my type of man if I wasn''t in this business.... well there is no use talking about what ifs."


    She is trying to manipulate me.


    I look at her turn my back towards her and say.


    Me:" There is only one woman I will ever love in my life and she is dead."


    Me shoulders start shaking and I say.


    Me:" These -These monsters... the Sky ninja these guys took her from me... they they.... had their way with her."


    I start producing tears at an alarming rate. Well this whore should know a lot of info about this place. Also I used a sad and tragic story to try to make her loosen her lips.


    She looks at me with sadness and she starts telling me the info I want.


    Then she starts talking. Surprisingly there isn''t a kage ruling the Sky Village it is actually run by some nobels that decided to ban together. There are 5000 ninjas: 3000 chunin, 1000 genin, 1000 jounin... she also gave me some other info.


    After the clone goes outside the motel stealthy. The whore looks at me she probably knows something is definitely wrong with my story cause I just made a clone.


    She then says.


    ???:" Wh-."


    But I cut her of with a senbon on her neck.... then I put poison in her blood.


    She will have a heart attack in 10 seconds. I untie her and vanish the singns that she was tied and clean the seals around the room and pick up all my things. Well then I have a job to do.


    Then I go outside the motel stealthy also, and change my disguise to an old man.


    I go to a shitty hotel and kill the owner and make a clone to act like him.


    This will be a temporary base of operation.


    -Time Skip- (Tomorrow/Midday)


    I slept untill mid day. Then I get up and eat some ration bars. I am not eating anything in this village... after all it is still enemy territory I don''t know what they do to it, and it is a great way to get poisoned by an enemy ninja.


    I then wait again untill it''s night time and go outside. This time I go towards the leaders place knock him out and make a clone to impersonate him and to have him put explosive paper tags around the leaders tower.


    I take the leader to my base tie him up.


    He really was arrogant he only had 2 jounin guards that I killed with poison when I transformed in maid and gave them water and had 2 other clones impersonate them.


    I really am grateful to the seal that Tsunade taught me I now have so much chakra to make a lot of clones.


    There were also 11 servants in the house, I didn''t kill them because they didn''t know what was happening. And would be a great cover for my plan.


    -Time Skip- (Tomorrow)


    I was going to torture the leader but he gave up everything so easily. And by everything I mean everything, even the existence of 0 tails and where to find it. How to get to it.


    Also he told me where all his money is. I looked through and he had 535 million Ryo. I now have a mountain of money in my storage scroll which I put in my wrist storage where I store my weapons.


    So here I am I go in the leaders office the guard which is my clone looks at me and says.


    Clone:" Do you have an appointment."


    I look at him with my elderly disguise and tell him.


    Me:" Yes of course I do."


    He nods and lets me in.


    I go inside see my clone he looks at me and nods. Then I dispel him. I get his memories... this is why you mustn''t have a weak leader. Cases like this happen and the leader gets replaced.


    They are a new village so they probably got arrogant just because they have some new and fancy gadgets. If this was one of the great villages I wouldn''t have been able to get inside. Even if I did get inside by some miracle and was able to bypass the sensory barrier.


    I definitely wouldn''t be able to leave alive.


    I see in his memories he just talks to some other people and I also learn on how this village stays a float... it does so by using the prisoners whom they use different methods like starvation, dehydration, pain, hate etc... to get dark emotions to generate chakra for the 0 tails, then they use that chakra to keep this thing afloat.


    I will also steal some more money from these rats.


    I just stole 177 mil from another notable noble family which I killed all their members easily I just stealthy put poisoned gas inside they had chunin and genin guards which didn''t notice anything wrong unrill it was to late... Now I am going to rob the 3rd and last family that build this Village.


    I go to the last familys house they live in the western side of the city, in a stone mansion it looks like a god damn mini castle. I also sense


    16 genin, 5 chunin and 5 jounin and 61 civilians in this house... this noble is more carefull than the leader.


    I make 3 clones and they stay outside together with my ninken to not let anyone escape. I also put silence seals Fuinjutsu all around the mansion, never hurts to be careful.


    I then undo my transformation I need to be able to fight at my full power.


    Then I go into the house stealthy and I wait patiently untill a jounin has to go to the bathroom as soon as he is about to pee. I immediately throw a kunai him but he turns around and intercepts my kunai with his, he looks at me and says.


    ???:" You are surrounded. Just give up and I promise we will let you live."


    I see so they noticed me.


    I also sense the other jounin have also just surrounded the bathroom.


    Well then I throw a paper tag in the opposite wall of the door and then as soon as the jounin get inside they look at the seal and get Paralysed it is a paralysis seal.


    I attack the jounin that blocked my kunai, this time I slashed at him and before our kunais touched I used wind chakra and I cut through the kunai but he jumps back but still gets a slash in his torso. He is really skilled.


    I then throw 5 kunais towards the Paralysed Jounin, the free jounin then goes to black them but the kunai explode killing them all.... well then this just alarmed a lot of people it seems I will have to exterminate them all....


    AITHOR HERE: NEXT CHAPTER OR THE ONE AFTER THAT HE WILL FIGHT THE O TAILS.

 Chapter 44 - Things Not Going To The Plan

    The I look at the jounins dead bodies and think. That jounin was dangerous and well trained but he didn''t have that much experience with real war where every dirty trick works. The closest he probably came to war was probably frying and throwing paper bombs.


    Then I start going outside of the bathroom 5 chunin and 9 genin have arrived to check what is happening. I go stealthly towards a genin and punch him behind his head.


    His head splattered all over the floor.... this is the first time I used the super strength technique in battle, I must say it is remarkably strong.


    I then use all of my pwer and punch the ground, the mansion starts collapsing.


    I use [Earth Style: Hiding Like a Mole Technique] I go underground while the mansion is collapsing... I know this isn''t a good idea, people are definitely going to notice this even though no noise was made outside because of the silence seals... Thank god I am way to paranoid and I did that or else I would have been surrounded by a couple hundred jounin by now.


    I go around and tell my clones that were outside to search for any treasure or anything important.


    I reaturn to my base... no one heard anything about what I did yet.


    I was going to take them all out stealthy, but I saw that it was impossible when the jounin noticed me. I also know I am stronger than some chunin but in a closed space like that if any of them used a wide range jutsu I would be at best injured or at worst dead. I don''t know how the jounin noticed me, but I suspect that it was because they had a sensor I would have used a chakra suppressing seal but that is to dangerous in enemy territory.


    But still did they really sense me or was it something else.


    I guess we will never know after all even if you are a ninja if a couple of tons fall on you... you will die.


    Also I checked and confirmed with my chakra sense that there was no one alive. I didn''t sleep all night and my clones returned with 174 mill Ryo. I don''t think I will have money problems for a long time.


    -20 Minutes later-


    My clone comes in and dispels himself.


    I get the memories and what I wanted.


    It was my clone which was the leader for some time they changed places.


    I also learn all the things I needed to do and then I make 10 clones again and they nod and spread out.


    I dispel all the other unnecessary clones that I have in the land of the sky.


    I only keep the leader clone, his two bodyguards and the 10 clones that I gave a duty to.


    I go to the market and buy the best bronze urn that money can buy.


    I then go to the leaders tower I am allowed inside immediately. I see my clone there sitting in the throne and he opens a hidden compartment and I run down there. Then I see a cocooned 0 tails... giving off dark chakra.


    I then look around at the cylinder shaped room and see the seals used in here all around the room.. What bad sealing... all of this to seal the 0 tails who is not really even a real tailed beast because it wasn''t made from the 10 tails.


    Then the the 0 tails seems to wake up and look at me.


    ???:"* Is it really worth it, sacrificing all just so you can maybe reach a dream in which tragedy lies.*"


    Hmmm so this is the 0 tails influence speaking in a weird way, like a whisper in my head.


    ???:"* What about your friend that you killed just so you could stay alive... he had a family, a sibling... he was someone''s child, someone''s brother...


    What would you so if someone killed your own little brother after all you aren''t there to protect him... you left them... your family, YOU LEFT THEM BEHIND.*"


    I look at the 0 tails, my face contorted in pure anger and I say.


    Me:" WHY YOU LITTLE WORM."


    -POV CHANGE- (Clones pov who is posing as the leader.)


    Then the a sky ninja comes in panicked and out of breath and says.


    ???:" Shimu -sama there has been an attack on the 2 noble families."


    I look arrogant like a noble and seem distracted, I then say.


    Me:" Who was it, was he captured or killed."


    ???:" That is the thing Shimu -sama we don''t know who was it and all the people who were in the buildings were killed."


    I look at him with rage and say.


    Me:"WHAT? YOU IMBACILES YOU TRASH HOW COULDN''T YOU NOTICE,


    CALL ALL THE SKY NINJAS AS SOON AS POSSIBLE. I ALSO WANT 100 JOUNIN AROUND ME AT ALL TIMES. I WANT ALL THE NINJAS TO GATHER ALL THE PEOPLE IN THE VILLAGE AT THE TOWER I AM GOING TO MAKE A SPEECH IN 6 HOURS."


    Well then I hope everything goes as boss''s plan... if it doesn''t we will all die.


    Me:" Call the guards gourding the door. I want them with me here at all times. We might have a traitor amongst us. That is the only way this type of assassination can happen."


    Then the ninja goes outside and the 2 clones disguised as guards come inside.


    They look at me and say.


    Clone1:" So what is going on, I was made during the plan A phase. Did it go wrong."


    Clone2:" I am the same, but I don''t really care neither way, I am sure boss will take care of it."


    I look at them and start explaining what happened.


    Clone2:" Ahhhh we are in deep trouble, now that the security is increased it will be a bitch and a half just to be able to escape alive."


    Clone1:" Yeah I wonder how boss will do it."


    Damn it how will we get outside I know this place is going to be surrounded with ninja. But even though I asked for 100 jounin ninja around me there will be: 895 other jounin looking for the assassin together with 3000 chunin and 1000 genin.


    SH*T DAMN IT. That is a circle impossible to escape from. There will also be a complete lock down. If I order the lockdown to stop I will blow my cover.


    WHAT WILL BOSS DO.

 Chapter 45 - Yami vs Zero Tails

    ???:"* What about your friend that you killed just so you could stay alive... he had a family, a sibling... he was someone''s child, someone''s brother...


    What would you so if someone killed your own little brother after all you aren''t there to protect him... you left them... your family, YOU LEFT THEM BEHIND.*"


    I look at the 0 tails, my face contorted in pure anger and I say.


    Me:" WHY YOU LITTLE WORM."


    This sh*tty worm. I will show him what pain means.


    I clasp my hands together, five small yellow orbs with skinny tails emerge from between my clasped hands and move above my head before forming a circle of five. Raising my clasped hands above my head, I slam them downward, sending the orbs into the ground. As a bright light is generated in the sky above the zero tails cocoon, five tall and thick pillars, which are connected to each other by chains, drop on the 0 tails and pin it to the ground.


    [Five-Pillared Iron Weights Seal]


    This will definitely hold it down. It could theoretically hold down a 4 tail chakra cloak Naruto, so it will deffinatly hold the 0 tails without problem. Yeah the Uzumaki advanced book is no joke. This is one of it''s strongest sealing techniques which isn''t a curse seal.


    I look at it and I still keep hearing it ''speak''.


    "* Even if you accomplish your dream, you will still just be alone for all eternity.*"


    I take out a brush and a bottle of ink, I pulse chakra in the ink.


    I then start drawing seals all around the 0 tails. The seal I am drawing is called the [Chakra Draining Seal]. It is f¨±injutsu designed to drain chakra. By placing the seal on the target, the chakra drained is transferred to the user.


    I am not some MC who can easily throw away the dark emotions. Then while his chakra is transferring to me I then look at the seals in the walls around and put my hand in it I start transferring all the Dark Chakra I have to it... This should keep the Sky Villave floating for some time around 2-3 days actually. I then look at the 0 tails it seems tired and thinner... but it''s still speaking.


    "* You left them, how would they feel if they knew the cruel things you are doing.*"


    This damn worm. I then take my brush and take the bronze urn I brought with me. I put it close to the unmoving 0 tails and write foujutsu seals all around the urn. Then I open the urn and clasp my hands together. Then an armored chakra hand comes and takes the 0 tails and pulls it in towards the urn. The seals around the urn start rotating and gathering all to fuse in one place when the 0 tails is fully in the urn.


    A red kanji meaning bronze appears.


    [Bronze Armour Seal]


    Now it stoped talking.


    You know sealing all that beast in this small urn is kind of weird looking at it


    I guess Fuinjutsu for the win then.


    Now that the sealing is done I release the Five-Pillared Iron Weights Seal which now is just in the ground, it then just turns into chakra and dissolves.


    For the other tailed beasts it won''t be able to seal them. But for a 0 tail it will keep him easily... it also has a weakness the seal is easily broken even from something like the ''Five Elements Unseal


    technique.


    I wake my ninken and make a shadow clone to guard me.


    Well then time to start the real battle with the 0 tails I then sit cross Legged close to the urn and start meditating to recover chakra faster I still have around 6 elite jounin chakra left in my seal but I am not going to waste chakra needlessly, and in no way am I underestimating the zero tails.


    Around 1 hour later I am at full capacity. Then I touch the urn with my palm and transfer my consciousness into it.


    I then go inside I look around and see a field of red dirt surrounded with bronze walls all around and I see some gears abeve who seem to be turning. I then look at the 0 tails which is coiled it looks at me and says.


    " I see that you came here, what is your reason of doing that."


    It speaks normally now, probably the voice he had earlier was a technique to wisper into the victim their deepest regrets and painful moments to triger a dark emotion output.


    It then looks at me and suddenly generates arms that come towards me fastly. I just jump back and use [Fire Style: Fire Ball Jutsu] at the 0 tails and it hits head on. 0 tails starts to meke a painful noises.


    "* You know for every ninja you kill you leave a kid orphaned... just like how you were orphaned.*"


    Huh the 0 tails is good as a supplementary ally but its fighting power is crap. I got used to its rambling by now and I don''t fall for it.


    I then use [Five-Pillared Iron Weights Seal] again and the five pillars hold it to the ground. It was screaming and in pain so it didn''t notice the pillars falling but I don''t really care for this weak little thing.


    After cutting all its arms and burning them.


    I then start writing some Fuinjutsu on the ground. After creating the necessary seals, the seal formula rises up in the form of multiple chakra chains and binds the 0 tails [Beast Sealing Technique].


    Ok so now I am sure it won''t be able to break from here in even 100 years by itself. Plus it isn''t able to get any dark emotions from outside.


    Well then 0 tails captured.


    Time to get out of the Sky Village...

 Chapter 46 - Is it a bird, Is it a plane, no it is a...

    My conscience returns to my body again and I see the urn and think.


    ''I will keep the 0 tails in that urn untill I learn a way to erase its memories. I know the memory erasing seal, but the seal erases the memories of the caster and the victim of a certain event.''


    But still though I am not using a seal that erses my memories also.


    I then get up and dispel my clone and my ninken then goes under my hoodie.


    I get up and start walking up the wall of the room. I arrive at the top and give a small almost unnoticeable chakra signal.


    - 1 hour later-


    I am still in the same position.


    Then the secret entrence opened.


    My clone looks at me and says.


    "Sorry boss I couldn''t open it at the moment I had some people in the room... Anyway how are you going to get out of here boss."


    I then dispel him get his memories and make a new clone which will know what to do.


    ...


    -CLONE POV- (leader clone)


    I then call a jounin captain over and tell him.


    " I will give you one of my bodyguards"


    I said " Because he will help you find the culprit sooner... By the way are all the people gathered already."


    The guard looks at me and says.


    "Yes sir they are all gathered."


    I look at him and say. "Ok then we are rushing a little I am going to give the speach in 10 minutes, am I understood."


    The guard widens his eyes and says.


    " Y -Yes leader we will be ready then."


    I look indifferent and say. " Of course you will... also take my guard he will operate in stealth and alone to be able to find the culprit also listen to all his orders he has the authority only second to mine at the moment."


    One of my two personal guards, with an urn tied on his waist and goes forward.


    ...


    10 minutes later.


    I get on the balcony of the tower and look at the ninja and around 10000 civilians on the roads. It looks crowded but they still came, after all it isn''t everyday that the leader makes a speech.


    I look confident and use a small genjutsu to make me look more dazzling with more sunlight around me and I take the microphone looking device and say. " My people of Sky Village... yesterday we were attacked by a traitor among us.


    It massacred two of the ruling familes."


    Some people start whispering amongst themselves.


    I look angry and say. "FOR SOMEONE TO DARE AND KILL IN OUR CITY IT IS UNACCEPTABLE, I WILL FIND THEM, I WILL KILL THEM.....


    ....


    7 minutes later


    The guard of the leader is walking stealthly among the edges of the city and goes to the launching satation and says to a supervisor.


    "Stop all the sky patrolling ninjas I want them on the ground immediately."


    He looks at me and seems to recognise the one talikng and says.


    "Y -Yes sir it will be done... but may I ask why."


    I look at him and say. "Well amongst all these flying the coulprit could just be one of them and might escape... from now on if there is any other ninja flying exept me shot it down, it might be the culprit."


    ...


    10 minutes later


    All the ninja are in the ground now I then take a flying device and strap it to myself , this is actually a device that works by just flowing chakra through the wings, which propels the user through the air and allows for flight. With sufficient skill, the shinobi can display considerable manoeuvrability mid-air through the use of this contraption. One downside to this is with their chakra being used to fuel the machine''s flight capabilities, prolonged use can eventually consume the user''s chakra reserves.


    I then get in the launch pad and it launches me up I start putting a little chakra through it and it propelled me I then turn slightly and it turns. I then get as high as I can. I then dispel the 10 clones I made to put explosive tags all over the city.


    I am so high the people can''t even see me. I make a half tiger handsign and say. "KATSU"


    *BOOOOOOM*


    A gigantic explosion happens the city starts falling down I can in pieces the the towers and the whole city is wrecked I even got the memories of my clones that were still there. The leader clone was distracting the population and ninja while I did the work.


    *Poof* I undo my transformation and a 10 year old kid with black hair and eyes with an Inuzuka tattoos came out.


    I wonder if anyone survived the destruction... well then the mission is not over yet. I still have to kill all the survivors.


    And to survive your village crumbling down on the ground and explosions around... well you have to be either lucky and strong... actually you kind of have to be both.


    AUTHOR HERE: SOME OF YOU PROBABLY HAVE NOTICED THAT YOU CAN''T GIVE POWER STONES TO MY NOVEL. I HAVE EMAILED THE WEBSITE TO SEE IF THIS GETS FIXED. BUT ANYWAY I WAS ABLE TO GET BACK MY AUTHOR NOTIFICATION THAT IS REALLY IMPORTANT TO ME CAUSE IT SHOWS ALL THE COMMENTS THAT I GET

 Chapter 47 - Villain!?!?

    I look at the wreckage of the used to be Sky Village.


    This kind of destruction.... this kind of catastrophe... how dumb... a flying village might sound like a good idea with an untouchable Village up in the sky...


    But if just a ninja is able to get there it will cause catastrophic damage or even destruction. If they really tried to fight the 5 nations they wouldn''t have been able to even battle them for a full day.


    They would have been destroyed with a wide range ninjutsu, it would have hit a


    crucial part of the city and it would have fallen down...


    Well anyway I go on the ground open a scroll and put the flying contraption on my storage scroll. I don''t know it might be useful for later.


    I then use [Earth Style: Hiding Like a Mole Technique] and travel underground while upping my chakra sense to see if anyone survived.


    - 1 hour later-


    I have discovered with chakra sense and a little investigation that there are survivors specifically 56 chunin, 58 genin, 123 jounin, most of the survivors have bad wounds but non life threatening. They seem to be searching for any other survivors they don''t find anyone else... they found 146 lucky civilians who survived.


    Well then I just apy on them from afar I look at them and I notice that some jounin seem to have noticed something. So I immediately retreat... I would go call the ninjas that Danzo gave me but by then some of the injured ninjas might get healed... better to attack now.


    After all we are not stupid to build the camp to close to the Sky Village so it''s going to take some time to get an attack force ready.


    ....


    4 hours later


    I then started my operation to kill them I catched animals and injected them with slow acting poison, a type of virus you could say, and then put the animals close to the camp for them to take as food. I then also start poisoning their water supply, by using different methods from impersonation to poisoning a close by stream where everytime they went to get water usually a genin or civilian I would put poison in the stream.


    .....


    -Night Time-


    While they are sleeping I look and use a poison mist in their camp. I have a gas mask I am boiling a certain concoction.


    And I am directing the steam towards the camp.


    Ahhhh I am so tired I need a break.


    I still stay up all night and when morning comes.


    I then go to their campsite stealthy and see all of them dead....


    I look at the background... the ruin of Sky Village. I look at my hands and think... I have started becoming a villain... Huh yeah right, in this world exist only winers, and the villains would always be the losers.


    You know the saying: the Hero always wins.


    I then start returning to my base camp.


    I arrive there in about an hour a with my top speed.


    Then I use an earth jutsu and go underground. I look at them and surprisingly all of them are there.


    They look at me in surprise and one of the root ninja says.


    "Welcome Captain Yami."


    I look at them and say.


    " Guys the mission is done."


    They look shocked for a moment, even the root ninja one of them even twitched his fingers and I see he is about to attack me but he puts a fake smile and asks me before doing anything.


    "Oh did something go wrong."


    I just smile and say.


    "Well there is no Sky village anymore."


    Some genins fall down, after all the destruction of a ninja village, this hasn''t happened ever.... well untill Pain does it in canon and he still didn''t kill every single one of them.


    "W -What."


    "A -Are you joking."


    "N -No way man."


    Then of course we went to check the crash site...


    Some people hadn''t seen anything and the genin were shocked one of them said.


    I just look at them coldly and say.


    "You didn''t have to do any fighting at all, so really this being a B rank mission would have been kind of suspicious."


    I then look at a Root ninja and I signal him.


    He looks at me nods and says.


    "Well the mission hasn''t ended yet. We have to eliminate some villages to send the land of the Sky a mesage and make them surrender anyone who participates will be rewarded with an extra rank A reward."


    Then Might Duy says.


    "Wait, wait is there really need for anymore bloodshed... tens of thousands of people have alteady died."


    I knew this would happen so I signal the Root ninja and he said.


    " Yes and thank god they were all enemies. You don''t want our children or even grandchildren fighting in the war do you."


    "This is still wrong no matter how you justify it."


    ..


    Ok so after that 5 genin together with Duy refused to participate in the massacre.


    But all the other ninja agreed...


    ...


    6 days later


    Some more Root ninja were sent by Danzo and we have destroyed 20% of the land of Sky. Most were villages, the nobles and Daimyo did send some assassins and samurai after us but we moved in large groups to be safer and we killed them all.


    Then as I was taking a rest the clone I left in Uzushiogakure poped and I got his memories....

 Chapter 48 - The Battle is WON!

    Well my clone didn''t find any treasure or special ninjutsu. He was just checking a normal house and he activated a trap and a scarecrow painting opened his mouth and it shot nails and my clone then ''died''.


    Well then I guess I will check that when I return back. But I will have to start killing some more for me to return faster.


    I have also gotten a lot of test subjects around they are all in a stasis coma in a specialy made storage seal.


    ...


    -17 days later-


    32% of the land of the Sky is destroyed and now.... the land of sky has asked for ceasefire. The Daimyo has requested for ceasefire and after paying some unspecified amount of payment to Konoha... which then accepted the ceasefire.


    Then we were ordered to return to Konoha to await further orders.


    Well then... I start organising my ninja group which is around 130 root ninja and 20 genin.


    You know I worked a miracle I killed 5000 ninjas and destroyed a whole hidden village with almost no casualties. The only casualties were a couple of the root ninja that I sent to send information to Konoha, by the way, only one of them survived and was able to deliver the message.


    Well as we are sailing in a boat towards Uzushiogakure... the same boat that we came with.


    Then as we are in the boat I look towards Might Duy who is with the other genin who didn''t participate in the massacre. I just look at him sitting in the ground and looking at the floor absentmindedly... I then say.


    " So Duy -san how are you feeling you... seem sad. You can tell me if anything is going on."


    He still keeps looking at the ground and says.


    "Nothing is really going on."


    I then sit in front of him and say.


    He turns and looks at me seriously and says.


    "Sure"


    Then he looks at the ground again.


    I don''t mind that and just say.


    " When I was asked to do this mission I didn''t want to accept.... but I did it anyway... I have a girl which is like my little sister. And I thought I didn''t want her to see war or be a part of it."


    He just looks at me and smiles slightly and says.


    "Sometimes I forget you are a kid. But... I also have someone special I want to protect..... I have a kid you know... he is just three months old... and I really needed the money that comes with the mission because I am a single father ... I know I am a killer, I am a ninja after all... but I will never kill innocents and civilians who have nothing to do with the ninja wars... they are only the victims of our war."


    I just look at him with an emotionless mask and say.


    " This is where me and you differ... I will do anything to protect my loved ones."


    I want to try and understand more about the 8 gates. I have an idea for a medical procedure related to it. I will use it on myself... I look at my small childish hands and make them in a fist...


    I first need my body to grow and then train it to 100% before I do the procedure.


    - 2 days later-


    We arrived at Uzushiogakure. I tell them.


    "You guys rest a bit... but don''t leave your guard down I am going to scout the island... I will check if anyone got wind of our mission yet and if there are any ambushes or traps in here. If I don''t come back in 6 hours max you must assume something happened to me."


    They nod and start setting up a perimeter.


    ''Wow this world really respects personal strength. I mean they take orders from a 10 year old... In my first life not only we didn''t take orders from a 10 year old, but we don''t even listen to what they say most of the time. The only way we listen to them is if we are at court and the kid is saying where his weirdo uncle touched him.


    Well then I go towards the place where my clone ''died'' and see a normal wrecked house I then send another clone inside and not even 3 minutes later he comes outside with a scroll in his hands then I dispel him and catch the scroll.


    I also got his memories, and apparently there were no more traps actually. And at the end of the tunnel was nothing. But if you move the picture of the scarecrow that shoots needles out of his mouth inside the wall is a safe and there is a scroll inside it. The safe didn''t have any trap seals only a locking seal and a destruction seal to destroy everything inside the safe if the seal is opened forcefully. I solved this quite easily it was mostly made to not be opened by those of not Uzumaki origins. And the best way to do that is to put seals that only Uzuamki know... and I obviously know because of the books about Uzumaki Fuinjutsu.


    ....


    It was not a trap and after 2 minutes just to make sure there was no trap, I then dispel the clone and get his memories of what he saw.... and then my eyes widen and I go to take the scroll and see for myself...

 Chapter 49 - Chain Jail

    As I open the scroll I read the technique and think...


    The techniques name is Chain Jail..


    It is an inferior variation of the Adamantine Sealing Chain that the Uzumaki use. It was made for those Uzumaki without the talent to be able to produce the Adamantine Chains, which would be able to hold the 9 tails for a very long period of time. Kushina wasn''t able to hold the 9 tails down for as long as she would have been able to if she was in top condition during the 9 tails attack.


    But still this technique could hold down the 6 tails for a long period of time and 7 tails for some time. How the technique works is that you write the specific seal in a part of your body and the seal will generate a sealing chain made out of your chakra.


    The max that can be inscribed in the body is 4 seals so that means 4 chains can be made at max. The chakra requirement is extreme for the average ninja to make even 1 chain... I should be able to generate 3 chains at max with my natural chakra amount.


    But I probably will only generate 1 chain to fight efficiently. I could generate all the 4 chains with the chakra in my seal, but if I am not fighting a Tailed Beast then 1 chain would be more efficient. I then put the technique scroll in a storage scroll, I will learn this when I return to Konoha and have more time. I really hit the gold mine this time. Iwas lucky... I am not usually this lucky... I guess there is rest for the wicked.


    I return to my camp and I rest a little and then we become ready to depart again.


    ...


    - 1 Day later-


    We are now at the land of waves. We destroyed the boat before arriving on the harbor and stealthily walked on water towards a desolate part of the shore. As soon as we arrive in the shore... a lot of projectiles are thrown at us I immediately use


    [Earth Style: Earth Wall] and put extra chakra into it still we still lost some people around 50 Root chunin and almost all the genin I think only Duy survived we have a lot of injured ninja. We were ambushed and had a catastrophic loss... WE NEED TO RETREAT.


    Then I notice the chakra signatures that were hidden before.


    So they used a technique that hides their chakra signatures and attacked us...


    I sense 10 jounin and 84 chunin.... I have around 70 chunin and a couple of genin under my command...


    Then 5 of the enemy Jounin clap their hand and use [Lightning illusion: Flash Pillar] I see that and I immediately start violently running chakra through my body from the seal and as I do so I see the 5 other jounin use [Gale Style: Laser Circus] towards us and I use use


    [Earth Style: Mud Wall] a gigantic wall of earth appears and stops the attacks... that took a lot of chakra. Then the Root ninja get out of the genjutsu... so I just tell them with hand sings my plan.


    [Fire Style: Flame Thrower] and as we are doing that I cut of my fire ninjustu and use [Wind Style: Great Breakthrough] to power our fire style and a great tsunami of flames appears going towards the enemy.


    They used water wall but it wasn''t able to handle our jutsu completely.


    51 enemy chakra signatures disappear. They let their guard down for a moment... they seem like they are fighting in unnatural territory... they probably aren''t Mist ninja even though they have Mist Village headbands... some of them seem kind of tan... if they were Mist ninja they would have used more Water Walls together to defend against our jutsu...


    I think they are Cloud ninja after all they even use Lightning techniques, what they are doing here I don''t know but I will think about that later.


    The Root ninja retreat and take the injured with them.


    I thet signal my ninja and we all disperse in different directions while I leave a couple of shadow clones to distract them.


    ....


    -1 hour and 30 minutes later-


    We have all regrouped in a specified location. It was in a cave under a small bridge. We retreated because even though we took them by surprise with our fire technique we were still at a disadvantage thay had 10 jounin and we only have me. If we fought the battle we would have had a 30% chance of winning ... and I don''t like odds like that.


    Three of the genin were injured and 2 of them heavily injured. I also healed them... This mission won''t be a 100% perfect completion like I thought it was going to be... I need to think of a plan and take the Cloud ninja all out in a fellow swoop. It won''t be as easy as with the Sky ninja, after all the Cloud ninja are more alert and experienced than them. Hmmmmm.....

 Chapter 50 - Dying as a Nameless Casualty

    - 4 Days Later-


    -POV CHANGE ???- 3rd person POV-


    In the camp of Cloud ninja a young man who is short for his age, with rather tanned skin and an athletic physique. He possesses ruffled burgundy hair that casts notably dark shadows on itself, combed back to expose his forehead, and wide, dark eyes with white pupils that appear dark pink around the lower section of their irises.


    His name was Ken, a Chunin of Cloud Village, he was born and raised in the slums of Akuzaya which is a city in the Land of Lightning, he had a sickly mother he deeply loved. In order to pay for medicine, Ken pickpocketed from people in town, but was caught three times. The guards beat him and marked him with tattoos, threatening to cut his arms off the next time he was caught and calling him a "demon child". When Ken returned home after his third beating, a villager informed him that his mother, having heard of his arrest, hung herself. In the letter she left, she stated she wanted Ken to live a full life and didn''t want her to be a burden to him. She also said that she didn''t want to take medicine if it was earned by dishonest means.


    The beatings didn''t hurt him but the death of his mother did. He felt that she wasn''t a burden after all... she was his mother... at her death he was devastated and lost... he didn''t know where to go and what to do.


    With his criminal tattoos and no home to return to, Hakuji was eventually banished from Akuzaya....


    Devastated by the loss of his mother and enraged at this society they lived in where he couldn''t afford his mother''s medicine, he picked fights with people and beat them up. One day, after nearly killing 10 a.d.u.l.t men in a village, he was approached by Han... Han is a ninja from the Village Hidden in the Clouds he is a black haired and brown eyed older man with a muscular body and unshaven stubble and a very cheerful personality... He is also a jounin from Cloud Village and a Clan head of the small clan which consisted of him and his daughter.


    Annoyed by the man''s cheerful demeanor, Ken challenged him to a fight, but was defeated with ease...


    Han took him in so he could nurse Izuno, Han''s sickly daughter. Her mother, her previous caretaker, drowned herself due to stress and Han had to do a lot of missions to keep them afloat and pay for Izuno''s medicine, so Ken was tasked with tending to her...


    Already accustomed to tending to his mother, he had little trouble tending to her, though he found it awkward whenever she burst into tears. One of those times, unbeknownst to him, he had indirectly motivated her by telling her that "there will be a next year" to see the Lightning Festival which celebrates the 1st defeat of the Octopus Bull Demon.


    Han also started training Ken to be a ninja.


    Three years later, Izuno was in good health and could stand and do chores. Ken continued training with Han to become a ninja. One day, Han offered Ken to take over the small clan¡ªand take Izuno as his bride, to Ken''s surprise and embarrassment. He agreed, silently vowing to protect both of them, even at the cost of his own life.


    At the Lightning festival, Izuno told him of her past, asking if he was really okay with the proposal, to which he reaffirmed his vows to her, promising to protect her for the rest of his life.


    He went and prayed to the grave of his mother before going to war and told her of his latest experiences... at the age of 17 he was a chunin almost a jonnin in about a year he should be able to become one... he still remembers the ambush that happened against the Konoha ninja... that was really just a coincidence they were supposed to deliver a message to the Mizukage that was their mission... but they already stealthy send 2 chunin and 1 jounin to deliver the message while they distracted the Konoha ninja... at least if the Konoha ninja were planning to attack us and they haven''t returned to Konoha yet.


    He went to war together with Han, who is now his father in law. He is actually one of the jounin. At that time Han came towards Ken and smiled and said casually.


    "Hey Ken, how you doing."


    He then immediately goes alert, that greeting was a code that was made in case we are surrounded and not to let lip readers notice. We then start getting ready casually with no sudden movements. Then all of a sudden we are surrounded we all go to fight our enemies and as we are fighting them Ken notices that someone killed one of them and it was a shadow clone then all of a sudden an explosion happens and that is the last thing he saw before he only saw darkness and DIED.


    father and the love of her life died she committed suicide... and Yami never knew who Ken was and what happened... even if he did he wouldn''t really care}


    -MC POV- (some seconds earlier)


    I look at the camp with binoculars and see that one of the clones got ''killed'' then I do a half tiger seal and say.


    "KATSU" *BOOOOOOM*


    A huge explosion happens and I signal the Root ninja... we had all used shadow clones and filled them up with explosive tags under their clothes. We then went and took care of the survivors... there were 17 survivors we tortured some of them and got information out of it and once we got what their mission was and I immediately start a retreat we don''t even clean the site. After all we could be surrounded by Mist ninja at any moment.


    ....


    - 3 Days Later -


    We returned to konoha we only saw some Mist patrol teams and we killed them all and we arrived at Konoha safely....


    I just smile and think.... I wonder what has changed since I was gone... did my bounty change... did I become some kind of war hero....

 Chapter 51 - Returnin to Konoha

    As I am going towards the hokage tower.


    The Root ninja disperse and only Duy and the 3 other genin. Then as I arrived there we then were told by the secretary that the Hokage was expecting us... well I guess he already knew we were coming. He probably saw us in his crystal ball or an anbu reported to him.


    Then as I go inside I see the hokage and all the village elders are there, even Danzo. The Hokage looks at me and can''t keep a smile from forming of his face and he then says.


    " Yami Inuzuka I congratulate you."


    I keep a serious face to mask my ''depression/trauma'' from killing all the people I did. This is what you call a double layered mask. I then answer seriously.


    "For what Hokage -sama."


    He noticed my mood and says seriously.


    "You are promoted to jounin...."


    "And also..."


    He picks a book from his desk and throws it to me. I catch the book and read it.... aha so my bingo book page got refreshed.


    ________________________________


    YAMI INUZUKA


    Code Name: Red Fang / Sky Slayer Yami


    BOUNTY: 73.000.000 Ryo


    Rank: S


    Description: He is believed to be good at Taijutsu (Tsunade Senju the Slug Princess was his Jounin teacher and he might have her freakish super strength), he has big chakra reserves, his strong point is Ninjutsu. He is also believed to be good at Genjutsu.


    BE AWARE THE NINJA IS A SCHEMER. IT IS SUGGESTED HE IS DEALT WITH QUICKLY AND WITH NO TIME TO PREPARE. DO NOT UNDERESTIMATE HIM BECAUSE OF HIS AGE, HE USED THAT TO OVERCOME ''CHIYO OF THE WHITE TROUPE'' WHEN HE WAS YOUNGER.


    Wanted for the destruction of the Village Hidden in the Sky. (The land of the Sky also offers a Noble Status to anyone who brings him in.)


    He is known for singlehandedly destroying the Village Hidden in the Sky, Capturing the 1 tail Jinchuriki, cutting of the arm of Chiyo of the white Troupe.


    Massacring the defenseless Land of the Sky Civilians, numerous killings in the battle against the Village Hidden in the Sand.


    He is the only student of Tsunade Senju who is still living. He graduated at.....


    -------------------------------------------------


    '' There were a whole lot of information about me... critical and important information.... no one is going to underestimate me now.... this is a big disadvantage to me. True the reputation will help me get high paying S rank missions even in peace time, but I don''t really care about that, after all I am only going to do a minimal amount of missions in peace time... it is better to train or experiment. And I know my power best... I am not S rank material...


    Then as I am about to put the book down on the Hokage''s desk, he looks at me smiles and says.


    " You can keep the book. No need to get a new one for yourself, you just returned so it''s some reading material while you rest."


    He then says seriously again.


    He then takes a check and gives it to me.


    "... 6 million Ryo."


    I just look at the the money and say.


    "Hokage -sama I don''t want the money..."


    His political senses go of and he noticed where I am going with this, he narrows his eyes and brings his hands together to his chin, he then says.


    " ...Then what is it that you want."


    Ohhhhh that means that he is ready to pay a big reward to me... well then let''s continue this acting in front of the genin and the council man.


    " In the battlefield I noticed how I was unable to protect myself and I want an S rank technique as my reward..."


    Except the Hokage all the others widen their eyes... but no one refuses after all it is a fair trade and I didn''t ask for an S rank forbidden technique, just an S rank.


    "The anbu will guide you where we keep the S rank ninjustu, but first you will have to give me a report for your mission."


    I then do so and of corse I hide some details like the 0 tails or my half truth of me torturing someone I dodged saying it was a p.r.o.s.t.i.t.u.t.e to keep my image cleared. Then after I do so I am escorted out by an anbu and him taking me to the anbu base.


    Then as we are walking I ask him.


    "Soooo I have been gone for a long time what happened around here."


    He just looks at me with his mask which I can''t see the eyes. But he says...


    "Sure."


    And he starts explaining what happened.


    Hokage returned to konoha and Orochimaru withdrew from the land of rain and took his place in the war against Cloud Village. Tsunade returned to the Mist battlefield. The Spectre Dan is now holding the Rain frontlines against Rock together with Sand which are temporarily our ally. Jiraya asked for a break and because of his contributions


    he was given one. If my estimation is correct he should be training Konan, Yahiko and Nagato at this time period.


    Then we arrived at our destination.


    The anbu base is actually located surprisingly in a run down apartment complex then when we arrive there we go inside, the anbu escorting me does a secret handsign to the man in front. Who then opens the door for us but the anbu says.


    "Wait here."


    Then as I am waiting I open the Bingo book and look at the bounties in there....


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    GUYS I HAVE A PAT,REON NOW AND I HAVE A CHAPTER IN ADVANCE THERE AND FOR MY OTHER DXD STORY, AND A NEW STORY OF HUNTER X HUNTER AND LIKE A CHEAP MALE PR0STITUTE FOR 2$ YOU GET ACCESS TO ALL THE CONTENT THERE.


    https://www.patreeon.com/HolyJoker


    take an e out of the word patreeon

 Chapter 52 - S rank Techniques

    I open the book and read...


    My bounty 73 million ryo 60 mill came from the land of the Sky and 13 mill from the land of Wind....


    Then I look at other bounties...


    Tsunade The Slug Princess had 103 million Ryo bounty,


    Orochimaru The Snake Master 118 million ryo bounty,


    Jiraya The Toad Sage had an 113 million ryo bounty.


    Hanzo the Salamander 134 million,


    Hiruzen The Professor / The God of Shinobi 171 million,


    Chiyo of the White Troupe 82 million,


    The White Fang Sakumo 115 million ryo,


    3rd Kazekage the Iron Wasteland has a bounty of 133 million ryo...


    Chiyo''s brother, Ebizo of the White Shroud has a bounty of 84 million


    Ohhhh I found an interesting one... Heartless Kakuzu 147 million ryo,


    Onoki of Both Scales / Fence Sitter Onoki has a bounty of 142 million....


    Of course these were only the characters that we see in the main story there were other people in the S rank like.. Fullmetal Toroi from Cloud Village 55 million ryo bounty has the ability of magnet release, when he shoots a metal projectile if it touches you it will follow you like a homing missile, not the magnet release which has the ability of sand control like those of the Sand Village.


    There is also the 3rd Mizukage nicknamed ''the Dragon'' with 101 million ryo bounty... he hasn''t really done anything noticeable in this war yet... there also isn''t a lot known about his abilities even from the bingo book...


    The only thing that the bingo book mention is that he is the Mizukage obviously, and that he accompanied the First Mizukage to the first ever Five Kage Summit in Konoha during the First Shinobi War.


    There is also Dodai The Rubberman 89 million ryo bounty he uses rubber that he makes from his Lava Style. I believe he is the guy that helped Naruto against Edo Tensei 3rd Raikage.


    There are also a dozen more S rank ninja, they weren''t in the main story but I will still memorize their info just to be sure.


    After an hour of reading and memorizing the Bingo book the anbu comes out with a paper in his hand


    He gives me the paper and says.


    "These are all the S rank techniques which aren''t forbidden... you will be able to chose one and I will then go to the hokage get a confirmation then I will deliver the technique scroll to you."


    I take the paper and read all the techniques names and their short descriptions.


    There are 98 techniques... the anbu looks at me and he says.


    "There are 98 S rank techniques and do you wanna know the best part 39 of those S rank jutsus were created by the 2nd Hokage."


    I then read some of the ninjustu in there.


    Rank: S


    Description: - Using large amounts of chakra, the user creates water from thin air and forms so much that it creates a mini-tidal wave. The water then does not dissipate for the duration of the battle, thus creating an arena where the user has a large advantage. If the climate is exceptionally arid, such as a desert, the water only lasts for a short while before draining into the sand. The depth of the water once the wave has settled is anywhere between


    3-4 meters (9''8"-13"1'')


    Water Style: Tidal Wave Jutsu


    Rank: S


    Description: An even better and more devastating water technique than the Suishouha Technique, this Technique can drown a large village but requires enormous amounts of chakra and stamina. Usually an ''all or nothing'' technique, as it is not used under normal circ.u.mstances due to the widespread and in discriminant destruction that it wreaks.


    Earth Style: Rock Finale Jutsu


    Rank: S


    Description: Rocks and debris materials, as well as chunks of the earth, will continuously barrage at the opponent from all directions. As soon as each of the pieces of earth, rock or debris approaches the opponent, they will explode, causing a brutal destructive force with all the pieces exploding. Standing still, the user will clasp their hands & stomp a foot. All material not held down will immediately pop up into the air & hover, and they will fly towards the enemy and if they touch something they will explode.


    So long as the user keeps their hands clasped , they may move about freely to avoid the danger of being close to the target & ensuing destruction. Lasts for so long as the hands remain clasped.


    Fire Style: Fire Hydra Technique


    Rank: S


    Description: An extremely powerful technique, used only by the most powerful ninja, it has been known to destroy entire landscapes in one fell swoop. By somewhat summoning a large, fiery monstrosity in front of them: a Fire Dragon with three heads.


    All of the techniques are amazing and they are not even the S rank Forbidden ones... I WANT THEM ALL... I mean imagine if I knew only the S rank elemental techniques in this scroll and was a Jinchuriki of the 6 tails or a higher number tailed beast I am sure I could compete with some of the most legendary ninja. I would even be confident of defeating most of the ninja of the Past, present and future... of course the monsters like Madara, Sasuke, Naruto and Hashirama don''t count though. I would be able to contend against Hokage Minato...


    I would just use a wide range S rank ninjutsu against konoha and keep doing that until he exhaust all his chakra and leave an invisible poison gas in the area 80% chance I would be able to kill him.


    But of course in a battle there are a lot of different factors. Like would the anbu help him against me, do I have allies, a lot of unstable factors in my calculations but still I would definitely be a one man army.


    There were a lot of other techniques of different elements and non elemental techniques and as I looked at them I looked at the one I was most interested....

 Chapter 53 - The Best S Rank Technique

    There were a lot of other techniques of different elements and non elemental techniques and as I looked at them I looked at the one I was most interested....


    Flying Thunder God


    Rank: S


    The user needs to be a Grandmaster in Fuinjutsu to be able to use it and make his personal seal.


    Needs great chakra reserves. It is mostly used as a transportation method. The use in battle is almost impossible because of the Teleportation the user might be teleported in front of a kunai.


    The Teleportation is almost instantaneous. To be usable in battle it depends on the thinking process and analytical speed of a person to be able to teleport fast and efficiently.


    Well then I mean there are all kinds of techniques but the Flying Thunder God is definitely the best non forbidden


    S sank technique, no questions asked.


    I mean another S rank Blood Bending jutsu that Tobirama has invented sounded good was able to manipulate those weaker than you and paralyze those of the same level for a couple of seconds, I mean for an average Jounin in a couple of seconds he can pretty much slice you around 30 times.


    I mean the Impure World Reincarnation is one of the techniques that I think could surpass it... but the technique is an S rank forbidden one and it''s not in the list.


    I then point towards the technique I want and say to the anbu.


    " This is the Technique I want... The Flying Thunder God."


    " Are you crazy, are you out of your mind, the Flying Thunder God hasn''t been mastered since the second hokage."


    I look at him calmly and say.


    "I know that."


    He then looks at me and says while pointing.


    "Ahhhh you don''t get it... ok let me explain it to you kid... hokage -sama was student of the creator of the technique


    Tobirama -sama and the previous God of Shinobi Hashirama Senju who bought all the tailed beasts to their knees. You know tailed beasts are like the trump cards of most nations. Sooo lord Hokage who also had Mito -sama to teach him Fuinjutsu and the creator of the technique as a teacher to help him was unable to learn it and he is 42 and still hasn''t learned the technique."


    Man he sure says ''sama'' a lot. I then just look at him seriously and say.


    "Can I get the technique now."


    He them calms down and says more calmly. He is not an anbu for nothing.


    " I am just saying kid you shouldn''t waste your time like this you are young you should expand your jutsu repertoire. "


    I just look at him and think... he doesn''t know what I know and has my best interests in mind... but I mean c''mon I know Minato learned it. As I am thinking that the anbu continues speaking.


    " Plus even if you did master it... if you don''t have the terrifying instinct that the 2nd hokage had the only thing you will get from Flying Thunder God is a fancy and fast way of travelling long distances."


    I just look at him... wow he... he really is wasting so much of my time so I just tell him.


    " I wanted to try to see how it works because I have hit a bottleneck in my Fuinjutsu... I thought this might be able to help me, plus the other techniques are way to chakra intensive and would be difficult to use in a situation plus I am not ready for a wide destruction S rank techniques."


    Get the hint you piece of sh*t, you are just wasting so much of my time.


    He looks at me and says.


    "Yeah even though your chakra amount is very large .. an elemental S rank ninjustu isn''t the best idea you could get hurt and even crippled.


    He is right with my chakra I would be able to use an elemental S rank technique only once, well more like 1.5 times but still it would not be very efficient.


    He then continues and says smiling this time.


    "Ok then I will take your decision to the hokage see if he will allow it and then I will deliver the technique scroll to you...


    By the way don''t get discouraged if you aren''t able to learn it I mean I had 16 years and I still haven''t learned it."


    He then shunshins away.... what did he mean when he said that he had 16 years to learn the technique... I start walking home. I keep thinking... do anbu have access to S rank ninjustu... at least the ones which are not forbidden...


    Hmmmm should I become an anbu when the war ends... no that would be a waste of time, just patrolling and protecting important people... better get an Inuzuka in there but I need to insure who will be loyal too though, cause if they aren''t then I will have a problem in my hands. I mean someone telling the hokage that I ask S rank techniques from anbu is a BIG red flag. They might also become double agents against me...


    I don''t need a retarded version of Itachi who likes dogs and is generally less cooler and way weaker than him as my clans anbu... though who would be a good person to become an anbu...


    I need someone young so I can mold ans brainwash easily and someone who is close to me... then as I arrive at my house I see Tsume training in the yard. When she sees me a smile takes form on her face then she runs towards me happily and says.


    " Yami Onii-chan you are back."


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    I wrote this in my college library for my first *******...

 Chapter 54 - Time Goes On

    I look at Tsume smile and say to her.


    "Hey there Tsume -chan... I see that you are training hard again."


    She looks at me and says.


    "Yes I want to graduate soon I am 9 I am going to war and be the strongest ninja ever."


    I just look at her and smile on the outside but in the inside I am thinking...


    Well she would die fast... how she survived up until canon in the story is nothing short of a miracle.


    This kind of personality unless you are the reincarnation of Jesus of the Naruto world (Indra&Asura) then there is no way you will survive with her shitty talent. I mean if she met a high chunin, then who is going to save her... Hmmmm I mean if she died it wouldn''t be that much of a big deal in my plans...


    But what about the ''timeline''... I don''t really care about the timeline but I need certain events to happen for my plan to go smoothly. Hmmmm her death would also be kind of suspicious I mean first the father then the daughter I would be the number one suspect. Plus I don''t have anything to gain from killing her.


    I look at her and say.


    " Tsume -chan you mustn''t graduate until you are 10 years old or I give you permission."


    She just pouts and goes back to training.


    I then go towards my room for some rest. I know Tsume has tried graduating early behind my back but you know me as a Sanin''s student my words have some pull plus the teachers ''understand''


    me and what I am doing is for her own ''good''... I go to my bed and lie down.


    -Time Skip- (5 months later)


    {MC age 11}


    On the rain side of things Jiraya is still probably teaching the rain kids and a new name has appeared in the battlefield against Rock Village... people have even started calling him a hero... yeah my fame from destroying a whole village singlehandedly is kind of dwindling.... I would take care of him if he was a threat to my plans... if I was a guy who really cared about a dead guy starting to catch up to my fame... his name is Dan Kato also known as


    Dan of the The Spectre.


    Before he appeared even all the S rank sand ninja were barely able to hold back the Tsuchikage but then Dan came and he used his technique to possess people clase to the Tsuchikage and attacks him randomly. It is said that he was able to make the Tsuchikage suffer one loss after another... and that hasn''t happened in a long time.


    Tsunade is easily holding the Water battlefield pretty successfully... she is probably the biggest legend formed in this war. If she wasn''t here the casualties on Konoha''s side would have been twice as much. She has saved so many lives it is pretty much impossible to count.


    I think she is 50% of the reason that Konoha will win the second ninja war.


    Anyways I have mastered the Chain Jail Fuinjutsu in 2 months. I also made my own technique... the rasengan is able to me made with one hand and is perfect for future Minato because he will hold the Hiraishin Kunai in the other hand.


    But for me at best it is just a way to be able to beat people with high defense and not really my trump card so to say.


    I then make some handsigns....


    Tiger ¡ú Horse ¡ú Rabbit ¡ú Rat ¡ú Dog


    [Wind Style: Chakra Scalpel] the cutting power is through the roof... I haven''t tried it yet but I believe that it has the ability to cut through the Susanoo


    rib cage... Rasenshuriken is an S rank monstrous technique but... my technique is monstrous in it''s own way...


    Still the chakra control to do this is needed to be perfect... I think my chakra control now is in the Top 2 in the ninja world... I should be right next to Tsunade.


    My physical stats have also advanced now that my body is growing.


    My natural strength should be around high Jounin which doesn''t really matter couse I have The Super Strength technique of Tsunade... my natural agility is Low elite Jounin I can raise that to almost S class speed with my Four Legged Technique... these natural stats are really impressive for an 11 year old.


    But it didn''t come from nowhere the training I do is inhumane together with my medical knowledge... well let''s just say that Lee has nothing on me with my training efficiency... though he does beat me in effort... I have other things to learn not just Taijutsu. But even though I train efficiently I don''t think there is anyone also who can train like me because of the immense pain... so I just nullify my pain with a little senbon in my nerve system and do the calculations to not hurt my body accidentally after all I don''t feel pain in that period of time.


    Anyway on the Flying Thunder God technique.... I haven''t made a lot of progress. I have 6 clones working at it at all times but almost no progress is made.


    I also have the last book of Uzumaki Fuinjutsu but I still can''t use the Flying Thunder God. Even when I learn all the Uzumaki Fuinjutsu... I''m not sure I will be able to use it... I mean the Fuinjutsu formula look simple at first sight but...


    I feel like a kid who just learned 2+2=4 and then he gets a math exercise with 4 unknown factors... How the hell did the Second Hokage come up with it... I have a whole different perspective of him now... How did a guy like that get killed by Ginkaku and Kinkaku... I don''t know but... anyway I look at a note in my hand it was left by an ambu yesterday to meet with the Hokage... Yeah I am important enough now and can''t get summoned at the whims of other people... they need to send me an appointment first...


    I wonder what the Hokage is calling me for, it isn''t a clan head meeting, they aren''t held in war time unless a sharingan is stolen, a clan member is a spy or something like that.


    I wonder what is the reason I am being summoned... though I have a pretty good idea what it is for...

 Chapter 55 - Meeting With The Hokage

    I wonder what is the reason I am being summoned though I have a good idea what it is for...


    I then go to the Hokage''s  Tower and as I enter I see the receptionist, she looks at me and says.


    " The Hokage is waiting for you


    Inuzuka -sama."


    I arrived exactly on time. I go inside the office and I see Hiruzen and Danzo in there the other 2 council members are missing. But there is a Shikamaru looking guy... probably a Nara, they are usually the strategists of our battlefields...


    Then the Hokage looks at me, smiles and says.


    "I see that you are getting stronger every  time we meet."


    Wow I feel like he starts every conversation with a smile...


    I just say to him.


    "Well hard work never betrayed anyone."


    He looks at me and says humorously.


    "Yeah you are right... hard work betrays no one."


    He then gets serious and says.


    "Then lets get right to the point. I need someone to go support Tsunade on the Mist battlefield... Well not really support... there has been cloud ninja seen in the territory of the battlefield between Mist and Konoha. Never hurt to cautious... you will act as her second in command."


    Then Danzo comes forward and says cynically.


    "We also want you to end things there in the Mist battlefield... I want you to... kill the commanders in the Mist battlefield..."


    These  guys... are they playing good cop, bad cop... is it a way for them to test me or something... are they suspicious of something... I don''t like not knowing things...


    "Well I will give it all my efforts... when do I have to get ready to go there..."


    Then the Nara lookalike says.


    "We will set of  in 5 days... I will also be coming with you..."


    I look at him and say.


    "Ok... I am Yami Inuzuka Sir..."


    He just looks at me and makes a smirk and says...


    "I know you kid... my kid used to talk about you a lot...*sigh* What a drag that was...  plus you are kind of famous around Konoha..."


    I look at him and think I was famous really....?  I might of have destroyed a village... but I thought I might be overshadowed by the Sanin... I mean Jiraya also destroyed the Dragonfly Village... that action also started the war... though Sarutobi was there but it was more as support to make sure no one escaped who then might come back for revenge... at least those are my thoughts on the events... It is described with waaaay to much propaganda on the Konoha books I didn''t even read past the couple of pages... I mean they accused them of stealing a very benevolent Noble or something like that... when in reality Fire Country just wanted to expand their territory.


    Well as they say history is written by the winners... but in the other countries they say thet Konoha massacred the small ninja village and the other countries wanted ''justice''...


    But in reality they were afraid of the Fire Country getting more land so they also started attacking their small neighbours to also get more land to be able to keep up with Konoha and then Konoha was like ''why are you massacring weak villages...''


    because Konoha was now afraid of them.


    Then they were like '' well you started it.''


    They started with small conflicts amongst each other and Konoha said to ''stop attacking the small villages''


    they didn''t and then booom war comes...


    With Konoha in the middle of all the ninja villages so it became a very disadvantaged situation for Konoha science the beginning.


    But Konoha was able to survive thanks to many legendary ninja like the Sanin, White Fang, The Sceptre, The Profesor, The Darkness of Shinobi etc...


    I just look at him and say.


    "Are you Shikaku''s dad."


    He smirks and says.


    "Yeah I am Shikaramu Nara the current clan head of the Nara can and I represent  Ino-Shika-Cho alliance *sigh* which is such a drag..."


    What the hell is up with that tired ''aura''


    around him... that is weird, kind of like killing intent but it just expresses his boredom... and it is pretty much useless... I wonder does he do that unconsciously... killing intent can be made unconsciously and consciously...


    Anyway I just tell him.


    "Well I see that you know me but I would like to introduce myself...


    My name is Yami Inuzuka, I like training, my ninken and Konoha. I dislike war and needless killing.


    My hobbies are eating delicious food and learning new things.


    My dream for the future is.... to become the strongest HOKAGE so I can protect Konoha and all of those I love."


    The Nara looks at me with his sleepy eyes and says...


    "Way to much info I didn''t really ask for or need."


    Well I need you to think you understand me and have me figured out. Because I am not really sure if I can hide things from an experienced and intelligent Nara who is best friends with the head of the clan who specialises in reading memories and dealing with information.


    I just look at him in a serious way and say.


    "Well we are comrades and we need to know each other plus I don''t think you are a spy..."


    -CHANGE POV- (Shikaramu Nara)


    I look at Yami Inuzuka suspiciously and think... this kid....

 Chapter 56 - The Mask has Been Seen

    -CHANGE POV- (Shikaramu Nara)


    "Well we are comrades and we need to know each other, plus I don''t think you are a spy..."


    I look at Yami Inuzuka... this kid... he is definitely wearing a mask... you notice these kind of things when you are always on guard against spies in our midst.


    Even though I wasn''t sure in the beginning that he was wearing a mask his body language is perfect, not surprising since he is a medic... but that is also what made me suspicious in the beginning... it was too perfect... even with Tsunade you are able to notice how she is feeling from her body language and slight face twitch. Though if I was an enemy and she was on guard there is no way I would be able to notice it in the midst of battle... even though sometimes she is very expressive of her feelings.


    But this kid, he is to guarded even against the konoha ninja... he is hiding something... I can count the people who would be able to notice his mask in one hand and 3 of them are in this room me included. I then say to the kid.


    " Sure, sure kid *sigh* this is such a drag... anyway my name is Shikaramu Nara I like cloud watching and playing shogi with my friends. I dislike dishonest people.."


    He doesn''t even flinch slightly when I say that, this control over his body''s natural reactions are scary even for ninja especially ninja his age. But I continue saying.


    ".. and people who go out of their way to disrupt my cloud watching. My dream is to live until this war ends so I can be lazy and play shogi all day..."


    He just looks at me without an even trace of anger and just says.


    "You know old man you are really lazy."


    This is the thing that makes me suspicious of him... his teammates died because some ninja were lazy or didn''t look hard enough and let a big group on ninja with jounin and chunin pass. I thought he would criticise me... but he is so calm like.... well anyway the hokage then says.


    "Yami as the second in command, if Tsunade is ever fighting against an opponent I need you to lead the ninja, if you want to just go and help Tsunade I need you to give command to Shikaramu because he will be your second in command and will be a critical part in planning strategies."


    "I understand Hokage -sama... "


    Then the hokage says.


    "I won''t keep you any longer I am sure you need to prepare for the journey."


    He gets the hint and goes out of the office.


    When he is gone there is silence for a couple of seconds until I say.


    "Soooo.... I am sure you noticed that the kid is wearing a good mask."


    Then the hokage looks at me and says.


    "That kid... he lost two of his teammates in a mission... in the reports from the medic they say it was a miracle he was able to stay conscious and come back alive after the battle against some Sand Jounin..."


    I then say to them...


    "That is true he doesn''t like to show weakness and he has a mask... we don''t know what is hidden behind the mask... but what I believe from all of the information that I have about his life is that he hides his so called weakness or as he precedes as emotions behind a mask. I believe for his mask to be so good he started wearin it young... probably when he learned that his father was dead... "


    Then Danzo is also looking at


    Hokage -sama then he says...


    "If we weren''t at war he would have been perfect for my Root program..."


    The Hokage frowns, looks at Danzo and says.


    "No you aren''t allowed to take clan children or ninja with talent in your Root program... we need them to be the light...."


    I look at them and think... Hokage -sama really hates the Root program... I mean 99.9% who know of it hate it...


    But still the Hokage knows that Root ninja are efficient and very useful...


    a Root Chunin could assassinate a Jounin with a suicide technique, or just simply attacking and having paper bombs wrapped around him... not even the most devoted ninja will do that...


    We have thousands of chunin, but only a handful of Jounin... if even one is taken out it is a great loss... they are after all the best ninja in their generation... there is a saying that there is no weak Jounin.


    That is why none of the clans even dare to get any ''smart'' ideas...


    I am brought out of my thoughts by Danzo''s voice who says.


    "I know I wouldn''t take him even if you gave him to me..."


    We all know that is not true.


    I think that while Danzo continues speaking.


    "... look at the strategy he did in the land of the Sky... he is without a doubt an asset to Konoha... if he wasn''t so young I would have even recommended him as a frontline army commander."


    The Hokage looks at Danzo with a little surprise, then he smiles and says.


    "Are you getting sentimental Danzo, does he remind you of a yourself when you were younger."


    Wait how does he get that oooohhh...


    Well that is pretty much it, but I bet you could match that background with 80% of the konoha ninja. I am sure the Hokage is just trying to get under his skin.


    Danzo looks at the Hokage and says calmly.


    "Aren''t you to old for these types of games Hiruzen."


    The Hokage shrugs his shoulders and says.


    "Oh well..."


    Then an anbu signaled us that the next visitor is coming.


    -CHANGE POV- (Yami''s POV)

 Chapter 57 - Unnamed

    Chapter 57


    Title: You Have Been Played


    -CHANGE POV- (Yami''s POV)


    As I go outside of the office I think back to the conversation... I feel .... NO I know I am not getting something that happened in that room... those answers.. those questions with the Nara... they were...


    SH*T, SH*T SH*T... GOD DAMN IT.


    He played me... he got me...


    that ba*tard... ok I need to calm down first...


    how would they think of me... obviously they wouldn''t jump to the conclusion that I am a reincarnated person... they shouldn''t have been able to see through my mask and seen my real personality... even if they did it doesn''t matter they think it''s just another Orochimaru... and that is not bad since he hasn''t left Konoha yet that behaviour isn''t considered ''bad'' since it''s only being used against the enemy.


    Ok I get my mistake now... I wasn''t able to understand the game the Nara was playing until it was to late... what I lack is wisdom that comes with experience.


    That is true the most I manipulated in my last life was a teacher or a classmate.


    People who I know their personalities are easier to manipulate and predict.


    I was able to manipulate people because I knew so much about them from the anime.


    Hokage and Danzo are dangerous because even if I might be able to manipulate them I am 50% sure they will notice my intentions after all they have experience in that...


    Anyway now that the gig is up I need another ''personality'' one which isn''t that different from the last one... one where the Nara won''t notice that what I am hiding is dangerous...


    Hmmmm how about one where I don''t blame anyone else except myself for the death of my teammates... but I need to make it seem natural...


    I didn''t notice that he was leading me on... I need to be more careful... after all I am more dangerous than Orochimaru...


    ...


    - 5 days later-


    I am waiting for the others to arrive here. I have prepared a lot for this war... I even have like 1 year worth of food in a storage scroll... that is in case I am banished from Konoha and need to go in hiding, I will live for a year in a cave and train or something... though that is a very, very unlikely possibility.


    ...


    - 5 Minutes later-


    They have all arrived and we are waiting for the Nara to show up.


    Then I sense the chakras of some ninja coming towards my direction. I sense 20 jounin, 26 chunin and 61 genin.


    When Shikaramu arrives exactly on time we start the journey. Towards the Mist battlefield. The frontlines are in the land of Noodles or at the Beaches near it. The Mist ninja have an advantage because we are near a lot of water and most of them are either Kekkei Genkai users or have Water affinity.


    .....


    On the road we didn''t meet any obstacles we only meet some Genin who had understood their position in the battlefield and they deserted we of course noticed them hiding and took care of them.


    When we arrived at the camp a jounin came to greet us and ran some tests to see if we were the real ones and not some disguised enemy.


    Then chunin and genin went to get familiar with the camp, while the Jounin which also included me went to meet with the leader in the meeting tent.


    She then looks at me, smiles and says.


    "So you are my second in command huh... you sure you are up for the challenge brat."


    I just look at her and say amusingly.


    "Why of course Tsunade...."


    Then after some more chit chat between me and Tsunade we get to the main point and I start explaining the mission from the hokage and how we need to end this war quicker.


    Then Tsunade started explaining that she would have  already ended it if they were in any other battlefield. The terrain gives them an unfair advantage.


    Our numbers are about the same as them... but we still have the absolute survival advantage with Tsunade here... and she has a high chance of single handedly with the help of Katsyu to kill a huge chunk of them them all in land... though it would take some time.


    But those odds do a 180¡ã turn if we are fighting on water... their advantage became able to keep Tsumade at bay and for her to not attack... but they also don''t dare attack us on land recklessly or else they would be annihilated by Tsunade.


    Then Tsunde says with a small smile.


    "Well since you are here Yami or should I call you now Sky Slayer Yami or Yami of the Read Fang..."


    I just say humorously.


    "Well you could call my Honey or Darling if you want..."


    The ninja look surprised at our humorous relationship... but they don''t really make a big deal out of it after all it''s just an 11 year old kid trying to be like an a.d.u.l.t, like I was older... well Tsunde Senju doing something with her student is well... scandalous though that is highly improbable.


    Anyway Tsunade just smiles and says...


    "And you should call me mistress then..."


    Ok this is just getting out of hand can''t you see that there are people around us...  well it is entertaining and it is not my reputation who is going to get a big hit... so I just say with an embarrassed face.


    "W -Well if you want that M -Mistress."


    All of the people in the room are shocked... even Tsunade who is used to me acting like this didn''t think I would really say it.... she rubs her eyes and says in a tired way.


    *sigh* "You know kid you are really tiring and shameless..."


    She then gets a serious face and says.


    "Enogh joking around let''s talk business... Now that we have two S rank ninja here we have a lot more options now... I have dicided that we will take the initiative and attack the Mist ninja first..."


    She then takes out a map  and puts it in a big table, points at a point in the sea and says.


    "This is the location of the Mist camp in an iceberg made by the Yuki clan... but the location also changes because they move the iceberg... I will now listen to any ideas you have so we can make a plan that has the highest success."


    ....

 Chapter 58 - War... War Never Changes...But I DO

    Tsunade then takes out a map and puts it in a big table, points at a point in the sea and says.


    "This is the location of the Mist camp in an iceberg made by the Yuki clan... but the location also changes because they move the iceberg... I will now listen to any ideas you have so we can make a plan that has the highest success."


    There are people who give some ideas, some of the ideas get accepted some do not. When it comes my turn I just say I can''t really think of anything in a water biome. After all there are not a lot of ways to be able to sneak up on them...


    Though I could think some plans of the bat but... they are kind of morally wrong even for ninja... plus I am not the leader.


    Tsunade is the leader and she probably won''t accept my plan... even if she did, it would ruin my image that I need for some of my plans... after all we are really going to need a scapegoat if my plan works... and that just shows how vile it is.


    So anyway we are going to attack the mist ninja tomorrow.


    ...


    -1 day later-


    Ok so we are going towards the Mist camp... I still think that this is not a smart idea... it would be better to draw them out somehow... but there are not a lot of ways an army will move... I was thinking of someone a.k.a me. Infiltrate the mist village kidnap someone important to the Mist camp leader and torture him/her and let him know about it, also if we are able to torture it in a easily watchable area so the commander will be able to watch it from far away to confirm the person is real and not someone transformed...


    Then he will come out with or without an army. But he might also not have anyone that close to him... there are also a dozen other plans but each of them is messed up and even those plans who aren''t cruel will make Konoha appear weak which then might entice the other countries to attack fiercely or in the worst scenario band together in an all out attack against Konoha.


    Anyaway enough thinking about plans I need to concentrate 100% in the battle.


    - 1 hour later-


    We can finally see the Mist camp, we immediately, without even resting go towards them trying to take them by surprise.


    But as we get closer a Hyuga ninja notifies us that the enemy seems to have noticed us.


    Well that is not really a surprise since


    it''s hard to sneak an army of almost 2000... even if they are ninja... plus we are in the sea and not exactly a lot of places to hide.


    Anyway as we get closer we see some ninja form a line and start doing handsigns.


    Then as we get closer I see that they are still not coming to clash with us in the middle of the battlefield and I immediately stealthily made a shadowclone and go under water following my clone.


    Then as it seemed like the ninjutsu of the enemy ninja was over we were close enough to them and we threw some projectiles towards them but then some other Mist ninja came in the front line, they used [Water Style: Water Wall Jutsu] and the projectiles were blocked though some did go through. Then suddenly snow starts falling.


    Then Tsunde throes a kunai which touches a snow falke and the snow flake blossoms like a flower but with ice spikes all around it. Then I hear Tsunade shouts loudly.


    "EVERYONE UNDERWATER NOW."


    All of the other ninja go underwater even my clone. I just pop my head above water to get some air and go under water immediately. Then some snow flakes touch the water and start freezing the water all around us.


    They are obviously trying to soficate us.


    Then Tsunde goes touches the ice then brings hes fist back and throws a puch at it and it immediately starts to crack and it then gets destroyed.


    Then we all go above water and the battle starts.


    Tsunade goes after a feminine looking guy. I can tell by his body that he is a guy it seems like he is the leader of his camp.


    ...


    -Clone Pov-


    I just take out two kunai and I run wind chakra through them. I then go against then so a hail of kunais being thrown towards me so I just throw my kunais in the air and use


    [Water Style: Water Wall] it stops the projectiles but then I sense some jutsu coming towards me.


    I can see a tsunami of water coming towards me. I see the jutsu, look at the ninja behind me and I remember...


    In every battlefield I was...


    I used to hide like a rat... always afraid...


    always weak... I hate it... even though it was necessary... that weakness I hate it... not having your fate in your hands...


    The tsunami is coming closer...


    I look at it and with a smile in my face I use [Wind Style: Chakra Scapel].


    AND THE TSUNAMI IS CUT IN HALF

 Chapter 59 - The Realization

    (Clone POV continues)


    The tsunami is coming closer...


    I look at it and with a smile in my face and I use [Wind Style: Chakra Scapel].


    AND THE TSUNAMI IS CUT IN HALF....


    ...


    When I came to this world...


    I didn''t know how weakness can be this frustrating....


    BUT I NEED MORE POWER TO BECOME REALLY STRONG...


    I then see mist ninja coming towards me I see thousands of them but what I am really concentrated on is the 4 ninja leading them.


    The special thing about them is the swords they have, they are four out of the seven ninja swordsmen...


    Kiba: Twin swords that are imbued with lightning which increases their cutting power. They are said to be the sharpest swords ever forged.


    Kubikirib?ch?: A giant sword with a butcher-knife-like appearance, the wielder can use the semi-circle on the blade to decapitate an opponent''s head, hence the name. The sword has an ability to regenerate using the iron absorbed from the blood of those it cuts down. It is also called Executioners Blade.


    Nuibari: A sword in the shape of a needle with a long thin wire that resembles thread attached to it, which can be used to pierce enemies and "sew" them together in human bundles.


    Shibuki: A sword that has a scroll full of explosive tags incorporated into it, lined up behind the blade, combining swordsmanship and explosions.


    They are definitely dangerous...


    The swords that is... not the ninja using them, they are at best elite jounin but they have become to depended on a weapon I can tell that much... but still I will not underestimate them.


    In the bingo book they all have a bounty between 50 million and 65 million ryo.


    Mostly because of their swords. But that still makes them S rank ninja.


    As they get closer I give a signal to Shikaramu Nara to take command and go to battle. As I do so I stealthily put explosive bombs all around my body as soon as they see me they signal each other and immediately start attacking me not leaving me time to think. As soon as they are close I....


    ...


    (Yami POV)


    I see the clone explode... but I can still feel the ninja swordsman.


    I make another clone but this one I order to go and order Shikaramu to do something for me.


    I then go outside of the underwater and go towards the four ninja swordsmen I look at them and as soon as the smoke clears out I see them unharmed...


    How???....


    Aha I see so they used the Explosion Blade to cancel out my explosion and the Executioners Blade as a shield to propel them backwards....


    They are experienced and work good as a team I will give them that...


    I take out two kunai and then go towards them as soon as I get close the guy with the Executioners Blade comes slashing towards me as soon as it does I act like I am going to block it as soon as my kunai touches his sword, it cuts right through it. Because I ran wind chakra through my kunai as soon as our blades touched. He jumped back but I knew my wind chakra will still cut him...


    Then as I am trapped I see the guy with the Explosion Sword slashing towards me...


    ''SHIIIIIITTTTTT''


    ... [Author note (cliffhanger)..... *then I feel a gun pressed against my head* I start sweating and say... "I -I was just joking"]


    (Go On with the story now)


    ...


    ''SHIIIITTTTTT''


    I use my super strength technique and force my arm to get cut off in the wire as


    I then grab my cut off arm with my teeth and jump back.


    I see the 4 ninja swordsmen stare at me with a little surprise... after all an eleven year old kid had the willpower to cut off his own arm.


    I understand something now....


    I look back at them and say to them with with gratitude while smiling.


    "I am really grateful to you guys you made me learn something."


    The one with the Explosion Blade looks at me and says bewildered...


    "Have you gone crazy kid."


    ''I came so close to death today...''


    I then put my cut off arm towards my stump and think...


    ''I was really a fool... TO THINK... THAT I COULD ACHIEVE MY DREAM WITHOUT GIVING IT MY ALL.''


    [STRENGTH OF A 100 SEALS] ACTIVATE.

 Chapter 60 - Understanding

    ''I was really a fool... TO THINK... THAT I COULD ACHIEVE MY DREAM WITHOUT GIVING IT MY ALL.''


    [STRENGTH OF A 100 SEALS] ACTIVATE.


    As soon as I do that tattoos start spreading all over my small 11 year old body. When it is finished I look at my detached arm and see that it has connected with the stump I squeeze my hand in a fist to test it and everything feels normal. What amazing power....


    I just activated [Creation Rebirth] to heal myself and the process is so quick...


    it really is bizarre.


    Though I should end this fast after all I am spending chakra that I have in my seal plus my lifespan to reattach my arm... But I should also take this more seriously now... no joking around and getting drunk on this microscopic power of mine.


    I run towards the four ninja swordsmen and as soon as I get close the Explosion Sword guy attempts to blast me apart. But as soon as he does that I jump on top of his sword and use


    [Earth Style: Iron Skin] to protect myself from the explosion and any internal damage is healed by [Creation Rebirth].


    I then take out a kunai and am about to stab it in his eye but it is stopped by the Lightning Swords guy and the Executioners blade swordsman is about to cut me and I don''t see them but I know there are some wires around me by the Needle Swordsman.


    Even though it seems I am in a pinch....


    It was all according to plan....


    [Chain Jail] then a huge amount of chakra condenses in my back and a chain comes out of it. Then I swing the heavy looking chain around their heads.


    *Crunch**Crunch**Crunch*


    Three necks broke and twisted in weird ways...


    I surprisingly took out all three of them... as expected of a technique able to hold down the 6 tails... though it is very chakra intensive even with my chakra stored in the seal... now it is only the Needle Swordsman... he looks towards me.... and I thought he would be angry that I killed his comrades... but he just turned around..... and ran....


    Well I am definitely not letting my enemies escape and come back for revenge. He knows my trump cards, he knows to much about me already...


    HE NEEDS TO DIE...


    I pick up the three ninja swords and the corpses and put them all in a storage scroll and ran after him carefully not to get myself trapped...


    These are the times I wish I had a sharingan or byakugan to see this stuff...


    As I chase after him I keep my [Chain Jail] active just in case... there are also some Mist ninja who try to get in my way but they are quickly killed...


    After some time the Needle Swordsman turned around and he raised his hand towards me with his palm open and then squeezed it into a fist.


    [Sewing Cocoon]....


    All of a sudden thousands of wires come out from under water and make a sphere of strings all around me and they are getting closer.


    ''SHIIIIIITTT this guy is the trickiest opponent I have ever fought...''


    Then I just wrap my chain around myself.... [Chain Jail: Cocoon]... I am able to protect myself like this from the wires...


    When I rip out of the cocoon I see that I am surrounded by Mist ninja....


    ''I knew this would be a trap but common you don''t need to take me so seriously after all I am just a kid...''


    I sense around 109 chakra signatures who have surrounded me most of them are chunin with with some genin in them and a couple of jounin....


    This is really bad... their numbers are to big I will run out of stamina if I fight them all, that is if I don''t get my head cut off first by a surprise attack. I don''t have a giant summon to help me take care of big numbers of ninja.


    I just look at them and am about to use a wide range genjutsu on them all and run away.... but then I get the memories of my clone who went to order Shikaramu and to tell him my strategy....


    Well then it seems like my luck just turned around a little....


    I just look at my enemies and think sinisterly....


    WELL THEN TIME TO ''TAKE CARE'' OF SOME OF YOU....

 Chapter 61 - Not Everything is Going to Plan

    I just look at my enemies and think sinisterly....


    WELL THEN TIME TO ''TAKE CARE'' OF YOU....


    ....


    I continue acting worried to not give off


    anything then I start howling....


    *HOWL*


    [Demonic Illusion: Dog Binding] even though it is a low chakra cost genjutsu it is still takes a lot of chakra to use as an AOE attack.


    If I didn''t have Tsunade''s seal that stores chakra I would be exhausted already....


    As soon as I see that my genjutsu takes effect I throw a smoke bomb and make a run for it... I sense a couple of them brak out of my genjutsu but there are still almost 100 ninja stuck in it....


    As I am making a run I notice the people who broke out of the genjutsu are not chasing me, I was going to stealthily take them out and then join Shikaramu to complete my plan...


    DAMN IT... I AM REALLY HAVING A BAD DAY...


    I need to kill the Needle Swordman... he has to much information in my skills and a battle between ninja is a battle between information... him spreading information about me in my bingo book page is like him making me weaker because people are going to take countermeasures against my abilities.


    I don''t give a sh*t how many Konoha ninja die. But me getting weaker is not allowed.


    I will abandon the plan then I am killing the Needle Swordsman today no matter what.


    But I am in a big disadvantage of our battle being in water. And I only know a handful of water ninjutsu.


    And if I sneak attack them the Needle Swordsman definitely has string traps around himself so I might end up ambushed instead... I wish I had a sharingan to be able to see them....


    ''Wait.... we are in the middle of the battlefield.... I can get a sharingan... this is actually the best way to get a sharingan.... Okay I need to calm down first and plan.''


    I look towards the mist ninjas direction and I turn around and flee from this place... I will definitely kill everyone of you... for my safety and peace of mind...


    I then deactivate [Strength of a 100 Seals].


    I make another clone and he goes towards Shikaramu to give him instructions on continuation of the plan.


    I run towards where the Konoha and Mist ninja are clashing.


    ...What was Tsunade thinking when she gave this order to fight in the middle of the sea against Mist ninja.


    I go to the frontline where the main fighting is going on I then make a clone to protect me.


    I see a couple of Uchiha around the battlefield. I know most of the clan people in the battlefield. I take out some binoculars and look for a person with a sharingan and with about the same pupils size as mine that after I seal my Sharingan it will look natural, to compliment this I also have natural pupiles eyes.


    After all even if temporary I am not having a faulty sharingan....


    I find a person who fits the description he seems about 15 years old with a one tomoe sharingan in both eyes... well I can work with that.


    Then I use a chakra suppressing seal to hide from some byakugan users.


    That means I can''t use chakra externally.


    Still I go underwater and as the battle is raging on I ho under the Uchiha and just grab him and underwater I put a senbon on his neck and I put him in a fake death state. I then drag him away from the battlefield.


    I then destroy the chakra suppressing seal.


    ....


    He will take him to land and hide him in a place and he will then dispel himself.


    ....


    Well then time to complete the plan with Shikaramu.


    Then I go back to the battlefield and immediately chanel a huge amount of chakra and...


    *HOWL*


    [Demonic Illusion: Dog Binding]


    All of the chunin and genin ninja on the battlefield are paralyzed then as the jounin break out on my genjutsu...


    [Shadow Possession Jutsu]


    Shadows come from the depth of the sea and bind all of the moving Jounin. All of a Sudden all the Konoha jounin come to my side and we all start doing handsigns.


    [Fire Style: Flame Thrower]


    As they finish that I and my clones come forward and use...


    [Wind Style: Great Breakthrough]


    To fuel the flames....


    Even though we are on water a tsunami of flames is created from our combination jutsu....


    ....


    Then I dispel my clones. The Konoha ninja immediately start killing the lucky survivors.


    Well I just turned this around. I sense that some lucky ninja were able to escape.


    Then I look towards a certain direction...


    Well then....

 Chapter 62 - This is Teamwork

    Well I just turned this around. I sense that some lucky ninja were able to escape.


    Then I look towards a certain direction...


    Tsunade is there fighting with the Mist camp Leader...


    Well then....


    ....lets go see what is going on in there.


    ....


    When I arrive there I see that one of the fighters is missing an arm... obviously it was the feminine looking Mist Camp Leader and he seems pretty exhausted too. Well it seems like Tsunade has this in the bag... But I am not honorable enough to let it slow down my plans for even a second.


    I stealthily go behind the camp leader who is distracted by Tsunade and his injuries. And I just punch him in the back of his head....


    *SQUELCH*


    Ewww gross his head just popped like a ballon.... Well anyway I look towards Tsunade.


    Tsunade just looks back at me and says pointedly.


    "I had that handled... why did you interfere."


    Well obviously I need to get something done you blonde bimbo...


    Opposite of what I am thinking I just say to her.


    "Well if your pride is hurt.... walk it off... we are ninja we don''t need that stuff."


    She just looks at me and I don''t let her analyse my words further to see if I insulted her or not, I obviously did...


    "I need your permission to hunt down all the retreating enemies."


    And obviously get myself some brand new sharingan.


    She then looks at me turns around and starts running towards the Konoha camp.


    I follow her and as I do so she says...


    "No I need you to help me heal the injured Konoha ninja... plus it might be a trap."


    SH*T.... I knew there was a high chance that she would refuse... well I guess it''s time to pull out the big guns.


    "If you let me chase them I can PROMISE you I will be able to end the war with mist within the year..."


    She just looks at me without any of her playful attitude and says seriously.


    "How much time will you need."


    "3 weeks."


    I answered without a beat.... I could handle the job at max with in 6 days but I don''t know how much time I will need to get used to the sharingan.


    She looks at me and says...


    "Make that two weeks... I know you like to be prepared about everything and just said three weeks just in case..."


    Well with us spending quite some time with each other she has learned some of my ''quirky'' traits that I have... well more like I let her learn some... after all if I seem perfect that is very suspicious.


    Then I look at her and say again.


    "Soooo is that a yes."


    *sigh* "Yes.... it is a yes."


    As soon as she says that I sprint in to the side and I go toward the direction of the Mist as soon as I am far enough I change directions and go towards the Land of Noodles where our camp is...


    Well then time to get some sharingan way before plan... but it isn''t really a huge change from the plan.... I was still planning on getting some sharingan just that it was going to be later....


    As soon as I arrive in land I immediately remotely cancel my clone and I get his memories of the location where he hid the Uchiha.


    I immediately start going there.


    ...


    I go to a forest and in a random place use an earth justsu and the ground opens up and I walk on the walls and start going down while closing up the earth behind me.


    When I arrived at the bottom which is quite deep I must say... well as expected of my clone... he takes great precautions.


    I then make a crude earth platform in the place of a table, take a white cloth of a storage scroll of mine together with some surgical equipment.


    I put the white cloth over the table and I took out a jar with strange liquid.


    I then put the Uchiha on the ''table'' lying on his back. I made a clone and he held started tying the Uchiha in the table with earth shackles and started putting chakra suppressing seals all over the uchihas body. Then he closed his eyes and kept running chakra through the seals to keep them always up that even if the uchiha tries to break them he won''t be able to do so because my clone has higher chakra amount than him...


    While I take some of my scaples and put a surgical mask on and order my clone to do the same.... I pull out the senbon and the Uchiha and he wakes up. I also put another senbon in his lung area to stop him from making noise.


    Well he definitely won''t hold that pride after I am done with him... I don''t really know if I can evolve my sharingan beyond one tomoe after I take it. Kakashi was able to do so but there were several unsolved and mysterious circ.u.mstances involved in that.


    So I will try to evolve my sharingan to at least three tomoe.... how I will do that.... obviously by torturing the Uchiha.


    I will fully evolve his sharingan and see if I can make him awaken the Mongekyo Sharingan. I have chakra suppressing seals all over him so he won''t be able to use amaterasu on me or something like that.


    LET THE PROCEDURE BEGIN....

 Chapter 63 - Sharingan!?!

    I will fully evolve his sharingan and see if I can make him awaken the Mongekyo Sharingan. I have chakra suppressing seals all over him so he won''t be able to amaterasu me or something like that.


    LET THE PROCEDURE BEGIN....


    ....


    -(3 hours later)


    The three tomoe sharingan has tears all over it by now.


    Well he got the 3 tomoe sharingan... he got them during the first hour of the torture...


    *Tch*


    Well I guess I should start healing him again to make sure he doesn''t die....


    Hhhhmmmmm I guess I should use my last resort... I use..


    [Water Clone Justsu] well this is the only other clone technique I know.... they only have 10% of my strength so pretty useless in a fight but I need it to use my last torture technique... I don''t wanna remember that. I also put a blind fold on my Shadow Clone which is holding the Chakra Suppressing seals on the Uchiha...


    I turn around and after a couple of minutes....


    "AAAAAAHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH."


    I then turn around and see the Uchiha has blood running all over his mouth.


    So he forced his lungs to scream and in the process destroyed them.... he is gonna die choking in his own blood.... in a couple of seconds.


    But it doesn''t matter it was all worth it... in his eyes I see the sharingan has a


    shuriken pattern on it....


    YESSS A I GOT A MONGEKYO NOW....


    Anyway I take out his eyes and put them in a jar, dispel my water clone and cut of the head of the Uchiha just in case...


    I then also dispel the shadow clone and make two others...


    I nod at them and burn the Uchiha''s body though I do keep a little of his blood in a storage scroll of mine for a project I had in mind.


    I then lie down on the table and one of the clones stabs me with a senbon and I am knocked out. Next time I wake up I will have a Mongekyo...


    ...


    - (10 Hours Later)-


    I wake up and I feel well rested I probably slept around 10 hours... and I can see normally I look at the clones who are just standing there. Then one of them said.


    "10 hours."


    Ok so that confirms it I take out a scroll and I take out a mirror. I look into it and I see my eyes


    I see the weird skin texture around my skin.... there is actually a Fuinjutsu Seal on my scull around my eye sockets. My eyes have their normal colour towards them. I then dispel my clones and make a new one. Then I take my stuff go above ground together with my clone and then collapse underground ''room''.


    I don''t get the instinctual knowledge about my Mongekyo so I will have to test it out myself.


    I look in the mirror again.... I run chakra towards my eyes but as my sharingan activates Fuinjutsu markings appear in my skin...


    Well this is unexpected.... but I really won''t be showing my sharingan to anyone I wont kill.


    I look at my slowly rotating tomoe....


    I then look at my clone... everything seems clearer and I can see the chakra in my clone... I move my hand.... I see it moves in slow motion.... I tell my clone to punch the air with full speed... it''s still slow.... I move towards my clone...


    It seems like I am moving to slow... I now get it why the Uchiha got arrogant. I can copy any Ninjutsu and Taijutsu, I can do Genjutsu at only eyesight connection... I can see my enemies next move... this is quite amazing... still I will need some time to get used to it....


    Let''s try the Mongekyo now...


    Then suddenly my field of vision changes...


    *UGH*


    I immediately fall into my knees with a hand over my eye.... wow that is quite some pain... I look at my hand with some blood in it... so my eyes did bleed...


    It seems like my right eye has the ability to teleport me towards the place I am looking at...


    I then look at someplace else with my left eye...


    My field of vision changer again...


    So my left eye has the ability to teleport to a place I look also.....


    So I got one when I purchased two it definitely feels like I got scammed...


    -(10 minutes later)-


    So it kind of covers the others weakness....


    Also to heal my Mongekyo from going blind is going to be a pain... I can figure out a way and I don''t have the blindness problem yet but still though....


    Now I guess it is time to give chase to the Mist ninja....


    Even though they have a 10 hour headstart we will see who will win the race.... I activate my three tomoed sharingan....


    [Shunshin]

 Chapter 64 - Battle’s Outcome Is Decided... Before It Even Starts

    Now... I guess it is time to give chase to those Mist ninja.


    I''m sure that Needle Swordsman thinks himself lucky to have escaped his latter comrades'' fates... How foolish¡­


    Even though they have a 10-hour headstart, that is nothing to me now. This race is more like a test run for my newly acquired and evolved Sharingan.


    I activate my three-tomoed Sharingan¡­


    [Shunshin]


    ....


    ....


    ....


    Even though I can see clear as day while performing Shunshin at night and do it with pinpoint precision, there''s an imbalance in my previously perfect chakra control.


    One that prevents me from going full speed as I have to constantly make adjustments.


    A foreseeable complication nonetheless.


    Same as with any new skill or power, I still need to get used to it in order to use it effectively in battle. Although thanks to my nigh-perfect chakra control, it shouldn''t take more than a few times...


    ....


    ....


    ....


    -4 hours later-


    ...


    I''ve been traveling at speeds unseeable to the human eye for quite a while now. Their chakra trails start to become clearer by the second... They''re close...


    Even though I had to stop and track their direction a couple of times, I''ve finally caught up to them.


    In water that would''ve been a little harder, but here in the mainland I could see their lingering chakra trails with relative ease.


    Now I''ve caught their scent too, so I am sure they are pretty close. I am officially in Mist territory now... The confrontation is imminent.


    The Water Country island closest to the Land of Noodles is where the battlefield lies. I had prepared for the worst and this -luckily for me- is not it.


    I move deep into enemy territory...


    ...


    ...


    2 kilometers into the island, there lies the Mist military camp. I take a vantage position on top of a tree and start doing recon.


    The first thing to catch my attention is a makeshift earth wall surrounding the perimeter, built with Justus. Its usefulness being only to alert them in case of a surprise attack and nothing else. A head-on attack anyway.


    They are expecting an army to come after them... I laugh at their stupidity.


    Without their inexhaustible water sources, they would''ve been annihilated long before, and the proof lies in front of me.


    I hear chatter and even some laughter from time to time. They are resting...


    Security is nowhere near as tight as one could expect from a military camp this size and so relatively close to the enemy. Though I must say they are still on guard and haven''t given up on their lives just yet...


    As I continue scouting, looking for weaknesses in the perimeter, then I barely manage to see something with my Sharingan...


    I see almost microscopic chakra strings around the camp...


    WTF...


    ...Is this how the Mist ninja always knew when I was going to attack... I didn''t think that the mist ninja would be able to use chakra strings this way.


    I was too quick to discard their cognitive abilities... *Tch* I must prevent myself from underestimating my enemy again... Underestimating me was the doom of hundreds upon of poor bastards. Who is to say that I couldn''t fall victim to the same mistake?


    Anyway, I get my head back in the game, looking even more carefully at the strings and...


    Hmph... So that''s how it''s gonna be huh...


    Well then, time to move. These ninjas won''t die from inanition while I wait.


    ...


    I go underground so as to not be noticed by the Mist ninja. The perimeter was breached just like that. Their defenses still mean nothing to me in theory, but I can''t afford to make that assumption before actually engaging...


    I made sure to readjust my calculations for this battle accordingly, just in case.


    I stealthily come out from under the ground. I obviously don''t immediately go to kill the Needle Swordsman. After all, even with the Sharingan, I am not sure that I can take him out stealthily, and would only get myself surrounded by hundreds of ninja. Not good.


    I''ll do it the right way. The cold-blooded way.


    I start off killing the weakest genin by the dozens and swiftly get to the chunin...


    Some minutes and dropped bodies later, I''ve killed 202 ninja. As expected, it was noticed by the patrolling jonin that people were being killed.


    But they still didn''t know my location... I remained unseen and unheard. That body count


    kept rising despite their efforts to find me.


    I''m dealing with the cannon fodder that might interfere in my fight against the Needle Swordsman. I will allow no imponderables in our duel.


    Relaying in my speed and clean kills, in 20 minutes I had killed everyone except the Needle Swordsman without allowing them any time to even know what I was doing.


    As I originally expected, they never stood a chance.


    With the help of the Sharingan, I could take care of all the minuscule details. Throw in some genjutsu and like that, I''m able to kill them all.


    The Swordsman seemed to be more concerned with setting up his string defense and preparing for the imminent fight against me, than with helping out his "comrades". He probably thought himself untouchable and didn''t want to risk it.


    I duly thank him for his cooperation.


    Now it''s time to cash in my ch.i.p.s and take him out.


    I finally reveal myself, and stand 20 meters away from him, letting my wonderful Sharingan do some intimidating for me. He tried to hide it, but he was certainly shocked to see I had it.


    After all, we''ve already fought and he identified me as Inuzuka... not that it matters what he thinks, to be honest. He''ll be dead in a few moments.


    ...


    We keep staring at each other... but this isn''t a child''s game. This is a battle between elite ninja.


    Right now each one is observing the other''s stance, analyzing outcomes and risks... planning the next -and possibly last- move. That''s what a ninja showdown is. All or nothing.


    He an advantage in this terrain because he has a wire trap shield all around him by tying it around the trees and with the help of his sword he can control those wires with precision and speed.


    Terrain advantage? Now that''s something new.


    He must also have a greatly developed calculation ability. After all, just a wrong move and he could very well cut himself to pieces.


    But nothing I haven''t taken into consideration.


    I then look at all the threads and calculate a trajectory...


    This is so easy now... I take out a shuriken and slightly blow on its edge, to get it infused with a generous amount of wind chakra... Augmenting its slashing capabilities tenfold.


    I throw the shuriken towards the Needle Swordsman and immediately after, I secretly throw something else, keeping it hidden inside the shadow of the shuriken...


    Then as the shuriken is cutting through some of his wires suddenly...


    *Swish*


    A head flies into the air...


    <Shadow Shuriken>


    Well... This certainly was anti-climatic...


    But well this is life I guess... Not a problem for me though.


    Thrill and excitement don''t matter. Only results. Positive results.


    I had thrown the first shuriken with wind chakra to distract him from noticing the second shuriken (the one hidden in the shadow of the first one) which had mangled on the wires and cut his head with his own wires...


    Turns out he wasn''t as good at calculations as he thought he was.


    Normally the chance of this happening is .01%... but with the Sharingan, I can turn most odds in my favor. With its prediction ability together with my knowledge of physics and reactions, I was able to make the probability of this scenario happening with 99.99% accuracy.


    Talk about overpowered bloodlines.


    I take the Needle Sword... And now I have four of the seven Mist Swords... The 4/4 of those I''ve faced. I also take the Swordsman''s Head to claim the bounty on it...


    Actually... scratch that...


    I burn the head right there. He witnessed I had the Sharingan and that is a big no-no... One of the biggest for me right now.


    After doing that I just burn down the rest of the camp and disintegrate the earth wall with a couple of wind Jutsu. It wasn''t even that strong, to begin with. Nothing remains.


    I don''t want or need anything from here. I especially make sure to burn the bodies so that not even a single bone gets left behind.


    No Edo Tensei corpse spilling my secrets now.


    Knowing the future is so good... I mean not only do I know the strengths and weaknesses of some of the strongest ninja in history... but I can plan along with almost 100% accuracy of my plan succeeding.


    The only thing that might mess things up is that infamous Butterfly Effect...


    Not that I care about it, but that doesn''t keep me from taking measures against it. Like when I destroyed the Sky Village. No need to leave anyone alive especially the kids to come back for revenge 10 years later. And just to be sure I took the 0 tails also.


    Once I am done with the camp I eat some food from my storage scroll and I deactivate my Sharingan.


    I didn''t plan to get a Sharingan so soon but I guess it will have to do for now and its Mangekyou ability is pretty good, for now.


    I will definitely change it later though.


    As I finish up my rations, I get up and then make way for Konoha''s camp...


    Hmmm...


    I wonder how Tsunade will react when I show her four of the Seven Swords of the Mist...

 Chapter 65 - Back At Konohas Camp

    Chapter 65


    ¦î¦î¦î¦î¦î¦î¦î¦î¦î¦î¦î


    ???????????????????? ????????: ????????????????????????????????????


    ???????????????????????? ????????: ????????????????????_????????????


    ¦ï¦ï¦ï¦ï¦ï¦ï¦ï¦ï¦ï¦ï¦ï


    ...


    ...


    ...


    I get up and then make way for Konoha''s camp...


    Hmmm¡­


    I wonder...


    What will Tsunade''s reaction be when I show her four of the Seven Swords of the Mist? ...


    ¡­


    ....


    ....


    As I arrive at Konoha''s camp I immediately go towards the command tent in the very center of the camp.


    I step inside, and as soon as I enter, my eyes meet hers...


    Tsunade''s... she''s standing up arms crossed, close to her seat at the center of the table; the one with the strategic map and doc.u.ments.


    And she is giving me that annoyed "I''m gonna make your face my punching bag" expression. Nothing unusual in her to be honest...


    In a moment''s notice, I have the undivided attention of every jonin in the room. I don''t pay much attention to the rest and say:


    "What''s the matter Tsunade-sensei?"


    **Tch**


    After a loud tongue cl.i.c.k.i.n.g, she just turned her head in another direction so as to not look at me...


    Hahaha wow. She sure as hell is letting her childish side take over now... There''s a sannin for ya.


    At the lack of an answer, -one with words anyway- my gaze turns to Shikaramu Nara as if requesting an explanation...


    **Sigh**


    "What a drag..."


    "It has been decided by the Hokage and the Konoha Council that Tsunade will be sent to another theater. They need her advanced medical-nin skills desperately."


    "Our frontline against the Land of Lightning has suffered increasingly heavy casualties in the camps'' infirmaries..."


    ...


    *Sigh*


    ...


    "Therefore, as her second in command,  naturally you are appointed as the Commanding Officer of the forces in the Land of Water..."


    ...


    ...


    OOOOHH YEESSSS!!


    Almost...


    It was hard to keep my grin from showing up in my 11-year-old face...


    Finally, I have the authority and power to do some of the more complex bloodline experimentation I''ve been meaning to for a long time... This will greatly further my plans...


    But still though, taking Tsunade away from the theater... It will definitely weaken my forces...


    But they can''t exactly let a Senju take orders from an Inuzuka, kid or otherwise... Even if I am an S-rank ninja¡­


    And no matter how they sugarcoat it, I know what they are doing... The Land of Lightning division is constantly suffering heavy casualties...


    Hmph... And that is why I love politics... They''re putting me to the test... To see if I can replicate the feat I pulled off against the Land of Sky...


    Probably Danzo''s idea... As I expected...


    Although they seem to trust my abilities, enough to put a child in command of the 2nd largest theater anyway...


    But the things is, that they''re underestimating me just as well...


    Not contacting me directly as soon as I arrived at the camp... No summon delivering a message as I was en route¡­ Even ignoring my clone...


    No doubt, the pretension is to have Shikaramu as the one in actual command.


    They know I''m not stupid, and that I''d figure it out sooner rather than later¡­ They''re trying to pass it as a controlled test of my capabilities¡­ when in reality they''re putting my mask to the test¡­ The want to see ''just how cunning this kis'' and if I suppose a ''potential threat'' to them.


    Even if they tried to hide it, it has Hiruzen Sarutobi written all over it. That pipe-smoking rascal...


    I mean, sure I might get all the renown. But if I don''t have the power and authority, all of that doesn''t matter. Fame is irrelevant to my plans... At least for now.


    Political scheming sure is complicated and entertaining.


    On a different note, looks like that 4 Swordsmen of the Mist debrief is old news to them right now.


    I had already sent a clone with my mission report as soon as I finished "cleaning" out the camp remains, and while it''s protocolary to be debriefed by one''s dispatching officer (in this case Tsunade), it shouldn''t become a problem for me later on given the circ.u.mstances.


    This actually works great for me; the fewer questions asked, the better. They already know what I wanted them to know.


    The icing on the cake is that 4 Swords of the Mist I "collected" remain in my possession...


    ...


    ...


    Anyway, after a couple minutes'' worth of a somewhat awkward silence, I look at Tsunade and in a fake sad voice I break the ice with one of my patented child-mask jokes...


    *Sigh*


    "So the student has surpassed the teacher¡­ Huh?..."


    "Don''t worry Tsunade... I''ll never forget what you did for me once I become Hokage..."


    Tsunade then turns to me with an even more pissed-off look (was that even possible at this point) and says:


    ¡­


    "You are REALLY pissing me off Yami¡­ Don''t push it..."


    I just smirk slightly, only to then get serious and say in a tone as domineering as a child''s voice can allow:


    "I have some things I want to discuss about the new battle plan with former commander Tsunade. In private..."


    They just nod and comply.


    Now that we''re all alone, I look towards Tsunade and say.


    "You know they are doing this to you because you didn''t meet their expectations, right?"


    *Tch*


    "I told you not to push it...."


    "Do I really look like I''m joking right now, Tsunade-sensei?"


    ...


    *Sigh*


    She sits down on her chair, throwing her feet over the table and bringing her hands to the back of her head. The cue of me using honorifics worked.


    "I get what you mean Yami... I know... it''s just... complicated ok? They expect me to pull off miracles just because I am a Senju."


    "Well I do feel sorry for you but... I need you to do me a favor."


    She gives a small nose exhale in amus.e.m.e.nt and then looks at me with a mildly curious look...


    "For my prodigious student, I guess I can... but depends on what it is."


    ¡­


    "I need you to take Shikaramu with you to the front against the Cloud Village..."


    ...


    ''Or else I am definitely killing him if he stays in here. A mountain can''t hold two kings. I don''t want to take the unnecessary risk of killing someone as smart as Shikaramu. He will definitely leave clues on who the murderer was... The cunning bastard...''


    ...


    "Why would you want to get rid of someone like Shikaramu?! He would be a valuable asset to you and has a great head on his shoulders."


    I look at her with a bored look and say...


    *Sigh*


    "Political schemes Tsunade... they are trying to undermine my authority and I haven''t even started."


    It took her a second to understand what I meant...


    "Oooh... I get it now..."


    "It won''t be easy to take him away though... After all, it won''t do my reputation any good if I make this decision..."


    ''Well, you won''t even have a reputation to worry about in the future... But I can''t tell her that¡­ So...''


    "Look at it this way: I''ll be on your debt and you can collect whenever... It can be ANY favor..."


    She looks surprised and harbors a little doubt in her eyes... After all, a favor from an S-rank ninja is not something that is given away without a good reason, even if it''s limited. In this case it isn''t...


    Of course, that would be an empty promise. She still doesn''t know me well enough to know... It''s not like I will keep my end of the deal if it''s against my best interests¡­ So let her think that I owe her anything she wants¡­


    I notice that she is in deep thought about this...


    ...


    ...


    "Ok, I will get him off your back... But DON''T forget your promise..."


    Excellent. Everything is falling into place, as it should.


    "Yes, thank you! ... You have no idea how much this will help me... I will now begin my plan to end this war!"


    Her eyes widen a little when she looks at me.... then she says...


    "I understand Yami..."


    Then she gets up and as she is leaving the tent she says:


    ...


    "Don''t make me regret this, you understand?"


    I give her a smirk as I nod...


    "I never break a promise Tsunade..."


    ...


    ...


    ...


    -(Tomorrow)-


    ...


    As I wake up I dispel the clone that keeps watch while I sleep.


    I get dressed, and after that do my daily morning exercise. It keeps me in peak physical and mental condition, as also I mix it up with light meditation.


    After an hour of training, I get out and ready to say goodbye to Tsunade and the squad she''s taking with her.


    I also make a shadow clone and order him stealthily to go back to Konoha and contact a certain Konoha Council member, with utmost secrecy...


    ...


    After I said goodbye to Tsunade, I waited for five hours just to be sure.


    I then called someone from the Torture & Interrogation Department and asked him:


    "Tell me... How many prisoners do we have here? ..."

 Chapter 66 - Advancement

    Chapter 66


    ?Story by: ????????????????????????????????????   ¦ò Edited by: ????????????????????_?????????????


    ...


    ...


    ...


    I then called someone from the Torture & Interrogation Department and asked him:


    "Tell me... How many prisoners do we have here? ... Give me a full report officer."


    ...


    With the characteristic expression of a torturer; one devoid of all emotion and as cold as your ex, he answers dutifully...


    "All of our prisoners were taken to the T&I facility on the outskirts of Konoha.  All except 6 jonin. The former commander ordered us to hold them in the camp, as she pretended to use them as bait to lure in the remaining Swordsmen of the Mist."


    "However, there have been no signs of enemy movement near the camp, and ever since Inuzuka-sama''s assault, they have retreated even further in order to regroup. Those 6 have been forsaken by Kirigakure."


    "Hmph, I see... Anyway, do any of them possess any of the village''s special bloodlines? ..."


    "Most notably, there is a Yuki clan member, but he is currently in a dire overall health condition and all valuable intel has already been extracted from him. Therefore, I''ve scheduled his execution in 4 hours. That is all Inuzuka-sama!"


    "Good job officer. Dismissed."


    "Hai!"


    ...


    Well... That was certainly disappointing... I was hoping for at least a Yoton (Lava Release) user... But alas, we can''t always get what we want now, do we?


    ...


    ...


    I go towards my tent and get to work right away.


    Everything''s ready to begin the construction of my own private lab at first light tomorrow. As the camp''s Commander, I have available to me all the space and resources necessary to build an underground lab. This way I can safely keep my most ''s.e.n.s.i.t.i.v.e'' material away from prying eyes...


    I''ll obviously set each and every kind of territory protection Fuinjutsu I''m able to... Can''t leave my ocean of knowledge open for just anyone to swim in... Not even an Anbu...


    This undertaking won''t be a secret per se, but only the quartermaster and some camp officials know of it...


    Works for me.


    On the other hand, I''m sure the Brass back in Konoha will see this as standard procedure as well. Given that I''m Tsunade''s best and last student and a somewhat reputed medic-nin myself they should see no problem with me ''looking for new and better ways of healing their soldiers''. If anything, they should encourage it...


    They also won''t expect results anytime soon, thanks to medicine in this world advancing at the speed of a crippled slug...


    I don''t have to report to them either. They''ll probably have their eyes and ears everywhere within the camp by now... But that also means I''ll have tread very carefully... Even more so now than my ''first'' mask has already been seen through...


    Nothing I can''t take measures against though.


    Anyway... This is the power I wanted... The power that I needed to make some real headway on my projects...


    Shikaramu had to go and there''s no doubt about it...


    Also, I didn''t have to kill him, so that''s a plus. I wouldn''t want to deal with his annoyingly cunning self...


    Yet...


    ...


    ...


    -(Time Skip. 3 months later)-


    ...


    These past few months I have spent doing a lot of research, while a shadow clone does all the tedious work of running a military campaign. I dispel the clone every night, take in all of his memories and experiences, and then make another that already has his orders for the next day...


    I''ve mastered the Shadow Clone Jutsu at such a level that nobody has noticed the deception... As long as he doesn''t get attacked, everything will continue to run smoothly...


    Whilst the real me is attending more pressing matters than dispatching cannon fodder out to die and such...


    Instead, I like to focus on my experiments and research, but of course, that doesn''t mean that I can just neglect my duties as Commanding Officer of the Mist Division... And the Shadow Clone patented method has proved to be my ace card in this affair...


    ''Excellence and discipline'' is my motto. I like to run a tight ship and I''ve done well so far. Having zero tolerance for any insubordination or inefficiency, no one dares to question my authority now.


    Good. I intend to keep it that way.


    I must say... These past three months have been quite productive, to say the least...


    Most recently, I''ve been working with my brand new test subjects I''ve been kindly procured by my hardworking subordinates...


    I am currently going over my new Taijutsu moves. My body has gotten a little stronger now as I haven''t dismissed my training, not one day.


    Of course, when I say ''going over'' I mean using a prisoner as my punching bag.


    This way, I get the most accurate data regarding my damage output, chakra and stamina consumption and replenishment rates, the effects of striking certain Tenketsu (Chakra Points), and a long etcetera...


    This is formal scientific work and without precise data results, there''s no point in me wasting my time with these experiments...


    Now, analyzing the current condition of this used-to-be-jonin meat bag, I start taking notes...


    The man isn''t conscious, obviously. He is a black-haired feminine man from the Yuki clan... I have already conducted several experiments on him, so he evidently looks like a mess...


    23 days of incessant physical and mental strain, have rendered his already weak mind completely blank and at this point is hardly able to process the simplest of my orders.


    To be expected, since I have been trying different memory manipulation techniques, and additionally training my Sharingan''s genjutsu capabilities on him.


    His body is in an emaciated state with several healed and recent fractures, muscle tears all over, bruises, and some organ damage to top it all off.


    To be honest, he actually went beyond my calculations and managed to stay alive for 7.2 hours longer than I had predicted. I''ll make the pertinent modifications.


    Not my proudest piece of work, -I''ll admit as much- but it was a necessary one...


    There are many sacrifices to be made if I am to reach the apex, and his life is one that I''m willing to make...


    ...


    ...


    I go on with my ''session'', putting aside my pen and notebook...


    "Come here Number 1..."


    He comes towards me in a strange crawling motion fitting a zombie, and as soon as he is 2 meters away from me...


    *Slash*


    I cut his throat so fast that my movements couldn''t have been seen by the untrained eye, putting him out of his misery.


    I didn''t do this out of pity though, he simply is no longer useful to me.


    Afterward, I burn his body until nothing remains, as usual. I''ve implemented a crematory in the lab with an optimized exhaust system, and a chimney that remains hidden between some rocks; well beyond the camp''s premises.


    The remaining jonin prisoners have also seen the end of their usefulness. Their cause of death was my new Taijutsu Style called Death Fist.


    I secretly used my Sharingan to copy the basics of the Hyuga Taijutsu from a scout: the Gentle Fist.


    Even though the Gentle Fist itself can''t be used without a Byakugan, the main principle for my technique derives from it, along with a combination of the Eight Inner Gates technique, plus my Chakra Enhanced Strength technique.


    This particularly devastating Taijustu obliterates the Tenketsu of the target with a silent chakra shockwave, effectively crippling them in the best-case scenario and killing them in a full-on direct hit.


    However, it is not yet battle-ready. It''ll take some more trial and error in order to complete it, but the progress I''ve made so far is to not be disdained either. It''s just a matter of time, really...


    ...


    On another note, I have currently stopped studying the Flying Thunder God Jutsu.


    The reason being that, even though I now possess all of the Uzumaki Fuinjutsu and made substantial progress on that front as well, I''ve also inevitably hit a wall. And a quite considerable one at that...


    This is a technique that needs 100% of my attention to develop from now on -which I most certainly will eventually-.


    I''ve already grasped the core principles of the technique, but now I need to develop my very own kind of Technique Formula to be able to teleport.


    This ''formula'' consists of two elements: the fingerprint, that in this case would be the Fuinjutsu; and the ink with which to inscribe it: chakra.


    In theory, there wouldn''t be a problem, but the thing is that the kind of Fuinjutsu used in it is unlike any other. Anyone who tries to learn the technique has to start by creating their own Fuinjutsu mark. One that is tuned precisely to one''s chakra flow and vibration at the time of casting it.


    And chakra is the combination of Physical and Spiritual Energies...


    In other words, that means that each Technique Formula is unique for each individual that casts it. It''s basically tailored to a specific body, at a specific time, under specific conditions... Nigh impossible to replicate, no matter how many tests are run... At least with the current technology.


    So... the giant wall that stands in my way is this: Not even my shadow clones have a formula 100% identical to mine.


    Theirs might be almost 99.99%, but they don''t have a physical body that can be hurt or that needs to eat, et al. This becomes a problem when their Fuinjutsu mark, -the fingerprint- isn''t the same... And in turn, the formula is unequivocally altered.


    The solution to that dilemma, however, is also the main complication for me right now: I need to study the Jutsu on my own... That means no shadow clones hack, regrettably...


    Given the aforementioned, I postponed it at least until the 2nd Ninja War ends, in order to be able to study it on my own and dedicate myself fully to such endeavor.


    ...


    Going on with my inner monologue, I have completely unveiled the profound truths of the Eight Inner Gates technique, and have been trying to combine it with the Creation Rebirth technique. That would counteract the Eight Gates'' weakness: the destruction of one''s body inside out. Such a dreadful combination could very well become my trump card...


    Just remembering how Might Guy brought Six Paths Madara to his knees when he unleashed the Eighth Gate, is a testament to its undeniable potential... The potential to open the Eighth Gate without dying or crippling my body forever... It certainly puts things into perspective...


    But there comes the reason why not all ninja learn the Eight Gates technique, besides the difficulty of learning how to open the Gates...


    When even someone as untalented as Guy was able to do so... When just the First Gate would already be able to help any ninja tremendously in a battle...


    The reason for it couldn''t be more reasonable... And it is that whenever a Gate opens, you can''t use even the simplest of ninjutsu or genjutsu... The chakra is literally rampaging all around your body... It is statistically impossible, no matter how good the chakra control of the user is.


    Plus there''s a high chance of it backfiring, and for the user to only be able to use a weak Fireball Jutsu, with the First Gate open... Now imagine how it would be in the Third or Fourth... Let alone the Seventh...


    Though this method might be impossible, there should be a way to train your body using the Eight Gates...


    ...


    Finally... About my next course of action...


    During these three months, there have been no battles against the Mist, as they took huge losses... They lost around 30% of their army last time and there was even a high number of jonin casualties...


    There obviously have been some skirmishes though. Which I naturally obliterated and even took some new test subjects... Though they also died fast, as their level was at most chunin...


    Now that I''ve got my Sharingan 100% mastered (hell ye), I am planning on venturing into enemy territory once again... Obviously not with an army at my back, otherwise they''d notice that a hundred miles away...


    After all, the Mist still has scouts all around...


    ...


    I left my second in command -a random jonin officer- in charge, while I am away conducting my ''advanced reconnaissance tactics'' and ''preemptive trap setting''...


    Also, the shadow clone I commissioned to secretly go back to Konoha and contact a certain council member, has concluded his mission satisfactorily.


    I asked Danzo to give me some information on the Mist and their patrol routes. I also added in some bullsh*t speech about the greatness of Konoha and how we mustn''t lose any more forces over a lack of preparation.


    Obviously, I won''t be taking the ''safe route'' he ''graciously'' marked for me...


    Danzo is probably on my top 5 people I wouldn''t trust in this world no matter what.


    The true objective of that meeting, however, was to get a way in with Danzo. Firstly, because he has a way to get me more test subjects during peacetime, just as he did for Orochimaru in the canon...


    And secondly, because I also need him to vote for me when I contest for the title of Hokage...


    His political support is invaluable for my plans...


    ...


    ...


    I stealthily go out of the camp, only the jonin -including the Brass'' spies- know that I am going away... And I didn''t even go into much detail when I informed them of my departure...


    As soon as I''m a couple dozen meters outside of the camp...


    <Shunshin>


    So it begins, my journey well into the Land of Water...

 Chapter 67 - Land of Water? More like Land of Bloodlines...

    Chapter 67


    ?Story by: ????????????????????????????????????   ¦ò Edited by: ????????????????????_?????????????


    ...


    ...


    ...


    As soon as I''m a couple dozen meters outside of the camp...


    <Shunshin>


    So it begins, my journey well into the Land of Water...


    ¡­


    ...


    While on the road, I try to organize the information I got from Danzo and combine it with my knowledge of the canon Naruto timeline. This way I can finally get a clear picture of what is the current situation on the Land of Water...


    So... the Land of Water has the smallest landmass of the five great nations. Their territory is mostly water.


    The county''s landmass is composed of many islands, each having its own unique people and respective culture.


    The weather is temperate all-year-round and the islands are usually covered by mist. The islands themselves also feature many lakes.


    Little else is known about the country and it apparently leaves itself out of most political affairs. This is due to the fact that it is composed of vast islands relatively far from the continent containing the other four major countries.


    It''s doesn''t come as a surprise for each small settlement to have adopted an isolationist policy regarding foreign conflicts...


    What it is known, however, is that the country used to be overwhelmed by wars between clans during the Warring States Period...


    It was during this period, that most of the Kekkei Genkai users -and their clans- earned fearful reputations as slaughterers and monsters. Sometimes fighting for their own clan, sometimes selling themselves as mercenaries...


    It means that Obito didn''t start a civil war out of nowhere... He just gave them a little push... After all, even if the Mizukage says something like: ''Hey let''s kill anyone with a Kekkei Genkai'', no one is going to just say: ''Yeah that sounds like a good idea''...


    Not without a reason anyway...


    Also, the ninja clans who founded Kirigakure have a higher standing than the ones who were ''integrated'' after being conquered...


    Currently, the Mist Village in the brink of civil war... Danzo has been trying to make it happen for some time now... But the Mist Village Council and the Leaders of the Land of Water are no fools. They have been sending out the clan ninja on consistently hard and even suicidal missions...


    All of that just to keep civil war from erupting...


    Though that method is just a time bomb waiting to explode...


    The land of water also has a good relationship with the Land of the Sea. Kiri shinobi take a lot of missions from there.


    ...


    ...


    After some time, I have arrived in the Heart of the Land of Water. The main Island where Kirigakure and the Capital are. This is where the Daimyo lives.


    Also, there are going to be a lot of opportunities there.


    ...


    I think back on the several clan compound locations on the map that Danzo prepared for me. That bastard is really useful that is probably why the 3rd Hokage kept him around.


    Danzo is not afraid to get his hands dirty to get what he wants and doesn''t care about his reputation...


    Anyway, I change my direction towards a certain clan hideout...


    ...


    ...


    When I arrive there I see that the clan compound doesn''t have any strong chakra signals...


    I am not nice enough to let an opportunity like this go. Not when there is so much loot there for the taking...


    ...


    ...


    ...


    -(1 hour and 30 minutes later)-


    ...


    The Kaguya clan compound is all covered in blood. Civilians... Men, women, children, elderly... none were spared... They''ve all been killed in the most efficient way possible: their brains pierced with a senbon or throats slit with a kunai...


    ...


    (Third Person POV)


    In the engawa (Japanese style porch) of the Clan Head''s mansion, a person -or what remained of it- could be seen... The lifeless body nailed to the wall by dozens of senbon...


    There are clear signs of struggle... The cheeks slightly moistened, maybe by tears or just the night dew...


    And many other characteristics best left to the imagination...


    Right next to where the blood puddle stops its way through the wood... There''s a kid of approximately 10-13 years old, sitting in a lotus position on the floor, who appears to be reading some old books and scrolls...


    His eyes stand out in the dark... with a bloodshot color, along with strange markings on both of them...


    ...


    (End Third Person POV)


    ...


    The person nailed to the wall used to be the wife of the Clan Head. I had just tortured some information out of her.


    I am currently studying some books about the Kaguya Clan''s Kekkei Genkai: Shikotsumyaku (Dead Bone Pulse).


    It was an extremely rare and feared bloodline even within the clan itself. It was often regarded as the definitive Taijutsu Technique by many experts.


    But of course, that was without considering Kaguya''s Tomogoroshi no Haikotsu (Murderous Bone Ash) or the Eight Inner Gates Technique...


    In any case, all of the clan''s users of this Kekkei Genkai are out on a battlefield right now... Damn, talk about bad luck...


    I wasn''t able to find even a kid with the Kaguya bloodline in the Clan Compound...


    ...


    ...


    ...


    -(1 hour later)-


    ...


    After I memorized all the techniques and information of the Kaguya clan.


    I made another check-up around the compound just to be sure, so as to not leave behind any loose end or the cliched 10-years-later-revenge kid...


    Just as back then with the Sky Village... No survivors...


    Just used my patented method of ''KILOBU'', which stands for: Kill everyone, Loot anything of value and then Burn whatever''s left.


    ...


    By the way, the Sharingan is really useful. This photographic memory is one of the best abilities of the Sharingan. Even more so for someone like me.


    I mean sure, I might learn stuff but like every other average human, I eventually start forgetting information... But if I see something with my Sharingan I will never forget it.


    It makes learning things way easier.


    I also looted 45.000.000 Ryo from the clan''s vault. Now I have a total of 967.000.000 Ryo to my name.


    Not bad for a kid huh?


    *Poof*


    I make 5 shadow clones. They have to burn everything here while I run away. You know I wouldn''t have it any other way... After that, they will dispel themselves. In other words a perfect mission with no evidence of my activities.


    Except for the massacring of hundreds of people and the destruction of an entire clan compound... Not much really...


    I won''t linger here a second longer. After all, a fire for a ninja is just like saying: ''Hey I am here, come kill me please''.


    Oh, one more thing... The information I got from the clan head''s wife?


    ...


    The whereabouts of her husband and the Kaguya Clan army...


    Naturally, that is my next destination...


    <Shunshin>


    ...


    ...


    ...

 Chapter 67 - The Three Is

    ?Story by: ????????????????????????????????????   // Edited by: ????????????????????_?????????????


    ...


    ...


    ...


    After what must''ve amounted to the same time it used to take me to microwave some popcorn, (oh how I miss popcorn...) I finally arrived at my destination: the Kaguya Clan ''military'' camp...


    And yes, you read that right. I said ''military''.


    You see, I''ve been lurking in the shadows for about half an hour, not deactivating my Sharingan for even a moment...


    After fully mastering it I''ve managed to drastically optimize its chakra consumption rates to a ridiculous amount, so I could probably use the Sharingan as indiscriminately as Itachi and not feel tired at all, despite not being an Uchiha.


    Kakashi couldn''t do the same simply because he didn''t have the 2nd best chakra control of the Shinobi World.


    My Mangekyou remains unaltered in its deteriorating effects on the user''s eyes and body. Unless I get myself a pair of EMS, that''s how it''s gonna be, regrettably...


    ...


    Anyway... Back to the point I was making. I''ve been doing standard reconnaissance of the camp, evaluating risks and such...


    But then I realized... That this looks more like a beer festival than it looks the camp of a feared Warrior Clan...


    I mean, they''ve got large banquet tables with several foods (mostly meat) right next to a giant bonfire, carts with uncooked meat in some crates, and TONS of barrels of beer and sake...


    Almost 90% of the ninja are intoxicated right now¡­ I mean yeah, they kinda have patrols going on... but man, this is outrageous!


    They don''t even have a perimeter set up, just tents scattered everywhere and--


    Ugh...


    May I remind you, that these people have declared war on a Hidden Village?...


    I mean WTF!!!! This must be some kind of trap or something... right?!


    *Sigh*


    The Mist camp I infiltrated had a similar vibe, with people celebrating and whatnot... But this is on a whole other level... They at least had a wall and weren''t as close to their enemy...


    **Sigh**


    ...


    These Kaguya bunch, I tell you. Besides being ugly as f*ck, they are also way too stupid. Even for musclebrain standards...


    No wonder they got exterminated in the canon...


    ...


    ...


    ...


    Heh...


    Now that I think about it...


    It doesn''t really matter...


    They''re living on borrowed time...


    Their people have just been exterminated... Their compound burned to less than ashes...


    And they don''t even know it...


    Let them have their drinks and delicious meat...


    Maybe it''s for the better. They get to enjoy their last moments on this accursed World of Shinobi...


    A privilege that not everybody has...


    ...


    ...


    ...


    So, I''ve calculated their numbers using my enhanced Inuzuka senses and the Sharingan, with 100% accuracy.


    There are 284 ninja scattered around the camp, with varying chakra amounts... 51 of them have jonin-level chakra...


    Nevertheless, jonin-level chakra doesn''t mean they''re are all jonin level per se... But still, no matter how much I may look down on these savages, (I do... a lot) I''m also not willing to compromise the mission for anything.


    Nope, not happening.


    I''ll make this another flawless mission on my personal record...


    In any case, it''s time I go back to what I do best: Hide for indefinite amounts of time while analyzing stuff, calculating stuff and planning even more stuff.


    That''s my ninja way.


    I guess...


    ...


    ...


    After another hour of doing what I do best, I have identified the Clan Head''s tent. It''s basically the same as any other tent, so it was truly harder to find than your average ''command tent''...


    ...


    Hmmm...


    Maybe they''re not so irredeemably stupid after all...


    ...


    I also made sure that this wasn''t a trap and memorized their patrolling itinerary (if you could call it that anyway).


    That was the easy part, seeing as there are so few ninja on actual guard duties.


    ...


    I don''t have much nighttime left, and I''ve got my targets identified¡­ Not wasting any more time, I proceed to make my move...


    ...


    ...


    Firstly, I sneak close to one of the patrolling ninja. I''m already relatively close to the camp so it takes me a moment to reach him.


    Just as he makes a turn around a shadowy corner next to what appears to be the armory, (unguarded by the way...) I use my patented senbon-to-the-back-of-the-neck technique with surgical precision.


    This knocks him out cold and without any noise, as I prudently grab the unconscious body as it collapses.


    ...


    Then I make a shadow clone that instantly transforms into the ninja I just took out. The clone resumes the ninja''s patrol in his stead...


    Following that, I take the unconscious ninja further into the darkness of the forest and tie him up with some chains and put a gag on his mouth that I took out from a storage scroll.


    Then I carefully pull out the senbon off his neck...


    His muscles spasm a bit, whilst he instinctively tries to recover, making some muffled groans...


    I immediately force open his eyes and give them a death-stare with both of my Sharingan...


    ...


    It''s time I put my first original Sharingan skill to use. This one, I''ve been working on for quite some time, and have finally perfected it barely a couple of hours ago...


    It was with the Clan Head''s wife actually...


    I didn''t just torture her for the fun of it when I could''ve just used my hard-earned Sharingan to get any valuable information...


    No... You see...


    I was actually taking the time to make the most of my somewhat disappointing ''visit'' to the Kaguya Clan compound...


    Yes... I worked on her since she had an incredibly strong mind (for a civilian) that allowed me to play for a bit with all kinds of mental and physical pain¡­ All to get the exact formula and translate the results into a master genjutsu that would put your average Uchiha to shame...


    That was also the first in-depth field experiment I have conducted... And it was quite efficient as well since it bore fruit only 38 minutes in...


    Now... What is that precious technique which I have developed? -You may be asking yourself...


    Well, that is...


    ...


    ...


    <Sharingan: Memory Extraction Technique>


    Or just ''Memory Extraction Jutsu'' for short...


    As I delve into his mind, the ninja''s eyes gain a noticeably hollow look (that yandere-going-to-kill-you look)...


    ...


    ...


    This genjutsu is used to break the will of the captured target, to make them give as much information as possible.


    And that''s where the similarities with other interrogation-type genjutsus end.


    You see... this a perfect hybrid of the most powerful interrogation techniques of the Shinobi World: the Yamanaka Clan''s Mind Probe Technique and the Sharingan: Interrogation Genjutsu...


    The first one I learned from a member of the T&I Force on my camp (the one that brought me the test subjects).


    Using my proxy-clone as bait, I managed to copy his clan''s secret technique when the clone ''accidentally'' mentioned having created a new A-rank Jutsu... And faked regret after ''revealing'' that ''secret''...


    I knew he wouldn''t resist the idea of probing the mind of his superior for his secret technique...


    Oh, the irony...


    In the end, what he found was images of me having dinner with Tsunade while she demanded the waiter to bring her more sake...


    Hehehe...


    His expression afterward; a mix of cringe, anger, and shame... for the usually cold-as-ice T&I agent... It was certainly priceless...


    As was the technique I obtained, unmistakably...


    The second component technique doesn''t really need an explanation, does it?


    ...


    Now... on to what this master interrogation technique does...


    It''s basically breaching the target''s mind with such a powerful and yet simple genjutsu, that its defenses are not able to react in time... giving me full access to my target''s mind.


    It''s like shooting a catapult boulder through a gateway before the gates can be closed. Simple in theory but exceedingly effective.


    I can then freely browse through the target''s entire memories (not just what he''s thinking at the moment) and take whatever memories I want for myself. Like copying a file from a PC into a Pendrive...


    It allows me to obtain reliable and clear information, which I can access at any time with my Sharingan''s photographic memory.


    No bloody mess, no interrogation nonsense, and it''s also time-efficient since time inside the victim''s mind elapses at 5% of the real-time...


    ...


    It almost sounds too good to be true... But of course, it isn''t. Too good, I mean.


    This technique has a fatal weakness. If the target has a strong enough will or countermeasures against genjutsu, the technique is rendered effectively useless.


    Why?... Because I risk it backfiring on me... And you know what THAT would mean...


    I would be utterly and royally f*cked...


    Therefore, if the target starts to resist it, I would have to employ other techniques, and that would probably end up with the target''s brain becoming a useless lump of tissue...


    Genjutsu on top of genjutsu it''s just nasty.


    Consequently, I have to be extremely careful with whom I use the technique on...


    The good news is: most ninja below jonin level, and maybe even a few jonin, are in the necessary mental strength range for my master technique to work appropriately...


    It is kinda overpowered, but you cannot say that I haven''t spilled blood, sweat and tears in developing it...


    ...


    ...


    ...


    Back to what''s happening with the poor bastard and his hollow eyes...


    I chose this ninja for two reasons: First, he''s barely at chunin level from what I gathered. His reaching this level is nothing short of a miracle, given his early 30''s appearance... The second reason is that I noticed during my reconnaissance that he''s profoundly insecure; from things like not looking at his peers in the eye, fidgeting when talking, to the way he walks, etc.


    Normally I''d run many more tests before actually using a new technique on the field... But the risk of failing against such a weak individual is negligible...


    ...


    [--and then my father *sniff* never acknowledged me *sniff* as his son... Just because my mother was a servant!! Since then... everyone on the clan looks down on me... Plus I am weak and all that... *sniff*]


    ...


    ...


    Ok... damn... The dude w.h.i.n.ed about his pathetic life to me thinking it was all some kind of dream... and that I was his spiritual guide or some sh*t...


    Turns out that if the target has an extremely weak mind, he may be called directly into his mindscape and talk to me... Free of inhibitions...


    Although in this particular case, it was mostly a pain in the *ss... Only after 52 minutes (2.6 minutes real-time) has he finished telling me his whole life story...


    I only bore with it because of the next part of my plan...


    ...


    ...


    ...


    After the sob-story-time is over, I end the technique, only to knock him out again and making a clone to watch over him.


    With that taken care of, I can see my other transformed clone on the distance doing some patrolling.


    I rush towards my clone. Dispelling him in an instant, and at the same time, I transform into the patrolling ninja... Then I take out a scroll and go towards the Clan Head''s tent...


    ...


    I run towards the tent''s entrance from the other end of the camp...


    Guarding it (while having a few drinks) there are two middle-aged guards. As drunk as they are, both have jonin-level chakra and most definitely are jonin level per se...


    I don''t let my guard down...


    ...


    And now comes the reason why I didn''t just take that chunin''s memories: I wanted to experience first-hand how he interacted with others, to correctly impersonate him...


    ...


    Time to get into character...


    I started to act nervous and fidget...


    "E-Excuse me G-Gami-sama, Maru-sama¡­ I-I..."


    They look at me like I am trash with an eyebrow raised and a smirk...


    "Spit it out brat, whaddya wanna say!!" -Says the one on the left.


    The other one laughs, only to add:


    "Well, he gonna be spitting something aight! His teeth, if he doesn''t start talking in the next 5 seconds!"


    Wow, really funny guys... Arrogant drunkards like you are only any good as lab rats...


    Still, I keep on my wimp mask.


    "Y-Yes s-sir! Mizukage-sama has sent a message to be delivered directly to the Clan Head! The envoy was injured so I sent him directly to the medic''s tent!"


    They just look at me... C''mon now I am ready... Ask me questions, I have prepared an answer to all of them...


    Even the ones of why would someone even give me the message if it was meant to be delivered directly to the Clan Head...


    I even know the answers to personal questions if they ask me...


    Hah!


    ...


    Then they look at me seriously...


    "Then, go inside! Now!"


    ...


    ...


    W-wait what...??!! This sounds suspicious as hell... WHAT THE HELL, I MEMORIZED THAT GUYS WHOLE LIFE STORY FOR NOTHING!!!


    And I can''t ever forget that sh*t because I used the Sharingan to memorize everything he said...


    F*CK...


    Despite my... annoyance... I keep my act going.


    "Y-Yes, sir!"


    ...


    ¡­


    As soon as I get inside the tent, I see the Clan Head. He has a big build with black hair and a scruffy goatee on his face.


    He is sitting in a cross-legged position on the ground with a Japanese low-table in front of him and a half-filled bottle of sake on it.


    Putting down an empty small cup on the table, a questioning look is drawn on his slightly blushed face.


    As he turns to me, I promptly bow down to hide my face from him and I secretly activate my Sharingan. I also extend the scroll I had on my hands towards him in an obeisant manner...


    ...


    "Kimru-sama! The Mizukage-sama has sent an urgent message for your eyes only!"


    He rudely takes the scroll away from my fingers, and as he''s opening it, his eyes widen in shock...


    ...


    Indeed... I have done with his clan as I willed, essentially unopposed. This time with my patented method of espionage, the Three I''s: Infiltrate, Interrogate and Impersonate...


    ...


    He looks at me... with a look that reveals his futile realization of what has transpired...


    Anger, impotence, despair... even a hint of sadness...


    He looks at me like he''s is about to say something... Probably his last words... or-


    Perhaps...?


    ...


    -But then his gaze helplessly shifts to my bloodshot eyes...


    That realization came all too late...


    As if those spinning shapes... were... singing to him...


    ...


    <Demonic Illusion: Shackling Stakes Technique>


    ...


    ...


    ...

 Chapter 68 - Wrapping Things Up...

    ?Story by: ???????????????????????????????????? // Edited by: ????????????????????_?????????????


    ...


    ...


    ...


    <Demonic Illusion: Shackling Stakes Technique>


    ...


    As soon as he is in my genjutsu I knock him out with the usual... senbon to the vital points in the neck. This time I use eight of them, just to be sure.


    After all, people with the Shikotsumyaku bloodline in the Naruto anime are said to have a different body structure from normal humans...


    Also, I lay him on the ground and pull up his shirt to expose his stomach, I run chakra through my fingertips and jam them against his stomach...


    <Five Elements Seal>


    I make his chakra go haywire... Well, he will be out of commission for some time now. A dark sealing formula appears in his stomach...


    I could have used some more dangerous seal, or test some self-made seals but I don''t want to hurt my precious test subject...


    At least... not yet...


    I then put the leader on the side of the tent and cover him with a blanket and a little dirt under the blanket to the side, to not make it look like a body. Also on top of it, I put a camouflage genjutsu on it... just to be sure.


    ...


    ...


    Then I order my clone to go outside and act like the wimpy guy to not raise any suspicion. After waiting for about 10 minutes just to be sure everything is in place and no one suspects anything.


    I then go outside and I order my guards...


    "Gather all of the ninja!!! The situation has changed... the Mizukage has sent word of an emergency...!!!"


    They bow down.


    "Hai, Kimru -sama!!!" -They both answer at the unison.


    Then they immediately go to notify the other clan members.


    As they do that I go inside the tent again and make 10 clones. They know what they have to do. They immediately start using earth jutsus to go underground.


    ...


    ...


    Every minute after that, I made 10 shadow clones and started spreading them underground.


    I had to start drawing chakra from my Strength of a Hundred Seal to make more clones. Currently, my natural chakra levels are only around elite jonin level but... with my seal I store as much chakra as I can in there, whenever I am not in a combat situation.


    I also ordered some of my clones to band together and replace all of the genin in the medic''s tent. After all, I need to keep the scheme keep going... at least for a little more...


    Though I could probably make a couple of thousand shadow clones if I used all of my chakra from the seal, that would be an incredibly inefficient use of chakra...


    But I can still definitely say that I have one of the biggest chakra availability in the Naruto world at the moment...


    ...


    After I make 100 clones. 50 of which are underground while the others are hidden on trees and bushes...


    ...


    ...


    ...


    Then after I sense that all of the chakra signatures in the camp are in one place I go outside of my tent transformed as the leader. I also see my clone transformed as the wimpy guy in there.


    Well then, time for some wordplay...


    I put up my cold mask on and plan what I am going to say... I think back on all their traditions and such...


    All of them are looking towards me in expectation...


    "My clansmen... my brothers... I have some grave news for you all... The Mizukage has just given me a message..."


    "...There has been an attack on our Clan''s compound..."


    ...


    They are all shocked...


    "WHAT!!!"


    "HOW IS THIS POSSIBLE!!!"


    "DID AN ENEMY VILLAGE ATTACK US???!!!"


    "IT MUST BE THOSE DAMN COUNCIL MEMBERS IN KIRIGAKURE!!!! IT MUST BE A RUSE!!!"


    While most of them are panicking and screaming at each other.


    I signal my clones...


    They immediately come from underground and attack all of the jonin individuals...


    15 of them fall down... knocked out...


    Soon all of the others are running in different directions...


    *Howl*


    A howl is heard...


    <Demonic Illusion: Dog Binding>


    All of the genin and chunin.. the jonin are stopped for a second before they can break out of it and another 5 are captured... Then as the other 30 jonin are getting away...


    I give another signal to my clones and suddenly as the jonin are about to reach outside of the camp perimeter...


    <Four Violet Flames Formation>


    "GROUP UP DON''T LET THEM TAKE YOU BY SURPRISE!!!" -I order them loudly.


    I say that to all of the jonin. They listen to me as I am still transformed as the leader.... and then they are all grouped around me...


    I immediately take a small round ball at the size of my palm and secretly crush it... I hold my breath and...


    16 other Jounin fall... that was invisible and odorless paralysis poison. Even though it seems only the ones closest to me got knocked out...


    The other 14 immediately get away from me and look at me suspiciously... well now they are on their guard... still kind of late though...


    "What have you done to our leader and who are you??!!"


    I act like I don''t even take them seriously... I take out and crush another ball that nullified the poison in the air...


    Even though I have developed a resistance to this type of poison, this is a poison I made myself in order to take out ninja, especially ones with weird bodies...


    That means that even with my resistance I can get dizzy from it...


    I look at them as if they were just prey... It manages to unnerve them even further...


    "Hmmm only the ones close to me got knocked out... the Kaguya clan truly has a peculiar anatomy..."


    They look like rabid beasts ready to strike at any moment...


    "What kind of trash village are you from stranger???!!!"


    I don''t even answer, no need to talk with an enemy opponent if it gives you no advantage. Also, it seems like this identity is no longer useful...


    *Poof*


    I undo the transformation... and I show them my real form: an eleven-years-old kid... Although, I noticed that this time my opponents didn''t get distracted...


    Oh well, they are not jonin for nothing...


    <Chain Jail>


    Four silver chains come from my back... It was instinctual for them to look at my chains for a split second. In that second I activated my Sharingan and when some of them looked back at my eyes...


    <Demonic Illusion: Shackling Stakes Technique>


    10 of them are caught into it, the others are about to help them break out of my Genjutsu...


    But my chains immediately attack them, and they dodged... With only 4 left now, they are easy prey...


    They have all got some bone swords on their hands...


    Hmmm, they should be good at taijutsu then... but I won''t fight in their strong point... Even if I know that I could beat them with my super strength...


    <Shadow Clones>


    Nine clones appear... they go to handle the three of them... One of them against three of my clones, and the last of them vs myself...


    My opponent is also looking at my feet and no longer looking me in the eyes now...


    Hmph... it doesn''t matter...


    <Shunshin>


    I immediately appear behind my opponent. I stab a senbon on his spine and paralyze him instantly...


    I look at my other opponents... they are now all taken care of as well... Good...


    "Gather all of the bodies and after we go far enough, two of you burn the place to the ground. I want no witnesses... no evidence..."


    The clones simply nod.


    My clones cancel the barrier and seals that stopped any chakra leaking out to signify that a battle was going on in here. I then lifted the Genjutsu that my clones had around here that made it look like nothing is going on...


    ...


    ...


    ...


    After three hours everything is ready.


    It seems like even amongst the fighters of the Kaguya Clan only 49 people had the Shikotsumyaku bloodline.


    Therefore, I killed the others who had nothing special about them (mainly just denser bones than normal) and put them in storage scrolls.


    I then kill 24 of the 49 Shikotsumyaku users... After all 49 of them, should they manage to escape and sneak attack me somehow, then they become dangerous...


    I seal all of the dead bodies of the Shikotsumyaku users in another scroll and put the scrolls back in my pouch.


    Then as I have all of the unconscious Shikotsumyaku users'' bodies ready with my clones and am about to leave...


    ...


    At the edge of my chakra senses (100 m) I can sense a vaguely strong chakra...


    ''Well, time to get out of here...''


    Because of my paranoia, I always kept my Sharingan active...


    The next second from 100 meters away... I sense the huge chakra right next to me...


    ''IT''S COMING...!!!''


    Ironic... Same as the Clan Leader... That realization came too late for me...


    ...


    "LARIAAAT!!!!"


    ...


    ...


    ...

 Chapter 69 - Title: Almighty A... The 3rd Raikage

    ?Story by: ???????????????????????????????????? // Edited by: ????????????????????_?????????????


    ...


    ...


    ...


    "LARIAAAT!!!!"


    ...


    I immediately tried to jump backward.


    *CRACK*


    I can feel my neck getting slashed and broken.


    *BOOM*


    I got thrown on the ground and a crater is formed all around me.


    I can feel blood bursting out of my neck. The only thing holding my head together with my body is my spine. I can''t even move my body below my neck anymore as the lighting running through my system has temporarily paralyzed me.


    <Creation Rebirth>


    I hope this can heal my injuries... c''mon please I... I don''t want to die... I am scared... SH*T... the flesh is too far apart IT''S NOT HEALING...


    F*CKF*CKF*CKF*CK...


    OK CALM DOWN...


    I extend chakra strings from my head and bring the separated flesh on my neck closer together...


    He was a tall, dark-skinned man with a large muscular and well-defined build. He had a full head of white hair that flowed into his back along with a long beard. He had unusual eyes, which had green irides, dark sclerae, and no pupils.


    His face has pronounced cheekbones and tear troughs under his eyes, and a prominent crease across his forehead with a mole above his right eyebrow. His top lip also had a darker pigmentation than the bottom one. His canine teeth were also slightly elongated. He has the kanji for ''lightning'' tattooed on his right shoulder. He also had a lightning bolt-shaped scar that runs across the right side of his c.h.e.s.t.


    There''s no doubt about it, IT IS THE 3RD RAIKAGE!


    Then I feel the ground under me shift a little I panic but when I notice the two chakra signatures under me I relax.


    *Crack*


    Two of my shadow clones come from underground and take me below the ground. Then they start running away from there.


    Now that I am safer I need to think of a plan. When the 3rd Raikage appeared far away within my range of detection, he didn''t stop to look for me, he just charged...


    So the most likely conclusion is that he had a long-distance sensor with him... and a good one probably, because why didn''t the Raikage attack my other 100 clones...? The most probable answer is because the sensor is able to sense which is a clone or which one is not.


    I need to run away NOW... since once he meets with the Raikage... I am a DEAD man...


    ...


    ...


    After almost 4 minutes my neck is all healed. But even with the healing, I have a huge scar surrounding my neck.


    *Boom*


    I hear the Raikage attacking the earth on the surface. He knows that I probably went into hiding underground.


    I am having the two of my clones fix my arteries and vocal cords or I won''t be able to talk for the rest of my life. Even Creation Rebirth can''t perfectly fix an almost cut off head with lightning running through my body...


    ...F*CK... I was so close to dying... if I hadn''t jumped back to lessen the impact my head would have been separated from my shoulders.... and I would have died...


    ...


    ...


    After healing me, I have ordered my last two clones to take out the last members of the Kaguya clan. It''s a shame that I wouldn''t be able to have them as test subjects but I can''t let that uncertainty in my plan live. No loose ends...


    *Boom*


    The Raikage is still rampaging about. But I need to first wait for the sensor to meet up with the Raikage and then kill the sensor to escape...


    Because even if I escaped now, they would follow me anyhow. After all, even after almost 10 minutes since I disappeared underground, he hasn''t entered my chakra sensing range. For a ninja traveling at that speed, it must mean that the sensor has a detection range between 5-10 km...


    That is crazy... I don''t know anyone even in Konoha who has that type of range. The longest I know is the Yamanaka Clan Head who is said to have a sensing range of 3 km.


    But I know with the Raikage here the chances of me killing the sensor are almost zero. Also, there might be other ninjas with the sensor¡­ Then my chances of getting out of this alive become 0% with a 100% chance of death¡­


    If I travel underground with an earth Jutsu I will be too slow to escape... I need to get on the surface and somehow run away from the Raikage...


    NOW...!


    ...


    ...

 Chapter 70 - Just a Bad Day

    Chapter 71


    ?Story by: ???????????????????????????????????? // Edited by: ????????????????????_?????????????


    ...


    ...


    ...


    If I travel underground with an earth Jutsu, I will be too slow to escape... I need to back get on the surface and then somehow run away from the Raikage...


    NOW...!!


    I make fifty clones and they know what to do.


    It seems like I need to make sure my plan goes 100% accurately in order for me to survive...


    ...


    ...


    I wait for about 10 minutes...


    When I go outside of the hiding spot, I immediately sense the Raikage come for me I just look towards a mountain nearby.


    My Sharingan starts to change shape.


    <MS: Teleportation>


    As soon as I see that my surroundings have changed I sense the Raikage hastily following me.


    Even with the extreme pain that comes with using the Mangekyou Sharingan... as soon as he is an arm''s length away from me... I just mentally smirk...


    All according to plan...


    **BOOM**


    <Chain Jail: Cocoon>


    (A/N: The Chain Fuinjutsu that he found in the ruins of Uzushiogakure, the chains came from his clones.)


    Chains start to trap him. A couple of them are broken, but with so many chains, no matter how strong the Raikage is, unless he is at Madara-level, he will be restrained.


    First, his right foot gets entangled in one chain and then the other chains swarm up both his legs like serpents. He''s imprisoned now.


    My clones are still channeling chakra through them, and yet it remains quite hard to hold him for long. Plus he saw my Sharingan already, so I''ve got to kill him...


    The only Jutsu in my arsenal with even the slightest chance to injure the Raikage is my ''Wind Style Chakra Scapels'', but that would mean that I would have to beat melee distance to the Raikage to even be able to connect with the Jutsu... And that would be a very bad decision that I am not dumb enough to take...


    Besides, that would only deal some moderate cuts to the Raikage. It would take a lot more of those to cause him to bleed out...


    But I have a better idea...


    I then perform two hand sings...


    <Earth Style: Dark Swamp>


    Quickly, the earth starts to suck in the cocoon of chains in the muddy, watery quicksand.


    Well then, let''s see how long it will take for him to suffocate underground...


    As soon as I do that... I sense a dozen of chakra signatures enter my sensing range...


    F*CK ME...!!! THIS F*CKING DAY HAS BEEN F*CKING TERRIBLE...!!!


    ...


    ...


    One amongst the ninja I detect even has a strong signature, and I would guess that he might be an S-rank. All of the others are no slouches either with everyone being at least jonin level...


    My levels of chakra for the first time in a long time have started to feel extremely low... And that''s taking into account the meager amount of chakra left in my seal...


    But I know that I can still take them on... I look at the ground under which the Raikage is suffocating to death...


    What a damn monster!! 50 of my clones using a tailed-beast-restriction type of sealing and he can still manage to move around...


    He can actually do a lot more than move, as I have a suspicion that he might break out of them before he suffocates...


    Well damn... I guess I better take care of the jonin and S-rank before that happens or at least take care of the sensor... Otherwise, I will endlessly be pursued until I run out of stamina or I collapse from the lack of sleep...


    So killing the sensor is the safer choice...


    Just as I am about to go towards them...


    *BOOOOOM*


    The earth behind me explodes...


    I immediately turn around and see a familiar figure.


    WHAT THE F*CK ???!!! HE BROKE OUT SO FAST...!!!


    I see him coming towards me using my Sharingan, which then morphs into a shuriken shape... He has his ultimate technique pointed towards me...


    <Hell Stab: One Finger Spear>


    I can see he is aiming for my head... He wants to finish me off, this bastard!


    <MS: Teleportation>


    I immediately appear below his outstretched arm. I look at his elbow and calculate something with the help of my Sharingan...


    <Rasengan>


    I slam a Rasengan into his elbow in an uppercut move.


    His arm changes its trajectory... and just as it''s about to hit his lighting scar in his c.h.e.s.t...


    Suddenly, his hand stops midway and changes direction...


    He''s... Incredibly strong... WTF how did Naruto made this work?! F*cking plot armor...!


    <Hell Stab: One Finger Spear>


    And it comes back to hit my head...


    "DAMN IIIT!!!"


    As a last resort, I have to meet his technique head-on...


    Launching a punch with my right hand... All the energy, chakra, stamina and whatever-the-f*ck-else left in every cell in my body, supercharging it into an attack 10x times stronger than one Tsunade-level punch...


    ****BOOOOOOOM****


    The Raikage gets knocked back with immense speed and is sent flying, crashing into a tree...


    This might seem like I won the exchange but...


    I then look down...


    At my right arm... Or rather... The shallow stump that is in its former place now...


    ...


    ...


    My arm was completely obliterated by the power bout...


    ...


    ...


    ...

 Chapter 71 - The Only Way Out

    ?Story by: ???????????????????????????????????? // Edited by: ????????????????????_?????????????


    ...


    ...


    ...


    I look at my stump I now have for an arm... DAMN IT... I can''t even move from the Lighting running through my body...


    I can feel the cold grip of fear grab my heart... my body is in a state of panic...


    CALM DOWN¡­!!


    I NEED TO RUN AWAY NOW... OR I AM GOING TO DIE¡­


    C''MON THINK... My Mangekyou ability is amazing at running away. While the Raikage is momentarily a distance away from me... I GOT IT.


    I extend one chakra string from my left hand and grab a stone and like a slingshot, it shoots into the air. My Mangekyou looks at the stone that is shot up...


    *Swish*


    I am teleported to it... this should be a distance where he probably can''t jump to...


    I immediately start to fall together with the stone. I then run wind chakra through my body to repel the lighting that is paralyzing my body...


    I can feel the pain wreck in my brain like it is being punctured by a hundred needles. I can turn around and look at where I see the Raikage calmly looking at me... damn... I can see that he was not hurt by my last all-out attack...


    Ok, then I need to run away NOW.


    I grab the same stone again and throw it forward again and this time even higher in the air.


    *Fwoosh*


    Now I am in such a height that he definitely can''t jump to me. I can even barely sense him anymore that is how high I am so it should be around 80 meters (~260'') ... to teleport to it. I look at the sky and see if I can spot any clouds...


    Damn, it is also a clear day... so I can''t hide in the clouds... FU*K...


    Anyway, this teleportation ability can only teleport me to something that I can see clearly. And with my Sharingan I can see stuff from far away... that is if my vision hadn''t started already getting a little blurry as of lately.... my Creation Rebirth has been halting the deterioration of my eyes by a great deal... but I have been using it a lot lately...


    *Swoosh*


    Again I teleport to the stone... I grab it again and I can sense the Raikage hot on my tail.... he is following me but... let''s try this... I throw my stone again this time I throw it in a straight line...


    I am temporarily out of the Raikage''s sight...


    With my one hand, I make the tiger hand sign...


    *Poof*


    And a shadow clone appears next to me.


    SH*T the chakra in my seal is almost all gone...


    Then I make another hand sign.


    <Camouflage Ninjutsu>


    Immediately my body gains a see-through cover even while falling.


    I really should be glad that I am so paranoid and mastered most of my critical life-saving jutsus to be able to do them with only one hand sign.


    *Fwosh*


    And I am immediately teleported there.


    Because the Raikage doesn''t have a chakra sensing ability... I should able to slip right past him...


    As he comes closer to my place while following my clone... Ok, I need to calm my heart... I do that by putting chakra pressure in it and clogging my blood vessels to stop them from moving and giving out any signs of a living being... I can only hold this state for 1 minute at most...


    I can sense the Raikage is getting closer I can hear lighting crackling...


    *Swoosh*


    He doesn''t seem to notice and still goes after my clone he is 50 meters away... YES YES YES YES YES YES...


    After he is out of my sensing range...


    At last, I finally escaped him temporarily... That was risky... but the thing paid off... now I have a little bit of leverage to move around...


    I can sense that the sensor squad with the 10 Jounin and S class ninja is coming towards me... I wonder which one of them is the sensor...


    I had my clone run the opposite direction to the sensor team so they won''t be able to catch up with the Raikage''s speed... then they shouldn''t be able to meet up until the Raikage destroys my clone. I also know what I did wrong during this exchange...


    F*CK... I SHOULDN''T HAVE GOTTEN ARROGANT...!!


    I shouldn''t have tried to take on the Raikage... did my recent power jump to my head... did I think that I could hold someone who would need to have at least two strong S ranks to hold him back... I should have taken my chances and escaped immediately... I should have taken the risk of being hunted down...  THAT ALMOST COST ME MY LIFE... DAMN IT...!!!


    I look at my stump where my arm used to be... at least I must get rid of the sensor...


    If I know one thing about long-distance sensors is that their close distance sensing ability is very blurry... even Minato who is also a long-distance sensor has to use a technique from the second Hokage... he puts a finger in the ground and sends a chakra pulse so he can sense any living being in the perimeter.


    Anyway, I need to go and kill the sensor at all costs... I know what happens when a shadow clone uses the Mangekyou Sharingan until it goes blind... I will also lose my light... I will become blind and lose my Sharingan & Mangekyou Sharingan as soon as my clone is destroyed...


    And also with the Raikage as his opponent, I would give my clone at best... 3-4 minutes until it goes blind from Mangekyou overuse and can no longer use his ability and then the Raikage destroy it and he will figure out what is going on... by that time I need to have finished my objective and be far.


    VERY FAR away from here...


    THIS IS THE ONLY WAY OUT....!!!


    <Shunshin>

 Chapter 72 - Begging for Life

    ....


    <Shunshin>


    Yami immediately starts going towards the sensor team at his top speed. Though he noticed that his balance is off a little.


    ''It seems like I will need to master this sh*t real quick. After all there is an S class and 10 Jounin ninja that I am going to fight against... they can not be underestimated especially now that I am weakened so much. ''


    ...


    When I arrive at their destination in around seven seconds... I see 10 ninja with Jounin level chakra and another one who I knew was S class.


    I hide in the trees and look for the sensor in their midst... No one seems to be using any sensor techniques. I can see that with my sharingan... they also seem to be acting strange... I can pick that up in their body language... Aha I get it now... they already know that I am here and are trying to lure me in a false sense of security.


    Well then... I make a tiger handsign.


    *poof*


    A shadow clone appears next to me.


    Now all of my chakra from my seal is gone so I only have my natural chakra amount... damn I haven''t run out of chakra in a long time...


    Since I know that I will go blind anyway then I better use these eyes as much as I can... it''s truly a shame I never figured out how to use Susanoo.


    Though I better be careful. Usually I am not worried about the chakra consumption of the Mongekyo ability but now I still need to not accidentally pass out from chakra exhaustion...


    As soon as I see that they already have noticed me. I order my clone to stay back while I attack them. I also have an absolute advantage over them.


    They don''t know any of my abilities.


    Then I take out a scroll and...


    A giant blade comes out. This is the explosion blade,  one of the four blades that I stole from the four ninja swordsman that I killed.


    I then pick up the huge sword... I bet that I look ridiculous with this sword. A one armed eleven years old kid with blood all over his clothes AND a huge sword on his remaining hand...


    I look at the middle of their formation.


    <MS: Teleportation>


    Immediately I appear in the middle of the formation. And before they have even a chance to be shocked I attack the three jounin who are closest together.


    *BOOOOM*


    The explosion hits them.


    "AAAHHHHHH"


    I immediately sensed two chakra signatures disappeared so they are probably dead. And the last one seems heavily injured.


    But I didn''t stop there with the help of my first explosion I propelled myself towards another Jounin and I swing the sword to attack him.


    [Lava Style: Rubber Wall]


    *BOOOOM*


    My sword then hits something bouncy...


    *tch* It was blocked by a rubber like substance. I look towards the S class ninja... he is the one who used rubber to block my attack and protected his ally from death.


    I NEED TO END THIS FAST.


    ....


    *Raikage POV*


    ....


    Following the kid with the strange ability to teleport wasn''t honorable.


    It also seems like the teleportation part of his ability comes from his eyes.


    .....


    -3rd POV-


    ....


    In about four minutes later the Clone starts falling from the sky. The Raikage immediately follows him. The clone extends some chakra strings from his hands to tie around the trees to stop his fall.


    And soon the Raikage appears in front of the clone and is about to attack him but then.... the clone bows down with his head touching the ground.


    "PLEASE LET ME LIVE RAIKAGE -SAMA."


    Immediately the Raikage''s face morphs into a frown of disappointment. After all he thought that at least the kid would be have a little dignity. But even then he is a ninja... so the 3rd Raikage can only suppress his feelings and try to at least try to get some information for from the kid.


    After some thought the Raikage asks Yami (clone).


    "What can you give me kid."


    The Raikage asks Yami with a cold look. After all he can kill the kid whenever he wants.


    ''I  holds all of the cards. I will still kill the but he will have to wait if the kid has any useful information. As soon as I notice that the kid is lying. I will kill him.''


    Yami looks at the Raikage in the eyes. The Raikage can see two hollow eyes staring back at him. Like a mist in front of Yami''s original eyes who had a pure black colour¡­ they now have a gray color.


    ''The kid is blind... so that teleportation ability of his did have a drawback.''


    "I know all of the current S rank ninja placements. Together with me being one of the best medical ninjutsu. If you take me to-..."


    The Raikage immediately gets a suspicious look on his face.


    ''He is just saying non specific stuff. So he is trying to buy time... I already know how troublesome he can be so...''


    *Boom*


    The Raikage immediately punches Yami''s head off his body and just then¡­ The Raikage''s eyes widen...


    Yami bursts into smoke.....

 Chapter 73 - The 3rd Raikages Promise

    When the Raikage sees that it was a clone. He immediately looks around for a sneak attack or something of the sort but then....


    ''The kid is sneaky he shouldn''t be as oblivious as to attack head on... is he hiding underground again... or maybe in the sky. Did he transform into a nearby object.''


    ....


    Raikage POV


    ....


    I could use a lighting sensory technique that senses chakra signatures 50 meters around me but... I would have to drop the lighting cloak and I would have to be a special kind of stupid to make such a fatal mistake against an enemy like this.


    The kid is young and small... but very dangerous. I had heard about him. A true S class ninja from such a young age. But he is definitely more dangerous. Because even¡­ sience the beginning of the fight I never underestimated him and went 100% from the beginning.


    But where is that kid... he is a sensor so.....


    WAIT DON''T TELL ME....


    I immediately start retracing my steps and running back where I came from.


    THAT LITTLE BRAT. HE WAS AFTER MY TEAM ALL ALONG¡­.


    ....


    After twenty seconds while running back on where I came from... I notice something in front of me...


    DAMN¡­. IT...


    There are mutilated body parts  everywhere... some even pierced on the trees. THESE ARE MY TEAM.....


    Even with all of the rage inside of me. My face does not show any emotion. My brain is 100% alert to my surroundings. Waiting for a sneak attack, a trap. I was expecting chains to come from underground and surround me at any second. Those things were dangerous so I need to be careful.


    Then after looking at the blood of my comrades, my close friends. They were my chosen squad that I would entrust my life to them.


    If only I had noticed it earlier...


    "Anyone alive..."


    When no one answers...


    *cough*


    As soon as I heard the cough I went to the side of my teammate. He had his hands and legs both of which were bent in ways that they were not meant to bend. Immediately as soon as I saw his face I knew who it was. It was one of my best friends¡­ Dodai.


    I went towards him carefully in case it was a trap. But when I looked at my friends mouth area I noticed that even his tongue was cut off. I couldn''t handle the guilt anymore and I immediately went to his side. His face was a little bloody and messed up¡­ I know the ruthlessness of that kid¡­ did he leave him alive to hold me back on not giving chase to him¡­ the blood still seems fresh so he should be close¡­. around here¡­.


    But I can''t let my Dodai die¡­ I am not even sure if I would be able to find the kid¡­ also C is dead. He was the best chakra sensor in Kumo or even the whole Elemental Nations¡­ finding him now is going to be like trying to find a senbon in a haystack.


    I look at the horizon and swear in my heart¡­.


    I WILL KILL YOU NEXT TIME KID...


    ....


    ....


    I spread my chakra senses all around the cave that I assume is in a dark place. The only thing I sense is my clone that I made before starting the fight. I let one of my enemies alive and had my clone put him in a simple Genjutsu to make him cough when the body hears the Raikage''s voice.


    That was plan B in case I couldn''t get away from the Raikage in time. So for the love for his comrade in critical condition. He will then go to the Mist Village to heal his friend.


    Though Dodai''s injuries even though they seem bad from the outside... they are even worse on the inside¡­ he is crippled forever.


    Also I placed a certain seal in the inside of his skull and in 24 hours it will explode.


    And it will blow up the hospital. It will put quite a strain on the relationship between Mist Village and Cloud Village. Even if they figure out that it wasn''t them who planted the trap. They wouldn''t dare admit it publicly especially Mist Village or else the blood line clans which were being discriminated up until now, as soon as they see a weakness, they would feast upon them like a wolf feasting on a sheep. So it seems both outcomes are good for me...


    I turn towards my clone and even though I can''t see him I can sense his chakra. The clone still has the sharingan because he was created when I still had it... he will only last for some hours with the chakra that he currently has and I can''t even transfer some to him because I am almost to the brink of chakra exhaustion.  I just look at him and say calmly.


    "Go and Genjutsu a bird and write a warning about the Raikage''s change of battlefield. Say in the letter that I can hold him back for some days. Write it in a confident way. Also tell them to recall some S rank ninja from the other


    battlefields to prepare for the Raikage."


    "Ok... but you  need to calm down."


    What is he talking about... I am calm.


    "Your hand is shaking and you have a childlike happy smile in your face¡­. It is honestly creepy."


    Wow what a rude bastard....I try to calm down and touch my face. And I can feel a joker like smile in my face¡­ I know I should be in panic because the Raikage almost killed me but¡­


    I AM SO HAPPY that I am alive...


    I then try to calm down.


    Well then since this is over I should relax. I should let my body rest. My body today got wrecked... but still... I am so happy that I survived. *Ouch*... I feel my body calm down and let the adrenaline wear off.


    After all the battle.... I could feel my body begin to rest. When I sense that my clone came back, I just looked at him with half closed eyes and asked him.


    "How long do you think you have left."


    "Five hours at best."


    I am a good medic so the transplant should be over at worst in two hours.


    I then let myself fall asleep while taking out a storage scroll and giving it to my clone.....


    ¡­.


    (1 hour later)


    ¡­.


    As soon as I open my eyes the next time.


    I get up and I feel that my body is still tired. But at least I can see¡­ I see the lights all around me and even a bed¡­ storage scrolls are really convenient.


    When I look at my clones face. He was frowning and had a nervous look on his face¡­


    Immediately I ask him in a rushed voice¡­


    "What is wrong.."


    He just gives me a mirror¡­ and when I look at it I couldn''t help but say¡­


    "FU*K."

 Chapter 74 - No Rest For The Wicked

    Chapter 75


    While looking at my face at first I didn''t notice anything wrong¡­ until I looked at my spiky hair.


    Some strands of hair almost unnoticeable by the n.a.k.e.d eye had started turning¡­. WHITE¡­


    "FU*K."


    The overuse of the Creation Rebirth Technique has started to finally take his toll on me¡­ ho-how much lifespan did I lose¡­ probably in the battle against the Raikage I lost most of it¡­ Tsunade was able to use her Creation Rebirth more because of her Senju heritage and even then at around fifty years old she looked like a hundred year old hag without her transformation on¡­ DAMN IT¡­


    Ok I need to calm down¡­ that just means that I need to become immortal sooner than expected¡­ the plan can just be adjusted a little¡­ instead of waiting till Naruto Canon comes around to become immortal then I just need to become so sooner¡­ I can do that¡­ but I need a plan for it¡­ I wanted Kaguya''s immortality with some higher regeneration on the side, but it seems like I will have to temporarily settle for some other type of immortality¡­ Or I could invent my own type of immortality¡­


    ....


    Then after some thinking I finally concoct a plan.


    Oh¡­ yeah¡­ that could work¡­


    But that will take some more planning to get the finer details of it worked out. First order of business is to go back to Konoha¡­ and not spend anymore of my vitality & lifespan on this war¡­ which no longer has any benefits for me. I already exterminated all of the Kaguya clan members. I already have enough dead bodies that have the Shikotsumyaku bloodline limit.


    I then get up and look at my clone who still has the sharingan activated. I just dispel him immediately and get his memories. Then I sit down and take out another scroll and¡­


    *poof*


    A lot of food comes out. From cup ramen, vegetables, dried meat¡­ and I immediately start eating¡­


    I will just wait in this cave for three days and then return to the camp. Just in case the Raikage decides to take out his anger somewhere. It will be the camp¡­ and if the Raikage doesn''t attack I will take the credit of holding the Raikage back all by myself¡­ so it''s a win-win situation for me. If he does attack I just say to the higher ups that I did my best, I even lost an arm and almost died¡­ but the first situation is the better win for me.


    ¡­.


    -three days later-


    ¡­.


    I am currently still in the cave. I sent a shadow clone to scout out the Konoha Camp and see if the Raikage already attacked it.


    ..


    After some hours I get the memories of my dispelled clone. The camp was... ok, the memories were mostly from the clone confirming if it was a trap or not.


    The clone after much inspection confirmed that it was not a trap. So I myself went outside of the cave for the first time in three days¡­ I could feel the sun shining in my eyes¡­ ahhh not having a sharingan is going to suck¡­ everything just became 120% harder¡­


    I stealthily get off the island and start running on water towards  the Land of Noodles which is the place where Konoha and Mist Village fight in order to not destroy their own lands.


    ¡­.


    When I got close to the camp I didn''t hide anymore and one of the patrol ninja  noticed me, and came towards me. He looked like your average chunin.


    I saw in his eyes that he realized who I was. He also looked at my missing arm and the huge scar in my neck. I didn''t bother to hide either of them. I need to be seen as a hero for when I return to Konoha...


    Even though he recognized me because of protocols he still asked me in a serious voice.


    "The ramen in the land of noodles is hot¡­"


    I just look at him seriously and answer.


    "But the tea in Konoha is better¡­ also the ramen has gotten cold lately."


    The code changes every day but this was an answer that showed that I was the real deal and that I had been on a long time mission.


    He just nods at me and signals for me to follow him. I do so and go to the camp. When I go inside I see some of the Hyuga and Uchiha clan members look at me suspiciously.. well I know why they are acting like that¡­ I already have a plan on how to take care of it...


    The Jounin that I left to run the camp are still all alive. As soon as they see me they tell me to follow them. They will escort me to the Camp Leaders. I secretly do a handsign to them without the chunin even noticing anything. I ask them with handsings what is going on. It seems that apparently two S-rank ninja were sent to hold back the Raikage¡­ and while I was away it seems like me having a sharingan has become a s.e.n.s.i.t.i.v.e situation. Apparently I am under suspicion of killing an Uchiha and taking his eyes¡­.


    So I confirmed what I already suspected.


    ''I knew that making promises (that I probably won''t keep) to these Jounin would pay off one day.''


    ¡­.


    I go into the tent, and see who it was¡­ the first face that I saw has eyes with snakelike pupils with long hair and pale skin, he is wearing a Jounin jacket¡­ As soon as I saw him I was immediately in 100% alert mode¡­. It was Orochimaru¡­ I will need to be VERY careful around him¡­ especially with what now is the ''Me Having a Sharingan Situation.''...


    ...damn I can never get a break can I¡­.


    Also the other person is¡­.

 Chapter 75 - The Truth

    The other guy beside Orochimaru is¡­  Jiraya¡­ even though he will become Konoha''s spymaster in the future I can still somehow handle him¡­ but I need to be EXTREMELY careful around Orochimaru¡­ though I will still need to be on guard even against Jiraya...


    Jiraya is smiling towards me and says in a cheery voice.


    "Hahaha it seems like it was true¡­ you were able to hold back the Raikage."


    I just smile at him¡­ and point towards my missing arm and the scar in my neck and say with a melancholic tone in my voice.


    "Honestly I was barely able to get out of this alive."


    Then while sitting down on the ground he points at the ground besides him and says.


    "Come sit down and relax, you fought one of the strongest living ninja. A Kage, a leader of a whole ninja Village."


    He then grabs a cup of what it smells like watered down sake and he drinks it.


    "You should be happy¡­it calls for a celebration¡­ so c''mon let''s eat some nice food that I brought directly from Konoha."


    Then his face scrunched up in disgust.


    "I know how gross the cardboard food can be on the front lines."


    He takes out a storage scroll and¡­


    *Poof*


    A lot of food and drinks come out of the smoke.


    I just smile politely and sit down on the ground with the table in front of me. Facing Jiraya and Orochimaru.


    I look at Orochimaru who still has a cold look on his face looking towards me¡­ Then suddenly a small smirk appears on his lips and he says...


    "You can relax now. No matter what we can protect the camp. It is no longer your responsibility."


    ''He definitely is a perceptive snake.''


    ¡­.


    After half an hour of eating and talking. Jiraya is doing most of the latter. When suddenly he says.


    "I need to go to the bathroom."


    When he goes outside of the tent the atmosphere immediately becomes awkward¡­ and I don''t care about the awkwardness¡­ I need an opening in Orochimaru to be able to slightly manipulate him¡­ plus I need to be extra careful with smart and dangerous people like him¡­


    Suddenly Orochimaru is the first to break the ice. And with a weird smile on his face he says.


    "I wonder¡­ is it true that you were able to hold back the Raikage¡­ or were you lying¡­"


    ''This is it''


    I just smile slightly and with a strange tone in my voice and a pitying look I say to him.


    "So you suspect my story¡­ I suppose it is only to be expected. Though you have my pity. There is no such thing as ''truth'' or ''lies'' in this world; there never has been. There is only plain, hard facts. And yet, all beings who exist in this world take only those ''facts'' that are convenient to them, and take them to be the ''truth''. They do so because they know no other way to live. However, for those powerless beings that make up the majority of this world it is those ''facts'' that are inconvenient for their own self-affirmation that make up the real ''truth''."


    The more I talk the more his eyes widen¡­ he has a shocked look in his face¡­


    It was hard to keep myself from smirking¡­ sometimes it is easier to trick a genius than an idiot.


    ''Also Checkmate Orochimaru...''


    ¡­.


    Then after a couple of minutes Jiraya comes in. Orochimaru now has a calm mask on¡­ but I can see it in his eyes, the barely hidden curiosity and contemplation¡­


    The rest of the day passed like this. Jiraya messing around as soon as Jiraya came back from the toilet  Orochimaru excused himself and he went away. Then I had all night to try and keep an act and a lie going on, always being 100% alert and on guard to not let anything slip out . Though I am smiling on the outside. This is a very stressful situation for me¡­ I had to describe a whole different battle against the Raikage which did not EVEN happen. I had thought of what to say but then Jiraya kept asking stupidly accurate questions¡­. I had to do a lot of very careful improvising.


    ¡­.


    -Tomorrow-


    ¡­.


    You know Jiraya is way more smarter than he seems. I mean even though I tried very hard to give accurate descriptions mixed with a lot of half-lies, and at the end I tried to lead the story on him to think that I am hiding something and when he mixes the clues together with the story I had cooked up he will ''discover'' what I am trying to hide. The ''truth'' is that I used the Raikage''s teammates as a hostage and such.


    I also got the confirmation that I can return to Konoha whenever I want now. After getting everything ready and even having a team to escort me. Before taking off, I go to Jiraiya''s tent and when I go inside I see him writing some book or something like that. He turned towards me and when he locked eyes with me... He smiled and said in a cheery voice.


    "Do you need something Yami¡­ or did you come here to say goodbye to the gallant Jiraya."


    I just smile slightly and take out a scroll from my Jounin flak jacket and toss it towards him.


    After he catches it I just smirk at him and say.


    "There are four of the seven ninja swords in that scroll. I promised Tsunade -sensei that I would singlehandedly end the war against the Mist¡­ it seems like I won''t be able to do so. Use the swords as a bargain or something to help end this horrible war."


    I act a little sad when saying the last part.


    Jiraya then looks at me with a serious look.


    "Don''t worry Yami¡­ you have comrades you can depend into¡­"


    He then smiles again.


    "If you ask them¡­ I am sure they will give you a shoulder to lean on, and help you hold that burden."


    I just nod and smile at him. I then thank him then I go towards the team that I will be travelling with. There are fourteen members, most of them are chunin. There are a couple Uchiha giving me the stink eye. But I just simply ignore them¡­


    I think back on the words that Jiraya said.


    But he doesn''t understand that to trust in another person''s ability is the same as to rely upon that person. Reliance is for the weak. It is of no use to me¡­at the end of the day... the only person I can rely on to fix my problems is¡­ myself¡­ and as soon as I arrive in Konoha the problem with me allegedly stealing a sharingan it is upon MY shoulders to fix that problem¡­.

 Chapter 76 - Changing Masks

    ¡­


    Then we immediately take off. Jumping from tree to tree¡­ this is another thing that I lost now that I don''t have the sharingan. I used to travel with Shunshin everywhere. I would have been in Konoha in twenty minutes tops.


    I then look at my squad¡­. and with these guys dragging me down, now it will probably take around three days.


    *sigh*  This is going to be a looooong journey.


    ¡­.


    Surprisingly we arrived in Konoha only after two days. But it sure felt longer than that. There was not a lot of conversation going on. I got close to all of them except the Uchihas.


    Anyway we are finally here. Seeing the giant gates of Konoha almost gives me a sense of relief¡­ As soon as I go towards the gate the guards greet me and look at my arm. I just nod towards them and the chunin team splits and they each go their own way. Then,  I am about to go towards the Inuzuka clan compound. But suddenly three Anbu appeared in front of me. They all had masks with animal drawings in them so that means that they probably are not root ninja. Then one of them with the eagle mask says to me in a calm voice.


    "Jounin Yami you are invited to report your


    battlefield experiences to the Hokage. Then there will also be a clan hearing after that."


    "Oh.. Ok I will remember to do so after I go and greet my family¡­ I haven''t seen my mother and Tsume in a long time."


    Then as I am about to walk away the Anbu with the hawk mask touches my shoulder and says in a stern tone like scolding a kid.


    "I would suggest that you go see the hokage.


    Yami -san."


    ¡­.


    -Anbu POV-


    ¡­.


    This one armed kid¡­ who does he think he is to refuse the Hokage¡­


    As soon as I grabbed the kid''s shoulder he turned around and he had a very serious face. His eyes cold and bloodshot¡­ that put chills in my back...


    I could feel a formless pressure from the kid and then the kid says quietly, in a strong voice.


    "I will kill you. Right here. Right Now."


    *chirp**chirp**chirp**chirp*


    Then a heavy killing intent comes out of the kid, and even birds started running away as if sensing the danger¡­


    Suddenly the world turned red all around¡­


    Then¡­. I feel like I am being butchered with a dull knife. Pain is ringing all around my body. Blood is flowing like a river from all of my wounds. I could hear the loud scream of a woman in pain right next to my ear. I turn back and see those cold eyes staring at me and the dull knives start to gently skin me alive...


    "AAAAHHHHHHH."


    ¡­.


    -MC POV


    I look at the guy who is standing in front of me. He has let go of my shoulder and his anbu mask fell off. His mouth is open and his eyes are dull. I put him in a Genjutsu as soon as he touched me. The other Anbu are looking at me in shock and they seem ready to attack. Then I disperse all my blood-l.u.s.t and smile at them slightly with a ridiculing look in my face.


    "I am just joking."


    Then the Anbu who touched my shoulder, seems like he broke out of my genjutsu and as soon as he does so, he gets on his knees and¡­


    *brlegh*


    He throws up on the ground. It seems like I will have to get rid of the innocent & naive kid mask.


    I just look at him with a serious face.


    "You know you are lucky that I am so nice. If it was some other S rank Konoha ninja..like Orochimaru. You would have thrown up more than your lunch."


    And then I started walking towards the Inuzuka clan compound. I don''t even stop at my mother''s house and immediately go towards the Clan Head''s house. When I enter my house, after making sure no one is around. I go into my room and stomp hard on the floor.


    *bam*


    *Poof*


    A clone appears next to me. I extend my hand towards him and he does the same. We start doing some handsings together.


    I use an earth jutsu to move the earth below me, and a hole that only someone around my size can enter. The clone nods at me and waits up there.


    Then I jump down again with chakra strings attached all around to slow down my fall ¡­


    and at the end of it after 20 meters or so underground. I see a jar with a kanji meaning iron inscribed in it. I pick it up and I  jump up with the help of chakra strings.


    After getting to the top. I sit down cross legged. And with my hand I touch the jar, with my clone keeping watch over me¡­ I let my conscience go into the jar...


    ¡­.


    Soon I am in a white space¡­ and I see in the middle of this white space there is a creature that resembles a dark purple leech with a serpent-like body¡­ on its face, it wears a blank white coloured  mask that has the kanji for ''zero'' on it, which is tan in colour and five red hair-like strands sprouting from it four at the top and one at the bottom. It is surrounded in chains holding it down together with five giant steel pillars connected by chains in a circular way. All of that is holding the creature down.


    As soon as it sees me it tries to send some dark chakra towards me but it is blocked by all the seals. Then a mouth on the mask and the mouth in the mask moves and it says.


    "I see that you only have one arm now¡­ I can heal it for you if you want¡­ I can give you unimaginable power¡­ a power that can strengthen you the stronger your enemy is¡­


    I CAN MAKE YOU STRONGER¡­ THE STRONGEST..."

 Chapter 77 - You Are My Pet...

    "I see that you only have one arm now¡­ I can heal it for you if you want¡­ I can give you unimaginable power¡­ a power that can strengthen you the stronger your enemy is¡­


    I CAN MAKE YOU STRONGER."


    ¡­.


    So he can talk huh¡­ I just look at it, smile and say to the zero tails  in a calm voice...


    "I always assumed that you had some sort of intelligence¡­ but I am surprised to know¡­


    that it was so low¡­ let me explain¡­"


    Then I make a handsign and the pillars shine with lightning around them and then¡­


    *boom*


    It started shocking the zero tails.


    "Aaahhhhhhh"


    The zero tails gets shocked and his body tries to move because it''s in pain but the seals don''t allow him to move at all. His body just shakes a little and he screams.


    "AHHHHHH¡­"


    ..


    I keep the lighting going for twenty seconds and then stop. I get close to the zero tails. Who now has smoke come out of his burned flesh, I look at it and say in a cold voice.


    "So have you come to your senses now¡­ do you understand now¡­. our relationship... isn''t as equals¡­".


    I then look at it''s face and say.


    "You are my pet¡­ and¡­ I am your  master¡­ so never misunderstand our relationship¡­ little leach¡­ another temper tantrum like this and you get demoted to a labrat."


    Immediately as soon as I say that. It doesn''t move. I have plans that when I go into the Konoha Clan Head meeting there is a chance (however small) that they might be unreasonable or maybe by my influence I have changed the Canon timeline and the Hokage is under a Genjutsu. So if they might try to silence me or... even someone like Madara who currently should be in a cave in an unknown location might do something unexpected and ruin my plans.


    So if I need to run away I will release the Zero Tails in the middle of the Village and become a missing nin. Maybe go over to the Village Hidden in the Grass. Kill it''s leader, impersonate him and continue lurking in the shadows researching and then come out and join akatsuki. Assassinate Obito and impersonate him in the fourth ninja war. Get the 10 tails and the rest will be history¡­. That I will write¡­ as I will be the victor¡­ so if I see that there is no other option than to become a missing nin¡­ that is the day Yami Inuzuka will ''die''.


    Though this is a world that I know the future of¡­ there are many unstable factors in this thing that this has become like a house of cards¡­ if I am not careful enough with some minor details, my knowledge of future events without my careful intervention everything will fall down¡­ also like a house of cards¡­ so I need even my plans to have plans and my secrets to have secrets.


    I have to keep my mind open to numerous possibilities and options¡­ never let myself get tunnel vision and concentrate on only one enemy. I have enemies everywhere inside and out of Konoha.


    I look at the leach again and say¡­


    "Have we come to an agreement."


    Then the leach gives a quiet "yes"


    "YES, YES MASTER."


    I then drop my hand down and the flashing pillars go back to normal. I  start walking away but as I do so I turn around towards the zero tails and tell him in a mocking tone.


    "Next time don''t say it that loud¡­ it sounds weird."


    I don''t look at it''s face and I make another handseal and...


    *fwosh*


    My conscience is pulled out of the jar and now I am in front of my clone. I then take the jar in my hand and throw it towards the clone. He catches it. I then take a normal stone from the ground and put some chakra into it. As soon as I do that strange seals start being made on the stone. Another invisible seal appears into my hand. I look at my clone and he nods seriously. He knows what to do. If the stone breaks¡­ release the zero tails on the Village and with the negative emotions it has been creating by itself, it will wreck quite a havoc before it''s stopped¡­ giving me a window to escape.


    Soon I get out of the hole in my floor and I am back to my room, my clone will move later and get into position. I go take a shower which I haven''t had in a long time. The battlefield sure is a nasty place. Then as I am wiping my hair and look, at my eleven year old body with one arm¡­ countless scars all over my body but only two stand out¡­ one in the neck, which I got recently from the Raikage. And another giant slash scar into my c.h.e.s.t¡­ this was from that Sand Ninja during the ambush¡­ I also noticed the slightly graying hair...


    ¡­.


    I then wear a black kimono with anbu pants and go outside of my house as soon as I go outside I see a dog with white fur come towards me. It took me a second to recognize him...


    It''s Shiro my Ninken¡­ he has grown a little he used to be as small as a pup now he has gotten bigger and looks like a snow white wolf¡­. but he is still kind of small¡­ as soon as it comes towards me and starts rubbing his face on my leg. I bend down and pick him up by the back of his neck.


    I bring Shiro up to my face level and look him in the eyes. He looks at me happily wiggling his tail  with his tongue out. I then squint my eyes and¡­ say to him in a serious face.


    "You have put on some weight Shiro¡­."


    His tail stops shaking and his ears fall down in sadness. Then he just looks down and w.h.i.n.es a little¡­. Then I just smile at Shiro, put him down and scratch the back of his neck. He then lies on his back and shows me his belly.


    I just smile and tell him in a jokingly way.


    "Wait for me little guy."


    Then I get up, walk outside of my house and start going towards the Hokage Tower¡­.


    ¡­.


    When I arrive there I look at it with a cold calculating look in my face¡­


    .


    .


    It seems like it''s time I started getting serious...

 Chapter 78 - Politics 101 with Yami -sensei (Part 1)

    ¡­


    Then I open the doors to the Hokage tower and immediately I see all of the clan Heads in there crowded¡­ there also seem to be some of the successors of the clan heads in here.


    Except the Yamanaka clan head (who has a proxy), Senju and some other unimportant clans who are probably on the front lines. As soon as I enter I see all eyes on me. The clan leaders are all sitting in a big circular table. With the hokage having the highest chair, showing that he is the highest position of power.


    The Hokage looks at me at me with a strange look. He probably wanted to meet me before the Clan Head meeting. I would have gone there, he would have probably tried to help me. After all, I am the most ''talented'' ninja that Konoha has had in all of its existence. I would have gone to him for help... if I was innocent that is.


    I definitely don''t underestimate Hiruzen''s ability to read me. He will be the longest hokage in power in the future. You don''t go that far by being nice and good all the time. I am not saying he isn''t kind but if he knew¡­ I really did steal the sharingan well¡­ that would backfire in me. By not going to him it might make him suspicious and it will definitely make Danzo doubt me. But I am still only a ''kid'',  an eleven year old kid who just was in a death battle and is just having a temper tantrum.


    ¡­


    (3rd POV)


    ¡­


    The Uchiha Clan leader sits to the right of the Hokage. He looks at his successor¡­ a nineteen year old Fugaku sitting to his right and his young daughter Mikoto to his left. He communicated with handsigns with Fugaku. Telling him to not cause a ruckus or anything like that.


    When all of the clan heads sit down. They don''t whisper anything or even talk. They all communicate between each other by using handsigns.


    Yami looks around and sees that there is no seat for him. Then he just simply takes out a scroll, everyone instinctively tenses up and Yami runs some chakra through the scroll¡­


    *poof*


    A normal chair comes out of the smoke and Yami  rings it closer to the round table and sits on it. Taking his seat as the Inuzuka Clan head¡­ the other clan heads are looking at him with cold looks. He just challenged their power play. It''s the same as Yami challenging their authority.


    When Yami sees this he sits down he looks at all of them and smiles.


    "Hello. Long time no see. I really missed Konoha. Ahhhhh it is so sad that I couldn''t meet Tsume and my mother. Even when I was tired I went to my house and didn''t find them there. Then I remembered an anbu told me that there was a clan meeting and immediately came here. Finally taking a shower without having to use a water jutsu or being afraid of a kunai stabbing me in the b.u.t.t hole."


    Some of the clan heads politely laugh while some are truly laughing. The Uchiha and a couple of other clans don''t even smile. Yami just looks at them secretly while memorizing every one of the clan names that would be a problem.


    ''Playing dumb can turn a powerplay on its head. When someone has to explain exactly how they are threatening you, it becomes either laughable or plain evil, both of which are more easily resisted'' - thinks Yami...


    Then suddenly the Hokage clears his throat and all of the clan heads immediately stop communicating with handsigns.


    Then the  Hokage looks towards Yami and says in a calm and serious voice.


    "We are glad to have you here Yami."


    Fugaku Uchiha is about to say something but the Uchiha clan head notices this and looks at him coldly. Fugaku''s words got stuck in his throat¡­ and he didn''t say anything.


    The Uchiha clan leader can''t help but look at the Inuzuka kid in a new light.


    ''The kid melted all of the ice and suspicion when he got here by acting like he did. He already knows what is happening. He also showed that cold look to Uchiha, the Hyuga and the Kurama clan¡­ he is telling us not to act against him no he is¡­ ORDERING US¡­ THAT KID¡­ JUST BECAUSE HE GOT A LITTLE FAME HE THINKS THAT THE UCHIHA ARE SO WEAK¡­''


    Even though the anger inside the Uchiha clan head was like a volcano. He had an impassive face like nothing happened. He looks towards Fugaku, the future clan head that the current Clan Head is trying to make him understand the political side of konoha¡­ just strength and pride are not enough to be prosperous in Konoha. Fugaku will need some more self control before he can be married to Mikoto and take over as the Clan Head.


    Hiruzen smiles and says to Yami.


    "I heard that you did some amazing things on the battlefield and saved hundreds of lives. Tsunade is very proud of you."


    Yami didn''t stop smiling at all and said in a sincere voice.


    "Thanks Hokage -sama. I am glad that I was able to help¡­ also I gave Jiraya -sama the four ninja Swords that I took when I killed their welders. I hope that Jiraya -sama is able to use them to broker peace with the Land Of Water."


    The Hokage nods and then he gets a serious look.


    "Jounin Yami Inuzuka¡­ due to some troublesome news¡­ they say that they have seen you using a Chain like Fuinjutsu technique."


    Everyone is looking at Yami with a serious face.


    But Yami seems like he is oblivious to the looks around him and says with an even wider smile and he seems completely relaxed...

 Chapter 79 - Politics 101 with Yami…. part 2

    .


    .


    Everyone is looking at Yami with a serious face.


    But Yami seems like he is oblivious to the looks around him and says with an even wider smile on his face completely relaxed...


    Then Yami says in a cheery voice.


    "Oh yeah that is a technique I created. I was intrigued when I read about the Uzumaki chains. It was truly amazing¡­ able to seal chakra and restrain even the strongest of monsters. It was hard but with my best friends Kushina and Minato helping me learn some Fuinjutsu. I was able to figure it out."


    All the clan heads nod. After all no matter how you look at it there is no other way that he was able to do so. The only slightly surprising thing was his talent in Fuinjutsu.


    Then suddenly the Uchiha Clan Head speaks in a cold voice.


    "What about the Sharingan that you seem to have..."


    Immediately a cold atmosphere descends on the room. The Hokage looks at the Uchiha Clan head for daring to interrupt him¡­ but he¡­


    let it go¡­ after all, a lot of Uchiha did die in the war¡­ even the Uchiha Clan Heads son did so. So if Yami Inuzuka did take the eyes of an Uchiha that is a VERY grave crime¡­ it could even be considered treason of the highest level.


    ''Then there is the possibility that the mother Yami Inuzuka cheated on her husband with another man¡­ an Uchiha more specifically.'' -That is the thought process of almost everyone in the room.


    Yami looks a little surprised and shocked at this, his smile vanishes while he says.


    "Wait what do you mean about sharingan¡­. I don''t think I have the sharingan¡­ I am from the Inuzuka Clan¡­ Uchiha -san.."


    The Clan Head frowns and is about to say something but¡­ he senses a strong gaze with a little killing intent directed at him. He looks towards the gaze and sees the Hokage''s gaze. He stops himself from talking anymore. But he still doesn''t apologise to the Hokage. After all he is the Uchiha Clan head and he won''t embarrass himself over something as small as this.


    The Hokage even though he is a little angry about this... he doesn''t show any emotion in his face and says to Yami in a calming voice.


    "Due to some secret intelligence we now know that you somehow were in possession of the Sharingan and were able to use another secret technique of the Sharingan that¡­ only the strongest of Uchiha should know how to use it."


    Yami looks at the Hokage weirdly¡­ and then Fugaku covers his eyes with his hand as if rubbing them.


    Yami then says in a serious tone.


    "Is that so called secret informant...


    the Raikage¡­  Did the Raikage''s say of how I killed all of his teammates in front of him and that he couldn''t protect them. And how I escaped him."


    "I lost this against the Raikage¡­ but he lost all of his subordinates and one of them who was a sensor and¡­ another was the S rank shinobi¡­ Dodai "The Rubber Man."


    Then Yami dramatically spreads his arm to the side and says.


    "Why... I used a genjutsu in my eyes that made them look like the sharingan¡­"


    Then there seems to be some dawning realisation in all of the people in the room.


    Then Yami continued with a smile on his face.


    "... and that gave me a big advantage over them¡­ they were afraid of looking into my eyes. The teleportation was also a clone of mine creating illusions for the Raikage to ''kill'' while I was taking ''care'' of his teammates."


    The Hokage seems to physically relax a little and he said to Yami.


    "Truly an ingenious tactic. Though it seems like the Raikage underestimated you for it to work on him. But it truly was a genius plan. Not only did you eliminate some strong enemy ninja, you also were able to hold back the Raikage and you notified the camp of his presence and to prepare for it. Also you exterminating the mad dog of the Mist the Kaguya Clan, and that will give us a huge adventure in the war against Mist"


    ''Though I know you are hiding something Yami Inuzuka¡­''


    "Jounin Yami Inuzuka you are awarded


    17 S rank missions to your record also another 15 A rank to your record due to your good leadership on your part¡­ and another 20 B rank missions will be added to your record, you will also receive pay for the B rank missions."


    Yami just nods towards the Hokage.


    Then the hokage''s eyes  look around the room¡­ as if asking for anyone to dare to challenge his decision.


    Then as a final saying the Hokage says.


    "The accusation against Yami Inuzuka are all dismissed. They were all the lies of an enemy ninja."


    All of the clan heads nod. Even the Uchiha. They don''t dare to challenge the Hokage on his decision.


    ¡­


    Then after the matter is finished and done all of the clan heads go outside of the room. When they are outside. They go to Yami to make some small talk and get to know the new Hero of Konoha¡­ and current Inuzuka Clan Head.


    The Hyuga are an antisocial bunch so they immediately left¡­  but the Uchiha also went outside and left soon after the Hyuga... the Clan head then says to Fugaku.


    "Never again activate the Sharingan in a Clan Head meeting like that."


    Mikoto looked surprised when her father said this. Fugaku looks at the Clan Heads back and says.


    "I apologise Yashiro -sama it will never happen again. But the other Clan Heads didn''t notice me so I didn''t see the harm in it."


    Yashiro looks at Fugaku and says sternly.


    "All of them noticed you, even those who didn''t were secretly notified by the others of what you were doing¡­ Fugaku... let this be the last time you ever do something like this."


    Fugaku looks at Yashiro (Uchiha Clan Head) and says seriously.


    "I understand Yashiro -sama."


    Then Yashiro looked sideways at Fugaku completely ignoring that Mikoto was here and he said.


    "Well what is done,  is done and can''t be changed¡­ so what did you see¡­ was he lying.."


    Then Fugaku makes a strange face and says¡­.

 Chapter 80 - I Am Back Home

    ¡­.


    "Well what is done,  is done and can''t be changed¡­ so what did you see¡­ was he lying.."


    Then Fugaku makes a strange face and says¡­.


    ..


    "No he was not¡­ I checked his heart beat, blood flow, body language and everything else. He didn''t lie¡­"


    Yashiro then nods and keeps walking forward.


    "I see¡­ come then Fugaku, Mikoto¡­ you two will need to also learn how sometimes you need to use diplomacy to solve problems¡­ after all Fugaku you are the most talented Uchiha of your age¡­ and the next Clan Head of the Uchiha."


    It was true¡­ Fugaku''s talent with Genjutsu is one of the best the Uchiha has ever had¡­


    ¡­.


    -(MC POV)-


    ¡­.


    When everyone else dispersed. I invited one of the minor ninja clan heads in Konoha to join me for a walk.


    ¡­.


    After some time I am able to convince the Onikuma clan head.


    I just smile at the Onikuma clan head and say...


    "Thanks¡­ Enki -san¡­ the Onikuma Clan will always  be a friend of the Inuzuka."


    This is one of the minor Clans of Konoha. The Onikuma Clan who uses a possession type jutsu with their Bear summons. We just made an alliance together in case something like this ever happens to any of us¡­ I will have his vote and he will have mine¡­ my clan is stronger than his so I will be the leader in our decisions. The other strong clans like Nara already are in an alliance. The Aburame Clan don''t need an alliance anyway since they are one of the four noble ninja clans in Konoha.


    Then I separate from him and go towards the Inuzuka clan compound.


    While walking I can''t help but think of Fugaku activating the Sharingan. That was a lucky break¡­ the Uchiha probably will not question me anymore. After all with their pride they will never even question if their eyes are wrong¡­


    I had the sharingan¡­ of course I developed some methods on how to lie to it¡­


    I also knew that they won''t use any mind reading techniques on an S rank ninja like me¡­ I can easily stop a mindread with Fuinjutsu but that would definitely mean that I did something wrong.


    In the end it all went¡­ according to plan...


    ¡­.


    When I go inside my house I sense someone trying to hide from me.¡­ and they are doing a very bad job at it.


    "HIYAAAA I GOT YOU YAMI."


    "HEYYY DON''T IGNORE ME YOU BASTARD."


    She then tries to punch me. I just dodge out of the way with speed that she can''t even see. The whole way to the kitchen she kept attacking me but couldn''t even hit me at all.


    ..


    I go into the kitchen and start making some tea¡­ Tsume is still attacking me, I just dodge her attacks¡­. And she is punching my after images¡­


    Tsume looks angrily at me and gains an evil light in her eyes¡­


    "How about this BAKA YAMI."


    *baam*


    She kicked the teapot while it was heating up¡­


    All of the tea is in the air and the pot is about to fall down...


    Then I use some weak fire jutsu to continue warming up the tea.


    I then grab a cup with my chakra string, go to the kitchen table and sit down. I pour some tea for myself and look towards Tsume and say to her in a relaxed voice.


    "Do you want some tea¡­"


    Then veins appear on her forehead. Wow that is unhealthy for someone her age¡­


    "SHUT UP YOU BASTARD." -says Tsume while she is trying to punch me again¡­


    No wonder the future Kiba had such a¡­ terrible temperament, it seems like it was an inherited trait from his mother.


    I have already read her feelings... even though she tried to hide them from me by acting like this.


    I just smile at her and say¡­


    "Don''t worry Tsume¡­ I am okay¡­ it was just an arm¡­"


    She then gets close to me and¡­ hugs me then I see her face¡­


    "YAMI¡­ I THOUGHT YOU WERE DEAD¡­"


    While looking at her I can''t help but think¡­so being a tsundere really isn''t as easy as it seems¡­ Then I just pet her head and say¡­


    "Sooo¡­. You don''t want tea??"


    Then she jumps away from the hug and just points her finger at me.


    "Why the hell are you so concentrated on the tea. You ruined a touching moment damn it."


    I just shrug my shoulders. I sense her ninken outside of the house running around with Shiro.


    "So where is your ninken Kuromaru... "


    Then I  widen my eyes for some dramatic effect.


    "...don''t tell me... you lost him... or maybe he died a very painful death while sacrificing himself for you to be able to run away."


    Tsume''s body just starts shaking in anger again.


    Then she screams towards me


    "No he isn''t dead. Why are you making up some depressing story all of a sudden."


    Then I take a sip of hot tea¡­


    *sigh*


    I get up from the table, get close to the angry Tsume and¡­ hug her¡­


    "I am back home Tsume."


    While saying that I can''t help but think of another home¡­ in another world¡­


    Then Tsume tears up again. She hugs me back and says in a quiet voice.


    "Welcome back Yami¡­"


    I just smile slightly at her¡­


    ''I should go visit my ''mother'' soon¡­''

 Chapter 81 - The Life of a Mother…

    ¡­.


    -Misune (Yami''s Mother) POV-


    ¡­..


    While lying here in bed not knowing whether today will be the day that someone comes to the door with the news that my son is dead¡­ my hair is a little disheveled and I have gotten thinner from the stress...


    When I was younger I used to consider myself the luckiest woman in the world¡­ I was married to a Shinobi who made a lot of money and was very powerful and during the peace times, death of a Chunin in missions was almost nonexistent ¡­ then in a day just like this the news came of my husband''s death¡­


    I recently heard stories of Yami''s achievements¡­ how he ended the war against Sand Village and all that¡­ but he will always be my little baby boy¡­


    When he was younger he was always such a nice kid¡­ he never cried too much neither was he too naughty¡­ he was just a normal sweet kid¡­ I remember like it was yesterday when he came and asked me to teach him how to write and read¡­ he was only three back then¡­ I was so proud of him but also a little curious what my little angel was doing with that knowledge of his...


    I got that answer the next week when during my birthday he gave me flowers and a card with his  bad handwriting¡­


    {To the best mother in the world


    -FrOm: YaMi}


    I can''t help as some tears fall from my eyes¡­ he is such a sweet kid... I don''t want him to die in this war¡­ I knew I shouldn''t have let him go to the Ninja Academy¡­ I knew something like this would happen¡­ By guiding him in a career that he is destined to die¡­ it''s the same as killing him with my own two hands¡­


    All alone in this empty house¡­ Tsume who is such a sweet child comes around but¡­ lately when I asked her about Yami she seemed a little nervous and she kept stuttering¡­ Tsume is an amazing girl but¡­ she is also a terrible liar.


    Something happened to Yami and she isn''t telling me. I am now expecting everyday¡­ to hear the bad news...


    ¡­.


    -(Yami POV)-


    ¡­.


    I am walking together with Tsume towards my mother''s house. Tsume looks at me and says.


    "You know I asked her multiple times to come live with me. But she always said that she likes it in the small house, and that it reminds her of you."


    After I finish this greeting with mother, I need to go and start working on a prosthetic arm¡­ then with me at 100% I can confidently ask Danzo about the ''thing''. I still have some blueprints from when I studied Chiyo''s puppets. I will look through the research scroll and try to make an arm that will be able to allow me to at least use Tsunade''s Super Strength technique with it.


    When I get closer to my house I can sense my ... mother''s chakra weakening.


    Sh*t is that b*tch about to die¡­ she can''t die yet¡­ I need her to be alive for dangerous people like Danzo and the others to think that they have an advantage against me. I need them to think that I have a weakness and an attachment to the village...


    I then start running towards the house leaving Tsume behind and I  hear Tsume loudly tell me.


    "Hey Yami why are you rushing¡­"


    But I leave her behind to follow me¡­


    As soon as I arrive in the house I immediately go inside her room and  see her there. Disheveled hair, thin body and void eyes¡­ holy sh*t¡­ is she depressed or something, I can guess that she is probably depressed about me but c''mon can''t she be a little more strong willed. I am not even dead yet. I mean I don''t even have my family in this world and you don''t see me b*tching about it..


    I immediately use a diagnosis jutsu on her¡­ ok so she is healthy¡­ but just a little weak¡­ then when she sees me¡­ her eyes gain life again and she immediately sits up from her bed and envelops me in a powerful hug¡­ I could feel her tears falling on my shoulder¡­


    I just hug her back and smile while telling her.


    "You shouldn''t have worried for nothing mother. Your son is powerful and a hero¡­ so there is no need to worry about me¡­ also I am not going to war anymore.."


    I then use a subtle Genjutsu on her before she notices my arm¡­ I don''t want her to have a cardiac arrest or anything like that¡­ it would be very troublesome to heal her back¡­


    Then Tsume finally arrives while breathing heavily. Then when my mother sees Tsume she just smiles at her..


    "I see so you are back from your C rank mission


    Tsume."


    Then my ''mother'' looks at me and says while smiling.


    "Isn''t she cute Yami¡­ she was so nice to me while you were gone Yami she even helped me cook."


    Then I notice ''mother'' secretly making an okay sign towards Tsume¡­ who blushes profoundly¡­


    I just smile slightly while seeing their interactions. Wasn''t she very depressed a couple of seconds ago¡­ what a drag..


    ¡­.


    After some catching up and me still maintaining my Genjutsu in my mother for her to not notice my missing arm¡­ then I look towards Tsume while eating some food that mother made. I then say to Tsume.


    "So you have become a Genin now huhh¡­"


    She just nods while eating. Then she tilts her head like she remembered something and she takes something from her ninja pouch and ties it around her neck. Then she looks at me and while smiling she says.


    "Tadahh¡­"


    I just look calmly at her¡­ and go back to eating without saying anything¡­ it''s really fun to mess with Tsume.


    When she sees that I didn''t say anything to her she then gets a little nervous and says.


    "S -So how does it look."


    I look away from my food and back at Tsume.


    "It was a smart decision to put it in your neck."


    Then I notice Tsume smiling slightly at me and she says.


    "I know right. Most people put in their forehead but that would cover my hair and that wouldn''t look as good."


    ..Oh right¡­ I am used to ninja war veterans doing everything to protect their weak points¡­ Tsume probably hasn''t even gone in one war mission. If my dates are correct , her graduation should have been just recently.


    My mother just looks at Tsume and me talking¡­ she keeps smiling in silence while seeing us act like this.


    ¡­.


    Like this we all keep having some small talk until it becomes night time. Even though I don''t want to¡­ to keep up my act I still ask my mother if she wants to come live with me and she¡­. says yes¡­ ohhh¡­. *sigh* this will be such a pain...


    ¡­.


    ¡­


    Then when we arrive at the house I look at my mother and tell her.


    "You can choose any guest room you want mother."


    She just smiles and nods¡­ then she goes upstairs. Tsume goes to do her own things in her room. Most likely fall asleep¡­ I should sleep too¡­ this has been a VERY stressful day¡­ but before that I need to reorganize some plans for the prosthetic arm¡­


    I go into my lab door and put my hand on it and a¡­ seal arey appears all around the door and the seal burns off allowing me to go inside.


    I look around and all seems normal. The self destruct sequence is not broken and neither is the alarm¡­ and the barrier seal is also not broken and neither is the notification seal or the second self destruct sequence...


    There is some dust around but everything else seems okay¡­ I guess no one was able to break in even if they tried they wouldn''t really get anything from it except a destroyed room.


    Then as I summon three clones to clean this up¡­


    ..


    After five minutes everything is clean again¡­ then suddenly I hear a knock on the door¡­


    "Can I come in."


    So it''s Tsume¡­ what does she want at this time.


    "Sure come on in."


    When she comes in I see that she is  wearing a green kimono and she seems to be blushing¡­


    I see that she is nervous so she then pulls down her kimono on one shoulder¡­ then while stuttering she says.


    "S- S- So since you lost an arm¡­ I understand that you might die one day. So since you are the most talented in K -Konoha. I have read some books a -and¡­ S -SO LET''S HAVE A BABY TOGETHER."


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    (A/N: This time I had to write one and a half chapters as one because¡­ well you know¡­ (it''s because I am addicted to cliffhangers¡­ I have a problem I know¡­)

 Chapter 82 - Annoying

    "S- S- So since you lost an arm¡­ I understand that you might die one day. So since you are the most talented in K -Konoha. I have read some books a -and¡­ S -SO LET''S HAVE A BABY TOGETHER."


    ¡­


    I just look at her seriously¡­ go towards her and¡­ grab her by the back of her neck lift her up¡­ Tsume then gets a shocked look in her face¡­ I go towards the door, open it with my chakra strings and¡­


    *fwoosh*


    I threw Tsume outside¡­ she falls on her b.u.t.t and while closing the door I tell her.


    "Kids shouldn''t stay so late¡­ go to sleep Tsume."


    And I close the door. Tsume then is knocked off of her shocked state¡­ she says nothing and just


    walks away. Though I can hear her quietly say to herself.


    "Baka Tsume¡­ that was so embarrassing¡­ waaahhhhh how will I talk to him tomorrow¡­"


    Then I just deactivate my spying seal that I have all around the house¡­ kids are really weird in this ninja world¡­ I know that Tsume is a kid¡­ her affection for me is definitely not love or anything like that¡­ it is mostly a childhood crush and a huge amount of admiration that she has for me


    And I should know this¡­ after all admiration is the emotion furthest from understanding or love.


    *poof*


    A lot of different books and scrolls come out of the scroll¡­ then I search through some of them and I finally find the one that was a study upon Chiyo''s puppets that i did a long time ago¡­ I open the book and start doing some light reading¡­


    *sigh*


    I really miss the sharingan¡­ I will need to get another one soon...


    ¡­


    -One Month Later-


    ¡­


    ..


    .


    I am currently in my yard lying in a beach chair while drinking some horrible tasting medical juice that I made. I am wearing sunglasses with black shorts and a white loose white t-shirt¡­ the juice helps my body develop faster strength and dexterity. Also it helps my hair roots produce black pigmentation. I don''t want other people to know of my weakness yet.


    I then  pick up the juice with my arm¡­ the one who used to be only a stump¡­ not it looks like a normal arm with the same skin color as the rest of my body and all that¡­ it''s not even a transformation jutsu¡­


    Though the arm is a prosthetic that I made by myself¡­ with fake plastic skin to make it look like my skin¡­


    Then I look at the genin team in front of me who are cleaning the grass as a D rank mission¡­ poor bastards they are doing the job all by hand while their Nara Jounin sensei is lying down on the porch cloud watching¡­ I look at the genin team two of them are civilian ninja so totally unimportant but, the third genin is¡­ Tsume¡­


    Ever since that day I keep teasing Tsume about what she did¡­ hehehehe it''s just so fun¡­


    ¡­


    Tsume POV


    ...


    I just look at Yami who is drinking his gross juice. I asked him once what it even was and he with a serious voice told me it was the source of his strength. Then when I secretly tried it once I immediately threw up and had to stay all night and clean it so Yami wouldn''t notice. And in the morning he just had that knowing smirk  in his face.


    Then there was that time when one morning he just came out for breakfast with a new arm like nothing happened then¡­


    "Tsume what are you doing."


    Then when I get back to my senses¡­ I look at my hands and see that I have pulled the grass together with the roots¡­ Sensei looks at me¡­ he is lying down¡­ then he just sighs and turns the other way with his back facing me¡­


    Damn it I didn''t know Yami was this annoying. I used to admire and think of him as a hero¡­ but now even I see that he is a dork¡­ I mean he is only a little older than me and he is still amazing.


    Only recently he bought: five dango shops, one small clinic, one veterinary, ten new shops that make something called pica and five apartment buildings. Now all of the civilian Inuzuka are employed by the Inuzuka clan.


    I have even heard Nara -sensei say that he is a genius merchant and Anyone who wants to sell something knows to go to Yami Inuzuka. He will give you the best prices. I don''t know where he got the money but apparently it is all legitimate.


    I mean I know nothing about money. But even I can sense that he did something very fishy. Nara sensei says that if Yami continues like this the Inuzuka Clan''s wealth will surpass the Uchiha and Senju clans in only five years.


    Also I have only done D rank missions since I came back¡­ that is also very suspicious¡­ and 99% of those missions are from Yami. Clean his yard, helping lady Missune with grocery shopping, entertaining Shiro, giving a full body massage to Shiro, washing Shiro, playing catch with Shiro¡­ he spoils his ninken Shiro way too much and the little bastard Shiro as if reading his master''s mind. When my  genin team went to buy him his dog food he just tires us all around Konoha trying to find his favourite food. Which changes every three days.


    I look at Yami and he as if sensing my gaze looks at me, he takes his sunglasses off and¡­ with an obviously fake blush on his face pulls his shirt down on his shoulder while badly acting embarrassed...


    THIS BASTARD IS SO ANNOYING¡­


    -Yami POV-


    ...


    After having some more fun with Tsume I wait until night time. I am in my lab during this time I look at my prosthetic arm and say.


    "Go get me a drink."


    Suddenly the arm dispatches from me and¡­ a rocket like black flame comes from the place where it used to be connected to my arm¡­ then the arm goes and gets me a glass of water and comes back¡­ I usually control it remotely but I wanted to see if it works like this too. I checked the seals and everything seems in order. This new arm has rosen my combat ability by at least 50%. I then look at the arm and smile at it...


    "Goodwork everything seems good¡­ isn''t that right¡­ little leach¡­"


    ...Yes I have sealed the zero tails inside the arm. With a lot of seal modifications I can use it''s full ability without any drawbacks. I did also learn the Body Revival Technique but it was not as good as I thought. Anyone who knows or can see where the chakra points in a human body are will be able to completely cripple and easily defeat a user of the technique¡­ kind of like Sasuke did to the guy who used this in Naruto. Though I do use it to train my body by just sitting down¡­


    Then I look at the clock¡­ 10 pm¡­ just two more hours to go...


    ¡­..


    Then when it is immediately midnight I wear my anbu pants and a black shirt. And start going towards an old building in the outskirts of Konoha. I go inside and immediately I notice anbu with blank masks hidden in the shadows¡­


    Then I soon arrived in front of a rundown door. I open it and inside is¡­.  Danzo¡­ waiting for me¡­.


    Then I look at him in the eyes...


    Well then¡­ let''s see how you play the game¡­ Shimura Danzo...

 Chapter 83 - Doing Homework

    Chapter 84


    Title: Conversion with Danzo...


    Looking at Danzo in front of me I am absolutely calm. I am stronger than I was in the fight against the Raikage and I could kill Danzo together with the seventy three root ninja that he has with him, at max three minutes ¡­ also I have shed off all of the stress that has been acc.u.mulating since all eleven years of my life in this world¡­ always without a break¡­ now that I have relaxed and again remembered why I wanted to become immortal in the first place¡­ that was a goal I had in my last life¡­ I now kind of understand myself much more¡­ when I become immortal I know¡­ I won''t be satisfied with just that. I will want more and more¡­ as soon as I get something I will want something else even more precious¡­ that is my expression of human greed and will¡­ never satisfied with what I have¡­


    ¡­.


    Anyway I sit on the chair in front of Danzo and I know that he won''t appreciate any jokes or dull conversations so I immediately go to the point and say to him.


    "I want some Hashirama cells. Can you find that for me¡­"


    Danzo''s eye just widens a little and he says calmly.


    "What would such a thing be useful for¡­ to you"


    He didn''t even ask how I know that he is in possession of Hashirama Cells. I just calmly calculate all of the risks and say the most appropriate response.


    "It doesn''t matter to you what I use them for¡­ I know that as long as it doesn''t hurt Konoha you won''t care."


    He looks at me with his emotionless eye¡­ even though he acts cold like this I know that deep down Danzo wants to be acknowledged and appreciated for doing his duty to Konoha. I know that he feels inferior to Hiruzen¡­ and I will use that against him¡­


    He just looks at me coldly for a couple of seconds and says.


    "Let''s say that you are responsible with them and you somehow gain my trust¡­ what does Konoha Village gain from it."


    ''Trying to figure me out aren''t you''¡­ then I just act like I am thinking of something and like I have finally come to a conclusion. I then calmly said to him¡­


    "I promise you that in one year Konoha will have a wood style user¡­"


    Danzo then looks at me a little surprised. After all... there hasn''t been a wood style user since Hashirama Senju. Even his children and grandchildren haven''t been any Wood Users.


    "I will accept your offer¡­ but¡­ you will owe me a favor of my saying in the future."


    YESSS checkmate¡­ even though I am excited in my head... I just calmly look at him calmly, I frown a little and say.


    "I will accept¡­ if it''s favour which won''t go against my morals."


    He just looks at me for a while¡­ I could see him thinking hard on this¡­ but he doesn''t know that I have already won this game old man. Now I am just acting to not make him suspicious or anything like that¡­ also I am definitely not going to keep any promise or do any favours if they don''t suit my needs. I mean he could ruin my reputation by saying that I don''t keep my word but then he would expose himself so that is a definite no no¡­


    Actually after giving me the Hashirama Cells he just kind of became useless to me¡­ should I kill him¡­ nah he still has one final use before I take everything from him¡­ also managing Root isn''t something I am planning for at the moment.


    Danzo after some time just stood his ground and said harshly.


    "It''s either this or no deal."


    As soon as he said that his mood and posture kind of change¡­ like he is getting ready for me to attack him. Danzo doesn''t respect people who are ''weak'' like Hiruzen¡­ I guess he thinks that I am kind of like Hiruzen¡­ he might not even keep his deals if he thinks like that¡­ well that just won''t do now...


    I just¡­ look at him and for the first time during this meeting I just¡­. smile.


    "No need to be so on guard Danzo -san¡­ I am after all only an eleven year old kid..."


    Right after that I release a little bit of killing intent towards Danzo¡­ as soon as I do so¡­.


    *fwosh*


    Ten root ninja, they are around high chunin level, they appear all around me stabbing towards my vital areas with their tanto''s as soon as they seem about to stab me...


    *clank*


    They meet an invisible barrier blocking all their tanto''s. Fuinjutsu deals a lot with barrier jutsus¡­ I know quite a bit of them¡­ I just look at them and point my prosthetic arm at them. Then I just point my finger towards one of the root ninja and¡­ suddenly it falls down¡­ then all of the ten root ninja actually fall down and¡­ die¡­ with no injuries to their bodies¡­


    Danzo sees them and doesn''t say anything. I know he is panicking but he doesn''t express it. Well barriers aren''t made just to stop physical attacks. This is my modified barrier that stops a certain type of poison stored in my prosthetic arm from going over a certain radius and killing everyone around me. Then I just look at Danzo amusingly and say¡­


    "Ok I accept the deal and¡­ I will still owe you a favor¡­"


    This action of mine is my warning to him¡­ I am not Hiruzen¡­ as soon as he steps out of line or does something¡­ I will kill him¡­ he won''t know when or how¡­ but he will die if he takes any action against me¡­ then I stop all of the poison and suck it back into my prosthetic arm with the help of another seal¡­ then I get up and start walking away while calmly telling him¡­


    "I will expect one of your Root Ninja to deliver the package."


    And then I walk outside. When I am outside of the worn down building I can''t help but think to myself¡­ Damn the ability of the zero tails to sense negative emotions is really useful...


    (A/N: The MC is warning Danzo that if he wants to try something against him he better be sure he will succeed or he will be killed without him even knowing how. The MC now finally has the political power and real power to act like this. He is also using the Zero Tails power which is sealed in his prosthetic arm to read his emotions.)

 Chapter 84 - Experiments

    ¡­.


    After that whole conversation with Danzo I go back home again¡­ Tsume and ''mother'' are both asleep. I then go into my ''lab'' room, there are several unimportant experiments and notes around. Then I go into one part of the wall and run my chakra through it a hole opens up below me and I jump inside it. When I arrive at the bottom hundreds of Fuinjutsu seals restrain me¡­


    Then as soon as I go there I pass through the hundreds of identification seals and dozens of self destruct seals¡­ when I enter there I see the results of hundreds of millions Ryo that I put in it. The room has seals all around the wall making the walls seem like they are painted black. Making it impossible for anyone to even enter in here. I am confident that even if Madara Uchiha wanted to enter here he wouldn''t be able to do so¡­. Well he might be able to brute force his way inside somehow. But as soon as he does so the lab will self destruct and will take everything inside it to smithereens. Even future Obito with his ability won''t be able to enter in here. Anyone who is in here except me¡­ it will self destruct.


    The lab floor is about 300 m2. There is also another lab one floor down from here and there are mostly the research material that I have on the zero tails and so... called ''demons'' naturally created from people''s chakra and negative emotions.


    On this floor there are dozens of humans inside capsules filled with green liquids. Inside of them are members of the Kaguya clan the liquid doesn''t allow their dead bodies to decompose. There are also dezen of big, ancient looking  computers around. Then I turn on the lights and then the room is completely lit up.


    Then in the middle of the room are three tables with three people from the Kaguya clan in them. They are dead but¡­ I have healed their injuries completely and activated their brains¡­ they should be alive but they are not.. they are missing a key component in their makeup... they can breathe and their heart also beats¡­ but¡­ they are missing their ''soul''... they have no conscience and can''t learn. They can''t produce chakra or anything like that. They are completely active and their bodies are ''alive'' with the machines attached to them but¡­ they are not truly alive.


    So by studying this is where my theory my theory on my own ''rebirth'' came from... that if it was my normal soul from my world I wouldn''t have been able to use chakra or even ''activate'' a body from this world, since to do so takes chakra. I might  have even been paralyzed at birth if I had the same soul from my last world and a body from this world. A consciousness but unable to move¡­ so that means that when my soul came here it¡­ devoured the soul of the original ''Yami'' and gained his life, memories(as a fetus they were nonexistent), and I even took his chakra¡­ since my soul was more m.a.t.u.r.e it is logical that I ate his soul. But¡­ how did my soul move from my world to this world¡­ death..  no¡­ that''s not it¡­ by some energy¡­ no that''s not it either¡­ there are only two current possibilities that I know of how I came here¡­ in death by some complete accident that generated enough energy to create a crack in the multiverse death ''system'' (the only thing I know about it is that it exists)¡­ or I was brought here¡­ or more specifically¡­ someone brought me here¡­


    I will assume the worst case scenario which is the second option¡­


    Then I instinctively start biting my nails¡­


    That means that¡­. Ok I need to calm down¡­ since this is out of my power I will just keep getting stronger until I can start getting answers¡­ it''s useless to worry about something out of my power. If it was some god or anything else I won''t think about it anymore. Everything that exists has a logical explanation to it¡­ so I will just experiment until I discover it.


    Anyway¡­ now I have learned all that there is to know about the kekkei genkai of the Kaguya Clan the Shikotsumyaku.


    Users of Shikotsumyaku possess three unique skills: the ability to control their osteoblasts (cells responsible for producing bones); the ability to control their osteoclasts (cells responsible for breaking down bones); the ability to regulate their bones'' calcium density. So long as their body does not tire out, users can take advantage of these abilities without limit. Quite a good ability.


    Then after I check that all the bodies are stable and I go downstairs.


    This is a totally different room¡­ there are different flesh parts from the ''body'' of the zero tails. They sealed in tubes with green liquid. I have studied that every part that I cut off it creates some type of mini zero tails but they die soon after they are cut off and turn into chakra. I keep them always fed with chakra on tubes so that they can even stay alive a little longer. I have created some techniques that incorporate Fuinjutsu and dark chakra¡­ they are surprisingly very compatible together. I can''t wait to use them against a real opponent.


    Then I look at the middle of the room where a giant cube made out of glass filled with green liquid on the inside. There is also an animal in it as big as a lion attached with a breathing mask and tubes attached to it¡­ the creature has dark fur¡­ damn I really should have chosen a better name for him...

 Chapter 85 - Spending Money

    .


    .


    .


    .


    ¡­.


    -three months later-


    ¡­.


    I am currently eating breakfast with my ''mother'' and Tsume¡­ who just looks at me and in a bored manner while she says.


    "So when is Shiro going to finish his secret training."


    I don''t look at her and just look at the eggs that I am eating. Shiro should be done soon¡­ Shiro before the experiment was at chunin level, for him to go beyond that he would have to wait for another 5-10 years¡­ and at max he would only be able to go up to low level Jounin¡­ that might seem good¡­ but to me that is pretty much useless. I thought that he might die during the procedure to nourish him with the flesh and dark chakra of the zero tails. I have already put numerous Fuinjutsu all over Shiro''s body. From anti corruption seal to the clear mind, anti possession seal and all that. I even put a seal in him so that I could summon Shiro whenever I might need him. Kind of like a Summoning animal but not really.


    Then I firmly replied to Tsume.


    "Soon he should be done¡­"


    Then I get up from my seat and thank my ''mother'' for the food.


    Then I go to the bathroom¡­ while I am washing my hands Tsume comes in after finishing her breakfast. When she looks at me she just smiles a little¡­ yeah she has gotten over the phase of me teasing her. She knows what I am doing is just for fun so she doesn''t want to give me the p.l.e.a.s.u.r.e ¡­ but I also know her weak point.


    I just smirk at Tsume a little and say.


    "So anyway how are your missions going."


    Her team hasn''t been in a C rank mission ever since I came back. Obviously I am manipulating the system a little. It isn''t all fun and games as it seems actually and I am doing this for a reason. Since my link to the village which is currently my ''mother'' she is my ''weakness'' that keeps people from thinking of me as a greedy monster with selfish aspirations. I have seen that my ''mother'' is a person with a weak will that might just die from the stress of me being in danger. I need to train Tsume as my next ''weakness''.


    I mean Danzo hasn''t done anything to me even when I threatened him. Because he thinks that he knows my weaknesses¡­ he thinks that he is in control. While they are all dancing in the palm of my hand¡­ the ninja are looking underneath the underneath¡­ but I just keep building more and more layers...


    .


    Then Tsume just looks at me a little angrily and she just fumeds off and goes away¡­ without even washing her hands¡­ I just smile a little and say¡­ how unruly she is¡­ and how dumb¡­ she doesn''t understand that she is being manipulated all along¡­ although this teasing seems like it is 90% for fun¡­ which is true... it is mostly for fun¡­ then there is also the other 10% which is for Tsume when she grows up and understands that I teased her because I had a ''crush'' on her and didn''t know how to express my feelings.


    Also she isn''t pretty enough for me to try so hard to get her¡­ she is like a 5/10 and if she really tries hard she might be like a 6/10¡­ I then take a shower to get ready for a very important procedure today...


    ¡­.


    Then I again go into my underground laboratory in the new third floor. I put 100 mil Ryo in it¡­ this floor is meant for Uchiha & Hashirama Cells experiments. I had almost one billion Ryo from the stealing during the war but with all of the expenses I only have about 230 million Ryo left. It isn''t bad but it also isn''t good either. My clan treasury (me)  has an income of 8.5 million Ryo a month with all of the clan taxes, restaurants, one clinic and the six apartment buildings that I own. After the first big buy out for me there are no longer enough people that want to sell things in Konoha. Though my clan treasury income is up there with the best of the clans in Konoha but¡­ my clan members still aren''t as rich as the others like the Uchiha clan members. Since their clan mostly has ninja¡­ which is a good paying job and there are a lot of Jounin in the Uchiha Clan.


    ..


    When I enter the 3rd floor there are six capsules with dead Uchiha''s in them. Of course I took their eyes and even transplanted  a pair of them to myself. How did I even get a sharingan¡­ well¡­


    I had my Clones go out of Konoha from the sewer system. Which is the only place where there is a weakness in the barrier and someone can go out undetected¡­ it took me a long time to find that weakness. And a lot of ninjas die in the war... even Uchiha''s and some bodies not being found is a normal thing in this chaotic war.


    Also in the middle of the room there is a smaller capsule filled with green liquid and there is an arm in that. The arm has thin wires and tubes attached to it¡­ getting and pumping red blood into it¡­


    ''So in about twenty minutes all of the preparations should be completed.''


    I then go to the second floor of the laboratory. There are no stairs so I just chakra walk. There it is my little puppy¡­ Shiro. He has full dark fur as black as darkness. His eyes have now become red.


    Then I press a button at the side of the giant glass cube filled with green liquid. The liquid is all drained from it and Shiro who is now the size of a horse¡­ I sense his chakra levels and I am quite pleased with his progress. He has the chakra levels of an Elite Jounin¡­ nice¡­ but let''s see if I need to kill Shiro or not¡­


    I look Shiro in the eyes, I couldn''t sense any malicious intent from it. But since he was recreated from the zero tails flesh and chakra might be able to somehow cheat the chakra sensing¡­ then I just look at him, extend my hand towards Shiro and say to him calmly¡­


    "Paw."


    *w.h.i.n.e*


    Shiro just w.h.i.n.es a little and puts his now giant paw into my hand. I immediately ran a full diagnostic jutsu on him¡­ he is perfectly normal¡­ the zero tails chakra only changed him physically¡­ so no special chakra stealing ability and all that¡­ it just simply gave Shiro a stronger body and some more chakra.


    Then I tell Shiro to use the Inuzuka man beast transformation to transform into a small dog. He does so and after I order him to go outside of my lab he listens to me¡­ as soon as he is out I let out a sigh of relief. After all the seals that were around the room were about to obliterate Shiro as soon as he gained consciousness¡­ damn I really put too many seals in here. I had to remote control thousands of them to not kill Shiro...


    Then I go back into the third floor again¡­ I activate my new sharingan and see that the arm is stabilized. Then I take out my prosthetic arm and link it to my shoulder blade to be able to be summoned whenever I want¡­ so I now have like three arms once I finish the transplant¡­ though the third prosthetic arm will be in a seal most of the time. But I will still be able to use the abilities of the zero tails¡­ and I know how useful the abilities of the zero tails are¡­ from chakra stealing to me being able to sense up to three thousand meters clearly and even being able to sense negative emotions¡­ I need to keep it on just in case¡­ at least until I figure out how to be able to use those techniques by myself.


    Then I lie on a table and do a handsign.


    *poof*


    A clone appears next to me¡­ he nods at me and goes towards the class capsule, he dries the green liquid in it and then he opens it. He then takes the arm which has a pale color and he looks at me, he then activates his sharingan and my clone says to me.


    "Let''s see if this procedure will be a success."


    I just nod and activate my own sharingan.

 Chapter 86 - Hashirama Cells

    ¡­


    While looking at the pale arm that my clone is holding. I can''t help but think¡­ every person in this world is born with a certain amount of talent¡­ the world truly is unfair¡­ but it doesn''t end there¡­ because the world is even crueler¡­ when we are born we also have a limit¡­ both physically and chakra wise¡­


    My studies showed that when I studied myself that my natural physical limits were¡­ physically at max I would be an mid Elite Jounin and¡­ Chakra Wise when I tried to do the test it would be¡­ at max high Elite Jounin rank chakra amount. Though with techniques this could be negated but¡­ for me who chases after something perfect I wouldn''t have  my body be so flawed¡­ so this transplant will truly help me extend both of my limits.


    Naruto truly was born great¡­ with a mother, who even amongst the Uzumaki Clan, she had a huge  amount of chakra. His father is the Hokage. Naruto is also the child of prophecy. Also let''s not forget that he has the strongest tailed beasts inside of him. He is also this world''s Jesus reborn. Oh yeah he also got trained by legendary ninja¡­ Naruto Uzumaki''s story isn''t of how an underdog won¡­ it was how a VERY lucky and special person born with EXTREME advantages¡­ curb stomped everyone else¡­


    How will I even compete with someone with all of those advantages¡­ I wasn''t necessarily even reborn lucky or into a good clan¡­ I am not necessarily talented or anything like that¡­ even in my first life I wasn''t some genius and I always had to try hard and use underhanded means to get where I was trying to go in life¡­ and the world simply expected me to bow my head, be nice and hope Naruto comes to save me¡­ NO FU*KING WAY THAT IS HAPPENING¡­ IF SOMEONE IS GOING TO SAVE ME IT WILL ONLY BE MYSELF¡­I WILL SLAUGHTER EVEN THE GODS WHO TRY TO CONTROL ME ...


    I will show them my human GREED¡­


    .


    Then I just look at the clone who  then puts the arm made out of Hashirama Cells eight to my stump. And he ties me up tightly to the table. Then my clone uses the chakra scalpel jutsu to slowly and delicately cut off a part of the stump to reopen the wound and unclog the blood vessels. I shake a little from the pain¡­ I didn''t use any pain killers or anything like that since it might raise my chances of not noticing something like a rejection by the Hashirama Cells.


    Then he closes the arm made from Hashirama Cells. The arm was specifically made for me¡­ as soon as the arm and my stump touched I felt a slight burn at the connection point. Then suddenly I felt like something was crawling up my arm. I am ready now for my body to reject the cells and start fighting for dominance¡­ my clone also started connecting the veins and arteries together¡­ with chakra strings and with his sharingan active he was able to see them all perfectly. He even passed some healing chakra through the strings....


    Wait when is the rejection happening¡­ after all transplants like this¡­ always have a rejection rate¡­ it''s true that I made the arm perfectly for me. From the configuration of veins to fingernails everything was made to fit me and have no rejection¡­


    ¡­.


    -one hour later-


    ¡­.


    I waited one hour after the transplant just to be sure. Then I just ordered my clone to untie me¡­ he does so¡­ and as soon as I get up I flex my new arm¡­ everything seems normal¡­ I start doing handsigns¡­ everything seems normal. My speed of doing them is about as good as when I had both hands.


    I check my body with the sharingan¡­ everything is normal¡­ my chakra is stabilized. My chakra control is perfect like always¡­


    Then I go outside of my lab and into the house¡­ I immediately go towards the Inuzuka training grounds. There were some Inuzuka genins training in it. But I just told them to go and train in one of the public training grounds since I will be testing some  ninjutsu. Then they went away. After that I check if anyone is spying on me and I also check if the Hokage is looking at me through his spying ball. When I confirm that no one is spying at me¡­ I usee


    <Earth Style: Earth Wall Jutsu>


    A normal earth wall appears in front of me¡­ nothing special about it¡­


    Then I try¡­


    <Water Style: Water Wall>


    Suddenly...


    *fwoosh*


    A HUGE amount of water spews from my mouth¡­ making half of the training ground a mud swamp¡­ amazing making a C rank jutsu have the power of a B+... this is good¡­ immediately I pull out a storage seal and summon a chakra paper¡­ I  suppress my wind chakra a little¡­ and I run chakra through it¡­


    Then the paper is cut in four pieces...

 Chapter 87 - I just didnt want to do it...

    ¡­


    I look at the paper.  Half of it is damp while the other half is normal except a little part of it has crumbled to earth¡­ amazing¡­ so I now have a natural water element¡­ it''s like I was born with two elements  ¡­this is amazing¡­ then I do a couple of handsigns and¡­


    Some muddy water  raises from the ground...


    I was hopeful for me to get Wood Style¡­ but it seems like it wasn''t effective¡­


    ..


    Then I look at my new arm and decide to¡­ punch the ground¡­


    *BOOOM*


    A giant crater is created¡­ I look at my hand¡­ everything is normal¡­ then I run some chakta to my right shoulder blade¡­


    *poof*


    Another arm appears¡­ it''s my prosthetic arm with the zero tails in it¡­ I control the arm to open its palm¡­ then the hand starts morphing and slowly forming a canon head¡­


    ''Let''s see how good it is now¡­''


    The canon head rotates with dark chakra forming in the middle of it and taking the form of a dark laser¡­ then after three seconds¡­


    *PEW*


    The lazer flies off and hits a tree¡­.


    *BOOM*


    It ran through a couple of them and caused an explosion ¡­ just like before when it was my arm¡­ it has around the same power as a C rank jutsu. The longer I charge it the stronger it becomes. Also if I grab someone with that arm I can suck out his chakra and it will store it into my  Strength of a Hundred Seal¡­


    Everything seems in place¡­ I now have a Sharingan, Hashirama Cells and the zero tails¡­ I am at the peak of my power again¡­ currently except getting a new better Mangekyo Sharingan, which I am currently working on¡­ there is no way for me to get more powerful¡­ I will just need to wait for my body to grow up¡­ I am still only eleven years old¡­ after this war is over I will attempt to reverse summon myself and learn Senjutsu¡­ it seems like the only thing that I need to grow¡­ is time¡­ which I do have quite a bit¡­ I guess with the help of the sharingan I should learn some jutsu¡­ I should also use clones on it¡­


    Then I look around at the wreckage all around¡­ this will have to be cleaned¡­ then I smile slightly¡­


    ''I guess Tsume is getting a C rank cleaning mission¡­''


    ¡­


    ...


    -Tsume POV-


    After Yami''s birthday, which was yesterday three days ago... I asked him to spar with me. I know that he always says that a ninja must be prepared¡­ so I have bobytr.a.p.ed this whole training ground¡­ also I have started getting C rank missions since two months ago¡­ and I am definitely not happy about it¡­ IT''S JUST CLEANING YAMI''S MESS¡­ he practices ninjutsu and my team has to CLEAN and FIX  the WHOLE Inuzuka training ground...


    ¡­


    -two hours later¡­-


    ¡­


    WHERE THE HELL IS THAT BASTARD. IT''S BEEN TWO HOURS SINCE IT WAS THE MEETING TIME.


    Then suddenly... I catch Yami''s smell¡­ I look towards the direction of where it is coming from and there he is walking casually with a dango stick in his hands and a bored look on his face¡­ then he looks at me¡­ he just sighs. Then he waves and then he says in a bored tone.


    "Hey sorry I am late¡­ I just¡­ didn''t want to come."


    "THEN WHY DID YOU ACCEPT THE SPAR."


    I just couldn''t control myself and screamed at him.


    Then Yami looks at me and cups his chin and makes a thinking position.


    "Ahhhh I was drunk during my birthday."


    I just narrow my eyes at him.


    "You never drink."


    Then he takes another thinking pose.


    "Hmmmm¡­"


    Then Yami points a finger at the sky like he had an idea¡­ then he smirks and says..


    "I did this to test your will power."


    Then I can''t help but scream at him again.


    "JUST ADMIT IT THAT YOU FORGOT INSTEAD OF MAKING LAME EXCUSES."


    Then Yami eats the last part of dango in his hands then he throws it in the ground¡­ I know that he will hire my team to clean his mess again¡­ he always throws trash in here like there is no worry in it¡­ he sure is an annoying bastard...


    Then Yami shrugs his shoulders and says in a tired voice¡­


    *sigh* "Ok here it is the truth... in the morning I totally forgot about our meeting until I saw you at breakfast then I really didn''t want to do it so I went around Konoha''s shops to buy some dango¡­ then since I was already late by then I thought that you wouldn''t wait for me so I went to this new ramen place."


    This bastard sure is annoying and he totally didn''t want to spar with me¡­ he could have just said so in the morning instead of making me wait here¡­


    But then Yami still goes on.


    "Then after that, I went to a tea ceremony house, I always wanted to try one of those. Then after that I went and climbed the Hokage mountain and enjoyed the scene from there and then I had an amazing inspiration for a new business idea... I was going to call it... a maid cafe."


    Then I narrow my eyes at Yami and I can''t help but think... how long is this story...


    "But I was scared that I might forget the idea. So then I went back home and wrote down the idea. Then while I was coming here I was kind of hungry so I went and got some more dango. Then I thought surely you must have been gone by now so I came here to enjoy the quiet atmosphere but then¡­ you know..."


    THIS BASTARD.


    My body is shaking from anger at him...

 Chapter 88 - Always looking at his BACK

    Chapter 89


    ¡­


    THIS BASTARD.


    My body is shaking from anger at him...


    ¡­


    Then I immediately run towards Yami. He just yawns a little. And while he is yawning.


    [Four Legged Technique]


    My nails sharpen and my hair stands on point. I then get close to him and am about to kick him in the head. Then he just brings the back of his fist to stop the strike. When I see that I put even more power into my kick.


    Yami creates a chakra sphere on the back of his fist and and when my leg connects with it.


    <Repulse>


    *Boom*


    I am thrown back and hit a tree. I try to move but¡­ my body is frozen¡­ then after two seconds I am able to move¡­  I look at Yam andi he is¡­ looking at an anthill¡­ and touching it with a stick¡­ he even annoys the ants.


    Also it seems like he isn''t even paying attention to me¡­ well then how about this¡­


    I signal my ninken Kuromaru who is hiding in a tree¡­


    Both me and Kuromaru start rotating to use the technique and we at the same time attack Yami¡­


    *fwoosh*


    As we get closer at our attack hitting Yami¡­ I see that he is still messing with that anthill¡­ THIS BASTARD¡­ WE WILL SEE HOW MUCH NOT TAKING ME SERIOUSLY WILL COST YOU¡­


    Then as we are an arms length away from Yami¡­ he just does a handsign.


    <Splitting Void>


    *Bang*


    I hit something invisible with my head¡­


    Owowowowowowow¡­ I clutch my head while rolling on the ground.


    What the hell even was that... some invisible barrier or something¡­ after the pain subsided a little. I get up, jump back towards a tree and I look at my ninken to see if he is ready to¡­ what the hell¡­


    "Who''s  a good d.o.g.g.y¡­"


    Then I take out three kinai and am about to throw them at Yami¡­ but I stop myself. I change my target and throw my kunai towards another tree.. I hit a rope and cut it which drops a rock on a seal and it activates the trap I have been working on for three days¡­ then I hide behind a tree.


    *fwish**fwish**fwish**fwish**fwish**fwish*


    *fwish**fwish**fwish**fwish*fwish**fwish*


    Thousands of kunai come from all of the trees and go towards Yami''s general direction. Then I do some handseals and¡­


    *poof*


    I summon Kuromaru to me. This is something that Yami gave to the Inuzuka clan. We are now all able to summon our ninken to us.


    This is an attack that I prepared for three days. I WILL make Yami acknowledge me. I will let him know that I am not a little kid. I had a storage scroll maker come here and paint storage scrolls all over the trees and plus buying the kunais¡­ this cost me a lot¡­ plus the projectile throw seal¡­ this cost me almost all of my savings.


    Then the kunai go towards him and.. hit him¡­ HOW IS THAT POSSIBLE¡­ I didn''t want to kill Yami only... impress him¡­ nononono¡­ then..


    Where Yami should be there is a log¡­ then suddenly I hear someone whisper into my ear.


    "The kunai were thrown very slowly."


    I turn around and try to backhand Yami.


    *Fwosh*


    Then he disappears from there and appears on the ground again¡­. he is treating this as a game.


    I jump down from the tree and land in front of Yami. I frown and in a serious voice I say to him.


    "Take this seriously and no¡­ fooling around¡­"


    Yami is still just smirking towards me, not even heading my words. Then I just continue and tell him.


    "Do not hold back."


    *sigh* "Are you sure you want that"


    I just narrow my eyes at him¡­


    "Ye-"


    Before I can even finish what I am about to say Yami disappeared from my line of vision.


    *fwosh*


    Then I hear Yami say from behind.


    "A ninja should also know when he is outclassed and... run away¡­"


    I turn around and the only thing I see is a giant fist coming towards my face. I can feel the wind pressure almost suffocating me. I close my eyes. I could feel the scythe of the reaper across my neck. I -I d -don''t w w- want t -to DIE..


    *FWOooo*


    *BOOOOOM*


    I feel a giant explosion¡­ I open my eyes and¡­ I see a fist in front of my face. It had stopped about three centimetres in front of my face.


    Yami then lowers his fist and I see him turn around and start walking away.


    "I am going to try some sushi. I will be home a little late today so don''t worry about it."


    I can''t help but think back on what my father always said... that only the strongest survive while the weak die... I am prepared to do almost anything in order to become stronger.


    Then I look behind me.


    But¡­


    I can''t picture myself even approaching Yami''s power.


    I think that as I see half of the forest behind me  destroyed...


    -3rd  POV-


    ¡­


    Then¡­ as Yami is walking away as soon as he is out of Tsume''s sight.


    *poof*


    He dispelled himself. It wasn''t Yami¡­ it was just a shadow clone¡­ all along¡­Yami wasn''t even here...


    ...


    -Yami POV-


    ¡­


    I am currently in an Akimichi restaurant eating some very delicious beef. This is good¡­ I look at a certain woman who is sitting alone on a table far away from mine. She is drinking and crying at the same time.


    Then I look at the person in front of me. He is an average looking man with black hair and black eyes. He also¡­ just chunin who just keeps rambling on. Then when I get the memories of my clone.. I just blink a little and analyse all of the information. Well that was a waste of time¡­ even for my shadow clone. But I guess it did raise Tsume''s opinion of me.


    Then after the Chunin finishes his rambling and he finally gets to the point. If I didn''t have a deal with him I would have gotten out of here a long time ago¡­


    Then the chunin makes a serious face and says.


    "So about the price."


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .

 Chapter 89 - Good Things

    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    This chunin is nothing special... he is just a teacher at the ninja academy. Pretty much trash cannon fodder. But he is a guy I bribe to talk to children about my heroic deeds and such.


    I look at the chunin straight in the eyes and tell him.


    "What about the price."


    "I think that¡­ you know¡­ the job I do is very beneficial for you so¡­ I think that it should be more expensive¡­"


    I just look at him coldly¡­ hmmm how to handle this with the best benefits for myself¡­


    Then I just squint my eyes threateningly at him and say.


    "Let''s negotiate then. I currently pay you 100.000 Ryo a month. That is about as much as a good paying B rank mission¡­ Give me a suggestion."


    His face then lights up a little and he has to try hard to keep his smile from showing.


    "O -Ok so I was thinking 120.000 maybe¡­"


    I just look at him¡­ what a sh*tty negotiator. And weak willed too¡­ but that is the main reason why I chose him¡­ too scared to betray me and too afraid to risk anything and likes for other people to think of him in a positive light¡­ perfect as a useful tool and a scapegoat.


    Then I interlock my fingers and release a minor genjutsu to make him more nervous and make me seem more intimidating. Then I say to him in a normal voice.


    "90.000"


    "W -What."


    Then I just look at his eyes and coldly say to him.


    "You go up... I go down¡­.80.000"


    Then he starts panicking.


    "OK ok I am sorry for bringing it up."


    I continue to look at him coldly¡­


    "You will get paid 80.000 Ryo this month. I never want to hear about this again or I am going to find someone else."


    I immediately get up without even giving him a chance to answer. I go towards the drinking woman. She has tears in her eyes as she takes another shot of sake. I then sit in front of her. She doesn''t even bother to look up. Her hair is disheveled and she smells of sweet sake.


    She is my teacher Tsunade. I look at her outfit. It isn''t her jounin outfit. It''s her casual green kimono¡­ when she looks at my eyes I can see my reflection in them¡­ ahhh yes a teacher¡­


    -Flashback-


    -MC age 12-


    -2 months after his father''s death-


    -6:40 AM-


    ¡­


    Like always¡­ I get up from my bed early, go into the bathroom and look at my face in the mirror¡­ brown eyes with a hidden sadness in them and black hair¡­ slightly above average in looks.


    When I see that sad look into my face¡­ I just smile at myself in the mirror. I need to be happy. Mother already has enough problems now. I know that she is worried about our poverty. My brother is only three years old and she has to go to work¡­  she doesn''t need to see me sad.


    When I look at my smile¡­ showing too much teeth¡­ I smile in the mirror again¡­ this one looks fake¡­ then I smile again in the mirror¡­


    ¡­


    ¡­


    I come out of the bathroom with a natural happy smile on my face. Then I go towards my school bag and grab it. Then I go into the kitchen and I see my mother who is already in the kitchen cooking food. When she looks at me I smile at her and she gives me a weak smile back¡­


    ¡­.


    Then when I arrive at school. I greet everyone and they greet me back.


    I look at Linda and I wave at her then she waves back. I go towards her. Before my father''s death I used to joke around and ask her out¡­ we are friends. She always used to tell me that she will accept to go on a date with me when I really mean my confession. She is so pretty intelligent and she has a nice personality. Then when I get close and look at her blue eyes while I say to her with a smile on my face.


    "How is my princess today."


    Since my father''s death I haven''t asked her out anymore. It would just feel awkward to ask her out since I know that she would pity me and accept¡­ I don''t want a useless thing like that. I want it to be real. She just smiles slightly and twirls her blonde hair.


    "If you keep saying things like that I might just fall for you."


    Then I smirk and say to her.


    "If you fall I will catch you."


    She just smiles slightly and says.


    "Cringe."


    When she says that we¡­ both laugh at it.


    ¡­


    -after school-


    ¡­


    As Linda is picking up her stuff she just waved at me and said while smirking.


    "So it seems like the perfect student isn''t so perfect anymore is it."


    I just smile at her and say.


    "I am a bad boy, I will be whatever you like."


    She smiles a little and soon her smile drops then she comes close to me and grabs my hands, looks into my eyes and says.


    "I know it''s been hard on you and your family¡­ you know that if you need anything you have me here."


    I just smile at her¡­ she truly is kind¡­


    ''Be good and good things will happen to you.'' My mother says¡­ I am sure that good things will follow Linda.


    ...


    Then after Lisa goes away and school is finished ms. Johnson opened the door and came into the classroom. She is wearing jeans and a plain white shirt. She has curly black hair and brown eyes. Then when she sees me sitting on my desk. She leaves her bag on the teacher''s table.


    Then she comes close to me and sits on the chair next to mine. Then she turns around and looks at me in the eyes.


    "You were always a straight A student Andy¡­ you mustn''t let yourself go like this¡­ life goes on. I am sure that your father was a good man. He didn''t get killed by anyone and didn''t leave any grudge behind for your family. He is in a better place now."


    I start to tear up a little and she just hugs me comfortably and says to me.


    "Every day after school I will stay behind and help you catch up to the others."


    Then she grabs my face and makes me look into her eyes. Then she smiles and says.


    "You are smart so I am sure that you will surpass them in no time."


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .

 Chapter 90 - Darkness

    ¡­.


    -Change POV-


    -Yami-


    ¡­


    I just look at Tsunade''s eyes and I can see myself in them. When I think back on those times. Always looking at the best in people. How naive¡­ understood that later when my teacher seduced me¡­ I always thought that she loved me¡­ how idiotic I was, never in control of anything¡­ always afraid of everything¡­ then when she got run over by a car right in front of my eyes¡­ the world is a number of infinite possibilities¡­ that must try to control¡­


    I will be in control now¡­  also I remember Linda¡­


    ¡­.


    -Flashback-


    -MC age 15-


    ¡­.


    I just look at Linda in front of me¡­ her blond hair swaying in the wind¡­ I look at her blue eyes and see myself in them... I have changed so much¡­ the world is a cruel place¡­ death is inevitable¡­ I can''t change that¡­ so I want to know how the world works¡­


    My eyes have gotten a little colder. My face now most of the time has a fake smile on¡­ my good uncle who tried to help me died from a rat bite that he thought that it was just nothing but the rat had a deadly disease in its teeth¡­ humans are truly fragile beings¡­  life is way too short so¡­ I must have no regrets¡­


    "I see that you don''t have those whores who always surround you."


    I just give her a weak smile while trying to act sorry.


    "Hey Linda how have you been. Haven''t seen you in a long time¡­ so how about we go and grab some coffee together and catch up."


    Then her face goes from indifferent to angry. Then she says in a soft voice..


    "Andy¡­ let me ask you a question¡­"


    I just raise an eyebrow. Then she continues.


    "Who are you right now."


    My eyes just widen slightly. But she just continues saying


    "The Andy I knew was smart, caring and¡­ someone trustworthy¡­ then there is the other you, the one who has his little whores all around him and every word that comes out of his mouth is a lie. Fake promises, manipulation¡­ I don''t know you anymore."


    "I will be whatever you want princess¡­"


    Then I see that her eyes have started tearing up. I notice that it is not out of happiness¡­ it''s out of sadness. Then while crying she says.


    "I can''t even hate you no matter what you do¡­ I just pity you."


    ''THIS BITCH''... even with all that anger inside me my eyes just narrow a little. Then my face becomes indifferent while I turn around and say to her.


    "I would say that it has been a p.l.e.a.s.u.r.e Linda¡­ but it hasn''t¡­"


    Then I start walking away¡­ then Linda says.


    "Wait¡­ I said wait ANDY¡­ I want to help you."


    My eyes go cold for a second¡­ then I turn around and tell her.


    "Who are you Linda¡­ you don''t need to answer that. I already know you better than you do yourself. You are a little girl who has abandonment issues¡­ also a girl who no one wants¡­ even your parents abandoned you."


    "So please¡­ shut the fu*k up¡­ trash."


    ¡­


    -Yami POV-


    ¡­


    Tsunade banging a sake cup on the table wakes me up from my thoughts. She just looks at me with a strange look and then a light of recognition flashes in her eyes. Then she says in a drunkenly voice.


    "Yami¡­ long time no see¡­"


    When she says that I notice that it is almost an automatic response. She isn''t even that concentrated on me¡­. There is only one way to describe Tsunade right now¡­ WEAK¡­ before she only used to drink on joyous occasions, now she has become an alcoholic.


    This is why I never drink alcohol. It doesn''t let you be in control of your own body. To me that is scarier than any deadly poison.


    Then I call a waiter over and order some food and a glass of juice. I look at Tsunade who is still drinking out of her sixth sake bottle. While eating I ask Tsunade.


    "What happened."


    Even though I know what happened I still needed to hear her say it.


    She just looks at me with hollow eyes and she says.


    "Dan¡­ Dan Kato died."


    I just raise an eyebrow towards her to express my ''confusion''. Then I say in a bewildered voice.


    "So what¡­ all people die¡­ eventually." (except me that is)


    She just frowns a little and says in a slightly annoyed voice.


    *sigh* "You are truly inconsiderate sometimes Yami."


    Then she leans her head down on her hand which is on the table. Her hair also falls down a little. She still has a sake bottle in one of her hands¡­ when I look at the bottle I  can''t help but think about my teacher in my last world¡­


    Control¡­


    Then I secretly summon something from my wristband summon scroll¡­ then I pick the thing and drop it into the drunk Tsunade''s sake bottle¡­


    This time I will be in control¡­


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .

 Chapter 91 - ANNOUNCEMENT

    Hey guys... I have published all of the first chapters of My stories of Pa?reon on a new story in here.... I will not post anymore than the first chapters until I finish this story...


    Also if you like the stories check out my patre¨°n.


    pa?reon.com/HolyJoker


    Also on Ptreo? I usually update two stories a day. During weekends that might be more


    (usually 3 or four updates during weekends.)


    Soo see ya... (~?_?)~


    P.S: My story with the first chapters is called:


    MY OTHER STORIES -BY HOLY JOKER

 Chapter 92 - The Forbidden Fruit...

    Chapter 92


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    DISCLAIMER: DO NOT READ THIS CHAPTER IF YOU ARE UNCOMFORTABLE WITH RA*E, MANIPULATION, AND GENERALLY THE MC BEING WORSE THAN HE USUALLY IS.


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    ....


    After putting the ''thing'' on Tsunade''s drink and making sure that none around me nor Tsunade noticed what I did. Then Tsunade brings her head up from leaning on the table and looks at me while squinting her eyes and making a thinking pose....


    She must be really drunk¡­ then Tsunade just looks at me while thinking something and she finally says¡­


    *sigh* "I am thinking of leaving Konoha for a vacation. I will also be taking¡­ Shizune..  the niece of Dan Kato with me¡­ do you want to come with me Yami¡­"


    When Tsunade finishes saying that she takes another sip of her sake bottle. She actually drinks the whole bottle in one fellow swoop.


    YES¡­ plan complete¡­ even though I am ecstatic of what just happened. I still had a calm face and my body language doesn''t give out anything. Then I say to her in a calm voice.


    "I see that you have already made your mind¡­ but I am sorry Tsunade¡­ I won''t be able to come with you."


    Then I also notice Tsunade''s slight rise in body temperature. She is also blushing a little. Then as she is about to open another bottle of sake. I immediately grab it out of her hands and say to her with a slightly forceful voice.


    "You have had enough for today, Tsunade."


    She just looks at me and extends her body over the table. Trying to grab the bottle.


    "Give it back Yaaaammmiiii."


    Then as she is about to grab the bottle she¡­ ''accidentally'' slips and falls on top of me. With her b.r.e.a.s.ts all over my face. Then as she gets close I just sneakily and without anyone noticing I activate my Sharingan.


    <Genjutsu: Sharingan>


    Due to allowing herself to get drunk and her venerable mental state¡­ Tsunade immediately fell on my Genjutsu. Then when she gets up and stands in front of me Tsunade grabs my face with both hands and says to me¡­


    "Sorry... are you okay Yami."


    I just nod and say to her again.


    "I think that you have had enough for tonight Tsunade."


    She just nods and I call for the bill. I pay for our meals and then we go outside of the restaurant.


    As soon as we are outside I make a handsign and¡­.


    *poof*


    I transform myself into an older teenage version of me. Then I put Tsunade''s arm over my shoulder with her b.r.e.a.s.t feeling against my c.h.e.s.t. Now I am about the same height as Tsunade.


    I then take her to a good hotel and when we go inside I pay for the room and tell the receptionist to not bother us. She just noods¡­


    When we go to our room. I go inside and see that it is a luxury room with a bath and a king sized bed. First I just touched the wall once and an anti sound seal array was conjured all around the room.


    I put a half awake Tsunade on the king sized bed. Then as I am about to take off my shirt that now smells of alcohol. Two slender arms come around my neck and I can feel Tsunade''s b.r.e.a.s.ts on my back.


    "Yami¡­"


    She doesn''t even need to say anything as I just turn around and kiss her. I can feel the alcohol in her breath. I start using a little tongue, Tsunade is a little surprised in the beginning but then she grabs the back of my head and brings me down to lie on top of her while we make out.


    Then one of my hands goes towards her blouse and I untie it. Sneaking it in and gently twisting her n.i.p.p.l.es. While my other hand goes towards her inner t.h.i.g.h and close to that other place near her t.h.i.g.h.


    *Mghn* Tsunade also m.o.a.ns a little. Clearly aroused by the situation. Her m.o.a.ns are muffled by me kissing her. She can''t even think straight from all of the alcohol in her system.


    Then my hand slowly sneaks in her pants and under her p.a.n.t.i.e.s. When I feel her p.u.s.s.y. I slowly rub it and start teasing around it with my finger.


    Then when I suddenly feel Tsunade''s muscles around her v.a.g.i.n.a contracted a little. That is when I decide to put my finger inside¡­


    "C''mon now Tsunade. Are you all tired already. I didn''t even get the chance to try you."


    She just looks towards me with half closed eyes. I take off my pants and then I just take her hand and put it on my shaft. Her eyes immediately widen and she looks towards me. Though I notice that she is still drunk.


    Then  she gets up and also takes off all of her clothes. Slowly and sensually. After she is all n.a.k.e.d and in her full glory I can''t help but admire her beautiful perfect body, her b.r.e.a.s.ts even with their size are perfectly firm. Even in my past life I haven''t had a girl this good.


    She then gets on all fours on the bed. I get on the bed again. And I also start fondling her b.r.e.a.s.ts sensually. She then grabs my shaft and starts running her hand up and down. While with her other hand she is touching my face. I then decide that this is enough foreplay and I push Tsunade laying on bed under me. Then I line  my shaft with her p.u.s.s.y. She is already wet enough. I grab her h.i.p.s and PUSH my shaft inside of her. Some tears fall off Tsunade''s eyes during the insertion.


    Then I feel a type of warmth and p.l.e.a.s.u.r.e I haven''t felt in a long time. So I don''t even wait for Tsunade and hold my grip on her h.i.p.s while I keep pushing in and out of her.


    "AH AH AH AH AH AH."


    After some time Tsunde gets used to the rhythm and she starts m.o.a.ning louder and louder.


    I can feel myself c.u.ming¡­


    "Ahhhh."


    ¡­.


    We keep this up until late at night¡­ and we both fall asleep on the arms of each other.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    I just combined it with some real life experience and a little imagination ¡­ I am not sure how it came out.)

 Chapter 93 - Love & L.u.s.t… and WAR

    Chapter 93


    ¡­


    Morning


    -Tsunade POV-


    ¡­


    Waking up in the morning. I sit up and pull my arms up for a stretch when I notice that I don''t have my nightgown on.


    Then like a damn that was broken¡­ memories of what happened last night come flying back¡­


    Oh no¡­ Ohhh no¡­ what have I done.


    I asked him for this last night¡­ I shouldn''t have done that¡­


    Then as I get up I wince a little at the pain on my h.i.p.s¡­ damn it¡­ we did it all night long¡­ me¡­ the last hair of the Senju clan¡­ have seduced my twelve year old student¡­


    Even while thinking all of this a darker part of me enjoyed it¡­ the forbidden fruit of having s.e.x withba student of mine¡­ DAMN IT¡­


    I instinctively punch the wall next to me¡­ but I control myself¡­ I don''t want to destroy half of the building¡­ I just look at Yami''s back and I can''t help but think¡­


    It seems like I truly do need to go on the vacation.


    I started putting on all of my casual clothes from last night and with a D rank jutsu I got rid of the smell of the alcohol all over me.


    At least a console to myself is that Yami probably wasn''t a v.i.r.g.i.n and I didn''t take his first time. He showed an experience on the act so I am sure that I am NOT his first time¡­ at least¡­ I didn''t take something special from him...


    Then I think back on all of the girls that he knows¡­ was it that Tsume girl¡­ or was it some other woman who tok his first time¡­ *sigh*... I better stop thinking about stuff like this.


    When I finish putting on all of my clothes I use a transformation jutsu to make myself appear as an average looking woman and then I go outside¡­


    ¡­


    Yami POV


    ...


    As soon as I sense Tsunade leave. I let my breathing and heartbeat go back to normal¡­


    Tsunade also has a slightly different memory of how we hooked up. She was the instigator from her perspective¡­


    Then I get up from the bed and think about all of the effort that I put into trying to make her romantically attached to me¡­ that obviously didn''t work out¡­ I wanted to try at least once how good Trunade was. From now on I am sure that there will be no romantic feelings between each other.


    I am not a man patient enough to chase after only one woman. Love¡­ that to me is a very complex feeling¡­ I know what love is and I have experienced it before¡­ I still love my mother and little brother from my first world¡­ after all¡­ family is everything¡­


    Also to me romantic love doesn''t exist¡­ love is a pure emotion¡­ but...


    Romantic Love?... it is just a fleeting emotion, usually just mutual l.u.s.t disguised as affection¡­ in that way I did and still do love Tsunade¡­


    But not really¡­ real love is something pure¡­ if I truly loved Tsunade¡­ I wouldn''t care if she is pretty or even if her face is carved and her skin is all peeled¡­ even if she had a grotesque terrifying appearance¡­ If I can look her in the eyes and still not even flinch and my love for her be unwavering by neither time or distance¡­ then I can truly say that I love her¡­


    The only thing that I ''love'' about Tsunade is her physical appearance¡­ so in a simple manner¡­. I l.u.s.t after Tsunade¡­


    ¡­


    After I finish putting on all of my clothes. I get up and touch the wall. The silencing seals start receding back into my hand and they cancel¡­


    As I go outside of the room¡­ I think about the future¡­ Tsunade will definitely move away¡­ especially after what she & I did¡­


    She will start her drunken habits like canon¡­ again¡­ will see if she comes back during the 3rd ninja war¡­


    As I go outside of the hotel I look at the sun shining bright on the buildings of Konoha¡­ I can''t help but smile a little.


    Finally¡­ I can start making some moves...


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    Time Skip: 1 Year and 6 months later


    ¡­.


    I am currently playing Shogi against Tsume''s Jounin sensei¡­ and I just lost again¡­ well he is a Nara after all...


    "I win Yami -san."


    I just smile and nod¡­ the Nara truly are intelligent. Playing this game against him will keep me sharp and never let me underestimate my enemies.


    Then as we are about to start playing another game I sense the anbu as soon as he enters my clan compound. As soon as he is on a tree he jumps down from it and I see that¡­ it was actually a male anbu with a weasel mask¡­ then he bows down in front of me and says.


    "Yami -sama. I am here to notify you that


    The 2nd Ninja war is¡­ OVER."


    .


    .


    .

 Chapter 94 - After War Situation

    Chapter 94


    ¡­


    [MC age 13]


    [2nd Ninja war is OVER]


    ¡­


    I currently have sunglasses on and am trying to get some tan on my skin by lying on the beach chair on my porch.


    I am  drinking some horrible tasting juice that is healthy¡­ I kind of like the grassy taste now¡­ and it also helps my body growth and I still have the whole sh*t with my lifespan still to fix. My hair has now started producing black pigment again so now my limited lifespan wont show physically. But I know that even if I don''t use Creation Rebirth anymore in about 10-15 years I will start to show symptoms of weakness of muscles, slower natural regeneration and such problems that are most common in old people. Though the Hashirama Cells have pushed this limit to about 30-40 years later  because of the crazy vitality on its cells.


    Then a clone comes from the inside of my house with a paper in his hand and he gives it to me.


    Since there is no form of entertainment that I like in this world. I have made a new form of entertainment for myself.


    Then I look at the paper that he gave me.


    INUZUKA CLAN


    Money: 230 mil


    ¡ñIncome: +60 (mill/month)


    ¡ñMembers:


    ?65 ninja:


    0 Elite Jounin


    15 Jounin


    2 Special Jounin


    9 Chunin


    ?98 Civilians:


    62 Academy Students


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    I just smile at it. Inuzuka Clan (My) income is probably the highest of all the clans in Konoha. I could have already made the Inuzuka Clan the ric.h.e.s.t Clan in Konoha by stacking my money. Since this is how riches are counted during this time, since there are no stocks or such things.


    I never try to leave more than 100 mill Ryo in the treasury. Since that means that the money is just sitting there and not doing anything with it is the same as not having it. That is one of the things modern times taught me¡­


    I already have businesses all over the Land of Fire. My business plan was for example: Pay some thugs to destroy a shop and steal everything in it. Oh no what is old Peter going to do now. Well of course I will pay for his shop to be repaired and make him sign an overly complicated contract that he won''t understand without a lawyer (which are not yet a thing on here).


    Also I have been adopting a LOT of orphans who I deem decently talented into the Inuzuka Clan. When they get older they will all marry within the Clan and my clan will finally have enough Jounin ninja. Then there will be no need for me to keep pulling the clan up by the nose.


    So that is pretty much my business plan and since there are really no laws against this type of thing in here. I just take over businesses while the fat nobles stay in their castles doing nothing in there. Then after some decades they either become my puppet government or they get obliterated.


    ¡­


    Then after some time relaxing I sense an anbu land in front of me. I signal him that it is all clear and he takes off his mask. Immediately his most notable feature is the Inuzuka tattoos on his face¡­ finally I was able to get one of my own in that division. And I made a lot of sacrifices¡­ I spent a lot (4 hours) of my time carefully making holes in Akira''s 8th Gate and closing them again to give him a permanent physical boost. Though he will die in around 20-30 years thanks to the dark chakra I ran through him to lessen the symptoms. At least he won''t die for nothing, like cannon fodder¡­ he will die for my benefit.


    I also remembered from that one villain  in Naruto that said that because he had the Body Revival technique he wouldn''t be killed even if he opened the 8th Gate¡­ That was a complete lie¡­ first even with only the first gait opened he would suffer a backlash since he wouldn''t be able to control the raging chakra on his body and second¡­. the 8th gate can''t be opened and then live  to tell the tale. It will literally expend all of the lifespan plus with the gate full opened it will destroy and burn your body from the inside.


    A death that is very painful and only people like Guy who know pain from his extreme training and opening the previous gates would be able to handle the pressure.


    "Yami -sama there is a new development on the after war plans¡­"


    Then he explains to me how after the war the Hokage didn''t take any territories over and how he played passive on the Kage Summit¡­


    Ok so now I know why there will be another Ninja War soon¡­ it was because Konoha didn''t flex its muscles after the war¡­ could this even be called peace¡­ there will definitely be small skirmishes among the nations¡­


    It seems like Hiruzen was too soft again¡­


    *sigh*


    I can''t help but sigh at this¡­


    A leader needs to have both compassion and cruelty to be a good leader¡­ by doing this we didn''t even take any territory over¡­ and let''s be honest. The war was started for more territory and resources. We should have gotten that at least¡­ the Hokage probably didn''t want anymore bloodshed but by doing this he undermined all of the sacrifices from the dead ninja...


    ...


    After that I dismiss the ninja¡­ I have already placed numerous seals on him in case of a betrayal so I am sure he isn''t dumb enough to do that. After all I gave him his power¡­ and I can take it away¡­ by eroding my seal on his 8th gate and killing him. I have already checked if he is a double agent and all that¡­ I don''t want an Itachi in my Clan after all.


    Then it seems like it''s time to start the next phase of the plan.


    ¡­.


    I notify my mother that I won''t be back for some time since I have something to take care of¡­ like usual she started asking if it was dangerous or anything like that¡­


    After reassuring her I went towards the Inuzuka training field¡­ then I did some handsigns and I slammed my hand on the ground.


    <Reverse Summoning Jutsu>


    *poof*


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    (As we can see time skips are happening. I am time skipping since there has been enough slice of life and clan building during the handful past chapters. The MC also has started to relax a little since he doesn''t feel like there is a time bomb nearby (except the whole Kaguya thing). He already is at his physical peak for his age. The MC has simply grown too fast and his body couldn''t keep up.)


    .


    .

 Chapter 95 - Summonings?!?!

    Chapter 95


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    As soon as the smoke surrounds me I can feel myself s.u.c.k.e.d in by the space around me then for 1/10 of a second my vision goes dark¡­then¡­


    *poof*


    I again see myself covered in smoke I also see that I am high up on a tree. Immediately I have my senses on 100% and then I sense a big creature as big as a truck  flying towards me.


    When it was only an arms length away from me¡­


    <Shunshin>


    <Wind Style: Chakra Scalpel>


    I use the technique on my right hand and I slash towards the bat''s neck as I am about to cut off it''s giant neck¡­


    *fwosh*


    It manages to manoeuvre himself mid flight away from my slash¡­


    I just look at its appearance and think¡­


    That is right¡­ as a bat it was probably able to sense my attack with echolocation¡­


    I just immediately analyse my surroundings. It is  a dark shadowy environment. It is not a cave since there are trees in here and there is a small amount of light coming through the barren trees. Everything around here seems so out of life. I look down and it seems like a red swamp¡­


    *snif**snif*


    Is that blood¡­ a bloody swamp¡­ and even though I can''t sense any chakra from the swamp. But using the power of the zero tails can still sense countless negative emotions from at the bottom of the blood swamp.


    "Human just let me eat you."


    I don''t even answer it¡­ the bat is a flying enemy¡­ let''s see if that new technique works¡­ I point my two fingers towards the bat.


    I generate dark chakra on my fingers , with a black dot appearing on my fingers with some kanji to it.. then I throw it at the bat and it gets absorbed in the bat''s body. The bat just looks at me strangely when...


    He himself starts releasing dark chakra which envelopes him with a powerful torrent of gravity.


    The bat has an ugly look on his face and he says desperately ¡­


    "W- What is-."


    <Black Coffin>


    But then the chakra that he himself is expeling starts taking the form of a box of black energy, covered in several spear-like protrusions which pierce the box, lacerating the bat inside from head to toe.


    Then when the bat is dead the coffin dispels into nothingness and the body of the dead bat punctured with countless holes all around it starts falling down leaving a trail of blood behind¡­


    As soon as it falls into the swamp I just look at the body with my sharingan to see what the thing in the blood water in the swamp is.


    Suddenly I see a giant figure move in there¡­ and there seems to be thousands of other minuscule small figures around it¡­ I try to see the true form of this creature¡­


    Hmm¡­ when I see the creature close to


    it should be a leech¡­ interesting her size is also pretty big¡­ it is around the size of the Sanin summons maybe a little larger also with this hiding ability¡­ it is quite good.


    Then after conforming all of this I look at the bloody swamp below me and then I call out loudly.


    "Hey you¡­  big leech ¡­ I need you to answer me some questions."


    Suddenly the leech stops moving¡­ then as if a river of blood is rising forth the earth the leach ''stands up'' and it''s head reaches up to the tree where I am standing. It is only a couple of meters I can see it''s mouth full of rows of teeth dyed red in blood. Then the creature speaks in a deep voice.


    "Since you feed me a bat I will answer your question. What do you want to know boy."


    Woah it''s breath smells really gross¡­ but I just look at it¡­ definitely don''t judge a book by its appearance. It has a rational personality


    "Do you know what and where this place is..."


    The leech just noods I don''t know what he is thinking since he doesn''t have a face or anything like that. Then he says in his deep voice.


    "You are in the Blood Swamp."


    I just look at him and ask him again.


    "In which Land is this blood swamp."


    The leech then answers.


    "Agh yeah I forgot that you were summoned here. Well it is in the Land of Waterfalls¡­"


    I nod and... I have noticed that here in this place there are multiple summons¡­ unlike Mount Myoboku where the frogs dominate or the Ryuchi Cave where Snakes dominate¡­


    After analysing all of this information I say to him¡­


    "I see that the situation in this place isn''t that simple¡­ Can you tell me the situation of what is going on here."


    The giant leech has a moment of silence and it then says.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    (What is Yami scheming again and what will his summon be. Find out in the next chapter of.... Naruto: Dream to Immortality.)


    Three updates today... noice...


    Also 10 chapters on Pat?eon in advance.

 Chapter 96 - Seals

    Chapter 96


    ¡­


    "I see that the situation in this place isn''t that simple¡­ Can you tell me the situation of what is going on here."


    The giant leech has a moment of silence and then it says.


    "You are asking too many questions boy."


    I just look at him¡­ and I get a certain idea¡­ with a smile and say¡­


    "I just want to help you."


    Then with a little anger on its deep voice the giant leech says.


    "I can sense your chakra kid. Although it is good for your age¡­ we have been living since the time of the sage of the six paths¡­ you are too weak and inexperienced to help me. I have answered all of your questions now... let me return to my slumber human."


    Then the giant leech turns around and it is about to go back down to the Blood Swamp¡­


    These old creatures think that just because of their age they have some kind of superiority against younger beings. Their pride won''t allow other people to help them¡­ well then¡­ I guess only showing my POWER can change his mind¡­ well I could probably coax him into it if I stay here for a week¡­ but¡­ that is just a waste of time¡­ and I don''t like wasting time and what is the use of power if you don''t use it.


    Then my face immediately goes cold and emotionless.


    I start releasing dark chakra all around me forming a tornado of darkness with me in the middle of it.


    The leech senses this and turns around to look towards me...


    "Anyone who uses their age to display some type of nonexistent power¡­ is truly pathetic¡­ if you are as old as you say and... this is all of the miniscule strength that you have. Then you should be ashamed to tell other people your age. All this shows is that  in the thousands of years of your life¡­ you never really achieved anything significant."


    As soon as it hears this the leech doesn''t say anything but¡­ it starts producing crazy amounts of negative emotions¡­ Then¡­


    *poof*


    On my shoulder blade appears a third mechanical arm¡­ which I use to fuel my dark chakra reserve with the help of the zero tails sealed inside it.


    <Shunshin>


    I appear at the top of the leech and I punch down¡­


    *Splatter*


    Then all of the leech parts are dispersed. As I am falling down I just extend some chakra strings from my back and go to a tree and stick to it sideways.


    The punch definitely wasn''t strong enough to blast him to smithereens like that¡­ plus I can still sense his dark emotions¡­ so that means that he is still alive¡­ so this old guy truly had some tricks up his sleeve.


    <Shunshin>


    *fwosh*


    I immediately dodge and appear behind my attacker. It was a miniature version of the leech. I just look at it¡­ with my sharingan actively recording everything that just happened¡­.


    I just kick the leech and... its body pops like a balloon with blood flying everywhere¡­


    Then all of the body parts and blood of the Giant Leech flows together like a tornado and¡­ the leech is now fully formed back to his full size¡­


    He is kind of weak but his regeneration ability¡­ is quite good¡­


    Then as soon as the giant leech was fully formed it was ready about to spit something at me.


    I  immediately clasps my hands together, then five small yellow orbs with skinny tails emerge from between my clasped hands and move above my head before forming a circle of five.


    Then I raise my  clasped hands above my head, and I slam them downward, sending the orbs into the ground.


    <Five Iron Pillar>


    As a bright light is generated in the sky above the leech, five tall and thick pillars, which are connected to each other by chains, pin the giant to the ground.


    *boom*


    The leech is pinned to the ground and then it starts to disassemble it''s body¡­ I make another handsign.


    <Six Rods Prison of Light Seal>


    I summon six thin, wide beams of light that slam into the leeches midsection, holding him in place. Then it stopped moving at all as if paralysed. The leech becomes unable to move any part of their body including the parts that were not struck by the beams¡­


    Dealing with a regenerative opponent is easy¡­ you either obliterate them completely¡­ which I won''t do yet since I don''t want to kill this leech¡­ the other method is sealing¡­ which I am quite proficient at¡­ I am sure that I am the best seal master currently alive¡­ even better than Kushina or any Uzumaki¡­ I already know all of the Uzumaki seals and have even started creating my own usually to combine with Dark chakra¡­ oh yeah¡­


    I look at the giant leech¡­


    I should try that new sealing technique¡­ since the leech has such a strong regeneration even if anything goes wrong it probably won''t die¡­


    Then I point both of my hands towards the Giant leech¡­


    <Nine Sunlight Traps Seal>


    I create eight black holes that emit dark chakra in the personal space surrounding the leach, with a ninth black hole manifesting in the center


    of the leeches body¡­


    *fwoom*


    Woah¡­ I can feel as if gravity is holding the leech in place¡­ this is pretty good¡­


    Anyway¡­ then I get close to the leech and say to it with a cold voice.


    "Ready to talk now."


    .


    .


    .


    .


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    (We see that the MC has progressed quite a bit. Now he has more fighting experience and his Fuinjutsu¡­ he has started getting creative with it.)

 Chapter 97 - Old Creatures are Such a Drag...

    Chapter 97


    ¡­


    The leech doesn''t say anything for a couple of seconds and then in a defeated voice¡­it says¡­


    "This place¡­ The Blood Swamp is a place where numerous summons exist¡­ from birds, alligators and many more¡­ but there are three powers that rule the others¡­ one of them is¡­ me the Leech Sage¡­ then there the bat summons with their leader the Bat Sage they currently have the advantage because they have the numbers advantage and the last major power in this swamp is the Mosquito Sage¡­"


    Then he keeps explaining the dynamics amongst the smaller summon clans in the Blood Swamp. Alligators and Flies and Dragonflies are at all out war against each other¡­ pretty much this place is a Blood Swamp and the blood running through the swamp is real blood from the countless giant summons that die here.


    Then I ask him another question with a nonchalant voice.


    "So¡­ now... tell me everything that you know about leech Senjutsu¡­ "


    Then as he is about to answer me I interrupt him¡­


    "Also lying to me isn''t a good idea."


    As soon as the leech heard me say that he stopped the lie that he was about to say¡­ even if his physiology is different from humans. I already have memorised his patterns of when he lies and does different things with my Sharingan.


    Then it continues saying in its deep voice.


    "The Leech Sage mode works like any other Senjutsu¡­ I will just use some of my mucus on you, to help you sense the natural energy and-"


    I don''t even listen to him anymore¡­ he is still hiding things from me¡­ I guess some old monster like him might underestimate my ability to notice him lying¡­ really old creatures who are above 100 years old and are simply just strong¡­ I mean I am a patient man and like to plan things slowly and carefully but¡­ if they haven''t already become the strongest being in existence by that time or if they stop searching for a higher level of power for themself and get too comfortable in their position is just simply¡­ trash¡­ they will simply be overtaken by someone with a higher ambition¡­ that is how the world works¡­


    Then after the Leech finished talking¡­ I just looked at it and said¡­


    "Your age has really rusted your brains Leech."


    I just clasp my hands together and a blue ball comes out of them and it floats above my head.


    <Falling Mountain Barrier>


    Then my jutsu  ignites at a single point above my head, blue energy extends upward to four points and forms an inverted pyramid, which solidifies into a barrier around me¡­


    This should keep any outside forces from interfering. Then I make another handsign and the pillars start flashing¡­. and I summon some black chakra from my mechanical arm¡­ after that I make a ball of chakra in my hand and use the dark chakra to corrupt it¡­ and I also use some Fuinjutsu on it.


    Sorry little leach but it seems like you have to go¡­ I then throw the ball towards the leech and it gets absorbed by it¡­ then¡­


    ¡­


    After two minutes the dark chakra ball comes out of the leech and now it has a dark red color¡­ as then I make a small seal on my abdominal muscles and store it in there.


    The leech then¡­ says something¡­


    "Who am I¡­"


    I just smile at it and touch it with my right hand and then I pull up my shirt and draw a circle with fuinjutsu all around it and a spiral in the middle of the seal¡­ I make sure to not connect it with my life force and such things and¡­ more correctly the seal is not on my ''body'' but on my skin.


    Then I touch the restrained Leech and then with my other hand I touch my seal¡­


    "Who are you." -the leech asked confused before¡­


    <Four Trigram Seal>


    It was sealed on my skin¡­ what I did was steal its memories and I am pretty sure that torture against millennium old creatures like them is ineffective. So I took it''s memories and sealed its body¡­


    I didn''t absorb his memories since¡­ only dumb people absorb another persons memories¡­ that is like asking for the memories to take you over¡­ especially this leech who has thousands of years of memories. It will definitely be able to take over if it absorbs my memories.


    Then I slowly use a seal to ''review'' the memories in my brain like a movie with my sharingan¡­


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    One Hour Later


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    HOLY SH*T¡­ I know he was hiding something but for it to be this BIG...


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    (We see that Yami is being his usual careful self. Other MC''s in some other fanfics they just simply ''absorb'' the memories of other people and learn all of their techniques. It doesn''t work like that. Personalities are literally memories. If you lose those¡­ are you really yourself¡­ so the MC used this method to view memories... and what is the thing that the MC discovered in the leeche''s memories.)


    10 CHAPTERS IN ADVANCE ON PATR¨¨ON.

 Chapter 98 - Gotta Catch Them All

    Chapter 98


    ¡­


    I thought he was hiding something¡­ but this is good¡­ he has some memories of meeting different summons and all that but¡­ his most important memory for me¡­ is that the leach sage which I learned from his memories is named Hiru¡­ the sage mode of leeches could also be used in a synthesis way¡­ the Leech fuses with his summoner and the leech draws in Nature Chakra while the user concentrates on fighting¡­


    This is amazing¡­ I just have to force Hiru who now has no memories to just gather nature chakra¡­. But I will also need to invent another seal like The Seal Of 100 Strengths that I learned from Tsunade¡­ but this time it will just make it to store nature chakra¡­ it¡­ shouldn''t be too hard¡­ especially with the Leech doing the acc.u.mulation of Nature Chakra...


    But first¡­ I will just keep them on me... and then I will make this thing work after I return to my lab¡­ also I won''t sign the Summoning Scroll of the Leech summon since the Leech is sealed on me and¡­ it''s Summoning Scroll is inside his stomach¡­


    Anyway I already got the information that I wanted¡­  I will also review his memories 100% after I return to Konoha¡­ this guy really did exist since the time of the Sage of The Six Paths¡­


    Anyway it''s about time to get myself some new pets¡­ and these all have the strength of around S rank¡­ but I can beat them easily¡­   especially since I know the way that they fight and their special abilities from Hiru''s memories.


    Well then¡­ better go and search for them¡­


    <Shunshin>


    *fwosh*


    I start running towards the location of the Bat Sage.


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    3rd POV


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    .


    .


    .


    .


    When Yami arrived towards the nest of the Bats¡­ it was inside a giant hollow tree. There are nests all around the tree¡­ Yami analyses the situation and looks for any opening and then he counts how much Bats there are currently flying all over the tree. There are twenty eight giant bats all of them about the size of a truck¡­


    Then Yami just uses¡­


    <Shunshin>


    ...and like a ghost with no smoke or anything after using the technique¡­ Yami appears above one of the Bats and immediately feeling the disturbance with their echolocation all of the Bats look towards him¡­ but he just neck chops the Bat below him knocking out unconscious. And as he is falling down together with the Bat¡­


    Yami just uses Shunshin again and appears above another Bat and even though the bat can sense him with his echolocation his body can''t keep up with the speed of Yami and he is knocked out also¡­


    This happens another twenty six times and all of the Bats are knocked out. Then after defeating all of his enemies before him¡­ Yami seemed to relax¡­


    But as soon as that happens a surprise attack comes tree''s and attacks towards him¡­ a giant bat, bigger than any of the other ones he has already fought ¡­ and the bat bites Yam on the head...i and¡­ it rips out his head from his shoulders¡­ with deep red blood spewing all over like a fountain.


    ¡­.


    But then the ''dead'' Yami turns¡­ into water and all of his blood that was spewing is also turned into water¡­


    ¡­.


    After all of that Yami also takes the memory of the Sage Bat and examined it¡­ he finds some echolocation sensing techniques and a sound wave type of attack¡­


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    MC POV


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    .


    .


    .


    .


    When I look through his memories I also see the Bat Sage Techniques¡­ they were pretty good but not as useful as The Leeches Techniques..


    Then after that I take the Bat summons scroll from a hidden part of the hallowed tree. It was hidden simply under some hay. I also put seals on all of the Bats in here and return the memories to the Bat Sage and the Fuinjutsu memory sphere flies back into the Bat Sage.


    I also wait for some more bats to come here¡­ they will probably come soon¡­


    ¡­.


    After thirty minutes and knocking out another eight Bats¡­ I also knock them out¡­ and put  certain seals on all of the other bats. The first to wake up is the Bat Sage¡­ and as soon as he sees me he is about to get up but¡­ I immediately activate the seal on his body¡­ and the Bat as big as one of the Sanin''s summons stops dead on his tracks¡­


    .


    .


    .


    .


    (We see that the MC now has a VERY well rounded arsenal of techniques to deal with different types of enemies ¡­ anyway good night now¡­ I am going to sleep¡­)

 Chapter 99 - Conquering

    Chapter 99


    ...


    When the bat sage is paralyzed by my seal and no matter how much he tries he can''t move¡­ so I just smile sweetly at him and say¡­ I have already put his memories back in place...


    "I am afraid that you won''t be able to move¡­"


    He just looked at me and noticed who I was¡­ the one who he was trying to sneak attack but failed. Then with my smile still on my face I say to him¡­


    "I have put some seals on all of the Bats in here¡­ that if they disobey they will just simply¡­ DIE¡­ so¡­ I wanted to offer you all to become my summon animals¡­"


    He just looks at me and then with a neutral voice says¡­


    "What happens if I refuse."


    I just raise my eyebrow in a questioning look and say¡­


    "Well obviously you will die."


    "So not much of a choice is it."


    Then with my same still on my face I just say to him¡­


    "Well if you choose death you won''t have to serve me and teach me ALL of your techniques¡­ and also better not try to hide anything¡­ the last creature on this swamp that tried it¡­ let''s just say that it disappeared¡­ and the leech was quite submissive at first too¡­"


    As soon as I say that¡­ I noticed that the Bat noticed what I was trying to convey¡­ and said¡­


    "Yes I accept the deal¡­ the Bats shall always be in service to you and your bloodline till the end of time."


    I just nod at him and smile a little¡­ I see¡­ he said my bloodline also so¡­ they will most likely try something in the future¡­ but by then¡­ I will either be so far out of their reach that they won''t even think of such possibilities¡­


    ¡­.


    And just like that after two hours I had their whole Bat summon clan under my thumb to summon any of them whenever I like¡­ then I look at all of them bowing before me¡­ they don''t know that¡­ with just a thought I could obliterate their whole clan¡­ even if someone is new is born from them and they might think that the newborn is free¡­ WRONG¡­ the newborn also has a seal automatically made into his brain¡­ just in case..


    ¡­


    ¡­


    When I arrive at her territory I see thousands or maybe millions of small mosquitoes¡­ apparently the mosquito Sage is a single person controlling all of the mosquitoes in the Blood Swamp also... the mosquitoes in here are all the same size as normal mosquitoes...


    When I start going forward and thinking if I should just burn all of the mosquitoes¡­  the horde of millions of them split in half to reveal someone that I have never seen in reality but I have seen it from the memories of the summons under me¡­ I also know of all of her powers¡­


    When I look at her I see that she is a tall and large woman and has the appearance of a humanoid mosquito.


    Her body is very light, allowing her to fly, and her limbs have been enlarged and have clawed tips on them. Her biceps and shins are covered in long bristles and stripes which are akined to that of a mosquito. She has long hair and a human-like face but other than that, her head resembles that of a mosquito with a second pair of compound eyes, two antennas, and a large stinger on her forehead.


    Wow¡­ she really does look like a part human¡­ that is¡­ gross¡­


    Anyway I start walking towards her¡­ she just says to me¡­


    "I give up¡­ and accept to be on your service."


    I just look at her and a smile comes into my face and then with a happy voice I say¡­


    "Hmmm is that so¡­ ok then I accept¡­ give me your summon scroll."


    "I also admit that I used mosquitoes to spy on you when you arrived here..."


    She just throws a small scroll towards me and I immediately see that from its fuinjutsu it was the real deal¡­


    I just bite my thumb a little and write my name on it and the same as with the bats I put the summon scroll in a storage seal on my wrist¡­


    While I am still on top of one of the bats... I just look at them and smile at them all while saying¡­


    "So the Blood Swamp is now under me¡­ also bats¡­ get every other summon creatures here I will be signing some more summon contracts¡­"


    Then I jump off the bat that I was flying on¡­ and with perfect equilibrium I stand on a tree sideways¡­ and then I point towards the mosquito lady¡­ and say to her...


    "You will be teaching and explaining to me Sage Mode¡­"


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    (This is when the MC starts becoming really scary and here he also showed his true colours.


    All of the summons are terrified of him¡­ soon the whole Blood Swamp will have him as it''s new leader. Also the MC only has 3 S rank monsters under him. The other bats are all C Rank with some B ranks¡­)

 Chapter 100 - Assassination...

    Chapter 100


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    Time Skip 1 Years Later/ MC age 14


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    -Kakuzu POV-


    .


    .


    When I enter the Bounty Building on the Land of Fire¡­ I have a ninja on my shoulder¡­ some Jounin from Kumogakure¡­ even though the 2nd ninja war was over there wasn''t a definite winner and in all of the Lands there are skirmishes happening between the Elemental Nations¡­


    Which is good for me since I can catch ninjas like this guy and earn some money¡­ around three million here and four there it all adds up¡­ so that is pretty good.


    Then when I am inside the bathroom I open the door when I use the sink and go into an underground room. There I see an empty room like usual and go towards one of the corners and when I push a part of the wall it opens up like a window with a guy coming out¡­ when he sees me he smiles and his eyes brighten a little¡­


    When I notice this I immediately say..


    "Bradely¡­ you haven''t gotten any bright ideas about the bounty on my head have you."


    Immediately as soon as I say that Bradely puts his hands up and says.


    "Nononono¡­ I was just excited to see you."


    I just look at him with an intense stare¡­ as soon as he says anything suspicious I will kill him¡­ living as a rogue ninja and letting anyone have ''bright'' ideas isn''t a good thing. So I with a threatening voice I say to him.


    "And why would you be exited."


    He takes the body and gives me the money. Then he says¡­


    "Well someone came asking for an assassination on a certain individual from Konoha."


    I just look at him¡­ I have known Bradley for a long time¡­ like three years¡­ he has this weird habit of his that seems like he is  about to almost get to the main point¡­ but he doesn''t¡­ so I just ask him¡­


    "Get to the point or I am going to strangle you by your own intestines¡­"


    He just looks at me panicked and says¡­


    "Ok, ok¡­ it''s just some kid from Konoha his name is Yami Inuzuka."


    As soon as I hear this name I grab Bradely by his collar and say to his face¡­


    "Do you want me to die or something¡­ Yami Inuzuka might seem like a kid but from what I heard he went against the 3rd Raikage¡­ there is no way I will fight someone like that."


    "Nono it isn''t like that. The guy who put the assassination order said that he is someone close to him and in two days Yami will go to the Land of Fire Capital. He even showed the route he will take so we can put traps along the way¡­ also he said that he will poison Yami that day so the kid will definitely be weakened¡­ plus he said that he will pay 500.000.000 if the assassination is successful."


    Immediately my eyes widened at the extravagant amount of money¡­ the kid must have pissed off some powerful people¡­


    Then Bradley continued saying¡­


    "He also has hired someone else¡­ some famous assassins from the Land of The Sky¡­ they hold some grudge with Yami Inuzuka too¡­ also he will give a down payment of 100 million."


    I thought  this through for a couple of minutes and made my decision¡­


    "Yes I will accept¡­"


    At worst I know I will be able to escape¡­ after all... I escaped the First Hokage¡­ there is no way anyone else on the Elemental Nations will even be able to catch me if the God of Shinobi couldn''t¡­


    ¡­


    After two days we put traps all along the way and when I look at my partner''s in this assassination I can''t help but feel the chances of success rising. They  both have a pretty good amount of chakra. They look like a man in his forties with long blond hair and a muscular build. While the other is an old man with a mustache and short silver hair¡­


    I haven''t heard of them except from Bradley but¡­ even though Bradley is a greedy sh*t he can still be trusted to have important information¡­ after the assassination I was planning to kill them and take their part of the Reward¡­ but it''s better to keep things to myself and not do that¡­ those guys have a dangerous vibe¡­


    Then after a couple of hours of us hiding a kid who is pretty tall for his age with spiky black hair and black eyes¡­ Yami Inuzuka is here¡­ also I see that he seems to be breathing hard for a ninja like him to do that it means¡­ he is already poisoned from our contractor...


    Then Yami stops leaning against a tree and he is sweating like crazy¡­.


    *cough*


    He coughs into his hand and Yami Inuzuka sees that it is blood¡­ his eyes widen and¡­


    Immediately as soon as I see that¡­


    ''NOW.''


    I decided to attack him immediately.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    (Whaaaat Yami got betrayed?!?!... what is going on here¡­ how is this possible¡­ who is after Yami and who are these mysterious assassins¡­


    Find out on the next chapter to Naruto: Dream To Immortality.)


    P.S: Soon there will be some huge timeskips...

 Chapter 101 - FINALLY!??!

    Chapter 101


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    Still Kakuzu''s POV


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    .


    .


    .


    .


    Then immediately I attacked Yami Inuzuka¡­ when he turned around... he had a strange smile on his face that sent shivers down my spine¡­ my hearts felt cold.


    I could immediately sense that¡­ SOMETHING IS WRONG¡­


    Suddenly I felt darkness claim me as I fell down on the ground¡­ w- what¡­ am I going to die like this¡­ am I Kakuzu the ninja who was able to escape the God Of Shinobi die here?!¡­ like a bug¡­ squashed by a little kid¡­ NOOOOO¡­


    That was my last thought as I felt my consciousness also slip into darkness¡­


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    General POV


    .


    .


    .


    .


    Next time Kakuzu wakes up he is under a tree that he was sleeping¡­ while leaning on it¡­ when he wakes up he says¡­


    "Damn¡­ what was I doing¡­"


    Then he sees the dead body that he had next to him¡­


    "Oh yeah¡­ I should go and deliver this to Bradley''s station¡­ I know that guy will give me the best deals."


    After Kakuzu dusted himself off he couldn''t help but think¡­


    ''It''s nice to rest sometimes.''


    ¡­.


    When he arrived at the bounty hunters station. He went to the bathrooms and opened a secret door on it and then he went to the secure room and when he entered¡­ Kakuzu saw Bradely like usual sitting there on with only a hole in the wall big enough to fit the average human body¡­


    Kakuzu then goes towards him and says¡­


    "Bradley here it is a new body¡­"


    Bradley looks at it and says¡­


    "Hmmm a Jounin¡­ he has a three million bounty¡­"


    Then he takes a sack of money and hands it to Kakuzu while saying.


    "Here it is your money."


    Kakuzu counts all of the money there and after doing so he just walked away¡­


    If he had looked at the other side where Bradley was staying he would have seen¡­


    Another Bradley tied up and unconscious with a hollow look on his eyes¡­ then the ''Bradley'' who talked to Kakuzu just said¡­


    "You can come out now."


    The so called ''assassins'' who were from the Land of Sky came out of the shadows¡­ then they all¡­


    *poof*


    Were back to their original appearances¡­ they were all shadow clones¡­ of YAMI INUZUKA¡­


    One of them then pulls out a sealed memory and puts it into the real Bradley''s head¡­ that was in case someone ever investigated this thing¡­ and Bradley now has the memories of really... he himself doing the transaction with Kakuzu...


    Then they untied him¡­


    *poof*


    Dispel themselves...


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    Yami POV


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    .


    .


    .


    .


    I come back to Konoha through the sewer system and then I stealthily make my way towards the Inuzuka Clan compound. I saw my clone just chilling and drinking green tea¡­


    When my clone sensed me he went to the bathroom and¡­ I went there too. Then we  changed places when he dispelled himself¡­ I have to be careful inside Konoha¡­ a lot of spies watching me¡­ the Nara seem to have taken an interest in me¡­ they are dangerously smart¡­ better teach them that curiosity KILLED the cat¡­ it would be a shame for the same to happen to them...


    Then I go to the garden and sit down on my chair and drink the tea that my clone was drinking¡­.


    After taking a sip of it¡­ salty tea!?... tastes horrible¡­ but I kind of like it¡­


    I can''t help but remember how easy it was for me to defeat Kakuzu¡­ just one Bat Sage Genjutsu Scream and it was over and I even planned so much and even had two of my clones act as assassins to backstab him¡­


    ¡­I guess sometimes I forget how strong I have gotten¡­ I have always compared my strength with monsters like Kaguya or Ten Tails Madara¡­ I will always keep doing that¡­ but...


    Then I pull out a small vial with black slithering goo inside of it¡­ Earth Grudge Fear¡­


    ¡­A Dream To Immortality at last...


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    .


    .


    .


    I am currently inside my laboratory¡­ I can''t help but laugh like a maniac...


    "HAHAHAHAHAHA YES FINALLY¡­."


    I just look at my hand¡­ then¡­


    *fwosh*


    I used <Chakra Scalpel> and cut off my hand¡­ when it falls in the ground there is blood all around it¡­ then with a mental command from me¡­ from my stump¡­ or more specifically from inside my bones¡­ black tendrils come out and also from my cut off hand black tendrils come out and then they connect together and my hand comes back into my arm and¡­ I heal it perfectly¡­ like there is no problem¡­ I can use this to extend my lifespan indefinitely and repair and revitalize my organs even when they get thousands of years old¡­ I have combined it with the Earth Grudge Fear with the Dead Bone Pulse to create a metally strong bones that can have the properties to be as strong as metal and as flowing as water whenever I want them¡­ and I still have my fleshy body with blood and all that¡­ plus now I can remotely control EVERY single part of my body manually if I want¡­  I will never need to train and my body will ALWAYS and FOREVER remain¡­.


    YES I FINALLY REACHED IMMORTALITY¡­


    I REACHED MY DREAM TO IMMORTALITY¡­


    Then an uncontrollable maniacal smile appeared on my face while thinking¡­


    BUT I WANT MOREEEEEEE¡­.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    (At chapter 101 Yami Inuzuka has achieved his dream and as soon as he did so¡­ instead of feeling empty or hollow inside¡­ he already wants more¡­ Yami will always want more and will never be satisfied with what he has¡­ at the end of the chapter Yami might seem like a monster of evil but¡­ he was truly emphasising humanity with their unquenchable greed.)


    P.S: Next chapter will be a two years Time Skip.


    P.P.S: 10 advanced chaps of this story are in Patr?on.

 Chapter 102 - Student...

    Chapter 102


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    Time Skip/ Two Years Later/ MC age 17


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    While walking around Konoha while reading a paper in my hand¡­


    ¨C¨C¨C¨C¨C¨C¨C¨C¨C


    ¡ñInuzuka Clan Members:


    ?60 ninja:


    2 Elite Jounin


    22 Jounin


    6 Special Jounin


    19 Genin


    ?400 Civilians:


    100 Academy Students


    ¨C¨C¨C¨C¨C¨C¨C¨C¨C


    The reforms with the Inuzuka clan opening dozens of orphanages all over my clan compound and taking in Civilian children¡­ has truly boosted my Clan Members¡­ when the number goes around 1000 members I will stop accepting any more members into my clan¡­  the clan even had the first political marriage happen¡­ we connected ourselves even more with the Onikuma Clan¡­ of course I wasn''t the one getting married¡­ after all¡­ having me married to that trashy Clan is like giving a pet a five star dinner¡­ completely useless¡­


    We just married some talented Genins together and that was that¡­ the thirteen year old husband was supplied by us and the 17 year old bride from the Onikuma Clan¡­ so she will be coming to the Inuzuka Clan compound to live¡­ the Husband... like the average 13 year old is horny so he will accept anything that moves as a wife soo yeah¡­


    Also my clan finally has some Elite Jounin¡­ I made them by using some Mosquito Sage Techniques¡­ they are really useful¡­ like chakra transfer. I f.o.r.c.i.b.l.y raised their chakra reserves¡­ it can raise it up to B rank... and just to be safe I put some seals in case of betrayal and¡­ they were good to go and the lifespan expected was minimal compared to my 8th Gate Puncher Technique that took a loot of lifespan from them...


    Anyway now I am officially the ric.h.e.s.t person in Konoha with a Networth of around 6 billion Ryo¡­


    Immortal life has been treating me VERY well¡­


    Can''t say the same about Sakumo though¡­ the guy just went up and killed himself¡­ he wasn''t exactly useful to me so I let it happen¡­ plus I didn''t want to ruin my relationship with Danzo¡­ that guy is VERY useful when he wants to be¡­ I just asked him once about S rank Jutsu¡­ and the guy literally gave me half of Konoha''s S rank Elemental Ninjutsu¡­ I owe him two favours now¡­ which I am obviously not gonna keep¡­


    ...


    Then I arrived at my destination... the Ninja Academy¡­ when I go there I see that the teams are being assigned and then the Jounin sensei are appointed.


    Every Hokage has a Legendary student or students¡­ so I am going to need my first Legendary Student¡­ when the classroom is all empty I see my future student just staying there nervous¡­


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    Might Guy POV


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    .


    .


    When the teacher appointed all of the teams I I thought that it was weird that only I was left out¡­ damn it¡­ after all of this work and my teacher isn''t even here¡­ or maybe there was a mistake and the teacher doesn''t want a student like me anymore¡­


    When the teacher said that it was some famous Jounin named Yami Inuzuka¡­ the name sounds familiar but¡­ I don''t remember where I heard it from¡­ even the teacher was nervous when he said his name¡­ I should have studied on the Jounin of Konoha before I became a Genin¡­


    Then suddenly from the corner of my eyes¡­ I see someone entering from the window¡­ he had a Konoha headband black spiky hair, with black eyes and he was wearing a Jounin Uniform¡­


    When he looks at me he smiles and I immediately recognize his face¡­ he is the guy from the books¡­ the ones which teachers wont stop mentioning and is even more famous than the Sanin.


    Then as he is smiling at me he asks.


    "Are you Might Guy."


    I immediately answered him¡­


    "YES YAMI -SAMA."


    Then his smile became wider and he said¡­


    "Ok then come here."


    I immediately jump from my seat and arrive in front of him¡­ then while still smiling Yami -sama says¡­


    "Well then we should decide how you will do during the next part of the Genin exam."


    Then I tense up and ask him.


    "What will the next part of the exam be... Yami -sama."


    Then when he heard me ask that Yami -sama answers¡­


    "Good¡­ I like your attitude¡­ well then grab my hand."


    He extended his hand towards me as if asking for a handshake¡­ I then grab his hand and as soon as I do so¡­


    <Flying Thunder God>


    *fwosh*


    For a split second I thought I saw a dark flash.


    Then I notice that my surroundings have changed and we are currently in some training ground that I have never been to before...


    Then I looked at Yami -sama in surprise¡­ was that teleportation¡­ isn''t it impossible for a ninja to be able to teleport I never even heard of this¡­


    Then Yami -sama smiled at me and he said¡­


    "This will be your final exam before becoming a Genin¡­ if you are able to pass my test¡­ you will become officially a Genin and then I will begin teaching you¡­ how to become the strongest Taijutsu user."


    When I hear him say this... I can''t help but be surprised¡­ besides my father no one has ever believed in me¡­


    Then I look Yami -sensei in the eyes and think to myself¡­


    I WILL NOT LET YOU DOWN¡­


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    AUTHOR  NOTE:


    (The MC chose Guy to become his first student and even went as far as placing him in an apprenticeship¡­ though this might seem like the MC truly believes in Guy¡­ he doesn''t believe in him¡­ BECAUSE he already KNOWS how strong Guy will become in the future¡­)

 Chapter 103 - My YOUTHFUL Genin Student...

    Chapter 103


    ¡­


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    Might Guy POV


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    .


    I look at Yami -sama and can''t help but loudly exclaim..


    "Wooaaahhh¡­"


    "Yeah I know what you mean. It is a really convenient technique if you wanna travel anywhere really."


    That does sound convenient.


    Then Yami -sama continued saying.


    "Then let me start explaining the test that you will need to pass to become my student¡­"


    He made a handsign and a clone appeared next to him¡­ then he put his hand on his clone''s shoulder and said.


    "You just need to dispel my clone¡­ and as a shadow clone one good hit and he is gone."


    As soon as he says this he disappears in a dark flash...


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    Yami (MC) POV


    .


    .


    .


    .


    Well I was going to use another test to get him into my Genin team but since he is the only student currently he will get this test.


    Then¡­


    <Flying Thunder God>


    I teleported back to my house in the Inuzuka Clan compound and went to the kitchen, got some popcorn and some of my favourite horrible tasting tea¡­ I kind of have started liking it¡­


    Since now I can''t raise my strength anymore at least until the 3rd Ninja War starts... so since in this world there is no internet¡­ I started using my Clan Development as a long game¡­ raising its stats and all that type of stuff¡­ it is very fun¡­ I am bored most of the time so even this type of sh*tty entertainment is better than nothing¡­ I also surprisingly got a hobby for gardening¡­  that also isn''t that fun¡­ but it is a great excuse to stop listening to Tsume''s bullsh*t accomplishments¡­ I mean c''mon when I was her age I achieved Immortality¡­ and what did she do¡­ well she completed some B rank mission¡­ I could do those while taking a sh*t¡­


    Anyway¡­ better go back to Guy now¡­


    <Flying Thunder God>


    ¡­


    I appear on a tree in the Inuzuka training ground where Guy is still fighting my clone¡­ and my clone is just playing with him...


    I have also given one giant Bat as a summon to every Ninja of the Inuzuka clan¡­ now they have a dog¡­ and a bat¡­ so there is that¡­ in my clan since the 2nd Ninja War only five ninja Inuzuka have died¡­ that is a relatively small number compared to the Senju who now only have Tsunade¡­ and then there is the Uchiha¡­ those guys die quite a lot¡­ like since the 2nd Ninja war ended there have been 46 Uchiha deaths in the field¡­ that is nothing special after all in the peace time between the 1st and 2nd Ninja War the Uchiha death count was 58¡­


    The good news is that now¡­ I have 92 new sharingan¡­ and some of them even are Mangekyo¡­ though none of them have some amazing abilities.


    ¡­.


    After five hours Guy finally just fell down from exhaustion without even touching my shadow clone once¡­ so it seems like he still hasn''t learned the Eight Gates Technique...


    Well then.. as I get close to and see him¡­ crawling towards my clone while whispering with tears in his eyes¡­


    "I can''t give up yet¡­ I must pass this¡­"


    When I see that¡­ I just calmly sid to him¡­


    "Guy yo-."


    Then he interrupted me and screamed..


    "I CAN DO THIS YAMI -SAMA¡­. JUST GIVE ME A LITTLE MORE TIME¡­"


    Then even more tears flow from his eyes and he says¡­


    "Please Yami -sama¡­ just please¡­ give me another chance."


    I just look at him¡­ this kid¡­ the world doesn''t necessarily reward hard work¡­ but I will¡­ Guy¡­ you will be a paragraph from my Legend¡­ but... you must still be a shining star that others can never even hope to catch up to.


    Then I smile at him and say with an encouraging voice¡­


    "Guy¡­ you have already passed my test¡­ so Might Guy¡­ welcome to team Yami¡­ also known as team 3¡­"


    "YES I DID ITTTT¡­"


    *snore*


    And he fell asleep¡­ I guess no matter how hard of a worker he is¡­ he is still only seven years old¡­


    Heh¡­ that was amusing to say the least¡­


    Then I put a hand over his c.h.e.s.t and started running healing chakra through it¡­ and¡­ his muscles are all healed with no drawbacks to him¡­ actually it just made his muscles stronger¡­ but he is still asleep because of his fatigue¡­


    So I pick him up over my shoulder like a sack of potatoes.


    ¡­.


    Then I go to one of my clinics and put him on a bed there to rest¡­ then I call a staff member to me¡­


    When he arrived¡­ I could immediately see that the staff member radiated nervousness but he was still able to say.


    "H -How can I help you Y- Yami -sama."


    I just look at him and say to him with a calm face and calm voice.


    "You¡­ go and notify Might Duy that his son is okay and that he also passed my test¡­ he is now my student now. Also his address in the North forests there is a Cabin-...."


    ¡­.


    After telling him the address he went away¡­ that I just left a letter besides Guy and then I went back to my home¡­ today has been productive¡­ at least comparing it to the last months¡­ everything has been so slow lately¡­ I feel like I am getting stagnant¡­ and¡­ I don''t like that one bit¡­ I better prepare some side subjects and maybe start learning some new Justsu¡­


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    (We see that the MC is a little bored now¡­ and he has started becoming stagnant¡­ he doesn''t like that but¡­ and he... like always has a plan for it¡­ He will also be helping Guy become stronger¡­ how strong well you will have to keep reading...)


    P.S: Chapters 1->3 of my Harry Potter Reborn as Lockhart are for free on Patr¨¨on.

 Chapter 104 - This Lovely World...

    Chapter 104


    ¡­


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    ????? ????? POV


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    .


    .


    .


    .


    I look at the green field around me with a city on the horizon¡­ I can''t help but think of how beautiful this world is¡­ when mother is drunk she says that god doesn''t exist and that even if he did he is an evil god¡­ after all someone who is all powerful but still allows atrocities to happen all around the world then¡­ that god is evil¡­


    I am sure that God does exist¡­ after all, the proof is all around¡­ this world from its smallest creatures to the giant monsters¡­ everything in a strange way¡­ it works good together¡­ like a mechanism¡­ the world truly is perfect¡­ and even though bad people exist¡­ there are also good people to stop the bad ones...


    Then the butterfly flies off from my hand¡­ then I get up and dust my clothes¡­ I look up at the sun and notice¡­ even though mother drinks in the evenings she always says to me that I must always be back for lunch or I will be grounded for a week¡­ *sigh*...  then as I am going back I see my aunt in the market buying some groceries¡­ she has black hair and black eyes. She is wearing a black kimono with a small pig following her. She is transformed as an a.d.u.l.t when I know that she really is only a little older than me.


    As soon as I go close to greet my aunt the pig turns around and¡­


    *oink*


    ...he oinks at me¡­ then aunty turns around and says¡­


    "What is Tonton¡­"


    When she sees me she just smiles and says¡­


    "Did you have your morning walk Hachi¡­"


    I just pout at her and say¡­


    "I was adventuring¡­ not going for a walk¡­ aunt Shizune¡­"


    She just keeps smiling while saying.


    "Sure, sure whatever you say Hachi¡­ just go back to the hotel and I will cook us something."


    I just nod and start going towards the hotel¡­ but before going there I put a hand in my pocket and take out then I go to a dango shop and buy some dango¡­


    ¡­.


    Then as I am walking towards the hotel and as I am about to arrive there¡­ I noticed something strange in an alley¡­ so I curiously went there¡­ what I saw there¡­ was reality¡­


    A mother who had a baby wrapped in a blanket. As soon as I see that I approached the mother and the baby I extend my dango towards her¡­ then when she looks at me in the eyes¡­ I see that her eyes are devoid of emotion and hollow¡­ she just takes the dango¡­ and starts eating it¡­ and then she cuts some small pieces to give to her baby¡­


    After I gave her the dango I started walking away¡­ the woman didn''t say anything and neither did I¡­


    I am not going to help her¡­ so there is nothing to say from me¡­ and I didn''t do this to get some cheap thank you¡­ I will probably forget about this deed tomorrow¡­


    ¡­.


    Then I see my mother sleeping on the couch. I decided to take a blanket and cover her. After that I went and took out a leaf from my pocket and did the exercise that aunt Shizune taught me. I put the leaf on my forehead and use chakra to make it stick in there. I have been training it for a couple of days and I think I finally got the hang of it¡­


    Then aunt Shizune comes inside with two bags of groceries and Tonton following behind her¡­ I always wondered why she even keeps the pig around¡­ I just assumed that it was like a food reserve¡­ but I think she likes Tonton a lot¡­


    I went to help aunt Shizune with the grocery bags and she just said in an amused way¡­.


    "Aren''t you such a nice boy Hachi."


    I just smile at her then when she looks at my forehead on which I am holding the leaf she just sighs and says¡­


    "You truly are very talented Hachi¡­ you already learned the leaf sticking exercise¡­ and you are only five years old."


    ¡­.


    Then aun-.... I mean Shizune -sensei is teaching me how to walk on walls just by using chakra control¡­     THAT''S SOOO COOOL.


    ¡­.


    Then aunt Shizune came behind mother¡­ and she wasn''t drunk so she just told mother while giving her a bottle of sake.


    "You will continue drinking alone¡­ I am going to sleep since I  have to wake up tomorrow."


    ¡­


    Then as Shizune went to sleep¡­ I decided to stay with my mother, while she drinks herself to sleep¡­ I know that she cries while she is alone¡­ I don''t know how but¡­ I don''t want my mother to cry and be sad all of the time.


    ¡­.


    After some hours and mother drinking another bottle of sake she just continued speaking gibberish¡­.


    "Yami Inuzuka¡­ that kid¡­ was¡­ is a monster¡­ he was always too smart, too good¡­ he would be nice and good for one moment then as soon as you would turn your back on him. You would always feel like a predator was looking at your back."


    Ah yeah Yami Inuzuka¡­ mother doesn''t like to talk about him but aunt Shizune says that he was mother''s student and protege¡­


    At a young age he became an S rank ninja. Just like mother, the other Sanin were and ...so was my father Dan Kato.


    Whenever I asked my mother to tell me about my father. She says to go and ask Shizune. Shizune says that I took more  from my mother''s side with my straight black hair and pupiless black eyes¡­ I kind of look like Great Grandfather Hashirama Senju¡­


    Then my mother while looking at me she says¡­


    "What I did was wrong¡­ you were our mistake¡­"


    What did mother just say¡­


    As soon as I heard what she said¡­ I was shell shocked¡­ no words were even coming out of me¡­


    What does she mean by that¡­.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    (Hachi Senju will develop kind of like a Yami who actually cares about some people close to him. We can see that Hachi truly does love his family¡­ even though Tsunade is a drunk. Also because of that Hachi is more m.a.t.u.r.e than children his age. Now we see the result of Yami''s actions just because of his one night of carelessness. He will definitely learn something from this.)

 Chapter 105 - A son… like his Father...

    Chapter 105


    -Time Skip three months later-


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    -Hachi Senju POV-


    I just walk around the new city. Mother chose  this  city to spend her money on¡­


    I hope we stay here for a while. I made a new friend here. Then as I am walking I faintly hear some merchants talking to each other. My hearing and sense of smell has always been surprisingly good.


    "Man I sure love working for Inuzuka -sama the pay is good if you aren''t dumb enough to do something stupid. He definitely has the Daimyo in the palm of his hand¡­ I mean the guy just got three Gold Mines for himself¡­ by literally just paying almost nothing."


    Hmmmm that is interesting¡­ but I keep walking anyway¡­ and then I arrive at a house. The house looked normal like any other house in this place. When I was outside the door I just called out¡­


    "Erzaaaa come out to play."


    Then immediately like a flash of red a girl around my age comes out of the house¡­ she has red and brown eyes¡­  when she sees me she just pouts and says¡­


    "I told you not to call me like that¡­"


    I just act like I am falsely crying  and with fake tears on my eyes I tell Erza.


    "S -Sorry I won''t do it again."


    When she sees me and thinks that I am about to cry she gets uncomfortable and comes close to me. She starts rubbing my back to comfort me while she says¡­.


    "No problem¡­ I was just joking."


    She really is nice when she is worried like this. Why can''t she always be like this. I heard that her grandma is an Uzumaki¡­ a Civilian one. So that is cool...


    *pft*


    Then my act slipped and I chuckled a little¡­ as soon as Erza heard this¡­ she just said in a cold voice.


    "Hachi¡­. you wouldn''t try to fool me would you¡­"


    Then I just look at her with a serious face and say¡­


    "I guess I will have to use the Secret Senju technique¡­"


    Her anger slips away and she just looks at me in confusion and says¡­


    "What do you even mean by that¡­"


    Then I just clasp my hands together...


    And loudly screamed¡­


    "Secret Senju Technique¡­. RUNNING AWAY¡­"


    And I immediately started running away from her. While running away I hear her scream¡­


    "Hachi¡­ THAT WAS LAME¡­"


    As soon as she says that¡­


    *bang*


    I fall on the ground¡­ why¡­ did she have to be so mean¡­


    Then she catches up to me and grabs my head with her hand¡­ I just give up...


    After a couple of minutes of her screaming at me and¡­ me dodging her slaps¡­ but making it seem like they hit me¡­ the Uzumaki really are craz-... I mean wild¡­ that is where mother got it from¡­ great grandmother Mito.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    And then we start playing¡­ we go around the forest trying to find bugs¡­ we like to crush them¡­ there are some strong ones out there¡­


    Then as Erza is about to say something...


    "So how-."


    I cover her mouth. She is about to say something rude to me but when she sees my serious face¡­ I am even covered in cold sweat¡­ I smell something VERY dangerous around and my instincts are running CRAZY...


    Then suddenly I see a big bear¡­ he is as big as a carriage there is no way I can defeat that¡­ I don''t even know ONE justsu¡­ then as I turn around to warn Erza¡­


    *crack*


    I noticed that she stepped on some leaves way too hard¡­ then the bear turned towards us¡­ I AM GOING TO DIE¡­


    Then I look at Erza and can''t help but unconsciously think¡­


    If I left Erza behind¡­ while the bear eats her¡­ I can run away¡­


    *roar*


    Then the bear comes running towards us¡­ I AM GOING TO DIE¡­


    Then as if the voice of an angel...


    "Head Shot"


    *boom*


    As I am still in shock I hear him say in a panicked voice. "Ahhh sensei is going to be mad at me that it took so long to finish this D rank mission¡­ he will probably make me drink that horrible tea while he explains to me my mistakes¡­ but wait¡­ this wasn''t my fault¡­"


    When I heard him talk to himself I wanted to say something but¡­ no words came out of my mouth¡­ I immediately understood why¡­. I am absolutely terrified¡­ I look at my hands and see that they are shaken¡­


    Was I just about to die¡­ if it wasn''t for this guy¡­ I would have definitely died¡­. I haven''t experienced anything¡­ I haven''t even seen how the world is¡­ and I was about to die...also I was about to leave Erza behind¡­ I read it in a book once that people show their true colours when they are about to die...


    IS THAT THE REAL ME¡­ am I deep inside¡­ a coward¡­ someone so vile that I am willing to abandon my best friend just like that¡­.


    I don''t even know myself¡­


    I get brought out of my thoughts by a hand touching my shoulder¡­ when I turn around to see who it was¡­ oh¡­ it is just Erza¡­ then I see that the body of the bear was gone and just the bear blood splattered around is there¡­ still fresh¡­


    Then Erza looks into my eyes with a nervous look herself and she while shaking says. "You were out if it even when that ninja asked us if we were ok¡­ are you ok Hachi."


    I just look into my still shaking hand and clench it into a fist¡­ "Yeah I am okay Erza."


    I NEVER want to feel so out of control again¡­ I should ask Aunt Shizune on how to become stronger¡­


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    AUTHOR  NOTE:


    (Character development¡­ from Hachi¡­ we see that even though he had that instinct to immediately run away and abandon Erza just to buy himself some more time¡­ he is like Yami in that regard¡­ but Hachi doesn''t like that side of him¡­)


    (I hope you liked the personal development that Hatchi came this chapter)


    P.S: We also see that Yami has quite the influence¡­ and some people are even scared of saying his name in a disrespectful way...

 Chapter 106 - Breaking Down?!?!

    Chapter 106


    ¡­


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    Yami POV  (MC)


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    .


    .


    .


    .


    I am just looking at some paperwork that my clones brought me. I am waiting for Guy to return from his D rank mission of taking care of some bear that has been terrorising a Village. Then I hear an alarm clock go on inside the house. I just give a mental command and the clock is turned off. Fuinjutsu is the most versatile thing I have learned ever since I came to this world.


    Anyway at least Guy is not dead or in danger. I have a seal on him that if he is in danger or dead it will notify me¡­ anyway¡­ Guy has just been taught the 8th gate technique¡­ and I already copied it¡­


    Then I force my chakra through the gates.


    1st gate open, 2nd gate open, 3rd gate open, 4th gate open, 5th gate open, 6th gate open, 7th gate OPEN¡­


    My body is immediately flooded with chakra continuously destroying and repairing itself¡­ but still I can''t use any Jutsu,  because of the rampant chakra inside of me, I can still heal myself with the Jiongu. Afterall the Jiongu is not really a Jutsu in the typical way. It is more like a parasite that I control¡­


    Then after a couple of minutes I close all of the gates¡­ and¡­


    *fwosh*


    My body started releasing steam and healing itself¡­ and that is it for my daily training¡­ in about four to five years my body will be at its best shape¡­ after that I will stop the aging in my body¡­ *sigh*... in my last world immortality was a dream that I gave up on for my family¡­ sometimes I really wonder how they are doing¡­ do they have enough money now that I am dead¡­ we already were very poor¡­ I really hope that they are ok...


    Then I feel something wet pall down from my eyes¡­ when I touch it with my hand¡­ I see so I am crying¡­ even though I can suppress my feelings¡­ I have been doing so for seventeen years¡­ I really am lonely¡­ everyone here will kill each other for the Village¡­ they will kill their own families like Itachi did just for the ''Village''..... WHAT THE HELL IS THAT SUPPOSED TO EVEN MEAN¡­


    I immediately calm down¡­ *sigh*... as expected I have started to ''burst''... before I was so worried about surviving in this world, because of that I spent every moment planning and scheming that my feelings and fun came second.


    Now that I have immortality I have free time¡­ that means my mind has the time to wander onto things like this¡­


    Then since¡­ my emotions are getting the better of me¡­


    I immediately put a full barrier around my house forbidding anyone or anything from coming in. Then I make a water clone and have him go outside to tell anyone that wants to come in that I am busy doing a critical experiment or something like that.


    I won''t send a shadow clone since he might also be affected by my feelings.


    Then I also put an anti spy barrier all around.


    My face immediately gets a cold look¡­ and I fall into my knees¡­ my breathing gets heavier¡­ cold sweat surrounds my body tears wouldn''t stop coming out of my eyes and falling into the ground¡­ my heart was beating so fast that it almost hurt¡­ I grab my c.h.e.s.t and fall into the ground¡­ even while being overwhelmed by emotions there still existed that calculating side that¡­ kept saying that I am just having a panic attack.


    DAMN IT¡­ DAMN IT¡­ DAMN IT¡­


    Why can''t I calm down¡­ I need to calm down¡­ I need a release¡­. I just start punching the ground¡­ with my raw strength...


    ¡­.


    After some minutes I just lay down in the crater that I created into my backyard¡­ crying silently¡­ in a more controlled way¡­


    Damn¡­ I guess I really am lonely¡­ I just point my hand upwards as if to grab the sky¡­


    This must never happen again¡­ I need a release state¡­ or I am going to start doing irrational things and letting my emotions lead me¡­ they are a part of me so I would never get rid of them but¡­ I need a way to take care of them¡­


    ¡­


    <Genjutsu Sharingan: Self Hypnosis 1000 Happy Memories>


    ¡­.


    *fwosh*


    I look at the world around me¡­ I see that it is my apartment where my family used to live¡­


    I know this is a lie¡­ and I know that I am in a genjutsu that I could break out of whenever I want but¡­ I guess I will truly rest¡­ after seventeen years of wearing a mask¡­ I can let go¡­


    I guess spending some time with the real family is good¡­


    I open the door to the kitchen. I see my little brother with his blond hair and brown eyes just drawing. He was always worthless, he liked comparing himself to me. I was his role model. Though I know and he knows that I know that he is jealous of me. I truly did portray myself as perfect in front of him.


    I just smile and go forward¡­ he stops drawing and looks towards me. He smiles and says. "Hey brother do you want to play D&D with me."


    Unlike that annoyance that I felt in my first life when my little brother used to ask this... I just smile a little while saying. "Sure let''s play a little then."


    I grab a couple of drinks as I hear my little brother say. "I will be an elf archer named¡­."


    I never liked playing D&D with him¡­ but now I guess I will get what I can...


    Even while thinking all that... for the first time in a long time... a truly happy smile appeared on my face.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    (I know that this might seem out of character for the MC. But if you have read his backstory in the Auxiliary Chapters. You will know that his first life story was quite a tragedy and he truly loved people before he died and even gave up his dream to Immortality (that he got from seeing loved people around him dying from big things to small things like just a small rat bite.)


    (He truly cares for his first life family and him acting for 17 years he¡­ had a crack appear on his mask. Since he also kept the people here far away and didn''t care about any of them. He can''t give up one family just to have another. For someone like him a  person can only have one family that is why he doesn''t trust anyone in this world. They would kill family for something like a village. For him even if the whole world is to torture in hell he wouldn''t care as long as his family is OK.


    He chooses and will always choose his first life family. His love is psychotic and twisted but in a way also true he will never care if his real family is rich, poor, evil or good¡­ they will always be his one and only family¡­ he will never abandon them just because he got Reborn in another so called ''family.'' Even if his first world family could be people that torture and eat babies for fun he¡­ would still love them¡­ no matter what.)


    P.S: Yami will still be cold and cruel like always. He won''t be changing. He just had his inevitable ''burst.''


    P.P.S: Also does anyone know some type of reference with HolyJoker and HolySaintJoe... a comment asked me in the last chapter about it... I didn''t get the reference... I am disappointed in myself. I googled it but I only got some Christian stuff about it...


    P.P.P.S: In patr?on Yami and Hachi have already met..????

 Chapter 107 - The Eight Gates...

    Chapter 107


    ¡­


    After that episode of me panicking I have my mask back on. I am at the best performance possible at the moment. I was truly repressing my feelings too much¡­ I guess... I was overdoing it¡­


    *sigh*... after that little dose of Genjutsu I am back to normal¡­


    ¡­.


    It seems like the ''burst'' lasted just about an hour. Not really enough time for anyone to even take notice of stuff like this. After all it could have been just an experiment gone wrong. After all, who are they going to question.


    ¡­.


    Then after another hour of me thinking back on the truly happy time I had during the Genjutsu. I should regulate that so I don''t overuse it or get addicted to it. I should only do it once a year during random intervals whenever I feel like I need it. Since making a habit of anything can be used as a weakness in this sh*ty world.


    Then I sat on my porch while thinking of my future plans. That is when I sense that Guy has entered my sensing range¡­. I see so he finally finished his mission.


    When Guy arrived I noticed ¡­ that he had a nervous look on his face. Then he came in front of and started scratching the back of his head while nervously saying.


    "H -Hey...Yami -sensei how was your day¡­"


    I just smile at him and say. "Ah Guy¡­ I see that it took you two whole days to finish a D rank mission."


    In difficulty it was C Rank but the villagers didn''t have the money to pay for a C rank so I (my clone) just made a deal with them on certain parts of the lands I would own. I will boost the economy on there like I did in many other farming villages. My VERY basic economic knowledge from the future is really revolutionary here.


    Then while Guy is waiting I take out my ''original'' book that I was writing in here¡­ its name is Romeo And Juliet¡­ but I haven''t thought of a good pen name yet¡­ maybe I won''t even publish it. After all, I am flushed with cash currently, no matter how much the book makes it''s still just a book.


    Anyway Guy is still nervously standing waiting for my answer¡­ if I punished him with more training he would instead like it. So I just said to him. "Come here Guy and tell me how your mission went¡­"


    Guy almost seemed relieved but then I continued saying. "... over a cup of tea."


    Immediately his face scrunches like he just ate a lemon. Yeah I know he hates my original recipe of gross but healthy tea... Guy just reluctantly accepts... not like he had a choice in the matter.


    He is currently seven years old but with my training. He can currently beat anyone in Taijutsu in his group age¡­ if Kakashi wasn''t a thing he could beat anyone in his group age at a straight fight but he hasn''t been able to surpass Kakashi''s talent with hard work¡­ at least not yet¡­ I predict that at around the age of 12 Guy will be able to beat Kakashi 9/10 times in a fight.


    But even though Guy seems like a knucklehead. He is still helping Kakashi cope with his father''s recent suicide. Truly a sad thing, it''s really a shame for a ninja like Sakumo to die. If only he had more uses to me, I would have botherd to save him.


    .


    .


    .


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    9 Months Later/ MC age 18


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    .


    .


    I just look at Guy moving to attack me. It has already been a year since I started training him. When he gets close to me I can hear him say. "3rd GATE OPEN."


    Oh so he is now able to open a new gate and just as his speed increases he comes towards me.


    I just simply side step. Guy then turns around and tries to dropkick me but I just jump back and his kick hits the ground.


    *boom*


    A small crater is created where his kick landed. And I also notice that the leg that he used to kick right now has a couple of very big muscle strains. But Guy just winces a little at the pain and still charges towards me like a bull.


    Ok that is enough now.


    <Shunshin>


    If there was a competition on who held the most knowledge about the Eight Gates¡­ I would be either the first or second¡­ depending on how knowledgeable the creator of the technique was about what he was even doing.


    Then before Guy falls in the ground I just catch him and lay him gently in the ground and start working on his injuries. Then when Guy who is still conscious asks. "How did I do this time Sensei."


    I just smile and say to him. "Better than last time. But your attacks were still predictable¡­ you couldn''t strategise while under the pain of opening the Gates. But you will eventually get used to it¡­"


    Guy just thinks back on his mistakes that he did during the fight... and nods.


    ¡­


    After healing him. I just say. "Also better get ready. We have an A rank in an hour or so."


    Guy immediately panicked and said. "Wait what¡­ why didn''t you say that Sensei¡­. and why did you even let me use my gates technique. We also haven''t even gone to any B rank Missions aren''t we supposed to follow some type of order."


    I just sigh and say to him. "I have gone on a dozen S rank, A rank and even easy B rank missions by myself. So what are you complaining about. Plus I won''t let you do all the work like I do during our C rank missions."


    As soon as Guy hears the last part of what I said, he gets up and points a finger at me while saying. "AHHHH I knew you were doing that. I always thought that it was weird that you were always sleeping during any type of attack¡­ and now you even admitted it yourself."


    Guy still isn''t the funny guy that he will be when he grows up¡­ I guess I will have to teach him about other things than youth. To be honest I wasn''t asleep. I just used a Genjutsu to make it seem like I was. I usually just watched him fight for entertainment.


    Then I see that Guy suddenly just falls to his knees and out of breath¡­ afterall I didn''t heal his stamina.


    Then I just pat his head and transfer chakra to him¡­ giving him some energy to move.  Then I said to him."You don''t really need to pack anything. I have already got all of your things in a storage scroll already. You just get to the front gates and I will meet you there."


    <Flying Thunder God>


    Then I immediately teleport at my house and I just pack a lot of different delicious food. I am not going to eat cardboard food for nothing. This is way better¡­ then I heard the voice of Tsume say. "So you are going on another mission."


    Over the years Tsume''s voice is no longer angry or arrogant. She has truly changed a lot and definitely won''t be the same as she was during canon. I just turn around and look at her¡­


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    (The MC is calmer and back at wearing his mask like normal. Soon I will start transitioning to Hachi''s POV (Yami''s son) a little more since they are more interesting and he will have certain character developments. Though first  we will see Yami keep using his Charm and Charisma to manipulate people a little more and then we will do the transition. Since Yami''s POV have started getting stale since he is so powerful now and most of the time he will be either thinking of plans or chilling or doing both. Hachi will have to have a couple more character development moments before he starts truly resembling his father. (He will RESEMBLE Yami he won''t be his clone. He will just have certain quirks that Yami has¡­. Whether those are good or bad it depends.)

 Chapter 108 - Me in danger??... I AM THE DANGER!!!

    Chapter 108


    ...


    I just turn around and look at Tsume... she has finally understood that wild hair doesn''t suit her at all. So she has straightened and let it freely flow down. Now she doesn''t look like the wild tomboy Tsume. She even has a soft smile on her face and stopped being a tsundere.


    She has truly changed and m.a.t.u.r.ed a lot. She is a Chunin now, which is pretty good for her age group since not a lot reach Chunin in their teens... not impressive but it''s still better than Genin and now she also has a Giant Bat as her pet that she can summon. She should be able to reach Jounin level in her twenties.


    She just sighs and then says with a tired voice. "Don''t worry too much. I will take care of the Clan while you are away. I won''t let any old man ruin anything that you have worked so hard to build."


    I just smile at her. She knows some of the stuff that is going on behind the scenes. Since I have been taking any talented orphans into the clan. And well¡­ there is another person who would like those orphans to become his tools in his little secret boy band. This other person¡­ is Danzo¡­ since I also haven''t delivered anything or shown any progress on the promise that I made him about making a wood style user in a year in exchange for him giving me access to the Hashirama Cells¡­


    So he started playing little political shadow games with me. It is true that Danzo is good at politics¡­ for a ninja that is¡­ but for a person like me who comes from the 21st Century¡­ my little brother used to be better at them than Danzo¡­ so within the first month of our little games I economically ruined the Shimura Clan. Closed all of its shops and its only source of income being it''s ninja¡­ which are strangely dying a lot in the conflict.


    The Hokage has decided to stay neutral during my Cold War with Danzo. And he better stay like that if he doesn''t want all of the civilians of the Sarutobi Clan to become beggars.


    Anyway Danzo¡­ like I predicted... has started to use his little Root Ninja to try and forcefully destroy my establishments. But he is so confident in his little trained puppets that he has forgotten that they are humans¡­ you can NEVER turn a human into a puppet¡­ or he will be used against you¡­ I have six root members as my spies¡­ what some people like them will do for you if you show them kindness.


    I also easily took care of the Fuinjutsu that stops them from talking about Root to others. Also me literally having thousands of normal looking mosquitoes spying on his every move¡­ even when he sh*ts¡­ had definitely helped me a lot. I accept that I definitely am an absolute control freak and when I don''t  like something I change it not the other way around , I don''t like changing myself for others. Definitely terrible in a relationship...


    He hasn''t even noticed that I have started having my clones assassinate his Ninja Clan Members as soon as they take any mission B rank or above. The way that they die is different every time, though they might start suspecting something¡­ well they have already started suspecting that I am doing something but they have no proof so there is that. Though it seems like I will need to start moving my plan faster to the  elimination of Danzo. I can''t allow the 3rd Ninja War to start and give Danzo time to counter attack me. He needs to be eliminated NOW¡­ Danzo is too dangerous to allow him to think of a good counter attack against me.


    Also I poisoned all of his nephews¡­ of course I made them look like some type of new natural sickness. He no longer has an air for his clan. I think that he probably noticed what I have done to his nephews¡­ and I must say he has good self control¡­ if he does even one careless move against me¡­ he would already be dead¡­ but I guess him picking a fight with me is already considered a dumb move made by Danzo. He thought that he could just use his political power as an elder to put me down. Well that is too bad for him¡­


    He had tried a couple of times to poison my Clan''s water supply but I also already expected that so no one was hurt¡­ and poisoned 97% of his Root Ninja as a warning to him. So now the Root Ninjas numbers are around forty and most of them are at Genin or Chunin level. I mean I just think¡­ What would I do if I was in Danzo''s position¡­ and that is why I don''t even take showers in my house in case of acidic water. And I have sent all of my ninja clan members in missions so even if Danzo somehow kills my civilian clan members I wouldn''t suffer any huge losses. Also I have mosquitoes spying on each of my clan members in case of a traitor amongst them or any of them being in danger while outside of Konoha.


    Honestly this is like child''s play to me. People say that a cornered animal is more fierce¡­ and some even use it as a metaphor that a cornered enemy is more dangerous...


    But to me a cornered enemy is already dead¡­ in my eyes Danzo is already dead¡­ really the only thing keeping him and the Shimura Clan alive is the Hokage¡­ he might act recklessly if Danzo suddenly dies¡­ every Clan head knows the battle in the dark going on against me and Danzo. Of course there are some unspoken rules about not involving the rest of Konoha and causing a Civil War¡­ but honestly that sounds more like one of Konoha''s problems than mine¡­ so I already recruited most of the Clans in Konoha to my side.


    I have also already hired some strong rogue ninja to kill any Shimura Clan member and they will be rewarded quite nicely if they do so¡­ if Danzo decides to make the first move and make a move that has the slightest chance of causing a Civil War¡­ then he will just give me a reason to kill him. Honestly I am just waiting for the inevitable wrong move that he will make so I can get rid of him and then make the Shimura Clan a subordinate clan of the Inuzuka¡­ honestly that is their best outcome¡­ well it is their only outcome where they aren''t completely obliterated.


    Danzo really did a bad move¡­ he should have known that I already hold Konoha''s economy by the throat¡­ if I wanted I could put a little pressure in there and start choking Konoha economically.


    Monopoly is such a good thing (for me)¡­ especially when it''s not illegal. I would give Danzo and the Shimura Clan around a couple more months before they die out. Now I just should look out for any irrational moves from the Hokage.


    ....


    After giving some instructions to Tsume on how to do nothing and just keep the clan going how it is. I even made a couple of clones to be here and notify me if something happens and I will be hore in a flash¡­ literally¡­


    ¡­.


    Then I arrive at Konoha''s front gates ready to put another A Rank mission on my record. I really should start experimenting with the Byakugan when I return from this mission.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    Some of you might have been worried about the MC because maybe he is in danger because of Danzo¡­ and I just wanted to reassure you that he isn''t in danger¡­ he IS THE DANGER. The MC is the scary guy behind the scenes not the other way around. He has won every encounter he has had with Danzo. Now all that he is waiting for it is for Danzo to slip and then the MC will break his neck. Also we see that he betrayed Danzo without a second thought, and the MC won''t keep his promises (as expected) if it doesn''t benefit him. After all, giving Danzo a wood style iser would be dumb.

 Chapter 109 - The Noble

    Chapter 109


    Title: The Noble...


    ¡­


    -Hane (Noble Girl) POV-


    .


    .


    .


    While waiting for the Jounin that will be escorting us from Konoha I look at his student¡­ his name was Gay¡­ or Guy¡­ something like that¡­ and he is doing pushups¡­ that genin will be escorting us. I am not sure how effective this protection will be.


    Plus the important thing is that he dresses really weird¡­ with that green jumpsuit¡­ and weird bowl haircut¡­ I hope his Jounin Sensei isn''t like him¡­ after all...


    My gaze wandered towards my father who has brown hair and is chubby. The fat bastard¡­ he is trying to sell me to some killer¡­ he says that the other nobles can''t see it and that it is too late to do anything about it¡­ but this ninja already has more influence in the Land of Fire than the Daimyo¡­ which I doubt, after all what would a born and bread killer know about politics.


    But enough about that, I am sure that I won''t even be appealing to the Jounin¡­ I wore a normal white shirt and brown pants that aren''t attractive at all plus my brown eyes and brown hair with my glasses¡­


    I am not very attractive like my sisters but¡­ they have already been sold (married) away to other noble families for alliances. They are all into loveless marriages and just waiting to pop out babies, then they will start having affairs with some of the male servants or guards. Being a noble''s daughter is a really terrible existence, never being in control of your own fate or life.


    As my thoughts wandered into depressing subjects¡­ something strange happened¡­ before I could even look clearly.


    *fwosh*


    Suddenly a black flash appeared at the Konoha gate. Then a person appears out of it...He seems like a ninja¡­ I wonder who he is¡­ he isn''t overly handsome or anything like that¡­ but he has a smile on his face¡­ that just seems so pure. From the tattoos on his cheeks I bet that he is an Inuzuka.


    Then he goes towards my father¡­ wait don''t tell me¡­ then the ninja says. "Ready to start travelling whenever you are."


    Father just seems a little nervous and says. "Of course Inuzuka -sama."


    I just frown a little when I hear father speak like that. What a coward¡­ the way father said that, it made it seem like we are trying to ask for the ninja''s permission¡­ father shouldn''t be so nervous. After all ninjas are raised to be killers they aren''t exactly as good with money. Probably someone is using this Yami guy as a front while he manages things in the darkness¡­ I bet father never thought of that.


    ¡­


    Then  I get into the fancier carriage with just my maid in there and¡­ my father goes to the other carriage. After that we start moving¡­ and the ninjas seem to be running alongside the horses¡­ even though I have heard a lot of  stories about them during my eighteen years of life, it truly is amazing seeing them run at high speeds like that, they don''t even seem tired.


    Then after only a couple of minutes I hear my father say to a running Yami. "Inuzuka -sama¡­ I don''t want to be rude or anything but why waste energy needlessly. You can sit in the carriage with my daughter. Your student can come and sit in my carriage just in case of an attack¡­ also I am sure I can teach him or two about nobles and such things. I have complete trust in your ability to protect us no matter what."


    Can you be any more obvious father. The only thing that you have left unsaid was just go and take my daughter, while I suck you off.


    But then without any warning what so ever.


    The Inuzuka ninja called Yami just¡­ just appears inside the carriage sitting opposite of me¡­ how did he come inside¡­ the window is too small to enter and I didn''t hear the carriage door open¡­ I guess it must be a ninja thing.


    Since Yami is sitting opposite of me¡­ he is also sitting next to my maid and she seems very uncomfortable. Then the ninja Yami looks at me and smiles. Then he says. "So the journey to twelve days at the speed that we are travelling. So how about some games."


    Then he pulled something out of his pocket¡­ they were¡­ playing cards¡­ a ninja having playing cards on him just seems kind of strange. Well then I just look at him and ask. "Couldn''t you just cheat¡­ after all you are a ninja."


    Then Yami''s smile gets even wider and he says. "I promise on the name of the Sage of the Six Paths on all that is holy and right I shall never cheat."


    Well I guess we should play. I look at my maid who seems a little nervous, then I said. "She will be playing also."


    Yami just nods. "Sure no problem."


    I guess I could play games¡­ better than doing nothing¡­


    ¡­


    After some time I just stare at the cards. I can''t help but think... how was this even possible.


    After sixteen games we even started betting money after the 4th game¡­ I just look at our resident ninja¡­ we have played SIXTEEN games¡­ and he has lost EVERY single one of them¡­ his luck is horrible¡­


    I don''t even play poker¡­ my maid just learned how to play the game and EVEN she won money¡­ all of Yami''s money that he was concurrently carrying all 100.000 Ryo¡­ I just look towards the maid that has been my friend since I was young¡­ she is 90.000 Ryo richer¡­ I didn''t lose money, actually I won 10.000 Ryo¡­ but I was wondering¡­ is my maid some type of gambling genius¡­ I just squint my eyes and look at her body shaking and a happy smile on her face. She did just more than her yearly wage¡­ probably¡­ I am not really sure how much father even pays her..


    Then I look at Yami, unlike us¡­ he is the only one who lost money. 100.000 Ryo to be exact¡­ then he just looks at me and with an embarrassed face and scratching  the back of his head he says. "Can you buy me some food when we go to the next town¡­ I lost all of my money to you guys."


    A ninja¡­ just lost so much at poker¡­ he really didn''t cheat did he¡­ but his luck sure sucks¡­


    I just smiled at Yami and said to him with a familiar voice. "Sure Yami¡­"


    It is his money after all¡­ and I guess he isn''t such a bad guy.


    Then suddenly he just hugs me. Bringing his arms around my neck and our bodies touching together¡­ I could feel his body heat. "THANK YOU."


    I blushed a little but he couldn''t see it. Then when I came to my senses I told him.


    "Ok, ok stop now Yami."


    Contrary to my plea he just gives me a deeper hug and says with a whispering voice. "Nice people like you really do exist. You just rekindled my faith in humanity."


    When he says that,  I can''t help but wonder, he really is a good guy..


    I just¡­ hug him back a little¡­


    If I am going to be sold to  some noble¡­ It wouldn''t be so bad to...


    .


    .


    .


    .


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    (Do I really need to say what Yami is thinking¡­. Anyway we see that people have started to notice that Yami is an economic powerhouse.)

 Chapter 110 - Love?!?!...

    Chapter 110


    [1384 words without AN]


    Title: Love?!?!...


    ¡­


    -Hane POV- (Continuation)


    During the 7th day of our journey towards our destination we haven''t reached any city yet. So we stopped by a small lake to let the horses rest. We all set up tents¡­ well more like Yami and his weird student set up our tents since none of us knows how¡­


    Then after that we all ate, and when dawn came we went to sleep. The road had been long and tiresome so we all needed our rest.


    ¡­.


    When I woke up in the morning I saw that it was quite early¡­ I put on my clothes and went outside, then I decided to go towards the lake and just walk around.


    Then as I was walking towards the lake I could feel the chill of the cold morning air¡­ and when I arrived at the lake¡­ I saw Yami¡­ sitting on the grass all alone¡­


    When I saw his figure just sitting there alone with an expressionless look on his face¡­ I don''t know why but¡­ I just couldn''t help but pity him¡­ something about him just sitting at the side of the lake and throwing rocks in it¡­ not even trying to skip them¡­


    Even though his face showed nothing¡­ he had that hidden sadness on his pupiless dark eyes¡­ it was as if he was looking for something he can''t grasp. As if¡­ he will forever be alone¡­ a sense of true pity for him rose in my c.h.e.s.t.


    I instinctively wondered if I could do something about the loneliness that he is experiencing. That is when I decided to take action.


    I just walked normally. I could hear the animal sounds coming from the forest. Then as I got close to Yami he just turned around he just smiled at me and then I felt that his whole vibe changed. Like he was just¡­ simply happy. I even wondered if that lonely figure of Yami was a fragment of my own imagination.


    When I sit down on the grass right next to him. I can see the fog come out of his mouth as he says with a jovial tone. "Goodmorning  Hane¡­ I see that you are up early."


    When I see how jovial he is I just smile back. "Hey Yami¡­ watcha doing."


    I wonder if I was just seeing things and thought he looked sad.


    He just looked at me and said. "Nothing really. I am just bored."


    Then as I sat next to him as I jokingly said. "Well sorry for not being interesting."


    When I said that in a joking manner he just sighed and gently replied to me. "Don''t worry¡­ I know being born boring wasn''t your fault."


    I pout and slightly punch his shoulder. "Hey don''t say that about a lady like me."


    He just smirked. "Oh my lady¡­ where is your dress and your butler who is secretly in love with you. And where is the guy whom, you will have to f.o.r.c.i.b.l.y marry and have a horrible life with."


    I just look at him grimly, pushing down the


    hard truth that the joke had hidden behind its funny tone.


    "Your sense of humour is like your name¡­ very Dark."


    He just laughs a little at the pun and says. "And your jokes suck like a lady at a brothel."


    I just look at him confused by what he said.


    "What is that supposed to mean." I asked Yami out of curiosity, after all he is generally pretty knowledgeable and he is very blunt in explaining things.


    He just looked at me surprised when I said that. Then he answers with a weird look on his face. "Right you really are a lady."


    What is up with that look on his face as if he really is shocked by something. "What is up with that look on your face. As if you are mocking me."


    He just smirks in an evil way.  "Well my joke was an innuendo at how a wh*re in a brothel sucks a customers di*k to p.l.e.a.s.u.r.e him, then she could also..."


    But Yami still continues the explanation.


    "So my joke was supposed to convey some reason for you to be shocked an-"


    I stopped him from continuing anymore by just covering his mouth with both of my hands and said to him with a blush on my face. "Ok ok I get it you don''t need to explain anymore."


    As I am about to sigh of relief I feel two arms come around my neck¡­ and they drag me down¡­ on the ground¡­ on top of Yami. I can see his face, jawline and  dark eyes that when I look deep into them from this distance I can feel certain chills come all over me.


    My father told me to make him fall for me¡­ I don''t care about that¡­ but he will fall for me anyway. Because I want him to, he is gentle, loving and wouldn''t hurt a fly. I know that if he wasn''t born a ninja he would be a kind man, the type of man I wouldn''t mind falling in love with...


    So I lean in and kiss Yami softly on the lips.


    ¡­


    -Yami POV-


    I just look at Hane¡­ her face gets closer to me and I can already guess where this is going.


    Then she just whispered in a small voice. "I will be honest with you Yami¡­ my father told me-"


    I just zone out whatever she tells me. I have been with her for more that a week¡­ I am a control freak. I literally spy on whatever she is doing 24/7¡­ I already know about the situation.


    After she finished her whole speech then she started crying while saying. "I really do love you Yami Inuzuka."


    Thank god she finally got to her point I was about to fall asleep. I already know that too.  I am not some anime protagonist who can''t notice other people''s feelings. I haven''t had to seduce a girl in almost two decades. In my first life I was pretty good at seducing (lying to) girls but I thought that I had lost my touch since I couldn''t seduce Tsunade¡­. But I still got it¡­ also this was mostly to get rid of the boredom of the twelve day journey. I must say it was quite entertaining and made this journey less boring, maybe she might even be useful to me later down the road, though I doubt that possibility, she is just a boring girl without that much ambition, and her only above average looks don''t do her any favours either.


    Anyway better start acting now.


    I make a face that has a complicated look on. Then I force blood to rush to my cheeks to make them blush.


    Then with a slightly (fake) unsure voice I say. "I have never had a girlfriend, or done anything  so¡­ so I don''t know how to deal with this."


    Aaannnddd like expected she blushed a craze amount, ok this just got boring, she is like the easy level girl in a dating game. She is boring and mostly used to get players used to the controls and finish the tutorial.


    Also my rule with girls worked wonders in this situation. My rule is that, one has to always make the girls think I was pure mindless, nice and a vergin. The last thing is especially important to convey how important this relationship is to you and that you are a keeper. In my last life I made the mistake of being known as a guy who sleeps with a lot of women. So sometimes I had to go to great lengths to meet strangers that don''t know about my¡­ secret hobby.


    Then Hane just blushes and says. "I want to be your first and I want you to be my first."


    I just smile and say. "Of course... Hane."


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    (And now we are back at this sc.u.mbag MC POV¡­ we see his thought process again. From the girls perspective she thought that even though Yami seemed a little mysterious and like he had secrets it also added to his charm. That was his little game all along. In a way she was another test subject of the MC¡­)


    P.S: I am trying to write longer chapters now.

 Chapter 111 - Obviously NOT...

    Chapter 111


    .


    -Guy POV-


    .


    .


    As soon as I woke up and opened my eyes. I immediately started doing my youthful exercises of 300 pushups. Yami -sensei says that hard work never disappoints you, and Yami -sensei is a smart guy and he has never said something that is untrue or a lesson that is wrong. I could ask him about anything and he would have the right answer.


    ¡­


    Once I finished my morning training,


    I went to find Yami -sensei. He had told me about some new technique he will teach me. He calls it Diable Jambe or also known as Devils Leg, he says that it will suit my fighting style well. He says that if I could use this technique I wouldn''t have to use the eight gates so much.


    I went to check on his tent but he wasn''t there¡­ he usually is here¡­


    Then I went to look at the lake¡­ he wasn''t, he wasn''t there either.


    ¡­


    After some thinking on where Yami -sensei might be¡­  I went towards Hane''s tent, to see if he maybe is playing cards with her. Then as I went there I heard some weird m.o.a.ns coming from it¡­ I get closer and hear Hane''s voice come out of the tent, her tone was something I have never heard come out of her. "Yes Yami fu*k me harder."


    I ran away from there before they noticed me.


    ¡­.


    As I was running away I couldn''t help but think. ''Who knew they were like that¡­ Hane and Yami -sensei. I never knew. Then as I was running I arrived at the lake. I kept wondering if Yami -sensei will marry Hane -sama or something like that.''


    ¡­.


    Then during breakfast I ate my food very fast¡­ I was too embarrassed to be in their presence ¡­ but I still saw that both Yami and Hane acted like everything was normal¡­


    .


    -three days later-


    .


    .


    And just like that we finished this mission. We didn''t have any accidents down the road. Well Yami is known as one of the best living ninja. His medical skills are only rivaled by his skill in Fuinjutsu. He is one of the three people who ever learned to use the Flying Thunder God. It is true that Minato the Yellow Flash also knows the technique¡­ but Yami is better known and more famous than Kakashi''s teacher¡­ Minato. Also Yami -sama has a monstrous strength and endurance.


    ¡­


    Then as we travel a little away from the city where we finished our mission. Yami stops and looks at me and he extends his fist towards me. I immediately understood what he meant by it, we had already done this dozens of times before.


    I just nodded and we bumped firsts.


    *fwosh*


    Immediately. My field of vision changes and we are in a room filled with different seals. There are some robot arms doing something¡­ wait¡­ they seem to be making some type of soup?... don''t tell me this is where Yami -sensei cooks stuff.


    But then I noticed the chemical vials¡­  oh¡­ so this is sensei''s laboratory.


    We just go outside and I can''t help but feel a little curious. So I asked sensei. "Yami -sensei are you going to marry Hane."


    When he heard me say this he stopped on his tracks and looked at me as if analysing me. Then he sighed and said. "Well no I wouldn''t be marrying her. We did something that a.d.u.l.ts do but that doesn''t mean that mine and Hane''s fates are tied forever now. It was an a.d.u.l.t decision¡­ that is all that there is to it."


    Then sensei started walking and went towards the kitchens. I was a little surprised at his answer so I asked him again. "Why sensei¡­ don''t you love her."


    Then the next words that he said¡­ felt as if ice was climbing up my spine. For that split second I thought that I truly understood Yami -sensei when he said¡­ "Obviously not."


    But then maybe that was all a figment of my imagination as when Yami -sensei turned around he had a smile on his face with two bottles of Ice Tea¡­ the terrible tea that he makes.


    So to not drink that terrible tea I started sweating a little and with a nervous voice I said to sensei. "U -Um¡­ don''t we need to ehh¡­"


    I couldn''t think of anything reasonable so I said the first thought that came to mind. "I AM GOING TO DO 10.000 PUSHUPS SENSEI¡­ SO SEE YOU LATER."


    And I ran off¡­


    ¡­


    -Yami (MC) POV-


    I just smirk a little as I see Guy run off. I just look towards one of the corners of the hallway and say. "Tsume you can come out now."


    Then as if with an invisibility cloak it is taken off, the space there shivers and Tsume appears. I just look at her with a questioning look. "Really¡­ hiding. Are you stalking me."


    She just has a serious look on her face and says. "Stop kidding around Yami. Danzo has made his move."


    I just pour myself a glass of ice tea when I see that she has stopped saying anything I just tell her. "Oh sorry just was thirsty¡­ do go on."


    She just sighs a little and continues. "Well he made a surprising  move. The Shimura clan has fused with the Sarutobi clan. Well not really fused¡­ but all of the Shimura clan changed their last names to Sarutobi, so the Shimura clan is no more but now they might collaborate between each-other."


    She just looks at me unnerved as I still have my calm smirk on my face. She knows enough about me to follow my orders¡­ but not really enough to understand me... she isn''t smart enough to know that there is no real chance of collaboration between the two clans. She thinks of the Sarutobi clan as Hiruzen¡­ those are two different things. It is true that Hiruzen probably was behind this. But he will probably not have as much support from the Sarutobi clan from now on, after all he just did something that could potentially destroy the Sarutobi clan.


    They think that Hiruzen has literally put a ticking time bomb on them. After all now I have my sights on the Sarutobi clan. I am not going to pursue them, go after them or anything like that¡­ because it would be just a waste of time.


    After all they will soon go against each other. Also Hiruzen''s and Danzo''s relationship has most likely deteriorated even more. After all he just literally made Danzo seem like a b*tch on the eyes of the Clan Heads who are watching this¡­ generally it might seem like a good move but¡­ this is such a bad move on the long run for both of the sides. Plus there are also the kids¡­ when parents can act civil kids cant¡­ so that is where I come in...


    Then I just look at Tsume with a smile on my face and say. " Well now¡­ isn''t that interesting. I wonder how the kids will act when some of  their parents rage at home for the trouble that this will bring them. You just have to look at a child to know the situation at home is.


    Tsume finally understood a very small part of the big scheme that is really going on in here and her face just scrunched up as she said. "You really are cruel aren''t you¡­ Yami¡­"


    I just smiled at that. "Everyone is cruel in their own way, my little Tsume."


    .


    .


    .

 Chapter 112 - Team Three is complete.

    Chapter 112


    Title: Team Three is complete.


    ¡­


    -Kurenai Yuhi POV-


    I look at my friends sitting next to me, he is  Asuma Sarutobi. I look around and see all of the others seem excited to finally be able to become true ninjas.


    Them when the teacher came in. He looked like a pretty plain chunin. Then he said with his usual bored tone. "Today we will decide who your Jounin sensei will be. You will all be split into different teams. Anyway here it begins¡­"


    Then he took out a list and started calling the names in there. I mostly dozed out until it came our turn. "Asuma Sarutobi, Kurenai Yahi¡­ you will also be in a team with another genin who has already graduated Might Guy. Your Jounin sensei will be Yami Inuzuka."


    As soon as he said this I became excited. I couldn''t stop a smile from appearing on my face. After I got YAMI INUZUKA as my teacher. He is the most famous ninja of his generation. His legendary deeds are written in books and there have been countless books written about his life and the battles he took part in. My classmates all looked at me and Asuma with a little jealousy in their eyes. After all we already know that Guy has become quite well known as a skillful ninja, and he couldn''t do genjutsu, ninjutsu and could only do taijutsu. I have heard from my father who once worked with Guy and Yami Inuzuka that he had never seen such power¡­ Guy was able to create craters just by kicking the ground and of course he said Yami Inuzuka could literally punch a mountain and break it.


    I thought that those were just tales of his power but when I heard my father say that it was true I was quite shocked. Plus Yami -sama is still only eighteen. Then I hear Asuma say in a quiet voice. "I am going to be a great ninja just like Yami Inuzuka."


    I just giggle a little at him. I remember that he has been saying this ever since we started the academy. He once asked me what type of guys I like. I of course answered that I like awesome ninjas like Yami Inuzuka, since then he also says that he will be a ninja like Yami -sama¡­ he is so silly sometimes¡­


    Then as the Jounin  one by one came to pick their students I completely ignored the others and my eyes concentrated when one of them came in¡­ I had seen him in numerous pictures and drawings from books. He had an expressionless face and then he looked towards us. When saw us, he just smiled and waved towards me (and Asuma) but when he did so... I felt my heart beating faster and it felt like I had butterflies in my stomach¡­ he is quite handsome.


    Then Yami just says. "Team number three comes with me."


    ¡­..


    -General POV-


    Yami just takes his students and slowly walks with them towards the roof of the academy. While he was doing so he also asked. "So we will meet your other teammate on the roof. I am not sure if you are familiar with him but his name is Might Guy. He is quite enthusiastic and fun to be around, he also wears a green jumpsuit and you might have seen him run around Konoha with just his hands."


    a crush on Yami and to her wanting to learn some of the Genjutsu that he has¡­ in the end she couldn''t even get a single word out of her mouth.


    But Asuma just asks. "So I heard that you know a lot of Juntsu is that true."


    Yami just smiled and ruffled Asuma''s hair while saying. "Yeah I know quite a bit of Ninjutsu, Taijutsu, Genjutsu, Fuinjutsu, Kenjutsu, Bakijutsu and some Monk Techniques that I picked up during some of my missions. I would say that I know around 7000 Jutsu in total."


    When they heard this both Asuma and Kurenai were shocked. They weren''t sure if even the whole Konoha has that many jutsu. Kurenai even exclaimed. "That is amazing."


    When she said that Yami turned towards her and smiled. She immediately blushed and looked at the ground.


    Asuma was kind of excited too, after all he will be able to learn so many jutsu from him.


    Then as they are all walking together, Yami asked another question. "Anyway what are you guys best at and do you know any jutsu yourself."


    Asuma was the first to say. "Well I know how to use the D rank Fire Bullet jutsu and some E rank elemental jutsu together with the Transformation, Replacement and Clone jutsus that we learned in the academy."


    Yami with a smile nodded towards Asuma and said. "That is quite impressive for someone your age."


    Then he turned towards Kurenai and said. "What about you little lady, what are you best at."


    When Kurenai heard Yami address her and the familiar way he talked to her she couldn''t concentrate and just meekly said. "Uhhh¡­ I know some genjutsu."


    Yami patted her head also and said. "That is pretty good also. Someone having a talent in Genjutsu is pretty rare."


    Kurenai just blushes and she says. "I mostly learned it from my father."


    Then Yami seems to think for a little and as they were climbing the stairs to reach for the roof he said. "Ah I remember now. Your father is Shinku Yuhi right. He is an instructor in the Genin and Chunin Corps. I also heard that he is also pretty good with a sword."


    Kurenai felt a sense of excitement when she heard that Yami knew of her father and him praising her family like this made her happy. When she finally got the courage to finally say something they had already arrived at the rooftop and her words got stuck in her throat when she saw Guy doing push ups with one hand while screaming.  "If I can''t do 1000 one hand push ups I will have to drink the gross tea that sensei makes."


    Yami just smiled and as he didn''t notice what Guy had said a moment ago and he said. "Guy come and meet your new teammates Asuma Sarutobi and Kurenai Yuhi."


    Then he immediately jumps up by only using one of his hands. Then he comes in front of them and bows down while saying. "A P.L.E.A.S.U.R.E TO MEET YOU MY YOUTHFUL TEAMMATES MY NAME IS MIGHT GUY."


    Both Kurenai and Asuma were in shock at what just happened while Yami just had a smile on his face. In the academy Guy was just a little weird who used to wear a green jumpsuit. Now he is a weirdo with a green jumpsuit that also talks weirdly.


    .


    .


    A/N: Yes Kurenai does have a crush on Yami.


    P.S: Have been sick for the last couple of days... (not health problems... I just ate too much icecream and have been having stomach aches.????????????)

 Chapter 113 - When aiming for me… better pray that you dont miss.

    Chapter 113


    Title: When aiming for me¡­ better pray that you don''t miss.


    ¡­


    After Asuma and Kurenai''s shock at Guy''s weirdness Yami with a smile just says. "Well then let''s sit down and get to know each other."


    When they heard this they all sat down. With Asuma in the middle with Kurenai to his right and Guy to his left. Then Yami continues. "Well as I said let''s get to know each other. So let''s start with saying our name, hobbies, likes, what you don''t like and what are your dreams for the future. I will first show you how it is done. My name is Yami Inuzuka, my hobbies are making tea, reading books and learning new techniques. I like to use the techniques that I learn in original and cool ways. I also like my family and ninken Shiro. I don''t like boring and dangerous things. My dream for the future is to become Hokage."


    When they heard the last part they were all surprised, even Guy was surprised he didn''t know that his sensei wanted to become Hokage. But it wasn''t strange since he believed that his sensei could also become Hokage. Kurenai and Asuma were surprised too since becoming Hokage means that their sensei would be the future village leader¡­ and they would be just like the Sanin.


    Then next was Guy who said. "My name is Might Guy, my hobbies are repeated side-steps, and hitting focus mitts. I like super-spicy curry rice and curry udon, though I find it impossible to dislike food. I don''t particularly dislike anything and my dream for the future is to show the world that I can be a great ninja with just Taijutsu and I also want to be the strongest Taijutsu users."


    Then Kurenai and Asuma tell their own hobbies, things they like and dislike. When it came to their dreams Kurenai just blushed, looked at Yami and just said that she wanted to become a great ninja. Asuma was the same, he just looked at Kurenai, blushed and said that he also wanted to be a great ninja.


    Though when they finished and looked at Yami they saw him frown and they became a little nervous¡­ unsure of what they had done wrong. Yami just looked at them as his face relaxed and went back to being expressionless and now his smile was gone as he said. "Guy as expected you want to prove something to the world. I always knew that¡­ and now you also want to become the strongest Taijutsu Master, that is an amazing dream as expected of my protege."


    Guy was at first a little worried but when he heard the praises coming from Yami he couldn''t help as some tears started flowing down from his eyes. He had spent his whole life trying to prove that he could be a great ninja and Yami saying with such certainty that Guy was his protege made him very happy¡­ he can''t wait to go home and tell his father the good news.


    Then Yami looked towards Kurenai and Asuma with a neutral look on his eyes. "I don''t mean to be hard on you, or anything like that. But your dreams of becoming only good shinobi¡­ if they are so small I am not sure I can even teach you two. To me talent isn''t really the thing I am looking for in my students. What I am looking for is ambition. Guy has a great ambition and as his teacher I will give it my all to help him accomplish that dream of his.  I also fully believe in Guy''s ability and hard work that he will be able to accomplish his dream.


    But if you guys don''t have the ambition I am not sure you will reach far¡­ a good ninja could be said to be your every day Jounin. I don''t plan to put any effort into someone who will be able to achieve only that. I plan to make Legends not just some Jounin."


    When Kurenai and Asuma hear this they both freeze, shocked hearing their hero that they admired say that. Then Yami continues. "I will see you in training ground number seven. In there, I will see if you  are really ready to become Genin."


    *fwosh*


    And in a black flash Yami disappeared from where he was sitting. Kurenai and Asuma were shocked and a little down. Guy was happy but when he saw his new (possible) teammates faces he tried to reassure them that Yami didn''t really mean it like that.


    ¡­.


    During the same time in the Hokage''s Tower where the Hokage resides. Hiruzen is sitting in his room reading some recent reports. He didn''t like at all what he was reading. Some reports about some unrest along the borders. He can''t help but be afraid of the worst possible scenario¡­ of the 3rd ninja war starting. In the previous war many nations were left unsatisfied since there wasn''t  any clear winner and the animosity amongst them was running at a peak high. Skirmishes had already started amongst the border¡­ it seems like it will be inevitable¡­ another Ninja War¡­


    The first to say anything is Homura. He immediately just got to the point. "I think we should cut all ties with Danzo."


    As soon as he said that Koharu also supported Homura. "I agree¡­ with the small rumours that have started spreading around¡­ it wouldn''t be wise to associate ourselves with Danzo anymore."


    As soon as Hiruzen heard this he immediately ordered the anbu to leave. As they did so he still just looked at them and said. "What types of rumours."


    Koharu just sat down and with a calmer voice she said. "You would have an easier time explaining what type of bad rumours haven''t been circulating about Danzo. From kidnapping to working against the interests of Konoha and anything in between."


    Hiruzen knew that by saying ''working against the interests of Konoha'' she meant betrayal. He knew that Danzo would rather slit his own throat than betray Konoha. But the general population didn''t see it like that.


    Then even though Hiruzen was pretty sure he knew the answer he still asked. "And who has been spreading these rumours."


    Homura just answers with a slight fear in his voice. "Who do you think¡­"


    Koharu answered by saying. "Yami Inuzuka obviously. It seems like Danzo bit more than he could chew¡­ you better not make the same mistake Hiruzen. Yami Inuzuka¡­ even though he is young he is very dangerous both power wise and politically."


    As soon as Koharu said that. Homura as  if remembering something said. "By the way I am afraid that I will have to be the bearer of more bad news."


    Homura took out a letter with the Daimyo''s seal and read the letter out loud. "By the order of the Daimyo and the Ruling Council it has been decided that due to careless use of power, tax evasion, suspected kidnapping, suspected trafficking, suspected grave robbery, suspected collision with the forces who do not have the best interests of the Land of Fire. Danzo Shimura is therefore released of his duties as an elder and is not allowed to have any say in the Land of Fire''s or its territories. He is also to be kept under supervision nonstop during an investigation on his suspected crimes. And the investigator of the alleged committed crimes will be¡­"


    Homura stopped for a second to make sure that he was reading it right. "The investigator of the alleged committed crimes will be¡­ Yami Inuzuka."


    As soon as they all heard they understood what was really going on here.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    A/N: Yami is the investigator in this case. It''s like saying, the robery will be investigated by the one who was robed... so he will definitely find the rober guilty. Yami aslo doesn''t necessarily even need proof since the mideval system is VERY flawed.


    P.S: This also fans the conspiracy that Yami has a connection with the Daimyo.


    P.P.S: I moved back to my apartment (which is close to my college) two days ago and even took my little brother with me since he wanted to come... now mom told me that she is coming for a visit... SH*T... I have to clean all of the mess I have in my room and everything... DAMN IT... FU*KING SH*T...

 Chapter 114 - Danzo is….

    Chapter 114


    Title: Danzo is¡­.


    ¡­


    -General POV-


    The next day... Guy, Asuma and Kurenai were at training ground number seven. Then exactly on time for the meeting.


    *fwosh*


    In a dark flash¡­ someone arrives in front of them. It was Yami with a serious look on his face. While looking at them he says. "Ok now that we have introduced ourselves, I will tell you about your exam to see if you can truly become Genin."


    Yami takes out one bell and says. "I will make a water clone which has only 10% of my strength and I want you to work as a team and try to take this bell. If you do get the bell you pass. If you don''t you fail. You have 24 hours to do this starting NOW."


    Then Yami makes a Water Clone and gives him the bell. Then he himself disappeared in a black flash. But not before leaving a shadow clone behind also. In case of injuries.


    He himself went to meet with the Hokage. About Danzo''s accusations. Which he had no evidence of but medieval law sucks¡­ full of corruption and bribes, power in the hand of the powerful, while the weak are suppressed. Yami isn''t going to just change the system¡­ he is going to abuse the hell out of it¡­ then when he has absolute power he might change it...


    ¡­.


    While Yami was going towards the Hokage''s tower. Someone else was in a cell, guarded by dozens of Anbu.


    He was a one armed old man, he has a bandage around one of his eyes and he has an X shaped scar on his chin.


    He was Danzo Shimura¡­ one of the ex elders of the Konoha council. He has fallen from grace. Yesterday in his capture the last of the Root members got killed. His clan doesn''t exist anymore, his political power is gone, his physical power was long gone even before this. It all began when he gave Yami Inuzuka the Hashirama Cells.


    Yami made a lot of promises to Danzo¡­ he kept none of them. Even when Danzo asked him about it he just answered, he didn''t know what Danzo was going on about. He even added that he never made a promise to Danzo.


    That was the moment that Danzo decided to teach the kid a lesson that people need to keep true to their word¡­ and now Yami Inuzuka took everything from him.


    Suddenly outside the cell the sound of bodies hitting the floor could be heard. The door of the cell opened and a cloaked figure came in saying. "Well Danzo I must say I didn''t expect you to be in here like this¡­ how the mighty have fallen."


    Danzo looks up and under the cloak he sees yellow eyes with snakelike slits looking at him. Then Danzo says. "Why are you here Orochimaru."


    Orochimaru just looks at Danzo with a cold smile on his face as he says. "Why  to free you of course."


    Danzo thinks this through for a little while and his frowns as he says. "I know that Yami Inuzuka has been experimenting with the First Hokage''s Cells¡­ I just need you to find me some evidence of it, Orochimaru. If you do that I can promise you the dead body of Hashirama Senju so you can study it to your heart''s content."


    When Danzo says that Orochimaru''s eyes shine a little and he licks his lips in anticipation of this. Suddenly he started laughing.  "Hehehehehe this is good¡­ come with me. I am sure that Yami knows that you know this. So he won''t leave loose ends. He will definitely kill you if you stay in here."


    Danzo gets up and goes outside. As he does so he starts casually walking with Orochimaru. After all they are in no rush Orochimaru isn''t incompetent enough to be unable to stealthily take out some Anbu.


    As they were walking towards the outside of the T&I department everyone inside was already unconscious. Orochimaru is not an S Rank ninja for nothing. His knockout gas and different chemical weapons can be devastating to even the most Elite Ninja.


    Then when Danzo saw the light. He had a heavy heart thinking of what he will do after escaping from here and how he will be able to clear his name. But the thing he was mostly thinking about was.


    ''Yami Inuzuka has made an enemy out of me. For the sake of Konoha I should never let such a ninja exist. He was willing to come close to causing a civil war during these dire times.''


    As soon as Danzo got outside and into the light of the sun he saw something that shocked him. There were Hiruzen, Homura, Koharu and Yami Inuzuka and many other clan heads looking at Danzo.


    Then Yami just pointed towards him and with a steely voice he said. "As you can all see he accepted the escape when offered. That means that if he was confident in his innocence he wouldn''t do that. And I Yami Inuzuka, temporary appointed investigator of this case by the Land of Fire Daimyo. Have come to the conclusion that Danzo Shimura is found guilty¡­"


    Hiruzen just had a sad look as he saw his old friend just standing there with a shocked face. He already understood that this was all over. But then Yami continued and said. "I have also considered this very carefully and have decided to sentence you Danzo Shimura¡­ to death."


    Immediately Hiruzen turned around and looked at Yami. He saw that Yami had a cold face, portraying no emotion at all. Hiruzen was about to say something but he noticed that most of the clan heads were not surprised by the sentencing.


    *fwosh*


    In a dark flash with such speed that none of the people present could even follow¡­ Yami  decapitated Danzo¡­ and Danzo''s head flew in the air with eyes still wide open in shock.


    Orochimaru just looked at this and smiled. He had already made a deal with Yami Inuzuka and unlike Danzo he wasn''t dumb enough to take anything other than a payment up front.


    The Clan heads who were surprised and weren''t in the loop, were the Uchiha, Hyuuga, Yamanaka, Akimichi and Nara.


    The other clans were already in on the scheme, had absolute calm faces¡­ they had a secret meeting before this where Yami had informed them of his decision. But even though they didn''t display it. They were  surprised that Yami had decided to immediately carry out the execution.


    None of them even had the slightest thought of betraying him¡­ after all look at what had happened to the Shimura Clan.


    But for the first time they all saw¡­ just how scary and terrifying Yami Inuzuka could be.


    What the others didn''t notice though was Yami Inuzuka looking at Orochimaru with a cold look that dared him to betray¡­ it was a lesson¡­ no it was more of a demonstration of the consequences that would happen in case anyone got in his way.


    .


    .


    A/N: Yami is showing them his decisiveness. He has made an example out of Danzo to show that they shouldn''t take the risk and go against him. And him becoming the investigator in Danzo''s case is like saying to them that he will definitely not make things fair in a fight against him and he will use any means necessary.


    P.S: 17 CHAPTERS IN ADVANCE ON PATRE¨°N

 Chapter 115 - The Dangerous BOY...

    Chapter 115


    Title: The Dangerous BOY...


    ¡­


    -Hiruzen POV-


    It has been one week since that day. I still can''t get the image of my dying friend out of my head. In my own mind I have killed and cursed Yami Inuzuka countless times, but in reality I didn''t dare to act, we are dangerously close to another ninja war. I should try to negotiate with the other Great Hidden Villages.  I know that another war wouldn''t accomplish anything¡­ only more death and destruction. Weakening us all, during these times there would always be Danzo whispering about going to war and Konoha making the first move. I would never listen to him, even though he was smart Danzo wasn''t too good at strategic battles. He would consider the option of sacrifice way too easily.


    I knew that letting Danzo pick on Yami would be dangerous. I don''t know what was going on between them but they definitely had a deal going on. It seems like Danzo was on to something and decided like usual to try and use force against Yami by ruining his clan''s shop and other establishments owned by him. It seemed like that was the wrong move both from Danzo when he reacted like that and my part where I didn''t stop him.


    Sometimes I even wonder if I have truly been sitting in this chair for too long. Everyone seems unsatisfied... not just the other great villages¡­ even Konoha is craving for war. Are they all mad?... didn''t they learn from the 2nd Ninja War that fighting will only lead to our mutual destruction and weakening.


    And Yami Inuzuka that BOY... doesn''t he understand how much he will weaken Konoha with the last stunt he pulled. He had a mother, sister figure and his whole clan in here. Why can''t someone smart like him comprehend something like this. He took such a major risk for such a useless thing. His mind truly doesn''t have the maturity needed to understand things like this. He obviously doesn''t listen to me¡­ oh he does follow my orders but he doesn''t truly listen to them. He is an S Class ninja, he needs to understand that his actions have consequences.


    He also has my son Asuma in his team. The Sarutobi elders agreed to this, my influence and power as a Hokage has been slipping away, and no matter how, even though Yami doesn''t say anything¡­ if people looked deeper into it¡­ they will understand that he is just simply saying to my face that he will kill Asuma if I do something stupid. Accidents do happen and if Asuma died he wouldn''t even be blamed for it. During these times we need to be united¡­ not squabble amongst ourselves.


    I only know one person Yami will truly listen¡­ it seems like with the war just seeming around the corner I will need to prepare. I will need Jiraya back here. Minato also needs to be here¡­ and also¡­ Tsunade will need to come back from her grieving, Konoha needs her now more than ever.


    ¡­.


    I look at young Hachi trying to do the tree walking exercise¡­ he is such a good kid and so cute. I look at his cute little face concentrating. He is so cute¡­ and he is only six¡­ though technically I am not a lot older than him¡­ but I use transformation jutsu most of the time to seem older. After all if I want to buy something if they see that I am a kid they wouldn''t take me seriously¡­ I am nine and all that... and technically I am older than Hachi by just three years but that doesn''t matter. I am still his aunt.


    I see Hachi just looks at me while saying. "By the way Shizune¡­ you aren''t really growing a lot recently. I have almost caught up to your height."


    I just smile because I mustn''t be angry at my own nephew¡­ but inside my heart I can''t help but curse those abnormal Senjus¡­ he can already beat me at raw strength and his chakra reserves were always bigger than mine and the distance just keeps getting bigger. No wonder the Senju were the strongest clan in the Clan Warring Era.


    *slip*


    Hachi falls down from the tree again but before landing he does a backflip and lands on his feet. He then turned towards me, smiled and gave me a thumbs up while saying. "That was cool when I did that right."


    I just sigh a little and say to him. "You have been trying this for a whole day and you still haven''t got it down¡­ how do you plan to become a medic ninja or learn cool ninjutsu with bad chakra control."


    Though that is mostly because he has high chakra reserves for someone his age and he has already gotten up half of the tree. But there is no way I am telling him that.


    Then Hachi suddenly asks. "Has mother woken up yet."


    I just think a little and say. "Don''t worry she just drank too much yesterday night so she will be sleeping a little more."


    I just look at his face and see the worry in his eyes. He truly is a loving child, even though Tsunade doesn''t necessarily pay him attention to Hachi like any other mother would¡­ he still loves her with all of his heart. Even though I never expressed it¡­ I am disappointed in Tsunade¡­ Hachi is the proof of love between uncle Dan and her. So why does she ignore him so much. I have noticed that sometimes she even goes out of her way to not look him in the eyes. Hachi doesn''t say anything and acts happy all the time but I know that deep down he is sad and hurting.


    Then suddenly Hachi''s face brightened as he looked towards the side of the forest where our camp. Is¡­ even though he isn''t a natural sensor, Hachi has good hearing, eyesight and especially good smell.


    I look towards where he is looking and see Tsunade. She still seems a little sleepy. She has a small note in her hands and then she says. "There are worries over the raise of skirmishes around the border and Konoha has called me back."


    Then Tsunade has a conflicted look on her face, like she seems unsure of something. Finally she just sighs and says. "You will also be coming with me."


    Hachi just smiled and pumped his fist on the air as he said. "Yes I am going to join the ninja academy."


    I just looked at Hachi''s excited face and thought that since I already have the power of a Genin I will just return to Konoha and immediately graduate.


    But why is Tsunade just looking at Hachi with a worried expression on her face. Is something wrong¡­


    ¡­.


    -Yami POV-


    I am sitting on my chair in my personal office in the Clan Heads house.  I just look at the paper in front of me. It was all of the reports that the mosquitoes have relayed to me, it was written by the mosquito sage. Those little intelligent guys truly are great spies and they are literally spread all around the five great nation''s capitals and hidden villages. I have the best spy network¡­ I will soon spread them in major cities and all that. Soon I will have information that no other spy networks could hope to achieve¡­ I will have everything under control.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    A/N: Yeah the fated meeting between Yami and  Hachi will be happening soon.

 Chapter 116 - My son...

    Chapter 116


    Title: My son...


    ¡­.


    -General POV-


    In his lab under his own house, the lab is well lit and it has different human bodies in glass containers full of some strange green liquid, but Yami was just looking through a small glass canister as big as his hand¡­ which had two pupiless white eyes¡­ the Byakugan. He has got it, but he is planning on how to incorporate it into his body so it doesn''t disrupt the sharingan. Obviously fusion of the Sharingan and Byakugan is impossible because that is not how biology works. Even in a world where chakra exists.


    Yami then analyses his forehead planning to have another set of eyes put in there. But he will have to connect it with his brain  for him to be able to truly see. But that is a very dangerous procedure that could even lead to memory loss. Yami will first learn a way to separate the soul from the body in that way he will be his true self and won''t lose memories. He could just make a shadow clone and have him take all of his memories out, do the surgery and put the memories back. But Yami knows that after that it won''t be him anymore¡­ it will just be a clone of him with the same memories as him. Yami is someone who strives to be himself, never letting even a whole new world change him. Doing that would mean that it would be the same as having an identical clone. No one would notice but¡­ he himself would cease to exist. After all he doesn''t want his clone to be like him¡­ he wants to be himself.


    While thinking of solutions about this he can''t help but come to one conclusion. Living Corpse Reincarnation¡­ obviously he isn''t planning on leaving his powerful body that he has right now. His  body is immortal now, so he will just use the Living Corpse Reincarnation method to immortalise his mind. But that method is forbidden to all no matter what rank, he would have to go steal it but¡­ there is a high chance he would be caught.


    ''Better wait till I become Hokage, I can have any technique I want and no one will question me.'' Thinks Yami with a slightly dark smile on his face.


    ¡­.


    While on another place travelling towards Konoha is Hachi, Tsunade and a nine year old Shizune. They are walking at a normal pace, Tsunade told them that there is no rush and they can take it slow.


    Hachi had a smile on his face as he was happy. He had just mastered the tree walking exercise. Even Tsunade was a little surprised at this, after all the tree walking exercise needs good chakra control but it also needs the strength of a Genin to support the weight and all that. She was surprised that he was this strong physically.


    And even though she wasn''t drunk at all¡­ she felt happy, seeing Hachi jumping around and being so energetic was funny in its own way. She also couldn''t help but compare Hachi to a younger Yami. Yami was eight years old when he became her student. He always has a certain brilliance in him¡­ and those eyes¡­ that hunger for always wanting more. Back then he was like a second Orochimaru but nicer and actually cared for other people.


    She can''t help but smile a little at those memories. Yami always was a good student and a hard worker, though he did have that mischievous side of him, he was serious most of the time. That might have been because she spent time with Yami when he was training. Even though Tsunade is nervous to meet Yami, she also can''t help but feel a little melancholy when thinking about her only student who is alive.


    While Tsunade is thinking this, suddenly Hachi hugs her.


    "Hey mom c''mon teach me something else I am already bored out of my mind." Said Hachi with puppy eyes.


    Tsunade just sighs and takes out a small storage scroll from between her b.r.e.a.s.ts. Then she opens it and puts a finger on it.


    *poof*


    Then a small paper appeared out of it. Then Tsunade gave Hachi the paper.


    "Run chakra through this. It will show your elemental affinity and which jutsu you should concentrate on learning."


    Hach enthusiastically nods and takes the paper. Then he runs chakra through it. Tsunade and Shizune look at it with a little curiosity. Though Tsunade doesn''t show hers outwardly, but, she still wanted to know. She had never really been a good mother to Hachi¡­ she knows that. When she looked at him she always saw Yami''s eyes staring back at her.


    When she noticed where her thoughts were going Tsunade just frowned a little. While she thought. ''This is why I don''t like being sober for long periods of time¡­ well it hasn''t even been a day since I was sober¡­ but it''s already a day too much. I know I am not a good mother, I know what I did to my student, I know that I am a horrible human being. But¡­''


    She looked at Hachi''s paper that he was running chakra through. Tsunade was waiting to see her son''s affinity. Would it be the same as his father''s, after all he looks a lot like Yami, sometimes even acts like him during certain situations. But the paper just got a little wet¡­ he had water affinity¡­


    Tsunde just looked at it, and thought. ''What  am I doing¡­ he isn''t Yami¡­ he is just a child¡­ maybe I really should stop drinking and start acting like a mother¡­ I hope it isn''t too late though¡­''


    Tsunade smiles at Hachi. Which surprised him a little since his mother rarely smiled at him.


    "Your elemental affinity is water, just like the Second Hokage your great grand uncle. When we return to Konoha we can gain access to the water jutsu left by Tobirama. The Senju library has a lot of them all the way up to the S Rank Ninjutsu. Though you might have it harder to learn Fire ninjutsu, it doesn''t really matter that much. Better be good at one thing than mediocre at a lot of things."


    When Hachi heard this he smiled. "Yeah and I am going to make water dragons and all that. I will surpass even Tobirama and become THE GREATEST WATER STYLE USER THAT EVER LIVED."


    Tsunade just smiled at him, when she saw Hachi saying that. She just went towards him and hugged him.


    What they didn''t see though was a mosquito just looking at them. As soon as it saw this it immediately sent the information to its queen.


    ¡­.


    In another place on the Blood Swamp the Mosquito Sage was just meditating inside the bloody swamp water. When it opened its eyes she processed the information that she got.


    ''Should I tell Yami about this¡­ or not.'' She contemplated on her next action. But as soon as that thought came it immediately went away. She knew Yami pretty good, better than all of the other Blood Swamp creatures, since she was the one who taught him how to gather and train Sage Chakra.


    ''He would probably torture me to insanity while the other creatures watch¡­ just so he can make an example out of it¡­ yeah better tell him then.'' Though the Mosquito Sage with a little fear on her heart.


    Yami was eating with his mother and Tsume when a mosquito flew in. And landed on his finger. Then he just saw what the mosquitoes saw¡­ Tsunade with Shizune and¡­ a child¡­ with black hair and black pupiless eyes.


    ''WHHHAAAAAATTTTT''. Thought Yami with his thoughts in confusion. Immediately when he saw that he understood what was happening.


    *Fwosh*


    ¡­


    In a dark flash Yami appeared outside of Konoha. Then¡­ his skin turned red, his black hair lengthened it became spiky and it went up to his lower back. Under his eyes black markings had appeared.


    <BLOOD SAGE MODE>


    Tsunde was eight kilometers north. He didn''t have any Hiraishin markings there so he couldn''t teleport.


    *boom*


    A crater was created as he used all of his strength to kick off the ground. Running towards his destination¡­


    While doing this he couldn''t help but think¡­  ''That is my child.''


    For the first time... Yami''s mind was.... in shock....


    ¡­


    A/N: Yami is a little panicked... something that he simply dismissed has come back to haunt him. Just because he couldn''t keep it in his pants and he let his l.u.s.t for Tsunade effect his plan.


    P.S: Always wear a C.O.N.D.O.M my bros...

 Chapter 117 - Meeting of son and father...

    Chapter 117


    Title: Meeting of son and father...


    ¡­.


    -General POV-


    Yami was rushing towards the location without stopping, running at speeds that created sonic booms behind him. As if even sound was trying to catch up to him.


    He couldn''t help but think. ''How stupid of me to not have some mosquitoes spy on Tsunade. DAMN IT¡­ I was so concentrated on infiltrating the five Great Ninja Villages that I honestly didn''t even think about Tsunade at all. Back then when I came inside her, I forgot to use a contraceptive jutsu, I was too excited to think about that. I just thought that Tsunade would use it once she noticed what we did¡­ just how fu*king stupid is she¡­ DAMN IT...


    ¡­


    *Boom*


    In only nine seconds he had arrived at his destination. It was a dirt road surrounded by green forests. Though the road did have some carriage tracks.


    Yami just turned off his Sage mode and went back to normal.


    Both Hachi and Shizune have surprised looks on their faces, they were shocked that he appeared out of nowhere.


    Tsunade looked at him with wide eyes filled with shock and surprise. After a split second her ninja training comes to play and he calmed down. Still though Tsunade had a conflicted and despairing feeling in her stomach as she saw  Yami just looking as Hachi with calm but he had such a hard and concentrated look on his face that she has never seen him have.


    Yami then calmly looked at Tsunade. "Hello there Tsunade."


    He didn''t address her as sensei but that wasn''t what Tsunde concentrated on. What caught her attention was that even though he said that in a normal voice and with no expression on his face¡­ Tsunade could tell by his demeanor that Yami was angry. The way that his eyes moved was in an instinctual way of expressing anger. Yami could always hide this little instinct, him expressing it like this meant that he was REALLY angry.


    But Tsunade with a calm look on her face and an even calmer voice said. "We should catch up¡­ when we go back to Konoha."


    As she said that, Yami understood the true meaning of her words¡­ it was¡­ ''Not here in front of them. We will talk back in Konoha.''


    Yami looked calm as always, then he just nodded and said. "Right¡­"


    He forced himself to calm down and he did what he is good at¡­ he just bottled up his emotions. Then he turned towards the kids and smiled. "Hey there kids my name is Yami Inuzuka. Tsunade''s ex student, nice to meet you."


    Shizune seemed a little shy at this, but Hachi had no problem as he replied with a smile on his face. "Hi my name is Hachi Senju. Do you know any water style jutsu."


    Yami still had a smile on his face. "Of course I know quite a bit of them. If you need any help just come ask me. Why is your elemental affinity water? Or is it just because you like water ninjutsu? Or maybe you want to be like Tobirama Senju? Also are you hungry, I usually keep food in storage scrolls. I cooked it myself. It''s pretty good. I have anything you want from eggs to steak, just ask for any food and I could go back to Konoha and get it for you¡­"


    As Yami continued rambling on. Tsunade just cleared her throat and Yami immediately stopped. Tsunade was surprised seeing Yami like this, after all she has never seen him act like that. He always seems like he is in control.


    The six year old Hachi just looks at Yami questionably and asks. "Wait, if I want some food from Konoha you would be able to get it. How would you do that."


    Yami just smiled and took out a kunai from his kunai pouch. The kunai looked normal except that it had an encryption with strange seals in the form of a flower or something like that. "This is the Hiraishin Seal¡­ it allows the user to teleport to places he has marked."


    Hachi''s face just brightened with stars in his eyes. "That is so cool! You must be the fastest ninja then. So that means that we also don''t have to travel. Also would you be able to take us to Konoha immediately."


    Yami just laughed a little. "Ahahaha I am not actually good enough at it, to be able to teleport people together with me."


    Hachi just sighs. "That must really be nice then. Not having to walk anywhere."


    Yami just smiled. "Yeah it really is convenient."


    ¡­


    -Yami POV-


    I just looked at my own kid¡­ Hachi¡­ someone created by me. My soul created his¡­ he was not supposed to exist. His existence is proof of how easy it is to mess with the canon timeline. I have been trying¡­ well more like I have been guiding the events to have some general direction that I can predict. Knowing the future is my extreme advantage that I have. If I didn''t have this future knowledge I would just open up a shop as a civilian and use an absurd amount of money to hire a Chunin or Jounin rank ninja to teach me chakra and things like that.


    While looking at Hachi I can''t help but see the resemblance he has to me. The only things he really has from Tsunade''s side is the feminine look.


    When I finally calm down my different emotions like panic, uncertainty, familiarity and think like that I can finally think clearly and analyse myself.


    "Anyway Yami -sensei, what kind of cool techniques will you teach me. Mom doesn''t teach me anything except some tree walking and leaf sticking exercises." Says Hachi, frowning while saying the last part.


    I just looked at him with a smile still on my face. "You don''t have to call me sensei¡­ that just makes me sound old. Anyway you should definitely concentrate on your water ninjutsu at the start. You don''t want to start expanding your jutsu repertoire at such an under developed age. You need to grow your chakra first and then start learning ninjutsu. So your mother only teaching you those exercises is a very good start."


    Hachi just looked a little down when I said that. "But it is all so boring."


    I just laughed at him. "Hahahah¡­ you need to start crawling before you can start running Hachi. But¡­ I still have a more exciting technique that I can teach you. Anyway I know a lake close by that is, a good place as any to learn water ninjutsu."


    I notice Tsunade frown a little and say. "We are still going towards Konoha and at the pace we are going at will take at least another say to arrive at our destination."


    This b*tch¡­ does she have a death wish or something.


    I just turned towards her. "Well you and Shizune could go at a faster pace like ninja while me and Hachi separate from you and we visit the lake. He could learn a lot there with the high amount of water helping him use ninjutsu easier and learn them faster¡­"


    Even though I said that with a smile on my face. Tsunade saw the look in my eyes¡­


    ¡­


    A/N: I deleted and rewrote this chapter so many times. I wanted to portray a nervous, excited Yami, now he had a son, a true family.... but he also knows how this world is.


    His cold and calculating thought process is telling him something dark while his emotions are telling him that he should still be a good dad to Hachi even if he could grow up to be his adversary due to how the mentality of this world is. If he grows up to go against him then he will kill Hachi then, but that is also a risk. He is currently in a conflict on how he should feel¡­ or even how he should act as a father really. Yami doesn''t do evil things just to be evil¡­ he had a reason and a motive.


    But he still knows that there are people like Itachi who would massacre his family for the village. He also knows that even Kaguya got betrayed by her sons.


    P.P.S: 20 Chapters in advance on patre¨°n.


    P.P.P.S: Yami won''t suddenly just become a nice guy... nor will he care for Hachi. It later depends how this situation develops.

 Chapter 118 - First Day of training

    Chapter 118


    Title: First Day of training


    ¡­


    Tsunade just looked at me with an unsure face but she relented and just said. "Ok¡­ but don''t waste too much time on the lake."


    I just nodded and Hachi jumped up in happiness while screaming. "YEAHH."


    ¡­.


    Then after that we separated going towards our different destinations. Tsunade and Shizune went towards Konoha while me and Hachi went towards the lake nearby.


    While walking we talked about different things, mostly about ninjutsu and training. I noticed that Hachi was glad to have someone else to talk to now. He is family to me¡­ I definitely don''t know how to feel about that.


    It is true that my mother in this world, Misune¡­ I never truly saw her as family or anyone important to me. Since she birthed me in this world I will let her think of me as her son¡­ that is my gift to her, ignorance is truly a bliss. I never understood, being grateful to someone. If someone risked his life for me, that I should risk it for them¡­ that just isn''t logical to me. If someone risked his life for me, I would feel grateful but I wouldn''t do the same or necessarily, or even help him in any way if it doesn''t benefit me. After all they chose to risk their life for me, I didn''t ask for it.


    Anyway while I think about my son, I can''t help but contemplate if I should kill him now or when he becomes a genin, I will just make it look like a mission gone wrong. But¡­ whenever I think about killing Hachi and seeing his dead body I feel displeased.


    He might develop into my true weakness later¡­ for the first time in quite a while I am unsure about the next step that I should take. He was truly an accident, I believe even Tsunade didn''t kill him in the w.o.m.b as soon as she noticed that she was pregnant, was because she thought that it might be Dan''s baby. I never hold any naive thought that Tsunade would do it just so she can keep our baby because she loves me or anything like that. She can''t see past our age difference¡­ and she met me when I was young so she most likely sees me like a little brother¡­ than a lover candidate.


    I just look at Hachi with a smile on my face. ''Should I kill him or not, he is definitely someone who has a chance to develop into my true weakness¡­. I will decide that later, a decision like that needs to be planned and contemplated before I decide if I want to do it.''


    ¡­


    -Hachi POV-


    Yami really is cool, he knows so much about Water Jutsu but at the end he said. "But before that we will need to build a strong foundation of knowledge and strength, before you can start learning ninjutsu, because that will allow you to learn things of a higher level faster. That is why no one starts learning strong ninjutsu from the beginning. We will stay here for one week and during that time I will teach you to the best of my abilities."


    The first thing he taught me was the transformation jutsu. Yami showed me the handsigns slowly and told me how the chakra should flow through them. I was able to learn the transformation pretty easily. Even though I would like to say that I learned it all by myself, that isn''t true Yami made it possible. He would tell me when I was moving my chakra wrong, it was as if he could see my chakra. When I asked him about this, he just said that he was a sensor and the close range allowed him to sense chakra in a very detailed manner.


    He really is a great teacher.


    ¡­


    After I learned it, Yami just said for me to continue practicing more with the technique, then he went away somewhere.


    When he did that, I practiced the technique for another twenty minutes and I got bored of it. So I just lied down at the side of the lake. I already learned the technique, why would Yami say that I study it again when I already learned it.


    ¡­


    When it got dark he came back and saw that I wasn''t practicing. He just frowned and said. "I see¡­ that is disappointing."


    I just looked at him with a questioning look. "What do you mean by that?"


    Yami''s face just went back to normal. He made a big white camping tent with the Inuzuka symbol on the front. Then he just invited me inside. When I entered I saw that it had two beds and a wooden dinner table for two people. The floor was hardened earth, probably some jutsu. Then I look up and see some strange lamp structures with a seal inside of them that makes light.


    *poof*


    A pot of soup appeared in his hand. I see that he even has forks and all that. This definitely isn''t how camping is supposed to be.


    I didn''t complain and just sat down on one of the chairs. Then Yami brought out the plates and he filled them with soup. Then in an uncomfortable silence as we ate. I couldn''t wait anymore and asked Yami. "Uhhh Yami¡­ you seem angry did I do something wrong."


    Yami just looked at his plate with soup, and said. *sigh* "I don''t think you should be a ninja Hachi."


    When he said this I got a little angry and narrowed my eyes. "What is that supposed to mean¡­ Yami."


    Who is he to decide what I should or shouldn''t be. I mean I learned the transformation jutsu in just a day. I think that is pretty good. After all, Shizune always said that I would learn these techniques when I am in the academy.


    Yami just looked at me in the eye, and for the first time since I met him, he had a cold look in his eyes. "When I said that I will go away for a little hunting¡­ I was actually watching you. You gave up only after twenty minutes of practicing. You have potential to be a strong ninja¡­ but that is it¡­ you don''t have the drive or the will to really put your money where your mouth is."


    I just looked at him with even more anger. What does this have to do with money¡­ and what does the last part of what he said even mean, eating money¡­ that is ridiculous. I just tried to keep down my anger and said. "What do you know¡­ you have only known me for one day¡­ plus I already learned the stupid transformation jutsu. What am I even supposed to practice anymore."


    Yami''s eyes again get that disappointed look in them when looking at me. "Listen Hachi¡­ you were born lucky by being a Senju and having big chakra reserves with a pretty strong body. But if you don''t have the will to train endlessly for hours, you will not become anything great and most likely die a meaningless death¡­ just like most of the Senju clan did."


    When I heard that my anger exploded. "WHAT IS THE HELL. THE SENJU MADE THIS ERA HAPPEN. THEY MADE KONOHA. THEY ARE THE GREATEST CLAN TO EVER LIVE."


    Then I angrily stormed out of the tent. Who does he think he is, insulting my Clan like that in front of my face. He should be thankful to the Senju¡­ everyone should¡­ they created Konoha. They all died for Konoha and it''s people, they died an honorable death... forever remembered as heroes.


    Out of anger I just ran into the forest.


    The Senju sacrificed their lives for generations for Konoha.... and this is the thanks they get¡­


    ¡­


    A/N: Hachi is still only six years old so don''t expect him to make great decisions or think things through a lot. Also what is Yami planning by saying that to Hachi.


    Also Hachi isn''t Yami so don''t expect him to always act like Yami.


    P.S: I know Hachi might not seem likeable to everyone currently reading. But don''t forget he is only SIX. Even Yami at that age.... ok Yami was a reborn person so not a great example...????????????


    But in his first life Yami also wasn''t anything beyond a little devious and scheming at that age. Though he already had that cold perspective on things even back then. But as I already said Hachi isn''t Yami... they are two different people.


    ....


    (I have a video of a journalist criticising hent*i watching people, but it was discovered that he himself watched Hent*i)????????????????

 Chapter 119 - The inevitable training montage...

    Chapter 119


    Title: The inevitable training montage...


    ¡­


    -Yami POV-


    I just see Hachi, my son run out of the tent. As expected, he got offended way too quickly. But I guess it should be expected of a six year old. Though he will still learn his lessons, that is my job as a father after all.


    Then I just stealthily followed him as he was running. Well trauma is the best teacher in my opinion, that is how I learned most of the important lessons.


    Then as Hachi was running, when he ran quite far away and was a little out of breath, a big brown snake I had under a genjutsu, the snake was as thick as a tree and as long as a two story house. The big snake was hiding in the mud when Hachi ran past it and didn''t notice that it was there. The snake under my genjutsu immediately¡­


    *fwosh*


    The snake prowled towards Hachi.


    "Ahhhh." Screamed Hachi as the snake slithered and wrapped its body around Hachi and started using force on its grip that it had around his body. His bones started cracking a bit as Hachi just


    screamed even louder. "AHHHH HELP."


    <Shunshin>


    *fwosh*


    *slap*


    I just slapped the head of the snake and the head...


    *burst*


    Exploded like a watermelon. The snake body without a head loosened his grip and Hachi fell on the ground with a traumatised look on his face. He also seems to be breathing heavily and taking deep breaths.


    I just looked at him coldly with my eyes shining as the full moon behind me. With Hachi looking at me with a terrified look on his face while I continued saying. "The world doesn''t consider anyone special. Just because you were born into the Senju there is no stopping you dying from something like, slipping on a banana peel and breaking your neck. You are not special, no one is and everyone can be killed. Take that lesson to heart¡­ Hachi."


    Then I start walking away towards the tent leaving Hachi behind. As I was walking I just continued saying with a cold voice. "Everyone can have a little luck and be born in a good clan. But they all die the same when a kunai is stabbed in their skulls. Even a Kage can be killed by a kunai. So if you don''t want to die by some wolf or some other animals¡­ follow me back to the tent. Remember you chose to be trained by me so don''t start complaining now."


    ¡­.


    When we return to my tent we go inside and sit down on the table again. We didn''t talk at all, he still had a horrified look on his face, kind of disappointed that he hasn''t already adapted to it or suppressed his feelings to make himself calm down. I wonder if he will be able to use wood style in the future. I am definitely experimenting on him and deleting his memories. After all when I i.m.p.r.e.g.n.a.t.ed Tsunade I had Hashirama Cells in me plus Tsunade being a Senju it would definitely help.


    ¡­.


    Finally he is how I wanted him to be.


    I am just sitting on a tree branch watching Hachi walk on water while fighting one of Water Clones. He is doing pretty good for himself. True a water clone has 5-10% of my power and it is mostly used as a distraction or trap by most ninja due to the liquid properties of the water, when the clone it is stabbed it has a sensation kind of like the same as stabbing a human, use it with some genjutsu to make the water that flows from the clone red like blood and then you have a pretty realistic distraction.


    Even though the water clone is pretty weak in a fight, your everyday Chunin would have a hard time fighting against my water clone.


    Then I look into the fight and analyse it.


    Hachi makes some water clones for himself using the water of the lake he is standing on. He makes 10 water clones and I can sense his chakra levels plummet to around 20% left. He has Genin chakra amount, pretty good for a six year old. But I must say, wasting your chakra making water clones is quite dumb. Though I am a little pleased that he can do the water clone jutsu with just one handsing. But he still should have used all of the handsigns of the jutsu so he can lessen the chakra needed for it.


    And then Hachi and his water clones run towards mine, and I notice one of his clones go underwater. My clone has a calm look on his face and just kicked two of Hachi''s clones obliterating them. Then Hachi together with all of his clones jumped towards my clone trying to beat him with numbers. Then suddenly Hachi¡­


    *fwosh*


    Replaced himself with a water clone that he had underwater and tried to grab my clone by his ankles.  But my clone dodged that by jumping up, but Hachi just smiled at this and threw a kunai towards the clone. The clone just takes out his own kunai to deflect and¡­


    *ching*


    He deflects it but hidden¡­ in the shadow of the first kunai was a second one, my clone''s eyes widened a little but still my clone had around 5% of my speed and perception so that was enough for him to also deflect the other kunai too. And as the clone is about to fall back one the ground all of Hachi''s water clones attacked my clone, but my clone landed back on water and the other water clones tried to hit him but he just dodged and¡­


    *fwish*


    With a slash of his kunai he ''killed'' all of the clones. But suddenly from underwater¡­


    <Water Style: Water Ball>


    *boom*


    A water giant ball jumped from underwater and hit my clone shredding him apart¡­ dispelling it. Hachi just slowly came above water he didn''t use water walking but he just floated above water breathing heavily¡­ I sensed that his chakra was almost all exhausted bordering on chakra exhaustion. He couldn''t even use water walking anymore.


    I could see it now¡­ the look that Hachi had when he fought. That cold calculating hidden in his eyes¡­ as expected from my son. Though it is kind of disappointing that he is only like that during fighting, out of combat he is just goofy as hell. I guess he still is a Senju no matter how much he is my son, but being goofy isn''t a problem as long as it''s not during combat. But he is my son, not my clone, so we being different is inevitable. But he would probably be terrible for Anbu or Spy missions.


    I just sigh and then go towards Hachi, I walk on the lake and when I arrive close to Hachi¡­ and.. he is sleeping. I just smile a little and carry him piggyback. During this week I have taught him how to fight opponents stronger than him and how to perfectly use the basic three techniques that are learned in the academy. He has a certain bull headedness that allows him to train a lot to achieve his goals and since the snake incident he¡­ has a goal to surpass all of the Senju in history. That is honestly a good goal, but he doesn''t have even the slightest comprehension on why Hashirama was called the God of Shinobi. True that Hiruzen is also called that but comparing Hirazen with Hashirama is like comparing a mouse to a dragon. Most likely Hachi will try to surpass Hiruzen since he will think that he is around the same strength as Hashirama, or maybe just a little below it, but still around somewhere there.


    I just sigh and¡­


    *fwosh*


    <Hiraishin>


    In a dark flash, the scenery in front of me changes as I am back to Konoha. I just make a shadow clone without having the need to use handsigns, I overcame that hurdle a long time ago. The clone takes Hachi of me and he¡­


    <Shunshin>


    ¡­ goes away¡­ he will take Hachi to one of my clinics to rest. I have another problem to take care of.


    I just take a deep breath and¡­


    My senses expanded¡­ finally I locked in who I wanted to find¡­ Tsunade¡­ and since this is Konoha I have Hiraishin markers all around the village.


    *fwosh*


    I just appeared at the Senju Clan compound, more specifically I was at one of their hot springs.


    Well when in rome¡­ I just got rid of all my clothes, tied a towel around my midsection and went towards the hot spring where Tsunade was. It seemed like she was all alone in here. I entered the hot spring and watched Tsunade relaxing in there, all by herself. I just sigh at this, she looked towards me with a calm look, she already knew I was here, I didn''t try to hide my presence at all.


    I also had a calm look on my face and just said. "Well hello there Tsunade -sensei."


    A/N: (1550 words without AN.)


    Even with the sharingan you can''t learn to be a good parent. -Yami


    P.S: In his own way Yami is trying to be a father to Hachi. Hachi will also never really catch up with the MC... he can''t even keep up with Yami''s growth....


    P.P.S: Hachi might seem a little strong now. But in reality he is weaker than a chunin. Yami''s training was optimized perfectly for him. Yami''s water clone which only had 5% of his stats also didn''t use any Jutsu and the water clone also wasn''t going for the kill. Hachi just used a lot of underhanded methods to win. That was what Yami was trying to teach him. In reality the Clone didn''t go all out so it was more as a high level genin in fighting power. Also Yami is a Godly techer, with his sharingan and medical knowledge plus with training Guy he can scedule a perfect training method as long as he is around.

 Chapter 119 - DISCORD

JOIN DISCORD. ITS AMAZING NOW. WE CAN DISCUSS HENT-... I mean stuff we like... which might be h*ntai...????????


    discord.gg/M9hghrm


    NEW CHAPTER IS PREVIOUS TO THIS. I JUST DELETED AN OLD ANNOUNCEMENT TO MAKE THE CHAPTERS MORE CLEAN.

 Chapter 120 - Talking

    Chapter 120


    [1512 Words without AN]


    [BEFORE THE DISCORD CHAPTER, THERE WAS A NEW CHAPTER. I JUST DELETED AN OLD ANNOUNCEMENT WHEN I PUT THE DISCORD CHAPTER HERE. Some were confused by that and thought that there were no new chapters yesterday.]


    Title: ''Talking''


    ¡­


    -General POV-


    Tsunade just looked at Yami as he entered the hot springs. She could see his body rippling with compact muscles, trained to 100%... she hadn''t even thought that it was possible but he has achieved the perfect muscle & fat ratio. Also with her experience in medical ninjutsu, the way his muscles twitched when Yami moved she noticed the overwhelming amount of pink muscles.


    ''His medical knowledge and medical ninjutsu  has already surpassed mine.'' Thought Tsunade with a feeling of shock blooming inside of her.


    After all, she has spent countless time and had the Senju library together with notes from her grandfather and grandmother, for Yami to surpass all of them at only the age of eighteen, that shocked Tsunade to the core.


    Yami just looked at her with a nonchalant look on his face. He just relaxed in the hot spring. "You know Tsunade¡­ I always liked to keep things in control, I don''t like not knowing things. I thought that you knew how to use a contraceptive jutsu or something like that."


    Tsunade had already prepared for questions like this from Yami¡­ though she didn''t expect him to be so calm about this. He is talking about this complicated situation as if he is talking about the weather, Yami even has the audacity to look bored while asking these things.


    Tsunade also just stared back at Yami thinking about the messed up situation that they are in right now. She even felt a certain nervousness raised inside of her as she just looked at those cold eyes of his, and finally she got the courage to answer him. "I didn''t want to kill a baby, no matter how you put it this would be like taking a baby''s existence from them, who am I to decide that. Also the Senju clan needs an heir anyway¡­ so I kept him."


    Yami for the first time since this meeting started just smiled at Tsunade. "Truly a good story¡­ but you can tell me the truth now."


    Tsunade felt shocked when she saw how Yami saw through her lie immediately.


    ''Is he just guessing.'' Thought Tsunade, while trying to keep herself from giving any information to Yami from her body language.


    Her body didn''t give out anything so she tried to keep to her story. "I don''t know what you are getting at Yami. But that is the truth, if you decide to believe it or not is up to you."


    The amused smirk on Yami''s face unnerved Tsunade to no end.


    "I suppose it is only to be expected. You have my pity." Said Yami with the smirk still on his face. While coal black eyes looked at Tsunade.


    She felt as if he already knew everything just by looking at her with his dark eyes as Yami continued saying. "Do you know what classifies as ''truth'' or ''lies''."


    Tsunade just frowned at this.


    "Where are you trying to go with this Yami." Said Tsunade with an impatient tone in her voice.


    "Just humor me¡­ will you Tsunade. What does ''truth'' and ''lies'' mean to you?"  Asked Yami in a mysterious tone, that creeped out Tsunade to no end. Even though she felt a little fear from Yami''s words she didn''t display it on the outside.


    "They mean what they are supposed to mean." Answered Tsunade with a casual voice that she was faking.


    Yami still kept smiling at her. "There is no such thing as ''truth'' or ''lies'' in this world¡­ there never has been. There are only plain, hard facts."


    "And?" Said Tsunade as her mask started to slowly crack a little and the fear started appearing on her face.


    "And yet, all beings who exist in this world take only those ''facts'' that are convenient to them, and take them to be the ''truth''. They do so because they know no other way to live. However, for those powerless beings that make up the majority of this world it is those ''facts'' that are inconvenient for their own self-affirmation that make up the real ''truth''." Said Yami with an amusing toned voice and then suddenly his face turned back to his cold look. "That is why when you say to me your reason, you say that it is the truth, even you yourself might believe this but now¡­ tell me the facts and how it is."


    Tsunade has to physically try to stop her body from shaking in fear as she understands that Yami has already seen through her facade.


    Even while Tsunade was  having this state of panic Yami simply said. "You can start talking now."


    Tsunade had to forcefully calm herself down. This was an unpredictable situation to her. Yami was too knowledgeable about the situation.


    ''He most likely knows what happened already and what my thought process was back then, when I noticed that I was pregnant. I was not even thinking of my clan or even Yami¡­ I was thinking that it was my love given form¡­ a physical representation of my love for Dan¡­ but instead it was a child born of sin. Hachi Inuzuka¡­ is truly the son of Yami Inuzuka. At first I didn''t want to believe it but the blood tests that I did and everything else points towards Yami.'' Thinks Tsunade, while diving into her memories.


    She just looks at Yami while saying. "Hachi might have been a mistake but¡­ he is still my son and I plan to raise him like it."


    "Well¡­ I can''t say you have been doing a good job at it can I¡­ with your drinking and whoring yourself around." Said Yami with a mocking tone in his voice.


    But as soon as he says this Tsunade gets angry and rushes towards him, her towel falls off, and she is running n.a.k.e.d, towards Yami. She punched him in the face. "You think of me as some cheap whore you fu*king bastard."


    *boom*


    But to her surprise her fist with all of her power behind, is blocked by Yami''s palm. Then she uses her other hand and¡­


    *boom*


    Her punch this time, landed on his chin¡­


    *fwosh*


    ¡­ and Yami''s body was sent flying high in the air. Tsunade jumps high and appears above Yami. Then she clasped her hands together and¡­ hit Yami on his stomach as he was sent barreling into the ground.


    *boom*


    Then Tsunade landed on the ground and started walking towards Yami. Ready to plummet him some more, she is sure that he can handle a little bit more, if he can''t she will just heal him and plummet him all over again.


    "You shouldn''t forget who taught you all of your tricks Yami." Said Tsunade with an angry tone.


    Then as she got close to the crater she saw Yami sprawled in there looking at the sky, it seemed like he had no injury on his body and no bleeding, that surprised Tsunade. Yami just looked at her.


    "Weak." Was all Tsunade heard before.


    *burst*


    The next thing she felt was something piercing her c.h.e.s.t¡­ she turned to look behind her and saw a n.a.k.e.d Yami just smiling at her.


    "Weaker than expected." Said Yami as he ripped out his arm that was going through Tsunade''s c.h.e.s.t. Tsunade''s body fell to the ground like a puppet with its strings cut off.


    She immediately activated the seal in her forehead that covered her body in Fuinjutsu lines that started healing her injuries. Though this would take quite a while to heal since Yami deliberately obliterated a part of her spine to temporarily paralyze her.


    "Now that we can talk normally again, I will start first by saying¡­ you are and will be a horrible mother. Hachi will never achieve his full potential with you raising him. But don''t worry, I am not like some other men who want a descendant to for their legacy to live on or some dumb sh*t like that. You can keep what happened between us hidden forever, it will be our little secret. Hachi can learn of it when the time is appropriate, but he will train with me and I will teach him how he should act and all that. You can continue your drinking and alcoholism. Don''t worry though you can still meet Hachi whenever you want, but if you go to meet him you will need to be 100% sober. After all, my son doesn''t need vices like drinking or gambling." Said Yami, as he started walking away. He used a storage seal to bring out a blanket that covered Tsunade''s c.h.e.s.t and lower body while she healed.


    ¡­


    A/N: Wow¡­ Yami really is an advocate for gender equality. ????????????

 Chapter 121 - Shiro the Ninken...

    Chapter 121


    Title: Shiro the Ninken...


    Tsunade with difficulty said¡­ "He is still my kid¡­"


    Yami halted on his step for a second, but he continued walking again.


    "Maybe if you get completely sober, you can come and live at my house, where Hachi will be staying. It''s not too late to stop acting like a weak woman and be yourself. The Tsunade I knew before, she is broken now. Maybe then, you would be a mother that Hachi can look up to." Said Yami.


    ¡­


    -Couple of days later-


    -General POV-


    Team thirteen, or also known as team Yami, were in the Inuzuka Training Grounds, waiting for their Jounin teacher to show up. He had been absent for a week, but they still had his shadow clones to train them. Kurenai was leaning on a tree while reading a book, Guy was doing one handed pushups. Then there is Asuma¡­ he is lying on the ground napping¡­ but Yami''s ninken Shiro kept nudging Asuma.


    Asume just turned around, but Shiro who was transformed into his small white puppy form,  just kept nudging him. Asuma finally just gave up trying to nap and while still lying down he just turned around. He lazily opened one eye and said to Shiro. "What do you want now Shiro."


    Shiro just straightened his body as his tail wiggles behind him, Shiro just opened his mouth and...


    "Go buy me some ramen, human." A deep voice came from the small ninken. He had learned how to talk quite a while ago, when Yami is around he acts all cute and all that. But as soon as Yami looks away, Shiro oberly abuses his power and orders people to do stuff for him, like buy him food, scratch his back and pick up his poop.


    Asuma''s eyes fully opened, he was no longer sleepy. "As if I will do that you stupid dog."


    Shiro just calmly looks at Asuma. Then he just turns around and¡­ makes a sh*t and turned back towards Asuma. "Pick up my poop."


    Asuma immediately got up and backed away from the poop. "WHAT THE HELL YOU STUPID DOG, THAT IS GROSS WHY WOULD YOU DO THAT."


    Shiro just smirked and said. "Pick up that poop."


    "NO WAY I AM DOING THAT YOU STUPID DOG." Angrily said Asuma, with a face full of anger. Shiro keeps humiliating them repeatedly like this. He is very demanding and thick skinned, when Yami isn''t around he even walks like he owns the land he is stepping on.


    "You know how Yami -sensei is about cleanliness Asuma, he would probably ground you for a month. You know that Shiro also likes to exaggerate things when he reports to Yami so you have to take that into consideration." Even while saying this, Kurenai had a calm look on her face. She and Shiro had made a deal that she would help him if he gave some of Yami''s shirts to her. Kurenai knows this is kind of creepy but as long as no one finds out, then that is okay.


    Guy didn''t care about any of this as he started doing  some thumb pushups.


    When he heard all of this Asuma decided to give it up. With a resigned face he asked. "So does anyone have a plastic bag or anything like that."


    Shiro just innocently looks at Asuma and he says. "I have a thin napkin if you want."


    Asuma just sighed in resignation as he felt his pride being stepped on and strangled to death.


    Then came the final nail in the coffin as Shiro said in a haughty voice. "Maybe if you do your job well, I might be generous enough to pay you for a D rank mission¡­. human bitch¡­"


    Unknown to them, the biggest thing Shiro and Yami have in common is¡­ their pettiness¡­


    ¡­.


    While this was all happening, Yami was hiding in the trees looking at them. His ninken Shiro truly is a source of entertainment for him, his personality is just too fun.


    He had just taken care of registering Hachi in the Academy. He also just finished putting some explosion seals inside Hachi''s scalp¡­.


    It''s true that Hachi was his kid, but why would that make any difference to him. Itachi was Frugaku''s kid¡­ look where that went. Anyway Hachi isn''t that important at the moment, he should concentrate on the more immediate stuff.


    ¡­.


    -Yami POV-


    Even while looking at my genin I couldn''t help but think about my latest problem.


    My power has almost peaked again¡­ I have five hearts that I have created by myself, for myself. I even replaced my original heart with a better wind affinity heart. My chakra will still continue to grow until I naturally have as much chakra as five strong Kage level chakra. I even have wood style now, with just that alone I would easily classify as S rank, but Wood Style uses too much chakra, and its nowhere near Hashirama''s level.


    But I am still nowhere near satisfied, Kaguya¡­ the other Otsutsuki¡­ I want to be so strong that even the Shinigami himself would fear taking my soul.


    But if I reached that goal what would I do next¡­ I want to be Omnipotent and Omnipresent¡­ I want to be God¡­ not some god just in name, like the god of death or so on¡­ I want to be THE GOD, the one who knows everything and has the power to do everything. Even after that I want more, there definitely exist other worlds out there¡­ I want to conquer them all¡­ I want everything that the Multiverse has to offer and some more.


    I want to play with people like they are my toys. I want  to be able to express my sins upon the world without fear of something happening. Is that so unfair to ask for¡­


    Then a twisted smile forms on my face as my thoughts go into dark places.


    If I was born with the ability to choose and have free thought, why shouldn''t I chase towards Godhood.


    If from the very start, no one has stood upon the absolute throne of worlds. Not me, nor even the, so called gods. However, that intolerable vacuum has  to come to an end. Henceforth...I shall strive to stand upon the absolute throne heavens and rule over all.


    .


    .


    .


    Ok that is enough time contemplating stuff like this, I haven''t even achieved my current goals. Biting more than I can chew would be dangerous, I need to be extra careful if I want to reach my dreams.


    ¡­


    After Asuma cleans Shiro''s feces¡­ I just started normally walking towards my team. I had a look of complete disinterest as I just looked at them with a bored look in my eyes.


    "Hello there my students, how was your training while I was away. Hope you didn''t fu*k around and waste your life away." I joked with them in a soft tone.


    "C''mon now sensei, you don''t have to word it like that. It''s just one week." Said Asuma as he tried to soften the talk a little.


    "Also sensei Shiro is being cruel and petty again." Complained Asuma, all the while pointing at Shiro.


    I just looked at Shiro, he was on his back, showing his stomach to me as his tail was wriggling around. He acts innocent as he tries to play with me.


    "Is what Asuma said true, Shiro." I asked.


    Shiro just turned back on his feet and with an innocent look in his eyes he said. "Of course not Yami, you could even ask the others."


    I just looked towards Guy, who had stopped his training as soon as I arrived.


    "I was training sensei, so I wasn''t really paying attention." Answered Guy.


    Next was Kurenai, she looked unsure of what to say. Then I noticed Shiro making strange expressions towards Kurenai, but I simply acted like I didn''t notice it. He is most likely threatening to expose the weird stuff that she does with my shirts¡­ I really don''t know how to confront her about that. It''s like the FIB agent can''t comfort someone for watching weird p*rn since they would have to admit that they are spying on them. So I just let the situation be, I am sure that Kurenai will grow out of her creepy phase... hopefully.


    "Uhhhh I am not sure¡­ I don''t think Shiro said that." Answered Kurenai with a guilty expression on her face.


    I just shrugged my shoulders. "Well it doesn''t matter anyway, as I just came to tell you all that I have registered you for the Chunin exams that are going to be held at Kusagakure."


    They all seem a little surprised at that. But I put on a serious expression and started explaining the situation to them. "Well the truth is that¡­ before this year is over¡­ we will be having another ninja war..."


    ....

 Chapter 122 - The bird has to fly from its nest...

    Chapter 122


    Title: The bird has to fly from its nest...


    ¡­


    I am just drinking some good tea in the morning, like always. Yesterday I explained to my genin the details about the Chunin Exams. I myself never had one since I was promoted on the battlefield.


    Which was easier to me, at the time, because I was concentrated on power, than some survival test that can be passed even by unskilled people if they were lucky enough.


    I mean during the canon timeline, none of the Konoha 12 were really even qualified to become Chunin. I mean, give a battle hardened Chunin and it will wipe the floor with the likes of Naruto, Sakura and Sasuke. I mean the ones like Lee had enough power but lacked the leadership and intelligence to be a chunin. But I guess those will be different times.


    ¡­.


    Three hours later and I am at Kusagakure, of course I didn''t teleport my Genin here. They need to learn how to handle their own problems now, and since war is closeby they need to be especially careful.


    Kusagakure or also known as the Village hidden in the grass isn''t anywhere as impressive as Konoha. It is a small ninja village and generally has a very gloomy atmosphere. I mean even the buildings are painted in darker colours.


    Anyway, I have a lot of Hiraishin seals around here too.  This is my back up, in case I ever become a missing nin. In the next election of their Kage, the guy who I control should become the next leader of the village.


    I have stacked the deck so much in my favor, it really does reassure me¡­ somewhat¡­ I am not as worried about the 3rd war as I was about the 2nd. I was a weakling back then. Only as strong as a Chunin. But now¡­ now it''s different¡­


    ¡­.


    -General POV-


    While this was happening to Yami back in Konoha, his ninja dog Shiro was having a whole different dilemma.


    Shiro was looking at the menu on a ramen stand that he likes.


    ''Which one do I pick, Yami gave me 100 thousand Ryo and that is my salary while he is away¡­ it''s going to be hard to manage it. I mean that is what a normal family makes in a month. But I am not some normal family, I am used to a certain type of lifestyle. While picking ramen I would say all of each dish, just taste them all and then leave.'' Thought Shiro, while he is faced with one of the toughest decisions he has ever made.


    Then suddenly as he is contemplating this a red haired female, who seems around 19 years old, she has a jounin outfit on and her hair is tied like on a pony tail.


    Shiro just looked at her and felt a familiarity about her, like he had met her somewhere.


    ''Is she someone I have scammed before.'' Thought Shiro. He truly scammed and bullied a lot of people so he can''t remember them all.


    Shiro was about to insult the tomato hair lady but¡­ his instincts stopped him from doing that¡­


    ''Huh¡­ I guess I shouldn''t do that. She seems dangerous and unstable. Plus the negative emotions coming out of her are overwhelming, is she the Nine Tails Jinchuriki that Yami sometimes talks about.'' Contemplated Shiro.


    ¡­.


    -Two Months Later-


    It was your average sunny day here in Konoha, the sun was bright, the birds were singing, and people seemed to enthusiastically talk to each other. But if you look underneath the underneath, you will find a lot of ninja, who are on edge.


    The skirmishes amongst borders of the countries are escalating. Soon enough Anbu will have to be sent out there, and then¡­ all hell will break loose.


    ¡­


    The 3rd Hokage was taking care of some paperwork. In such dire times each paper had to be looked over carefully, after all war times are very close. There must be some budget cuts that need to go towards the army. The Hokage was deciding if raising taxes would be a valid decision that would give the ninja better equipment and because of that, it would raise the chances of victory dramatically.


    The Hokage, even though he has finished grieving for his friend Danzo. He still remembered when he would ask Danzo for council on decisions like this. He was always an extremist, if Danzo had his way, 80% of the budget would go towards our army. But even with such bad suggestions, Hiruzen still got a lot of insight from it.


    ''Danzo''s peerless spy network would have to be replaced, Orochimaru has been working on taking over that job.'' Decided Hiruzen.


    ¡­.


    At the gates of Konoha, in a black flash Yami and his genin team appeared.


    Everyone was uninjured and looked the same, except the genin looked tired, and had chunin vests on them¡­ so they had all graduated and become chunin. Yami just looked at his team and said. "Since I have teleported you here and now you are all chunin, there is no need for you to go into C or B rank missions with me anymore. You can do them by yourself."


    Yami just looked at them and smiled slightly. "But remember, you will always be team number three, and will always be my students. Now you can fly on your own¡­ so go and spread your wings¡­ make me proud¡­ leave behind a legend that will be spoken for many generations."


    While Yami was saying this, Kurenai was blushing, Guy was crying and Asuma just smiled a little. They had come so far in so little time because of Yami.


    Then Yami started walking away from his students. When Guy, Kurenai and Asuma see his back¡­  all three of them bow down to their waists and loudly say. "THANK YOU FOR EVERYTHING YAMI -SENSEI."


    Yami stops in his tracks¡­ his face has a calm expression like always, a small smile appeared on his lips as he turned around and gave his students a thumbs up. "I am proud of you guys, and just because you are chunin it isn''t the end of the road. Read the books that I gave to you as presents after the exam. They have a step by step explanation on how to become an S rank ninja. I made it for each of you, especially for your chakra natures and specialities."


    When they hear that, they are all surprised that Yami spent so much time writing a book for each of them. Even when he is not their teacher he will be guiding them on¡­


    After that whole fiasco with the kids.  Yami went to his Clan company and saw that everything was ok. As he is walking every Inuzuka, when they see Yami they bow a little and say. """Yami -sama."""


    Yami just smiled at them warmly. Then while he was walking he sensed Shiro sleeping in one of the dog houses. That is where they raise their ninken and he was a little curious at what Shiro has been up two when he has been away.


    When Yami enters the house, he sees a lot of dogs all around, everything seems  normal, some dogs are playing, some sleeping and so on. He stops his chakra flow and dulls his emotional state, to stop Shiro from sensing him. Since Shiro has had a fusion with some flesh of the Zero Tails, his sensing abilities are pretty good.


    Then Yami finally entered the last room. In there he saw¡­ Shiro on his back, he is covered by dog food while some other dogs are l.i.c.k.i.n.g him.


    "Ooohhhhh yeeeaaaahhh." M.o.a.ns Shiro, while surrounded by dogs l.i.c.k.i.n.g him.


    "Yeah you b*tches¡­ lick me¡­ you wh*res¡­" Says Shiro with his tongue out and a satisfied expression on his face.


    Yami just looks at Shiro¡­ he obviously knows what his ninken is like when he is not around¡­ but even he was surprised by this.


    Yami just sighs and with a calm voice he calls out. "Shiro."


    Immediately, as soon as he heard this, Shiro''s eyes widened, he looked around and spotted Yami. He rolls on his feet and even while covered by dog food he says. "Yami this isn''t what it looks like."


    Yami just raised a questioning eyebrow. "I am pretty sure this is what it looks like."


    "Didn''t you always say that you shouldn''t judge a book by its cover."


    "<Sigh>... If in  the cover of the book it is written, ''Dog covered in food and m.o.a.ning while being licked by other dogs''.... I don''t think I need to read the book to know what is written inside."


    ¡­.

 Chapter 123 - Family….

    Chapter 123


    Title:  Family¡­.


    ¡­.


    After the whole fiasco with Shiro being gross. Yami went towards his house, he hadn''t been back for two months since he was at the Chunin exams¡­ they were boring as heck and he spent most of his time looking for any good looking kunoichi (female ninja) to manipulate to sleep with him. There weren''t really many important forein powers in Kusagakure during the exams because of the times of almost conflict.


    ¡­


    When he arrived at his house Yami felt the four chakra signatures in his backyard.  He enters the house and with his instinctual silent walking, he arrives at the backyard.


    In the backyard there is a sakura tree and a pond¡­ There he also sees Tsunade, Tsume, Misune (his mother) and Hachi. His mother and Tsume were sitting on the porch, while Tsunade was instructing Hachi how to water walk while at the same time holding a leaf on his forehead.


    Tsunade was sober, which was Yami''s condition, for her to meet up with Hachi. Yami just looked at this with analytic eyes, he determined that Tsunade must have been sober for some time, since she and Hachi showed such familiarity while she was instructing him.


    "Hachi, concentrate, don''t think about anything else." Instructed Tsunade, while she was also doing the same exercise as her son, so she can show him that it is possible, she even encourages Hachi. Which pushes him to try harder since, before he got to live in Konoha, he never got any compliments from his mother.


    Yami just went forward and gave a casual greeting. "Yo!... what have you guys been up to."


    Immediately they all turned around, not having noticed that Yami was here at all. Even Tsunade was a little surprised, after all even she, an S rank ninja didn''t notice him. She has already acknowledged that Yami is stronger than her. But noticing him shouldn''t have been so hard.


    ''Maybe I have gotten a little rusty during these last few years.'' Thought Tsunade.


    Misune just smiles and her age truly shows with that. She is almost 40 years old and during the time while her son (Yami) was in the frontlines, the stress that she experienced during that time has made her seem a little older than her real age. She gets up and hugs Yami, with a loving smile on her face. "Welcome back Yami."


    Yami also hugged her back and a smile appeared on his face. And a true genuine looking loving expression appeared on his face. "I am back mother, I hope you didn''t miss me too much."


    Tsume just has a calm expression on her face. "Welcome back Yami."


    Hachi and Tsunade also give their greetings, while the latter had a strange look in her eyes. Tsunade hasn''t forgotten about the things Yami said to her, and him punching through her with his fist. She still remembers the pain of her spine being obliterated and having to carefully and slowly heal that type of injury is very painful, but not overly so, Tsunde has had to heal from worse during the 2nd ninja war.


    Yami sat down with Tsume and his mother while Tsunade continued lecturing Hachi on how to control his chakra better.


    But still they weren''t having any progress and Hachi was still  deep up to his knee on the pond, while trying to hold the leaf on his forehead. Then after a dosen of minutes of just watching Yami decided to take action by himself.


    "How long has Hachi been training in this chakra exercise?" Asked Yami with a curious tone to his voice.


    Tsunade just gave him a side glance, her eyes shining in the light as she answered. "He has been at this for two weeks, but is doing very good progress for his age. I remember that Jiraya couldn''t do this exercise up to his twenties, it took him almost five years to do."


    Yami noticed how she didn''t say anything about how quick she or Orochimaru did the exercise. He could already guess that it didn''t take too long for either of them, they probably mastered it in weeks. Tsunade just doesn''t want to pressure Hachi.


    ''But she is being too soft of him, that would be detrimental to his growth and possibly make him arrogant. I have already trained him to be way above any of his classmates, so he might start having some dumb ideas or notions. He needs a strong male figure in his life. The one that will take him off the wrong drugs... and put him in the right drugs¡­ Ok maybe not that last part.'' Thought Yami amusingly, while at the same time he was observing Hachi.


    Suddenly his eyes flash red for a split second, with no one noticing it. Then he got up and slowly walked towards the pond where Tsunade and Hachi were.


    "True Jiraya might have taken that long¡­ but I learned this exercise under a week. I wasn''t necessarily talented either. So the conclusion is that¡­ you Hachi are not working hard enough." Scolded Yami, with a soft voice.


    Hachi was speechless at this and Tsunade wanted to say something, but Yami stopped her by using sign language and telling her that he has everything under control.


    Then he walked on the water and went close to Hachi. He crouched down and acted like he was looking at Hachi''s leggs.


    He gets up and says. "That won''t do¡­ your problem is not that you can''t concentrate on two things at once¡­ I know how we can solve this."


    "Get off the pond." Mentions Yami.


    Hachi followed his instructions and did so. Tsunade just sighed and went to sit down next to Tsume and Yami''s mother.


    Yami then took two sticks from the sakura tree and said. "Take these and try to draw a circle and square on the ground at the same time."


    This sounded easy to Hachi and he tried to do it¡­ but he couldn''t¡­ he tried again.. he still didn''t do it right.


    While Hachi was trying to get it right, Yami went and sat down next to Tsunade. When Misune (Yami''s mother) saw how good Yami was at training Hachi, she couldn''t help but say. "You are good with kids Yami. You truly looked like father and son."


    Tsunade flinched a little at this, while Yami only had a mysterious smile on his face when he heard this.


    "Maybe I should become a father soon, who knows, I seem pretty good at it." Said Yami, while smiling at his mother.


    Tsume immediately started having weird fantasies about having children with Yami, starting a happy family while Misune spoiled her grandchildren, Yami and she would be strict, but they wouldn''t be the same. Yami would be the strict dad expecting nothing less than perfection, but she while being strict would also be a little soft on her children.


    But while Tsume was thinking this Tsunade looked at Yami with her eyes hiding a certain feeling she had.  ''Family¡­ huh¡­''


    While they were all talking about the family here¡­ Yami had a melancholic look in his eyes¡­ while thinking about another family all together¡­


    ¡­.


    A/N: It would be easy to make Misune (Yami''s mother) unlikable or something like that. But I want to keep this realistic and not everyone the MC kills or doesn''t like has to be evil. I don''t want to portray characters as good or bad or evil unnecessaril and without reason... because everyone has both of them inside.

 Chapter 124 - Geniuses...

    Chapter 124


    Title: Geniuses...


    ¡­.


    -One Month Later-


    -General POV-


    During midday, in the Inuzuka Training grounds, Yami was training. He was stretching and doing light exercises to warm his body up. He was shirtless and had even taken off his headband and put them to the side. His only clothes were his dark blue pants.


    As Yami finished the last warm up. He took a deep breath and slowly lightning rays started appearing over his skin¡­


    ''This is it.'' Thought Yami trying to motivate himself.


    <Lighting Armor>


    Soon lighting encompasses his body and¡­


    *fwosh*


    Yami blitzed two meters to the right¡­ but as soon as he did so, he started smelling something burning. He looked at his hands and saw that his skin was slowly melting away. He tried to gain control of the lightning but he couldn''t so even half of his face melted away, showing a black skeleton beneath his flesh¡­


    As soon as Yami saw that he couldn''t control the technique, he just stopped it. The lightning dispersed and everything went back to normal¡­ his flesh knitted itself back together and in less than two seconds. His flesh was back to normal¡­


    ''I can''t seem to have control over the lightning I generate from the technology¡­ if only I had the Jutsu scroll for the technique and how it is used.'' Contemplated Yami.


    He wasn''t able to use the technique because he couldn''t copy (even with the sharingan) something at the level of the Raikage''s Lightning Chakra Cloak. But even at the failure Yami wasn''t disappointed at all. He was at least making progress and when he kills the 3rd Raikage and experiments on his body and reads through his memories, Yami will figure out how the Lightning Armour works.


    ''I will not kill the Raikage for almost killing me during the 2nd ninja war. Revenge is something that clouds the judgement of people and makes them act irrationally. I will kill the 3rd Raikage because that is beneficial to me. Plus it wouldn''t significantly change the future events that I know if I decide to kill him during the 3rd ninja war. Though with my power rising to such levels lately, I have not even been that worried about such things like the timeline. I already have eyes everywhere in this world, even as far away as the Land of Demons.'' Calculated Yami with a strange glint in his eyes.


    After a couple minutes of resting while standing up¡­ Yami suddenly looked towards some trees and with a cold face he said. "You know for a Sanin you really aren''t that good at stealth."


    Then a strange laughing tone comes from one of the trees as it slowly morphed into a human figure and that figure was¡­ Orochimaru. He had his hands in his pockets as he calmly walked forward.


    "As expected of you Yami. Your sensory abilities are extraordinary. I wonder how you got them." Said Orochimaru with a twisted gleam on his eyes.


    Yami had a bored look as his black eyes stared into Orochimaru''s yellow eyes, which with the slit in them, they looked like the eyes of a snake. Yami wasn''t scared of Orochimaru at all, but the gleam in his eyes definitely unnerved him. After all Orochimaru is someone dangerous and extremely intelligent, letting his guard down even slightly around him could be his end.


    "When you talk, it  almost feels like you are about to get to the point of something, but then you just babble on and on¡­ and on¡­" Says Yami calmly while trying to discern Orochimaru''s goal.


    Orochimaru doesn''t take what Yami said as an insult and he starts getting closer to Yami, his hands come out of his pockets as he says. "Tell me Yami¡­ what is the meaning of life."


    Yami still just had a bored look on his face as he said. "*sigh*... life is what you make it out to be Orochimaru, now can you stop bothering me."


    Yami waved his hand to tell Orochimaru to go away. But Orochimaru''s eyes had an even crazier glint on them. This slightly worried Yami and he clenched his muscles, ready for any sudden attack or anything like that.


    But Orochimaru asked again. "What is your view on power then Yami."


    Yami just rubbed his eyes while acting annoyed.


    "*sigh* You know¡­ I was in the middle of something before you came here. And you coming here and asking these questions, not only does it seem suspicious, it also seems like the kinda thing that the T&I department might like to investigate." Yami said to Orochimaru while giving him a hidden threat.


    "Huhuhuhu... C''mon now Yami¡­ me and you¡­ we are the same¡­ aren''t we¡­ I analysed your behaviour reports ever since you were young. You are a lot like me¡­ and your dream isn''t to be Hokage or anything like that¡­ your dream is¡­ immortality." Exclaimed Orochimaru as the grin on his face widened. "You want to be perfect don''t you. I have an idea, if you help me with something, I can give you a certain technique who would allow you to be perfect."


    ''This reaction just confirmed my speculation.'' Analysed Orochimaru.


    But suddenly as soon as it came Yami''s cold aura calmed down and he¡­ smiled at Orochimaru as if mocking him. "You know nothing Orochimaru¡­ There is nothing in this world that is truly ''perfect''. Though it may be a rather large cliche, it is still the truth. It is the ordinary people who look up to ''perfection'' as an ideal and seek after it. But in truth, what is this idea of ''perfection'' truly worth? Nothing. Not a single thing. I detest ''perfection''. To be ''perfect'' is to be unable to improve any further. There would be no scope for ''creation'', not a single gap in one''s knowledge or one''s ability. Do you see now? To true¡­. scientists like you and I, ''perfection'' is tantamount to ''despair''. We aspire to reach greater levels of brilliance than ever before, but never, NEVER, to reach perfection. That is the paradox through which we scientists must struggle. Indeed, it is our duty to find p.l.e.a.s.u.r.e in that struggle. In other words, the second you allowed yourself to spout a ridiculous word like ''perfect'', in truth, you had already been defeated. That is, if you wish to be treated as a scientist."


    Orochimaru''s eyes widened at the things that Yami said. The more Yami said the more Orochimaru was amazed. He had never heard something like this¡­ in the end, Orochimaru''s face calmed down, he turned away and started walking off without saying anything.


    ¡­.


    -Yami POV-


    I just looked at his back¡­


    Should I kill him now¡­ he got dangerously close to the truth¡­ as expected of a true genius¡­ even though I never underestimated him, neither did I ever let my guard down¡­ he still figured me out.


    Truly terrifying¡­ the geniuses in this world are scary. I mean someone like Kabuto was able to read the Uchiha tablet out of nothing. I don''t even know how Orochimaru connected the dots to figure me out.


    Though as expected, he tried to manipulate me by saying things like he will give me perfection and such things. When he wants to manipulate, Orochimaru is scarily good at it. But I already know how he is, so I would never accept anything from him. Still¡­ I was able to amaze him and this will lead him in a wild goose chase for at least a decade.


    *sigh*


    I better rest¡­ tch¡­ I hate people smarter than me¡­ even though I will take absolute measures against Orochimaru¡­ I am not necessarily too worried about what he can cook up¡­ after all¡­ not only do I know his secrets¡­ I am also more powerful than him.


    Plus Orochimaru truly was impulsive with this. He probably came here to confront me as soon as he figured it out. Plus with that cazy expression on his face as if he figured out the secrets to the world... and to me.... he is simply... imm.a.t.u.r.e...


    ¡­.


    A/N: The MC had to use his foreknowledge to fool Orochimaru and lead him in a wild goose chase. In a way you could say he used the <Talk no Jutsu>


    P.S: The MC recognizes that there exist people more intelligent than him¡­ but that doesn''t mean he can''t overcome them all¡­ with YOUTH????????????¡­ (Just joking about the last part¡­ but still, even though now Orochimaru can''t read what Yami is thinking or planning, he can analyse his past actions and guess his personality. As I said¡­ genius sh*t¡­)

 Chapter 125 - Naruto: Dream to Immortality

    Chapter 125


    Title: Orochimaru''s Curiosity


    ¡­


    -Orochimaru POV-


    Yami¡­ Yami... YAMI¡­ that has been the thing in my mind during the last week.


    *squish*


    I look at the table and the human I was experimenting on¡­ I accidentally squished it''s heart too hard¡­ he is dead...damn I really need to calm down. Anyway the thing the Yami said at the end brought chills to my body. I still can hear him say those words¡­ ahhhh¡­ he is so perfect¡­ his way of thinking is so refined¡­ I was only able to realise how Yami truly was by torturing some people he knew and getting what they remembered of him¡­ I even read some memories from Yami''s mother about when he was a kid¡­ it was truly hard to get a Yamanaka to allow my mind access to Yami''s mother''s mind¡­ even the Yamanaka who read her memories didn''t notice it, but I did¡­ as clear as day¡­ Yami even as a toddler was abnormally smart¡­ just like me¡­ AHHHH YAMI¡­ you are truly a magnificent specimen. Even though the Yamanaka cost me a lot... it was all worth it¡­ it quenched my thirst for knowledge on Yami a bit¡­ though trying to dodge his little mosquito spies is quite troublesome¡­ some of them it''s really hard to notice even for me. But it''s nothing I can''t overcome...


    .


    I have already got the first half of the Living Corpse Reincarnation¡­ I am almost at the stage of fully immortalising my mind. I was only able to get this part because of my old (dead) friend Danzo. Even he wasn''t able to get the second part, since it is in the Forbidden Scroll¡­ the one in the Hokage''s office is obviously a fake. But I do know the location of the real one¡­ now if only I could steal it. I was going to ask Yami for his cooperation but he refused me so fast.


    I am so close to the immortality that I have dreamed of for so long. Finally I will achieve immortality and then I can start working towards my dream of learning ALL of the Jutsu in the world.


    Anyway¡­ Yami when he acted angry and cold when I said what I had observed from him. He was faking it but I didn''t notice it at all until he just smiled a second later¡­ with that he really told me that he can just fool me whenever he wants.


    But who else should I investigate to be able to get a clearer picture of Yami¡­


    While thinking this I decide to burn the body of the person I killed, since it might start to smell bad.


    Suddenly¡­ I get an idea¡­ a person who knows Yami since young and saw his personality develop even while he was younger. Who better to ask than my good old teammate¡­. Tsunade.


    ¡­.


    Finding Tsunade wasn''t  that hard. Though it was a little surprising to see her¡­ and her son. I heard that she had returned to the leaf months ago, but I didn''t really care since I had research to do¡­ but I found Tsunade and¡­ her son (whatever his name) eating at an expensive sushi restaurant.


    While still in my Jounin uniform, I made sure that I had no blood on my clothes, because of the recent experiment. Plus I heard some rumours from my spy network that Tsunade is now afraid of blood¡­ how silly that is¡­ she used to splatter on the ground, from ninja families, from children, to elderly, to mothers and fathers. She would splatter their organs around with only one punch¡­ and now she is afraid of blood¡­


    I get close to their table, which is in a pretty secluded corner of the restaurant, with a view of Konoha. When he arrives at the table, he sees Tsunade who just looks at him and says. "Hey Orochi¡­ long time no see."


    I just smirk at her casual greeting. "Yes, long time no see Tsunade¡­ now you even have a child. Who would have guessed¡­ Tsunade would become a mother."


    Tsunade just shrugs and says to her son. "C''mon now Hachi¡­ introduce yourself to Orochimaru, he is an old teammate of mine¡­ he is like... a weird uncle to you¡­ I wouldn''t recommend following him in a dark alley or eating the candy he gives to you."


    I just look at Tsunade, with a strange look on my face. "Tsunade¡­ I think you are not giving young Hachi any truthful information about me."


    Tsunade seemed to think a little more, and again she turned to her son. "Oh yeah¡­ actually it''s not just the candy that he gives to you that you shouldn''t eat¡­ you really shouldn''t consume anything Orochi gives to you."


    I just shake my head at this¡­ it is ridiculous¡­ and the poor child seems confused what Tsunade even means by what she said.


    My face becomes serious as I ask Tsunade. "Tsunade¡­ lately there has been a certain¡­ individual of interest to me."


    Tsunade just has a confused look on her face. Then she looks at her child and says. "Go back to the house Hachi."


    The kid nodded and started walking away as he said. "It was nice to meet you, uncle Orochi."


    Then Tsunade takes a roll of sushi with her chopsticks and eats it, and with her mouth full she asks. "So whomever is that person that you want to know about."


    Talking with her mouth full¡­ that is as unladylike as you can go¡­ but if I said that to her she would definitely punch me. I have known Tsunade for a long time, ever since back in the academy¡­ and by the look in her eyes she already knows what I am going to ask about.


    As I was deep in thought a waitress came and with a very obviously fake smile asked. "What can I get you sir."


    "Some fried eggs and possibly make them as hot as you can when bringing them here." I answered, eggs are my favourite food and I generally like hot food. The waitress nodded and went away.


    I smirk towards Tsunade. "I am sure you know that we are talking about Yami."


    "*sigh*... Well as my teammate I can still only say to you¡­ he is dangerous." Says Tsunade while pointing towards the waitress that just took my order.


    I looked at the waitress and noticed¡­ nothing strange about her. Her chakra reserves are even lower than your average civilian and there are no mosquitoes. I look at Tsunade with a little confusion evident in my eyes.


    Then she makes a handsign that represents¡­ ''SPY''


    What¡­. OH SH*T¡­. I have been concentrating on the mosquitoes and forgot that he might actually have real human spies on this¡­. Damn¡­ I got sidetracked.


    Even while thinking that I still have a calm look on my face. Well¡­ now that I know that Yami is still spying on us¡­ I can''t really say anything.


    Tsunade still looked at me intently and said. "I live with Yami Inuzuka in his house together with my son¡­ so don''t mess around¡­ he will not play around with you¡­ with the war on the horizon he will definitely go for the kill and make it seem like it was done by enemies. I would suggest you also stop investigating him. Or you will be killed¡­"


    When I see Tsunade''s look in her eyes. I just nodded to express my understanding of the situation. She simply just told me that Yami will not be as soft as some other people. He will kill me whenever and wherever, he could strike while I am sleeping, eating, drinking or even while I am in the bathroom. Yami will immediately go for the kill¡­ so that means that even I underestimated him a little and thought that he wouldn''t do that. Also her saying that she lived with it meant that she would take Yami''s side if a conflict took place.


    Damn... I mean Yami took out Danzo because he got in his way¡­ but I am not doing any of that¡­ I just want to understand him.


    With that being said, even during the rest of the meal I was restless...with what Tsunade had just said. We made some small talk during the meal but I wasn''t really even concentrated on it.


    ¡­.


    -Yami POV-


    While sitting on my couch inside my house. I look at the small contraption on my hands¡­ a rubix cube¡­ easy and cheap to make. Now I just need to open a company where the labour is cheap for maximum profits¡­ hmmm¡­ Land of Wind would be good. The people in the desert don''t exactly have a rich economy¡­ but Sand Village is a big problem. They would definitely sabotage my company if it''s in their lands¡­ so I need to find another place¡­


    Oh I know¡­ how about Land of Sand¡­ that place is west of the Land of Wind and it is a generally unknown place, which is often overlooked and is not really in that many maps. It''s decided then¡­ I will open a company there for different small and easy to make things¡­ maybe since the land is so poor, the officials should also be very corrupt. How do I use that¡­ maybe bribe them to have some people who might be in labor camps to come and work there for me¡­ that would definitely cut some expenses down¡­ and more money for me. Hmmmm¡­. I guess a shadow clone could go there and put some of their high officials under a genjutsu¡­ that would put wage expenditure¡­ to zero¡­ not paying people for their work¡­ ok then that is the plan¡­


    ¡­.


    A/N: So Yami is not going to pay his workers... is that really a surprise though... the guy really is greedy... he doesn''t even need that much money anymore. That is Capitalism as it''s best...????????????????


    P.S: Orochimaru has been warned by Tsunade... let''s see where this goes...


    P.P.S: I also wanted to express Orochimaru as a human... after all he isn''t some type of god who learns and knows everything about Yami... he is just smart... like really... really smart...

 Chapter 126 - The coming of the 3rd Ninja War...

    Chapter 126


    Title: The coming of the 3rd Ninja War...


    ¡­.


    While I am contemplating different business ideas I can sense Tsunade walking towards the clan compound. Hachi had arrived earlier but he went with Misune (my mother) to do some shopping. She truly adores Hachi¡­ he is like the normal kid (as normal as a ninja kid can get) that she can finally spoil with gifts and all that. Even though she doesn''t know that Hachi is literally her grandson, she does act towards him like she is his grandmother or¡­ more like an aunt¡­


    I know that Orochimaru and Tsunade met¡­ I also know that Orochimaru has noticed that I use mosquitos to spy on people. Well it was bound to get out sooner or later anyway, and the summon lands do occasionally communicate amongst each other and me taking over the Blood Swamp is a pretty big deal to them.


    So I had the waitresses spy on them¡­ Tsunade noticed the waitress¡­ and that was also a distraction since I actually had a spying seal under their table. That is one of the restaurants that I own¡­ though to know that you would have to go through a special case of files in the civilians councils business room¡­ which is a room full of copies leases for restaurants and other businesses¡­ I know¡­ the management in Konoha sucks¡­ I am definitely changing that when I become the Hokage... I am really good at this...


    ¡­.


    Anyway Tsunade comes inside the house, and then comes to the living room. Sadly TV''s haven''t been invented yet at this time¡­ which kind of sucks. I remember from the Anime that during Naruto''s generation, movies and TVs were already a thing. I kinda don''t know how to create a TV¡­ I never googled it as far as I can remember. If I had even a single memory of it I would have gone through my memories and reread the memory and become the inventor of the TV¡­ that would have made me so much money, a monopoly like that would be priceless, though I already have way more money than I might need¡­ but there is never too much money.


    I bear the door open and Tsunade looks at me and with a complicated look on her face she says. "As you predicted, Orochimaru did come to me, to ask questions about you¡­"


    I could see her astonishment at how I was able to predict what Orochimaru would do next. Obviously I predicted that he would ask Tsunade, after all as her former teammate, Orochimaru trusts Tsunade quite a lot. After all he hasn''t gone rogue ninja yet.


    But I just smiled at her, as I added more fuel to the fire. "Yeah¡­ he isn''t as cunning as he thinks he is."


    Tsunade just sighs at that and said in an exhausted tone. "Anyway, Hachi told me that he will be attempting an early graduation."


    God damn it¡­ that kid¡­ and I know Tsunade just dances around the problem like this¡­ why can''t she just get to the point and say that she wants you to convince Hachi to not do that.


    "Then if he gets an early graduation he will also get an early death. Tell him that and I am pretty sure he would understand." I replied casually.


    Tsunade just frowned at that and got a little annoyed. "That would discourage him from a ninja career."


    I shrugged. "That is good then, he would live longer if he did that."


    "But¡­" Tsunade tries to say something, but she can see the logic to my words. It''s true, it doesn''t even matter if Hachi becomes a ninja or not. I mean sure people would judge him¡­ but people who have the time to judge others aren''t really worth even taking advice from. Also why would someone even care what people think of him¡­ unless it has an advantage towards his goals. For example I acted all nice and good when I was younger because I was weak, and it benefited me. Now that I have power (politically and physically), why should I waste time thinking what other people think of me.


    I mean Hiruzen probably isn''t that fond of me, and Tsunade too might not like me that much right now since I am too dominant on everything I do. But they still don''t have a choice but to put up with me.


    Anyway¡­ Tsunade is saying useless things again. If Hachi wants to graduate early, let him do it¡­ it doesn''t matter if he dies or not¡­ after all, death in this world isn''t something permanent. I will just revive him when I get certain things in place. What is there to be worried about¡­ I already have a bunch of cells from Hachi to be able to revive him with Edo Tensei.


    -Three Months Later-


    -General POV-


    All of the Elite Jounin were assembled on the Hokage Tower¡­ they were all inside a room with a map of the Elemental Nations in the table in the middle of the room. The Hokage was looking at all of the members present. Then he said. "Orochimaru, Tsunade, Minato, Jiraiya, Yami and Fugaku. You are all the pillars of Konoha. I need every one of you to go and lead the troops to guard the borders of each of the nations."


    Hiruzen mentioned all of the current S Rank ninja in the village (except) himself. The other jounin who were here weren''t offended, after all they knew it was the truth, the Hyuga were a little miffed about an Uchiha being called but not a Hyuga, but they also knew that they didn''t have any exceptionally strong members of the Hyuga clan.


    "War is expected to erupt soon, and I don''t want any of our borders unguarded. Today I have gathered you all here to decide which border each of you will be guarding." Explained Hiruzen with a grave expression on his face.


    Yami is the first to speak immediately, as soon as the Hokage finishes his speech. Yami decided to say¡­.


    ¡­.


    A/N: Yami like always, way to controlling and three steps ahead of his enemies.

 Chapter 127 - War Plans...

    Chapter 127


    Title: War Plans...


    ¡­


    "I will take the border against the Land of Lightning. I am fast and also a heavy hitter, I would be a perfect counter against the third Raikage." Said Yami with a casual tone.


    The Hokage thinks for a little and then he nods. "That sounds reasonable."


    Even though the 3rd Hokage isn''t fond of Yami. He still has a cordial relationship with him, after all he doesn''t want anything like a civil war during these times.


    "Does anyone have any other suggestions."


    Yami answered again. "I would suggest Minato and Fugaku work together against the Rock Village, Minato could counter the Tsuchikage''s Atomic Dismantling Jutsu with his Hiraishin. And Fugaku could take care of any Tailed Beast that the Rock Village might decide to throw at us. He would probably be able to put them under a genjutsu to stop them. I can also lend him some paper seals that could suppress the Jinchiriki''s chakra just in case. I would also suggest, that Tsunade and Jiraya handle the Hidden Sand Village, Tsunade would be enough to hold Chiyo and her brother, since the Kazege died that would be enough, but their Jinchuriki of the one tails would be a little hard to handle if they decided to use that one too. Then comes the real problem in there, since I have heard rumours form my spies that the most likely candidate for the next Kazekage would also be able to control Gold Dust, with all that it would seem a little hard for only Tsunade alone to handle this."


    All of the people in the room looked at Yami with wide eyes, amazed at what he said and how he was able to make such an alitical plan. Plus the spy network also seemed quite good considering the information that Yami just easily gave away.


    The Hokage just looked intently at Yami. He wasn''t dumb enough to not see Yami''s usefulness. He just came up with an amazing plan in case of war¡­ so Hiruzen decided to ask Yami again. "Do you have any more ideas¡­"


    Yami seemed to think for a little, but in the end he just said. "No¡­ not really¡­ though I guess Orochimaru would go to the border in the Land of Water, against the Hidden Mist Village¡­ so no I can''t really add anything new."


    The Hokage nodded and after thinking for a couple of seconds he calmly said. "Your plan is quite good Yami¡­ but I see one flaw in it¡­ the battle against the Cloud Village, where you will be guarding it. Can you handle the 3rd Raikage¡­ I think that me coming and helping would be optimal."


    After listening to Hiruzen, Yami contemplates a little, but in the end he still says. "There is no need, I can handle it. I think that you staying in Konoha would be for the best, in case of an emergency in any battle front, you could easily go and help thee within less than a day. But being with me, the travel time to the other borders would be significantly larger and it could take up to 2-4 days of travel to reach the destinations from where I will be holding the front. And travelling long distances with Hiraishin is not worth it since we could just teleport ourselves within a trap. Also¡­ don''t worry¡­ I am confident on being able to handle the Raikage."


    The Hokage still doesn''t seem convinced yet and asks again. "What if they bring their Jinchuriki in the fight, because even though the Eight Tails Jinchuriki is said to be young and he probably can''t control the Tailed Beast inside of him. He could still be dangerous, after all in a battle between equals even the smallest margin change could have an effect on battle results."


    "As you all know, I am at my best against a Jinchuriki. With my Fuinjutsu to help me with it, the situation could be easily handled by a shadow clone of mine." Reassures Yami.


    Then Yami added. "Also we should keep the Nine Tails Jinchuriki inside Konoha, after all Kumo already tried to steal it once. What would be stopping them from doing it again."


    The Hokage nods, after all only Yami knows his abilities best, and he is an S rank ninja. They know he won''t overestimate himself needlessly, that is just a rookie mistake.


    The discussions on different battles start, they calculate the different scenarios that might happen and how we will handle them. The Nara Jounin also try to change battle scenarios and make the best possible response for them. While they advise us on how we should handle the different situations that might arise.


    ''This is boring.'' Though Yami, as he was calculating which strings to pull to get some of the people he wants into his army.


    ¡­.


    After the meeting we all had two days of break, before we  needed to get to the frontlines. As Yami was walking towards the exit and got ready to meet Orochimaru. He felt a hand on his shoulder, he turned around and saw Minato, who had a smile on his face. "Hey Yami, long time no see, we should catch up, want to go to the Jounin Bar close to the Anbu building."


    ¡­.


    -Yami POV-


    I just looked at Minato and contemplated. We do usually meet at the Ichiraku ramen stand, but even then we are always on a rush or something like that. So we didn''t get to talk a lot¡­ well I admit that it was mostly me not seeing a reason to talk to him, since I already got the Uzumaki Fuinjutsu Books from Kushina¡­ She and Minato have become kind of useless to me and I see no reason to even hang out with them. Kushina is too loud and Minato is¡­ kinda boring honestly.


    "Yeah sure, I would like that. I will meet you there in ten minutes. I have something to take care of first." But still out of courtesy I decided to take the shot and go hang out with him¡­ a dead man walking¡­


    ¡­.


    After that I go outside and¡­


    *fwosh*


    As my view changes, I see Orochimaru leaning on a tree, we are currently in the backyards and training grounds of the Academy. Orochimaru has that intense gaze on his face as he looks at me. He still has that creepy obsession with me¡­ that fu*king pedo¡­ anyway I just look at him calmly.


    "What did you want to meet me for Yami." Asked Orochimaru, with a calm face.


    When I saw this I smirked. "Well since you were so interested in me. I did a little investigation on you too. I must say that you have a LOT of illegal stuff going on. Really?... Human Experimentation, Kidnapping, Torture, Extortion and even had an underground lab built. Well that isn''t  illegal but the money that you put in there¡­ it wasn''t in your Researchers Tax¡­ so you committed the worst of crimes¡­ Tax Evasion."


    I can see that Orochimaru doesn''t understand what I mean with the last part. But in my last world, when criminals were good at doing their crimes, and not leaving any evidence¡­ Tax Evasion was the crime that they mostly got caught with¡­ I mean that is how some of the most infamous criminals were caught.


    Actually the law exists even in the Naruto world¡­ though it is mostly overlooked¡­ which won''t happen once I become Hokage. I am definitely going to abuse that law¡­


    Still I decided to clear things up for Orochimaru by saying. "Don''t worry about that made up law¡­ I am just joking¡­ but really though¡­ immortality huh¡­ I can''t say I understand you. To me if life has no end there would be no meaning in life."


    I see Orochimaru immediately start to analyse every word I say, trying to understand my motives. Especially now that I know all of his dirty little deeds.


    Like always, it is so easy to make smart people overthinking bullsh*t that I say¡­ meaning in life¡­ what the hell is that¡­ can you eat it? Why would anyone need a reason to live. People just live, with or without reason. People can make their own reasons to live and they can make their own goals that they want to achieve.


    But I let Orochimaru contemplate the things I said for a couple of seconds as I said to him again. "Ok now that you understand the situation you are in. I would like to make a deal with you."


    Orochimaru comes back to his senses and a smirk appears on his face. "And what would that deal entail exactly."


    My smirk matched his as I said. "Well I am a curious man, just like you. So I would like for you to send to me certain types of people with certain types of bloodlines for me. It would also be preferable if the people were alive."


    Orochimaru with a smirk still on his face as he asks. "And what about me¡­ what benefits would I have."


    I just shrugged. "Well when I went through your super secret lab, I saw how sh*ty,  the stuff was so I will offer you money, untraceable with no strings attached. You will get money so when the war ends you could build your super secret lab with the top equipment available."


    I know that even though ninjas generally make a lot of money. They don''t make the type of money to be able to build labs worth around hundred million ryo. After all to build that you would have to hunt one or two S ranks. Probably more since the S Rank battles don''t leave a body behind. After all, an S Rank body has a lot of secrets hidden inside it. But still without a body or head there is no bounty, so most likely an S rank ninja would have to locate an S Rank, track him down, hope he isn''t with friends, make sure that he doesn''t escape and so much more.


    So in the end¡­ Orochimaru''s answer is¡­ "I will do it for 400 million Ryo and I want 200 million beforehand."


    I smiled at his answer, he already knows that I will most likely go back on my word¡­ he knows what I did with Danzo¡­ so he asked me about a down payment because of that.


    "Yeah sure¡­" I take out two small scrolls as big as my little finger, my pockets and throw them towards Orochimaru. "On there you have 200 million Ryo."


    He just nods¡­ "You will have your bodies when the war starts."


    Then he turned around and walked away¡­ as I look at his back a sinister smirk appears on my face.


    Ahhh poor Orochimaru, he doesn''t understand that he is already in my trap¡­ even though he is a genius he doesn''t know sh*t about things that aren''t generally related to ninja things. For example, just because he has the money, that doesn''t mean that he can just magically buy a lab¡­ he needs to have certain connections & contracts to be able to buy scientifically advanced machines or parts for the machines.


    That money is just paper, it won''t really do anything for him. I will block every channel legal or in the black market, he is not getting his little lab any time soon. I have already bought the companies that create stuff for labs and closed the other companies who did the same service as my company. I closed them by lowering the price of my products so much that I didn''t win anything from the companies for some time¡­ but it forced the other companies to shut down¡­ so here I am¡­ the only private producer of 99.99% of fabrically made machinery¡­ damn I am good at this sh*t¡­


    Then I also decided to Hiraishin towards the meeting place that I had with Minato¡­


    *fwosh*


    And so I disappeared with the now iconic¡­ dark flash...


    ¡­.


    A/N: We see that Orochimaru and Yami, even though they are both kind of adversaries. In the term of benefits they are both smart and put their differences aside.

 Chapter 128 - Minato… and his life...

    Chapter 128


    Title: Minato¡­ and his life...


    ¡­


    -Minato POV-


    I look around me and see a bunch of Jounin just getting drunk. I don''t really blame them¡­ honestly any of them could die in the coming war¡­ actually most of them might die. Even,  I myself might die¡­ during the 2nd ninja war I didn''t really participate in a lot of all out wars, usually Jiraya -sensei was around to help me and not let me die. War is so chaotic, one stray kunai and you could easily die, Kushina has been helping me lately sharpen my instincts even more, after all I don''t want to teleport in front of a kunai and die.


    My Shunshin and Hiraishin are my best moves right now. Since battles can last so long amongst a big number of ninja, I usually save chakra and use Shunshin or Hiraishin. That is how I earned myself the moniker Yellow Flash, I even have a bounty of 64 million. Though amongst the Konoha S rank I am quite new. Also I don''t have a finishing move in my arsenal¡­ I definitely need that. Plus I have Kakashi to take with me¡­ I truly hope he survives this war¡­ poor child¡­ his father committed suicide and he was the first to find the dead body. Anyway I look at the clock and see that Yami will come in five minutes¡­ he is very punctual about things like this and will always be on time¡­ like exactly on time...


    As I am currently sitting on one of the tables as I wait for Yami¡­ now that is an amazing person if I have ever seen one.


    Ever since I was young I was way better than all of my peers¡­ I understood that¡­ so I liked to help my friends be as good as me¡­ after all having another friend watching your back is never bad. I even wanted to graduate with my friends¡­ which would have been when we were all ten¡­ but then I saw him¡­ Yami Inuzuka.


    Everything I did good, he did it perfectly, he easily broke through all of the records  I had set in the Academy. Even while he did all that¡­ I noticed that he didn''t see any of these things worth his attention. He didn''t even care that he was the best in his class. Since I am a long range sensor I was able to sense his chakra clearer when he was further away from me. He even had a higher chakra amount.


    That is when I understood¡­ I will never be Hokage if I don''t give it my all. So I decided to graduate at eight years old, two years before the time I had decided previously. I decided to train with my Jonin techier Jiraiya as hard as I could. I wanted to put as much distance as I could between Yami Inuzuka and me.


    And I made great progress and Jiraya -sensei even decided to make me the next Toad Summoner. I could confidently say that I had left Yami in the dust in just one year¡­ but as soon as he became a genin¡­ he caught up to me¡­ and more¡­ so you could say the rest was history.


    But Yami is also better with women, the girls loved him. I remember the way Kushina used to look at him. She always had those dreamy eyes and longing expressions on her face when she saw Yami. But then that fated day came¡­ when Kushina was kidnapped¡­ we saved her¡­ and for the first time I understood¡­ no deep down I had known that a long time ago, but I simply didn''t want to accept it¡­.. Yami Inuzuka never even saw me as competition, I was just a stepping stone for him.


    At the end it is true¡­ I did end up dating the woman of my dreams, Kushina¡­ and for that I am thankful to Yami. He truly did bring me and Kushina together¡­ he is a true friend¡­


    Also I finally thought that Hiraishin would give me an edge over Yami and even wanted to ask him to spar when I learned it, but¡­ I got news that he also had learned it, one week after me. I had the help of Kushina to learn and master the Hiraishin but Yami still outdid me and learned it by himself. That guy really is super talented¡­


    I also noticed that while I was deep in thoughts I drank half a bottle of sake already, without Yami even coming here yet¡­


    I look at the clock and see that he has another two minutes until he will come, exactly on time like always.


    I wonder if Yami is dating anyone, if he isn''t maybe I can return the favor and find him a girlfriend. I think that one of Kushina''s friends, Mikoto, would be nice for Yami. She is pretty and is from a great clan, the Uchiha clan. But maybe Yami is dating someone in secret, but even then technically me and Kushina are dating in secret but ask any Jounin and even most Chunin will know that we are really dating.


    But now that I think about it¡­ I have never even heard of any rumours about Yami''s love life.


    Damn¡­ I am thinking about getting Yami a girlfriend at the brink of another ninja war¡­ I must really be drunk¡­ should I dispel the alcohol inside my system¡­ nah¡­ I came here to relax so that is what I am going to do¡­


    Then as I was thinking that, I hear the front door open and saw, Yami in the flesh¡­ I just wave towards him and say. "Here Yami."


    He looked towards me and smiled. When he got close to me, he sat down on the table, and took the chair opposite to mine while asking a rhetorical question. "So I guess you are already drunk right?... since you should remember that I am a sensor and can easily sense your chakra, you didn''t need to call my name."


    ¡­.


    A/N: Since it was mostly from the Yami''s POV we didn''t notice the changes he made to the Canon Timeline, but here it is one of them. Even in the beginning, Yami was changing things.

 Chapter 129 - Getting drunk is bad...

    Chapter 129


    Title: Getting drunk is bad...


    ¡­.


    -Yami POV-


    You know seeing Minato drunk like this is¡­ amusing to me. He just keeps saying some dumb sh*t about his early life and that Inoichi''s pubes are blond. The whole bar can hear him (because they are all Jounin level ninja) and I can''t stop myself from laughing.


    Then out of nowhere Minato asks. "Y -Yami *hiccup* tell me the truth¡­ why didn''t you get together with Kushina when you had the chance. *hiccup*"


    Well obviously because she is too annoying, needlessly aggressive, she isn''t wise and can''t really hold a decent conversation, she is very nosy, she would also try to help other people without thinking of the consequences. So over all, the only thing she has going for her is her looks¡­ which isn''t enough for me¡­ there are way prettier women in the Naruto world and in no way am I settling down without ''trying'' most of them.


    Plus Kushina is an Alpha in a relationship it means that she would try to wear the pants in our relationsh.i.p.s. Minato is a beta, and could handle her¡­. I wouldn''t, we would have fights constantly about what we think is right and what we want, until one of us (most likely me) cheats on the other. I had experience with someone like this in my past life.


    But even while I think  all of these negative opinions about Kushina, I keep a calm face and just shrug. "Meh¡­ we weren''t really compatible with each other. You and her are a perfect couple, like you were made for each other. But me and Kushina¡­ at best we would be friends, anything further and our relationship would start crumbling. I saw how she looked at me, but that was just a crush on me, born from her need to be acknowledged and¡­ I did so¡­ it was nothing special anyone else could have been that silly crush of hers."


    Minato looked at me, then suddenly tears appeared in his eyes and as he tried to hug me. "Yami you are such a good friend!!"


    As he comes to hug me, I lean back on the chair to get out of his reach. "Stop!! You are drunk Minato. This is not Jonin behaviour."


    "You are not Jonin behaviour!" Said Minato.


    *sigh*... he is really drunk.


    I just casually dodged all of his attempts to try and grab me into a hug. Then as his body goes over the table. I have a clear shot at his stomach.


    And I punch him in the stomach, while sending some of my chakra in his body. Minato just looked around confused. "That was a weak punch."


    As soon as he sayd that... I can see Minato''s eyes widen in pain as smoke comes from his ears and mouth. But as a Jounin and S rank ninja his pain tolerance is beyond just amazing. He didn''t even flinch and the only sign that he was in pain and was actually feeling a painful electric like shock inside his body was the widening of his eyes. I was using my chakra to forcefully flush the alcohol out of his system.


    Then after ten seconds of Minato standing there frozen in place¡­ he suddenly blushed, sat down on the chair and his head hit the table. "Damn¡­ that was embarrassing!!"


    "Yeah and it was uncomfortable as hell for me too. Probably everyone in here will remember this for the rest of their lives and even if you do become Hokage, they will always look and remember you as, that one drunk guy." I said to Minato with a nonchalant voice. They say that hitting a man when he is down is shameful¡­ to me that is the best time to hit anyone¡­ while they are down.


    "*sigh* You are never going to let me love this down are you..." Said Minato with a tired voice. As he looked me in the eyes while his head was leaning on his arms, which were on the table.


    I just smirked at that. "Never¡­"


    But I decided that this is enough fooling around and asked Minato. "So¡­ how is your relationship with Kushina¡­ you know¡­ you being insecure as hell about it makes me worried."


    Minato makes a weird face as if he ate a lemon. "C''mon now that was just me talking while being drunk¡­ me and Kushina are doing very good. But what about you Yami."


    I immediately noticed that he was trying to change the conversation¡­ damn¡­ I guess scheming against old foxes who are good at this type of stuff makes Minato''s attempt at subtle manipulation seem¡­ bad¡­ but I he is still only 19 and not like me¡­ only one year older than me¡­ but technically I am already like 36 years old if I count my first life. Damn... I really am old¡­


    All of these thoughts were processed in a second by me as I looked at Minto, I got some green tea that I ordered and took a sip. "What about me?."


    "Well, are you really single or do you have a secret girlfriend already?" Asked Minato with a friendly smile on his face.


    I just shrug at his question. "No not really, I am not dating anyone currently."


    Plus I am the Inuzuka Clan head, so me dating someone publicly isn''t quite¡­ appropriate. After all, I plan for my marriage to give me at least some benefits. Because if I want to just get my wick wet, I can seduce any girl and have my wish granted.


    Minato smirked mischievously at this. "Well Kushina has a friend of hers, her name is Mikoto Uchiha. I think you should go at least on a date before going to war."


    I think back on that name and scan through my memories about the name. She is Mikoto Uchiha of the Uchiha Clan Head''s daughter. She is also a Jounin of Konoha and three years older than me.


    But any of that doesn''t really matter. What really mattered is that she is also the mother of Sasuke and Itachi.


    "Ok¡­ sure¡­ but when will me and her meet for our date." I asked Minato.


    He seems to think a little and says. "How about you go on the date today."


    That surprised me a little...


    ¡­.


    A/N: It''s just a date, Yami is not going to marry her or anything like that. It''s not that big of a deal.????????????


    P.S: Me and my ex (one of them) just had a date... it was nice. Rekindled our passion... just went through four c.o.n.d.o.ms in 2-3 hours... might start officially dating her again. Plus we meet everyday now since the gyms are opened again, and I have started to go to the gym where she works.????


    Soooo long story short that us the reason why today''s chapter was late....

 Chapter 130 - Date With Mikoto

    Chapter 130


    Title: Date With Mikoto


    ¡­.


    A couple hours after the conversation between Minato and Yami¡­


    ¡­


    -Mikoro POV-


    My name is Mikoto Uchiha, the Uchiha Clan Head''s daughter¡­ well technically I am¡­ but father always told me that the true leader would be whomever I marry.


    I look at my best friend in front of me. She is Kushina and she keeps telling me. "C''mon now, you have to smile, if you don''t your face looks emotionless and might scare him away."


    I think back on how I got roped into this. Obviously tomorrow almost all of the Jounin will be deployed to the borders. Konoha''s geographical position is in the middle of all the other Great Ninja Villages. So during times of peace it is a blessing, since we have trade routes and merchants take their carriages along the Land of Fire. So it generally brings more money in. But in the times of war¡­ it is a curse¡­ every war we have fought we have always been so close to the collapse of our village and foreign invasion that it isn''t even funny.


    Oh I let my mind wonder again¡­ I really need to concentrate¡­ this is my first real date¡­ I am 21 years old and this is my first real date¡­ damn that sounds so lame, I am definitely not telling anyone that.


    Kushina is gushing over me like always about my hair and that¡­ but I just look at myself in the mirror and see¡­


    I have tied my hair in a ponytail and¡­ my face seems passive like always. Kushina calls it emotionless and scary, but what does she know? She probably has ramen juices running through her brains.


    "C''mon now Mikoto¡­ you need to smile and me more enthusiastic about this. Your date is Yami Inuzuka, one of the best bachelors in Konoha." Says Kushina trying to get me excited. I just turned and looked at her.


    "Didn''t you also have a crush on Yami Inuzuka when you were younger." I asked Kushina with a nonchalant voice.


    Immediately she got nervous and started stuttering. "W -What¡­ of course n -not."


    She is a terrible liar¡­ how someone like her even qualifies as a Jonin still amazes me. I guess her strength qualifies but her personality definitely doesn''t¡­


    ¡­.


    After some more of Kushina''s unnecessary comments and useless advice. I finally was able to get out of her company and I used Body Flicker to arrive at the meeting place.


    It was a restaurant on the outskirts of the always expanding Inuzuka Clan compound. Kushina reassured me that Yami said that this restaurant is under his control and no one would even see us here. That is good since I still have an arranged marriage with Fugaku, and me seeing another mad would be seen as scandalous.


    Plus an Uchiha marrying outside the clan is rare and since I am the Clan Head''s daughter, that becomes impossible. After all, no matter how much my father praises Yami Inuzuka on his political exploits. I know that he wouldn''t approve of me marrying anyone but our clan''s rising star, Fugaku Uchiha, he is also known to our enemies as Wicked Eye Fugaku an S Rank ninja and he is still in his early twenties.


    I took a deep breath and opened the door to the lavishly looking restaurant. Inside I surprisingly saw no one¡­ this restaurant is quite popular. As I walked deeper inside I saw lavish paintings and decorations. Then as soon as I entered the restaurant area two waitresses came towards me.


    ""Hello lady Mikoto, we have been expecting you. Follow us, we will show you to your pre arranged table."" They weirdly spoke in synchronisation. Then they led me towards a balcony with the view of the Inuzuka clan compound. There was only one table for two on the balcony and one of the seats was already occupied by my date¡­. Yami Inuzuka. He was looking towards his clan compound and had a soft smile on his face. My interactions with him up till this moment had been minimal, I mostly only saw him in the Clan Head meetings when my father decided to take me too.


    I walked towards the table and sat down opposite of him. When he heard the sound of the chair being pulled back, Yami looked towards me. He had his soft smile on his face as he said. "A p.l.e.a.s.u.r.e to meet you Mikoto. I hope you find my company fun."


    I also smiled back and tried to make my dark pupiless eyes seem happier. Then I responded in the most cordial way that I coul. "I am glad to be of your acquaintance Yami Inuzuka."


    When Yami heard this I noticed that his smile widened a little as his eyes shined in amus.e.m.e.nt. "So you must have the same problem right."


    I looked at him strangely and decided to ask. "What do you mean by that."


    "Hahahah." He bursted out laughing when he heard my question. Then he wiped out a small tear from his eyes. "Well I used to have the same problem, the eyes¡­ that they show no emotion. Me and you have the same eyes. Though I must admit,  I am a little jealous of your eye''s form and beauty."


    That is when I noticed that he really did have the same eye colour as me. And if he didn''t have that strange light of happiness in his eyes, they would look emotionless and empty¡­ just like mine.


    ¡­.


    After a couple of hours it does get dark, but I still decided to stay with him. Talking about life and different things. We truly had a lot in common and at the end of it we even developed a Genjutsu together that allows the user to have a certain ''friendly'' look in their eyes¡­ for the first time since I could remember I laughed¡­ truly laughed with someone¡­ I must say that¡­. if only he was born as an Uchiha.


    And as the curtain of darkness covered the stars, we drank expensive wine together. Not as the Inuzuka clan head and the daughter of the Uchiha clan head¡­ but as Yami and Mikoto¡­ friends or maybe more¡­


    Then, when it got quite late and I knew  that my father would be worried if I stayed any longer, as I was about to get up. I felt a hand softly hold into my own. I look at Yami and see a look of uncertainty appear on his eyes as he says. "Stay with me Mikoto."


    ¡­.

 Chapter 131 - A one hit wonder...

    Chapter 131


    Title: A one hit wonder...


    ¡­.


    "Stay with me." When I heard those words, for a split second I thought about the possibility of abandoning my clan and running away with Yami. He is someone who understands me, and¡­ embarrassingly enough¡­ I spilled a lot of secret things about myself tonight¡­ Yami has his way with sweet words¡­


    But that fantasy all washed away¡­ as I just looked at him with my cold eyes cancelling the Genjutsu that made my eyes look friendlier. "I am sorry Yami, but I have my duties and you have yours."


    Yami looked a little sad at that, it broke my heart, unknowingly I had gotten close to the first person in my life.


    Then as I was about to walk away, my resistance almost crumbled when I saw Yami like that. But I had to¡­ suddenly I am turned around by a hand on my shoulder¡­ and feel a soft feeling on my lips¡­ fu*k the consequences¡­ it''s my life and I control it¡­


    ¡­.


    -Next Day-


    -Yami POV-


    I feel Mikoto stirr a little as the sun hits her eyes.. I just turned around and looked at the n.a.k.e.d body in the bed next to me¡­ her skin was like a pearl¡­ damn she is so hot¡­ but sadly she won''t be able to hold this beauty forever. Her t.i.t.s will sag and her face will wrinkle. Unless she had immortality¡­ which I won''t give to her.


    After all if I do that, there would be a 100% chance of her betraying me and cheating on me in the future. After all, infinity is a long time and having someone be loyal for that long is simply impossible. Romantic love isn''t some magical power, romantic love is something temporary that will fade away with time¡­ or even more correctly¡­ love is a chemical reaction that compels animals to breed and then it slowly fades away, leaving you in a loveless stranded marriage.


    Surprisingly Mikoto was a vergin¡­ who would have guessed, doesn''t she have an arranged marriage with Fugaku, and she is  around 21 years old. Damn I guess Fugaku was waiting for her to get used to the idea of them together and accept it¡­ such a nice guy¡­ and a damn cuck¡­ this is what happens when you wait too long.  Another guy will bang your girl...


    Also now I have learned my lesson and every time I came inside of her, I used a jutsu that temporarily stops her from getting pregnant¡­ I ain''t getting no more kids to raise. One is already bothersome enough.


    I got up from the bed and went and took my clothes from the ground where they lay. I put on my Jonin uniform, as I am doing so I hear the bed shift a little and when I turn around I see that Mikoto has woken up in all of her n.a.k.e.d glory.


    She still seems a little sleepy and tired.  While looking at her I can''t help but think that she is quite intelligent, she made a clone and sent it to her father saying that she will be at Kushina''s place.


    I decided to take this opportunity and ask her. "So on which border you will be during the war. Because if you are in the one where we will fight against the Hidden Cloud Village, we could have some fun during this sh*tty war."


    Mikoto just seemed to think a little and said with a voice that didn''t express anything. "I am deployed in the battlefield against the Hidden Sand Village."


    Well that is disappointing, I guess this will be only a one night stand between us then.


    "I want you to know Yami, that this was only a one time thing. I have a duty to my clan to fulfill." Said Mikoto¡­ I noticed that she is probably expecting some type of response from me.


    But I just shrugged my shoulders and casually said. "Oh ok, sure thing."


    I saw her eye twitch for a split second. Heh¡­ was she expecting some type of sadness or regret from me. No thank you, I almost broke my back last night, carrying the conversation. She is as unskilled at social skills as she is at s.u.c.k.i.n.g d*ck¡­ which is bad¡­ very bad¡­ she almost scratched me with her teeth a couple of times. But still she is pretty enough so I overall had a good night.


    Then I went towards the door to go outside but I turned around one last time. "See ya around Mikoto."


    I saw her eyes narrow at me, with a little anger inside of them as I left the room.


    ''Sorry Mikoto, but I am more of a one hit wonder. I am not the type of guy who would fight too hard for a girl. If she doesn''t give me head on the first date I am bolting out of there. I ain''t ready to commit yet I am only like 18 (36 on the inside).


    ¡­.


    Just like that I went towards my clan compound. I had my mind back in the game now. Already brewing new plans and schemes.


    ¡­.


    -Next Day-


    When I become Hokage I need them to have the reputation of the Sanin¡­


    I made a shadow clone, and gave it one of my Kunai with the Hiraishin seal in case the group gets attacked¡­ which is unlikely.


    *Fwosh*


    Then in a black flash, the view in front of me changed into a green field in front of me with countless tents all around¡­ I had directly teleported to the Konoha Camp¡­ where I needed to be.


    Immediately when some of the people in here saw me, they recognized me. I just waved at them and ordered. "Call all of the Jonin present in the camp, I will be discussing the¡­ defense strategy with them."


    They nodded and got to notifying the Jonin. I just went towards the big tent in the middle, it was the Camp Leader''s tent (a.k.a My Tent) there was a round table with around 30 seats and one of them being higher signifying higher authority¡­ I went and sat on that seat.


    ¡­.


    After five minutes Jonin just kept coming into the tent until almost all of the seats were occupied. They all looked at me with respect and admiration, while awaiting my orders.


    During the 2nd Ninja War I was just a simple kid, no matter how much authority I was given. People would instinctively think of me as a kid. But now I just interlock my hands in front of me while I lean them on the table.


    .


    When I saw that they were all here I started by saying. "We will go into the counter attack immediately, we will not give the chance for them to make the first move."


    Immediately they were all shocked by what I said. Hiruzen is a passive person who wouldn''t attack without being provoked¡­ but I am different¡­ and in this camp I have almost absolute authority.


    "And this will be the plan." I smirked towards them as I started explaining the plan.


    ¡­.


    A/N: Yay¡­ finally fighting will happen again¡­ I am happy¡­ only two arcs left after this one, till the story is finished...

 Chapter 132 - A certain rapping Killer B...

    Chapter 132


    Title: A certain rapping Killer B...


    ¡­


    Looking at the people in front of me as I told them that we plan to be the ones to take the initiative and attack shocked them. After all, Hiruzen was very passive and wouldn''t attack unless we were provoked. But if we attack right now, we could have the initiative and easily crush anything they throw at us, since it is so early in the war, well the war hasn''t even officially started but so the 3rd Raikage is in his village. Attacking now is the best time. We are in the Land of Hotsprings¡­ this would be the battlefield, since Konoha almost never went to fight in the Land of Frost which is the land between Land of Hotspring and Land of Lightning. Though our enemies camp lies in the Land of Frost and the cold and snow around might give the Cloud Ninja an advantage since it would allow them to have more water around them to use against Konoha Ninja who are mostly Fire Style Users.


    Though some of them still seem a little unsure. After all, while the camp leader has the authority to order an attack like this. Doing it at this scale without the order of the Hokage is¡­ strange.


    But I still continued saying. "If we don''t attack right now and allow the Raikage to come to the front lines with his full army¡­ that would bring us in a HUGE disadvantage. The balance in our camps power would shift tremendously."


    I reassured them with this and some of them seemed to think it through and accept my logic. Though I don''t need them to like me. It''s better that they like me than hate me. Plus words and lies are free so why not use them to my advantage.


    Without even allowing any possible spy in the camp to send messages or anything like that. I immediately gathered all of the troops to get ready for a counter attack. We won''t be waiting for any reinforcement, me and the other thousand ninja will attack by ourselves the enemy who outnumbers us one to three. They have three thousand ninja¡­ nothing like an S rank ninja like me to even out the field ¡­ though they also have their own S rank ninja as the leader of the caml most likely.


    Contrary to what I said to the other people, I WANT to lure out the 3rd Raikage. After all, he is ready to be my stepping stone now¡­


    ¡­.


    -General POV-


    While Yami was preparing the army and explaining the chain of command to the canon fodder¡­ the Genin and Chunin.


    Now if anyone knew the real Yami they would ask. ''Where is the corruption?''


    Then the answer would be, that he put people of the clan''s whom he had an alliance with,  higher on the chain of command. Though some of the people were only put up there as doll commanders¡­ since the one really giving orders were Yami''s clones.


    ¡­.


    Then the Konoha ninjas started their journey to attack the enemy camp who was in the Land of Frost, the camp was surrounded by earth walls and it had frost and snow all around the camp.


    ¡­.


    -Yami POV-


    I smiled at the chaos that was caused by the fire jutsu. I smiled even more as I saw the snow and ice all around melt and turn into water. People might think that this would give an advantage to the enemy but¡­ they don''t know that the strongest Water Style user in this battlefield is¡­ ME.


    I immediately did some handsigns and the water that was being melted from the ise and snow slowly rose into the air and flew towards the clouds over the Cloud Ninja Camp¡­


    Then up in the clouds the water was pressurised and turned into a deadly weapon. Dropping down on the enemy force to cut through thin steel.


    *fwosh*


    <Water Style: Sharp Rain of Death>


    I could hear the screams of my enemies reverberating through the battlefield. I used my chakra control and sensory abilities to maximise the jutsu''s killing efficiency. I truly haven''t been on a battlefield in quite some time. So I just decided to use an S Rank jutsu, I didn''t even feel the strain¡­ but I did hear the screams from the enemy camp¡­


    *Roooarrrr*


    While looking at its giant form I couldn''t help but think that¡­ tailed beasts really are something else aren''t they.


    The beast just looks at me and opens its mouth and a dark chakra ball starting to form inside of his mouth.


    I immediately analysed the attack and easily guessed that it was a Tailed Beast Bomb. But contrary to my expectations the eight tails swallows the Tailed Beast Bomb¡­ and then¡­


    *BOOOMM*


    He spits out an explosive beam with a wider range¡­


    Even while my hands were making hand seals, and I even already knew that tailed beasts could already do this from the anime. I was still amazed by the raw chakra that it has and the destructive power it displays¡­ if I wasn''t so uncomfortable with having another intelligent being inside of me I would definitely get one for myself.


    Then as the ninja behind me paniced at the attack and thought that they were


    about to die. I just put my palms forward.


    <Splitting Void>


    *BOOOOM*


    I could see that when the attack made contact with the barrier, it was able to crack it a little, but the explosion wasn''t able to get through and hurt anyone behind me.


    While the other Konoha ninja were terrified by this. I just simply had a huge smile on my face. "I must say, this is quite amazing, little octopus¡­ the power was perfectly controlled. So Hidden Cloud Village now has something that has never been done before¡­ a perfect Jinchuriki of the eight tails."


    ¡­.


    A/N: Finally a big stage fight for the MC... in the 3nd ninja war he would have never been able to stop a tailed beast attack so easily...

 Chapter 133 - Fight Against the Eight Tails…

    Chapter 133


    Title: Fight Against the Eight Tails¡­


    ¡­.


    When I said that the people behind me were terrified even more. After all Tailed Beasts were scary, and if someone with the intelligence and knowledge of a ninja was able to control one¡­ that would make it terrifying. Then I create two shadow clones and they nodded and went to command the army behind me.


    With the smile still on my face I just sighed a little as a certain seal on my stomach, where a certain leach who now has no memories is sealed¡­ the seal opened a little and¡­.


    *fwosh*


    Red chakra surrounded me and my skin turned red, while my hair lengthened, even my pupils turned red, under my eyes also appeared dark red markings. I controlled my body with the help of the Jiongu  and formed a transparent barrier in front of my eyes while I activated the Sharingan but now it still looked like I had my normal eyes on, and it also protects my eyes from small projectiles.


    <Blood Sage Mode>


    And then¡­


    *boom*


    The ground under me cracked as I threw myself towards the eight tails. When I got close to it, the eight tails awung one of its giant tentacles at me. Since I was mid air usually I could only dodge if I used Hiraishin but¡­ suddenly on my back¡­


    *fwosh*


    Made out of countless microscopic wires two wings like those of a fallen angel appeared behind me. (This was done with the help of the Jiongu.)


    So I flew sideways and dodged the attack and finally reached the eight tails. Then I fly below its chin and before he can react I clench my hand into a fist and¡­


    *boom*


    I punched the eight tails on the chin and, something impossible that shocked all of the others happened, the eight tails was sent flying in the air.


    ¡­


    -Killer B POV-


    Just looking at the ninja in front of me taking care of me so easily. I couldn''t even concentrate on my rapping¡­ he is way too trapping. By his earlier appearance he is probably the Red Fang Yami Inuzuka.


    When we were teleported away from the battlefield. I could still feel my head ringing from the punch he gave me before¡­ I literally almost passed out and was gassed out.


    I need to take care of him right here, right now¡­ I immediately formed a small Tailed Beast Bomb and threw it towards him at top speed. But somehow he just made three strange handsigns and a seal formula appeared in the air¡­ and my n


    Beast Bomb was s.u.c.k.e.d into the seal and disappeared¡­ then¡­


    *boom*


    I heard an explosion in the distance¡­ this guy is good¡­ and his attack power is scary¡­ I don''t think I can stay conscious if I take another one of his punches¡­ so I need to be a smaller target¡­


    Slowly my body morphs back into my human form and then I immediately activate¡­


    <Tailed Beast Chakra Cloak Version 2>


    And dark red chakra surrounds me, hiding my body and a skeleton is formed around my body frame. I see Yami upthere still flying with his strange wings. He has an amused smirk on his face as he looks towards me. "You truly are a shinobi killer¡­ who would have thought that Kumogakure could keep someone like you hidden."


    Then a deep voice made from the tailed chakra came out of my mouth as I just said with a rap. "Let''s quit talking, so I can show you my might, in this fight."


    Yami just smiled at me and¡­ suddenly¡­


    *fwosh*


    He disappeared in a dark flash and appeared below me¡­ then I felt an explosive force hit me on my chin.


    ''HOW.'' Was the last thing I thought as I went unconscious.


    ¡­.


    -Yami POV-


    I just simply used the Hiraishin marker I left under his chin when I first punched him to teleport back to it again. Then after I punch him and his brain hits the inside of his skull... Killer B falls down on the ground at my feet¡­ unconscious.


    I must say that the fight was exceptionally easy¡­ though it was mostly so because he made such a rookie mistake. But I would have easily defeated him either way. The only difference was that I didn''t use as much force that I would have used if he was in his giant octopus form or else his head would have either flown off like a baseball or burst like a watermelon.


    I see that even though he was unconscious the eight tails chakra was being released even more¡­ hmmm so it is trying to return back to its giant form¡­ the eight tails is trying to take over his body when he is unconscious¡­ and protect him from me, since he thinks that I will kill him.


    But I just simply touch his stomach and easily go through his chakra cloak as my finger sinked on the flesh of his midsection.


    <Four Trigram Seal>


    A spiral Fuinjutsu seal appears as the Eight Tails chakra forcefully recedes back into the teenager Killer B''s body¡­ hmmm he seems to be around my age probably a couple years younger.  Then I sense that the eight tails, still trying to forcefully break through the seal¡­


    I just sigh and I run chakra through the tips of my fingers, with a kanji for each element on them. Then I sink them back in his belly and¡­


    <Five Elements Seal>


    It destabilizes the Eight Tails chakra and it doesn''t allow it to be able to gather it again¡­


    ''Damn¡­ I really am the perfect counter against Jinchuriki.'' I think that while I put Killer B over my shoulder and¡­


    I get back to the battlefield.


    ¡­.


    A/N: NOW we can see how far Yami has come.

 Chapter 134 - Really gotten stronger....

    Chapter 134


    Title: Really gotten stronger....


    ....


    With Killer B on my shoulders, I teleported back to the battlefield. There I see my shadow clones holding back Unruly A the future 4th Raikage. Though he seems kind of weak right now since, the lightning armor around him seems weak. Though I guess he is only in his 20s...


    I see that my clones keep him occupied, but the clones are also careful, after all even a small electric zap and they are gone. But since the future 4th Raikage is currently so slow, even the clones don''t have a problem keeping him occupied.


    I just shunshin to his side and... run a little wind chakra on my palm, hit his neck, knocking him out. His eyes dull as he slowly falls down.


    I can''t believe Minato had a hard time against someone like this. But I guess I am way stronger than Minato already.


    Then as I see that the battle is going on I just take a deep breath and... for around ten seconds I charge a little sage chakra into my lungs.


    <Sage Art: Dream Whistle>


    I whistle in a certain tune and slowly all of the ninjas on the battlefield whether friend or foe started... falling unconscious. I can sense all of their chakras on their first gates became stagnant. Sound Genjutsu is what the Bat Sage Techniques are best at... it can even easily affect an Uchiha.


    Ninjutsu, Taijutsu, Genjutsu, Sage Jutsu, Fuinjutsu, Healing Jutsu... I can say that I am definitely not a jack of all trades... because I master everything I pick up. After all if you are going to do something, you must make sure that you are the best at it.


    Then without the need of any hand seals I make 100 Shadow Clones. And have them go and wake up the thousand Konoha Ninja, and tie up and imprison the 3000 Kumo ninja... this has been an absolute victory from Konoha.... or more like an absolute visitory for me.


    ....


    -Hachi (MC''s son) POV-


    I am currently in the Academy classroom. I am finally graduating, honestly I am glad about that. The fangirls coming after me were crazy, all they saw was the Senju name and they came towards me like headless chicken. But I guess even with all of the hasle,


    Anyway our teacher comes in and looks at all of us. His eyes stay on me for a second longer than they stay at the other kids but it isn''t anything special. I wonder if I fought him... would I be able to beat him... I am obviously only six years old but Yami has taught me that, if I see a chunin in battle, I must run away. If running away is not an option, then I must fight them to the death. But he also said that never fight a chunin head on, I am nowhere near being able to do that, so I must use my head and use strategies against him. Then around a dozen or so ninja wearing the jonin uniform come and line up in front of the class.


    "Team one: Uchiha Izuki, Myoko Kmui and Jaya, your Jonin Sensei will be Toshinori." Says the teacher as a jounin comes forward and mentions for them to follow him.


    "Team 13 will consist of Hachi Senju, Momo Uchiha and Shoto." Continues the teacher with an unenthusiastic voice. "Your jonin teacher will be Ken Inuzuka."


    When he says that, a man in a jonin uniform comes forward. He has dark spiky hair that extends to his lower back. He had dark eyes, and the Inuzuka markings on his cheeks. He also seemed to be tired as his eyes were bloodshot, and had dark circles under them, even his cheeks seemed a little sunken in.


    He just looked towards us.


    Then he opened his mouth and a raspy voice came out. "Come with me."


    We went and followed him, and we walked together out of the Academy. We didn''t say anything as we were all nervous. We started walking on a road that was very familiar to me.


    We are going towards the Inuzuka Clan Compound. And it really is uncomfortable here... no one has said anything since we left the academy.


    ....


    Then we arrived at the outskirts of the Inuzuka Compound. Ken took us to a fancy restaurant and as we sat down.


    He cleared his throat and started saying. "Well honestly, I didn''t really want to be your Jonin sensei. But a certain someone asked me to do it. I would rather be fighting on the front lines and at least being useful, in there. And see Yami -sama fight one last time. I hope that you will become Chunin within 4-5 years because I can feel that my body has started getting weaker. I will probably die within this decade by natural causes."


    Then this time the girl in our team. Her name is Momo Uchiha and she has dark eyes, pale skin and a very beautiful but cold face. But even her eyes widened when our teacher said that. She couldn''t help but ask. "Isn''t Yami Inuzuka the best medical ninja to ever live, surpassing even his teacher Tsunade Senju. Shouldn''t he help you since you are in his clan."


    Ken just laughed loudly at this. "Hahaha, your name is Momo right?" Momo just nods at this in confirmation.


    "Well Momo, he is the reason that I am currently able to even walk. My body should have given up a long time ago. But Yami helped me move for at least a little while more. But enough about me about you tell me about yourself, while we wait for the cute... I mean the waitress to come here. Anyway, tell me your likes, dislikes, hobbies and dreams for the future." Said Ken as he smiled at us.


    The first to talk was my last teammate, the one who barely passed. He had red hair and black eyes. He also had a huge grin on his face. "My name is Shoto, I am a civilian orphan, I li-"


    He was about to continue but someone barged into the restaurant and screamed....


    ....

 Chapter 135 - Others Schemes and Plans...

    Chapter 135


    Title: Others Schemes and Plans...


    ....


    Shoto was about to continue but someone barged into the restaurant and screamed.... "BIG NEWS, YAMI INUZUKA HAS CAPTURED THE EIGHT TAILED DEMON AND THE 3rd RAIKAGE''s SON."


    Everyone who heard that, was in shock. There hadn''t even been any real full blown battles amongst the borders. The first one happened and it was an OVERWHELMING victory for Konoha.


    Then the guy went on explaining that the evil Cloud Ninja said that they wanted to meet for a treaty, but instead the Konoha ninja were attacked and ambushed.


    And as expected almost everyone believed it. After all, this is the only source of information... so facts can be muddied up... and work on Yami''s favor.


    Hachi had a shocked look on his face and so did his teammates. But Ken, his jonin teacher, had a wide smile.


    "Damn... wish I could have been there." Said Ken as he had a wild smile on his face. His body, which had a certain fragileness to it, was revitalised and full of energy when he hears what Yami had done.


    ''I owe Yami everything, my life, fame and even power... someone like me never would have never even dreamed of being an Elite Jonin of Konoha.''


    Thought Ken, as he just looked at his hand and clenched it into a fist. ''This body of mine will last for a little while more... I need to help him in any way I can.''


    Ken looks towards his students, he doesn''t know why Yami asked him to train this team. But he will do it to the best of his abilities.


    Hachi was unsure of what to think about this. He had understood that Yami was amazing... but he didn''t think that he was so strong.


    His teammate Shoto, even though he was shocked he didn''t understand the true effect that this event of Yami will have. It could possibly lead to at least a 50% Reduction in the power of Hidden Cloud Village, and the Raikage''s son was taken prisoner during the confrontation. Plus losing someone like Killer B isn''t a small matter either, he is possibly even more important than the 3rd Raikage''s son.


    ....


    But in the Hokage''s office, something else was happening. While the Hokage was a little glad that Asuma had now become a Chunin, because he wouldn''t be 100% in Yami''s control now.


    ''Those Sarutobi Clan Elders, doing something dumb like this is unexpected of them. Did they somehow expect Asuma to spy on Yami, or did they send him to Yami as a peace offering and let me and Yami tear on each other while they disassociate themselves from me.'' Contemplated Hiruzen while he tried to understand the double or triple meaning of different decisions. He wasn''t a naturally born political genius, who is good at understanding people. He has only learned these things from his experience as Hokage.


    Suddenly he can easily sense an anbu enter the room, even though nothing indicates so, since both the door and window are closed. The Anbu just puts a newspaper in front of him... the newspaper was also one of Yami''s inventions, that is quite.... misinforming... he can easily read through the propaganda but most people wouldn''t be able to do the same... but there are some true facts in there sometimes. That is why the Anbu brought the newspaper to Hirizen.


    ''There must be something seemingly true in this then.''


    ''How is this possible...'' Hiruzen looked at the Anbu in the walls. "Go and find out if this is true."


    ''Though I am not necessarily fond of Yami Inuzuka as a person, if what he says is even half true... we could negotiate a peace between Hidden Cloud Village and Konoha. His skill as a ninja truly is unparalleled.'' Thought Hiruzen as he looked at the newspaper which as its front page had a photo of a smiling Yami in his jonin uniform.


    ....


    While on the Land of Lightning, inside the Village Hidden in the Clouds... the Raikage has just learned what has happened on the battlefield. Although he is feeling unquenchable anger he has a calm mask on his face... though he still can''t help an angry growl coming out of him every now and then.


    He knows how cruel Yami can be... he still remembers when during the 2nd Ninja War, a twelve year old Yami slaughtered his comrades. Even Dodai died when he took him to the closest hospital¡­ which was close by Land of Water. But while he thought that would help the relationship with the Hidden Mist Village... Dodai''s body exploded in the hospital where a lot of injured Mist Shinobi were recovering. A lot of them died and even though the Mizukage knew it wasn''t him, he had to kick him out of the Mist to keep his image of power. Since then the relationship with the general ninja of the Mist has not been good at all.... and all of that happened because of that cruel kid. Who now has his son...


    The Raikage keeps wondering if Yami is already torturing his son even as he spends time like this uselessly thinking to himself. Bit he knows that the Hokage will sue for peace... in his eyes the Hokage was weak and indecisive like that. That is also why everyone wants to start another war... after all, the 1st & 2nd weren''t really that much of a decisive victory for Konoha. Konoha almost fell countless times.


    ''I will kill Yami Inuzuka as soon as I get my son... sons back... he will let his guard down during the small time gap after the treaty... that is when we will strike.'' Schemes the Raikage, while plotting to have Yami unguarded during the attack too.


    ....


    While they were all plotting different things... Yami was in his temporary underground Laboratory with the unconscious Killer B, strapped to a table with tubes strapped all around his body. The tubes had some small Fuinjutsu written on it, they were drawing red chakra form the Eight Tails inside Killer B, and were transporting it inside a pitch dark cube with countless Fuinjutsu written all over it.


    ''War really has a lot of opportunities.'' He thought while observing his sleeping test subject.


    ¡­..


    A/N: For a change of view¡­ everyone scheming and plotting while Yami is ''building'' something¡­


    P.S: If I wasn''t clear enough Ken Inuzuka (Hachi''s joinin teacher) was an early test subject to Yami''s Eight Gates Experiment. That is why his body is slowly falling appart.


    ¡öANNOUNCEMENT: For every 1000 Power Stones, this story will get +1 extra chapte

 Chapter 136 - Crafting and Policing...

    Chapter 136


    [Well... I am a man of my word... here it is the 2nd chapter for today... damn... in just an hour you did this... damn... I underestimated you that is for sure]


    Title: Crafting and Policing...


    ....


    Yami was just looking at this small cube, it could be said that this was his best creation. It had the soul of the zero tails inside. Obviously the soul was wiped out of all its memories, emotions and everything else that made it be special. Now Yami is using its soul as a way to try and create an artificial tailed beast.


    Yami did this to the zero tails, because when he studied and learned all of the abilities from the zero tails, from being able to generate dark chakra from negative emotions, sensing emotions, chakra stealing and all of its other minor abilities. The zero tails wasn''t a tailed beast no matter how much others called it the zero tails. All it is, is a strange leach that was naturally born with the ability to generate dark chakra from negative emotions.... so simply it is an animal with a kekkei genkai.


    Though rare on animals it is nothing that weird, the old toad sage had the ability to see the future in the form of prophecies and the zero tails is also quite old, that is why Yami took its soul as the catalyst to make this cube. After experimenting with the  zero tails, Yami discovers that it has a strong soul, able to hold tailed beast levels of chakra and with the help of his Fuinjutsu, he has created an item (that only he can use) that is like an artificial tailed beast...


    And it works perfectly for Yami since he would feel uncomfortable having another being inside of his soul or more correctly, inside his chakra system...


    since that is why a Jinchuriki dies when their tailed beast is pulled out.


    Yami senses the Soul of the zero tails thrashing around in the cube, since the chakra that the eight tails generates is to much for it, the sould started feeling burning pain. If it was a normal human they would be potentially crippled, but with zero tails strong soul it only felt unimaginable pain. Though the soul is like a clean slate, so to it pain is not comprehensible of what is happening.


    Yami just smiles even more. ''Finally, the experiment was an absolute success... I really love it when things go like planned.''


    ....


    Just like this three days passed, Yami spent most of his time experimenting and let his clones manage the Konoha camp. Though he saw that his test subject Killer B had thinned a little.


    ''This is nothing too big. The Eight Tails can regenerate back it''s chakra easily.'' Summarized Yami as he had a now red cube in his hand, it had changed colors and the Zero Tails soul had already lost its sense of being, so it now is just a chakra storage and purifying machine. It also adapted to the eight tails chakra and already started producing tailed beast chakra...


    ....


    But, as Yami was celebrating, about his recent success. The Hokage wasn''t far away from his camp, he also had ten Anbu around him for protection. Konoha and Kumo had made a secret arrangement of exchanging prisoners. The Hokage was also hoping to be able to sue for peace.


    When they were finally able to see the camp, they slowed down and half of the Anbu went forward to confirm their identities.


    .


    After that then they were told to go to Yami''s giant personal tent. They went there and opened the tent flap. What they saw inside, it was normal, it looked like your average office, with a desk and a very uncomfortable looking wooden chair.


    Yami was also there sitting up and he had two unconscious people on the ground at his feet, they were Killer be and Unruly A (future 4th Raikage)


    -Yami POV-


    When I sensed the Hokage from kilometres away. I simply got Killer B out of my underground laboratory and with a single handsign, a staircase that takes me to my tent is formed.


    Then I tie up Killer B and dispel the clone I had acting as me in the tent. I also have the future 4th Raikage with me. I must say... this is quite nice. I can feel a sense of excitement hit me, when I feel the power that I possess.


    As I am contemplating this, my tent flap opens up and Hiruzen comes in together with his ten personal Anbu... I can already easily sense where they are... damn these guys suck... you wouldn''t have me protected by these weaklings, that''s for sure. I also immediately noticed the look in Hiruzen''s eyes... he plans to make peace with Hidden Cloud. He is too easily pushed around, it makes him seem weak as a leader, well that is why in the canon timeline, he had to be replaced by Minato, after all not a lot of people like such a weak Leader.


    "Yami, you have done an amazing job at this. When you return back to Konoha, you can choose any jutsu that you want to learn." When I heard the Hokage say this, I immediately caught on what he was doing. He is trying to lure me. Plus I, as a border camp leader, it is VERY unlikely that I will return back to Konoha before the war is over. I just smiled at him out of courtesy and said.


    "No thank you Hokage -sama, I didn''t do this out of anything like greed. I just did it to help Konoha in these hard times." As I said that with a smile on my face, I could see that Hiruzen too had a perfect smile on his face. Though I knew that the smile is fake... after all... I have already spent 18 years amongst ninja. I can know even when a ninja is lying. Plus I have waited all this time for techniques, I am not going to ruin my plan to get them just because I was a little impatient.


    "Oh, I am forever grateful to you Yami. You have helped Konoha tremendously, you have saved so many lives... from both sides of the war, from what I heard. It was quite merciful of you to hold the 3000 Cloud Ninja prisoners." ''Thanked'' Hiruzen, I again immediately caught on what he was playing at. Aren''t you being a little hypocritical calling me soft for not killing the prisoners Hiruzen... I mean you literally let Danzo walk around, even when you definitely knew what he was doing.


    But I still had a smile on my face as I nonchalantly said to Hirizen. "Well, I was just waiting for your order, Hokage -sama. We can execute them right now if you want. I am ready whenever you are."


    When I suggested executing all 3000 of the Kumo ninja. Hiruzen was shocked, and he said.


    A/N: Yeah... Yami can''t be tricked so easily anymore.?????


    P.S: Soon Yami and the 3rd Raikage will meet. Ever since the 3rd Raikage almost killed Yami, and Yami killed all of the Raikage''s comrades.


    ANNOUNCEMENT: For every 1000 Power Stones in this story, this will get +1 extra chapter that day.

 Chapter 137 - Ceasefire...

    Chapter 137


    Title: Ceasefire...


    ....


    When I suggested executing all 3000 of the Kumo ninja. Hiruzen was shocked, and he said. "No, there will be no need for that. We will be negotiating a deal with Hidden Cloud now... I would like you Yami to be part of it."


    C''mon now old man. When you say the talk, you must also walk the walk. This is why people view you as a weak Hokage.


    "Of course Hokage -sama." I answered. After all, even while thinking all of this I  had a calm look in my face. There is no need to aggravate  the Hokage. I know that he is already mad at me for killing Danzo, so I don''t need to give him another reason to try and undermine. Because unlike Danzo I can''t just go to the Land of Fire''s Nobles and the Daimyo and ''suggest'' to them that I would like the Hokage killed.


    But it doesn''t really matter anyway, Hiruzen is an old man and in a few years he will step down as the Hokage. By then, not even his clan will have his back after the little stunt he pulled with Danzo''s Clan, by uniting both clans under the Sarutobi banner. Hiraishin is truly useful, I have had my clones go back and manage the clan, so even though I am at the battlefield, the Inuzuka Clan can continue advancing. Especially now that all the others are more concerned about the war, I can take advantage of this.


    ....


    Three days later and another three thousand ninja were sent from Konoha.


    So now that everything was in place, we set off, with me and the Hokage leading our army.


    ....


    After some time we got all of our army to move to the borders of the Land of Frost and the Land of Hot Water. There we were, meeting with another one thousand soldiers, all of them having the headbands of the Hidden Cloud Village. Signifying their allegiance, and in the midst of them all... I saw it... the man who one made me so scared that I had to literally use every trick in the book to even be able to run away from him... The Third Raikage...


    ....


    -3rd Raikage POV-


    Seeing the face of that pushover Hokage was a pleasant sight, since it means that at least my sons haven''t been killed or tortured to insanity... yet that is... I have no doubt that if Yami Inuzuka was the Hokage, Konoha would be a really scary existence to all the other Villages. Thankfully he isn''t Hokage and he never will be, because Konoha isn''t rational enough to get leaders like Yami, the Hokage are mostly chosen by the Nobles or the people of power... what do they even know of how a ninja village should be run or anything like that. They simply choose the one who seems nicest and who can talk good enough to convince them... Konoha has a lot of resources but it can''t use any of them well enough to make them something special. Currently the only thing they have going for them is their high population inside Konoha.


    Also another reason why Yami Inuzuka won''t be Hokage is because... I will kill him within one month. This time I will make sure to go all out and plaster his brains, and be done with the brat. I give the signal for my army to stop, and so does the Konoha''s Army.


    They come for the meeting, and only I go forward. From the opposite side, comes the Hokage and the brat, Yami Inuzuka.


    We all intensely meet up in the middle, our armies ready to tear at each other''s throats.  We all looked at each other with serious looks on our faces.


    None of us said anything for a couple seconds,  I was the one to break the silence as I asked. "Where are my sons?"


    ....


    -General POV-


    "If you are asking if they are safe. Then yes they are alright." Said Yami with a calm look on his face.


    The Raikage frowned a little and asked. "I didn''t ask you that brat, I was asking the Hokage."


    Yami just shrugged at what the Raikage said. "Sure whatever I don''t care. I just thought that you would be worried that I might have. Tortured them to insanity while trying to get them to say Kumogakure secrets. Or that I could have used a Yamanaka on your successor and learned your secret Lightning Armor Jutsu. But sure, do go on, I guess you better talk to the Hokage."


    .


    The Hokage didn''t indicate his opinion on what Yami did. After all, to the enemy they must present a unified front.


    ....


    The Hokage and the Raikage continued their negotiations while Yami just looked from the sidelines. At the end Kumo would pay 1.8 Billion Ryo for the return of their 3000 Ninja with Killer B and Unruly A (the 3rd Raikage''s son).


    It was also decided that every week the transaction of 100 Kumo ninja will be let free to return to Kumo. Because releasing all 3000 of them at once wasn''t  a good idea.


    After Killer B and Unruly A were returned, Kumo will pay upfront and the rest of the transaction will be overlooked by Yami as the Hokage needs to return back to Konoha.


    Also a two year ceasefire was signed between the two parties. And that was the end of the deal.


    So they each separated and returned to their own camps. When he turned his back the Raikage got his sons and started walking back to his army. He had a dark smile on his face. Planning Yami''s demise, he would surprise attack Yami with his full army within a month.


    True they signed a deal and the Hokage was happy about the cease fire... but... that is all just paper... they are ninja after all. Why wouldn''t they attack them, just because they signed a piece of paper... No.. they are ninja, so why should they keep to their word.


    But that day, what no one noticed, was Yami''s own hidden... dark smile...


    .....


    A/N: While Hiruzen doesn''t necessarily like Yami, he won''t throw him at his enemies. I have seen some fanfics where Hiruzen is against the MC and then he acts irrationally. I HATE THAT. Hiruzen is a kind person and a little soft... BUT HE IS NOT DUMB. He is a born and bred killer after all.


    So they still portrayed a united front against the Raikage.


    ANNOUNCEMENT: For every 1000 Power Stones in this story, this will get +1 extra chapter that day.

 Chapter 138 - Of Treacheries & Sharingan

    Chapter 138


    Title: Of Treacheries & Sharingan


    ?Story by ????????????????????????????????????  ¨U  Edited by ????????????????????_?????????????


    ...


    ...


    ...


    With everything about the ceasefire treaty already settled upon, including my assignment of overseeing that Kumogakure held their end of the bargain and whatnot, I was returned the full command of the camp and troops.


    Good ol'' Hiruzen decided he was no longer needed and, as per the general war strategy (mostly my general war strategy), he had already made his way back to Konoha along with his personal Anbu Guard...


    Perfect!


    All according to my calculations, I have been left to my own devices, which are the same as always. Doing whatever is necessary for me to obtain what I came here looking for¡­


    On the road to perfection there''s a lot of sacrifeces (of other people) to be made. And I''m willing to do so¡­


    Now... about my first true ''cash-in'' in this war¡­


    ...


    Taking advantage of the almost real-time intel I get from my spy network, mainly coming from my thousands of insidiously attentive mosquito spy summons, I have started to receive the most interesting reports...


    I have thus been able to determine, with almost 100% certainty, that the 3rd Raikage Almighty A will go back on his word and try to increase his chances of killing me by launching a surprise attack...


    He sees this situation as his best chance to try to get his oh-so-yearned-for revenge against me, and maybe strike a decisive blow against Konoha... All in one fell swoop...


    Emphasis on the word ''try''...


    And while it is indeed true that both the Raikage and his Kumogakure would lose quite a lot of credibility by pulling such a sneaky and dishonorable stunt -even to the point of hindering any future dealing with another Hidden Village- it nonetheless seems like the 3rd Raikage considers me a bigger threat that whatever could come out of becoming unable to negotiate with the other Great Ninja Powers...


    He''s not stupid, I''ll give him that...


    Now, here''s the thing. Allowing such a move from my enemy is certain to bring many risks to me...


    For a good example, there is the (very) latent risk of the 3rd Raikage leading a tandem formation together with the Jinchuriki of the Hachibi... That (could) become a problem...


    I might even have to draw upon my Mangekyou Sharingan if that happens... But that would also give me a good reason to use it again since I haven''t had the need to use its power as of late...


    ...


    ...


    On another note about the Sharingan though... I am still annoyed about the fact that I can''t use the Susanoo...


    I''ve done some casual thinking while preparing my disgusting tea, and came up with an answer eventually...


    My theory regarding such an intriguing conundrum is that this is an exclusive power of the Uchiha themselves, and not the Sharingan per se...


    But what is the meaning of such profound words Yami? -Some may be asking themselves... Well, that just means that Susanoo is an innate power residing inside the soul of an Uchiha, indicating that it exists at birth, and technically not through the unlocking of the Mangekyou Sharingan, or any form of dojutsu for that matter...


    BUT that doesn''t suggest that the Mangekyou Sharingan has nothing to do with the Susanoo...


    I know about the strong emotions that trigger the Sharingan''s evolution into the MS¡­ But it goes without saying that they -also- shake the soul of the Uchiha to the core with all kinds of emotional energies colliding the ones against the others (love, rage, sadness...).


    This event, then, acts as the catalyst for the awakening of the Cursed Guardian of the Uchiha bloodline... The Susanoo is thus activated and is unconsciously called upon by the Uchiha, at the same time that the MS provides to the Susanoo the conduit that links both body and soul, enabling it to manifest itself around the user and into this world in a material expression of the soul...


    My theory grows increasingly feasible if judging by what happened in the anime...


    During the 4th Ninja War, Madara Uchiha was able to channel Susanoo without even having his eyes on his sockets, let alone having the MS activated. Then there is also Shisui Uchiha, who was able to use it (although in a weakened version) with only one eye...


    Of course, if we take into account that they were both geniuses, that there may be differences with what was depicted in the anime and what is true for my world, and many other variables... the horizon turns foggy once more...


    My theory so far is just that... a theory...


    That''s why it becomes clear as water that I will need to further study the souls of the Uchiha in order to unravel the truth behind the Susanoo...


    If I was reborn as an Uchiha, by now I would have already got my pair of flawless Eternal Mangekyou Sharingan... Along with the Full Body Susanoo... but no use crying over spilled milk I guess.


    ...


    ...


    Anyway, with the endless experiments I''ve run so far on my dead Uchiha comrades (bless them for keeping their eyes intact when dying), I have also learned how to determine what Mangekyo Sharingan Skill one gets from their pair of Sharingan, with a certain degree of success of around 53.7% which is acceptable... for now...


    So, if the Mangekyo is obtained through extreme torture (the streamlined method), the person being tortured to insanity would want to get away from these dire circ.u.mstances by whatever means available, so he would get Teleportation-oriented skill... Just like the first Mangekyou I had...


    ...


    Now, just like I did with the Susanoo, I have come to a conclusion by using the anime for reference...


    When Rin died by the hands of Kakashi, Obito refused this reality where his friend killed the girl he was in ''love'' with.


    Hence, what did he get? His own pocket dimension. That Kamui...  truly an amateur ability that one.


    Anyhow, moving on. Sasuke had great hatred towards Konoha and the people who had made his brother go through all that pain and self-sacrifice...


    Hence, he got The Eternal Black Flame, Amaterasu. He had already been led astray by Orochimaru giving in to his anger. But most importantly, he used to look up to his brother, only to then hate him, only to later kill him. Therefore it was to be expected that his MS would replicate his brother''s Skill reflecting the inevitable insecurities of Sasuke when he compared himself to Itachi.


    So... he got Amaterasu and the ability to control the Amaterasu... Representing his d.e.s.i.r.ed and final victory against his anger.


    ...


    It is so, that with the help of the people who were so¡­ kind as to donate their bodies to me tacitly, that I now possess the knowledge about these matters and am ready to construct my very own customized pair of Mangekyo Sharingan... The ones I have on currently are simply not enough to reach the apex...


    I have already set my eyes on one distinct specimen for the base of my Custom Mangekyou...


    Yes... it seems like Obito''s will have to do. Now THAT is an ability that allowed Kakashi for that small amount of time that he had Obito''s Mangekyo, to surpass both Sasuke and Naruto with the Sage Of Six Paths power... Which pretty much made them demigods...


    A smile appeared on my face, thankfully I was inside my tent and alone so no one noticed it...


    ...


    ...


    ...


    I WANT OBITO''S POWER...!!!!


    Nonetheless, I have to be patient about this... Luckily I''m good at playing the long game...


    I (already) have DNA from Obito, that was too easy to get. But I still need some more things before everything falls into place...


    But now... I have a bigger fish on my plate... The 3rd Raikage...


    He has to die in this 3rd Ninja War¡­ there is no other way around it.


    And he will definitely die¡­


    ¡­.


    -Time Skip. Two Months Later-


    I am at another dealing with the Raikage, for the weekly prisoner exchange.


    I am currently waiting for the Kumo Ninja to arrive, I was here to stop them from setting some type of trap or something like that. Hiraishin is difficult to counter, after all, I could literally be in Konoha and out of any danger in seconds... But give me a week and I could create a barrier made especially for my Hiraishin Mark...


    Obviously, though, I know that the Raikage sometimes coming late to these meetings might seem like a power play by the bastard. But why should I care...


    I would easily beg for my life if it meant I would live, after all, what is dying with pride really worth...?


    Let me tell you: Dog sh*t... That is what it''s worth... No one will remember you, no one will even recognize you, after which you have become maggot sh*t...


    So, in reality, it''s worth a sh*t''s sh*t...


    ...


    I also have my army of two thousand ninja behind me and another one hundred prisoners from the batch that we have been exchanging every week...


    I have made sure that the prisoners were underfed, to maintain them in a malnourished and emaciated state... I have also been secretly inoculating a special parasite I concocted on their intestines by tampering with their limited food rations...


    After all, the thing I hate most is having an unnecessary enemy... So they will all die within a year from some nasty infection or disease. Their bodies will weaken gradually so it won''t be traced back to me...


    This ''prisoner-killing parasite'' is particularly tough and most importantly, discreet. It becomes apparent that the victim is infected only when it''s too late and there''s organ failure present... Only the best medic-nin could detect it on time, but even then, the antidote is one only I know how to make. I don''t like leaving behind loose ends.


    And in the extreme event that they traced it back to me, they have no proof of me doing anything... Plus this is war, no use crying over a couple of thousand shinobi dying...


    ...


    I see that, as usual, the Raikage comes with his army flanking him from a distance. Another one of his meaningless ''power plays'', trying to show me that he''s enough to take me and my army alone... it isn''t though¡­ and I don''t need power plays or something like that. I know because it is a fact...


    ...


    The Raikage''s face is calm, his body shows nothing strange... But from the corner of my eye, I saw a Kumo Ninja swallow nervously.


    I act like I didn''t see anything like that, and just calmly walked forward and met with the Raikage in the middle of the battlefield.


    Our armies both facing each other... deathly still.... the Konoha Chunin level ninja are a little relaxed since they have already done this a dozen times and have built an instinctive reaction to drop their guard at something like this.


    I still have no reaction on my face as I extend my hand towards the Raikage doing the unison sign to represent no harsh feelings after this. He nodded calmly... and took my hand in a firm handshake...


    ¡­.


    -Third Person POV-


    As soon as the Raikage shook hands with Yami, he immediately squeezed hard. He had done this before to express his ''resentment''...


    But the real reason why he had done so, was so Yami wouldn''t be alarmed when he did this for real. He wanted Yami to instinctively drop his guard, even for one split second... That is all he needed...


    As his squeeze got even harder... The Raikage then immediately swung Yami by the arm, entered in his Lightning Armor mode, and...


    **Booom!!**


    He slammed Yami on the rock-solid ground, headfirst. Yami saw what was happening but had no time for his body to catch up with his Sharingan that he keeps activated during these meetings...


    Thanks only to the Jiongu, he was able to manually control his body to an absolute level and had created a one-way mirror-like membrane in front of his eyes so when he had the Sharingan active it wouldn''t show.


    Then the Raikage swung Yami around again like an enraged gorilla, but then...


    ***BOOOOOOM!!!!***


    Yami''s skull hit the ground again, even harder this time, creating a crater of considerable size under it. As his head was stuck underground.


    His body on the outside had suddenly gone limp¡­


    ...


    ...


    ...


    _______________________________


    _______________________________


    *Author''s Note*


    I had this plan for the MC about when he would learn about how the Mangekyo works. That is why his first Mangekyou gave him a Teleportation power. Because it was created during torture.


    P.S: I like to plan these things so I don''t leave any loopholes.?????


    ANNOUNCEMENT: For every 1000 Power Stones in this story, this will get +1 extra chapter that day.


    _______________________________


    _______________________________


    *Editor''s Note*


    Hello everyone, Chili_Dog here.


    First of all,  I just hope everyone''s doing well and staying safe. I wanted to take a little space under the chapter to publicly thank Joker once again for letting me resume my editing of his work.

 Chapter 139 - The Battle Breaks Out: Clash of Colosi!

    Chapter 139


    Title: The Battle Breaks Out: Clash of Colosi!


    ?Story by ????????????????????????????????????  ¨U  Edited by ????????????????????_?????????????


    ...


    ...


    ¡­


    The sounds of a certain spine cracking and breaking in terrible ways, still echoed all across the brumal valley that divided the Land of Frost and the Land of Hot Water.


    Yami''s body lay there limp... lifeless... No response whatsoever...


    His pulverised head underground, while the rest of him leaned against the hard frosted rock... The hot blood had started to melt the thin ice sheet that covered the chilly ground...


    But the 3rd Raikage was a cunning old fox...


    He had most positively learned from his mistakes during the 3rd Ninja War... He had been too ''lenient'' towards the little boy... He would be absolutely ruthless this time and make sure that nothing of the now-grown Yami, remained...


    Almighty A immediately goes out of his way to completely annihilate the young shinobi''s cadaver...


    <One Finger Hell Stab!>


    **Phoom* *Phoom* *Phoom* *Phoom**


    Without holding back one bit, he starts using his infamous technique in a relentless barrage of strikes, leaving Yami''s body full of bloody giant holes... His entire corpse had been cut, burned, and almost down-right disintegrated...


    Yami had now become a mushy paste of blood, tissue, and powdered bone... With only small parchments of what once was his Commander battle suit...


    As experienced in battle as he is smart, the Raikage, while looking at this own brutal handiwork, immediately felt that something didn''t add up...


    There was definitely something wrong here... Yami Inuzuka couldn''t be taken down this easily, regardless of his surprise attack being successful...


    He literally hadn''t even been able to react, let alone counterattack...


    Had the boy that escaped him that one time with only 12 years of age, really fallen prey to his own arrogance and carelessness...?


    Almighty A wasn''t convinced of this at all...


    ...


    ...


    And he was proven right just seconds later, as Yami''s remains shattered like mirrors simultaneously...


    ''Genjutsu...!!'' -Instantly deducted the 3rd Raikage. ''But when did he use it?! I didn''t perceive any signs at all...!''


    Then another Yami appeared...


    The Raikage was right about to engage Yami again, when suddenly...


    The world around him had started to crack like a mirror...


    **CRASH!!**


    He was being held by Killer B''s Hachibi tentacle, as it kept transferring chakra in order to break him out of the Genjutsu he had been put under...


    ...


    ¡­


    ...


    In the real world, the Konoha and Kumo ninja armies were already engaging in an intense battle...


    The chaos and straying Jutsu blasts all around were killing countless shinobi left and right...


    The sky had been painted red and blue, by the hundreds of fire and lightning bursts that constantly shook the earth as they dropped down like artillery shells on the firing lines of both armies...


    The smell of crispening flesh and blood... cries for help... desperate screams of pain...


    There was an all-out battle all around them. Their men were dying. But neither commander paid attention to them...


    Yet they also didn''t dare get distracted by it... Not even for an instant...


    One small mistake and the Raikage''s frightening speed would overwhelm Yami in tandem with the fierce onslaught of the Hachibi''s Jinchuuriki...


    But the opposite was also true... One wrong move and Yami''s Flying Thunder God (Hiraishin) could easily overwhelm the Raikage and Killer B...


    ...


    ...


    The Raikage was the first one to make his move. As the ground under him fractured from the pressure that the Raikage was putting into it as he kicked forward in a shocking display of speed... He dashed forward faster than any lightning Jutsu could!


    As Yami sensed the Raikage coming towards him (as he looked like he had disappeared to the untrained eye), he had an absolutely calm face... His eyes move at unimaginable speed as they analyze the Raikage''s muscle movements and try to predict his next move and trajectory.


    His weren''t just any pair of trained eyes; they were Sharingan trained to perfection...


    ''Analyse beyond the limits and surpass them!'' -Thought Yami, while trying to predict the Raikage down to the movement of his eyebrows...


    However, that proved too hard of a feat for him to accomplish... Even his thought process and training, coupled with his battle instinct, he simply couldn''t keep up with the 3rd Raikage''s speed... At least not at 100% accuracy...


    A testament of just how outrageous the Raikage''s speed and agility were.


    A monster in his own right... Almighty A...


    ...


    His <One Finger Hell Stab> was now ready to obliterate Yami''s head with a fast and harsh piercing motion... If one could catch a glimpse of the Raikage''s expression, it''s likely that it would be calm and the only thing that would show what he might be feeling is his sadistic look in his eyes that would be present...


    Nevertheless, something weird had happened as Yami donned a slightly teasing smirk on his face.


    The moment the Raikage''s <One Finger Hell Stab> was within arm''s reach of his body, Yami''s hand went to stop the Hell Stab...!


    ...


    People would consider this the height of humanly possible stupidity given that this technique could inflict considerable damage to even the Hachibi...


    What it could do to a mere human being is a completely different thing. One that had been previously been delivered to Yami''s illusion not more than a few moments ago...


    By the time the crackling finger of the Raikage is about to enter contact with the hand of the Inuzuka... Yami''s hand also got filled with chakra in less than a split second...


    <Wind Style: Chakra Scalpel!>


    Yami was about to use that technique to contend against the Raikage''s!


    But then...!


    **Fwosh**


    ...


    In a black flash, before anyone including the Raikage could notice... Yami was behind him!


    He teleported to a Hiraishin-formula kunai that he had secretly buried in the ground.


    Yami then swings his Wind Chakra Scalpel at the Raikage''s back. The Raikage couldn''t see behind his back but Yami was already known for his use of the Hiraishin. Predicting a flanking attack, the Raikage just jumped forward to dodge Yami''s attack.


    Yami was about to chase after the Raikage, but then he sensed an attack from Killer B... He too was careful and jumped out of the attack range with relative ease, as it was just Hachibi black ink that he threw him...


    As he looks at the Jinchuriki, Yami clicks his tongue... Killer B is in his full Hachibi Aspect transformation!


    The giant Hachibi had now opened his jaws, and while yin and yang chakra were rapidly gathering there in a pulsating dark purplish sphere... Killer B had already taken aim at Yami as he finished charging a ''small-sized'' Bijudama...


    And although it looked to be no bigger than 4.8 m (15.7 ft) in diameter, it was still more than enough to level half of the battlefield in an instant!


    Yami frowned at this scene and immediately started performing several hand signs at a fast pace; he was getting ready to create a barrier to contain that dreadful technique...


    However, the Raikage wouldn''t allow this, so he again moved in to engage Yami and provide support for the Hachibi-clad Killer B...


    He returned the favor by appearing behind Yami and...!


    ****PHHOOOOOM!!!****


    ...


    Almighty A had landed a clean heavy punch on his back, making Yami stop performing his hand signs as his face grimaced in pain...!


    He could feel the lightning chakra running through him, tearing through skin and muscle... Paralyzing his body and scrambling his chakra... The pain not allowing him to even teleport away with Hiraishin...


    He didn''t have enough time to turn off his pain receptors... And as the Raikage blitzed away just as fast as he came with his punch, the <Bijudama> was at that same moment fired by Killer B...


    The two goliaths of Kumogakure had established just how overwhelming an assault in perfect coordination by them can be...!


    *****BOOOOOOOM!!!!!*****


    ...


    ...


    Differing from an ordinary bomb-type attack, the explosion wasn''t like that of a ball of fire and more like a blinding flash of pure chakra being set free in a violent rampage, destroying any matter that stood in its way!


    Everything around the zone of impact had seemingly seized to exist...


    ...


    ...


    There were countless casualties from both sides of the conflict... The attack had, as expected, caused immense devastation all around...


    Trees, water, rock... metal... flesh... No matter. Anything in range of the giant blast had succ.u.mbed before the terrifying power of the second strongest Bijuu...


    ...


    ...


    ...


    -Yami POV-


    ...


    I can feel it... Everything burning right off, a catastrophic amount of pain hitting me like a train... This is simply too troublesome... I could have killed the Raikage ever since the fight started... Regardless of how fast he is...


    ...


    I would have taken one single attack, for me to end him and paint the ground red with his insides...


    Nonetheless I require his body to be as intact as possible for it to be useful to me... It is quite harder to win right out of the bat when you need to take care to not obliterate your opponents in the process...


    ...


    Abruptly, I look at my hands... Trembling from the shock of pain...


    And by hands, I mean my calcined hand bones...


    I could feel that all of my hair and half of my face had been burned off as well... Including half of my skull...


    Thankfully I saved the Sharingan inside my eye socket... I could at least protect my vital organs and my Jiongu hearts in that decisive moment...


    *Sigh*


    It seems like... I will have to get serious!


    I get up, and move my hands... Not by the use of the nerves or anything like that. My dark bony hands move by the use of the Dead Bone Pulse (Shikotsumyaku) from the Kaguya Clan...


    ...


    ...


    ...


    -General POV-


    ¡­


    The Kumo shinobi were happy that this attack had paid off. Their hefty sacrifice had been worth it. The Konoha ninja were now trying to scatter in despair...


    But then...


    ...


    *Fwoosh*


    ...


    The dust quickly cleared off, and in the pits of the crater... There it was...


    A true monster...


    The Kumo ninja were absolutely frozen by the terror crawling up their bodies... Even the Konoha ninja, on top of their morale being low; after looking at the scene in front of their eyes, they were scared senseless...


    What they saw...


    Was...


    ...


    ...


    Yami...


    ...


    ...


    He had half of his face and body burned off. Most of him was now charred meat or blackened bone... With both of his arms as calcined skeletal limbs...


    But what had truly shocked and scared them... Were the flesh and muscle on the young man''s body, being restored out of nothing and at an alarming rate...


    As if it was the work of a Genjutsu of some kind... Maybe it was...? They couldn''t know for sure...


    His face had also regenerated, even faster than the rest of his body... Tattoos of different linear shapes started spreading all over Yami''s body like water rolling down a cascade...


    <Yin Seal: Release...!>


    All of his body had regenerated in the blink of an eye. Yami''s hair had also turned completely white. His body couldn''t possibly keep up with the Jutsu and produce enough pigments to dye his new hair roots.


    Yami had a cold demeanor that looked like you would be frozen if you got too close...


    He clasped his hands together, and a golden light radiated from where he Yami stood... No... More like from his entire physique...


    It was as if Yami himself, had become a miniature sun, emitting a blinding flash similar to that of the Bijudama...


    ...


    ...


    ...


    A/N: Yami truly is a monster now... I am not going to nerf him. In this chapter I showed his terrifying regeneration... next will be his power.


    ANNOUNCEMENT: For every 1000 Power Stones in this story, this will get +1 extra chapter that day.


    P.S: I will post again soon I know...????... but that doesn''t mean that I am happy baka????.. tsuntsun...????????????

 Chapter 140 - Changes in a split second...

    Chapter 140


    Title: Changes in a split second...


    ....


    Yami just regenerated and looked towards the Raikage. His body still shinning like he was a miniature sun.


    "It seems like I will have to start getting serious now." Said Yami with a creeping calm voice. The Raikage frowned at what Yami said but he didn''t let his emotions take the better of him and attack Yami immediately.


    So Killer B in his eight tails form was the one to attack. It threw another giant tailed beast bomb. Yami just waved three handsings and the Tailed Beast Bomb got absorbed by a giant Fuinjutsu seal that appeared mid air and far away an explosion was heard.


    This technique is very chakra consuming... if Yami was the average Ninja that is.... but he had the Tsinade''s seal that stored chakra together with five hearts and each of them are at S Rank chakra amount. So truly Yami didn''t even feel the drain. Plus his chakra was already regenerating at an alarming rate. He was s.u.c.k.i.n.g and purifying the huge amount of Dark Chakra that was produced by all of the negative emotions around the battlefield. Where Dark Emotions are overwhelming...


    Suddenly as the Raikage was about to attack again, Yami just dropkicks the ground.


    *BOOOOM*


    Creating a huge earthquake, destabilizing the Raikage''s footing. Obviously the Raikage was only destabilized for a split second... but that was enough time as a giant golden fist that seemingly came out of nowhere


    punched him...


    *pow*


    And threw him away...


    *booom*


    The Raikage was punched very hard.


    Going through many trees and rocks before his body halted. On the outside the Raikage didn''t have a scratch on him but he still had a frowning face as he touched his c.h.e.s.t.


    ''That was shock wave damage.'' Thought the Raikage, as he analysed what happened... he didn''t see it... but...


    *fwosh*


    He went back at the side of the Eight Tails B, he looked at his opponent and he saw Yami who now had white silver hair, with a smile on his face.


    Yami just clapped his hands again... and the Raikage was able to see what had hit him... a transparent buddha like golden statue with a hundred arms.


    <100-Type Guanyin Bodhisattva>


    A monk technique that had been modified by Yami to suit his needs. The statue was gigantic, easily matching the eight tails in size. The eight tails got ready to shoot another tailed beast bomb but before it even had time to gather the chakra to do that. The giant statue behind Yami opened its mouth, and....


    *booom*


    It fired a laser beam towards the eight tails. The speed of the attack was too fast for the eight tails giant body to dodge, but it still decided to bring his hand forward to defend itself.


    *booom*


    As soon as the giant golden laser beams and the Eight Tail''s palm collide a burning feeling fills the air as the hand of the eight tails is clearly burning from the laser who is spreading around and hitting people all over when the beam made contact with the eight tails hand. Killer B just winced a little and it held the beam back and he was still able to form a tailed beast bomb of the smaller variety and threw it towards Yami, simply waved another handsign and...


    <Summoning Jutsu: Mountain Leech Stomach>


    A giant flesh substance wraps all around Yami...


    *booom*


    As the mini tailed beast bomb hit him and even the Raikage went on top of the head of the eight tails and waved through handsigns as he dropped his lightning armour. Suddenly black lightning appeared on his hands...


    <Black Panther>


    The lightning transformed inti two panthers made out of electricity. So he sent the black lightning towards Yami''s fleshy defense. Yami of course wasn''t affected, even by the lightning shock. The meat ball around Yami burned and got electrocuted but it simply regenerated.


    Yami waved through another sequence of handsigns.


    <Earth Style: Swamp of the Underworld>


    All around Yami, the land turned into a swamp. He also put a full on Kage level chakra into the jutsu, making a huge and deep sinkhole all around him. Even the Eight Tails got stuck into it as the mud was infused with chakra to make it stick more to its opponents.


    *BOOOM*


    Completely obliterating it, but... Yami had already teleported out of there.


    ''That was a distraction all along. He had moved away from his meaty shield.'' Both Killer B and the Raikage came to the same conclusion.


    Suddenly...


    *fowsh*


    A purple square barrier is formed all around the Raikage and Killer B and... the Raikage used his lightning armour to help his perception and see if he could find any weakness in the barrier.


    *fwosh*


    The eight tails disappeared from under its feet. The Raikage was worried for B for a split second as he was falling down. Yami took that opportunity as he appeared from underground. The Raikage was mid air so he couldn''t dodge so he used his attack <Hell Stab> again, to attack the technique Yami threw at him.


    The Raikage frowned and it looked for any weak spots in my defense. But then...


    Three normal looking kunai were thrown behind the Raikage. He looked around to see who did that and saw... it was Yami''s shadow clones. The kunai had his Hisraishin mark as he...


    Appeared behind the Raikage... and...


    *swish*


    Yami used his super strength as he used <Wind Style: Chakra Scalpel>...and...m


    ....the Raikage''s body was pierced from his back... but due to the strong defensive properties of the lightning armor. But it definitely pierced the Raikage on his back. Then Yami does a slashing motion and a big cut appears in the back of the Raikage.


    Then while still midair dark wings appear on Yami''s back with all of his strength he grabs the arm of the  Raikage.


    *crack*


    And due to using all of his strength on it the Raikage''s arm is completely broken. Yamo tugs it away... and rips the arm of the Raikage''s body.


    When the Raikage sees this he immediately understands that Yami hasn''t been going all out.


    ''This kid will kill us all, if I am injured,  me and B won''t be able to hold him back.'' Thought the Raikage, while clutching his stump and using the heat of the electricity in the wound, burning it which stopped the bleeding. As soon as he does so, he screams to the top of his lungs...


    "RETREAAAAAAT."


    And he finally touched the ground... in a split second the battlefield had changed. The Kumo ninja were the ones in peril now....


    Yami had a calm look all along as he looked at the Raikage. With the Eight Tails teleported out of the way¡­ he could easily handle the Raikage¡­.


    ¡­.


    A/N: Yami is not nerffed or anything like that. He is simply trying to not kill the Raikage in one shot. He wants the Raikage''s techniques.


    ANNOUNCEMENT: For every 1000 Power Stones in this story, this will get +1 extra chapter that day.

 Chapter 141 - Almighty A Faces Defeat...

    Title: Almighty A Faces Defeat...


    ?Story by ????????????????????????????????????  ¨U  Edited by ????????????????????_?????????????


    ...


    ...


    ¡­


    The Raikage immediately ordered the retreat of his soldiers. He might not be a match anymore for the monster in front of him, but he can hold him back...


    He looks at his son, Unruly A, and their eyes meet each other. His son wouldn''t be useful in a battle against Yami, so he had gone to fight against the other Konoha Ninja. Whereas he is still an S rank ninja, he killed a lot of them.


    As the 3rd Raikage''s and his son''s eyes meet the Raikage, even with his arm ripped off of his torso he smiles at his son.


    ''It would be shameful and sad, for his last memory to be of me fearing for my life...'' Thought the Raikage. ''I took a gamble and lost... now I will pay the price...!''


    He simply says something to his son, who is far away and can''t hear him, but from reading his lips he can tell what his father said:


    "It''s your turn next...!!"


    The Raikage''s son... No... the new Raikage... tears came out of his eyes, but his face hardened as he screamed at his soldiers.


    "RETREAT...!!!"


    Ordering them... he followed his father''s wishes. The 3rd Raikage was a little relieved at this.


    This all happened in a split second and he then turned towards Yami who had a calm look on his face.


    ''To hold him back long enough I need to put some distance between us.'' -Contemplated the Raikage, using all of his vast life experience to try and use the best possible move.


    The Raikage jumped back in blinking speeds.


    Yami just looked at this calmly and asked...


    "Why are you putting so much distance between us?... If you want to make sure it hits me, then you should get up close and fire... Or is it that you''re afraid of letting even a part of me out of your field of vision by getting close...?


    If that''s the case, then it is a foolish thought. Distance only has meaning in a fight between equals...


    With you and me, distance holds no meaning at all...!


    Watch!"


    **Fwosh**


    In a black flash, Yami appeared in front of the Raikage and placed his hand on the Raikage''s c.h.e.s.t, right above his heart.


    "If I do this, my hand is almost instantly at your heart." Said Yami with an absolute calmness to his voice. He wasn''t bragging or anything... He was simply stating a fact...


    When he hit the Raikage''s back, he had already marked him with the Hiraishin Formula. The Raikage was already dead.... he just didn''t know it...


    Yami''s hand easily went through the Raikage''s defenses, and with a simple Wind Scalpel, he touched his heart...


    **Cough!**


    The Raikage coughed blood... His eyes slowly got hollow as his body started falling on the ground... Yami as a medical ninja is terrifyingly powerful, even with him simply touching his victim is a death sentence to his enemies.  The Raikage, except for his missing arm, no other outward injuries were on his body during the time of its death.


    Immediately when the Konoha ninja saw the Raikage fall... they cheered...


    From the couple of thousands of ninja from before... there are now only around five hundred... That is with counting the injured too...


    Today they lost comrades, friends, and family.... they fell in the pit of despair earlier when they saw Yami hit by the Bijudama... But now..... they see Yami as their undefeated champion...


    Kumogakure didn''t lose that many of its ninja members, due to their large numbers and the now de facto 4th Raikage helping them...


    Yami just simply raised his fist in victory and screamed:


    "THE BATTLE IS WON...!!!"


    Even while saying this, he had a bright smile on his face... But what no one had noticed were the black tendrils going towards the Raikage''s heart... Ripping it out and healing back the injury so no one would notice that the still-beating was heart gone...


    ...


    ...


    ...


    After the battle ended, Kurenai looked to be a little shaken as she saw all of the dead bodies around her... It smelled horrible... She watched some Kunoichi who had her eyes wide open in shock, as half of her face was gone...


    The whole place was covered in blood and mutilated body parts lying around...


    She would have thrown up if Yami hadn''t taught his students techniques on how to handle situations like this. Plus, team 13 already had their first kills a long time ago.


    "Ahhhhh...!!"


    Kurenai heard a scream in a bundle of different bodies that seemed to have fallen on top of each other. She went to help but suddenly she felt a hand on her shoulder...


    "That is just a desperate Kumo ninja..." Said someone behind her, she turned around and said:


    "Yami-sensei..."


    Immediately the vision of Yami almost dying by the Bijudama appeared in her mind... She almost cried from this as she went to hug Yami desperately.


    "Y-Yami... -sensei... I am glad you are okay...!" Sniffled Kurenai as she tugged on Yami''s tattered shirt...


    She felt Yami hug her and say. "I am only Yami''s shadow clones, we were ordered by him to collect all of the bodies... He wants the soldiers to rest and relax now that the fighting is over...


    He will take care of the rest, like healing the injured and cleaning up the battlefield..."


    ...


    ...


    Yami''s clone crouched down to her level and pinched her cheeks into a forced smile.


    "Shenshei shtop pleash!" -Complained Kurenai in her childish voice.


    "Hmm. A girl like you should smile more often... Overcast skies blot out the sun, and that always brings people''s spirits down. So why not let the sun shine... even if just a while longer¡­ ne?"


    Said shadow clone Yami, with a tender smile on his face while he lightly patted Kurenai''s head.


    He looked like a gentle and caring older brother looking out for his cute little sister...


    ...


    ...


    After some time it had gotten dark outside, as Yami (well more like his clones) ''buried'' the bodies. Coincidentally, a  dozen Uchiha and Hyuga clan members'' remains had been ''destroyed'' during the battle¡­


    It was actually very useful for Yami that Killer B had used the Hachibi''s Bijudama so freely¡­ The thought of something being wrong with the disappearance of so many Clansmen with dojutsu, would never cross anyone''s mind...


    Two hours later, and Yami''s thousands of clones had taken care of everything that he wanted.


    ...


    ...


    The remaining Jonin from Yami''s army came into his tent. Now, there were only 20 Jonin alive. Two of them having to retire due to one losing his kidneys, and the other''s eyes getting slashed with a kunai, leaving him blind...


    They all sat down, they looked a little nervously towards the head of the table where Yami was sitting on his slightly decorated chair. His hair had turned back to coal-black since his body was back to producing black pigment.


    He looked fresh and vigorous as if nothing had happened in the last few hours...


    Yami smiled mildly to all of the Jonin in the room. They were holding their breaths for what Yami would do next...


    Would he give chase to the now-weakened Kumo shinobi?


    Would he order a full invasion into the Land Of Lightning?


    Or would he rather let them lick their wounds while they waited for the reinforcements to arrive...?


    Yami could see what they were all thinking. His smile was still on his face as he got up from his chair and went to the side of the table, where there was a floating teapot with weird seals all around it.


    "Good evening Konoha Jonin. Please, relax..."


    "We will talk about what happened and what comes next... But before addressing that... let us drink some tea..."


    ...


    ...


    ...


    _______________________________


    _______________________________


    A/N: Yami¡­ he really is a sc.u.mbag¡­ and I love him.


    ANNOUNCEMENT: For every 1000 Power Stones in this story, this will get +1 extra chapter that day.

 Chapter 142 - The Debrief: Yami’s Authority Challenged?

    Title: The Debrief: Yami''s Authority Challenged?


    ?Story by ????????????????????????????????????  ¨U  Edited by ????????????????????_?????????????


    ...


    ...


    ¡­


    "Good evening Konoha Jonin. Please, relax..."


    "We will talk about what happened and what comes next... But before addressing that... let us drink some tea..." -I said to them with a calm and serene voice, as if I already knew what would happen and how I would deal with it...


    THAT is what a true leader must be. He must be a good liar to his people. Some leaders even tend to lie to themselves as well¡­


    Not me though. Those who lie to themselves are only welcoming death¡­


    Anyway, I am simply asserting my dominance when doing something like pouring tea for myself. Because they know how confident I am that they won''t rush the debrief...


    I feel even better than yesterday, as if I had woken up from the most refreshing and deep sleep¡­ I can feel a monstrous chakra more dense than anything I had felt before¡­ Right at the tip of every nerve in my body...


    All due to my discarding of my previous Jiongu Lightning Heart with a brand new one¡­


    The 3rd Raikage''s...


    I can feel that he truly wasn''t your normal Kage... his chakra levels were monstrous. No wonder he tied with a tailed beast in a battle of endurance... No Raikage will ever be his equal¡­


    ¡­


    After pouring myself some tea I go back to my seat and look at all of them in the eyes, one by one. They might be Jonin but my stare makes them a little nervous. After all, I did just take a point-blank Bijudama two hours ago and I am now comfortably drinking tea, without so much as a scratch on my face...


    ¡­


    "I have the Raikage''s body.... and have decided to sue for peace". -I told them about my decision.


    "I would like to refute this, commander." -Said one of the Jonin, as he stood up to make his voice reach every corner of the tent.


    By his looks, I can easily tell he is an Uchiha, plus the Uchiha clan symbol in one of his sleeves is a clear giveaway...


    ''Well then... time to make an example out of this little sh*t¡­''


    I calmly looked at him.


    "I am sorry, you must have misunderstood... I wasn''t asking for your opinion... I was simply informing you of my decision." -I stated calmly, leaving no room for discussion.


    The Uchiha seemed like he wanted to say something, but he saw the look on my eyes. He just sat down with an unsatisfied face, folding his arms to express his disp.l.e.a.s.u.r.e.


    I don''t say anything and keep looking at the Uchiha. The others seem to get a little uncomfortable when they notice me staring at him intently...


    "Uchiha, if you want to say something then say it. Don''t be a little cat now. At least stand by your own words, do not simply return to your seat as if nothing came out of your mouth... Because something did come out...


    If you feel that you are in the right, then we can settle this in a swift duel¡­" -I stated as the Uchiha just sweated a little and reluctantly said:


    "N-No... everything is okay c-commander."


    I just got up and walked around the table until I stood behind the Uchiha''s seat. I then utter to him in a cold voice:


    "Listen now little man, dare to question me one more time, and I will have your head on a stake for insubordination¡­ I''ll even nail your head on it myself...


    DO YOU UNDERSTAND ME??!!"


    ¡­


    I shouted the last part daring him to question my authority one more time. He just looked at me... at my cold back eyes... His bravado went away never to come back, and a look of fear appeared on his face. Not even a Sharingan could stare at my eyes if they belonged to a coward...


    I could easily guess what he was thinking... He is most likely remembering what happened to Danzo and his clan... Almost drawn to extinction just because of one man''s mistake...


    Trying to f*ck with me...


    He surely doesn''t want to do the same...


    ¡­


    "I SAID DO YOU UNDERSTAND ME??!! YOU LITTLE SH*T!!!" -I repeated the question loudly, as my eyes widened with a psychotic look appearing on my face¡­


    More than one Jonin recovered their posture in their seats...


    I don''t want to be seen as a pushover like the 3rd Hokage, but fighting anymore would truly be useless to me. I already have a high reputation, I have the Raikage''s body and the Hachibi''s Chakra...


    "Y-Yes Commander Yami...! This... will never happen again!" -Answered the Uchiha truthfully with his tail between his legs.


    Hmmm... I see... So even the Uchiha aren''t dumb enough to cross me. Good... or I would be forced to eliminate their Clan...


    I would then have to keep Mikoto alive, and since I would have killed her Clan, she definitely wouldn''t listen to me... So I would have my way with her until Sasuke was born...


    The reincarnation of one of Hagoromo''s children of legend... Indra... He will prove an important tool for me in the future, I''m sure...


    ...


    ...


    ...


    -General POV-


    While Yami was dominating the Jonin on his camp and showing the Uchiha who is the one in charge, something else was happening in Konohagakure.


    In the Inuzuka training grounds, Shiro was just laying down, unlike his usual sinful, erratic, and chaotic behavior. He had one eye open as he looked at Hachi and his team training...


    Even though Yami didn''t say anything specifically, Shiro already knows who Hachi''s father is...


    He couldn''t help but judge these people in his mind: ''How do these dumb people not even understand the basic sh*t?  It''s just a two plus two... I mean why would Yami even allow someone else in his house when he has those things right under...?''


    ...


    ...


    ...


    -Shiro POV-


    The style was modified a little by Yami to suit Hachi''s more flexible joints. Hachi had a more thin-than-fat build... but even with all that I can''t help but think if Hachi is adopted...


    I mean that kid is NOTHING like Yami. Yes, there are signs here and there but nothing that truly defines Yami... Like his Alpha and domineering attitude... If Yami walks in a room, everyone will HAVE to look at him, because his presence demands it.


    Hachi is NOTHING like Yami, he can''t even come close to Yami''s greatness. NO ONE CAN COMPREHEND YAMI... no one can win against Yami...


    ¡­


    ¡­


    Thinking about how his opponents try to outsmart him¡­ ''You''re not going to give him a chance to use his super strength? Not good. You''ve completely misunderstood Yami''s power¡­''


    That''s right, Yami isn''t feared because he can use his super strength to punch mountains into dust... Yes, his strength is terrifying, but that alone would not have been enough to subdue those Konoha Clans and Land of Fire Nobles who would rather die than obey.


    There was only one reason why those as powerful as the Uchiha, and even the Daimyo, do what Yami wants them to do, despite their motives:


    Just because he''s too powerful...


    All of Yami''s abilities are far beyond anyone else''s... ''You''re going to take precautions against his Jutsu and monstrous strength? Your plans aren''t good enough.''


    ''You''re going to take precautions against everything else? Your plans STILL aren''t good enough...''


    Even if everyone that opposed him were to combine their minds, and take precautions against unfortunate events like the sky falling or the Earth splitting, it wouldn''t matter. Yami''s abilities would be far beyond any of their plans...


    ...Anyway, I wonder if I could somehow get me some sake... Yami has ordered everyone to NOT sell me any sake...


    Damn... I can even sense dozens of Yami''s clones running around down by the sewers of the village¡­ There''s no escaping his eyes and ears...


    Even while he is so far away, he still controls everything in Konoha...


    ¡­


    Well, guess I''ll have to settle for that b*tch Chimei to come lick some yakisoba off my balls...


    ...


    ...


    ...


    _______________________________


    _______________________________


    *Author''s Note*


    A little bit of a look into Shiro''s head... he has been with Yami for a long time. So he can see the signs that Yami and Hachi have a connection. Also, his view of Yami is like that of a god, he sees Yami as this godly figure who can do no wrong move, and that Yami will never lose in anything.


    P.S: Shiro has copies of the abilities of the zero tails, and his chakra amount is A rank and chakra regeneration is S rank because he can use negative emotions to regenerate chakra. His overall power would be around S but on the low side, nowhere near Raikage, Hiruzen, or even Sanin level. But yes, Shiro is strong, but currently not useful to Yami, since he can''t keep up with Yami''s fast growth in power.


    P.P.S: Sorry for the late bonus chapter update, it was because I was asleep when the 2k power stones were reached.


    ANNOUNCEMENT: For every 1000 Power Stones in this story, this will get +1 extra chapter that day.


    Check Out My P.A.T.R.E.O.N


    (23 chapters in adavance)


    pa treon.com/HolyJoke

 Chapter 143 - The Undead...

    Chapter 143


    Title: The Undead...


    ....


    -General POV-


    In the Land of Lightning, inside the Hidden Cloud Village, a funeral was being held. People from all over the Land of Lightning were gathered here for the funeral of the 3rd Raikage. Some people who didn''t even know him directly were crying, the 3rd Raikage was greatly loved amongst his citizens, he was a pillar that seemed unbeatable, he was a cocoon of security, as long as he was alive they knew that the enemy would never torment them¡­  he put fear in his enemies hearts and relief in hearts of the people of the Land Of Lightning.


    Amongst the grieving people was the one called Unruly A, the 3rd Raikage''s son and the soon to be 4rth Raikage. He didn''t have any tears on his face, just a look of determination with his eyes holding a shed of sadness within them.


    People came and went, but he still just stayed like that, unmoving. But still greeting any important person that came to offer his condolences. No matter how fake they were he just accepted them, he knew that the Land Of Lightning was only so successful because of the continuity of the good Raikage being chosen. Their economy and military has always been the best amongst the Hidden Villages, they have always had the best ninja together with Hidden Stone, and the economy has always been strong due to the mountains of gold and trade within their land.


    ....


    After some time when everyone went away, A just looked down. He clenched his fist, he was angry at himself for being so weak. He just clenched his fist and unable to hold in his anger anymore, he walked towards one of the walls and...


    *boooom*


    Punched straight through it. But his anger and sadness wasn''t appeased at all. So he continued punching walls.


    *boom* *booom*


    He went through many walls like this. Until he was outside in one of the balconies, looking down at the Hidden Cloud Village from the mountain. He couldn''t hold it in anymore and tears came out of his eyes....


    ''Damn it old man. You weren''t supposed to die like this.'' Thought A, as he kept thinking back on his father''s death. His smiling father who had just gotten his arm ripped off¡­ but he still smiled to reassure his son.


    In this private and emotional moment, A suddenly hears the steps of someone walking from behind him.


    "Yo bro whatcha doing here alone, when you should be at... home." Said B, while still trying to chain his words together to form a rap¡­ in a way B was trying to comfort his brother in his own strange way.


    He knew what was happening to his brother, he too was saddened by the death of his father in all but blood.


    A was sad at this, so he didn''t turn around to look at B, because he didn''t want his little brother to see him cry¡­ he must be strong...


    "B.... I want you to go to the Storm Cloud Ravine, and train your Tailed Beast Bomb. You will not be engaging the enemy. If the enemy attacks the village, take them out with your long range Tailed Beast Bomb." Ordered A, he said this because he didn''t want B to fight in this war anymore or he might lose his brother in this too.  "As the Raikage! I will protect this village to the very end. That is what my old man wanted."


    Said A full of determination...


    ....


    ...


    ...


    ...


    On the other side of the war borders, many strange things were happening, Bloodline Limit users were disappearing with strange circ.u.mstances in the Land Of Water, and there has been proof found that it was the Kiri Village Elders. So the situation heated up¡­ and it was expected of a civil war to break out in Kiri. After all, the bloodline limit clans were given the most dangerous missions, and together with their children being taken like this. They couldn''t take it anymore and things started heating up.


    Due to this situation Konoha could finally take a breather. And the ordeal with Yami Inuzuka killing someone monstrous like the 3rd Raikage, spread all around the lands.


    His Bingo Book entry also changed with his bounty changing from 127 million to 200 million. The 73 million was all added to his bounty by the Land of Lightning. His name was spoken far and wide, and he was given the ''Flee on Sight'' order.


    .....


    ¡­.


    ¡­.


    ¡­.


    ...


    In the Hidden Stone Village, the Tsuchikage Onoki and the Hidden Stone Village Council members all sat around a table with Onoki at the head of it.


    "So the 4th Raikage is a green brat huh."  Said Onoki as he looked through some intelligence reports. "It also seems like some new hotshot just jumped up two steps. Konoha truly has some amazing talents sometimes."


    Then he showed to the other council members the report page he was holding.


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    FLEE ON SIGHT ORDER


    Nicknames: Red Fang, Sky Slayer, Demon Child Yami, Dark Flash, Yami of the 10,000 Jutsu,  Yami the Undead ninja,


    Rank: Jounin (S rank)


    Net Worth: Unknown (estimated in the billions of Ryo)


    Bounty: 200 mill


    Missions Record:


    S-68


    A-123


    B-63


    D-86


    Estimated Abilities: Dangerous in long range, close range and medium range. Be aware of his Genjutsu, Taijutsu especially with the power he has displayed lately, ninjutsu is very lethal. He is considered unkillable by known methods, it is assumed that the brain might be his weak point.


    If confronted.... FLEE ON SIGHT....


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    When the council members looked at this, they seemed nervous but then one of them said. "But Tsuchikage -sama, I think that Yami Inuzuka isn''t a threat, and wouldn''t the Atomic Dismantling Jutsu directly counter Yami Inuzuka''s regenerative power."


    Onoki nods at this. "Good attention to detail Jama, but he also knows the same jutsu like that yellow haired brat, so his speed would be very troublesome."


    The other council members nod at this. "Then how should we handle him in case of an attack from him."


    Onoki just scratches his chin in while deep inside his thoughts, and in the end he just says. "That is what we are here to figure out, after all, I believe that soon the Hidden Cloud Village will either sue for peace or they will get eliminated by either Konoha or some other Villages. Their losses have been enormous lately, and that might give the one who has lately been secretly taking control over the smaller hidden villages from the shadows enough courage to go in an all out attack against the Land of Lightning."


    The other elders all nodded in agreement at this. They could just send some Jinchuriki to deal with Minato and Fugaku, but Yami is a whole different type of monster. There is no definite weakness to Yami¡­. He is way too versatile for anyone to be able to take advantage against him.


    AUTHOR NOTE;


    If you want to support me:


    Check Out My P.A.T.R.E.O.N


    (23 chapters in advance)


    pa treon.com/HolyJoker


    JOIN THE DISCORD: discord.gg/M9hghrm


    ANNOUNCEMENT: For every 1000 Power Stones in this story, this will get +1 extra chapter that day.

 Chapter 144 - Yamis son...

    Chapter 144


    Title: Yami''s son...


    ?Story by ????????????????????????????????????  ¨U  Edited by ????????????????????_?????????????


    ...


    ...


    ¡­


    -Hachi POV-


    I slowly open my eyes and look around me.... hmm... I seem to have fallen asleep during training in the Inuzuka Compound.


    "So you are awake, sleepyhead."


    When I heard this sound I immediately turned around and looked at Yami standing upside down in a tree... but Yami is in the front lines... so this must be one of his clones.


    I rub my eyes a little and yawn as I say. "I must have just lied down to take a nap. It seems I didn''t notice it and slept a lot more than intended."


    Yami''s clone suddenly smiles. "So... do you remember anything before you fell asleep."


    I think back on it. "Uhhh.... no... not really... why did something happen."


    The clone just shrugged. "Nope, nothing happened. I just was worried about you, and wanted to ask how training has been going lately."


    "It''s been good." I decided to just say that and not elaborate any more. I mean... I have made such progress that seems to be at a snail''s pace compared to when Yami taught me. I could beat a Chunin with just a week of training.


    Now... I haven''t learned anything... I mean sure I learned about some new ninjutsu... but I don''t have enough chakra to use any of them. The Senju library is a treasure trove but I can''t really use most of the things, so I give them to Yami''s clones, then they modify techniques to perfectly fit me.


    Yami said that as I grow older he will continue to give me the modified techniques that I gave to him.


    I see that the shadow clone seemed a little unsure of something as he frowned and finally said. "I think that you should be deployed where the original Yami is. He will help keep you alive and he can protect you."


    Lately, I have been understanding more and more of what Yami is trying to teach me. Even though he doesn''t say it... well he will probably never say it... but I know that he does care about me in his way.


    He will never truly hurt me and will always protect me... he is like a dad... but he is way too young to be one.


    I consider the clone''s offer... I know that I will be safe if I go there... but I also know that I will never grow if I will always be under Yami''s wing.


    I decided to tell my decision to Yami''s clone. "I know that I will be safe if I do that.... but I know that I wouldn''t grow if I was under Yami''s wing."


    While saying this, I was a little scared... I knew that I would have to go into a dangerous situation and might die. But strangely... I have never felt calmer, I can think clearly and my face is cold, with no emotion in it. Portraying nothing of what I am thinking.


    The clone just looked at me with a strange twinkle in his eyes... then out of nowhere, something that I have never heard Yami or any of his clones do happens. He laughed...


    "Hahahahahaha." His laughter was very strange, it was too trained. It also had a certain coldness to it.


    "You are my-.... something else aren''t you... Hachi."


    I didn''t understand what he meant by that, but as the clone continued laughing I noticed that during certain intervals the smile would be a little wider. As if he had heard the funniest inside joke ever.


    ...


    ...


    -Two Months Later- (Yami''s age 19)


    ...


    -Land of Water Borders-


    Two months¡­ and there has been no battle, only small skirmishes against the Mist Village¡­ I was currently on a patrol run. It also seemed that even with the Senju name I am still treated as a genin. Which is nice and all that, but my patrol team is my teammates, Shoto, Momo, and Kai -sensei.


    Suddenly something strange happened as Kai -sensei signaled us to stop as we were jumping trees.


    Did he maybe notice any mist ninja around here? Who knew... as we were thinking this...


    *Fwosh*


    Sensei disappeared from where he was...


    Another noise was heard and then a thud... later the teacher came back with a ten-year-old girl under his arm, the kunoichi seemed to be struggling but she was already tied up by Kai.


    "It was her and some other genin. No wonder the Hidden Mist keeps losing ninja-like flies. They don''t even have Jonin teams for a talented kid like her." Said Kai -sensei as he threw the girl on the ground.


    When I look at her closer, I see that she has a special tape on her mouth to stop her from talking. She has long auburn hair, she has green eyes and jade-like skin, she seems to be around ten years old. She suddenly looks at me and my teammates with fire in her eyes.


    Then sensei rips off the tape of her mouth and says. "Ok start speaking kid. I want to know who you are. Someone with your chakra at your age wouldn''t be a no-name ninja... so there is a high chance you are from a clan. Tell me which one and you will live."


    Immediately when Kai says that, he releases killing intent towards her. She jumps a little back in fright, but she simply answers.  "M -My name is... Mei Terumi."


    Kai immediately just widely smiles at this and stops his killing intent.  "Terumi... that is indeed a very good last name... you will be very useful to Yami -sama."


    Kai -sensei seemed to know something about the Terumi surname. I must say that even though I read a lot¡­ I don''t know about every clan in the elemental nations.


    The girl seems a little uncomfortable and seems to be looking around for an escape route. When she sees none she looks down in resignation.


    ...


    ...


    As we are walking back to the Konoha camp, I notice the girl called Mei Terumi looking at me, and out of nowhere she just asked. "Do you have any relation with Yami Inuzuka.... you sure look a lot like him."


    I just look at her face, for the first time since we have started walking. Sensei waved a hand sign, signaling me to try and befriend her for information.


    "Every Uchiha and half of the civilians in Konoja look like Yami Inuzuka... Why, have you met him before or something." I decided to continue talking about Yami like this since she genuinely seemed interested when we walked about Yami.


    "No not really.... but I did hear of him... he killed my father in the 2nd Ninja War." Said Mei Terumi with a hateful look in her eyes, though her face stayed calm.


    ...


    ...


    ...


    _______________________________


    *Author''s Note*


    Mei''s father was just some random shinobi that the MC killed by blasting his brains.


    P.S. Hachi is 7 years old now and has m.a.t.u.r.ed a little now.


    P.P.S: Have annoying cousins over... tch... uncle should have pulled out, instead of having these dumbasses running around doing stupid sh*t.


    ANNOUNCEMENT: For every 1000 Power Stones in this story, this will get +1 extra chapter that day.

 Chapter 145 - Tied Mei, Confused Hachi

    Chapter 145


    Title: Tied Mei, Confused Hachi


    ?Story by ????????????????????????????????????  ¨U  Edited by ????????????????????_?????????????


    ...


    ...


    ¡­


    Hachi looks at the tied up Mei when she just told him that Yami killed her father. He was a little surprised, but he could understand that Yami has already probably killed hundreds or maybe even thousands of ninja.


    He¡­ isn''t necessarily fond of Yami, but he cares about him. He is like a big brother who in his way tries to teach him life lessons.


    But that still didn''t stop him from sympathizing with Mei. At the oldest she should have been five years old at the time, when her father died, depending on the year he died.


    His father also died, before he was even born, so he can understand, having no father growing up can be hard.


    Mei noticed the pitying look Hachi had on his eyes. She frowned and said. "I don''t need your sympathy little boy..."


    Hachi''s eye twitches a little when he was being called a little boy. But he still calmly answers. "Ohh... is that so... and how old are you... Little girl?"


    Even while tied up and walking, Mei puffed her c.h.e.s.t in pride and said. "Heh... I am nine years old."


    "Well I am seven, so there isn''t any big difference." Answered Hachi, as he calmed himself, not allowing Mei to get inside his head and get a rise out of him.


    ...


    ...


    ...


    Then as they were walking slowly, night came and they set up camp. Kai, since he is a Jonin and part of the Inuzuka clan, he has certain privileges. He waves some hand signs and slams his palm on the ground.


    *Poof*


    Smoke appears as a giant bat, as big as a horse carriage comes out of the smoke. The bat looked towards Kai and a smile appeared on the bat''s face. Thought to the genins and Mei, the smile looked terrifying on the giant bat''s face.


    "Hey Kai how have you been?" Asks the bat in a strange, old raspy voice.


    Kai just shrugs. "I have been okay, thank you for asking."


    The bat nods, that question had more layers to it than your average greeting. Since the bat is his bat summon, it knows about Kai''s body condition. He doesn''t have a lot of time left, plus he has been with Kai for many years now so they know each other pretty well.


    Kai then gives the bat a message to give to the Konoha Camp Leader in the frontlines against the Hidden Mist Village, this Camp Leader is Orochimaru.


    They are notifying him that everything is okay and that they will be a little late. Plus the message was filled with dozens of secret messages that identified that it was him.


    ...


    ...


    ...


    Then later as everyone was asleep, Hachi was the one on watch during that time. He was simply leaning on a tree. His eyes were closed since in the darkness they wouldn''t be that useful.


    He concentrated on his sense of smell and hearing. He could smell different natural smells, no smells of humans around. His ear also slightly twitches now and then, listening to the small wires he had put around the camp perimeter. They would slightly shift if anything made contact with them.


    He was on full alert as he heard someone approach him. It wasn''t anyone from outside the camp... it was from the inside. It was their prisoner Mei Terumi... She had a cold look in her face and simply said:


    "I think... No... I know... I really hate you Hachi..."


    This coming out of nowhere from her surprised Hachi a little and he looked confused.


    "What is that supposed to mean¡­? I know that we are enemies so there is no need for you to tell me that you hate me. I know that you already do."


    "Then how about this... I loathe you Hachi Senju!!" -Repeated Mei, she was still tied up and didn''t dare try to escape since she knew that her life is only hanging by a string, but she truly got annoyed by how Hachi acted.


    "Why do you try to act so kind when you know what is going to happen to me...?!"


    Hachi winced a little at this, he knows that she is probably going to get tortured for information.


    But what he didn''t know was... that reality isn''t that simple and nice. And Mei reminded him by saying with eyes full of despair. "I can''t handle it anymore."


    Then she took a deep breath and her eyes turned dull. She had forced her emotions to dull and not feel such despair.


    "I will be r*ped... that is what will happen to me. As soon as I am of age I will continuously be r*ped! I will continue bearing children until I die, for the Konoha clan that will be lucky to get me as their property... So stop acting like you are nice and all that...!"


    When Hachi heard this... he felt as if his whole world started shaking, his pupils dilated, due to his young age he hadn''t taken a possibility like this into account. His seven-year-old mind couldn''t comprehend humanity''s cruelty.


    He couldn''t understand that even when humanity takes over the planet they have no one else to fight and no other species to dominate... they will start fighting amongst themselves.


    But Mei didn''t let him even comprehend what she said as she dropped another bomb on him.


    "Judging by the actions so far, the Inuzuka Clan will get me. So who will have their way with me when I grow up.... will it be some unknown Inuzuka or maybe Yami Inuzuka himself will have his way with me.


    I heard that even when he was young he was always ruthless. Especially with the killing of the 3rd Raikage they call him Yami the Undying Ninja..."


    Then she gets close to Hachi and while in shock he can''t react as she whispers into his ear. "But behind closed doors, they call him a monster in human skin. Yami the Monster. The boogie man, that mothers scare their children to make them obey¡­ but he exists and is quite real."


    As she was about to continue saying more¡­.


    *Fwosh*


    Suddenly something even more shocking happened as a hand came out of Hachi''s stomach and grabbed Mei by the throat... Hachi immediately looked at the hand coming out of his stomach¡­ The hand was completely covered in darkness and he instinctively went for an attack towards the hand.


    But... as soon as he was about to¡­ the hand and the rest of something made out of the darkness came from Hachi''s stomach and¡­.


    Hachi fell on the ground unconscious, there was no attack whatsoever, even his team was also unconscious as they didn''t even wake up from the noise of Hachi''s body hitting the ground.


    The creature with a human form was completely covered in darkness and it just looked at Mei, who was terrified of the monster in front of her. She wanted to scream but couldn''t, she wanted to say something but couldn''t. Her throat was choked so hard, she could feel her neck was almost snapped like a twig.


    But the person covered in darkness didn''t seem to care while he simply said...


    "You shouldn''t confuse little Hachi like this... He is so young... He isn''t quite ready to handle the world yet...


    His mind is not m.a.t.u.r.e enough to comprehend cruelty like this..."


    Then she felt her vision go dark too, as she heard that being said by a surprisingly, young sounding voice.


    ...


    ...


    ...


    _______________________________


    *Author''s Note*


    Yes, the chapters before this when Yami''s clone was there as Hachi got up from his ''nap'' something happened¡­ which Hachi doesn''t remember...


    P.S: The Power Stones reached 3000 when I was asleep. So that is why this was uploaded a little late.


    ANNOUNCEMENT: For every 1000 Power Stones in this story, this will get +1 extra chapter that day.

 Chapter 146 - Cold...

    Chapter 146


    Title: Cold...


    ?Story by ????????????????????????????????????  ¨U  Edited by ????????????????????_?????????????


    ...


    ...


    ¡­


    -Hachi POV-


    As I wake up in the morning, I feel a slight headache... oh right.... yesterday during the time it was my time to stay watch, I accidentally bumped my head... I really should be more careful these days and shouldn''t try to train during these times, or it could be fatal.


    I see that our Jonin teacher Kai was the last watch. He came back and just gave us all a casual greeting, then as Mei woke up I felt a strange sense of D¨¦j¨¤ vu.... well whatever it doesn''t matter, everyone has this every now and then.


    I got up and started walking towards Mei, I noticed that when she looked at me she too had a strange look in her eyes, before it went away.


    Anyway time to go and escort her to the main camp¡­ I wonder what will happen to her. I hope she talks and doesn''t need to be tortured for information or something like that.


    ...


    ...


    -General POV-


    Orochimaru looked at the letter that Kai had sent to him.... he couldn''t help but frown a little. He was one of the people he had tried to bribe to get him to spy on Yami...


    ''Those Inuzuka are like dogs around Yami. Even though the Inuzuka used to be generally weak and didn''t have anything astonishing about them. Most likely producing one solid Jonin per generation.


    But even since Yami became the clan head they have skyrocketed into the big leagues, recently pumping out Jonin numbers at the same caliber as the Uchiha.


    ''Two... No... Just one more year and the Inuzuka will be the top clan in Konoha.'' Analyzed Orochimaru, his yellow eyes shining with a dangerous light in them. Especially now, he has got a Lava Kekkei Genkai... and he can''t even experiment on her.


    He knows that Yami wouldn''t allow them, and no matter how big his curiosity was. He knew that Yami would kill him, he probably wouldn''t even get a backlash from it. He knows that Yami would get rid of him like he did Danzo, carefully planned with no repercussions.


    Orochimaru hated to admit it, but Yami was better at handling people than him. He can see the darkness in people. Orochimaru had noticed the first time that he saw Yami as a kid...


    It was as if he had seen right through him and exposed all of his secrets. With those soulless and cold dark eyes of his, he has had his guard up against Orochimaru ever since he was a kid.


    ''DAMN IT!!'' Screamed Orochimaru inside of his mind. He even accidentally ripped the paper in his hands.


    Yami had grown so fast that he didn''t even have a chance to decide if maybe he should have killed him. No one could expect a 12-year-old to survive a confrontation with the Raikage who is considered a monster, and at 18 he killed that monster, which would need 2-3 S rank ninja to even hold him back.


    ''Damn... that kid has grown to be monstrous....''


    ...


    ...


    ...


    But on the other hand, at Yami''s camp, in the frontlines against the Hidden Cloud Village. Which was still technically in the war, but ever since the 3rd Raikage has died an agreement was made.


    Because they went back on their word, it was decided that the 3rd Raikage''s body would be held by Yami Inuzuka until the war is over.


    During that time, the Cloud Village won''t attack, if they do, Yami will destroy the 3rd Raikage''s body and he will go rampaging on the Land of Lightning. But there was also a monetary compensation, which Yami took and made them all sign complicated deals that if a lawyer from his first life didn''t read them, no one in his world would notice the plot holes in the 137 contracts that were issued by Yami.


    Yami was ''meditating'' and his clones were guarding the tent, but in actuality, he was inside his tent with a dark-skinned kunoichi. She is a slender and well-endowed woman of average height. She has dark skin, golden irises, and black hair. Her hair is waist-length and kept in a ponytail with chin-length bangs framing the sides of her face, and a Cloud Village headband on her forehead.


    Suddenly as she was talking Yami looked at her... he had dozens of human spies in the Land of Lightning. Raining from male, female, elderly, and even some children. They also have different professions from, ninja, politician, the mayor, and so on...


    But usually, the one who delivers him messages is the woman in front of him. She had dull emotionless eyes because Yami had deleted all of her memories and emotions, just like he does with every one of his spies.


    He can''t help and sneak a look into her voluptuous body. He feels himself get a little hard when he sees this, so he simply said. "Take your clothes off and come here."


    The woman got up and took her clothes off. She continued talking with Yami and telling him certain information. But since Yami already knew this from the mosquitoes, he considered this information useless.


    Yami frowned a little when he saw the emotionless look on her face. So he simply said. "Turn your emotions on."


    Suddenly her emotionless eyes got a certain light on them and when she looked at Yami''s body she blushed a little and looked away.


    Yami just g.r.o.a.n.e.d in annoyance. Him being able to see right through her acting got him turned off. Truly being able to read people so good is annoying to Yami sometimes. He can''t enjoy p.r.o.s.t.i.t.u.t.es and other lying b*tches because he can see right through their acts.


    "Just turn off your emotions and come here.... uuuhh... what''s your name again... Matilda, Maria, or something."


    The woman was not bothered at all by Yami not even remembering her name as she started answering. "My name is M-."


    "Stop, I don''t care." Ordered Yami with a certain annoyance in his voice. His son had disappointed him quite badly recently. He had to have the clone he had sealed inside of Hachi appear and delete Hachi''s and Mai''s memories due to Hachi going into a panic. The woman''s eyes turned emotionless again.


    "Anyway...my last child has been very disappointing, he is seven and is barely even a chunin. So... with your strong Lighting Element and my genes, do you think we could make a better child."


    -Says Yami, not even asking her if she is okay with it. He already knows that the woman in front of him is closer to a machine than a human. True it is a good machine since he programmed her brain.... but still, she is just a tool.


    *Sigh* ''I like some emotions into the women I bed... at least I have to lie and manipulate them. So that makes it a little more exciting. This is boring as hell¡­ Well, I guess time to make the heir to the Inuzuka Clan.


    This child shall be recognized as mine, and the child will be less disappointing than Hachi.''


    -Calculated Yami, as the woman entered his hot tub and impaled herself with his rod... No m.o.a.n of p.l.e.a.s.u.r.e or anything came out of her...


    ''This sucks...''


    ...


    ...


    ...


    _______________________________


    *Author''s Note*


    Ahhh... Young Hachi has already become a disappointment to his father.????????????????


    Also, Yami is still his usual cold self and is thinking of having another child. This time it''s planned.... but Yami.... why would he need another child.... what is he planning...


    P.S: The woman looks kinda like Yoruichi from Bleach.


    P.P.S: This is the cold truth about Yami, he doesn''t care about gender, he is cold to both women and men equally¡­. Sooo¡­. Yay¡­. Gender Equality?.... ok¡­ I will be out now...????


    ANNOUNCEMENT: For every 1000 Power Stones in this story, this will get +1 extra chapter that day.

 Chapter 147 - The Puppet and the Puppeteer...

    Chapter 147


    Title: The Puppet and the Puppeteer...


    ?Story by ????????????????????????????????????  ¨U  Edited by ????????????????????_?????????????


    ...


    ...


    ¡­


    Yami wakes up, unlike the normal person who would yawn or instinctively stretch themselves. He just suddenly opened his eyes, there was no trace of sleeplessness in them. It was as if he just blinked and wasn''t asleep for nine hours.


    ''I have started loathing the necessity of sleep. Like death, it puts even the powerful on their backs.'' Though Yami as he calmly got up. His immortal body does not feel any tiredness, fatigue, or anything like that.


    Even if he fights for a whole year against an army, he would still be able to fight them all¡­


    He saw that his little spy was still on his bed, and couldn''t help but admire her voluptuous body.


    ....


    -Yami POV-


    If it wasn''t about her emotionless state, she would give me a nice night. I guess as expected, she didn''t even m.o.a.n once during the hours upon hours we had s*x yesterday. I guess the brain wipe was successful... no p.l.e.a.s.u.r.e or pain¡­ she can''t be manipulated by either...


    As I go and start putting on my clothes I can''t help but think about a good saying in my last life. ''Everything is about s*x.''


    But I always added something more in my head. ''Everything is about s*x. Except for s*x. S*x is about power.''


    As she gets closer she stops and looks at me with her eyebrows frowned in annoyance, as she said. "Yami.... tell me to do you... you know... do things.... with some of the kunoichi in the camp."


    My immediate answer would be yes. I have fu*ked almost every pretty girl in my camp, it gets boring around here, so I have to keep myself entertained while my shadow clones take care of everything else.


    But of course, I keep these activities a secret.... hope one of them invites me to her wedding... I want to see the face of the loser who will get my sloppy seconds.


    Of course, I tell none of this to Tsume. I just mentioned to her as I say. "Walk with me Teume."


    She seems confused, but she complies nonetheless. We walk a little away from everyone''s hearing. We are at the very edges of the camp and there are no people around. So I took this moment to say to Tsume. "Tell me... how do you think humanity evolved."


    Tsume immediately frowned when I said that. "Listen Yami, I know what you are going to do. No matter what I say, I know that you will change the conversation without me even noticing... so I simply want a direct answer right now."


    I can''t help but be amused by her reaction. Since she has let her hair down she is a bang able 7.5/10... but still she is a little too young to be able to escape my bullsh*t speech.


    "What do you think of human intelligence Tsume?" I asked her with a certain playfulness in my voice.


    Tsume just sighs when she heard this. "Damn... you are so annoying Yami. Can''t you be serious for once."


    I just smirked at her.  "I think that the human intellect is like peac.o.c.k feathers."


    Immediately that gets her curiosity. "Just an extravagant display intended to attract a mate. All of art, literature, a bit of the Kage, greatest ninja, intellectuals, and even the Konoha.


    They are all just an elaborate mating ritual. Maybe it doesn''t matter that we have accomplished so much for the basest of reasons. But, of course, the peac.o.c.k can barely fly. It lives in the dirt, pecking insects out of the muck, consoling itself with its great beauty. Just like humanity, consoling itself with its intelligence, never understanding the true meaning of intelligence and power."


    Tsume immediately had a conflicted look in her eyes. Yep... when saying that type of sh*t in front of someone, definitely confuses them. Maybe I should use this as a way to confuse my enemies... now that would be amusing...


    .


    But enough amus.e.m.e.nt for now. I can''t let Tsume get too jealous or she might decide that I don''t appreciate her enough, so it''s better to spy on me for someone else... then I would have to kill her. It would be a shame since she has been so useful to me. Hmmm... if I am not mistaken, she will soon be 18 right...


    I run through my memories for a second, a quick read through them... and yep... her birthday was a week ago... I forgot and didn''t give her anything... well I don''t even celebrate my birthdays but whatever, some people like to be sentimental like this.


    I mean to other people, it''s like celebrating, for being one year closer to death... glad I won''t have to worry about old age or that would kinda suck...


    I just smiled at Tsume and put one of my hands behind my back and smiled towards her. "Well now Tsume, I know that this might be a little late but..."


    I pull the hand from my back and there is a bouquet. "Happy Birthday Tsume... sorry I have been a little busy lately."


    Tsume seems happy at this but then she suddenly frowns. "Yami... are you changing the subject again."


    I just wink at her. "Of course.... yes..."


    She immediately started screaming around and complaining. I just zoned her out and simply said. "It isn''t important why I do what I do... I was simply bored in the camp. I had urges and I satisfied them."


    I could see the look into her eyes, I could feel the decade of manipulation that I have done on Tsume take effect. Her face seems conflicted, her eyes a little dilated, her breathing has sped up a little and she has a small blush on her face.


    I just smile a little... she was manipulated to fall in love, head over heels for me...


    "W -Well... I -I can... be your..." Tsume whispers something under her breath.


    By her saying that I can already analyze that she doesn''t know how to express her feelings and what to say.


    I noticed Tsume has to use her kunoichi training, and the techniques Yami taught her so she can calm herself. Finally, with an even and calm voice, she asked. "Yami... do you think we could be a family... as in a wife and husband."


    No... Little Tsume... but I couldn''t say that. So I just looked down at my hand and said...


    ...


    ...


    _______________________________


    _______________________________


    *Author''s Note*


    Soon some BIG sh*t will be happening.... it will be mind-blowing... I just need to set the stage for it...


    P.S: Yami has manipulated Tsume her whole life. He has slowly and patiently built her to be who she is... even though he didn''t use any memory manipulation techniques on her... Tsume is already Yami''s puppet...


    ANNOUNCEMENT: For every 1000 Power Stones in this story, this will get +1 extra chapter that day.

 Chapter 148 - The Cube...

    Chapter 148


    Title: The Cube...


    ?Story by ????????????????????????????????????  ¨U  Edited by ????????????????????_?????????????


    ...


    ...


    ¡­


    When I heard what Tsume said, I just looked at my hand and clenched it. "Tsume... do you know what marriage means for people at my level."


    She looks at me with a strange look in her eyes. She has noticed that I am in one of my moods, where I will explain something to her that will rock her world.


    "My marriage will have to be a useful tool for the Inuzuka Clan to rise higher. We already have a very stable internal stability in the clan. Now we need external... Sorry Tsume.... but I can''t..."


    As I say this, I also noticed her eyes started tearing up. She was almost crying as she said to me in a low voice. "You are always so smart aren''t you Yami.... but couldn''t you find a way to let me down slowly could you?"


    Well, that would be a waste of time little Tsume, but then again she is delusional enough to think that I would marry someone like her. She is a 7.5/10.... and a soon to be fully-fledged Jonin. But that doesn''t mean anything, I have had certain plans recently and I have finally figured out whom I will marry.


    Plus I honestly don''t give a sh*t about the Inuzuka, except that they are good pets and a good stepping stone.


    Still, even though I am thinking that what I say to her is a different thing. Manipulation is a subtle art... it needs care and attention...


    With that, my face has a difficult look on it, as I say: "We could still...be together... though... it will have to be a secret."


    Tsume looks at me and tears up even more. "You are horrible Yami."


    Even while she says that she still decides to hug me. I just hug her with one arm and pet her head.


    She truly is a pitiful human being... so attached to me... so clingy... she would die for me... she will be my side b*tch.... or as they say it here... she will be my concubine. She can''t be with anyone else or it might ruin the internal structure the Inuzuka Clan has.


    .....


    Then after some consulting and her talking to me about things. Tsume decided to go and rest.... she will think about this. I know what she will choose.... but I still give her the false illusion of freedom of choice... which she doesn''t have.


    After that, I went back to my tent and went back to work on my little project.


    I take the red cube out of my jacket (storage seal inside). The cube is around the size of my palm, and it has Fuinjutsu seals all around it. The blank soul of the zero tails inside had stopped thrashing around.


    This little thing was something I didn''t plan on creating at all in the beginning. But now that I have learned that it is possible... I am going to use it...


    I can''t help but shake a little with excitement... I am gonna do it... now I am going to achieve unimaginable strength. I can barely control myself from using the cube. It isn''t complete yet... but even now I can faintly sense the strange energy it produces.


    In this world there exist a lot of strange items, like the Chakra Fruit, Samehada, Kusanagi and so many more. I have thousands of clones all around the world currently, searching for items like them... Currently, there aren''t any items at the level of the Chakra Fruit or anything like that...


    But I look at my cube again... but this little thing will easily surpass the feats of the chakra fruit...


    Suddenly I sense one of my clones dispelled, and I get its memories. I bite my thumb, just enough to draw a slight amount of blood as I slam my hand in the ground.


    *poof*


    And a golden cane with a ring at the end appeared in front of me... this was the item that my clone that dispelled itself just got. It''s called The Shuigu...


    The Shuigu is a special tool that, when wielded, it can produce a limitless amount of water. If the wielder has control of the Shuigu, it creates water according to their wills, such as rain that falls across a region or a constant stream flowing from its tip, the water can take shape if the wielder d.e.s.i.r.es.


    Truly a good tool, it was from the time of the Sage of The Six paths. It was given to a family by the Sage personally as a gift. It can only be used by the bloodline of that family.... but I wouldn''t call myself the Best Fuinjutsu User alive if I couldn''t easily take care of something this small.


    I was able to get this staff while looking through my memories of my first life. There were sometimes where I searched about this thing on google and I remembered about it. My other shadow clones are also on similar missions... finding things that I could remember about my first life memories, during the time I searched for Naruto...


    I slowly put the cane close to the Red Cube and with my connection that I have with the cube, I activated another command in it. As soon as the cane touched the cube, strange markings went along the cane, as it slowly turned into liquid substance and went inside the cube... the zero tails'' soul was screeching inside the cube, it was in pain... but that was good too. Since it will create more dark chakra and slightly reinforce the Cube even more...


    Then suddenly I notice something underneath me...


    *fwosh*


    In a flash my hand digs underground and catches what it was.... it was a little mouse struggling to get away from my grasp... it was a normal mouse... I keep those in the lab below this tent... this little guy must have dug his way out...


    Nope, he is not one of my rats... its chakra is also about average rat level chakra.... is this rat a spy... I use the Sharingan and look for anything indicating this rat is a spy.... there is none...


    So I decided, and then ripped out the little thing''s memories. Then saw through them...


    ....


    Well, I guess he was just another rat. I have run 137 tests on it and it truly was just your everyday rat...  it is brain dead now... but it''s still useful though...


    Well I guess using the cube on the rat would wield some data... and see how potent the Cube is.... this is MY creation so I am expecting something amazing...


    I just use the strange energy produced by the cube and throw it towards the rat...


    Let''s see what happens to you little guy...


    ...


    ...


    ...


    _______________________________


    _______________________________


    *Author''s Note*


    The Red Cube will be something that should be possible but has never been explored in the Naruto world... I won''t give any more than that¡­ it is an unexplored idea that has a relationship with a certain aspect of chakra¡­


    ANNOUNCEMENT: For every 1000 Power Stones in this story, this will get +1 extra chapter that day.


    P.S: On ******* the 3rd Ninja war is over.?????

 Chapter 149 - The Test & The Meeting

    Chapter 149


    Title: The Test & The Meeting


    ?Story by ????????????????????????????????????  ¨U  Edited by ????????????????????_?????????????


    ...


    ...


    ¡­


    Yami looked at the mouse as the strange energy produced by the cube entered the little thing. As soon as it did so the mouse stopped struggling and a black cocoon surrounded the small mouse, it looked like a black egg, that could easily fit on the palm of someone''s hand.


    And as the minutes passed by, with only Yami''s breathing as the only sound in the room. Suddenly the cocoon started expanding little by little until it went from being able to fit on someone''s palm.


    To become as big as a chair, and that is when the cocoon started cracking open like an egg. The cocoon parts slowly fell down and as it did so it turned into smoke. But Yami didn''t even look at it, what he looked at was the not so little rat anymore.


    It was a creature in the form of a rat, and it was so big that if he stood up, it would reach up to his knees.


    The rat was already brain dead from Yami''s ceaseless examination on it, to try and see if he was some spy for someone else. So the rat just stood there, not moving at all.


    Yami noticed that not only was the rat bigger, but his brown fur from before had turned to black fur. His eyes also turned to completely red and under that fur, he could see the muscles under that thing.


    He analyzed that this little creature went from a normal weak rat, to probably being able to rip apart the average ninja academy student to death, even his chakra was at that of the average human.


    Though your average Genin would wipe the floor with this rat...


    But as the rat''s teeth but his hand, they couldn''t even draw blood. Yami''s skin has been modified like the rest of his body. It is as hard as a rock, and even though the rat might be stronger, he is still only a rat. No matter how it changes, it still couldn''t bite through rock.


    As he saw this Yami also noted that the rat''s teeth had become more jagged, like the fangs of a predatory animal.


    He noticed that even though the creature is brain dead, it still had the instinct to protect itself.


    Also, the small cut that he made, healed quite quickly.


    ''Hmmm... this is interesting.'' Thought Yami as he kept, making small cuts on the rat. And as it tried to bite him, Yami simply sent a chakra shockwave to its brain. Immediately knocking him out.


    ....


    Then after a whole hour of Yami experimenting on the thing. He finally got what he wanted to know and killed it off, also burning its body.


    ''No one is getting anything from my research.'' Thought Yami as he walked out of his tent. He made a clone to act like him, and...


    *fwosh*


    ....


    -GENERAL POV-


    Mei Terumi wasn''t someone cruel or anything like that, all she wanted in life was to have a normal family, a normal husband, a normal life.


    But as she got closer to the camp, she could feel like her own blood was lava. His stomach was churning in disgust. She knows that she will become something that she will hate. Someone without power or familiar love, someone that when she births enough children she will simply be killed.


    The reality drowned on her like an ocean, her legs were noodles, her eyes felt like they had bleach in them and her whole body was cold.


    She was feeling physically sick from this, and when they arrived at the Konoha Camp. Her worries skyrocketed, as she saw someone that she knew of, to be waiting at the gates.


    It was Orochimaru, and he had a predatory look on his golden eyes. His hands were in his pockets as he leaned on a tree.


    His malicious smile, made her feel chills down her spine as if the ice was poured on her back. Even the cold mask she had on started cracking.


    But suddenly out of nowhere.


    A dark flash appeared, and a person came out of it. He was wearing a Jonin uniform, his hair was black and slightly spiky, but what caught Mei''s attention wasn''t his smile or his friendly looking face.... it was his eyes as he looked at Orochimaru. He had a strange cold look in his eyes.


    ...


    Orochimaru''s face now had a frown on it, and his eyes had a certain gleam to them. When he noticed that Yami was here he didn''t protest, but he was displeased, he wanted to experiment on Mei a little before Yami got her.


    Plus unlike the other people in here, he noticed that this wasn''t just Yami''s clone, it was Yami himself, so he can''t go around messing with him. He knows how dangerous Yami can be...


    *tch* ''That was unfortunate if only he didn''t have these little mosquitoes all over my camp, monitoring everything that happened in here. I would have had time to experiment with the girl before he came here. If those mosquitoes didn''t exist he wouldn''t be this troublesome...'' Thought Orochimaru as he went back inside the camp towards his tent. Ready to experiment on some unlucky fellow.


    ...


    As Orochimaru was walking back to his camp. Yami just looked at Orochimaru''s back. Contemplating something, his brain brewing hundreds of different ideas, schemes, and plans.


    But even as he was thinking this he looked back towards Hachi, Kai, Shoto, Momo, and Mei.


    Kai, as an Inuzuka, obviously has a lot of respect for Yami. After all, he is the one who rose the Inuzuka Clan to the powerhouse it is today.


    "Well hello, there child. I hope you didn''t have a hard journey. I know how hard it is for children to be dragged into war, away from their families."


    When Mei heard what Yami said, she somehow found the courage to speak in front of him. Whether it was Yami''s friendly-looking face or her desperation that gave her the courage to speak.


    Mei didn''t know this, as she said: "My father is dead, killed by you during the 2nd Ninja War, he was the pillar and protector of the Terumi Clan. My mother also died of sickness not long after that. My clan is in decline and will most likely die out because of you, Yami Inuzuka."


    When she said this Mei predicted a lot of ways Yami would act, he could be angry, not care, or even surprised. But his reaction truly baffled her as Yami simply just... laughed...


    "HAHAHAHAHA!!" His voice melodious and his laughter loud, as if he had just heard the funniest joke ever told...


    ...


    ...


    ...


    _______________________________


    *Author''s Note*


    Hope you guys like it... I just gave you a glimpse of The Cube''s power. It is nowhere near complete yet... and his real power isn''t stated yet. Soon... VERY soon... things will pick up the pace... BIG THINGS WILL HAPPEN... we will also see what Yami''s clones have been up to. Also, Yami is now strong enough that other people don''t want in NO WAY to push his buttons and make him angry. Even Orochimaru is wary of him.


    P.S: MY LITTLE BROTHER GOT BITTEN BY A FISH AT THE BEACH SO I HAD TO DRIVE HIM TO THE HOSPITAL... that is why I updated so late today. It was really just a scratch, most likely caused by a rock... the little sh*t worried me for nothing.????????????


    ANNOUNCEMENT: For every 1000 Power Stones in this story, this will get +1 extra chapter that day.


    WILL UPDATE ANOTHER CHAPTER SOON.

 Chapter 150 - The Wood Style User...

    Chapter 150


    Title: The Wood Style User...


    ....


    As Yami laughed at little Mei''s speech. She couldn''t help but be angry like this, the way she saw it Yami seemed like he was mocking her father''s death. Even Hachi and his Genin teammates seemed a little perturbed by this. Though Kai Inuzuka, their jonin teacher has a look of absolute certainty, he trusted Yami, and knew that he would make the right decision. Kai''s and the other Inuzuka''s loyalties have been nurtured for a long time by Yami, or what they assumed to be his shadow clone.


    Finally Mei couldn''t take anymore of Yami''s ridicule so she decided to angrily say. "What are you laughing for, Yami Inuzuka."


    When he heard this, Yami finally stopped laughing, but his face still had a smirk. "Wait, so you are real about this... hahahahaha."


    Yami started laughing again, but this time as Mei was about to say something angrily again. Yami suddenly stopped laughing, his face morphed into a cold look as he said. "We are ninja, we leave death and destruction behind each of our steps. How many people''s lives do you think your father ruined, hundreds or thousands.... If you understand that, then don''t start speaking stupid things little girl. Your father died as he lived... just another nameless ninja."


    Mei''s fists were shaking in anger. But this time when she wanted to say something and rebuke Yami. She saw the look in his eyes, unlike his smiley face and friendly look in his eyes that he had before. Now his face was stone cold and his eyes even colder. She knew that one more talk out of line and the next thing she would feel would be her head flying off her body. So in the end, she kept her anger inside her and didn''t say anything.


    When Yami saw this, he seemed strangely pleased. "You may survive us yet, little Mei."


    Then he went forward and offered the girl his hand. She seemed unsure for a split second, thinking of the horrible things that will happen to her. But she pushed down all of the fear and hesitation as she took his hand.


    When Hachi saw this, he felt a little weird, as if his stomach fell to the ground. He wanted to say something, but he couldn''t...


    *fwosh!*


    So just like that, in a black flash, Yami and Mei both disappeared. But not before Yami, used a telepathic message that gave different orders to the mosquitoes close by.


    ....


    They are then teleported to Yami''s tent, back in his Komoha Camp. Yami just looks at Mei and suddenly, her eyes become hollow, indicating that she is in a Genjutsu.


    ''Hmmm... if I am to use the Lava and Boil style... my strength would be  raised by another 20%.''  Thought Yami as he prepared for another experiment, his lips morphed into a sinister smile


    ....


    Back in Konoha something else was happening, one of Yami''s clones was in one of the Inuzuka Orphanages when he looked at one of the kids in there, and smiled towards them.


    "Yamato, you seem nervous, is something going on." Asked the Yami''s shadow clone, as he looked at Yamato.


    Yamato is an orphan that was ''randomly'' selected to be in the Inuzuka Orphanage.


    ''All according to plan.'' Thinks Yami''s clone as it reviews the plan that the original came up with.


    Yamato with uncertainty nodded and gently touched the ground.


    The kids laughed at this since it seems fun to them, but the matron has a shocked look on her face. She truly understands what this means, this is the legendary Wood Release.


    Yami''s clone has a mischievous smile on his face. Things were all according to his plan.


    ....


    When that happened, Konoha had a shock. Finally, after many generations, another Wood Style user has appeared, and he is a member of the Inuzuka Clan.


    Immediately as soon as it was announced, Yami was ''surprised so he started negotiating certain things with the Konoha Village.


    Of course, Yamato would still be part of the Inuzuka Clan, no one would even dare dispute someone like Yami on this.


    But he has now become more of a symbol now, of a new hope. To the civilians this was a miracle that could be attributed to fate. But the ninja were different, most of them already pieced together that this was a little too much of a coincidence. They immediately started suspecting Yami, of some type of... interference with Yamato''s so called ''natural'' wood release.


    No matter how things developed though, one thing could be agreed on by everyone. The Inuzuka Clan, just got another rising star. Also with the Crystal Release user Guren, that didn''t cause too much of an uproar, because even though Crystal Release Kekkei Genkai is  strong, it doesn''t have any legendary feats like the Wood Style.


    Just like this, two more months passed, the Third Ninja War was still going on. But for Yami, it was no problem at all, he kept getting benefits from it. Also Mei Terumi, has somehow ''escaped'' from Konoha during one of Yami''s negotiations in Konoha.


    Though no one said anything, the latent clan head meetings have become more of a playground for Yami, and every clan head has noticed this. Yami''s political power kept raising and raising. No one could do anything, it was already too late, the other clans were occupied with the war going on. But the Inuzuka kept advancing forward, so it was a surprise when ninjas came back from the war and saw different Inuzuka banners around different shops and companies.


    Even though ninjas aren''t very knowledgeable in economics. They could still understand what this meant, the Inuzuka Clan... no it is Yami Inuzuka who has taken over Konoha. But this came as grave news to the people who even had thoughts of going against Yami... he has something like political immunity... he is untouchable by normal political means anymore, even the Daimyo would have to listen to his ''suggestions''.


    .....


    A/N: Just to clarify, YES Yami did experiment on Yamato to give him the Wood Release.


    ANNOUNCEMENT: For every 1000 Power Stones in this story, this will get +1 extra chapter that day.

 Chapter 151 - Insecurities...

    Chapter 151


    Title: Insecurities...


    ....


    Yamato looked at Yami, well more specifically, it was Yami''s clone. But since a shadow clone will transfer its memories after being dispelled, it is still the same as talking to Yami himself.


    They are currently in Yami''s backyard, both of them are sitting on the grass. Yamato looks at him, with uncertainty in his eyes. After all, he thinks that he has never met Yami personally. Ever since he was accepted in the orphanage, he has only seen Yami a handful of times.


    Yamato used to be just your every day orphan before being picked by the Inuzuka''s Orphanage For The Gifted. Which is considered amazing, it is known that the people picked by the Inuzuka Orphanage are always amazingly talented children.


    Suddenly Yami''s clone pulls out a scroll and unfolds it. Inside it there are strange Fuinjutsu markings of different varieties. Yami put his palm on the scroll and...


    *poof*


    Smoke appears around the scroll, but when it settles down. The only thing seen in it, is a large stack of books.


    Yami''s clone smiles and says to Yamato with a reassuring voice. "These are the books we will be learning about during this week."


    Yamato immediately looked even more uncertain, but Yami''s clone simply flashed an even wider reassuring smile towards him.


    ....


    -Yami POV-


    This world truly is a place where wonders can happen. No matter the blood, betrayal, massacres.... I think I love this world. It isn''t something as simple as just because it has cool ninjutsu. It is more than that, just like in my last world people considered some countries as the land of dreams with a lot of opportunities.


    This world to me is my land of opportunities, I have achieved quite a bit during my stay on here. I am still only nineteen and nowhere near my peak strength. But that doesn''t mean anything... I WILL GO HIGHER...


    My children, the Inuzuka Clan, Konoha, I will leave all of these things behind as they will all wither as cities turn to dust and the humans turn into maggot sh*t.


    But first¡­ I can''t jump my steps to divinity.


    I look at this scenery around me. The trees and grass, while I lie down on the ground and stare at the sky.


    Lately there hasn''t been a lot of stuff going on.... well my clones have been killing and stealing treasures around the world but that is more like background noise to me.


    I am expecting two children this year, one by my little Kumo spy and the other... is by Tsume. Finally the manipulation during Tsume''s life paid off, since my little spy was so boring with her emotionless look, the threesomes made my s*x life a lot more entertaining.


    Also I learned that Mikoto is pregnant too. Obviously the kid is not mine, but I still want to look at Fugaku''s face if he knew that he got me sloppy seconds.


    Well I guess many konoichi will have to be sloppy seconds because of me. I can be REALLY charming when I want to.


    As expected I have been spending my last couple of months just relaxing and having a lot of fun with a lot of young ladies... and some milfs thrown in there every now and then to spice things up sometimes. I must say though... my immortal life has been treating me quite well.


    Plus lately things have been going quite good too, and everything has been going to plan. I have noticed that I have changed quite a bit since I came into this world. Especially with the whole thing of wanting to know everything and control everything. Truly a control freak all the way. I can easily recognize my different so called ''mental diseases'', well that is what they would be called by a modern world doctor, but those ''mental diseases'' have helped me not only survive but also thrive in this world.


    Most mental illnesses are categorized like that, because they disrupt a normal and standard society. Honestly, now even if someone promised me divinity just as long as I stay in a normal society, my answer would be...


    Obviously no dumbass, who the fu*k accepts strength given to them by some random being. How insecure and a beta male do you have to be to even want something like a system, or as I used to read in my last life. Some people even ask for a 12 inch di*k... I mean in my last life I used to sometimes read stuff like this but... really though, how insecure do you need to be to ask some random being to increase your di*k size. I can''t stop laughing at the losers who think like that...


    *sigh* Immortality really makes me think about stupid stuff. I guess now that I don''t have the pressure of being a normal squishy human, I have the leisure time to let my mind wander like this. Though I never slack off, my body is already at his physical peak and unlike normal bodies, it doesn''t need to keep training for its strength to not deteriorate. My body naturally doesn''t deteriorate at all, I will never lose muscle strength or something like that just because I don''t train.


    Suddenly as I am relaxing like this and just laying down in the grass with my hands behind my back and even my eyes are closed. But I sense a presence that comes inside my forest. I notice that it is trying to disguise itself as the average animal, but it obviously isn''t working too good while trying to hide from me.


    Mostly because I can also sense emotions, that is how I noticed... but of course no one needs to know that.


    To sense emotions is honestly easy once you know how, it is like a 6th sense  and most Jonin could learn it, I developed this technique by studying how the Zero Tails did it. Of course I won''t teach this technique to anyone else, not even my children, or that would be beyond stupid. After all, if they somehow learn how to counteract this technique, my children might have a legitimate chance to successfully betray me, before I kill them. So no... except me... NO ONE will learn this technique.


    Now let''s see how this little ''animal'' got here...


    ....


    A/N: Yeah... Yami is having a LOT of fun enjoying his immortality. He has already fu*ked most of the pretty konoichi. Unlike himself before immortality, where he was so cautious and careful, that he didn''t even dare or have the time to think about stuff like l.u.s.t. During that time he seemed more like a robot than human by the way he acted and perceived his surroundings. But now he has started displaying some emotions he had before coming to this world.


    P.S: Though he will still be cunning and careful. He will get annoyed at random stuff sometimes, and even ramble on for some useless stuff... just like a normal person would. He will still spend  time planning a lot, he now has the opportunity to sometimes enjoy life too.


    ANNOUNCEMENT: For every 1000 Power Stones in this story, this will get +1 extra chapter that day.

 Chapter 152 - Hiding...

    Chapter 152


    Title: Hiding...


    ....


    I just calmly walk up to the animal and see that it is a toad. I smirk at it, already figuring out who it is.


    "You know, is it just me, or are you Sanin  not very good at hiding." I say to the frog, who only looks at me normally like an animal would. I just raise an eyebrow at this.


    The toad opens its mouth and slowly a man in a Jonin uniform comes out of it. He has long spiky hair, black eyes and his face had an awkward smile on it. He is one of the three Sanin... Jiraiya.


    When I see this all, I just have a normal look on my face. As if this didn''t bother me at all. But really though, his hiding was impeccable, I couldn''t sense his chakra at all. My jutsu that allows me to sense emotions just saved me from a lot of troubles. I decided to say something first as I asked Jiraya. "I hope you weren''t sent here to spy on me or.... I would have to take, certain... precautions  against it."


    Immediately Jiraya started sweating cold sweat, a little as his face became a little nervous. I noticed his muscles instinctively twitching, even though he knows perfectly well that he stands NO chance against me, no matter what he might try.


    We are alone in a forest with him spying on me. He knows that I know, that if I kill him here, no one would even find his body after I kill him. The Hokage could say different things, but if we are being truthful here, I rule Konoha from the shadows. I could ruin it with just a snap of my fingers. So even the Hokage wouldn''t dare do anything like that, of course he could kill my mother, but who cares about that. Maybe she will finally be useful now.


    People say that when you have someone to protect, that will make you stronger... but that is all a lie. Only when you have no one to protect, and no one to worry about, only then can you become stronger. I have no true weakness, no one can threaten me with my mother''s life or anything like that. So that is the reason I am daring enough to take risky moves, plus when people think that I care about my mother makes it even easier for me.


    But still... I can''t just tolerate something like this, or other people might get some bright ideas. It seems like I will have to make an example out of Jiraya so other people know what the consequences of opposing me are. After all, if people think that I will just release the people that I catch spying on me, then they will take that as a queue to do so.


    While thinking all of this, I smile at Jiraya softly,  as he answers my question by simply saying. "I was simply here for a message."


    I can see that he has already calmed down, and his ninja training has kicked in. He is no longer giving me a lot of information on what he is feeling. Well... not being intimidated by... isn''t that rude of him.


    "Well now... you have put quite the hard decision on me." I said slowly as to emphasize that he wouldn''t get out of this so easily.


    ....


    -Jiraya POV-


    Those cold eyes, that relaxed posture with his hands on his pockets. He doesn''t see me as a danger to him at all. Well... he wouldn''t be necessarily wrong about that.


    Yami has become someone VERY dangerous, the type of guy who could kill Danzo, a village Elder inside the village and face no persecution. Actually he even got some praise out of it.


    Sarutobi -sensei told me to just look for any suspicious activity around Yami. I didn''t expect to be discovered so quickly. Especially here, in this forest where if he decided to kill me... no one would even notice.


    I can see it in his eyes, he WILL kill me if I step out of line. From what Tsunade says, Yami isn''t someone to act without a plan where he gets the most benefits and the least losses. His intelligence might be at Orochimaru''s level or possibly even higher due to his ability to plan things so perfectly and Yami has already surpassed Tsunade in medical ninjutsu.


    He will most likely kill me here after getting the information that he wants from me. Suddenly I hear Yami say with a nonchalant voice. "So... did the Hokage send you for an errand¡­ like spying on me or something like that?"


    When I looked at his eyes, my instincts were screaming to tell him the truth, that YES the Hokage did send me to spy on him due to some suspicion of Yami having a flight risk, he might become a missing ninja. No one ever thought of this strategy, since he has the Inuzuka and his mother in Konoha. But due to some information that Orochimaru has revealed, it seems like Yami doesn''t necessarily care about his mother. And a guy who doesn''t care about his family, what is stopping him from simply running away. This was supposed to be a simple investigation but it turned into much more.


    I keep my cool in this situation, my face and body language not portraying anything about my thought process, as I say to Yami. "No, the Hokage didn''t send me here, I was simply curious about Tsunade''s student that she keeps bragging about."


    I smile a little as I say the last part, trying to lighten the mood. But  somehow Yami still didn''t seem amused by this, and he isn''t even giving me an escape from questions like this.


    Yami releases a small sigh and rubs his eyes as he says. "Well... I guess I could forgive you for this time since you are Tsunade''s teammate."


    I didn''t know how to feel about that, so I simply nodded and didn''t say anything.


    I took that as my queue to leave, I turned around and am about to walk away. Suddenly I hear Yami say again. "I don''t think I gave you permission to leave."


    As soon as I heard that I couldn''t help but be filled with abject despair.... I now understood that Yami wanted to make an example out of me. So my body froze and couldn''t walk anymore, suddenly black markings started appearing around my body. The markings had square forms.


    I analysed that it was the paralysis seal... and the person who most likely cast is Yami Inuzuka. I didn''t even see him when he even put on the seal. I didn''t sense him touch me at all... don''t tell me... he has surpassed even Minato and Kushina in Fuinjutsu... but that shouldn''t be possible. Kushina is an Uzumaki AND  a Fuinjutsu specialist. Yami.... he also seems to know curse seals like the paralysis seal. Damn... what do I do now...


    ....


    A/N: Yami can''t let Jiraya go away so easily, since if he doesn''t make an example out of Jiraya, a lot of people will be sending even more spies.... he WON''T allow that to happen.


    P.S: I had some free time so I also wrote another chapter for today. Good Night...


    P.P.S: The ninja are slowly discovering parts of Yami''s true personality. But that is within his range of expectations of course. Now even if they did know how Yami really was, they couldn''t do anything, just like Jiraya right now.????????

 Chapter 153 - The Games Begin...

    Chapter 153


    Title: The Games Begin...


    ....


    -Jiraya POV-


    Of course I didn''t know what to do when I was stuck in place and couldn''t move at all. The only thing I can hear are Yami''s footsteps as he calmly walks forward.


    Damn, am I really going to die like this... I guess Minato really is the child of prophecy. Sadly Yahiko, Konan and Nagato died, when they were ambushed by Hanzo the Salamander. If I die¡­ their memory will die with me too...


    NO, I CAN''T GIVE UP EASILY LIKE THIS...


    I run chakra through all of my body, trying to force the paralysis seal to be undone. Yami seems to be so casual, so it means that he isn''t taking me seriously. I can use this against him and escape...


    I use my chakra to try and corrode the seal... but I can sense that the seal is only slightly weakened. But it''s not enough, so I try to stay completely still, even though I haven''t mastered this form completely, I can still enter it for a couple of seconds.


    I try to gather some sage chakra, but... I immediately stop doing so as I look at my chakra reserves... THEY ARE DROPPING! BUT HOW!?! I AM NOT USING ANY JUTSU OR ANYTHING LIKE THAT?!?!?


    The next thing I hear is Yami''s whispering in an amused tune in his voice. "So, you must be thinking something like ''My chakra level is dropping. But I am not using any jutsu, how is that possible.'' Isn''t that right."


    "Now you must be thinking if I have read your mind." Says Yami, as he gets in front of me. That is when I see his mocking smirk. Even with him being so expressive, I still can''t guess what he is thinking. DAMN IT¡­  I don''t understand his intentions, does he want to kill me or not. Or maybe he just wants to cut off one of my arms to make an example of me.


    But even these thoughts of mine are simply a speculation.


    Even while I think this, Yami simply has his hands in his pockets. His posture completely relaxed. He truly didn''t see me as a threat at all. I can see it on his eyes, it''s not that he underestimates me... more like he understands me. He understands that no matter what I do... I will never be able to pose any real danger to him.


    "How about this then, since killing you would be troublesome. How about you cut one of your fingers and never do something stupid like this again." Says Yami, as he sighs slightly at this.


    So, it seems like he has decided to let me live huh...


    I immediately feel the Fuinjutsu crawling away, and getting out of my body. But I will definitely check later if Yami has left anything inside my body. I didn''t even see him put the Paralysis Curse Seal on me. Who knows what else he might have done.


    Yami just looks at me calmly, I don''t let him repeat what he said again. So I just took a kunai.


    *fwish*


    *plop*


    Yami just nodded at this, and walked away, and started whistling like he has no care in the world.


    Damn... he is really terrifying, I am definitely not spying on him ever again. Let Orochimaru do this sh*t, after all he suggested to Sarutobi -sensei that we do this.


    I look at my pinky finger on the grass, even as I see Yami walking away. I don''t dare go and grab my finger, or he might change his mind¡­ that monster is unpredictable.


    So I just started walking away too. Better lose a finger than my life.


    ...


    When I am a safe distance away I can''t help but think of the terrifying situation I was in.


    Damn... I got off this easily. I honestly thought he would kill me when I saw the  look in his eyes. I was REALLY lucky this time.


    I had misunderstood and thought he was more like Sarutobi -sensei. It seems like I was wrong.


    He is dominant, extremely dominant. I wonder how Tsunade can even live with someone like that. Their personalities would clash constantly. I mean she even lets her kid around Yami,  that isn''t like Tsunade at all.... or maybe there is something I am not seeing here.


    I look at my now missing pinky finger... I guess I will stop the bleeding, it isn''t that bad anyway, it doesn''t even affect my fighting abilities too much.


    ....


    After ten days, I returned to Konoha. I know that Tsunade will be able to handle herself in the front lines against Sunagakure for some time, even without my help.


    ...


    Immediately I go to the Hokage''s office, where I find Hiruzen -sensei. When I ask him if Orochimaru is around.


    He simply says that he isn''t here but, in a couple of days he might return to Konoha because of certain situations raising in the front lines against the Hidden Mist Village.


    I only sigh and explain the situation... he thinks about it a little and says. "Well... I have a certain theory why Tsunade is doing what she is doing. But I am sure that Orochimaru could prove this."


    I just nod towards him... and go towards the hospital to check if everything is alright with my body....


    *sigh*... this situation seems to be way more complicated than it seems. Hope I don''t regret what I will discover. Sometimes I know that ignorance is a bliss...


    ....


    -General  POV-


    Hachi and his team are in another patrol. Ever since the time when Mei got taken by Yami.


    Hachi couldn''t help but contemplate that situation. Was that the right decision, was it wrong of him and his team to let Mei go like that. But he is sure that Yami won''t be cruel to Mei.


    ''I am sure that Yami won''t be cruel to her. After all, even though Yami is a little harsh he isn''t cruel. I can be sure of that.'' Thinks Hachi, but he still can''t get that feeling in his stomach. As if Yami isn''t what he seems.


    Suddenly as he was thinking this, his instincts kicked in as he and his team. Who were just jumping from tree to tree heard a sound as if something was burning.


    ''EXPLOSION SEALS.'' Is the last thing Hachi thinks as...


    *BOOOOOM*


    As the explosion envelops Hachi and his team.


    A/N: Now the games will start....


    P.S: Jiraya isn''t dumb, even though he might seem so when compared to the people like Orochimaru. So Jiraya is suspicious of something¡­


    GOT SICK TODAY... MIGHT HAVE GOTTEN COVID-19...????

 Chapter 154 - Plot Armor....

    Chapter 154


    Title: Plot Armor....


    ....


    *BOOOOM*


    As Hachi''s team are enveloped in the explosion, since Ken, their Jonin sensei was closest to Momo and Hachi he grabbed them both to pull them out of the explosion. Because of this Shoto is enveloped by the flames of the explosion and his lungs burn before he can scream anything. For Hachi it feels like time has slowed down, as Shoto''s face burned off and his eyes melt into his own skull.


    But he immediately comes to his senses as he sees the explosion coming towards them. He didn''t even feel pity for his teammate who he bled and cried with


    Hachi is simply terrified, tears start coming out of his eyes.


    Momo, his teammate, is also terrified of this, but before the explosion reaches either of them. Kai''s hair lengthens even more as it surrounds them all, in a cocoon protecting them.


    ''I didn''t smell anything wrong. This is bad... I need to get the kids out of here. If they were able to hide this good, it means that they must be Mist Ninjas that specialise in assassination. They must also be very strong to be able to hide from an Inuzuka.'' Thinks Ken, as he analyses the situation, choosing the best outcome possible in this.


    Since it''s a high level battle, Hachi and Momo would be useless in a fight like this. So he wants them to run away and not be a bother and get in the way. But if there are more than one ninja at his level, Ken will have a hard time making an opening for his Genins to escape.


    Ken thought all of this, while he protected Hachi and Momo from the explosion. He can feel his hair burning even though he has reinforced it with chakra.


    Due to the force of the explosion, they are thrown away. As soon as the cocoon protecting them touches the ground Ken dispels it. Looking at Momo and Hachi, he has a complicated look in his face as he says to them. "Hachi, Momo, you guys need to run away. You will only be in the way if you stay here."


    Even though still in a little shock from watching Shoto die like that. They knew better than not to listen to Ken. So they immediately attempt to run away, but as they are about to to do so.


    *fwosh*


    Seven figures appeared on the trees all around them. They all had swords on them... as soon as Ken saw this, his eyes widened as he looked at them.


    ''The seven ninja swordsmen...'' Thinks Ken, he immediately goes to take a vial from his Jonin jacket. He takes out a vial of dark red bubbling liquid.  This is a gift given to him by Yami, during the time he experimented on Ken...


    As he goes to drink the red liquid, a lightning bolt is shot towards him.


    Ken dodges this by simply stepping to the side but then...


    *fwosh*


    What he didn''t know however, was that during the 2nd Ninja War, Yami had taken out almost all of the Ninja Swordsman by himself, while he was only twelve years old. Ever since then, if a Hidden Mist Ninja ever meets an Inuzuka. They must immediately take him out without theatrics, and without underestimating him.


    Immediately they turn towards Hachi and Momo. The Genins obviously had no chance to escape them. Even though Momo had given up. Hachi, who was absolutely terrified, he still rose up.


    ''I will not die here today.'' Thinks Hachi as he waves through handsigns.


    *fwosh*


    But before he could even do anything, he is decapitated by a giant sword, also knows as the Executioner''s Blade.


    Hachi''s head flew on the air and he... died... as his headless body fell, like a puppet that had its strings cut off.


    *plop*


    His head too, landed on the ground.


    When Momo saw this, she wanted to scream but a ninja wire was wrapped around her throat.


    "Better not scream little girl or you will end up like your little boyfriend there." Said the one with the Giant Executioner''s Blade.


    ....


    -Yami POV-


    I just looked at my new test subject on the medical table... when suddenly..


    I get the memories of the Shadow Clone hidden inside Hachi.


    It seems like he is dead... well it is war and I am not hopeful enough to expect someone like Hachi to survive.


    Putting my faith in something like luck or fate, something that I can''t control is stupid. Though I did advise Hachi to not graduate early and even gave him a second chance for him to come to my camp. But he wanted to ''grow'' without me helping him... well look where that got you, you little sh*t.


    I can''t help but be slightly emotional over my son''s death. But that too is immediately settled down. After all, in this world, death is only a state of being. Plus even if it wasn''t, I am prepared anyway.


    *sigh*


    But really though... meeting the seven ninja swordsman is as unlucky as it can get in there. My clone made the right decision to not appear and help Yami. Because even if he did appear, he is still only a shadow clone, him hoping to be able to take the Seven Ninja Swordsman is almost impossible, even though I could easily do it. After all, he is still only a clone. Using the Hiraishin to get Hachi would also be almost impossible since my clone can''t use the Hiraishin to bring someone with them.


    Well... I guess I will have to deal with Tsunade''s hysteria. That will be such a hassle... I really don''t want to do it...


    Guess my disappointment of a son, couldn''t keep himself from dying. He just kept making dumb decisions, thinking that he will be able to grow if he is away from me. In war there is no such thing as wanting to grow, there is only death or survival. And he... as the weaklings that he was.... he died...


    My emotions are completely calm, even as I let a single tear fall from my right eye. That is as far as I will mourn him... and he should be glad he was my son... for his father will reach the heavens themselves.


    So goodbye my son... who never knew I was his father.


    ....


    A/N: Hachi died... yep... sadly he didn''t have plot armor. Could Yami have saved him? Most likely yes, but he would have to make a big sacrifice for that. Plus it would ruin some of his plans... so he let his son die. Hachi was given different chances to choose the smart path... but he refused. I gave small hints, mostly from Hachi''s perspective, to make his decisions seem as something logical and not too bad to the reader. But ever since then, Yami had already prepared himself in case Hachi dies. So don''t expect theatrics from Yami... he will continue with his own path...


    P.S: Some people might be outraged at this, but the chances of Hachi surviving were pretty low. Even though he was Yami''s son. After all, I strive to make this story realistic...


    P.P.S: Hachi was weak, he wasn''t even as strong as an experienced Chunin.


    THIS IS THE 2K BONUS CHAPTER THAT I COULDN''T POST YESTERDAY.????


    ANNOUNCEMENT: For every 1000 Power Stones in this story, this will get +1 extra chapter plus the daily chapter.

 Chapter 155 - The Flames of Youth!!!

    Chapter 155


    Title: The Flames of Youth!!!


    .....


    -Yami POV-


    Since Hachi is dead, the situation isn''t that bad. The plan can continue back into its tracks.


    My power will keep growing, no need to think about something like this anymore.


    He could have betrayed me anyway when he grew up. Either voluntarily or involuntarily, due to a Genjutsu like Kotoamatsukami or something like that.


    *sigh*


    I guess things will get a little complicated here. I will have to deal with Tsunade, plus the Seven Ninja Swordsman are going to attack the Konoha Camp. Where Orochimaru should be residing. Sadly he isn''t there... he has been summoned by the Hokage, because Jiraya became curious about mine and Tsunade''s little secret. Now obviously to get this information wasn''t through spies or mosquitoes. Not even Spying Fuinjutsu Seals, since if something like that was in the Hokage''s office it would be obviously noticed. What did I use to spy on them.... well obviously a technology,  mini radio recorders all over the office of the Hokage. It is perfect, since that technology isn''t developed yet here, it''s only in its early phases.


    But with my google knowledge from my first life, I did search on how radios work for a school project one time. So that was useful for myself to develop these since no chakra check or anything like that would be able to notice the little guys. They are placed inside the walls, and blended with the surrounding cement so not even a Byakugan would be able to notice that it was there.


    This technology should be developed  around the time the 3rd Ninja War is over. But... I can release it a little before that and get the patent. Which isn''t worth much in this world, but if I am the one who owns it... well obviously no one would be dumb enough to challenge me just for some short range communication. Which is already available by some jutsu.


    Anyway, Orochimaru won''t be at the camp, so it will be completely wrecked... normally that would happen... but I have a certain trump card. After that is played, everything will fall into place... just like according to plan...


    ....


    -General POV-


    In the Konoha Camp that fights against the Hidden Mist Village. Countless corpses were piled up like a mountain. Hundreds of Ninja were dead, with the Seven Ninja Swordsman working together, this camp stood no chance against them. Even though they did hold them back for some time.


    While they were fighting, a certain tall and well-built man with high cheek-bones, a somewhat bulbous nose, dark hair, thick eyebrows and noticeable body hair on his wrists and forearms. His hair was cut in a bowl style that was combed to his right and lifts slightly. He also sported a bristling moustache with a small goatee and stubble which made up the rest of his beard. He wore a green jumpsuit, orange striped leg warmers, and a yellow scarf around his neck. It was Duy...


    While looking at all of this and the ninja dying around him... already hundreds of them have been killed. It won''t take much more for the others to be killed too.


    When he understood that, Duy built up his resolve. His eyes closed as his chakra started going directly for the Eighth Gate... even while this was happening, he can''t help but regret not seeing his son one last time.


    ''Guy... it seems like I won''t be able to see you grow up. But don''t worry... I know that you already have comrades that will protect you. And Yami will protect you too, even though he appears tough, I know that Yami has a soft spot for Guy... so please... my son... LET YOUR FLAMES OF YOUTH SHINE SO BRIGHT THAT IT CAN WILL BE SEEN FROM THE EDGE OF THE WORLD.''


    Even while thinking this, slowly, red mist like chakra started surrounding his body.


    The Konoha ninja who were close to him, were looking at Duy, the Middle Aged Genin. Who started exerting so much pressure that even they didn''t


    know what to do.


    Suddenly the Seven Ninja Swordsman noticed the strange phenomenon, the Swordsman with the Giant Explosion sword started asking. "Well it pro-"


    But before he could even finish saying what he was going to say... his head burst like a watermelon.


    The other Swordsman immediately jumped back...


    But suddenly, the Swordsman with the needle sword, his body was kicked in the c.h.e.s.t by what to them seemed like a red blurr, his c.h.e.s.t caved in...


    *burst*


    And a giant hole appeared in his c.h.e.s.t...


    The other Ninja Swordsman immediately understood the situation, thankfully they had prepared for this. It was called the Yami Inuzuka Flee on Sight Strategy... they all split up in different directions and started running at full speed. This way, Duy would have to follow one of them.


    This strategy worked as Duy went after the one with the Heavy Hammer & Sword. He kicked his head, and the head flew off like a football was kicked.


    Duy wanted to go after the others but suddenly..


    *crack*


    ''Guy... when you find someone to protect... I hope that...''


    Even Duy''s last thoughts couldn''t be finished as he died...


    But the Ninja Swordsman all had already retreated, not daring to return back to the scene, hoping that they can get out of this alive¡­ not knowing that their attacker is already dead. They had been prepared to take on Orochimaru, in case he was here... they were happy that he wasn''t and thought that it was their lucky day. Not understanding that someone even stronger than Orochimaru was amongst their opponents.


    Though four of them escaped safely, they would never forget this day.... as the Seven Ninja Swordsman... were easily defeated by a Leaf Genin.


    ....


    Yami on the other hand, had already seen the situation with the help of his mosquitoes. He was sitting on his chair, inside his tent.


    He also had a strange smile on his face...


    ''Letting Jiraya go was part of my plan. Me letting his suspicion develop even more, insinuating that I only let him go because of Tsunade. That aroused a suspicion in the relationship between Tsunade and me. Then predicting the way that the Hokage would react, was easy. Hiruzen obviously wouldn''t tell his suspicion to Jiraya before he got some proof. The only people he knew that would know the truth would be Tsunade, me and Orochimaru. So he obviously chose Orochimaru to come and verify it... all of this... was according to my plan. Now with Duy dead... the timeline will go back to normal. I apologise to you my son... for you were an uncertainty''


    ....


    Also the last words Yami said... you can take those however you want, since it has a lot of meanings... Did Yami purposefully plan Hachi''s death? Or was it that the plan gone off course? Was it simply that Yami didn''t have the heart to kill his son with his own hands so he orc.h.e.s.trated this?... well I want you to make your own assumptions. ????????


    (2 updates today)????????


    ANNOUNCEMENT: For every 1000 Power Stones in this story, this will get +1 extra chapter plus the daily chapter.

 Chapter 156 - Tsunade & Yamis Relationship...

    Chapter 156


    Title: Tsunade & Yami''s Relationship...


    ....


    -General POV-


    When Orochimaru arrived in Konoha, he immediately went towards the Hokage''s office. He had already been notified about what Jiraya is curious about.


    Orochimaru could already guess how this conversation will go. He already knows that Hachi is Yami''s son


    ''But Hachi is still boring and easy to understand. Unlike his father, Yami is an complex rubic cube. While Hachi is simply an open book. I can understand where he came from and why he is like he is.'' Contemplates Orochimaru.


    He truly wasn''t interested in Hachi at all. Hachi was so boring compared to his father. Yami is always illogical and cant me understood. Hachi can be read so easily and even though he has some of Yami''s traits they seem to be minimal. Though he does use Hachi to get a better understanding of Yami.


    When he goes to the Hokage tower, he enters inside and no one bothers him, as he calmly walks to the office. Everyone just politely nods his way, not daring to stop him. He is an S Rank ninja and a Sanin, plus being the Hokage''s student hold some weight too.


    Orochimaru opens the door and inside the Hokage''s Office sees Jiraya and Hiruzen. The latter was smoking a pipe, it seems like usually he is smoking most of the times lately.


    Hiruzen was sitting on his chair, with paperwork all around his desk. Jiraya on the other hand was leaning in the window.


    ''He most likely came through the window. As expected of someone like Jiraya.'' Analysed Orochimaru instinctively. As a ninja he was used to observing miniscule things like this to come to a conclusion.


    Hiruzen is the first to ask as he leaned back on his chair. "Tell me... do you have evidence  of Tsunade and Yami having... a more than student and teacher relationship."


    When Hiruzen says this, Jiraya grimaces at that. After all, no matter how much time passes, Tsunade is someone whom he secretly loves ever since he used to be young. Plus hearing that a child, who at the time should have been around twelve years old had s*x with Tsunade... this was all bizarre to him. But during his stay here, Hiruzen has seemingly hinted to Jiraya what was his theory, so if it''s true it doesn''t come as an immediate shock to Jiraya.


    But Orochimaru, when he hears what Hiruzen has to say. His reaction is different from Jiraya''s, as he chuckles slightly in his own creepy way. "Why Sarutobi -sensei... is your inclination that Tsunade and Yami Inuzuka were more than¡­ student and teacher¡­ Especially during his younger age."


    Though  they were talking like this, none of them knew the reality, Hachi is already dead. Neither did they know of the situation in the frontlines against the Hidden Mist Village. The news hasn''t reached them yet due to the situation only happening¡­ not even an hour ago.


    No battles against the Hidden Mist Village happened during this war. Plus the rumours about some Civil War that has started in the Hidden Mist. So they were in their right to assume that Hidden Mist would not do something stupid like this. After all, Hidden Mist would help the Rebels in the Hidden Mist and the village will be easily overthrown by that.


    Jiraya was the first to refute Orochimaru''s idea.


    "No¡­ I know Tsunade wouldn''t do something like that." Said Jiraya, as he frowns at the thoughts in his head, that keep bringing up his suspicion.


    Orochimaru''s smile dampened a little when he saw Jiraya refusing something like Yami and Tsunade having something going on between them. So he just sighed a little and finally decided to drop the bomb on them. "Hachi Senju¡­ or should I say Hachi Inuzuka is truly Yami Inuzuka''s son. I have conducted blood tests by using Yami''s mother and Hachi. The connection is there and the evidence is undeniable. Hachi is Yami''s son."


    As soon as this was said by Orochimaru. Jiraya''s face becomes heavy. His frown deepens and he simply jumps off the window. Going somewhere¡­


    Orochimaru just shrugged his shoulders at this. He was absolutely calm at this, he didn''t have feelings for Tsunade anyway, so he didn''t care who she slept with. That was her business and it''s her body, she can do whatever she wants with it. He wouldn''t care which people his teammates slept with. He has better things to do.


    "So Sarutobi -sensei, how do you think we should act? Now that we have this information available to us." Questions Orochimaru as he thinks on how he might be able to use this information against Yami, and get an advantage over him.


    But contrary to what Orochimaru is thinking, Hiruzen simply sighs and says. "Yami is a Konoha Citizen and the head of the Inuzuka Clan. Even with this information, how are we going to use it? If we release it to the public, Yami wouldn''t care that much. It would only ruin Tsunade''s reputation since it would seem like she took advantage of a twelve year old Yami. Plus even if we have something bad against Yami, it wouldn''t be smart to use it.  After all, we don''t want to push him away or something like that."


    When Orochimaru heard the last part of what Hiruzen said he smirked a little and sat down on one of the chairs in the Hokage''s office. After he settled down on the chair, Hiruzen filled his pipe with tobacco and started smoking again.


    "So tell me sensei, you seem to act as if Yami has a high risk of desertion. Would someone as smart as Yami give up the advantages that Konoha has." Asks Orochimaru, contrary to his usual joking manner. When he was alone with his teacher, he acted more relaxed. After all currently Orochimaru and Hiruzen had a good relationship, he was Hiruzen''s favourite student after all.


    Hiruzen thought a little at the implications and the things his spies have conveyed lately. "Well¡­ I wonder if Yami will really be at a disadvantage though."


    Orochimaru folded his arms as he leaned back on his chair. "Hmmm¡­ and how would that be? Does he have some secret base or something like that."


    The Hokage sighs at this as he shakes his head. "Nope¡­ it''s even worse¡­ he has a whole new village to fall back into. Possibly a village who is under his absolute control."


    When he heard this, Orochimaru''s thoughts went into overdrive, and after a couple of seconds he showed his natural genius by guessing. "Hmmm¡­ so the most likely village that will support Yami and even when he leaves Konoha will most likely be¡­"


    ¡­.


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    Yami''s blood isn''t that accessible anymore. After all techniques that Hidan uses do exist. Someone like Yami tries to cover all of his weaknesses, and leaving something like this out there would be out of character for him.


    ANNOUNCEMENT: For every 1000 Power Stones in this story, this will get +1 extra chapter plus the daily chapter.

 Chapter 157 - Scheming is a Hurdle... but I like it...

    Chapter 157


    Title: Scheming is a Hurdle... but I like it...


    ?Story by ????????????????????????????????????  ¨U  Edited by ????????????????????_?????????????


    ...


    ...


    ...


    "Hmmm¡­ so the village that will support Yami and even if he defects Konoha, will most likely be one of the small ones..." -Says Orochimaru as he rubs his chin. Thinking about which village would accommodate Yami.


    "Amegakure (Hidden Rain) is out of the question because that place is too unstable, and Hanzo wouldn''t risk having someone like Yami in there... Takigakure (Hidden Waterfall) is also out due to its alliance with Konoha, so it would be either Kusagakure (Hidden Grass) or some other village that would be too far away... Like Morigakure (Hidden Woods) or something like that..."


    Hiruzen''s face morphed into a smirk when he heard Orochimaru say that. He can''t help but praise Orochimaru''s genius. It''s something that many people fear, but Hiruzen only feels proud of his student.


    So Hiruzen just nods at this: "You are correct. It is Kusagakure. He has absolute control over it. My spies have proof that Yami has Kusagakure''s new leader under his thumb. Whether they have a partnership or Yami is subtly manipulating him, it is unknown. But what is known, is that the connection between the Kusakage and Yami is undeniable."


    Orochimaru just shrugged his shoulders when he heard this. After all, they were stuck, they couldn''t do anything to Yami, and neither could they intimidate him. So they could only treat him nicely and hope he stays in the village¡­ but that option only exists for Yami¡­ because if anyone else who doesn''t have the power would be simply killed and the public would simply know that ''he was poisoned by our enemies''.


    ¡­.


    While this was happening, Yami on the other side was lying down on his bed, in his tent. He had his eyes closed as he had headphones on his ears. Listening to the conversation Orochimaru and Hiruzen were having.


    He smiles a little at this, things were going just as planned. Even though he didn''t have high hopes of this working, he still tried expressing his strength and daring anyone to challenge him. Obviously, this is a little crude form of manipulation, but he also has the power to be able to pull that off, so he did it.


    ''Or maybe they already know that I am spying on them. So Hiruzen and Orochimaru said that only to make me let down my guard. Knowing that I was spying on them all along.'' -Thinks Yami, his thought process calculating a counter plan in case something like that happens. After all, even with all of his power that he currently holds¡­ he never underestimates anyone. He knows better than to do something stupid like that.


    Now if only he can find where Zetsu and Madara''s Cave is. That will allow him to take countermeasures in case his Plan G fails in the future. Yami had seven plans on how to reach his goals, he is not following just one. In case one fails he has six others, and every now and then, he creates a new plan in case all seven of his plans fail.


    ''I also need to be careful of those underground White Zetsu. They are a great source of Hashirama cells. But I already have a lot of those, plus I don''t want to notify Madara and Black Zetsu that I know of anything about their existence.'' -Contemplates Yami, as he shifts in bed slightly, trying to find a comfortable position. Soon another of his two children will be born. Contrary to Hachi, they will be useful and have the Inuzuka name...


    ''Also Guy will soon come to know of his father''s death... Truly, the Eight Inner Gates in an amazing technique. Allowing a mediocre genin like Duy to instakill some of the Seven Ninja Swordsman and make them flee... So many plans¡­ So many wonderful things to learn about... This world truly is amazing. It literally has no limit on how much someone can grow. When I understood that, I even had a revelation and I now have a theory on how I came to this world. If what I assume is true¡­ then¡­ hehehehehe...'' -Yami laughed inwardly, satisfied with his recent progress.


    ''I must always seek to evolve, that is the only way I can reach my dream to omnipotence and omniscience. I can already imagine myself sitting on a throne laughing at the trivial things happening in the world...'' -Contemplates Yami, due to his plans lately going so good. He too is in a good mood.


    He brings his hand in front of his face and he uses some chakra. Slowly¡­ a little lava started appearing in his hand. He had only let Mei Terumi escape because she was no longer useful to him. Escaping Yami is truly impossible. Even if Kaguya magically descended from the moon to save Mei Terumi, she wouldn''t be able to do so due to the countermeasures Yami has in place against leaving loose ends.


    Plus, he even deleted the memories of the horrible tortures he inflicted on her, trying to figure out how to keep her alive while he obtained her Kekkei Genkai... So now Mei Terumi is just one more of his pawns¡­ She just doesn''t know it yet. Which is even better.


    ''Around another five years and the war should be over¡­ I must get some more benefits from this war. My shadow clones are already plundering the world for me¡­ But that isn''t enough. I need some more¡­ Hmmm, how did Itachi get something like the Yamata Mirror and the Totsuka Blade? Also, I need to start researching more on souls, I have hit a roadblock there¡­ But I need more. After all, I too would like to have my own Susanoo. I know that the Susanoo is actually in the ''nose'' of the human soul. But unlike replacing a physical nose, I must learn and investigate more about how the soul works...'' -Thinks Yami, as he remembers the strange research results that he got, he didn''t even know that somehow a soul-body form even existed¡­ That shows how much in the unknown he is researching.


    ''Hmmm, I wonder how people will react when they learn of what happened in the Hidden Mist. Tsunade will definitely be hysterical once she learns of Hachi''s death¡­ She will most likely leave the village again and drown in alcohol. But Hachi''s death might influence her even more¡­ Will she maybe become a hindrance to my plans? Or will she maybe even join Akatsuki in the future, if they promise to revive her loved ones? This is honestly a real possibility¡­ but¡­ maybe not so much¡­ Given that Nagato will not take to inviting her due to the risk of Tsunade recognizing him and figuring out his powers...''


    ''Or maybe she will join hands with Orochimaru in the future¡­ Both of those outcomes would be horrible...'' -Thinks Yami as he plans out bad possible future outcomes, and how he will handle them in case they happen.


    ''I also can''t put something like an explosion seal on her or she will definitely notice it. Plus my memory manipulation techniques are crude and unrefined. Truly, coming up with plans and schemes is a hurdle. Plus, I would like the timeline to continue as close to canon as possible, in that way I can somehow predict the future and not just run around blindly... My future knowledge is an absolute tool of mine. If I have to kill Tsunade for it, to keep it on track then¡­. So be it..." -Calculates Yami, while contemplating which people he should kill and which ones he should keep alive¡­


    ...


    ...


    ...


    _______________________________


    *Author''s Note*


    The last part was also a look back into Yami''s ways, on how he plans things and how he emotionlessly contemplates whether he should kill certain people or not.


    P.S: Just because he contemplated if he should kill the people, it doesn''t mean that he will definitely do it and kill them.


    ANNOUNCEMENT: For every 1000 Power Stones in this story, this will get +1 extra chapter plus the daily chapter.


    Check Out My P.A.T.R.E.O.N


    pa treon.com/HolyJoker


    (23 chaps in advance)

 Chapter 158 - The Funeral

    Chapter 158


    Title: The Funeral


    ?Story by ????????????????????????????????????  ¨U  Edited by ????????????????????_?????????????


    ...


    ...


    ...


    After a couple of hours, the Hokage is just sitting down in his chair. He just finished his current paperwork, he can let go a little and relax. But even though he is relaxing, his mind can''t rest. Thinking of different things, people, and the situation in the war front.


    Even though Konoha was somewhat holding up. It isn''t really in a good situation, it is literally at war with all of the other Great Hidden Villages. The situation was obviously horrible. Although Hiruzen is glad that Konoha has been blessed with a strong generation of ninja... From Yami, Minato, and Fugaku to even others who would normally be considered geniuses but have been overshadowed by these three.


    While he was contemplating this, a hawk flew in from the window and landed on his desk. The Anbu that were around the room didn''t react, since they knew that this was a messenger hawk.


    When it landed he immediately extended his hand forward and the hawk, which was of normal size. It opened its beak and a small scroll came out of it.


    Hiruzen caught the scroll and read through it. As he kept reading, his face morphed into a frown and when he finished it¡­ He had wide eyes on his face.


    ''How could this happen¡­!'' -Thought Hiruzen, shocked at the Hidden Mist''s actions¡­ But then became sad and terrified when he heard of Hachi''s death...


    With a heavy face, he looked at one side of the office where one of the Anbu''s is camouflaged. So with a weary voice, he told the Anbu. "Send a message to Tsunade Senju, who is currently in the frontlines against Hidden Sand. Inform her that her son¡­ Hachi Senju... is dead..."


    The Anbu silently nodded, it made himself seen and vanished again in a body flicker.


    ''Sh*t¡­ Tsunade will definitely leave Konoha now¡­ Also, Jiraiya is mentally unstable after the current news¡­ I wanted to give him some time to blow off some steam... But it seems like we don''t have that luxury anymore...''


    ¡­.


    During this time, Tsunade is currently healing an injured person who had his leg crushed by the 3rd Kazekage, Rasa. If it was anyone else, they would immediately designate that the victim''s ninja career is over and he will never be able to walk again. But Tsunade is not your every other medical ninja. She is one of the best¡­


    ¡­


    After that, she goes outside of the medical tent and goes towards her own tent. As she arrives there, she sees a hawk flying circles above her tent. Her eyes immediately narrowed, in suspicion that some enemy ninja might have copied the Konoha Communications¡­


    But after a couple of seconds, she went towards the hawk. When it saw her, the hawk flew in front of her and opened its mouth. Spitting out a small scroll. Tsunade caught the scroll and sensed that it had the Hokage''s fuinjutsu seal and chakra, so after confirming that she opened the scroll¡­ She had a casual look as she did so, she even had a bored look in her eyes... But... when she opened it¡­


    With a glimpse, she saw what it was¡­


    ''Hachi Senju is dead, the funeral will be held in two days...''


    Immediately her eyes became hollow.


    "W-what...?" -Asked Tsunade in confusion, not referring to anyone specifically. She dropped on her knees and crouched down¡­ as tears came out of her eyes...


    "T-this can''t be happening...!" -Said Tsunade in denial. She couldn''t accept a reality where everyone she ever loved has died. She didn''t even give Hachi her grandfather''s necklace.


    "Why¡­ just why¡­!!" -Asked Tsunade to no one in particular. Was she asking the gods? No, she didn''t believe in any things like that¡­ No ninja really believed in gods¡­ After all¡­ what type of god would allow the world to be so cruel?


    On the other side, Yami was just lying down on the grass, reading a book with his Sharingan activated. It was actually a book with the research materials of a certain ninja. Of course, the ninja doesn''t know that Yami has these. So Yami is just memorizing this before he put it back...


    Suddenly he senses as a hawk approaches him, he just looks upwards and as the hawk is about to land close to Yami¡­ He immediately puts the bird under a Genjutsu. It''s just a precaution¡­


    He takes the letter the hawk spits out.


    ''This form of communication really is gross. I know that we don''t exactly want anyone to get out hands in the messages, but there are definitely easier ways...'' -Thinks Yami as he opens his letter¡­


    ''Hmmm¡­ it''s about Hachi''s death¡­ They are holding an official funeral? Isn''t that only for accomplished ninja? Wasn''t Hachi just a mere genin? That really seems like a waste of time. Is it worth even showing up...? But if I don''t show up, Tsunade will just come and bother me while saying stuff like ''Why didn''t you come to your son''s funeral...'' It really is unavoidable isn''t it... *Sigh* Tsunade will leave after this, it seems like. Man talk about Hiruzen being a p*ssy¡­ Can''t that guy just grow a pair and tell Tsunade that if she leaves she will be branded as a missing-nin and hunted down like a dog...?'' -Thought Yami, as he just threw the letter away. It burned into ashes mi-air.


    ''I mean I would get it if this was a democracy. After all, you have to please the people if you want to stay in power. But this is more medieval, and people act like animals. So to me¡­ if someone acts like an animal¡­ they will be treated like an animal... But really though, the Hokage has so much power, but Hiruzen never uses it to its full potential¡­ That for sure, is something that I am not going to do...'' -Criticises Yami, as he can''t help but understand why people don''t really follow the Hokage.


    ''It''s simply because he doesn''t really rule¡­ He doesn''t dominate. He doesn''t show his power. Then he wonders why the Uchiha will revolt in the future¡­ well¡­ Obviously, Hiruzen gave them an opportunity and courage to challenge him. Why didn''t they revolt when Tobirama was Hokage, even though he banished the Uchiha to the outskirts, and made them be guards by creating the Uchiha Police Force? Well, it''s simple¡­ The Uchiha knew they would all be MA.S.SACRED if they did that...''


    ¡­.


    -Two Days Later-


    It was a sad day, as the entire village came to mourn someone who was supposed to be their hope¡­ Hachi Senju... Everyone thought that he had a bright future ahead, but sadly he couldn''t realize his true potential...


    Yami had to stop himself from yawning, as he saw Tsunade, Shizune, Misune (Yami''s mother), Tsume, and some other people he recognized. Thankfully, Jiraya was not here since he had already been sent to fight against the Sand Ninja.


    Hachi''s coffin was covered in white flowers all around it with a photo of a smiling Hachi doing a peace sign.


    ''Couldn''t they find a better picture? That looks ridiculous...'' -Thinks Yami as he looks at the picture of his son. Even though on the outside he seems sad and is barely holding himself from crying, on the inside Yami''s mind was like a gossiping housewife, nitpicking at useless stuff.


    ''Black really suits Tsunade¡­ Should I take advantage of her sadness and go another round with her? This time I would be careful so another Hachi isn''t born...'' -Contemplates Yami as he ''sadly'' looks towards Tsunade.


    ''Woah, is that Ino''s mom.?'' -Thinks Yami, immediately planning how to manipulate her. But when he saw the ring in her finger, he sighed sadly... ''Damn, she is already married... Guess I won''t f*ck her since it would require too much effort...''


    ''I am exceptionally horny today...'' -Mused Yami, as he looks for any pretty girl nearby who seems like she would be easy prey to get. Tsume already has a baby bump now, and he doesn''t want to hurt his child in any way, so he is looking to have a one night stand¡­ At his son''s funeral...


    ...


    ...


    ...


    _______________________________


    *Author''s Note*


    Damn¡­ he really is sc.u.mmy¡­ having thoughts like this at his son''s funeral¡­ but maybe there is more to that¡­ after all, Hachi was still his son. So he is trying to keep his mind off of things like that.


    P.S: Don''t expect Yami to act any better just because his son died.


    ANNOUNCEMENT: For every 1000 Power Stones in this story, this will get +1 extra chapter plus the daily chapter.


    ALSO CHECK OUT MY NEW HUNTER X HUNTER STORY.????

 Chapter 159 - My Happy Little Birds...

    Chapter 159


    Title: My Happy Little Birds...


    ?Story by ????????????????????????????????????  ¨U  Edited by ????????????????????_?????????????


    ...


    ...


    ...


    -Yami POV-


    Honestly, I felt like crying tears of joy when the funeral was over. I was a little surprised that Kirigakure even gave Hachi''s corpse back...


    I had used my mosquitoes to learn that, as expected, Tsunade will leave Konoha on a ''vacation''... Well, it doesn''t matter anyway. I have spies on her all day long now. I learned my lesson when I didn''t even know I had a child until he came to my front door...


    *Sigh* I guess I should return to the battlefield now. I start to look around and search among the people wearing black. It doesn''t take long for me to spot the person I am looking for.


    Tsume who now has her hair down and better makeup (a.k.a. not ugly like in canon). She seems a little sad. After all, Hachi had been living in my house for quite some time, and most people aren''t like me, so they get attached to people easily.


    I walk close to her and extend my arm towards her. She notices me and interlocks her arm with mine. I notice that some of the people around us started whispering, and they will probably start some rumors about mine and Tsume''s relationship. But, it doesn''t matter what they think or say¡­ And they aren''t technically wrong anyhow...


    *Fwosh*


    Me and Tsume disappeared in a dark flash¡­ arriving at my Konoha Camp in the front against Kumogakure. We are inside my tent, where one of my shadow clones is doing my pepper work while sitting on my desk. While my bed to the side is all fixed and with neat white sheets.


    When we arrive there, I see Tsume''s face changes from a little sad due to Hachi''s death into a frowning one.


    "Did that upset your w.o.m.b, Tsume?" -I asked her, wanting to know if she is feeling any problems. After all, she has my child inside of her.


    She just shakes her head: "No need to worry Yami¡­ Everything is ok. I feel no pain, no numbness, and not even any pricking."


    I just nod at her: "If you say so... Anyway if you ever feel even the slightest amount of pain, you must come to me for a check-up right away. Now go to bed, you need to get your rest."


    She sighs a little, but still accepts and goes towards my bed, going to sleep. As a ninja, she has trained so that she can go to half-sleep in a split second. I just dispel my clone and take his place sitting down on my desk.


    I throw all of the paperwork on the ground and put my feet on the table, as I lean back on my chair...


    Tsume and my hot spy from Kumo have both gotten pregnant. Which is good, since I can mold these children to my exact liking... No more undesirable variables... They will be very serviceable to me and I will ''love'' them very much...


    I have finally made up my mind... I can''t trust anyone in this world... They are all potential backstabbers and impostors... Yes, I will look after my kids and be a good father to them; but I will never trust them. I will always have countermeasures in place against them. And most importantly, they will NEVER be allowed to grow anywhere near my power level... They will be my happy little birds. Happy to always be inside their birdcage. Happy to flap around their wings and sing whatever I tell them to sing... All in order to please their ''loving'' father...


    In another note, the reason why Tsume reassured me that everything was alright, is because of my mindless spy... She too is holding my child, and since we had a lot of threesomes together, they most likely got pregnant at the same time¡­ I just recently told Tsume that the spy had been having certain complications with her pregnancy. I also explained that I had placed her in my own ICU ward in one of my labs, in order to care for her and the baby...


    But that''s obviously some bullsh*t...


    Since I don''t want someone who doesn''t have any emotions to be a bad influence to my kids, and that she wasn''t even that great to f*ck, I have decided to kill her off. And that is why her brain-dead self is currently under my tent, inside a life-support capsule filled with green liquid that keeps sustaining her and the baby. I made all the necessary adjustments and my child will receive all the required nutrients for proper growth. It will be like breeding my child in an artificial w.o.m.b.


    I made up that ''pregnancy complications'' excuse, just so I could simply let her die when she gives birth. Tsume will not doubt my intentions. Not even in her wildest imaginations. And even if she did, I will be prepared...


    ¡­.


    -Eight Months Later (MC age still 19)-


    Witnessing Tsume on the bed, screaming as she gives birth, isn''t quite the memory I want permanently inside my brain, so I deactivated my Sharingan.


    I just look at the baby''s head coming out of her... It isn''t difficult for her at all, and soon enough, a baby with dark hair is born¡­ Tsume seemed tired as her eyes were a bit dull, and sweat was all over her tan body making her skin seem glistering. Not that I care anyway.


    "Uauauauaua!" -Cries the baby who is now in my arms. I look at it¡­ trying to see any abnormal qualities or something like that. If her Yin chakra is higher than the standard 50%, that implies stronger mental capacity in the future. Usually, no one checks for this on their kids. Most people can''t even check for this... But I make sure to check everything for any sign of my child being born with any abnormality¡­


    I let out a sigh of relief, which I easily know that Tsume mistakes as me being relieved that my child didn''t have any complications.


    "C-can I see my baby?" -Says Tsume. I just nod at her.


    "It''s a girl..." -I say to her while smiling. I know that she will be worried about the baby being a girl but when she sees my reassuring smile she relaxes.


    "So what do you think we should name her?" -Asks Tsume with a tired smile on her face.


    I just smirk at this, as I go to her and hug them both warmly: "Well¡­ you are the mother so¡­ Do you have anything in mind?"


    She just smiles as she gives me the baby. I see her eyes are closing, she is going to sleep. "I think¡­ I think that her name should be Hana¡­ Hana Inuzuka..."


    I just smile at this and say: "Of course..."


    When Tsume falls asleep, I look at the baby in my arms. She too has fallen asleep. Her vitals are stable and everything seems okay... So this is my first daughter huh...? Hana Inuzuka¡­ I have plans for you...


    ¡­.


    ...


    ...


    ...


    A/N:...Yeah Yami did check if Hana was a reborn person just in case...????


    P.S: I just had a six (almost senven) hour drive today, so I won''t be able to post the bonus chapter, it will be posted tomorrow... so sleepy right now...???? Hope you understand that I am too tired today, tomorrow you will get today''s bonus chapter PLUS the usual daily chapter...


    ANNOUNCEMENT: For every 1000 Power Stones in this story, this will get +1 extra chapter plus the daily chapter.

 Chapter 160 - Literature, Family and Schemes...

    Chapter 160


    Title: Literature, Family and Schemes...


    ?Story by ????????????????????????????????????  ¨U  Edited by ????????????????????_?????????????


    ...


    ...


    ...


    -General POV-


    With Yami''s children Hana and Yoruichi Inuzuka being born, that brought up quite the news to the people in Konoha, who didn''t have a lot to talk about since the war front had been silent recently. There were many rumors running around. From the so-called ''scandal'' that Yami and Tsume now have a child together... To the whole dark-skinned child business¡­


    Yes¡­ It is speculated that Yami Inuzuka has been having a relationship with an enemy...


    Of course, since that sounded too crude, Yami used his connections to change the rumors, from ''Yami having s*x with an enemy ninja...'' to ''Yami and a Kumo kunoichi, falling prey of both naive and tragic love that was not meant to be...''


    During this time even a book called Romeo and Juliet started circulating around. It was a GIANT hit with the civilians, in just its first week it broke all of the existing selling records. It had also become a way to give light brainwashing to the masses, assisting them with believing the new version of the dark-skinned-baby rumors...


    Since the book was launched for sale, it eased the people''s feelings towards cases like this¡­ Some people in high positions were the exception though...


    This book came out very timely during this situation, before people even really started suspecting Yami of anything, and even before they even had the chance to form an opinion.


    This book¡­ it not only calmed the minds of the populace¡­ But it also made Yami''s reputation skyrocket among the demographic of middle-aged housewives and young women...


    Though most couldn''t see it, the old foxes and most of the Clan Heads could see the terrifying charisma that Yami had... He used something like literature to calm down a raging public... They have read the book, and even though it was good¡­ It didn''t change their opinion of Yami''s danger level...


    He¡­ a ninja who has never even had any books published in his name except some medical books... He is simply another type of charismatic monster. A monster in manipulating public opinion...


    ¡­.


    So as time flew and another month passed, Yami became twenty years old. He was in his office reading an experimental book on various Kinjutsu (Forbidden Techniques) that he got from the Land of Demons.


    He didn''t have a birthday party celebration or anything like that. What he did have nonetheless, were two daughters his clones took care of.


    Yami still keeps his experiments going on. He has been trying to experiment with mixing Fuinjutsu and Kinjutsu recently. He wants to create some type of Curse Seal technique like the ones Orochimaru will use in the future. Though it seems like so far, all of the test subjects explode from the inside when he uses the unfinished version... Although it is only matter of time and inner explosions before he gets it right...


    He had also contemplated if he wanted to go and try and steal the Tsuchikage''s Dust Release secrets... But in the end, Yami deemed that too risky¡­ After all, just one wrong move and he will be obliterated by the Tsuchikage''s Atomic Dismantling Jutsu¡­


    ''I guess it''s better to wait until he gets older...'' -Thinks Yami, as he contemplates his next move.


    His power growth had begun to stagnate again... He has already researched almost all of the Kirigakure Kekkei Genkai...


    ¡­.


    -One Year Later (Yami''s age is 21)-


    We can see Yami, in Konoha. He is out in his yard. He had a small yellow ball in his hand and he throws it towards his daughters. His daughters have also grown up. They are both wearing yellow pants and pink t-shirts. They run towards the ball¡­ Well, they try to run, since they mostly wobble.


    Yami just laughs at this. His aging has been good for him. He has gotten taller, his shoulders have also gotten wider and his good athletic figure can clearly be seen. His face hasn''t had any dramatic changes. He is only slightly more handsome due to the minor surgeries that he has done to his face... After all, what people see first when they meet someone is their face... They get their first impression from that, so now he can be called quite handsome, contrary to his¡­ average looks from before...


    Yami sees, as Yoruichi pushes Hana down and gets the ball. She cutely tries to run towards Yami while saying. "Papa, papa, I got this!"


    But as she is about to wobbily run, she saw her big sister (Hana) lying on the ground with tears in her eyes. So she felt guilty at this, she stopped wobbling towards Yami and turned around to go towards her sister. When she arrives in front of her, she just looks at the ball and extends it towards Hana. "Here... You can have it Hana-chan."


    When Hana sees this, she smiles and gets up to hug Yoruichi. "Love you, little sis."


    "Dad?" -Asked Yoruichi and Hana at the same time.


    Yami just smiled at this: "Yoruichi, Hana¡­ Always remember that family comes above all. So no matter what happens¡­ promise me that you will always love and treasure each other..."


    Yoruichi and Hana look at each other confused, but they still smiled and said: "Of course Daddy!"


    "Hahaha, you even finish each-other''s sentences like twins now..." -Says Yami, with a sweet smile on his face.


    ¡­.


    After spending some more time with his family, Yami finally decides to make a shadow clone to play with them as he stealthily slips out.


    When he is out of the sight of his children, Yami can''t help but think of the war situation going on currently. ''Kumo has been quiet lately. I know that they have been trying to form alliances... But obviously, I can''t allow that, so I have already killed all of the messengers they send around¡­ The more things change¡­ the more they stay the same.''


    Yami has heard about Zabuza''s massacre in the Kiri Ninja Academy. Also, Zabuza has already graduated this year at the age of nine.


    ''From running through my memories, I remember that Rin and Obito will become Chunin this year¡­ In a couple of months, the Chunin Exams will happen in Konoha. So I will have to make that happen, Rin HAS TO DIE at the Kannabi Bridge while Obito watches¡­ After all¡­ his Mangekyou Ability is something I ABSOLUTELY NEED!!'' -Thinks Yami, as an utterly cold look appears on his face.


    ...


    ...


    ...


    _______________________________


    _______________________________


    *Author''s Note*


    We see a part of Yami''s plan now, he needs Obito''s Mangekyou¡­ Also, a BIG timeskip happened in this chapter. There was nothing going on so I skipped. Yami was simply experimenting and spying on people so that is all that there is about that time. There is a ninja war going on, but on Yami''s Camp, there were only some small skirmishes going on since Kumo doesn''t dare to challenge Yami head on again.


    ANNOUNCEMENT: For every 1000 Power Stones in this story, this will get +1 extra chapter plus the daily chapter.


    ANOTHER CHAPTER COMING SOON TODAY.

 Chapter 161 - Changes...

    Chapter 161


    Title: Changes...


    ¡­


    -Yami POV-


    I go towards a restaurant that is close to my house. I should really maybe make a mansion or something like that for me. I mean I might not need it, but with the war going on and me kinda selling weapons and offering things like insurances to civilians. I am making so much money I don''t even know what to do with it.


    As I walk towards the restaurant, I see that there are a lot of new shops around the Inuzuka Compound, there are also kids running around. They are the hundreds of orphans that I have adopted into the Inuzuka Clan. The war has been treating me nicely, I have a couple of new cool Kekkei Genkai.


    I look at my hand as it slowly breaks down at a cellular level and it reforms into a giant eagle''s claw. I then easily just change my hand back to my normal human one.


    Though it was a little hard getting the right genetic structure and stopping my DNA from destroying itself. I had to reinforce every single one of my cells to be able to handle the power that is being produced by them. I mean it would normally be impossible even with my medical knowledge, but with the help of the Jiongu I was able to do it. But sadly my body wouldn''t be able to handle anymore bloodline limits.


    I tried to get the hearts of kekkei genkai users and see if I can use it. Sadly biology doesn''t work like that, I did get their natural elemental affinities though and chakra. But I do have another way to get some more Kekkei Genkai without problem, but it seems that I will need to wait for a while sadly.


    Also on the war front, I haven''t really been going to my Konoha Camp too much. Kumo hasn''t really been directly attacking me, well there have been a couple assassinations and poison attempts¡­ but they were kinda laughable. Well to be honest, with how careful I am, I don''t blame them for failing¡­ plus no poison even works against me.


    My camp is currently being managed by my clone and below him are twenty Elite Jonin from the Inuzuka Clan. I have discovered how to make a curse seal due to one of my clones getting his hands on one of Jugo''s Clan members. Now every Inuzuka can use the first stage of the curse mark, and the second stage can be accessible if they fuse with their dogs, turning them into creatures who look like werewolves.


    I go and sit down at one of the couches, and then I lie down on them making myself comfortable. I hear the waitress turn the sign on the door to show that they are closed, after all, now that I am here they know that I mustn''t be disturbed.


    When the waitress comes close I can easily hear, sense and smell her, and my eyes are closed, relaxing, so I couldn''t see her.


    But as expected of the restaurant made to my preferences, the waitress is also wearing the perfume that I like.


    Before she can even usher a word, I simply say. "Ten T Bone Steaks Well Done, and three buckets of chicken, also bring me a barrel worth of fruit drinks, I want the drinks from peach, oranges, green apple¡­ hmmm I am feeling adventurous for today, so maybe a lemon drink too."


    The waitress doesn''t say anything as she just nods and walks away.


    Ahhhh¡­ this is how immortal life should be, just be lazy and do nothing. I mean my body doesn''t really deteriorate even if I never train, and with my sharingan photographic memory, neither will my skill with jutsu become rusty. I mean I obviously work hard still¡­ but I mostly work smarter now, since training harder will not yield results anymore. Now¡­ everything is in place, and my strength is unmatched¡­ all I need to do now is wait¡­ so why not have some fun while waiting.


    So I enjoy the best of foods and drinks all day long. Though I don''t like the taste of alcoholic drinks so I don''t really drink them. But I do like fruit juice, sure some people might say it''s childish, but who cares what other people say.


    Also I am so rich that even if they had something to say, I would just stuff money down their throats and choke them to death.


    Also now that the Inuzuka clan is unofficially the strongest clan in Konoha. No one really dares to make fun of us anymore. I mean people can literally point at any building in Konoha and there is an 80% chance that it is owned by the Inuzuka Clan (a.k.a me).


    Though I haven''t economically ruined any clan, after all, that wouldn''t be good for my political career, no need to breed hate unnecessarily. But I have made the clans on my side way richer than those that are on the other rides. Also Konoha''s economy has skyrocketed since I have made my business ventures. I mean it isn''t publicity known but even other elemental lands are business partners of mine. Sure I might not have any businesses in other hidden villages but I do have economical contracts with their lands. So, when peace time comes around, my business empire would be able to do some¡­ aggressive expansions.


    As I was thinking that, the food finally came, so I immediately started devouring it. I am eating as much as dozens of humans would need to but... I mean I don''t really even need to sh*t anymore¡­ THAT is how far I have evolved from the normal human.


    Anyway, the Hyuga Clan should be joining my Konoha Clan''s alliance soon. When I become Hokage this will be important, but currently that is useless. I already have dozens of Byakugans, I just need to prepare some more before I implant them.


    Even though I can now laze around a little, I still have so many things to do...


    *Sigh* No rest for the wicked I guess..


    ¡­


    A/N: We see that the further away from human Yami is physically. The more he starts acting like a human, he eats his favourite food, drinks his favourite drinks and so more. He does minor things that might not really get him closer to his goals¡­ but he enjoys.


    Though he will never be the so called ''average'' human. He will never quite be kind, nor will he ever sacrifice himself (obviously). But expect him to act more human in the future, as ironically¡­ he gets further away from humanity by changing physically.


    Also Yami has been making some moves and raising his power during the time skip.


    P.S: Yami won''t leave his guard down... he is just enjoying himself.


    THIS IS THE BONUS CHAPTER...

 Chapter 162 - Inuzuka Clans future is very bright

    Chapter 162


    Title: Inuzuka Clan''s future is very bright


    ¡­.


    After having the big meal I decided to go towards the orphanage district in the Inuzuka Clan Compound.


    It is a district where all of the orphans that are adopted by the Inuzuka Clan (me) go. It is a place full of talented children that will be my main force when I become Hokage. So better start training them from now.


    And I can''t deny the effectiveness of this, I mean only having Yamato, who is ten years old now, be on the Inuzuka, it has given the Inuzuka a certain prestige, after all we have a Wood Style user in Konoha again. Also people in high places have been trying to make me give Yamato the last name of Senju. But I didn''t raise my political power for so long for nothing. So I easily rebuffed all of the efforts of that, and Yamato Inuzuka is the only Wood Style user in Konoha.


    Knowing the future truly does give me superior advantages. I mean it is the strongest weapon on my arsenal.


    ¡­


    When I arrived at the orphanage, I stealthily went into the back yard, the yard was bih and had dozens of slides, and other tools that a child might need to entertain himself, there were around forty kids just running around and doing kids stuff, like playing ninja and so on. But the one kid I concentrated on was Yamato.


    It was quite amusing seeing him as a ten year old, he had two younger kids hanging from each of his shoulders and another toddler was on the top of his head, hanging on by clutching Yamato''s hair. I also see another toddler come close to Yamato and nudge him on his leg.


    "Yamato -nii, make a slide."  Says the small toddler.


    Yamato just sighs and grabs the toddler that was on his head. Bit he seemingly can''t get him off.


    "C''mon little Bai¡­ you have to let go." Says Yamato, trying to reason with the toddler.


    But contrary to his expectations, the toddler on top of his head now known as Bai. Just started tugging even harder.


    "Owowowow stop it Bai." Complains Yamato.


    That is when I decided to intervene by walking out of the shadows and good naturedly chuckled. "It seems like you are having quite a difficult time Yamato."


    Immediately all of the kids stop what they are doing and look at me. I just smile sweetly at them. But nonetheless they all stop acting like little brats, and settle down.


    """"Hello there Yami -sama."""" Say all of the children respectfully.


    I just smile back at them. "Hey there kids."


    Yamato looks glad when he sees me. I just waive at him. "Yo! Yamato how has your Wood Style training going so far."


    He scratches his face with a finger in embarrassment. "Well Yami -san. It''s not advancing as quick as I hoped. I mean when I hear what the 1st Hokage could do with it¡­ it kinda feels inadequate whatever I do."


    I just smile at him, and get close. I put a hand on his shoulder and encourage him by saying. "Well, the 1st Hokage couldn''t do what you can do at the age of ten that is for sure. You are still young, so don''t try to compare yourself with Hashirama when he was at his strongest."


    But really though, he should be glad he isn''t getting too strong too fast or I would kill him. I don''t like people who are more talented than me, who can grow stronger faster than me¡­ honestly I HATE people who are better than me at anything. I usually kill them off. No need to take a chance if someone can compete with me¡­ better kill him now.


    "Just try to be you Yamato. Even if you never reach Hashirama''s strength. It doesn''t matter." Then I mention all around us with my hand. "What matters is family, those are the people who will love you and care for you even in health or even in sickness. So don''t try to be someone you are not¡­ you are Yamato Inuzuka. The self proclaimed big brother of the Inuzuka Clan."


    Yamato suddenly seems to feel better when I say that.  He looks towards the courtyard and does some handsigns.


    [Wood Style: Twenty Wood Slides Jutsu]


    Suddenly Wooden slides come out of the ground¡­ when the other kids see this they all cheer and immediately go to play.


    Yamato just falls back on the ground breathing heavily. His ten year old chakra reserves have gone lower than 10%.


    He looks at me and smiles slightly. "You are right Yami -san."


    I look at his questionably, as I ask. "Right about what?"


    "You are right¡­ I really do need to be more like myself. Everyone expects me to be the next Hashirama¡­ but I am not going to be that. I don''t want to be Hokage or anything like that. I just want to be Yamato Inuzuka."


    I just smile at him. "Silly¡­ you already are Yamato Inuzuka."


    Even while saying that on the inside. I was calculating on the inside. After all, what I said¡­ it is all to increase his belonging and build a familiar bond with him and the clan.


    Suddenly I hear the back door of the orphanage open and when I turn around I see another ''protege'' of mine.


    She is six years old, she has a small and petite body. She also has light blue hair and when she sees me her face lights up in happiness.


    "Yami -sama¡­ Yami -sama I have a new move." Says the little girl as she runs towards me. She shows me her right hand as a small palm sized crystal puppy is created from her hand and it jumps on the ground.


    When I see this I smile at her too.


    "Congratulations Guren, you truly are smart coming up with moves like these."


    Yes¡­ she is Guren, the subordinate Orochimaru would get if one of my clones didn''t find her. She is a great talent added to the Inuzuka Clan. She is now known as Guren Inuzuka¡­ the girl with the crystal release. I can say for sure that the Inuzuka Clan''s future is very bright.


    ¡­.


    A/N: We see that Yami has been gathering different test subject-... I mean orphans to help them.????????????????


    If you want to support me:


    Check Out My P.A.T.R.E.O.N


    (23 chaps in advance)


    pa treon.com/HolyJoker


    JOIN THE DISCORD:


    discord.gg/M9hghrm


    ANNOUNCEMENT: For every 1000 Power Stones in this story, this will get +1 extra chapter plus the daily chapter.

 Chapter 163 - The Loyalest(?) Subordinate...

    Chapter 163


    Title: The Loyalest(?) Subordinate...


    ¡­.


    -General POV-


    While Yami was just relaxing and planning like always. On the other side, where Yami''s Camp lies.


    In the Jonim meeting tent, there were twenty ninja sitting down on a circular table. They all had Jonin uniforms on them  and they all have fierce chakra and wild hair, each of them had the Inuzuka Clan marking on their cheeks.


    But unlike your average meeting, there were also ninken sleeping around on the ground.


    Suddenly one of them, who had long wild hair up to his lower back, his name is Aki, one of the Inuzuka Clan''s Elite Jonin. He says. "What are Yami''s orders."


    Another one who has his wild blown hair cut short. He had a serious look in his face as he said. "Yami has ordered that we should send his students, Guy, Asuma and Kurenai into the front lines."


    The others all nod at this, not questioning Yami''s orders. After all, they know that Yami will never lead them astray. But suddenly one of them, who has a lazy look on his eyes, his name is Kat. He tries to suggest. "But they are so young, Guy is eleven and Asuma and Kurenai are both twelve, maybe we should let them grow a little more before we push them like that. After all, the war isn''t going anywhere."


    Suddenly the atmosphere in the room gets colder. All of the other Inuzuka Clan members look at the lazy Kat. Their eyes, cold and emotionless.


    "Did you just question Yami''s decisions." Says Aki, he looks at Kat, depending on his answer he will be immediately killed. The number one rule in the Inuzuka Clan is¡­ NEVER¡­ I MEAN NEVER DARE to question Yami''s decisions.


    Kat sees this and just waves his hands in front of his face while nervously saying. "No, no¡­ nothing like that. I just thought that maybe we interpreted his orders wrong."


    Immediately Aki just gets up and¡­


    *Bang*


    He bangs his fist on the table, he takes a deep breath to calm himself down. His long hair moving upwards as his chakra aggressively pours out of him.


    "Are you saying that Yami isn''t smart enough to make his orders clear?" Says Aki as his anger almost poured out of him. But he must keep calm, he knows that he will bash Kat''s head into a bloody pulp if he lets his anger get the better of him.


    The ninken sense Aki''s negative emotions rising, so they open their eyes. They look at Kat and his ninken..


    *Grrrr* Immediately the ninken started growling at Kat and his ninja dog.


    Kat is in cold sweat as he looks at the situation around him.


    ''Damn¡­ why did I have to say that.'' Thinks Kat as he tries to figure something out on how to get out of this. He knows that he will really be ripped apart by the ninken if he doesn''t think of something.


    Of course the killing of comrades in Konoha obviously isn''t allowed. But there are very loose rules around that law. After all, if the ninja is working against Konoha'' interest, he could be killed on the spot with no repercussions. Now ''Working against Konoha''s interest'' has a lot of loopholes. It was originally that way so some ninja can be killed if they are so incompetent that they literally hinder the mission. Or some¡­ Konoha ninja is doing something treasonous, but the Village can''t find any proof. So they use this law..


    Obviously there would be an investigation by¡­ the Clan Head of the victim, civilians are investigated by some ninja personnel, most likely someone incompetent, so no one really cares about that. Of course there is also the death against enemies, so most deaths by comrades are not investigated. After all, in the eyes of the higher ups, it''s simply a waste of manpower.


    Anyway, Kat knows that Yami will never punish Aki. He literally is a fanatic about Yami, some even joke that if Yami told Aki to eat sh*t he would do it. So Yami will most likely just do an ''investigation'' and claim the case closed.


    Kat knew that and  was thinking of a way to get out and he finally decided to say. "No, no¡­ it''s just that I couldn''t understand it."


    Aki immediately disappeared from his position and with extreme speed he was in front of Kat, and grabbed him by the throat. Kat and Aki are in around the same level of strength so he could have dodged that move, but if he did so, the next move would be Aki going for the kill. He definitely doesn''t want to start a death battle with Aki that is for sure.


    The other Inuzuka let Aki handle this, after all in their eyes he was someone trusted by Yami.


    "So you think that Yami is unintelligent enough that he can''t explain things clearly for you to understand." Says Aki as he chokes Kai.


    Kat uses some chakra to reinforce his throat exterior so he can breathe a little and he groans out. "N -No¡­ I was in the wrong. I just wasn''t concentrating at the moment."


    Kat hopes that admitting that it was his mistake should help calm the situation a bit. But contrary to Kat''s expectations, black curse marks start spreading around Aki''s body.


    "So¡­ you are not concentrating on Yami''s orders is that it? Well then I guess that the Shinigami might forgive you¡­ BUT I FU*KING WON''T. Who the fu*k do you think you are to have the audacity to not listen to Yami''s orders?" Says Aki as his grip around Kat''s neck increases in strength. Kat''s eyes go bloodshot from the lack of oxygen, he tries to use his own inuzuka curse mark but he still can''t get himself out of Aki'' steel like grip. He can feel his neck almost give out and crack, and his lungs burning from the lack of oxygen.


    ''Fu*k¡­ is this how I am gonna die.'' Thinks Kat, but as he is almost about to pass out and his neck is almost about to break under Aki''s grip. He couldn''t believe that this is the way he will die, because couldn''t keep his mouth shut.


    But in a dark flash, a dark figure appears next to Aki and immediately grabs his wrist.


    *crack*


    Easily breaking it and releasing Kat from the grip of death.


    Kat drops on the ground and he starts coughing and taking in very deep breaths as if he is starved for air.


    Out of the black flash comes out Yami, with a smile on his face as he says. "What is going on here."


    Aki is about to answer, but Yami just looks around and nods. "No need to, I already got the gist of the situation."


    Not giving Aki any time to even get his voice out.


    ''As expected of Yami.'' Thinks Aki, with a smile on his face. He then decided to say. "What should we do with Kat, Clan Head Yami -sama."


    ¡­.


    A/N: Aki is Yami''s crazy loyal fanatical follower. Believing that Yami can do no wrong move.


    P.S: Yami was spying on them all along, he just acted like he just got there and understood the situation immediately.


    ANNOUNCEMENT: For every 1000 Power Stones in this story, this will get +1 extra chapter plus the daily chapter.


    If you want to support me:


    Check Out My P.A.T.R.E.O.N


    pa treon.com/HolyJoker


    JOIN THE DISCORD: discord.gg/M9hghrm


    BONUS CHAPTER COMING SOON.

 Chapter 164 - Fear...

    Chapter 164


    Title: Fear...


    ¡­.


    *cough* *cough* *cough*


    Kat coughs a little as he is finally able to get his breathing under control. When he looks up, he immediately sees Yami just smiling down at him. He can feel chills down his back when he sees Yami''s cold eyes looking at him.


    ''Damn¡­ I hate it when he looks at me like that, it is like he can read right through my flesh and blood¡­ and look straight into my soul.'' Thinks Kat as he tries to keep calm under Yami''s unnerving gaze.


    Unfortunately he fails, as his face morphs into a grimace when Yami says. "Hmmm¡­ tell me Kat, why do you think that my students, who are now chunin shouldn''t be allowed to fight?"


    Kat just looks at the ground nervously, not daring to look at Yami''s eyes again. This is why Yami as a Clan Head has never been challenged for the position. No one dares even talk about challenging Yami or they might¡­ disappear.


    "No¡­ no Yami -sama, it was just a stray thought of mine." Says Kat, the nervousness in his voice has now become very apparent.


    *Grrrr* The nineken started growling at Kat, but¡­ Yami just gave a side glance, looking at the ninken, though his face didn''t show anything, the look in his eyes showing ¡­ and they all w.h.i.n.ed putting their ears down in submission.  His dominating presence, helping him get the room completely under control. When Yami is inside a room no one would dare ignore him and his orders. Especially a barbaric like the Inuzuka Clan.


    Yami looks back at Kat. His dark eyes were emotionless as Kat finally decided to look up and he wished he hadn''t.


    Yami''s dark eyes, looking down on him. Kat could feel his scalp tingling from the overwhelming instinctive fear that he has for Yami.


    Kat has been in countless close to death situations, but he had never felt like this before.


    Suddenly he, a grown man¡­ tears started coming out of his.


    *baam*


    Kai immediately bows down, with his head banging on the floor. "I AM SO SORRY YAMI -SAMA, I JUST THOUGHT THAT YOUR STUDENTS WERE TOO YOUNG AND MIGHT DIE IF THEY ENCOUNTER SOME JONIN. I ASK FOR YOUR FORGIVENESS."


    Yami just keeps his smile on his face, as he crouches down and puts a hand on Kat''s shoulder. "C''mon now, there is no need for this. You are forgiven Kat."


    It wasn''t just Kat that felt like that, even though it was concentrated at Kat, the rest of the Inuzuka in the room felt nervous too. They all swallowed hard in nervousness.


    Yami just gets up and shrugs. "Well this situation is solved¡­ so see ya later guys."


    *poof*


    In a puff of smoke Yami disappeared, showing that¡­ he was a shadow clone all along. The real Yami was enjoying his time in Konoha messing around.


    ¡­.


    -One Month Later-


    Guy, Asuma and Kurenai were jumping on trees, they are currently on a patrol just like usual. Though they are still young and they still have an entry in the Bingo Book they all had only one page for the three of them¡­ simply stating that they are Yami''s students.


    They have also grown taller, especially Guy, he seems more like a teen than an eleven year old kid. Due to the protein and certain types of steroids in the food have given Guy the optimal body, with no side effects. The whole team is also wearing Chunin Uniforms, so their physiques can''t be seen clearly. Aleo their walking method has evolved, a medic can no longer read their physical strength just by looking at them and the way they walk.


    Looking for any Kumo ninja who might be around. Though it''s like your usual patrol, their assignments have been getting sent to more and more dangerous territories.


    Suddenly they all stop, and Kurenai takes out a flute and plays it. She closes her eyes, as soon as the sound comes from her flute.


    This is a technique that Yami taught her, to use sound to transfer her chakra and sense targets nearby. She also discovered that it can be used in Genjutsu just like her teacher (Yami) does.


    ^Enemies Nearby^ Signals Kurenai and points towards a thick tree.


    ^How Many^ Signals Asuma as they continue tree jumping, like nothing was wrong.


    ^Five, Two Jonin Level and Three Chunin.^ Explains Kurenai.


    Immediately Asuma continued communicating with his team, signaling if they should retreat. After all, there were two Jonin. That is very dangerous for them.


    But contrary to his teammate''s uncertainty, Guy is different. His bushy eyebrows form into a frown and he immediately just nods towards his teammates, they immediately understood what he meant. But before they could ask Guy anything.


    White masma like chakra came out of his body.


    <Fifth Gate: Gate of Limit¡­ OPEN!!>


    *fwosh*


    Immediately Guy disappeared from his place, with Kurenai and Asuma not even noticing that he was even gone.


    <Dynamic Entry>


    *BOOOM*


    The tree explodes to bits, as it is kicked by Guy. Two people carrying three others jumped out of it.


    *fwosh*


    Guy immediately goes after the one carrying two people, assuming that he must be a Jonin since he was able to react to his speed and even carry two people with him.


    As Guy gets close to him, midair, the Jonin throws the two Chunin, who were still dazed aside to free his hands.


    He started waving handsigns, but Guy didn''t allow him to do that as he immediately got in his personal space, due to his initial powerful jump.


    The Kumo Jonin goes for a block.


    This is when Guy remembers Yami''s lessons. He adjusts his stance and tries to kick the Jonin¡­ in his balls.


    But the Kumo Jonin blocked¡­ even though he grimaces a little when cracking sounds came from his wrists, due to Guy''s 5th Gate Power.


    ''Go for the chin.'' Thinks Guy, reciting Yami''s words in his mind.


    The Jonin didn''t have the speed to act anymore, even his wrists were broken. So Guy kicks the right side of Kumo Jonin''s chin.


    *pow*


    The Jonin''s brain hits the inside of its skull, knocking him out. His eyes roll into the back of his head.


    ''Take initiative, always make sure that you take him out.'' Says Yami from Guy''s memories.


    So Guy decides to make sure and¡­ punches the Jonin''s under his chin. Blood comes out if the Jonin''s nose as he starts falling down on the ground.


    This exchange all happened in a split moment and it was midair. Not even giving time to the other Kumo Jonin to intervene and help his comrade.


    But Guy as he is still midair, as he stopped using the 5th Gate and closed it. As he started falling down. He catches a branch of one of the trees and he swongs himself to lower the impact as he lands on the ground.


    ¡­.


    A/N: Guy can immediately open the 5th Gate, but it takes a heavy toll on his body that is why he quickly stopped using it. Also Guy is Yami''s protege


    Check Out My P.A.T.R.E.O.N


    pa treon.com/HolyJoker


    ANNOUNCEMENT: For every 1000 Power Stones in this story, this will get +1 extra chapter plus the daily chapter.


    THIS IS THE BONUS CHAPTER...

 Chapter 165 - In just two more years…

    Chapter 165


    Title: In just two more years¡­


    ¡­


    As Guy was looking at the other Jonin, he had a serious expression on his face. Even though it doesn''t exactly suit him¡­ he can be serious when the situation demands it.


    As the Jonin that he has knocked out started falling towards the ground head first, even though he knows that the Jonin will die, Guy didn''t do anything to help him. After all, he is an enemy, Yami had taught him many things. One of them is¡­ to never show mercy to an enemy or they could easily kill you.


    As the guy was falling, the other Jonin, just let go of the Chunin that he is holding, letting it fall down. Since he was already in the ground he uses chakra on his legs to reinforce his legs and¡­


    *fwosh!*


    He jumps up and catches the Jonin that was knocked out by Guy and was about to hit the ground head first. But at this moment¡­ Guy decides to attack.


    Since if he uses the gates anymore, he would most likely suffer muscle strain that would lower his immediate combat potential.


    Suddenly he started spinning around in one leg. Until heat started coming out of his leg.


    <Devil''s Leg: Diable Jambe>


    When the Jonin sees this, he is midair and can''t dodge, plus he has his comrade in one of his arms. But suddenly..


    *pssst*


    He hears the sound of paper being burned. Immediately his eyes widen as he looks at his fellow Jonin who is unconscious.


    ''Paper Bomb.'' Is the last thing he thinks as he is enveloped by the explosion.


    *BOOOOM*


    As the dust is about to clear out someone jumps out of the explosion. It was the Jonin¡­ except he had half of his face burned off. And he smelled like burned flesh. His eye had melted into his socket.


    Surprisingly he didn''t have any other outward injuries.


    But it wasn''t for long, as Guy used his flaming kick to hit the Jonin''s throat. Before he could scream, his own windpipe had melted and he choked on his own blood unable to breathe anymore.


    This whole confrontation happened in seconds, not giving the chunin, nor Asuma and Kurenai any time to react. But when they saw this the Kumo Chunin were shocked, so Kurenai was the first to act as a melodic singing voice appeared and¡­


    *flop*


    Asuma just goes to tie up the Chunin, and Guy falls on his back breathing heavily. "That was so close, I am glad I listened to Yami -sensei when he always told us of his fighting style when he was a Genin... though I didn''t expect it to be so effective... and unyouthful."


    Kurenai just grabbed her head in pain, as she had a headache. Her Yin chakra had truly gone low.


    ''As expected of one of Yami''s Genjutsu, they have such a heavy drawback and can only be used as a trump card.'' Thinks Kurenai, as her hands are surrounded in a green coloured chakra, she immediately started nursing her headache, and even turned off some pain receptors, as they need to quickly get out of here or more Kumo Jonin could come here.


    "Kill them. We can''t stay here anymore." Says Kurenai to Asuma, who without hesitation nods and slices the throats of all of the sleeping chunin. And due to the pain, they wake up from the Genjutsu and die choking on their blood.


    Asuma then goes towards Guy and says. "Can you run by yourself."


    Guy shakes his head. "Yes but I would slow you down. My body has some heavy muscle tears and burns on my right leg, where I used Diable Jambe."


    Asuma just nods at this and picks Guy up piggyback style. And immediately they started running.


    ¡­.


    After some time they were thankfully able to run away far enough and meet another patrol team. Telling them of the possibility of more Jonin being around the area where they fought.


    -Yami POV-


    Even though I am currently in Konoha, I am using some of my mosquitoes to spy on my little students. Hmmm¡­ they did pretty good, it seems like my lessons to them weren''t in vain. Guy will most likely get a Bingo Book entry of his own once his deeds are made public. Also it seems like opening the fifth gate even for a couple of seconds it''s still too much for his small body.


    Hmmm¡­ now I should just pull some strings and have him promoted to Jonin. After all, even though temporary, his abilities surpasses a Jonin''s, plus with him using my tricks, he will most likely win against the average Jonin even without even opening any Gates.


    Even though I am thinking about my students¡­ my mind still goes back to the only weakness I have left¡­ my brain. If it gets destroyed it''s all game over, no matter how fast of a regeneration I have.


    My hands subconsciously twitched, and my mind went to the thought of stealing the Forbidden Immortality Jutsu, and then I will use only half of the technique to immortalise my mind, just like Orochimaru did. So my brain will no longer be my weakness even when it is destroyed.


    But¡­ if I acted recklessly now. I would lose everything I have accomplished in Konoha. Plus I most likely won''t be able to get another Forbidden Technique, after getting the first. How did Orochimaru get the technique without being noticed.


    Damn¡­ DAMN IT¡­


    Why does someone smarter than me exist. He should just die¡­ but no¡­ I can''t get impatient. I am so close to my goal¡­ I can almost feel it.


    Omnipotent¡­ Omnipresent¡­ the two words that are used to describe god. I.. I want that, I want to see how THE GOD looks at humans. I am curious how it feels to know everything and be all powerful and be able to do anything.


    Just need to wait¡­ just two more years¡­


    I will get what I want from this village. Soon¡­ so soon¡­ canon will come¡­ in two years¡­ the nine tails will attack Konoha and that is when¡­ MY PLANS FOR GODHOOD WILL TRULY BEGIN.


    ¡­


    A/N: We can see that Guy uses part of Yami''s fighting style from when he was younger.


    P.S: CANON IS APPROACHING SOON...


    P.P.S: For the people wanting longer chapters... just wait okay... I am writing longer chapters now... from chapter 189 on Patre¨°n. ????


    ANNOUNCEMENT: For every 1000 Power Stones in this story, this will get +1 extra chapter plus the daily chapter.If you want to support me:


    Check Out My P.A.T.R.E.O.N


    pa treon.com/HolyJoke

 Chapter 166 - Yami is getting married!?!?

    Chapter 166


    Title: Yami is getting married!?!?


    ¡­.


    -One Year Later (Yami''s age 22)-


    I am currently in the yard of my mansion. The mansion isn''t too big and it only has fifteen bedrooms, but it is still called a mansion, and I also expanded my yard now. Now it has a big pond in there, and a garden, with different types of flowers. There are also different trees around.


    My two daughters are running around playing this world''s version of tag. Well I mean every game that has to do with, tag, hide and seek, etc. It is just called playing ninja. They are three years old now, so they have grown a little¡­ about as much as the average three year old.


    I have already started Yoruichi''s and Hana''s training. Well I have been covering it, to make it look like a game. I must say Yoruichi''s talent is way better than Hana''s. But as expected, after all Youruichi''s mother¡­ uhhhh¡­ What was her name again?


    It was something that started with M¡­ anyway Yoruichi''s mother was a Jonin from Kumo. So she had good genes, that plus with my amazing genes, and we have little Yoruichi, I am sure that she will at least reach Elite Jonin in levels of power.


    Though with me as her father, she will reach S Rank¡­


    As for Hana¡­ hmmm¡­ she should reach around Jonin¡­ maybe Elite Jonin. People say that hard work will always show results. But that is not true for most cases, after all, for example, right now even if I spent all day training for a whole year¡­ I would get absolutely NO results. My body has already grown to its maximum potential for my age, plus with just training you will minimize the results, you also need to get the right training and eat the right things to reinforce muscle growth.


    Thankfully Tsume hasn''t acted bad towards Yoruichi, after all, that isn''t her kid. So I wouldn''t be surprised if she acted badly towards her, but maybe she hasn''t noticed how much better Yoruichi is compared to Hana. Maybe when she notices that, she will start being jealous of how Yoruichi is better than her own daughter.


    Though maybe Tsume sees Yoruichi like her own daughter, after all, she was also most likely conceived while me, Yoruichi''s mother and Tsume were having a threesome.


    Anyway, Tsume has been a little mad at me lately, and the reason for that is¡­ well¡­ I am finally getting married. And this marriage will bring HUGE benefits for me. I mean currently, the Daimyo just listens to me, obviously he isn''t under some type of genjutsu, after all he has his twelve guardians with him. Some of them are truly skilled, especially that old blind Swordsman Monk. He has very acute senses, so he might notice something. Plus not everyone is allowed to meet the Daimyo whenever he wants. Even I have had the opportunity to talk with him once.


    After all, I have bribed all of his advisers and his wife and some of his concubines are very fond of me. So it wasn''t that hard to convince them to whisper things in the Daimo''s ear. So it was children''s play getting the Daimyo to approve certain policies and make decisions in my favor.


    But anyway¡­ my current arranged wife is¡­


    ¡­.


    -Shiori (Daimyo''s daughter) POV-


    I look at myself in the mirror for the up tenth time today. I am a tall and slender woman with long black hair that extends past her waist with locks of hair that frame my face down to my chin and with my dark blue eyes with long, voluminous eyelashes and pale skin. I have a narrow waist and very large b.r.e.a.s.ts. I am currently wearing a sleeveless top which emphasises my b.r.e.a.s.ts, and also  with a blue dress¡­


    ?


    Yes I know that I am pretty, plus with being the daughter of the Daimyo.


    I am the d.e.s.i.r.e and dream of many men. But sadly I am to be married to a killer who already has two children of his own¡­ what was father even thinking when  he made this dumb decision.


    I hear the door to my room slowly open and  my personal maid enters the room, she is young, the same age as me (age 21) and pretty cute too. Though nowhere near as cute as I am. But she will be my personal maid for when I go to live in Konoha.


    She just looked at me and said. "So¡­ I heard that you will meet your fiance today."


    I just give her a side glance.


    "Yep¡­ and you will be coming with me to meet him too. Who knows¡­ he might feel charmed by your meek looks and fall for you." I say to my maid, she has black black hair, brown eyes and she is shorter than me. So compared to me she is pretty short, and with her meek personality she would be the perfect little thing that men like to dominate.


    When she hears me say that, my little maid just fidgets, and her face is in a full blown blush as she says with her usual meek voice. "Shiori¡­ don''t say it like that. It''s embarrassing."


    I just smile at her, she usually addresses me casually when we are alone¡­ after all we have known each other since we were young. And I have kept her off the clutches of any noble or even my own father sometimes. So she is my closest confidant.


    "C''mon now¡­ don''t be so embarrassed or you will never find a man in Konoha. After all, you do plan to be married and have a family don''t you?" I simply rhetorically ask her. I know the answer already, but I just smile when her whole face goes red.


    She doesn''t answer so I just walk towards the door and say. "C''mon now¡­ let''s go and meet my future husband."


    ¡­.


    As I walk towards the guest room, where my father and Yami Inuzuka are. I keep my back straight and express a completely confident mask. But in reality on the inside¡­ I am nervous and even a little terrified. Yami Inuzuka isn''t just your simple killer¡­ he is THE BEST killer Konoha has. He most likely has already killed thousands, and I am not dumb enough to just listen to the news the Land of Fire has, since they describe Yami as some type of god that will protect the Land of Fire with his life.


    But¡­ the things the other Lands say about him¡­ is terrifying¡­ killing children and even the extermination of multiple clans by him, up to the last toddler. Destroyed the Village Hidden in the Sky who had hundreds of thousands of people living there and he was a child when he did that. Now he is twenty two, only one year older than me¡­ but still terrifying. I am to marry that man, will he be cruel to me, will he r*pe me and use me as his s*x toy until I am dead.


    But I was young back then and didn''t understand the world. But now¡­ I know how cruel the world is¡­ BUT I WILL NOT GIVE UP TO THE WORLD.


    I am not some submissive woman who will just stay by the side lines, I will either have my freedom¡­ or I will kill myself¡­ after all¡­ life without freedom to me is no life at all.


    I opened the door to meet my new husband...


    ¡­.


    A/N: We now see how Yami ''controlled'' the Daimyo. It wasn''t the traditional Genjutsu way, since the Daimyo has regular checks on those, after all, he isn''t a Kage that can resist Genjutsu, but just a normal guy who is very susceptible to them. So his guardians regularly check him if he is under a genjutsu.


    P.S: Shiori (Yami''s new wife) seems¡­ not very compatible with Yami¡­ we will see how that goes.


    P.P.S: Harems won''t work so easily, so Shiori definitely won''t be okay with Yami having the kids around her.


    ANNOUNCEMENT: For every 1000 Power Stones in this story, this will get +1 extra chapter plus the daily chapter.

 Chapter 167 - Shiori...

    Chapter 167


    Title: Shiori...


    ¡­.


    -Shiori (MC''s Future Wife) POV-


    When I open the door the first thing my eyes land on is my future husband, I only recognized that it is him because his photo in the Bingo Book. He is sitting on a big dining table, next to my father. They seem to be eating breakfast already.


    He has spiky wild hair, and contrary to my expectations he wasn''t in his ninja uniform, he is wearing black jeans and a black t-shirt with the words wolf written on it. He seemed just like your normal handsome young man¡­ except that he also had his Inuzuka Clan tattoos on his cheeks, so that is another sign that it is him.


    Neither did he seem to even be carrying any weapon¡­ and¡­ he had a genuinely happy smile on his face as he talked to my father.


    "Hahahaha c''mon now father-in-law, if you say stuff like that. People might think that I will be Hokage only because of our friendship." Says my future husband. Only then did I notice that eight of the twelve Daimyo guardians were here. The others are most likely scouring the castle like always.


    "So what, let them assume whatever they want. Me and you are friends Yami. After all, I will be your father-in-law soon. Obviously you should be the Hokage." Says my father with a smile on his face. But c''mon now father don''t you know better than to not say things like that out loud. Wait¡­ is that sake father is drinking.


    As I closed the door, father seemed to finally notice me as he turned around and looked at me.


    "Ah Shiori, you are here. Let me introduce you to someone. This is Yami Inuzuka, the future Hokage." Said father, as he started chuckling at the last part as if it was an inside joke with Yami, who too just smiled a little.


    "C''mon father-in-law, you can''t say stuff like that." Says Yami¡­ who seemed genuinely a little embarrassed at this. That is surprising¡­ an embarrassed ninja.


    "Nice to meet you Yami -san." I say greet him as I continue smiling.


    He just looks at me and smiles back¡­ it is genuine¡­ how is that possible. Whenever a new man meets me for the first, he will always have a surprised face. But Yami seems completely unfazed by me. He didn''t even try undressing me with his eyes.


    It is impossible for him to deceive me. I can read people well¡­ so he must be attracted to men then¡­ well... I can work with that.


    I just sat down on the table, next to my father and as I did so. Father immediately got up.


    "Well I better leave you youngsters to your own conversations." Said father as he walked outside of the room¡­ with his guardians all following him. Now the only ones left in this room are me, my maid and Yami Inuzuka¡­ how do I bring up the conversation of his s.e.x.u.a.lity¡­ then maybe we can work something out. He just has to let me be in charge of this.


    As soon as I was about to say something, Yami handed me a letter.


    [We are being spied on]


    I just nodded¡­ then I will speak normally and not say anything s.e.n.s.i.t.i.v.e. I guess we can talk when we take the carriage to travel to Konoha. In one hour it should be ready.


    I just put on a smile and ask. "So tell me how being a ninja is. It must definitely be exciting."


    Suddenly he just smiles and says. "Well it probably isn''t as exciting as you expect it to be. It''s mostly just killing and torturing some enemy ninja every now and then."


    WTF¡­ did he really just say that¡­ no way¡­ I turn a little and give my trusty maid a side glance. Yep, she is pale in fear.


    So he must be the type of man who is very straight forward then. It''s a little hard to keep the smile on my face when he says stuff like that¡­ but I can endure this.


    "Oh¡­ is that so¡­ then tell me a little about your family then Yami." I try to change the subject and keep the conversation going.


    His smile, ever present on his face as he says again. "Well my father died before I was born and my mother is alive, she is a nice woman. But she too almost died during the last war, it was from the stress of me going to the battlefield."


    "O -Okay¡­" I don''t know what to say to that, and the situation is getting kinda awkward so better say something. "So I hear that you have two beautiful daughters, tell me a little about them."


    His face brightens. "Oh Hana and Yoruichi, Hana was born due to me having s*x with Tsume Inuzuka, a girl who I see as my sister."


    When he says this his face is brutally honest, and it''s getting painfully hard to keep a smile on my face. But he still continues saying.


    "On the other hand, Yoruichi was born with a Kumo ninja I regularly fu*ked¡­ since we are getting married, we gotta be honest¡­ so I will just say¡­ I suspect that my daughters were born out of a threesome we had."


    What the hell is wrong with this man. I am half willing to marry a pig farmer than this guy. Contrary to his handsome looks he is not cool, nor charismatic, nor does he live up to his terrifying reputation. Also.. who says to their wife stuff like this.


    Just like this one hour passes and Yami still continues telling me some of his ninja stories with terrifying details, that would make any normal person throw up.


    "-so then my best friend and teammate Asutori died in my hands. I went to look for his sister Asume but she too was dead¡­ killed by the chunin." Says Yami with a smile still on his face.


    I am tired¡­ in just one hour talking to him and I am already extremely tired. I will have to spend the rest of my life with him. I will probably throw myself off the Hokage Mountain within the first week I spend with him.


    As Yami finishes his recent depressing and awkward story, the door to the room is opened. I turn around and see that it is a servant who just bows his head and says. "Your carriage is ready."


    ¡­.


    After that, we all go outside, only me, my maid, Yami and someone that Yami trusts will be riding the carriage.


    But surprisingly when I go outside, instead of seeing the normal carriage. What I see is a giant¡­ crocodile? Or maybe an alligator? With a small house on its back.


    I¡­ I have never seen something like this. So for a split second, my face expresses the surprise I am feeling. But that is quickly squashed as my face goes back to the polite smile.


    ¡­.


    When we went inside, it was just like your average house, it even had running electricity somehow. It has a stove and all that.


    Then I just waive at my father as the door closes. I sit down on a couch, and my maid also sits next to me.


    When the creature, which we are technically sitting on top of, starts to move¡­ surprisingly there is almost no shaking.


    Well¡­ this is actually way better than travelling in a carriage. But as Yami looks at the window, waving towards whom I can only assume is my father, he closes the curtains on the windows and turns on the lights.


    When he turned around, he had his smile on his face still. But¡­ there was something wrong¡­ I just couldn''t quite put my finger on it.


    He sits next to me and pushes his body next to mine. The next thing I feel is a hand going around my shoulder, in a friendly gesture.


    Suddenly the next words I hear come out of Yami''s mouth are. "You aren''t as smart as you think¡­ little princess."


    Immediately as soon as he said that¡­ I got chills running down my spine.


    ¡­.


    A/N: Yami was acting all along, she just didn''t notice it.


    ANNOUNCEMENT: For every 1000 Power Stones in this story, this will get +1 extra chapter plus the daily chapter.

 Chapter 168 - New Wife...

    Chapter 168


    Title: New Wife...


    ¡­.


    -Shiori POV-


    "You aren''t as smart as you think¡­ little princess."


    Immediately as soon as he said that¡­ I got chills running down my spine.


    His hand that he has around my shoulder slowly goes towards my chin and forces me to look at him.


    I was shocked by what I saw. His eyes¡­ they were so terrifying. Like two dull pupils with no emotion in them. I have never seen something like this.


    "Underestimating someone is the dumbest thing you can do my wife." I could see his smirk widen a little. "I have already analyzed what kind of woman you are. Judging by your personality, I am sure that we will get along. If you feel unhappy in our marriage, it doesn''t matter. You just give me a couple of kids and then you can live a life of luxury until your body slowly rots away due to old age."


    How¡­ I can''t read what he is thinking at all. Even though my face is calm, when I look at his eyes and amused smirk. It feels as if he already knows everything about me.


    "... I see¡­ so then tell me dear husband¡­ is this the true you¡­ or is this another mask." Though I can''t read him, I can loosely guess what he is thinking. After all, if he is someone like me who wears a mask then we might have the same thought process.


    Suddenly his whole demeanor changes¡­ and the hand that he had on my shoulder, slowly goes towards my  b.r.e.a.s.t. I obviously was prepared for this, so there was no reaction out of me.


    I see that now Yami has a blush on his face and his eyes now have a deep emotion in them. He just looks at me and says. "Shiori¡­ I -I love you."


    For a split second I almost believed him even knowing what I know about him¡­ damn¡­ his acting is really good. How does he do it.


    ¡­.


    -Yami POV-


    Looking at my new wife, I have to say, she is quite a looker. I don''t think I have even seen a woman as good looking as her. But then again, contrary to the ninja training female ninja do. She most likely spent that time taking care of herself, so her beauty isn''t something that will make my heart skip a beat or something like that. That only happens in sh*tty romance stories, that has no place in real life.


    But with my hand around her neck, I cupped a feel of her big b.r.e.a.s.ts. Hmmm¡­ that is nice. I don''t mind spending the next twenty or so years with her¡­ who knows I might not even cheat on her¡­ ok maybe sometimes with Tsume, and that cute waitress¡­ maybe sometimes with that one nurse that works in the Inuzuka Clinics too. But other than that I will not cheat on her¡­. possibly. But she doesn''t have to worry her pretty head about that since I will do any extramarital activities behind her back.


    Anyway, I think that her thinking face as she tries to figure me out is cute. We will reach Konoha in a day or two, then we can get the hokage to officialise the marriage¡­ yeah¡­ I am not waiting that long to fu*k her. I believe in my lying and manipulation enough to think that I can get someone like her to bed with me. Plus we are husband and wife to be, not doing it at least fifteen times before marriage is weird.


    Anyway, I truly already know everything there is about to know about my future wife. I just glance at the small maid that doesn''t even have a noticeable presence.


    This is why I never trust no one in this world, that little girl right there has been living her whole life with Shiori and has been treated pretty good by her¡­. But that didn''t matter at all¡­ she is a spy of mine I memory wiped and optimised. She is the perfect spy actually, she doesn''t even know she is one. And even if a Yamanaka went through her memories they wouldn''t find anything¡­ because no memories of her ever being associated with me don''t exist in her mind.


    People think that what makes them¡­ well them. It is their soul, body, brain or something like that¡­ no what makes me, me is my memories. Even if I died and my soul reincarnated without memories, that isn''t me anymore.


    So this is the secret to how I control her. She has some fake memories sealed inside her head at which during certain commands. They activate and she will ''remember'' how I saved her from being r*ped or something like that¡­ when in reality none of that ever happened. Her whole life is just a fake play made up by me. She is really beneficial...


    ¡­


    Anyway I just look at my pretty new wife and say. "Well since we are gonna be husband and wife. I think that we should be honest with each other. I will start first."


    I took a deep breath and stopped groping her firm b.r.e.a.s.t. "I was joking when I said those things to you. But you really need to be careful against ninjas. You are a good liar for a normal person. To a ninja though you aren''t even mediocre, especially the ones who can see even minute changes in your expression."


    I can see her frown a little and say. "So what then¡­ will I just be one of your fu*k toys then. Just another plaything until you get bored. If that is so then no thank you, I will slit my own throat before I become something like that."


    Hmmm... she is fierce, but people who talk about death like this, they have most likely never experienced  it. If I were to take out a kunai and put it against her throat she will become terrified and won''t say useless stuff like this.


    I just yawn a little and say with a bored voice."Well as interesting as the thing that you said sounds, I have more important things to say."


    She doesn''t retaliate, even though I just implied that what she spoke was bull sh*t. She stays calm, as she tries to guess what I am thinking.


    I just continued saying to her. "You are calm, that is good. What I want to tell you is that¡­ you will never really be able to read what any ninja is thinking. But you can study their previous actions and determine the future ones by that. Everyone has a pattern, something that they follow, plans and goals."


    Her face is calm as she looks towards me. "What are you trying to teach me. What is my ''duty'' as your wife."


    I just smile again. "Well¡­ you are my wife. Since you are not a ninja, I want you to manage my civilian business. And if we build some trust between each-other. Then maybe I will give you control of other things like: my clinics, businesses and so on. I will make you the most powerful woman in the world. You will be my empress by my side."


    ¡­.


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    Soon another chapter coming of this story. It is the bonus chapter.


    P.S: CHECK OUT MY HxH story... if you like HxH you will definitely like it.????


    ANNOUNCEMENT: For every 1000 Power Stones in this story, this will get +1 extra chapter plus the daily chapter.

 Chapter 169 - Shoris first time...

    Chapter 169


    Title: Shori''s first time...


    ¡­.


    After some time we finally Shiori finally seems more comfortable with me. We talked till midnight and the maid even fell asleep, but me and Shiori were still talking about my countless business ventures. And how she will manage them.


    Though I did notice her try to hint that she would be uncomfortable living in the same house as my daughters and my lover. She didn''t say anything when I just smiled at her. She just nodded, understanding that I wouldn''t listen to her on that one. She is truly a born manipulator, I have noticed on several different occasions where she instinctively tries to manipulate me.


    Growing up in a political slaughterhouse that is the Capital City of the Land of Fire has made her into quite the smart and politically inclined woman. Though she will have to learn a bit more before she can manage any business, after all, politics and business management are two different things. She should be glad that I am willing to even let her manage anything, I usually don''t trust people¡­ who am I even kidding, I don''t trust my future wife at all too. I just want to make her feel like she has control and choices in the marriage when in reality she controls nothing but I control her life. After all I don''t want to appear as a control freak, so better give her the illusion that I am not one.


    "So wanna consummate our marriage?" I asked Shiori with a slightly teasing tone in my voice.


    But ''contrary'' to my expectations Shiori just looked at me and said with a calm face. "But we are not officially married yet."


    I just lie back on the couch, my arms spread wide and leaning on the top of the couch as I stare at the ceiling. *sigh* "I know right. Why couldn''t the Daimyo do the coronation ceremony. That way we could be having fun right now. Instead of talking about business all night."


    I just give Shiori a side glance and she just blushes a little, but it goes away a second later. She is really good.


    "Well¡­ it doesn''t mean that we couldn''t have some fun before marriage. After all, every couple does it." Says Shiori as she looks at me with her deep blue eyes and her calm and pretty face.


    Immediately I just look at her, and with my hand I cusp her chin, bringing her face closer to mine, she doesn''t resist as she closes her eyes and I too extend my neck towards her and¡­ I kiss her. I can see that she is truly inexperienced as she just gave me a mediocre kiss. When I started using my tongue on the kiss her eyes winded, but I just clutch herby the a*ss and make her sit on my l.a.p as we continue our make out session.


    While we were making out, my hands didn''t stay idle at all. As I used them to slowly pull down her skirt. I saw that she was wearing nice pink p.a.n.t.i.e.s.


    Without hesitation, I used my agility to pull off my pants, as Shiori sat down across my length and started rocking her h.i.p.s, the arousal blooming on her face instantly, she no longer tries to keep her cold and indifferent look on her face.


    I pulled her closer, trapping her body in contact with mine. No argument rose from her lips, not that it was surprising. They were serving as my amus.e.m.e.nt, following the lead of my lips in a merciless tango.


    I could feel her arousal rising unchained, especially as we had the maid ''asleep'' on the same couch as us. As Shiori took off my boxers. It was the time to start the main dish. I simply ripped her cute p.a.n.t.i.e.s.


    I lifted her, my c.o.c.k jumping upright immediately. Then, a negligent push later, her slit was free for an unbound push. I pressed my shaft on her entrance, but waited for her to realize what was going on. Our lips separate for a second, just enough for her to m.o.a.n."Yes."


    Her m.o.a.n was filled with arousal and a little panic, the confirmation that she was trying to project turning into a weak echo, drowning the p.l.e.a.s.u.r.e. "You can do whatever you want to me Yami."


    "So be it." I said to her as, with my shaft inside of her, I took her to the bedroom, and we separated as I pushed her on the bed, her arms pushing to bed in reflex, which had the added benefit of forcing her to the d.o.g.g.y position. And then, without waiting for her to answer, I pushed into her mercilessly, earning a cry that would be heartrending if I had any mercy.


    "Yes, yes, yes!" she repeated like a mantra with every time I slammed inside her, her t.i.t.s trying to move freely only to be prevented by her bra and white top, but interestingly, every time she repeated the confirmation, it sounded less like a it, and more like a m.o.a.n of p.l.e.a.s.u.r.e.


    I slammed inside her again and again, and soon, the only sound that left her mouth was wordless cries filled with unbounded p.l.e.a.s.u.r.e.


    Still, the quickness of her mood change was the best indicator of her ''love'' to her husband (me). Her h.i.p.s swayed back and forth in the same pace as my beats, pushing my shaft deeper into her.


    Even her token attempts to keep her voice low didn''t last long, her voice loud enough to rattle the windows as I pushed inside her again and again. The maid was definitely awake by now.


    I decided it was time to catch a vision of her beautiful b.r.e.a.s.ts, so I reached for the hooks of her bra, opening it with a soft touch. Her flimsy bra opened and fell on the bed as I ripped her white top too. I leaned and grabbed her b.r.e.a.s.ts, sinking deep into her beautiful flesh, her n.i.p.p.l.es hard against my palm.


    Struck with a d.e.s.i.r.e to see her face, I pulled out. She let out a disappointed cry that tempted me to tease her with a session of denied o.r.g.a.s.m, but after all the fruitless sessions.


    "How do you feel, princess," I asked even as I slid my full length inside her.


    "I feel amazing Yami, I was nervous at first but now this is amazing." she answered with a calm voice, but her face, contorted with p.l.e.a.s.u.r.e, clued me that it was far from her actual feelings.


    The repeated gasps of p.l.e.a.s.u.r.e escaping from her lips, uncaring about the presence of the person who was ''sleeping'', was just a bonus. I pushed deeper into her even as I leaned forward, capturing her lips with a searing kiss.


    This time, there was no mediocre kiss as her lips countered mine. Her body was covered in sweat and other liquids from both of our bodies, looking at her beautiful perfect body enhanced my p.l.e.a.s.u.r.e even further. I doubted that I would (nor wanted) to be able to pull away from her, but it doesn''t matter, I want this too.


    "You love this, right?" I asked.


    "I do, with all my heart." she answered, a statement that might be comfortable if it wasn''t for an earth-shattering m.o.a.n following it. I started using my medical knowledge to raise her p.l.e.a.s.u.r.e and arousal at even higher levels.


    I finally let my c.u.m fill her, triggering a mirroring climax in her. Her cries rose unbidden as her hands found my shoulders, her fingers digging deep. I stilled as my load filled her insides. "That was nice," I said as I pulled out, my strong body already pushing for a second boner.


    "It was amazing." She murmured, her fatigue finally set in as she was breathing heavily.


    I just raise a questioning eyebrow at this.


    "What is this ''was'' stuff. I will let you rest for a couple of minutes and we will be doing it again." I said to her with a smirk on my face.


    "Oh Yami you are so bad." Said Shiori, though her words took a different meaning once she cupped her b.r.e.a.s.t and extended her finger towards Yami, mentioning him to come back.


    ¡­.


    A/N: It is chapter 169¡­ what did you expect me to do.????????


    I missed chapter 69... I will NEVER do the same mistake again. I calculated the story to come here all along.????


    ANNOUNCEMENT: For every 1000 Power Stones in this story, this will get +1 extra chapter plus the daily chapter.


    THIS IS THE BONUS CHAPTER...


    Check Out My P.A.T.R.E.O.N


    pa treon.com/HolyJoke

 Chapter 170 - Kanabi Bridge...

    Chapter 170


    Title: Kanabi Bridge...


    ¡­


    -Yami POV-


    -Two Days Later-


    After two days,  me and Shiori reached Konoha. We definitely had a lot of fun along the way. And thanks to my medical jutsu she can walk straight again.


    And I learned something very important during this journey of mine and that lesson is¡­ that it would take a lot of time for me to get bored of Shiori. So that means that she will be good for me for the next twenty years¡­  then her b.o.o.b.s will start sagging, her skin wrinkle¡­ but that doesn''t matter since I will have fun with her as she is young.


    When we arrived in Konoha, we had changed to a  normal horse carriage when getting close to Konoha so we didn''t draw attention with the giant lizard and house. That thing was my creation, after all as the leader of the blood swamp, I don''t rule just over mosquitoes, bats and leeches, there are many more creatures that live in a swamp, and the strange lizard is one of them.


    Anyway, as the carriage got inside Konoha, it immediately followed a separate road towards the Inuzuka Compound¡­ as we arrived at my mansion I saw Tsume waiting at the front gates. She has a pissed off expression on her face, oh right, I did kinda get married even after we have a daughter together. Oh well, maybe she should have tried harder to become stronger so she didn''t have to worry about stuff like this.


    I mean look at me¡­ I am all kinds of messed up and no women in their right mind would marry me after being such a di*k and literally making it almost obviously clear that I only valued her looks. But I know that Shiori will never cheat on me¡­ and that is because I am powerful¡­ I am so powerful that she wouldn''t even dare look at another man. I am so powerful that I can destroy the Daimyo''s family whenever I want. Especially now that she knows a part of my political power.


    She is the only non ninja who has the knowledge of how influential I truly am.


    I get out of the carriage and walk past Tsume with my hands in my pockets while trying to whistle the Game of Thrones song¡­ sadly I seem to be failing at trying to make the whistle sound anything like it.


    Hmmm¡­ well this will be a nice cat fight, but sadly I don''t have the time to watch it. They will resolve it by themselves, and I know Tsume won''t kill my wife, who is also  the Daimyo''s daughter. I mean Tsume isn''t exactly the sharpest tool in the shed, but she isn''t that dumb either, she is someone who grew up with me after all.


    ¡­.


    Two days passed like this and during that time I had my wedding, and all of the clan heads and a lot of people I  know showed up. My wedding was horrendously boorish, so I sent a shadow clone to take my place. During that time I just spent my time following Shiro around¡­ the little sh*t didn''t show up at my wedding so I thought I would look for him. Low and behold I found him in a trash can¡­ alive¡­ and surprisingly drunk. How did he even get his hands on alcoholic drinks.


    Anyway¡­ it seems like there is only six months left until an event that I must interfere must happen.


    ¡­.


    -Six Months Later-


    I am currently in a hot tub, with a paper in my hand. I couldn''t stop it¡­ the maniacal laughter coming out of me. "HAHAHAHAHAHAHAHAHAHA¡­ THIS IS IT¡­ THIS IS AMAZING."


    Thankfully I was alone in my mansion, so no one could hear me laughing. My plans can finally move once again. I can start finally acting again¡­


    I just got out of the hot tub, and due to the very hot water my body was releasing steam. Still, I just walked out of the room, and walked amongst the hallways. Tsume, Shiori, the maid and my daughters have gone outside to meet with the so called, Konoha''s Women''s Association. It''s something pretty silly, but apparently all women in Konoha who have husbands who are or were ninja gather together.


    I obviously spy on them, it is mostly talking about tea, gossip and bad mouthing each-other behind their backs. The paper is still on my hand as I walk down the stairs and go all the way down to the bas.e.m.e.nt.


    When I enter there, I see my ''laboratory'' but in actuality it is just a cover up.  I go towards one side of the room and release my chakra, that triggers the seals that appear all over the room, they start checking different things. And when it is all over and done with, I just jump down a hole that opens up in the ground.


    But as soon as I jump down, I hit a layer of liquid, it is just another secret check¡­ and after that, I finally enter my real laboratory.


    During all of this time I notice that I still have the paper on my hand. I can''t help but smile as I reread it once again.


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    Mission of the Kanabi Bridge:


    Delivery/ Investigation mission.


    Unexpected Events: Rin Nohara was kidnapped by enemy ninja. It was illogical and it is assumed that this happened due to the carnal d.e.s.i.r.es of the Enemy Ninja, or maybe an information leaker.


    TEAM MEMBERS:


    Obito Uchiha


    Rin Nohara


    DEATHS:


    Obito Uchiha (body not recovered)


    RESULTS:


    Unexpectedly Kakashi Hatake has one of the Shringan of Obito Uchiha, this matter will be investigated further by the Uchiha Clan Head, Fugaku Uchiha.


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    Hahahahaha Obito Uchiha is dead¡­ finally, I was so worried that I had changed too much of the timeline. I even had to manipulate a little for Minato''s team to take this mission. Plus I had to manipulate the events so Minato would be busy during this moment. Hahahahaha¡­ it worked out as expected¡­ though I was worried a little during the execution of the events. In the end everything ended up okay.


    I use fire chakra to burn the paper to crisp as I look at my lab. There is not a lot of light in here. So I just flick a switch in the wall next to me and¡­


    *bzzt*


    As the lights came on¡­ what I saw was¡­ dozens of pods filled with Uchiha bodies¡­ and not just any Uchiha¡­ it was Obito Uchiha¡­


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    dun dun duuun¡­ Cliffhanger...????


    Anyway¡­ we are getting closer and closer to canon now.


    ANNOUNCEMENT: For every 1000 Power Stones in this story, this will get +1 extra chapter plus the daily chapter.


    pa treon.com/HolyJoker


    (23 chapters in advance)

 Chapter 171 - The Clones…

    Chapter 171


    Title: The Clones¡­


    ¡­


    I look at the capsules filled with clones, I have been making people genetically the same or as they are usually called¡­ clones. I have been making them for quite some time, especially Uchiha Clones, but sadly¡­ they don''t have a ''soul'' their brain is running and they are perfectly healthy, only the soul is missing. Now how does someone make a soul, well I don''t, I have recently come to a conclusion, they are cones so they can''t wake up because I can''t create a soul yet.


    Which is sadly something that I haven''t worked out yet, I have observed a lot of pregnancies and learned that during the 6th week the soul is created¡­ BUT HOW IS IT DONE¡­ there is no definite answer. Something that I need to figure out, after all, the unknown is only something that we haven''t discovered yet.


    So I have been trying to make them¡­ the clones of Obito, a combination of Shadow Clone and Real Clone by using Obito''s chakra. I have quite a bit of it that I have gotten, enough to activate around ten clones but I haven''t done so yet, because I need to wait for Madara to die first before I do something like that. After all, he is as dangerous as people can get, so it''s better that I don''t underestimate him.


    I go towards one of the bodies, in the capsule the clones are all n.a.k.e.d and have tubes all around their bodies to give them the necessary supplements to keep them alive, also they have a breathing mask on, due to me having to use a machine to help them breathe.


    I also have clones of different Uchiha in some other rooms. This is my ''Sharingan Factory'' so now I just need to learn Izanami and I can go around confidently and start being ''brave''. Surprisingly, if someone has already awakened his sharingan, the clone will have it too.


    I walk past dozens of Obito Clones, I already have countermeasures against them if they somehow wake up and revolt. But there is no plan to wake them up by using Obito''s chakra any time soon.


    Just a little bit more and I can start truly creating human souls and bodies. Becoming GOD¡­ that will be the first step, when I can do that, I will start truly climbing the stairway to divinity. Slowly but surely, I will understand and control chakra to its highest calibre, I WILL become Omnipotent and Omnipresent.


    ¡­.


    After finishing the regular check up on the clones, the other clones were unimportant, most of them were just Minato, Fugaku, Mikoto, Kushina, Hachi, Tsumade, Killer B, A, and some others. Not really as big of a collection as I plan to make it. I also didn''t risk making any clone of me, because if I did that, it might actually just be me creating my own downfall. After all, if i was a clone, I would definitely kill the original and take over everything he has worked to accomplish.


    That is why sadly I can''t EVER create a clone of mine, or they will take me over. I never underestimate my enemies¡­ especially someone like myself. They will be the most dangerous of enemies.


    ¡­.


    After some time, I get out of my lab, and the first thing I actually did is put on some clothes.


    I decided to walk outside, I see that everything is normal. I take a deep breath and¡­


    *fwosh*


    I activate my sensing abilities to my full potential¡­ hmmm¡­ so Guy is actually in the village. I haven''t seen him lately, ever since he became a Jonin.


    ¡­.


    -Three Months Later-


    I am currently eating at one of the restaurants (which I own) which has a view of the Konoha Gates. Like usual I am eating as much as ten people, my modified metabolism and Jiongu working hard to turn this all into protein to build my muscles and support my growing body.


    I eat a whole T-Bone steak in one bite as my teeth turn jagged like a shark to break down the bones.


    While still looking at the gate without even blinking, I just control my finger to moleculary transform into a bone fork as I start eating some broccoli too.


    *munch* *munch* *munch*


    Finally, the one I have been waiting for comes in¡­ Kakashi¡­ a smirk takes form on my face as...


    *fwosh*


    In a black flash, next to my table¡­ a shadow clone of mine appears. He also has a vial of blood in his hand as he throws it towards me.


    I easily catch it, and immediately my smile widens as I look at my clone. "C''mon now, be careful will you, what if this thing hit the ground."


    My shadow clone looks at me with a questioning look as if saying. ''Have you gone crazy or something, you know that you are technically talking to yourself right?''


    The clone just shakes his head and dispells himself. That di*k¡­


    When I get his memories, I see that he took this vial of blood after Obito gained his Mangekyo Sharingan. So when I make a clone it will have his Mangekyo too¡­ at least that is how it is supposed to work.


    HAHAHAHAHHSHAHAHHAYAYAHAHA


    FINALLY¡­


    I can finally get the Mangekyo I always wanted. Also from the memories of my clone I see that Obito still seems to have the same ability as he did during the Canon Timeline. After all, he did run through those Mist Ninja''s attacks like they were nothing.


    I just look at Kakashi again¡­ he has a hollow and traumatised look in his eyes. But that doesn''t matter, that is such a small sacrifice that I am willing to make so it doesn''t matter. Hahahahaha¡­ I am so happy, finally I get one of the Mangekyo abilities I have always wanted.


    ¡­.


    Immediately walk back to my mansion, I go to my laboratory. I don''t even talk to my daughters or Shiori. This is something way more important, after all, children and wives are replaceable, opportunities like this are not.


    In the lab I walked towards the lab room with only a coffin in it, and a fuinjutsu array around it. Also all around the corners of the room are old looking computers


    I just walk towards one of the computers and turn on all of the machines.


    I have Kamui now¡­ only Kotoamatsukami left¡­


    HAHAHAHAHHAHAHAHAHA


    ¡­


    A/N: Yami is making major moves, finally putting to use his power and influence that he has acc.u.mulated. He will start becoming REALLY overpowered soon. Getting his hands on so many pies.


    ANNOUNCEMENT: For every 1000 Power Stones in this story, this will get +1 extra chapter plus the daily chapter.


    Check Out My P.A.T.R.E.O.N


    pa treon.com/HolyJoke

 Chapter 172 - The 3rd Ninja War Ends

    Chapter 172


    Title: The 3rd Ninja War Ends


    ¡­.


    -Three Months Later-


    I am currently in my backyard, getting a small tan, I just look at Shiro as he is rolling around in the grass playing with Hana and Youruichi. Though I know that Shiro is generally very sinful, sh*tty and doesn''t even have a lot of really nice character traits. He still knows better than acting anymore than a normal dog in front of my daughters will likely get him beat severely or even killed.


    He knows how dangerous I can be, and I don''t tolerate behavior like that. After all, I kill humans without a second thought, what is just another dog added to it. Shiro knows that he is no longer useful to me, so he is on thin rope. Of course as long as he doesn''t go against my interests I will keep him around. He is after all, my ninken and as strong as an Elite Jonin or even possibly a weak S Rank.


    Also I have noticed that the war is taking a toll on all the participating nations. Economy and income is falling down, though canon fodder ninja can be created almost endlessly to fight in the war, the economy and trade is a different thing. They will continue to drop down and then some Hidden Villages don''t have the economy to support their ninja so after that they are doomed.


    Money truly does make the world turn around¡­ I noticed and have been notified by my spy network that the war is going to stop soon just because of the worsening economy¡­ this is really funny to me. After all, no matter how many ninja died to ''bravely'' sacrifice their lives, that didn''t contribute at all. Their lives were worthless and no one except their families will remember them.


    ¡­.


    -One Month Later-


    As I am walking down the road after another burial of the cannon fodder. Konoha buried them all at once so the Hokage didn''t have to show at each of their funerals. Even death is cruel to the weak, thankfully I don''t plan dying or ever being weak.


    Suddenly I sense the strong emotions from a certain direction. I activate one of my numerous spy seals that I have around Konoha and look at who that is¡­ oh it''s just Itachi. He seems to be looking down a cliff with a depressed face. Hmmm¡­ is this the moment when he jumps from that one scene in the anime and he understands the meaning of life.


    Well then¡­


    ¡­.


    -General POV-


    While Itachi is looking down the cliff he contemplates. ''What is life¡­ what is death¡­ there¡­ is no meaning in life? Are we all meant to die anyway, so is killing not bad¡­ but why? In the war, why were people dying. We are all going to die anyway, so why live at all?''


    ''His posture is relaxed and he even walks like normal. No indication of being on guard at all¡­ but he must obviously be. After all, even I know who Yami Inuzuka is¡­ but why¡­ is he here?'' Analyses Itachi thinking of the different possibilities.


    Yami just gives a casual wave towards Itachi. "Yo!"


    Itachi sees this but he decides that it is better if he acted polite so he greeted back. "Hello Yami -sama."


    When Yami sees this he just yawns in boredom.


    "Why are you here kid?" Asks Yami getting straight to the point¡­ though he already knew the reason. He still wants to see how Itachi''s mind is working and if he is any different from the canon timeline.


    When he hears Yami ask that Itachi just looks down a little and asks. "Yami -sama¡­ you are a smart guy right."


    Yami just shrugs as he walks closer to Itachi.


    "Well I would like to think that I am." Says Yami, completely casually. He just arrived in front of Itachi and ruffled his hair.


    "What is the meaning of life." Asks Itachi with a tone of urgency on his voice.


    Yami just shrugs for the fourth time since this meeting. "I dunno. Everyone has a different interpretation of life¡­ why? Would you like to find out?"


    Itachi nods. Yami just shrugs and suddenly¡­ he kicks Itachi lightly on the c.h.e.s.t, just enough to push him away...


    *fwosh*


    And throw him over the cliff. Itachi immediately dropped down like a rock.


    Yami just comes to the edge of the cliff, seeing Itachi falling, as he tries to save his own life¡­


    Yami just puts his hands in his pockets and¡­


    *fwosh*


    He jumps down too. Unlike Itachi he didn''t slow his fall at all, so he plummeted down, his body accelerating even more.


    *Boom*


    And before Itachi reaches the bottom, Yami is already there inside a giant crater. With no injuries on him whatsoever.


    There is absolute shock, fear and even a little final realisation in his face. He looks towards Yami with a neutral look on his face, as if this wasn''t the guy who just pushed him down a cliff.


    "No one wants to die right?" Asks Itachi as a crow lands on his shoulder.


    Yami just nods at this. "Yep, you can be assured of that at least."


    And suddenly Yami''s body starts turning to dust as he just says to Itachi. "Don''t worry about inevitable things like, death, life or things like that. You are a kid, so stop thinking about stuff you don''t understand."


    ¡­.


    -One Month Later-


    Inside the Hokage''s office there was a gathering of all of the Konoha Jonin. Of course Yami was there too, as the Hokage announced.


    "The Five Great Elemental Nations have reached a peace treaty¡­ the 3rd Ninja War is over."


    Immediately, even though they were all Jonin there were celebrations all around. Some even hugged each-other, no longer holding themselves presentable in front of the Hokage. But Hiruzen didn''t mind this as even he himself couldn''t help as a smile appeared on his face.


    ''Peace at last.'' Thinks Hiruzen as he looks at a certain Inuzuka Jonin (Yami) who has a smile on his face too. When Hiruzen notices this he cannot help but think. "Even he doesn''t want the war to continue¡­ and that says something about it."


    ¡­.


    -Yami POV-


    Lying has really become easy now, I can lie to anyone I want and they wouldn''t notice I am lying. Of course I already had news of the war situation so I predicted (correctly) that the war would be over soon¡­ and it was. Now there are just a couple more steps¡­ for my plan.


    ¡­.


    A/N: 3rd Ninja War is over. The MC will soon start REALLY taking over sh*t. Also soon he will start manipulating and getting the forbidden techniques that Konoha has.


    SOON THE BONUS CHAPTER WILL COME!


    ANNOUNCEMENT: For every 1000 Power Stones in this story, this will get +1 extra chapter plus the daily chapter.


    Check Out My P.A.T.R.E.O.N


    pa treon.com/HolyJoker


    JOIN THE DISCORD: discord.gg/M9hghrm

 Chapter 173 - The 4th Hokage!!!

    Chapter 173


    Title: The 4th Hokage!!!


    ¡­.


    That day I returned back to my house, after giving Itachi a ''lesson''. I owed it to him¡­ I did fu*k his mom after all.


    But of course my real reason is because I need to see how he gets the Totsuka Blade and the Yata Mirror. I need to see how it is possible to get those types of ''spiritual'' weapons. I haven''t truly figured it out yet, I don''t know where to even begin with something like this, so I need to at least see a close example of how this is.


    When Ienter inside my small mansion, I open the door and enter the house. Currently it seems like Tsume is with my daughters in the backyard while my beautiful wife Shiori seems to be in the living room reading a book.


    I just casually walk through the corridor, and go towards the living room, where Shiori is. I see her sitting on the couch as she reads the book¡­ hmmm¡­ Romeo and Juliet.. huh¡­


    She doesn''t seem to notice me. Well then¡­ how about.


    I just walk behind her and hug her neck.


    "How is my beautiful wife doing today." I whisper to Shiori sweetly.


    She gets startled a little. "Oh, it''s you Yami¡­ so¡­ is the war over."


    When I hear her say that my smile widens, I easily jump over the couch and grab Shiori and lie down on the couch with her on top of me.


    "Hey don''t do this Yami! What if the girls see us?" Says Shiori slightly panicked at the prospect of my daughters or Tsume seeing us do something inappropriate.


    I just grab the book that she has in her hand and throw it away, and without even needing to look, I know that the book lands perfectly on the table, and ask her. "So tell me my smart wife¡­ how did you come to a conclusion like that."


    She smiles too, feeling a little pride in her ability to come to that conclusion. She lays her head on my c.h.e.s.t. "Well honey, I might not know how ninjas work. But I do know how management and economics work. It was just another as you usually say¡­ logical conversation."


    I just kiss her on the top of her head and relax my body, with Shiori on top of me. "Hmmm¡­ you would make a good Daimyo."


    Shiori just chuckles a little at this. "My brothers are not going to just ''suddenly'' die so I would ''conveniently'' be the next in line for succession."


    Nope, the next Daimyo will be our child. But I obviously didn''t say that to her, so I just reassured her. "That would make you sad, so I obviously won''t do that."


    "Uhuh." She just nods at this. She is a surprisingly tough nut to crack, I have tried everything except Memory Manipulation to make her fall in love with me. But even though we have a VERY active s*x life, I am 100% sure that she doesn''t really love me. Talk about a sociopath huh¡­ we have been together for quite a while and I even treat her nice but she has no feelings towards me. Of course she isn''t dumb enough to do something against me, she has learned about how¡­ ''harsh'' I can be to people who try to work against my interests. Actually she generally works well with the businesses that I have given her to manage, the income of those has gone up by 30% since she has started managing them.


    Anyway¡­ I just touch her throat slightly, giving her chills, she feels uncomfortable with people touching her neck, but I do it to sometimes remind her who is in charge. "You know my dear wife¡­ I think that we should start trying for a child soon. What do you think about that?"


    She knows that I am not really asking, so she agrees. "Of course, do you think that we should begin tonight?"


    I smirk at that. "How about right now."


    Though she hasn''t noticed the changes, I have slowly been putting her dominant personality under control by showing my alpha actions and personality. After all, humans are just evolved animals, so they still have the instinct to follow someone who expresses a dominant personality and seems to be confident in their decisions. They also like people who seem perfect and never make/ admit to a mistake (publicly).


    Shiori relaxes again and lies down on top of me. "So do you plan to become Hokage now? I don''t think that the 3rd Hokage will be for much longer, his approval rating has plummeted, so I think that he will be replaced soon. You would be a perfect replacement for him."


    Aaand there it is that instinctual manipulate, she doesn''t even need to try, she does it subconsciously.


    I shake my head. "Nope, this time I am not gonna compete."


    "Hmmm¡­ so the next election then?" She asks, as she coddles on my c.h.e.s.t.


    "Mybe." I answer her, not really giving her a clear answer.


    She just pouts at that.


    ?


    "C''mooooon teeell me." W.h.i.n.es Shiori.


    I just smirk at that. "Well I haven''t decided yet."


    "Ahhhh." W.h.i.n.es Shiori even more. "That is a lie, even I can tell that. You are such a tease. If I know one thing about you is that you plan 100 steps ahead."


    I just mockingly frown at Shiori and even make a ''sad'' tear appear on my eye. "Why must even my wife think so lowly of me¡­ after all¡­ I always plan at least 1000 steps ahead."


    ¡­.


    -One Month Later-


    -General POV-


    During this time all of Konoha was in celebration. Not only did the 3rd Ninja War end, but the next hokage will be chosen. Now contrary to the ninja, who think that the Hokage was too passive and not decisive enough during the war, plus the deal that he struck with the Raikage (only to be betrayed later) didn''t do too good to his reputation. But¡­ to the civilians who don''t really know (or care) about stuff like that, they love the 3rd Hokage, he is after all kind and has made a lot of decisions that better the life of a civilian ninja. After all, if he was bad at everything containing the job of a Hokage, he would have been booted from the position a long time ago.


    But recently, the ninja have been too unsatisfied with him recently so instead of starting some infighting with his supporters and nonsupporters. Hiruzen decided to step down, the last thing he wants is to see his own comrades fight against each-other.


    ¡­.


    That is why the Daimyo has travelled all the way to Konoha. He has been staying with his son in law (Yami).


    As the meeting has started, Hiruzen is the first to speak as he announces. "The ones viable to be the next Hokage are: Minato Namikaze, Jiraya, Orochimaru, Yami Inuzuka and Fugaku Uchiha¡­ but Yami Inuzuka and Jiraya have pulled out of the race immediately. Saying that they don''t want to be the next Hokage."


    Hiruzen breathed a sigh of relief inside of himself, because Yami decided to not participate in the race. But there is also Orochimaru¡­ he knows that Orochimaru is also too cold to be Hokage too. Even though Orochimaru is his favorite student, Hiruzen knows that Orochimaru would be too risky to have as a Hokage too¡­


    ''He could actually be even worse than Yami as a Hokage.'' Thinks Hiruzen, planning on how to drop Orochimaru out of the race too.


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    A/N: Hiruzen doesn''t necessarily hate Yami, he just isn''t fond of him. Also he thinks that Orochimaru too wouldn''t be a good Hokage due to his cold and cruel nature.


    ANNOUNCEMENT: For every 1000 Power Stones in this story, this will get +1 extra chapter plus the daily chapter.


    (THIS IS THE BONUS CHAPTER)


    If you want to support me:


    Check Out My P.A.T.R.E.O.N


    (23 chapters in advance)


    P.P.S: Patre¨°n just entered canon...????

 Chapter 174 - The 4th Hokage is…

    Chapter 174


    Title: The 4th Hokage is¡­


    ¡­.


    -General POV-


    After Hiruzen made that announcement, the meeting officially started.


    The Daimyo is the first to speak after that. He has a paper fan in his hands, and he uses it to cover his mouth as he says. "Hmmm¡­ it seems like my son in law won''t be participating in this. That truly makes me sad, I think he would make an amazing Hokage. But he told me that the main reason why he didn''t accept was because if he did become Hokage, he wouldn''t be able to spend time with his wife. So I am able to understand him¡­ he is a newly wed after all. Hohohoho."


    The others just nod at this, even though what the Daimyo just said, would be taken as offensive if anyone else in this room said it¡­ but the Daimyo isn''t really part of those rules.


    "Anyway, who would you like to suggest now." Asks the Daimyo, talking about choosing the future Kage of Konoha like he is talking about the weather.


    One of the nobles suggests. "How about Fugaku Uchiha, the Uchiha Clan has been loyal to Konoha and the Land of Fire for generations."


    "Hmmm¡­" The Daimyo just hums at this. As if he is thinking about it, when in reality he is thinking about whom Yami told him would be a good Kage¡­


    After many hours of discussion, they debated many options, advantages and disadvantages every candidate has. Finally there was a decision at 56% votes for Minato, 30% for Fugaku and 14% Orochimaru. But the Daimyo still hadn''t given his vote so there is that, plus some nobles might decide to change their votes so they can please the Daimyo¡­ who knows ¡­ maybe they might even get rewarded by the Daimyo due to their ''friendship''.


    The Daimyo seems to be thinking a little. "Hmmmm¡­" But finally he just said. "I decide to nominate Minato as the next Hokage."


    ¡­.


    -One Week Later-


    Minato is currently atop the Hokage Tower, addressing the crowd below him¡­ he still can''t believe it. His dream is literally coming true in front of his eyes. He sees so many people gathered here for his coronation ceremony, he cannot help but feel a little nervous at this. Next to him was Kushina comforting him, she had a noticeable bump on her belly, signifying that she is pregnant already.


    "C''mon now, Minato, be brave¡­ go there and dominate." Says Kushina pating Minato on the back.


    But Minato''s face becomes even pailer. "What if I slip while walking up there or something like that. That will be all I will be remembered for, no matter how good of a Hokage I am."


    Kushina just raises a questioning eyebrow at this. "You¡­ do know that as an S Rank ninja¡­ saying something like that is stupid. You have the best reflexes in Konoha. Don''t be stupid by saying something like that."


    ¡­.


    On the other hand Yami had a whole different problem to deal with. He was currently in his house sitting on his dinner table. His daughters and Tsume had gone to Minato''s Coronation Ceremony, they also took Shiro with them.


    So it is only Yami and Shiori (his wife) in the mansion. They had food in front of them but neither of them touched it.


    Suddenly Shiori frowns a little and says.


    "So¡­ I noticed that Tsume has a baby bump¡­ you wouldn''t know anything about that now would you."


    Yami just casually shrugs. "Well I don''t have any idea."


    He starts eating his meal after saying that.


    Shiori still doesn''t do anything as she asks again. "I see¡­ but isn''t Hana yours and Tsume''s daughter, as you can see, that seems a little suspicious to me."


    Yami just looks completely calm at the subtle accusations his wife is sending him. "Well that is true, but you know that ever since I married you, I haven''t really done anything s*xual with her."


    Shiori doesn''t even hide her suspicion as she looks at Yami very intensely. "Is that so¡­"


    "Yep¡­ plus why would I care who Tsume sleeps with now. After all, me and her are done as far as I am concerned." Says Yami as he takes another bite of his steak.


    Shiori''s eyes drip with suspicion, she doesn''t trust Yami at all on this.


    "I married you even though you already have two kids. And I NEVER treated them bad. I even let you live in the same house as one of your ''ex'' lovers WHOM you already had a child with before. Now she is pregnant AGAIN and you expect me to think that it had nothing to do with you¡­ you KNOW that we are expecting a child together. So why do this to me when I have been only nice and accepting to you." Says Shiori, even as tears started dripping from her eyes as she said the last part. "So please¡­ I beg of you Yami¡­ please tell me the truth."


    Yami suddenly stops eating, he still has an absolutely calm face on him, even while Shiori sobs in front of him.


    "So¡­ you want to know the truth huh?..." Asks Yami, and contrary to her expectations, Shiori strangely fels an icy cold feeling crawl up her spine as Yami continues saying. "The truth is that I don''t really love you."


    Shiori looks hurt by this, as she can''t even look at Yami''s face anymore. But Yami still continues. "I married you because of the benefits that you have as the Daimyo''s daughter. You have nothing special, and you also aren''t as smart as you think."


    Shiori just covered her face as tears flew down her face. "Did I do it with Tsume? Absolutely yes¡­ I did. I fu*ked her in our bed, where we sleep. It isn''t anything against you or your beauty¡­ but I do know that you don''t love me. I can confidently say that you NEVER will love me. Me and you¡­ we are the same. Just different sides of the same coin. So yes I do know what I did¡­ Do I regret it?... Nope absolutely not."


    Suddenly Shiori stops crying as she looks at Yami. "You¡­ never loved me?"


    She was surprised at this, after all, Yami expresses a lot of physical love towards her. She getts angry at this and Shiori gets an idea and without thinking she asks Yami. "Then tell me dear husband¡­ how would you feel if I cheated on you with another man. Maybe then you will understand how I feel."


    Yami just shrugs.


    "Well then, I would have to torture you and slowly rip my child out of you while you continuously scream in agony. I will also have a couple of horses and other animals ready to r*pe you to death. I will also kill and torture everyone you have ever loved. That would make as a great example, maybe my next wife wouldn''t DARE do  something against me after I make an example out of you." Says Yami casually.


    Shiori''s eyes widened and her pupils dilated she... is absolutely terrified when Yami says that. She had almost forgotten that she is married to the best killer Konoha has. But now... she is hrashly reminded.


    Yami suddenly just smirks again at Shiori. "Also¡­."


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    A/N: *yawn* I am sleepy good night.


    P.S: This is a real look in harem like relationsh.i.p.s¡­ they just don''t work. So here it is complicated like this. We see how Shiori has been feeling during this time, as her mask finally cracked and she said her true thoughts.


    P.P.S: We see that relationsh.i.p.s are a little more complex that just simply love.


    ANNOUNCEMENT: For every 1000 Power Stones in this story, this will get +1 extra chapter plus the daily chapter.


    Check Out My P.A.T.R.E.O.N


    pa treon.com/HolyJoker


    There are 23 chapters in adavance for Naruto: Dream to Immortality and a bunch of other stories that I write and publish in there.

 Chapter 175 - A Loud Roar...

    Chapter 175


    Title: A Loud Roar...


    ¡­.


    Yami smiles menacingly. "Also¡­ there is something you must understand my dear Shiori, you belong to me, your pu*sy, mouth, blood and flesh¡­ EVERYTHING OF YOURS IS MINE."


    Suddenly Yami''s maniacal expression calms down, as he leans back on his chair.


    "And it isn''t because you are a woman, or because you are my wife¡­ I have you because I want you. It''s because I am strong, I am so strong that not even your father will be able to do anything against me. I can ruin the Land of Fire and sink it into poverty whenever I want, I hold the rabid dogs of the Land of Fire under a tight leash¡­. I can also let them go whenever I want." Says Yami casually, he has a cold glint in his eyes as he sees Shiori look at her hands terrified.


    She finally understands the situation she is in¡­ so she can''t help but feel abject despair¡­ finally understanding what monster she has married.


    Yami on the other hand, just hides his smirk. He knows that Shiori has a dominant personality so it is unlikely she will listen to Yami for a long time. But her fear of Yami will keep her in line. She is someone who Yami truly understands. After all, living with her for some time has helped him get a grasp on her personality.


    ''In a couple of years¡­ she will suppress her fear and start working against me. Well it doesn''t matter, I already put fail-safes on her¡­ just in case she decides to do something¡­ that is unfavourable for me.'' Think Yami, planning on how to manipulate her. Shiori isn''t someone who is likely to be easily manipulated. Especially since they are together almost 24/7.


    ''Hmmm¡­ but I truly did cheat on her. Sadly for her she isn''t strong enough so she has no right to complain. After all, I am not going to suppress my urges for my wife or something like that. I finally got power and have to restrict myself even when I have power¡­ THEN WHY THE HELL WOULD I EVEN NEED POWER IF I WON''T USE IT.'' Thinks Yami, as he plans on cheating on Shiori again with another woman. This time though he will not have a child with them. His plan is to create Kiba and after that, he will stop having so many children anymore due to them not being useful anymore.


    *Yawn* Yami gets up after yawning, leaving a shocked Shiori ''alone''... well he will obviously never let someone like his wife alone. If she did something stupid like cheat on him¡­ well he won''t necessarily care, he will kill her and the perpetrator as well as his family. But unlike killing, if the rumours start spreading, it won''t be easy to quell them so easily.


    ''Shiori should be glad that she is still useful to me¡­ if she wasn''t¡­ well¡­ people always have ''accidents''.'' Schemes Yami, thinking of a way to kill Shiori, he knows that eventually he will have to kill her. She will obviously get older and less attractive, so he will then need a new wife.


    Divorces aren''t exactly a thing in this world. People separate constantly, but after marriage, the woman can only run away¡­ and subsequently hunted down by her husband or clan.


    But Yami will never allow Shiori to run, that will cause too much political unrest and trouble for him. So it would be easier to have her killed and deem it as an accident.


    ¡­


    -Three Months Later-


    -Yami POV-


    I just look at the room around me. My big living room actually. The pregnant Tsume and Shiori are here and so are my daughters, Yoruichi and Hana.


    We are currently all sitting in a half-circle comfortable red couch, with a low rectangular table in the middle. We are all playing cards, I am currently intentionally losing, this will make me seem more normal and approachable to my family. They will see me as human and not some monster that does nothing wrong and they can''t understand. After all, humans usually don''t act nice when they encounter something they don''t understand.


    Minato has been Hokage for three months already¡­ and I can''t really say that he has been doing a good job at it. I mean he is better than Hiruzen, so the ninja have a low standard which he passes with flying colours. He is also good with the civilians, so that is going good but¡­ Konoha isn''t experiencing some golden period or something like that.


    I remember that back in the anime, Minato was praised by everyone, but it seems that as I expected, he wasn''t that good at leading Konoha. I mean I have to admit that he has been trained his whole life to be a killer, so in comparison he is doing a pretty good job if you take that into account.


    But if it was me the one sitting in that chair¡­ well¡­ I am  about to create a miracle management by this world''s standards.


    As I am thinking this¡­ suddenly a shaking sound is heard all around the table. Contrary to my family''s, my expression hasn''t really changed. I have been expecting this for this whole month. I would have to be a certain type of stupid to not prepare for this situation.


    *ROAAAAR*


    A very loud and terrifying roar is heard and a malicious chakra with killing intent descends, making my family freeze in place, even Tsume who is a Special Jonin. Though the killing intent doesn''t really affect me, I still immediately disperse it with my own chakra, and make four shadow clones that grab Shiori, Tsume, Hana and Yoruichi to take them away.


    Tsume is the first to ask Yami with a desperate look on her face. "What is going on?"


    My clone who is holding her just says. "Most likely an enemy attack, judging by the chakra, it must be a tailed beast inside the village."


    Before Tsume can say anymore my clones use the Hiraishin and disappear in a dark flash. Then I too am surrounded by a dark flash and¡­


    *fwosh*


    ¡­.


    I appear at the top of the Hokage Tower. Hiruzen is there too, together with some anbu. He says. "We need to take the nine tails out of the village."


    Before he can say anything anymore I say. "I will take care of it¡­ and also."


    I make on handsign and¡­


    *poof*


    I am covered in a large cloud of smoke, which when it clears out. There are hundreds of my shadow clones. I just swish my arm sideways and say. "Save the people of Konoha."


    *fwosh*


    They all disappear in a dark flash. Then I just bite my thumb and clasp my hand on the ground.


    <SUMMONING JUTSU>


    *POOF*


    This time the whole Hokage Tower is  surrounded in an even bigger cloud of smoke. Out of it come ten giant bats as big as trucks, a mosquito lady and¡­ a giant red leech that has wrapped itself around the Hokage Tower.


    I just look towards the nine tails. It suddenly also looks towards me. I just smirk at it mockingly. "Wanna dance little fox?"


    ¡­.


    A/N: The time is moving, Yami is showing his dominance again. Also we are now again inside his mind. We see what he is thinking and like always, his thought


    process is cold and terrifying. Also Yami is 100% prepared for this battle.


    P.S: Minato is fighting against Tobi currently. If you were wondering where he was.


    ANNOUNCEMENT: For every 1000 Power Stones in this story, this will get +1 extra chapter plus the daily chapter.


    Check Out My P.A.T.R.E.O.N


    pa treon.com/HolyJoker


    (There are 23 chapters in adavance)

 Chapter 176 - Hiruzen and Yamis Cooperation...

    Chapter 176


    Title: Hiruzen and Yami''s Cooperation...


    ¡­.


    -General POV-


    Yami looks at the nine tails. His eyes shining with a dangerous light in them. He looks at his summons.


    "Leech disperse yourself and heal the people of Konoha." Orders Yami, the leech immediately splits itself into many smaller leeches, and starts healing the injured. Yami plans to become the main player in this tragedy, he plans to turn it into his advantage and cover Minato''s accomplishments in this.


    "Mosquito Sage, use your mosquitos to save as many people as you can. Try searching in obscure places like under buildings and such." Continues Yami, he looks at the female looking mosquito sage (the mosquito sage) in the eyes. He knows that this is the most likely of his summons to try and plot against him. So he gives her a hidden warning by saying. "Be careful."


    To the ninja around Yami, it seems like he is worried about her. But the Mosquito Sage knows better. Even though she has NEVER done something against Yami''s interests. Yami has already noticed her intentions and has made it pretty clear to her that he WILL kill her if she either steps out of line or stops being useful to him.


    The Mosquito Sage just smiles nervously at Yami. She has known Yami for a while now, and even with her rebellious thoughts that come out every now and then, all she needs is just a look from Yami and that will calm all of her crazy rebellious thoughts. She also doesn''t want to end up like the Leach Sage¡­ who is just a machine and tool for Yami.


    Finally she decides to fly away and spread most of her mosquitoes around Konoha, to try and save as many people as they can.


    The last, the Bat Sage just nods at Yami already understanding its duty of having to protect the Inuzuka Clan Compound. The other Inuzuka Jonin have already summoned the rest of his bat clan so he already knows the premise of what is going on.


    .


    While that was happening the Nine Tails has already charged up a tailed beast bomb and thrown it towards Yami. The tailed beast bomb obliterated everything in its path as if the world itself was making way for the ball of destruction.


    The ninjas and anbu too are scared as they try to dodge the ball of destruction.


    Yami just narrows his eyes at this and does three handsings, then he takes a Hiraishin Kunai in his hands and does the tiger handsing.


    The Tailed Beast Bomb has almost reached Yami, but that is when a strange Fuinjutsu mark appears in front of Yami.


    And the giant ball of chakra is immediately taken away. Not by the Hiraishin technique but by  a reverse summoning seal towards one of the hiraishin seals in the ocean.


    Immediately the ninja behind Yami ley out a sigh of relief, after all of that thing landed in the Hokage Mountain behind them, then the area of destruction from the tailed beast bomb would reach the whole Konoha. One tailed beast bomb¡­ is all that is needed to completely destroy Konoha.


    *ROAR*


    The nine tails roars towards Yami, sending a giant soundwave about as strong as an S Rank Wind Jutsu towards him.


    Yami does another couple of handsigns and slowly a barrier forms in front of him. Sealing the wind wave in, and locking it.


    That is when Hiruzen decides to take action and says. "Yami, if I got you close to the nine tails would you be able to teleport it outside of Konoha using the Hiraishin."


    Yami frowns for a split second and after thinking about it he says. "Yes, but teleporting something like the Nine Tails is bound to cost me almost all of mu chakra, but I believe I can move it outside of Konoha. The shadow clones and summons took their toll on my chakra reserves too."


    Hiruzen has a grave look on his face as he nods. .


    ''Maybe I judged him too early after all, it is said that only in a time of crisis does someone show their true selves¡­'' Thinks Hiruzen, contemplating if he maybe has let Yami''s killing of Danzo cloud his judgement when it came to Yami.


    *poof*


    Summons Enma, and when the monkey sees the grave situation. Before he even has time to think about his next action he hears Hiruzen say. "Enma: Adamantine Staff."


    *poof*


    Enma immediately transforms into it, and Hiruzen uses the staff by simply jumping high up and saying. "Maximum Expand."


    The staff immediately expanda to as thick as a bus, Hiruzen throws it towards the nine tails, who just swipes sideways and changes the direction of the giant staff, the nine tails then looks at Hiruzen¡­ but suddenly¡­ as the staff''s tip was pointing towards the nine tails¡­


    *fwosh*


    The staff extends¡­


    *baam*


    [Hell Swamp]


    Suddenly below the nine tails feet, the earth turns into quick sand and tendrils of mud slowly grasp the nine tails legs holding them in place.


    "YAMI NOW." Screams Hiruzen, telling Yami that is his chance.


    Yami just throws dozens of kunai towards the nine tails.


    *fwosh*


    He disappeared in a black flash next to his kunai, and he then appeared on top of the nine tails.


    *fwosh*


    And in a dark flash both Yami and the nine tails disappeared¡­


    ¡­.


    On the other hand around the village Yami''s clones are running around saving people all over. Saving people from debris and other things.


    One of the clones even notices Mikoto carrying what seems to be a baby¡­ he is Sasuke, Yami''s useful tool¡­ Yami''s clone sees a big piece of debris falling towards Mikoto and is about to go save her when...


    *fwosh*


    A small figure jumps towards the giant debris and¡­


    *baam*


    Completely destroys it.


    The clone''s eyes widen when he sees who the small figure is¡­ it is Itachi, using chakra to strengthen his muscles.


    ''Talk about monstrous talent.'' Thinks the clone as he goes to help someone else. After all, Yami wants to be saving people and then engraves himself in the citizens of Konoha as their saviour by the way he acts.


    ¡­.


    On the other side Yami, just transported the nine tails out of Konoha. Around 500 metres away, he also seems to be sweating and breathing heavily.


    -Yami POV-


    This is all an act, though it takes around 20% of my natural chakra, I do easily have tailed beast levels chakra due to my hearts that I have... I still haven''t even used any of my chakra from the 100 Strength Seal.


    No wonder Minato gave his life to seal the nine tails during the canon timeline, he knew he couldn''t outlast the monster.


    Anyway, I teleported the nine tails away, but only 500 metres. So I still get the glory, but the plans also go along as they are supposed to.


    ¡­.


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    Yami is simply making the best of this situation, and how many people die on this? Why should that matter if it doesn''t give any benefits to Yami.


    Also Yami is going to use this to make himself appear as someone cold but still cares about Konoha.


    P.S: Like always, you get +1 chapter for that day if the story reaches 1000 power stones.

 Chapter 177 - Nine Tails Sealed...

    Chapter 177


    Title: Nine Tails Sealed...


    ¡­.


    After teleporting the nine tails, and analysing the situation, I immediately start to draw Sage Chakra from the seal on my belly. My hair extended into a spiky stupor, under my eyes dark red markings appear as my chakra levels spike up.


    I again immediately do a couple of more handsigns¡­


    <Blood Sage Art: Blood Swamp>


    Slowly a blood like swamp appears below the nine tails and it starts getting Kurama stuck in.


    But the fox just uses its many tails to thrash around and blow away all, the swampy biome that I create below him.


    Suddenly the nine tail''s head swings around kicking me off it''s head. And with surprisingly swift grace and agility for such a giant beast, the nine tails just easily slaps me while I am midair.


    *BOOOM*


    And crash me into the ground creating a crater all around me. I see its giant paw coming for me again.


    *fwosh*


    *boom*


    Suddenly, though unseen to the normal eye due to the small self created natural lens that doesn''t allow others to see how his eyes changed into a three tomoe sharingan¡­ and then change again into a pinwheel like form.


    This is Obito''s Mangekyo. I noticed that the nine tails was already out of Obito''s control. It has actually been so for quite a while so I decide to take this chance and¡­


    <Genjutsu: MANGEKYO SHARINGAN>


    Immediately the Nine Tails starts thrashing around but in a bit¡­ it  soon calms down.


    ¡­.


    -General POV-


    While this all was happening, Minato finally got the real attacker to escape.


    He knows what he has to do¡­ in a battle of endurace the nine tails will win, plus the battle mustn''t last too long or the other countries might attack too. The nine tails has only been sealed once, that was when the 1st Hokage held it down and weakened it for Mito to seal. Ever since then, there has only been seal transfers and never really a change of the seal, only the Jinchuriki were changed.


    ''I can''t seal the nine tails, I will¡­'' Contemplates Minato as he was about to teleport close to where Yami was, even though he didn''t express it on the outside he is definitely scared on the inside. ''I will have to use the Reaper''s Death Seal and seal half of the nine tails into two different people, one of them will have to be me. But the other¡­''


    After a dozen seconds Minato finally reaches his destination and he sees Yami fighting against the nine tails. He sees that Yami seems to be using S Rank Fuinjutsu and Ninjutsu, trying to restrict the nine tails.


    Minato immediately throws dozens of kunai around the battlefield. He knows that Yami is tired and even seems to be breathing heavily, expressing his exhaustion, plus his chakra signature is very faint.


    ''Hang on a little more Yami.'' Thinks Minato as he tries to spread even more Hiraishin kunai, he knows that if he doesn''t prepare, he will only get in Yami''s way if he doesn''t have the Hiraishin markers around so he can move easier.


    ¡­.


    Then finally Minato decides to use his signature move as he disappears from his place in a yellow flash, and he appears next to Yami. Who seems too distracted and concentrated on the Nine Tails.


    He simply says to Yami. "We will need to seal it."


    Yami doesn''t look surprised by his appearance, and Minato isn''t necessarily surprised. After all, as Minato knows, Yami is a close range sensor.


    Yami takes this time to answer as he and Minato dodge another one of the nine tails attacks by teleporting away, but not before Yami touches Minato''s shoulder. He lets Yami do that because he has already caught up to his plan.


    Yami side teleports towards Minato and says. "We will be finished if we keep going like this. We will eventually get tired and most likely the village will be obliterated. Plus there are the other villages to think about, with the war just finished, they might like to take a chance and try to attack one last time. We need to end this NOW."


    Hearing Yami say the real situation that they are in. Helps Minato make up his mind. He just nods and says. "I need my son to be brought here."


    Says Minato as he teleports away, and a split second later he appears back here with Kushina and baby Naruto in his arms.


    "Yami¡­ I wanna ask you something." Says Minato, who is strangely calm, as he has baby Naruto in his arms and as Kushina falls to the ground¡­ lifeless¡­ unable to live any longer due to the toll the pregnancy and tailed beast extraction took out of her.


    Minato''s eyes tear up at this as Yami just looks at him with a cold face, expressing no emotion at all. But Yami still understands what is about to happen as he says. "Sure, ask me whatever you want, Minato."


    Minato finally hugs the blond baby in front of him for one last time as he says. "Take care of Naruto for me, will you Yami?"


    Yami just nods and says. "Don''t worry about it, I promise you and give my word that Naruto will be treated nicely and like a hero."


    Minati just nods at this, not knowing that Yami didn''t even mean any of the words he said.


    He puts the baby Naruto on the ground and starts doing some handsigns.


    <Shiki Fujin: Reaper Death Seal>


    Yami just looks at the Shinigami in amazement, the Nine Tails tries to move but due to being under Yami''s Genjutsu, it can''t really do anything.


    The Shinigami used his hand to grab into the Nine Tails and use its knife to cut it in two, and sealing them, one half in Minato and the other in Naruto.


    *UAAAUAAAUAAA!*


    Who also started crying, but even after Minato''s death and all of this... Yami is concentrated on something else¡­ the Shinigami was looking him dead in the eyes... with a confused but also amused look on his eyes.


    Suddenly it opens its mouth.


    ¡­.


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    HOLY SH*T... apartment building got hit with lightning¡­ I swear I am not making this sh*t up.????????????


    Fried my phone as it was charging, so I had to buy a new one. Thankfully all of my files are saved up. I will post again today. Sorry for the late update.


    P.S: Fried my TV too, but I never watch TV so it doesn''t matter.????


    P.P.S: Thankfully I didn''t die or else I wouldn''t have reincarnated since it wasn''t truck -kun.


    P.P.P.S: Like always, you get +1 chapter for that day if the story reaches 1000 power stones.


    (Soon the bonus chapter is coming.)


    Check Out My P.A.T.R.E.O.N


    pa treon.com/HolyJoker


    (23 chapters in advance)

 Chapter 178 - The Shinigami…

    Chapter 178


    Title: The Shinigami¡­


    ¡­.


    The Shinigami is a translucent, gaunt spectre with a demonic visage. It is still behind Minato, whose eyes are slowly turning hollow signifying his soon to be death.


    The Shinigami is  still looking at Yami with its ghostly eyes as he opens his mouth, which shows that he has a mouth full of sharp, jagged teeth, and a very long almost serpentine tongue.


    ¡­


    -Yami POV-


    The thing is looking at me¡­ and the intimidating aura really is something else isn''t it. I actually feel fear, even though I know that he can''t hurt me. Though I do not use, and will most likely never use the Reapers Death Seal, I do know some of the details about it. Whenever I see this and other techniques like the Edo Tensei, it¡­ really humbles me, it reminds me that monstrous geniuses like them exist, those whom even something like death is an abstract concept that is understandable.


    I can easily admit to myself that I am extremely envious of them. I wonder who created the Reaper Death Seal, he was definitely a talented Fuinjutsu User. Though I can easily claim that I am the best Fuinjutsu User alive¡­ when compared to geniuses at the art along its history, I am nothing special.


    I see that he moves its mouth and suddenly a voice comes out of its mouth. "YoU CaN sEe mE? aH! I UnDeRsTAN noW."


    The voice that comes out is hoarse and strange, as if it isn''t supposed to exist. I see that it seems as if it noticed something. My body is already translucent as I have already used Kamui to become intangible.


    Also¡­ this thing seems to know something about me. I can easily guess that it must be my reincarnation, after all that is the only thing even remotely special for me.


    I just look directly at the thing''s empty eyes. My eyes locked into his¡­ as a malicious smile appeared on my face and slowly a black hole opened in the middle of the Shinigami''s c.h.e.s.t.


    I simply say to him. "Tell me now¡­ what do you know about me. Or that hole will expand and kill you."


    The Shinigami¡­ just looks at his c.h.e.s.t without even a look of worry on his face.


    I know that this is unlikely to work since it is not a spiritual attack. But he doesn''t need to know that I already know that.


    The Shinigami suddenly forks his snake like tongue l.i.c.k.i.n.g the air all around him. I can see his jagged teeth as his face¡­ morphs into a terrifying smile.


    "HahAhAhahaHaHaAh." Laughed the Shinigami, I have to manually turn off a little of the reception from my ears to stop them from bleeding. The baby Naruto on the ground is also protected by me, before the sound can reach him, a wood enactment appears all around him.  After finishing his laughter it says. "YoU aRe NoT FrOm herE."


    Slowly the Shinigami starts dissipating as Minato is already dead and his soul sacrifice can no longer keep the Shinigami here.


    But I just look at the creature coldly and say to the shinigami as I point my finger at it. "Tick, tock the clock is ticking, just wait a little more and I will come to torture you to insanity. I will come and kill you all up there. So be careful¡­"


    But the only things I hear is his laughter as it gets dimmer and dimmer, his laughter sounding as if someone who just heard something that was the funniest thing in the world.


    *tch*


    I was trying to guide him to get closer to me, but sadly it seems like it didn''t work. I guess old beings like him could easily see through stuff like this. Sadly I only have the Dagger of Soul Valley which was absorbed by the Red Cube which can help me hit soul beings. I mean my cube can change forms into it and take its properties, but that is still useless. I am not dumb enough to approach him. Now I at least have a lead on my reincarnation. But... I need to be patient on this or else it will be a wreckage, I mustn''t rush this or it will have devastating implications. I don''t want to lose everything just due to recklessness.


    .


    I move the wood which is protecting Naruto away. I see a baby Naruto with whiskers and all that. He is crying, so I pick him up and rock him a little to calm him down. And he soon stops crying, even though his parent''s corpses are only around five metres away.


    Obviously babies don''t have something like a 6th sense that allows them to know if their parents died. I can already sense Naruto''s chakra bubble up and his chakra reserves slowly raise up.


    It seems like¡­ I will have to take action.


    ¡­.


    -General POV-


    But since the Nine Tails seems to have been handled, at least they know that Konoha will at least not be completely gone from the world. Today is one to remember since Konoha was almost gone from the face of the world.


    Suddenly when they enter the place where the surge in chakra was felt before the Nine Tails completely disappeared.


    When they arrive there, Hiruzen has to stop himself from exclaiming in shock. The 4th Hokage, Minato Namikaze... on the ground dead¡­ Kushina Uzumaki on the ground dead too.  There is only Yami sitting on a boulder that got taken out off the ground during the fight against the Nine Tails.


    Yami just looks at Hiruzen and the ninja behind him, unlike his usual neutral look. Yami''s eyes had a cold glint on his eyes.


    ''Dominating, stubborn, inflexible, makes himself seem like he does it all for the better of his organisation¡­ that is how a leader acts. Leaders don''t necessarily need to even know anything as long as they act like they know things. The sheep will believe him.'' Think Yami. ''I need to dominate now¡­ finally I don''t need to wear any more masks.''


    Yami just opened his mouth, his eyes cold, with the full moon behind his back.


    "I am going to be the 5th Hokage." Says Yami simply, no matter if anyone wants to refuse this or not. Their instincts scream at them and they all get chills as Yami simply gets up and jumps down from the boulder.


    No one stopped him just walking away as he gave Hiruzen the baby Naruto. No one dared stop him, the dangerous atmosphere around Yami¡­ even stopped on his tracks someone like Hiruzen who has been in hundreds of close death situations.


    Yami wasn''t simply exclaiming or explaining anything¡­ he is simply informing everyone of his decision as he walks back towards Konoha.


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    The subject of Yami''s reincarnation and how it happened won''t be brought back up again for quite some time.


    Also we see that Yami doesn''t need to hide anymore, everything is calculated and his power is unshakable.


    P.S: Like always, you get +1 chapter for that day if the story reaches 1000 power stones.


    (THIS IS THE BONUS CHAPTER THAT I COULDN''T POST YESTERDAY due to... you know... lightning hitting my appartment and frying my TV and phone.)


    Check Out My P.A.T.R.E.O.N


    pa treon.com/HolyJoker


    (23 chapters in advance)

 Chapter 179 - Clinging higher...

    Chapter 179


    Title: Clinging higher...


    ¡­.


    -Yami POV-


    I just walk away from the destruction behind me.


    *sigh* Finally I can stop wearing masks and can act like myself. I know that having a mask on for such a long time¡­ because the mask can become the real you. It''s like someone acting like a clown in school, he will start acting like a clown even trying to make people laugh again even when he is outside of school, when that mask is useless. It is a change that won''t be noticed by him. After all, the change is so subtle that it is almost unnoticed by the person.


    Back in the day I had to remind myself that I do not love my new mother. Or else my mask might have leaked in and changed my true personality. The best liars are the ones who can lie to themselves¡­ and when that is taken to the extreme¡­ well now¡­ you have a big problem in your hands.


    But that isn''t a problem for me, I know just the right amount of lies to believe about myself. I immediately don''t trust those lies when I am done with them being useful to me.


    I look at the jonin uniform I am wearing and notice that it has some scratches. Immediately I use some wind chakra around my body, it immediately obliterates all of my clothes. After that, I use some chakra in an invisible seal on my body and I am surrounded in a cloud of smoke and as I walk through the smoke which whifts away as my body moves, I now have a brand new Jonin uniform.


    My control over Fuinjutsu has gotten pretty good. Now that Minato and Kushina are dead, I will become the 5th Hokage after a brief emergency voting process. Which I will obviously win, I didn''t build up this political power just so I can wipe my a?s with it.


    Except the Uchiha, there are only other minor clans who aren''t on my side. Even clans like the Yamanaka and even Sarutobi Clan, they are kind of neutral, but will still take my side. But who knows though, the Sarutobi Clan might ''betray'' me and vote for Hiruzen since he is part of their clan. But that doesn''t matter at all, I have way more than 51% of the votes needed to win. Obviously the civilians of Konoha only vote the civilian council members, who represent their interests, I have them all in the pocket which is already ~20% of the votes. But the civilians have only enough voting power to not bother the ninjas. The Daimyo, nobels, current hokage (which is unavailable) and the Konoha Clan Heads.


    ¡­.


    -General POV-


    (Eighteen Hours Later)


    After the Nine Tails Attack some villages decided to try and proad how much Konoha was weakened, their spies told them that the 4th Hokage, Minato Namikaze. Immediately other nations tried to ''send'' ninja to travel to Konoha because of a ''mission''.


    But¡­ they were all killed. No sign of who did it. But as soon as they entered the land of Fire¡­ not even their bodies were found. It is as if they disappear from existence when they enter it.


    But that is when they got the news¡­ not from their spies, but from the merchants who travelled to Konoha.


    Two days later a ceremony was being held in Konoha. Where the whole village is already rebuilt, the streets were packed up to full capacity. They wanted to see the new Hokage, it is all thanks to him why they were able to return back to their normal lives.


    Finally atop the Hokage tower¡­ Hiruzen appears, with the Daimyo right next to him and that is when Hiruzen uses a fuinjutsu seal to amplify his voice as he says. "Let us welcome the 5th Hokage of Konoha¡­ Yami Inuzuka."


    That is when the crowd can finally see Yami as he is wearing his Hokage uniform, which consists of a white robe with plenty  of red decorations on it. Plus the hat also with the fire kanji on it.


    *WOOOOHHHHH*


    Immediately the crowd started cheering for Yami. After all, he had rebuilt Konoha within a day, as soon as he became Hokage.


    As the crowd continues cheering, Yami simply puts a hand up and with a slight smile on his face he says. "Everyone, can I please have a moment of silence to say something."


    As Yami says that with a calm voice, everyone stops cheering but their excitement wasn''t down at all. They simply listened to what Yami said, it is as if an invisible power of will settled upon them, they cannot help but look at Yami, who expressed absolute confidence in every movement that he made.


    Yami is a fresh air to them, who are used to a Hokage who is uncertain of his actions and even asks for their forgiveness as Hirruzen did when he showed them the ''demon fox'' baby. And telling them that Konoha would need their help to survive and everyone should work together as one big family.


    ¡­.


    While looking at the people below me I can''t help but think of the different things and actions that I have taken to get here¡­ I don''t regret any of them, with the knowledge I had during the time, I have made the perfect decision in every one of them. I chose the perfect road to power, I took every opportunity that was given to me.


    Killing, slaughtering and torturing people, I regret none of them. I did all of those things to normal people, ninja, children, parents, elderly and even some disabled people.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    I REGRET NONE OF IT.


    I am 100% knowledgeable of what I did and how I did it. I am not someone who runs away from reality. I accept what I have done. And I will continue to do this and possibly even worse things along the way. I will not ask forgiveness to god, or anything for my actions. Because I don''t regret any of them. Instead of looking at the past, I will look at the future ¡­ and think what I will do next.


    "Now that we have some quiet, I, Yami Inuzuka, would like to tell you all that Konoha''s people are good and amazing people. And I will make Konoha the GREATEST. A lot of people might not like me being the leader, but to hell with weaklings like them who cannot handle power and responsibility. MAKE KONOHA THE GREATEST." As I said that, I smiled and waved towards the people. My smile is casual but not too casual either. But I did want to show that I am 100% sure of what I am doing. As soon as I say that, I get a thunderous roar in response from the happy people. They obviously don''t know sh*t of what I am saying. But really, they don''t need to, after all, most of the population is made out of dumbasses.


    I obviously stole some tactics from my first life politicians. After all, it has already been proven to work. Obviously the smart people won''t buy into it, but who cares what they think¡­ after all they are a minority¡­


    Now comes the next part of my plan¡­


    ¡­.


    A/N: This is not meant to offend anyone, if some politician sounded like Yami. This is a work of fiction and anything representing the real world names/companies is only a coincidence.


    P.S: Like always, you get +1 chapter for that day if the story reaches 1000 power stones.


    (sorry for the late update, had some sh*t going on in real life)?


    Check Out My P.A.T.R.E.O.N


    pa treon.com/HolyJoke

 Chapter 180 - The 5th Hokage...

    Chapter 180


    Title: The 5th Hokage...


    ¡­


    I look at the people below me as I just wave towards them. I know that I am definitely not going to be the best leader, after all, I will only look after my shoulders, but no one needs to know that now do they.


    People are sheep and I will simply be their shepherd. So they WILL follow me.


    I think of the different strategies on how to deal with this.


    Just like this I walk back to my office where I will stay as the Hokage. It is a simple office with a lot of paperwork piled all around it. I just brush the paperwork aside and sit down on the comfy chair that I have personally made for myself.


    *sigh*... this world really doesn''t feel like home. I¡­ wanna go home and tell my family this one last thing of everything that I have done, to get it out of my shoulders. Then I can will myself to leave them behind too, or else even if I reach godhood I know that I will keep thinking about them. I have decided¡­ I WILL GO HOME.


    I know that unlike some other families, my family will easily accept me, even when I tell them of this. I¡­ need to see them one more time or I will be addicted to keeping to meet them on my Genjutsu. They are my last weakness¡­ they are my chains holding me down.


    My family.


    When I think of them I can almost feel a chill go down my spine. My little brother, my mother, they are the only people who will never betray me. They are the ones who have always loved me, my little brother has always known how I truly am. He always knew that the only reason I didn''t kill people for benefits, was because that will be dumb due to the police being on my tail, and me being afraid of my life every single day.


    My little brother¡­ the one who was never as smart, strong¡­ well he wasn''t better than me at anything. He always has had a little insecure about himself, due to me being better than him at everything. I was his shining light, an unsurpassable wall. But instead of that jealousy being developed into hate, it developed into absolute trust in me.


    When he was afraid of a robber breaking in, he would think of me and then he would be sorry for the robber instead. Well... he wasn''t wrong either¡­


    But this is a decision that I will need to think about.


    ¡­.


    Just like this one day passed, I contemplated my biggest decision for myself, I know that using genjutsu on myself to relive some memories will start being addictive¡­ I am not someone who will not face their mental problems. I don''t need a weakness like that¡­ so I will return home, I will look my family in the eyes and then I will leave them. I am sorry¡­ mother, brother¡­ I gave up my dream once for you in my first life. But this time, I will be selfish, I know that you will understand.


    As I decide to do this a small smile appears on my face. After all, becoming The All Mighty God, doesn''t come without giving up some things. But even knowing what I will have to do¡­ I can''t wait to go back home.


    Currently I am still sitting on my new office chair. Also the paperwork isn''t around here anymore and there is a tea making pot and stove on the side and two chairs in front of me. My clones already took care of everything while I needed time to think in my decisions.


    I have everything prepared and I can feel a heaviness on my heart settle down. I can finally think clearly again, as expected, when I have free time my mind always wanders on things like this. But¡­ I didn''t even go to college in my first life, even after all of that studying. Not that I really even wanted to go to that college, it was simply the major where most money is made.


    That is when the door to my office opens. There come the elders of Konoha, whom Hiruzen is part of. I know that he isn''t exactly fond of me, but I don''t care, after all if I try to please everyone, I will just end up as the most well liked dead man in the world.


    The elders sit down and Hiruzen simply summons a chair, they all sit down and as they do so I simply say. "We need Tsunade back to Konoha."


    Immediately the others react by their body language showing surprise. Hiruzen is the first to speak by saying. "I don''t think she will agree so easily."


    When I heard him say this, I just put my hand on the side as my anbu delivered a stack of paper to me. I just throw them to another side of the room where my clone appears and takes them.


    While this all happens Hiruzen and the other two elders are a little surprised at this, Hiruzen was always surrounded by paperwork. Well my system is made for absolute efficiency. The doc.u.ments have to be on the Hokage''s hands before they are signed to make them official. I don''t even do this when they are not here, they go straight to my shadow clones, but whatever it doesn''t matter.


    "Well Konoha needs her, if she doesn''t come then she will be simply branded a missing nin. If she can''t comprehend even that then she will be kidnapped and we will breed the Senju Clan out of her." I say that calmly as I interlock my hands and lean on the table.


    Hiruzen seems angry at this. Well I can understand that, after all, he has known Tsunade since she was little and pretty much raised her. Also Hiruzen''s teachers were the 2nd and 1st Hokages who were both Senju.


    "You doing this will turn the whole Konoha against you." Says Hiruzen clutching the armbands of the chair so hard that cracks started appearing on them, as his chakra spiked.


    "Well we are ninja, so this will obviously be done in secret. If Tsunade agrees with this or not, it doesn''t matter. Also if anyone spreads village secrets like this¡­" My eyes get cold as I look at Hiruzen.


    *booom*


    My chakra flows out of me, easily taking down Hiruzen''s.


    "Never question my decisions Hiruzen. Konoha will finally have a good Hokage. What do you expect us to do then, just let the Senju bloodline die off and dissolve to nothing just because of a woman''s feelings. NEVER AGAIN let your feelings influence your decisions." As I say that my chakra flow settles down and returns back to me. "Also if I see anything suspicious from either of you I will put you all in a coffin. You are here to advise, not question my decisions, so you simply advise and listen to my decisions."


    ¡­.


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    Yami is expressing dominance. It is a ninja village and he now has enough power that he doesn''t have to beat around the bush just to get something. He will simply order and he will get it. Also Yami''s character is developing, he doesn''t feel comfortable putting himself under a genjutsu at any moment. After all, now he is DEFINITELY under Black Zetsu''s gaze.


    Also contrary to his usual monstrous thinking process, when he thinks about his real family he has a certain softness in it. They are someone Yami still loves even after all these years.


    P.S: Like always, you get +1 chapter for that day if the story reaches 1000 power stones.


    Check Out My P.A.T.R.E.O.N


    pa treon.com/HolyJoker


    (23 chapters in advance)

 Chapter 181 - Tsunade...

    Chapter 181


    Title: Tsunade...


    ¡­.


    A couple days after that, in a gambling town in the Land of Fire, Tsunade is in a bar drinking herself to sleep.


    ''Sleeping with alcohol is better than sleeping with nightmares.'' Thinks Tsunade as she looks at her 20th¡­ ''Or maybe 40th cup of sake.''


    She hasn''t been sober ever since Hachi''s death. She knows that this is not healthy, and not exactly good for someone young like Shizune. That is also one of the reasons why Shizune is currently sleeping in the hotel.


    Suddenly she senses someone approach her. She gives the person a side glance.


    What she sees is a below average looking middle aged man. He seems to be extremely balding and had white hair with black eyes and a stubble for a beard. He is also wearing a suit, but it is disheveled and he seems to be missing his tie.


    Tsunade notices that he seems like a normal person. She used a chakra sensing technique and came to the conclusion that the chakra is also at civilian level and he didn''t have the turbulence that one has when he uses the transformation jutsu.


    The old man notices Tsunade and he comes drunkenly wobbling towards her. When he is close he goes to cup a feel of her b.r.e.a.s.t, thinking that he is being sneaky but obviously Tsunade noticed this and without even needing to look she grabbed the man''s hand by the wrist.


    ''A broken wrist should be enough to teach him a lesson.'' Thinks Tsunade as she exerts a little force on her grasp but¡­ she is surprised. As that doesn''t work at all and the man seems to smile at her.


    Immediately her ninja training kicks in as she despells the alcohol in her system. A cloud of alcoholic fog comes out of her mouth as she looks at the man in front of her. Next she uses all of her power to crush the man''s wrist but to her shock¡­ the man doesn''t even budge.


    She looks at the man in the eyes as a frown forms on her face and she releases her grip on the old man. After that, she just sits down on the table and grabs another cup of sake, her mood seems sour, she also notices that no one even seems to have noticed the exchange.


    She takes another sip of her sake cup.


    "Aren''t you supposed to be a Kage now. Do you really have so much free time?" Asks Tsunade sarcastically as the ''old man'' sits down in front of her, on the same table.


    Slowly the old man''s white hair turns black and it starts to grow back into a full head of slightly spiky back hair and the old, pudgy and below average face slowly reconstructed into a handsome one with the Inuzuka tattoos on both cheeks.


    Tsunade just sighs and drinks her dake cup in one go.


    "Don''t you have something better to do than stalking me Yami. Didn''t you get over your whole crush phase by now. You are like twenty four now." Says Tsunade casually.


    Yami just shrugs, as he calls over the waitress. As she gets close she gets a blush on her face and says. "Hello, what can I get your order Yami -sama."


    Yami smiles back at her.


    "Well hello there sweetie, well you could get me some more of you that is for sure." Says Yami in a flirtatious way.


    The waitress just giggles at Yami, she clasps her cheek with her hand and she fidgets a little. "C''mon now Yami -sama¡­ if you say things like that."


    Tsunade looks at this and quickly gets annoyed and...


    *baam*


    She bangs her fist on the table, looking at Yami and the waitress with an annoyed look. "Go and get a room, you two."


    The waitress immediately walks away, scared of the aura Tsunade was releasing. "S -Sorry¡­ I will get you the usual T-Bone Steak Yami -sama."


    As the waitress walks away, Tsunade looks at Yami questionably. "For a busy Hokage  you for sure seem to come here often."


    As Tsunade says that she is about to take another sip of her refilled sake cup.


    But Yami takes it away from her, and drinks it for himself. Tsunade just sighs at this in annoyance.


    "Actually I own this place." Smugly says Yami.


    "Why am I not surprised at this." Sighs Tsunade, filling another cup of sake for herself. She already knows how Yami is, so she isn''t THAT surprised by Yami owning a lot of businesses. She knows how greedy Yami can be.


    "Also I am actually twenty three, but I guess as you get in the years you start forgetting things." Says Yami, while casually pointing towards her age, which contrary to her looks, she is in her early forties.


    Tsunade''s eyebrow twitches slightly at this.


    *sigh* "You really are always blunt with harsh words Yami." Says Tsunade, not really in the mood to even talk to him. When she looks at him it always reminds her of Hachi.


    Yami stops his jokes and looks at Tsunade. "Konoha needs you back."


    Tsunade''s hand stops mid swing as she is about to drink. "I am on vacation."


    Yami''s eyes turn cold immediately and his friendly aura changes, turning cold.


    That is when Tsunade starts laughing. "Hahahaha¡­ I knew it."


    Yami suddenly stops and¡­ chuckles. "You got me there. I guess I have been on edge lately."


    He understands that Tsunade just acted a certain way to make him act like she wanted. Tsunade chuckles at this too¡­ she knows Yami better than anyone in Konoha, even better than Orochimaru. Yami literally obliterated part of her spine on some petty agreement when Hachi was alive. She can definitely guess what Yami will do if she refuses him, she isn''t that dumb.


    ''I knew that it was only a matter of time.'' Thinks Tsunade, she knows that as soon as she leaves Konoha... she knew that Yami will again ''ask'' her back once he becomes Hokage.


    Yami just smiles at this result, he was ready to wreck Tsunade and force her to come back to the village. She is an unstable factor on the outside of Konoha. Her mind is fragile and she could  be easily manipulated.


    Yami isn''t someone who you want to say no to. So Tsunade just raises her small cup with sake in it and says. "Congratulations on becoming the Hokage¡­"


    Yami clinks glasses with Tsuande.


    "Long may I reign." Says Yami with a glint in his eyes, as if this was an inside joke that no one else but him could understand.


    ¡­.


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    Yami and Tsunade didn''t talk about Hachi due to it being a s.e.n.s.i.t.i.v.e subject. Also Tsunade knows better than to say ''no'' to Yami. He has a certain VERY dangerous reputation now.????


    Check Out My P.A.T.R.E.O.N


    pa treon.com/HolyJoker


    (23 chapters in advance)


    JOIN THE DISCORD: discord.gg/M9hghrm


    [THIS IS THE BONUS CHAPTER]


    P.S: Like always, you get +1 chapter for that day if the story reaches 1000 power stones.

 Chapter 182 - Every ruler has his own opposition… from the inside...

    Chapter 182


    Title: Every ruler has his own opposition¡­ from the inside...


    ¡­.


    While Yami was teasing Tsunade and joking around. In Konoha, inside a dark room Hiruzen, Orochimaru, Jiraya and some other people who were all people of different political positions were all around, sitting down and talking.


    "Yami will ruin the spirit of Konoha if he continues like this. Konoha isn''t a place that treats his ninja like some tools that can simply be given away." The one who says this is Hiruzen, addressing the situation around him.


    Some people in the meeting look unsure of this. They know that if they do something¡­ that is against Konoha''s (Yami''s) interests then they know that they will suffer ''accidents''. They know how dangerous Yami is, he won''t tolerate anything that is against him. The only reason he hasn''t already killed Hiruzen, Orochimaru and Jiraiya is simply because they are useful to him.


    Everyone here knows that, but they still have the courage to meet here. So they all have the bravery to even stand against Yami, which is a feat in itself.


    Yami is like their boogie man, someone who can have them killed at any time.


    That is when Orochimaru decides to lean back on his chair. "Yami''s influence is terrifying, I have been careful to not even buy the chairs that we are sitting on or the chances are he would have investigated why I would buy something like this. There were all made by some craftsmen that are part of the Yami No Caution Act, our organisation which aims to lower Yami''s influence on the world."


    As Orochimaru says this, the other members and even Jiraya are a little nervous about this. After all, they have noticed how much of an influence Yami has on the world. It is¡­ simply terrifying. There used to be some Anbu that used to give them information about Yami, but they all had accidents the second day after Yami became Hokage.


    When Hiruzen sees this, he just gets up and with a voice full of confidence says. "We don''t want you to fight Yami head on, or directly oppose him. We simply need to lower his influence. Also if any of you feel unsure about this, you can leave easily. All that we ask of you is to not speak of our organisation."


    Some immediately get up and walk away, they have families and don''t want to risk them by going against Yami. They know how the Shimura Clan ended just by association with Danzo. They were still butchered even after Danzo''s death, though it seems like ''war casualties'' there is no need to look too hard to notice something strange going on in here. The Shimura Clan is also out of any history books now.


    Every single Shimura Clan child who graduated from the academy has died during the 3rd Ninja War. Everyone needs to think twice before deciding to oppose Yami, after all, their families will be put in danger too.


    ¡­.


    After ten minutes, more than half of the members in the room left. Even some nobles who were stripped of their positions just because Yami needed their lands, thus they lost everything to him. But they still left, their faces filled with nervousness, they lost everything to Yami... but they still don''t want to lose their lives too.


    Hiruzen looks at the people leaving and can''t help but slightly admire the effectiveness of Yami''s way of handling things. Contrary to him, Yami dominates and isn''t above using his power to keep someone in line, even by threatening their families. Even while he does this, there aren''t a lot of people who hate Yami, and even less who have the courage to stand up to him.


    As he looks around Hiruzen notices that there were some people who were unsure. There are less than twenty in here.


    ''This is worse than expected.'' Grimaces Hiruzen.


    On the other hand Orochimaru looks at this with a calm look on his face. But on the inside he is jovional, he can see how truly effective the method Yami uses to rule is VERY effective.


    ''As expected, just like everything else he does, Yami is perfect at ruling too. That man makes me think about becoming his subordinate, but sadly I am not someone who follows others.'' Thinks Orochimaru, as he has to hold himself back from smirking. He doesn''t even necessarily care about this so called organisation, but he has decided that ever since Yami became Hokage he will become missing ninja.


    ''Soon Yami will start exerting control dominance towards me. Not allowing me to do anything anymore, he will most likely have me become one of his researchers. But I wouldn''t be able to do anything for myself without Yami breathing down my neck.'' Contemplates Orochimaru, trying to predict what Yami''s reaction would be if he stays in Konoha.


    Jiraya on the other hand has a nervous look on his face. Yami already took his pinky finger. He knows that he will never give him another chance. But he still decided to work against Yami, he has seen his true colours. But he is also nervous, after all, amongst Konoha''s S Rank ninja, Yami''s mosquitoes and other methods of spying are scary, especially with the newly released radio device by the Inuzuka Corporation.


    ''Has he used it before to somehow spy on us¡­ no that is a stupid question¡­ he mostvlikely used a radio, which is undetectable back at the time. DAMN IT. Fu*k¡­ that kid is damn controlling to the extreme.'' Angirly thinks Jiraya, the radio not only gave Yami much more echonomical control, it also brought up some scary possibilities. Of course now that he is Hokage, Tsume Inuzuka is in charge of the Inuzuka Clan and his wife (the Daimyo''s daughter) is in charge of the company.


    ''Yeah¡­ like Yami would let someone other than him be in control of anything.'' Thinks Jiraya as he comes up with different outcomes.


    They had teaken every counter measurs against spying, mosquitos, people and even sendimg an electronic pulse of chakra that disables radios, and many¡­ many more precautions. But even after all that, even though Hiruzen, Orochimaru and Jiraya reasured the others that there is no way Yami can spy on this¡­ they can only hope that it is true. After all, underestimating Yami is something that none of them will ever do.


    Yami on the other hand, was jjst casually walking around Konoha, with Tsunade at his side. He had teleported her and Shizune right back to Konoha. Now he is taking Tsuande to his office, to assign her a new position.


    As they walk, Yami just extends his arm towards Tsunade. She looks at his arm and sighs. "You know people will start talking if I do something like that¡­ plus aren''t you married now? What would your wife say about it."


    Yami just stops at this and looks towards Tsunade and looks at her as if looking at a stupid person, which kinda ticked off Tsunade. But before she could say anything...


    "What? Are you some academy fan girl, that feels nervous just by holding hands with a boy." Says Yami, with a joking tone to his voice.


    *sigh* Tsunade sighs annoyingly and grudgingly she grabs Yami''s arm a little harshly and interlocks it with hers.


    Yami just smiles at this slightly and Tsunde frowns in fake annoyance. Both remembering the past¡­


    That is when Yami says. "Tsunade¡­


    ¡­..


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    P.S: Like always, you get +1 chapter for that day if the story reaches 1000 power stones.


    Check Out My P.A.T.R.E.O.N


    pa treon.com/HolyJoker


    (23 chapters in advance)

 Chapter 183 - Facts...

    Chapter 183


    Title: Facts...


    ¡­.


    Yami just looks at Tsunade remembering the past. The way he used to be so weak and powerless. He no longer is like that, he has no rivals or true enemies, just like he likes it.


    He will NEVER let anyone or anything evolve to anywhere close to his strength. He can''t say that he is loved by everyone, but even the best leader is hated by some of his people. No one can be loved by everyone¡­


    Tsunade just looks at Yami, his handsome face and can''t help but sigh in sadness. Yami has always had an average looking face when he was young, but Yami''s face now looks closer like Hachi.


    They are both thinking of the past, Yami is thinking of his past self who was weak. While Tsunade is thinking of Hachi, finally she looks at Yami, someone who she knows is likely to know things. She has been thinking about something lately¡­ she has never been a bad drunk who r*pes or fights.


    "Yami¡­" Murmurs Tsunade quietly as they walk along.


    "Hm?" Yami just looks at her, when he hears her call his name.


    "Tell me something¡­" Says Tsunade as she looks at Yami''s eyes. Her brown eyes with confusion on them, locking into Yami''s eyes who are always full of confidence and have a certain dark coldness into them.


    "Sure."  Answers Yami simply, as he turns to look in front of him. The people around him are just simply looking at him, some bowing their heads, not even expressing anything about Yami and Tsunade interlocking their arms.


    Suddenly Tsuande comes to a realization and looks at Yami.


    ''So it is some Genjutsu, but to be able to cover me without me even noticing¡­ not anyone in the Uchiha Clan alive can do that.'' Thinks Tsunade, not really surprised that Yami has gotten even stronger.


    ''His hunger is still there. He will hunt for more power. Yami¡­ you truly are pitiful.'' As Tsunade thinks that, she looks at Yami. She already knows how his life has been up till now. Always alone and the people close to him dying. She also wants to be like him. ''Having his son die, but even after that to just keep walking forward and move on¡­ that is¡­ inspiring of Yami.''


    Still even while she thinks that, she still gathers the courage to ask Yami. "Yami¡­ tell me what happened that night."


    Yami suddenly stops and turns to look at Tsunade. Tsunade can''t figure out at all what he is thinking. His ever present cold and nonchalant eyes look at Tsunade.


    *sigh*


    Yami just sighs a little, and he starts walking again. His eyes staring in front of him.


    "Do you want the ''truth'' or just plain facts." As Yami says this, Tsunade remembers Yami''s saying about the truth. So she simply answers. "I want the fact."


    For a split second a flash of amus.e.m.e.nt flashes past Yami''s eyes as he is about to answer but two familiar people are walking towards them. One of them seems to be fl.u.s.tered and angry. They are Orochimaru and Jiraya.


    Orochimaru seems to be holding Jirays back.


    "Let me go, Orochimaru, I want to ask Tsunade to her face if she is fu*king Yami."


    "You fool, you want to ask right now? This is the worst time possible."


    "I don''t care."


    "Next time instead of losing your pinky, you will lose your head."


    "I don''t care."


    As this argument continues Yami just looks at Orochimaru and Jiraiya¡­ who are approaching while arguing with each other. Orochimaru is wearing his Jonin uniform, while Jiraiya is wearing his usual attire which consists of a green short shirt kimono and matching pants, under which he wore mesh armour that is visible at his wrists and ankles. He also wore hand guards, a black belt, traditional Japanese wooden sandals, and a red haori with two yellow circles on each side. He is also carrying a large scroll on his back, and he wore a horned forehead protector with the kanji for "oil",  which denoted his affiliation with Mount My¨­boku.


    Orochimaru just sighs at Jiraiya''s foolishness, they all know how dangerous Yami can be and he still went to confront him.


    ''He could even expose our YMCA alliance, Yami is someone monstrous, we CAN''T underestimate him at all.'' Thinks Orochimaru, while contemplating on how to get out of this.


    Finally he made his decision and as Jiraiya was about to scream at Tsunade, that being the first thing that he would say to her in the last years that he hasn''t seen her.


    But contrary to anyone''s expectations Tsunade just says. "Yes¡­ me and Yami were in a relationship, but not anymore."


    Immediately Jiraiya is frozen in shock, unable to move and his mouth is wide open.


    Tsunade then is about to nudge Yami to come along as they walk hand in hand, but Yami doesn''t wait for other people to do the leading¡­ HE IS THE LEADER.


    So he controls the situation as he and Tsuande walk forward.


    "That was unexpected." Says Yami, as he has to regulate the Genjutsu around them again. It was a Genjutsu that is activated with the sound of his feet hitting the ground. It also only affects people with a chakra amount below Genin level.


    Tsunade just sighs. "I already shut him down dozens of times years ago. Plus there are more important things to talk about¡­ tell me the facts about the night Hachi was conceived."


    Yami looks at the sky when he hears Tsunade ask him again.


    *fwosh*


    They both discover in a bkack flash and appear in Yami''s office.


    ''What is it with all of the theatrics¡­ so there was something wrong with that night¡­ or is Yami just doing this because he is bored with the Hokage duties.'' Thinks Tsunade, trying to figure out the truth.


    But Yami on the other hand, just walks towards the Hokage''s chair and sits down in there while lying back and he puts his lugs on his empty desk, his office is not filled with any paperwork contrary to the time Hiruzen was the Hokage.


    Though Tsunade says that, Yami was still thinking. ''Why were the Orochimaru and Jiraya that we met¡­ shadow clones¡­ I didn''t know of that¡­ what is going on?''


    But he decides to put that thought for later as he just looks at Tsunade and says. "Well, the fact is that¡­"


    ¡­..


    A/N: Just came back from vacation ¡­ expect a lot more updates now on.????


    (This was an old chapter written while I was on vacation.)


    P.S: Like always, you get +1 chapter for that day if the story reaches 1000 power stones.


    Check Out My P.A.T.R.E.O.N


    JOIN THE DISCORD: discord.gg/M9hghrm

 Chapter 184 - Manipulating Tsunade...

    Chapter 184


    Title: Manipulating Tsunade...


    ¡­.


    -Yami POV-


    I just look at Tsunade as I lie back on my comfortable chair. I can sense my clones all around the Hokage Tower, they are finishing some paperwork and renegotiating contracts from the previous administration and the previous Hokage made.


    Honestly I never thought of it, but I am actually getting better with contracts and economics as my shadow clones negotiate things like this.


    My net worth is around 440 Billion Ryo now. Konoha is getting better and better, and of course cheap labor is being done in other lands where it is cheaper¡­ ahhh¡­ I love capitalism.


    Anyway, as Tsunade is waiting for an answer from me, I think back on the night I had with her. That used to be the best night of my life¡­ but I already have had better, I mean even my wife is better than Tsunade. Even though our relationship is a little stranded lately, especially with Kiba''s birth¡­ and yep¡­ he wasn''t a reincarnated person either.


    I have had my mosquitoes keep an eye on every newborn in Konoha, and if they sense ANY abnormalities with them, it will be immediately reported to me. I even have some in the other villages, but sadly I can''t follow every birth so far away, after all, I still have to be careful.


    "So tell me, why the long silence?" As Tsunade says that, I finally decide what to say¡­. Obviously it''s not the truth. I did after all predict that Tsunade might feel that something was fishy that night.


    I just look down regretfully when Tsunade asks that.


    "The day Hachi was conceived¡­ that was¡­ that is the day where I regret the most. My control over my l.u.s.t slipped and it wasn''t only you who was drunk and pushing for something more to happen. So no you didn''t do anything like r*pe me." As I say that, I just sigh heavily.


    I get up and walk towards Tsunade, who hasn''t sat down at all. As I am next to her, she has to look up at me, due to my height.


    "Hachi¡­ our son... is already dead¡­ so get over it Tsunade." I said to her, as I put my hand on her shoulder.


    But her eyes, who are now locked into mine, they narrow. And a frown appears on her face. Her eyes have anger behind them.


    "So do what then¡­ forget about him." Criticizes Tsunade, unwilling to do something like that.


    I just smile at this, and cup her cheek and wipe a tear that was about to slip out of her eye. "No¡­ but I am not someone to dwell on things that I don''t like."


    "Do you know what I do to things that I don''t like?¡­" I kill and obliterate them.  I obviously don''t say that. But what I just decide to say¡­ "I change them."


    Tsunade looks confused at this, so I decide to further explain it to her.


    "While studying Medical Ninjutsu I have come to a very shocking revolution¡­ that death is only a state of being. Not something gone forever¡­ I shall revive Hachi and then we can live together like a true family." I say to her as I envelop her in a deep hug, acting as if I didn''t notice her shocked look. "So I would like you to smile some more Tsunade."


    So c''mon now Tsuande, fall in love with me. Become my ''ally''... so I don''t have to kill you Tsunade¡­ I am a liar, a thief, a lover and a cheater¡­ so¡­ so I am not going to spare you Tsunade, you have grown into an uncertainty. This is your decision, you are either with me or against me¡­


    Tsunade decides to hug me back slightly. I smile at this.


    ¡­.


    After that whole ordeal, Tsunade decided that she will live with me and she will take Shizune with her too. I know that Shiori (my wife) will be a b*tch about me bringing two other women into our home.


    I have noticed that even though she is pregnant with my child. She has been planning to somehow leave me after giving me a child.


    Damn¡­ why can''t women just be as simple like in some fanfics in my first life. Just accept and be in my harem, don''t cause so many unnecessary problems.


    Tsume and Shiori already are at each other''s throats. Add Tsunade to that and we have a three way battle. But I don''t really care for any of that, after all they are just my pretty little dolls. Their lives have zero importance to me. But my children are different, after all, I don''t want them to feel like it''s ok to treat women like I do. That will make my daughters think that it''s okay to be worthless, so I usually treat my lovers nice and with love when they are around.


    Though Tsume still loves me unconditionally, she was raised for that after all. But Shiori is a whole different deal, she can''t wait to go away from me, as soon as she sees a part of my real self.


    Heh¡­ I guess I will have to kill her. Hmmm¡­ it seems like I will need a new second wife, which woman will give me some advantage.


    Anyway, better deal with a new problem that has been rising up. The Jiraya and Orochimaru that me and Tsuande met were both Shadow Clones.


    Why would something like that happen, I can easily spot shadow clones due to their emotions not feeling ''real'' and their ''soul'' being nonexistent. It would be difficult for anyone else to notice, but quite easy for me. Also no people know about this, so that is a boon for me. They could have just been busy and sent shadow clones around¡­ but¡­ why take the chance. I am not arrogant enough to think that I am omnipotent in Konoha.


    I bite my thumb and as a drop of blood appears, I just do three handsins and slam my hand in the ground.


    *poof*


    <Reverse Summoning Jutsu>


    ¡­.


    A/N: Yami''s suspicion is immediately lighted up. Just because Jiraya and Orochimaru that he met are Shadow clones. Which is pretty average for any jonin to have some shadow clones running around. But Yami immediately became paranoid about something that he didn''t know.


    P.S: Like always, you get +1 chapter for that day if the story reaches 1000 power stones.


    Check Out My P.A.T.R.E.O.N


    pa treon.com/HolyJoker


    (23 chapters in advance)

 Chapter 185 - Dominance...

    Chapter 185


    Title: Dominance...


    ¡­.


    <Reverse Summoning Jutsu>


    Immediately I can feel my position change, and I am in a tree. With a strange house building like in front of me. Well it isn''t a treehouse actually, I can hear the music coming from it and the sign which displays a mosquito with a beer in its hand, shows that it is actually a bar.


    This was an idea suggested by Shiro, on how to keep the summons relatively happy. Plus I already have so much money so buying the materials for the buildings isn''t really a problem for me.


    I only allowed it because even though Shiro is a drunk, degenerate, sc.u.mbag, sinful, druggie, bastard dog¡­ he will still have good ideas like this every now and then.


    I just casually go forward and open the door.


    Immediately loud music hits my ears, my eye just twitches a little. As I enter the club I see a lot of different creatures, from flies, fireflies and even some strange bird like creatures.


    They immediately bow their head¡­


    """Yami -sama."""


    I just nod towards them. But I keep walking forward, not paying any second thought to them.


    Finally when I reach the room, where the music seems to be booming.


    I see the gross mosquito lady dancing in a strippers pole. But everyone else immediately stops when they see me.


    I see that the mosquito sage seems drunk. As when she sees me, she just jumps off the striper pole and comes close to me and she hugs me with her gross arms.


    Immediately she says. "Yami -sama, I luv you."


    When I hear that, the way that she is talking irritates me. She thinks that her gross mosquito like body can entice me.


    *boom*


    *plop*


    She falls on the ground.


    "Huh?" Says the mosquito girl, confused by what just happened. Suddenly her eyes widen as she looks at her lower body.


    I just narrow my eyes at this. "Why didn''t your mosquitoes report to me that Jiraiya and Orochimaru were up to something."


    ¡­.


    -General POV-


    "I -I don''t know Yami -sama, I swear that I know nothing." Says the mosquito girl in full on panic. Her mind already instinctively flushed the alcohol out of her system. She can see that Yami might decide to kill her.


    On the other hand Yami just looks at her with a cold look in his eyes. "Ohhh¡­ I see, so you, as my main source of information don''t know what is going on¡­ well now¡­ I wonder how useful of an informant you are now."


    Immediately the Mosquito Sage, feels chills all over her body as soon as she hears the word ''useful'' said by Yami. She knows that Yami will kill her if she is no longer useful to him.


    Yami immediately disappeared from her field of vision and that is when...


    *baam*


    She felt a powerful pressure behind her head. As her head is bashed on the floor, creating a small crater in the floor as the whole building shakes.


    "Maybe if you weren''t messing around here you would have known that something was wrong. Do you really want to die that bad?" Says Yami, as his eyes have no emotion on them as he looks at the mosquito girl.


    He pushes his leg with some more power and¡­


    *crack*


    The skull of the mosquito under his foot starts making cracking sounds, and it is almost about to cave in and cruth the mosquito sage''s skull.


    "I see that you need a replacement then¡­ you have one month to find a replacement, or you will be tortured to death. After this month you can commit self suicide or be tortured to death." Says Yami, as if it is a fact, no room for discussion.


    He then takes his foot off her head, as soon as he does so the other summon animals just look at this with faces full of fear. This shows them that Yami can kill someone like the mosquito sage, who is VERY important to him and his general information network.


    ''This can''t be happening, is this how I will die!?'' Thinks the mosquito sage as she tries to get up but she is reminded that she doesn''t have her legs, and that Yami just blasted them off.


    As Yami was walking away he just says. "The Blood Swamp isn''t a place where I allow things like free choice. Here you are either useful to me or you are dead."


    He then looks at one of the giant human sized flies around and says. "You¡­ notify your flies sage that the flies are now in charge of spying."


    As Yami says that the mosquito sage feels abject despair. Yami knows that her spy system can run by itself, but if mosquitoes can still be distracted by things like shadow clones due to them having almost the same signature as the original. But if the mosquito sage was observing, this wouldn''t have happened¡­ and she would get to live a lot longer.


    *fwosh*


    Yami then immediately disappeared in a black flash¡­ but even then¡­ no one dared speak, out of absolute fear for Yami.


    ¡­.


    -Yami POV-


    Making an example out of the mosquito sage was a calculated decision. Even though I seemed angry, I wasn''t really. After all, anger clouds your judgement, but mine wasn''t at all.


    I showed dominance there, because I  don''t want my summons treating me like the Toad Summons treat Jiraiya and in the future Naruto.


    They are MY servants and pets¡­ not the other way around. They do what I WANT and follow MY orders. They are like my employees, they work for me and I let them keep their lives. And that is quite a high paying job. After all, not a lot of things are worth more than life, to most people at least.


    *sigh*


    Why can''t people work at 100% efficiency without being threatened. I mean I would treat them good and with love if they worked harder, but that is just a lie. Treat your employees softly and they will walk all over you¡­


    *tch*


    I guess that I will have to investigate myself on this case at what Orochimaru and Jiraiya are up to.


    ¡­.


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    Power, dominance, alpha, cold, ruthless, selfish¡­ that and much more¡­ that is Yami. Also we see that his summons fear Yami to death.


    Also the mosquito sage was partying because of the stress she has with having Yami as a boss. Sadly she relaxed too much.


    P.S: Yami isn''t omnipotent, this shows that. He has a structure on how he observes.????

 Chapter 186 - Shiro Settles Down...

    Chapter 186


    Title: Shiro Settles Down...


    ¡­.


    Just like this four years passed, Yami is now at the age of twenty seven. Konoha is a whole different place from it looked more like a modern city with all of the high buildings and dozens of skyscr.a.p.ers. The Hokage was one of those skyscr.a.p.ers with 130 floors. Konoha has already become something of a powerhouse on its own, even without the Land Of Fire.


    Its economical power has become terrifying, its Hokage, Yami Inuzuka has been credited to it. The Hokage now has as much power as the Daimyo has. Thankfully there seems to be no conflict between the two or the people might be worried¡­ well they DO know who will win, it will be Yami Inuzuka, he has a 91% approval rating. He has put so many nobles out of power and put ''smart'' people in there that have risen the local economy by over 900% in just four years.


    Konoha''s army has also never been stronger, many new talents have come out, though most of them are from the Inuzuka Clan. But no one questions that¡­ and if they do¡­ they usually suffer FATAL ''accidents''.


    As the son-in-law of the Daimyo, Yami has had one child with his wife. Though there are rumours of him sleeping around, in the eyes of the public they are just that¡­ rumours.


    On inside of the skyscr.a.p.er Hokage Tower, Yami is currently drinking something that looks like wine (gr.a.p.e juice) he just looks at Konoha below him, who even though it is still called a Village, Konoha is NOT one, it is a city with decades above its peers. It is the Nr.1 Village in economy, army, population, growth and anything else anyone can think of.


    ''Finally¡­ finally¡­ I have everything under control.'' Thinks Yami, as a smile appears on his face. ''The five great ninja villages are only so in name, Konoha is above them all.''


    His plans gone perfectly, no one here is to oppose him. No hidden enemy, he has hundreds of plans for the future. Everyone is dancing at the palm of his hand, everything under control.


    ¡­.


    The people love Yami, as he has improved Konoha in such a major way that some people call him the Perfect Hokage, and no scandals have ever been revealed. Also his power (political) has grown to something unrivalled.


    Secret organisations like YMCA have been taken care of from Yami having the organisation infiltrated from the inside. He didn''t wipe it out, after all he would have an organisation ''against'' him that he can control than one he can''t.


    Hiruzen and Jiraiya are running the organisation, Orochimaru having pulled out, in order to concentrate on his experiments. The YMCA organisation never accomplished anything, and didn''t limit Yami''s power at all. When Orochimaru saw that, he immediately figured out that these ''technical difficulties'' and ''delays'' he immediately left. He already figured that Yami already is under the control of it.


    Orochimaru is currently in one of his labs. He is actually outside of the Land of Fire, on a ''mission'', knowing that anywhere in the Land of Fire he will be under Yami''s eyes and control.


    *tch* ''I should run away from Konoha soon and become a missing ninja. No other choice left, I am already pressured to go into the new Research Department.'' Thinks Orochimaru, as his brows frown, he needs to hype himself to get the courage to run away from Konoha. He knows that Yami will immediately start hunting him down.


    ''If he starts hunting me, I am not even 10% sure I can escape him. Yami will become like a mad man, he will chase me to the ends  of the world. But¡­ if I keep down my head for  four years after escape, he should let his hunt dissipate. I can only hope that he will get bored of chasing me. Or I will have to run for the rest of my immortality.'' Contemplates Orochimaru¡­ trying to predict if he will be able to outrun Yami.


    ¡­.


    On the other hand, even with all of this scheming going around. In the slums of the city, where usually the lower income families live, there is a surprisingly high quality strip club, called Shiro''s Fur Smells Nice.


    There is someone who is living his life leisurely, not worrying about plots, plans or assassinations. He is just a simple white furred dog, he is just standing on a cushy couch. There were a couple of dog and cat girls all around him.


    Shiro just seems to be drooling. They are actually all cats or dogs who can use the transformation jutsu. So people with¡­ furry tastes cone here. Shiro already made a deal with the Cat Summons¡­ When he wants to he can be surprisingly convincing.


    ''When you live with Yami all of your life, you pick up a couple of things.''... ''wait¡­ I can think straight again¡­ I need some more alcohol in my system then.'' Thinks Shiro, as he is slightly sobering up. He hasn''t been sober in two years. The last time he was suber was at the time he had to ask Yami for a small loan of 50 Million Ryo to open up his dream strip club.


    Of course he spent 40 Million in a one year spree of hookers and cocaine but after that he was ready to leave behind his wandering ways and settle down, he was getting quite up on his years¡­ so he settled down by opening a strip club. So he doesn''t have to be sober anymore when he has to ask for Yami''s monthly check, he is self sufficient now.


    ''Ahhhh¡­ this is the life¡­ I am living the dream.'' Thinks Shiro.


    "Hey! Chikuba come and lick some honey off my t.i.t.s." Calls out Shiro to some cat girl.


    ¡­..


    But on the other Elemental Lands, in the Hidden Rock Village, the Tsuchikage and the elders have all gathered here to discuss the topic of Yami Inuzuka and Konoha''s recent rise in power.


    Onoki just looks at the elders and takes out a scroll throwing it towards them to read it.


    "This is the latest information our Konoha spies sent us." Says Onoki as he has an extremely annoyed look on his face.


    When they open the message the elders immediately frown as they read the letter.


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    Hey~ Yami here


    Anyway, this spy was killed and tortured for information too. This one lasted three days¡­. Ok who am I joking, he lasted like two minutes. We had a Yamanaka on the scene.


    P.S: Still open for a trade deal? I am that''s for sure. Just imagine¡­ Konoha having Iwa under its foot¡­ I mean we as equal allies.


    .


    .


    .


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    The letter continues with half a*sed written messages. There are even some food stains in it. Showing that Yami was writing this while he was eating most likely.


    They immediately think of attacking Konoha and starting another war. But that thought is quenched as soon as it comes. Konoha is WAY more powerful now that Yami is in charge and attacking it would he dumb. As unlike Hiruzen, if Konoha wins the war, Yami will be ripping apart the other lands like he was cutting a cake, he definitely wouldn''t be polite about it.


    This is the fear that keeps them from starting another war. They know that with Hiruzen, they just need to act angry and Hiruzen will give in, because he doesn''t want to continue the war. But¡­ Yami is a WHOLE different story.


    ¡­


    A/N: Time is passing and Shiro has finally settled down¡­ in his own way. At least he is living his own life. Also the other Elemental Nations are a joke to Yami, he spends his time fu*king around with their spies since he has nothing better to do. Next chap we will see Naruto and¡­ Yami''s plans will advance by another step.


    P.S: I know it is a BIG time skip... but I DO want to finish this story soon.????


    P.P.S: Like always, you get +1 chapter for that day if the story reaches 1000 power stones.


    pa treon.com/HolyJoker


    (23 chapters in advance)

 Chapter 187 - Unkillable...

    Chapter 187


    Title: Unkillable...


    ¡­.


    -Yami POV-


    It truly is amazing seeing the results of my actions. Konoha is stronger than ever, mostly due to my knowledge of economics and technology.


    I just sigh and go away from the window and back to my desk. I surprisingly have a lot more free time as Hokage than when I was your average S Rank ninja.


    My office has a one seat couch with my desk being wide and well refined and then there is the ''Forbidden Scroll''... it honestly surprised me a little. In the story when Naruto gets the Forbidden Scroll he learns the Shadow Clone jutsu¡­ it is made seem like there is only one Forbidden Scroll, but actually every Forbidden Technique in Konoha has its own scroll, so even if someone was somehow able to steal one it would only be one technique. They are all in way ''fakes''. It is said that Orochimaru read the Forbidden Scroll, but he only knew Edo Tensei, he most likely assumed that the one in the Hokage''s office is a fake¡­ and thought that he found the location of the real one which actually had the Edo Tensei.


    I knew it, no one is really dumb enough to put all of their techniques on one Forbidden Scroll. And only the Hokage knows all of the secure locations of the Forbidden Scrolls. The 2nd was really smart coming up with such a clever illusion of hiding scrolls.


    I didn''t want to be Hokage to make Konoha better or something like that. I could care less about Konoha. But the place is my base of operations where I have absolute power so I will keep it.


    Even with the nine tails attack everything was planned, Minato and Kushina dying was also ALL according to plan. If either of them somehow survived I would have killed them. I don''t hate either of them. But I need to keep at least a semblance of what the future will be, after all, future knowledge is my ultimate weapon and I am not going to give it up just for Minato or Kushina. I mean sure Naruto will not have any parents¡­ and I should care?


    It seems more like someone else''s problem than mine.


    Also I did let the nine tails attack destroy quite a bit of the businesses I own in Konoha, after all it would seem suspicious if I somehow saved my businesses or I sold out successful businesses before the nine tails attacked.


    I mean I know that I have changed some things, but that doesn''t mean that the future will change so drastically like the Otsutsuki attacking right now. It is simply illogical, though I do have plans in case that happens. After all, it doesn''t hurt to be prepared for things like this.


    While everyone else is playing chess and being concerned about me gaining more power over the political side¡­ I don''t really care about political power. In this world VIOLENCE is the ULTIMATE POWER.


    I look at the shadow that my hand casts on the ground as I wave it around¡­ slowly the shadow moves by itself as if it has a physical form. The Nara technique¡­ I have already learned it. I have also learned the Yamanaka Mind Techniques and even the Akimichi Yang Techniques like the Body Expansion Jutsu, really any techniques in Konoha I have already learned it.


    I have already learned Edo Tensei and¡­ I have also learned the immortality technique that Orochimaru uses.


    I use a shadow tendril to come close to my face and then¡­


    *puchi*


    I pierce my brain. I then use the shadow tendril to scramble my brain around. Ahhhh¡­ this pain is so amazing¡­ I CAN''T DIE¡­ HAHAHAHHAHAHAHAHA¡­


    HAHAHAHA¡­ this pain of feeling my brain scrambling, I am no m.a.s.o.c.h.i.s.tic but this is amazing. I used Orochimaru''s technique to immortalise my mind. The only way I really know how it is even possible to kill me now is to use the Reaper''s Death Seal¡­


    I have already learned so many S Rank ninjutsu Forbidden Techniques, and I did this the smart way, I became Hokage, so no one can tell me that I can''t learn these techniques. Nor will anyone make me a missing nin because of it. Hahahaha...


    This was my plan all along, with 100% benefits for me and with almost no downside for me.


    *knock* *knock*


    Suddenly I hear a knock on the door. I immediately withdraw the shadow tendril from my brain and let it regenerate as it does so in a split second it completely heals and even my brain gets back to perfect shape. Hmmm¡­ soon I will implement the Byakugan, since no matter what I can''t have any brain damage now.


    "Come on in." I say as I pull out some paperwork and act like I am working. That is when my hot blonde secretary, she wears a business suit¡­ she is a Yamanaka¡­ ummmm¡­ I have already fu*ked her. I could go another round with her.


    But now is not the time to do so again as I see a child around four years old hiding behind her embarrassingly.


    I just smile sweetly at this and say. "Who is the little guy that you brought with you Inami -chan."


    She just raises a questioning eyebrow at this. I just narrow my eyes at her.


    ''What bit*h, you were literally choking on my di*k two hours ago. So don''t act like such an annoying wh*re.''


    She just sighs at this. Yes I have had her keep an eye on some things around here and the kid behind her¡­ yea¡­ the kid behind her is¡­ a four year old Naruto. Yeah, since Hiruzen already announced that he was the Nine Tails Jinchuriki, he hasn''t had an easy road¡­. But the Inuzuka are always nice with him so it doesn''t affect him as much as it did in Canon. Also Kiba and my other son who are the same age as him, they are friends. Plus some other of the orphans are good friends with Naruto. So there is that, also a BUNCH of propaganda that I regularly shove down people''s throats.


    After all, I do control every news channel in Konoha.


    That is when Inami understands what I mean and she gently nudges Naruto forward. "Naruto -chan, say hello to Yami -sama. He is the Hokage."


    Naruto still seems nervous, so Inami decides to continue saying. "He is also Niri''s and Kiba''s dad."


    When she says that, Naruto seems to lose some of his nervousness and says. "H -Hi sir Yami."


    I just smile at him. His blonde hair and whisker making him look like a pet¡­ reincarnation of Asura¡­ you will be VERY useful to me.


    ¡­..


    Getting closer and closer to Canon¡­ soon the ending will come¡­ but why do I feel so sad.????


    Also Yami is pretty much unkillable, you could splatter him, but he would still regenerate himself.  Also Niri is Yami''s son with Shiori.


    EXPLANATION: Some of you are saying that Yami can''t make Shiori like him enough to allow other women on his bed and comparing him to some people in real life who CAN actually do that. Well let me tell you something, some men like to get c¨´cked, women are the same too. Some of them have some issues and allow their men to go and fu*k around. You make it seem like women just can''t wait to see her man fu*k someone else.????


    It doesn''t work like that bros, women and men are the same in this thing. They don''t like their partners f*cking someone else. I strive to make this story realistic okay. Also for example Tsume doesn''t mind Yami cheating on her... Shiori (Yami''s wife) on the other hand does.


    P.S: Like always, you get +1 chapter for that day if the story reaches 1000 power stones.


    (THE BONUS CHAPTER IS COMING SOON)

 Chapter 188 - Advancing...

    Chapter 188


    Title: Advancing...


    ¡­.


    -General POV-


    Yami just looks at Naruto, a sweet smile on his face. "Well hello there Naruto,  Inami told me that you want to be Hokage in the future. That is quite a brave dream."


    As Yami says that Naruto''s face brightens up and he answers. "Sir, yes sir. I wanna be the Hokage."


    Yami just laughs at this. "Hahahaha, I know that your road will be hard little Naruto. But be assured that you can come and ask me for help any time. After all, no one becomes Hokage with no friends and allies¡­ even I have people who are dear to me and trust."


    The four year old Naruto immediately feels inspired by this.


    ''People that you can trust huh¡­'' Thinks Naruto, immediately coming to the conclusion. ''I want to have that too.''


    "So anyway, what has been worrying you Naruto?" Asks Yami, acting as if he isn''t already fully aware of the situation and as if he doesn''t spy on Naruto 24 hours a day.


    When Yami says that Naruto seems nervous for a little while, but in the end he still decides to say. "Uhhh¡­ no it''s nothing."


    Naruto looks to the side, embarrassed.


    Inami just smiles gently at this. "He just wanted to meet you Hokage -sama. It is nothing so drastic. So thank you for your time Yami."


    As she says that, she notices that she accidentally called Yami so casually but they both play it off cool. Like they didn''t notice, so Naruto wouldn''t pay any attention to it.


    Naruto nods at this and goes back to hiding behind Inami. Yami just smiles at this as Inami and Naruto both go outside of his office.


    ¡­.


    -Yami POV-


    After they leave, I immediately just make a shadow clone to take my placea and¡­


    *fwosh*


    I teleport back to my house where no one is currently inside. I just walk casually towards my laboratory in the bas.e.m.e.nt entrance. And like usual after many security checks to confirm that it was really me, I finally got inside.


    I see the bodies of different cloned peoples, I have finally figured out how to create life¡­ in a way¡­ I just clone the person and use the chakra of another person to create a ''soul''... or more like create a shadow clone that inhibits the physical bodies. So even if they are hit or EVEN if the original dies they won''t ''dispel''.


    Honestly this was only possible due to the new understanding and perspective in life and death that the Forbidden S Rank techniques have given me.


    Though I have some counter measures against betrayal. I will NEVER make a clone of myself, because I know that it will immediately try to kill me, or scheme against me behind my back.


    Anyway as I walk along here I pass the Uchiha Clone Room, I finally arrive at the Hyuga Clone room. I see a dozen or so individuals floating in capsules filled with green liquid.


    I have a couple of smaller capsules with Byakugan''s in them. So that is when I go and get a pair of them.  I make three shadow clones and lie down on the operation table. My clones know what to do, as I feel them slowly opening my forehead and making two holes on the skill for them to fit in there. But before they put in the byakugan, they first connect the brain with the eyes.


    After that, with my regeneration, in twenty seconds I am ready to use my new byakugan.


    As I used it I felt weird¡­ x-ray and almost 360¡ã  vision. Though it seems like it only extends five hundred meters.


    Well that can easily be fixed¡­ but damn¡­ I can actually see the movements of the people all around. Though sadly due to my Fuinjutsu around the room it makes it fuzzy to look on the inside with a Byakugan, because I already have counter measures against it and blurring anything¡­ but I can still see clearly outside of the underground room. Which is kinda weird.


    ¡­.


    It is after two months, and that is when my byakugan''s range is at around 1.5 km. That something interesting happens, the delegates from Kumo come. I already know that they might try to kidnap Hinata but who knows. My power isn''t for nothing after all. People are afraid to take certain actions just because of me.


    Currently here I am, sitting with the Kumo delegates, there us three of them. They all seem like the average middle aged ninja.


    "Hokage -sama I am Kayin, I shall overlook the signing of the contract and confirm with Raikage -sama." Says the thin and smart seeming middle aged man.


    I just nod at this. I already know what the contract is about.


    ¡­.


    Five days pass¡­ and there is no problem.  Kumo didn''t dare act anything else but civil.


    Wow¡­ Hiruzen''s leadership must have really s.u.c.k.e.d. I mean in Canon, Kumo came here to sign a deal, they broke the deal by trying to kidnap Hinata, then their kidnapper is killed. Instead of refusing to associate themselves with the kidnapper¡­ they owned it up and even made Hiruzen give them the one who ''killed'' the delegate. That is as much of a b*tch as you can be. No wonder he had to step down as Hokage, he is weak and not a strong dealer.


    *sigh* As expected, I am changing things without even meaning to. Since I am not weak like Hiruzen, people don''t dare do something against Konoha when I am the leader. I mean Hiruzen allowed Danzo to orc.h.e.s.trate an assassination against him and even though it failed¡­ he didn''t do anything to Danzo and let him get away scot free.


    ¡­.


    As another month passes,  Itachi seems to graduate from the academy. That was about as interesting as this month had been¡­.


    But still¡­ I have to complete another procedure today¡­ it will allow me to change from a simple human man into¡­ something more. Now that the red cube is complete, now I just need to be delicate with it.


    I just walk towards my lab, and lie down as five of my shadow clones start the procedure which will make me at least 2x as strong.


    As it starts I can feel them start shaving my head first and¡­ digging out the skull¡­ slowly I could feel different ''visions'' appear around my head¡­ yes¡­ I have already put in there Kamui and different Sharingan all over my skull with different Mangekyo abilities and connected them all to the brain, allowing me to use multiple Mangekyo abilities.


    As I get up, I look at a mirror and see¡­ a pale skinned man with a bald head and twitching eyes all around his head¡­ that¡­ was me. That honestly looks grotesque... so¡­


    *poof*


    One transformation jutsu later I look just like my normal self. Welp that is that...


    That is when I undo the transformation and am back to my grotesque self and I pull out the Red Cube¡­  time to  use this thing on me now...


    ¡­.


    A/N: Kumo didn''t kidnap Hinata this turn because they knew what Yami might do if he decides to go after Kumo. But really though while researching this events... wtf... Hiruzen is such a weak leader... no wonder Danzo hated his guts. leadership.????


    THIS IS THE BONUS CHAPTER.


    P.S: Like always, you get +1 chapter for that day if the story reaches 1000 power stones.

 Chapter 189 - Evolution…

    Chapter 189


    Title: Evolution¡­


    ¡­.


    I look at my monstrous appearance with my byakugan, all over my head there are sharingans  and my hair has all fallen due to the stress my body is due to the mass of Bloodline Limits inside it. There are even some strands of hair around where there are no eyes on the top of my head.


    Damn, I look really ugly, as expected my body is already reaching the limit. No one can grow infinitely¡­ not even Kaguya or anyone¡­ there is a limit and your own cells start to die out, unable to handle your own power. But since this has been already predicted, I have made counter measures against this, after all I don''t plan to stop growing stronger¡­ like ever, omnipotence isn''t something that one can just get without any work.


    Anyway, my ugly appearance can easily be altered. Plus even if it wouldn''t be fixed, if it gave me a significant power boost I wouldn''t necessarily care. After all, what is appearance worth if you have the power to do whatever you want. You want a beautiful woman¡­ just take her. No need to ask or care what her thoughts are. Someone despises you because of your appearance¡­ that is easy, just kill them. Why would I care about what others think of them, if it doesn''t give me an advantage...


    *sigh*


    But still¡­ as I lie down on the medical and my clones look over me I can''t help but think about the harsh road that I had to walk to get here. Thankfully I had the will to never falter on my goals¡­ now I am powerful¡­ I can confidently say that at least. I obviously not always made the best decisions, but I always took the best possible decision with the knowledge I had at the time. So now I am the most powerful person in all of the elemental nations, soon I will kill the Daimyo and all of his sons, putting MY son with Shiori in there.


    I put my hand in my c.h.e.s.t..


    *puchi*


    My fingers sink inside my flesh easily, as they sink further inside my flesh, my hand sinks deep up to my wrist. I pull out the red cube and throw it towards one of my clones and I nod at him.


    My pain tolerance really has gotten monstrous, I can handle so much pain and don''t even flinch now. I comparison to my first life...


    The clones start putting tubes on me, filling my body with nutrients, giving it the necessary proteins for growth and healing. My monstrous body does the rest as it immediately started releasing steam, already in a state of pre healing.


    Slowly one of my shadow clones controls the cube as the fuinjutsu starts rotating around it. Slowly a strange energy is created by the cube and..


    *fwosh*


    Like a blast the energy flows into me¡­ I can immediately feel the changes in my body. I wince a little, but the pain isn''t that bad. All of my body hair starts falling and my skin starts cracking, black oily sweat comes out of my skin, my body starts getting thinner and thinner. Until it seems just like skin and bones, even the hard build muscles deteriorate.


    This cube has many abilities of the countless treasures that it has absorbed but its main ability is¡­ EVOLUTION¡­ IT FORCES THE CELLS OF THE BODY TO EVOLVE!!


    Slowly my muscles start building up, at a speed that is visible to the normal eye. Like worms crawling below my skin, my body starts healing and repairing it¡­ black blood flows from my eyes, nose and mouth.


    One of the clones nodges another and says. "This is gross."


    The other just gives him a side glance¡­ well more like a glare as he says. "Shut up."


    The other clone looks a little down and nods. "Just trying to lighten up the mood."


    "Well you are doing a sh*tty job at it. What if we die. Don''t detract us anymore, either shut up or get out, you are an eyesore."


    ¡­.


    -General POV-


    It takes two hours for the procedure to be finished. At the end of it, Yami is surrounded by shed skin. He smiles at this, he has an extremely pale skin as if it is painted with white, he also has no hair at all on his body.


    ''Sh*t¡­ I don''t even look human anymore.'' He then mentions one of his clones to stab him.


    *fwosh*


    The kunai¡­ is stuck on the strong skin, the clone pushes a little more and is finally able to draw a little blood.


    Yami smirks at the results¡­


    ''The Evolution Cube¡­ seems to be as useful as expected. This is the current limit of my current body.'' Contemplates Yami, he just dispelses all of his clones. He gets up and senses that his chakra has grown exponentially, his natural body is beyond what is imaginable for a normal human. Chakra is miraculous and has many different jutsu that can be used with it¡­ that you can say that the techniques are endless. Evolution is something that is possible, especially with the Zero Tail''s soul who can create dark chakra which forces change in one''s body.


    Yami simply closes his eyes and takes a deep breath. Slowly his bald head is filled with black hair and the eyes are all dragged on the inside of his skull.  Slowly under his skin he creates a type of exoskeleton. His skin colour changes and his face returns back to normal, he can manipulate every single cell on his body.


    ''Can I even be physically called a human anymore?'' Contemplates Yami, his body already works so differently from a different human that scientists would LOVE to dissect  him.


    Especially his cells, they have an even stronger vitality than Hashirama Cells¡­ so the newly called ''Yami Cells'' are even harder to integrate with someone else. Of course his body is even better now, his cells can handle his own energy now. Though he won''t be getting any new Bloodlines, he doesn''t want a cellular breakdown yet.


    ''I just need to get myself some Otsutsuki Body and I will be golden.'' Thinks Yami, wondering how their bodies will react with the Evolution Cube.


    ¡­.


    Just like this, two months pass and Yami is currently on his office, Inami, the Yamanaka secretary of his is under his table, with his di*k in her mouth.


    *slurp*


    Yami has his eyes closed and is watching his first life''s memories like a movie. He is watching the Avengers Movie¡­ well¡­ more like rewatching.


    Suddenly the door to his office is opened and he can immediately determine who it is by using his Byakugan. It is a young Anko Mitarashi, she seems sad as she finally says. "Yami -sama¡­ Orochimaru has deserted."


    Yami just nods at this, Anko was his spy against Orochimaru, so she isn''t really badly affected as she was during canon when Orochimaru left.


    Inami stopped s.u.c.k.i.n.g him off once she noticed that someone else was in the room feeling nervous.


    But Yami just mentions toward her to continue, and she is unsure but still follows Yami''s orders.


    "I see, just send a squad to hunt him down." Says Yami casually. Not really caring about Orochimaru. He already had dozens of spies amongst Orochimaru''s ranks. Orochimaru is a genius but Yami is so far along in his own game that to him someone like Orochimaru is just another pawn that moves accordingly to him.


    ¡­.


    Still he grimaces a little. ''They used acidic poison. If I wasn''t so knowledgeable about poisons I would have actually died. I really need to develop the Curse Mark faster so I will no longer be worried about things like this.''


    He then frowns as he looks at the carnage around him. *tch* ''I hate Yami, that arrogant BASTARD, by sending just these five Jounin level Anbu, he pretty much told me that I am free to go¡­ THAT FU*KER.''


    Orochimaru rages more as he punches the wall next to him. But suddenly he hears an almost quiet sound that if it wasn''t so quiet he wouldn''t have heard¡­


    *fsssst*


    ''EXPLOSION TAGS''


    *BOOOOOOM*


    That is when the cave immediately caves in on itself.


    ¡­.


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    Check Out My P.A.T.R.E.O.N


    pa treon.com/HolyJoker


    (23 chapters in advance)


    JOIN THE DISCORD: discord.gg/M9hghrm

 Chapter 190 - New Personal Guard...

    Chapter 190


    Title: New Personal Guard...


    {Some people seem confused, but let this be clear, Yami has his normal appearance. He used cellular Reconstruction to change his appearance back at how it looked and buried the Sharingan from around his head under his skull.}


    ¡­.


    -Yami POV-


    While in my office, I just smile as I look through the eyes of one of the flies outside of the cave. Orochimaru obviously survived this, but not without a scratch, he lost one of his legs. Obviously I know that he can make a new one, but he will need time to. Also he doesn''t have the healing methods that he will have in  the future, he still hasn''t perfected his experimental jutsus.


    He is my pawn¡­ he just doesn''t know it yet.


    *sigh*


    Really though¡­ it seems like I may need to step things up a little. I am already 100% prepared for when the 4th Ninja War comes around, but some more preparations don''t hurt.


    Also I have a certain seedling that I have been helping to grow. I sense the Hiraishin I have close to that person and..


    *fwish*


    I disappear in a dark flash.


    When my view changes, I see that I am in a dark room. With a man sleeping on his desk, he has different books about chakra and chakra theories all around him.


    I immediately activate the Byakugan and as a side effect, veins appear on my forehead. I know that even if I slap the person sleeping in front of me too hard he will be killed by me. But that doesn''t mean that I have to be careless¡­


    This man''s name is Hiruko, he is a white-haired man with red eyes,  he is wearing a beige robe with red u.n.d.e.r.g.a.r.m.e.n.ts, and his hair''s length has reached his h.i.p.s.


    I just reach him and grab the back of his head. He immediately wakes up, but before he can even do anything.


    <Yami Jutsu: Full Memory Extraction>


    His eyes go dull and he starts drooling like a vegetable. I have a ball made out of light in my hand. This is all of the memories of Hiruko.


    *plop*


    Hiruko slips out of his chair and drops to the ground. But I am not interested in it.


    I just put the ball of light and use the Yamanaka techniques and watch Hiruko''s life like a movie¡­ but I skipped the boring parts. Like the part where he didn''t have funds for his research but he ''coincidentally'' won the Inuzuka Lottery.


    Under a minute I read through it completely and when I do so I clutch the ball of light, shattering it into a million pieces as the memories disappear.


    I look at Hiruko drooling on the floor, I just get close to him and put my foot on his head.


    *burst*


    Bursting it open like a watermelon, and killing Hiruko.


    Well I got the Chimera Technique that I wanted from him. I am thankful to him, he did spend his life working for something and I got the results of his hard work.


    Though I will need to modify the technique for myself. I thank you for all of your hard work¡­ Hirumo. You will be remembered for it by me.


    ¡­..


    ....


    Since that day one year has passed and here I am. At the age of twenty eight. I am currently in my office, looking at the young ninja in front of me. He has just recently graduated to Chunin¡­ it is Itachi Uchiha.


    -Itachi POV-


    Though I keep a calm exterior look, I can''t help but feel as if I am being read like an open book.


    Being in front of the Hokage really is something else. Even though I have already met the 3rd Hokage, Hiruzen Sarutobi, the old man gives a friendly vibe¡­ contrary to the 5th Hokage, Yami Inuzuka¡­ he has a whole different feel about him. I feel myself as if suffocating on air, his presence is overwhelming. No wonder he is known as the best Hokage Konoha has ever had.


    I still remember when we first met¡­ I asked him about the meaning of life¡­ and he kicked me off a clif. A very drastic way to teach someone, but at the same time it is very efficient. It helped me understand that life is precious¡­ and no one wants to die¡­ not even me.


    "So, Itachi..." Says the Hokage, pulling me  out of my thoughts. "You seem to be a Chunin now. At this rank there are a lot of options that you can choose to go through. As an Uchiha you could join the Uchiha Police, or you could just go through missions with a couple of squads till you are ready to be given the Jonin Rank, but there are also options like the T&I Devision, or the border patrol teams."


    As he says that the Hokage has a serious look on his face as he gives me all of the possible options that I have for the future.


    I think through all of this, but I already have chosen. Though the Hokage didn''t say it, I know that there is one more choice¡­ to join the Secret Division of Konoha¡­ the Anbu Black Ops.


    "Hokage -sama¡­ I am grateful for your guidance. But I would like to join the Anbu." As I say this I bow my head slightly to show respect to the Hokage and that I don''t mean bad nor do I think of his advice as useless.


    When I look at him, I see that the Hokage has a strange smile on his face. He doesn''t seem surprised at all by what I said.


    "I guess you have made up your mind haven''t you." Says the Hokage as he takes out a paper and signs it. Handing it over to me.


    I just nod at him and go over to take the paper. When I read it, my eyes widen as I read the last part of the paper.


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    Name: Itachi Uchiha


    Rank: Chunin


    Devision: Anbu


    Role: Hokage''s Personal Guard


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    I look at the Hokage and see a mischievous smile on his face. "I must say that you will make a good addition to the team¡­ isn''t that right guys?"


    Suddenly out of the shadows dozens of Anbu come out. They just nod without saying anything, there are no defining characteristics for any of them. They even wear the same blank mask with the Inuzuka tattoos on the mask.


    -General POV-


    During this time on another place in Konoha, in the Jounin Restaurant, there are three people sitting together in their own booth.


    One of them is a female with black slightly spiky hair, she is a fair-skinned woman of slender build. She has long black untamed hair reaching her upper back, and very unique eyes that are red in colour, with an additional ring in them. She wears make-up consisting of red lipstick and purple eye shadow. Her  outfit consists of a red mesh armour blouse with only the right sleeve visible. Overall, this is very broad material which resembles bandages with a pattern on it similar to those of rose thorns. Her hands and upper t.h.i.g.hs are also wrapped in bandages and she wears the Konoha forehead protector and regular shinobi sandals¡­ she is Kurenai Yuhi. She is currently nineteen years old and is a well known Jonin of Konoha.


    "Ahhh I hate it. Yami -sensei hasn''t called me at all. Not to even talk for the last month. That is so annoying." Says Kurenai, and it is apparent that she has had a little too much to drink, shown so by the way she talks about Yami.


    ...


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    Yami''s students ages so you don''t have to look it up.


    Kurenai is at age 19


    Asuma is at age 19

 Chapter 191 - Unnamed

    Chapter 191


    Title: Uchiha Clan...


    ¡­.


    Next is Guy who is just wearing his usual green jumpsuit and his usual bowl cut hairstyle.


    "Hm? Didn''t you go to Yoruichi''s birthday?" Says Guy, since Yami always invites his students to any party as they are like his protege and his pride. They have, after all, made quite a name for themselves as Elite Jounin of Konoha and¡­ as Yami''s students.


    When Kurenai hears Guy ask her that she grimaces. "Yeahhh¡­ I was invited¡­ but Shiori, Yami''s wife, was staring daggers at me the whole time."


    Asuma on the other hand has his head on the table. "Yami goes to each of his children''s birthdays and spends time with them¡­ my dad (Hiruzen) didn''t even come home most of the time."


    Guy just shrugs at what they say. "You guys are weird. Yami invites me to his daily youthful training and we even discuss Taijutsu Techniques together."


    Kurenai immediately looks at Guy with a fire lit in her eyes.


    "Can I join? When are the meeting times." Says Kurenai, even though it seemed like she was asking. In reality she was just stating her decision.


    Guy just shrugs again and eats some beef that is brought over by a waiter. "Its usually in the morning, on top of the Hokage mountain. Though I can''t promise you anything. Sometimes he is there and sometimes he is not."


    Kurenai nods at this. "But there must be a rhythm to his meeting times and if I can only figure it out, I can meet up with Yami -sensei whenever I want."


    Asuma''s head is still on the table as a river of tears flows from his eyes. "Ahhhh, today really sucks."


    "Wouldn''t it be easier to just go to the Hokage Tower and ask to meet him." Says Guy, wondering why Kurenai even goes to all of this trouble. Yami is truly free most of the time and he knows it, since he is regularly invited by Yami to teach Kiba Taijutsu.


    "No! You don''t understand! If I do that I will seem too desperate." Says Kurenai, trying to think of a way on how to meet Yami regularly, while at the same time away from his wife Shiori, who is like a bloodhound against any woman that approaches Yami.


    *snore* That is when Asuma starts snoring, signifying that he is asleep.


    Guy just orders another plate and Kurenai gets annoyed at this. "DON''T YOU EVER STOP EATING!?!"


    This wakes Asuma up. "Huh! What''s going on¡­" He says while still half asleep and with a lot of alcohol on his system. But when he sees that nothing is going on he just goes back to sleep. *snore*


    Kurenai notices that people from the other booths are looking over, so she settles down and says quietly. "Can''t you listen to my problems seriously for once."


    Guy shrugs again, for the dozenth time today. "I dunno what you want me to do. I just told you. Go and meet Yami, why are you so stressed about it. You were his student and he taught you countless genjutsu. Why are you acting so awkward about it now? You are like an Academy Fangirl."


    Kurenai grabs her head in frustration at this. "Ahhh¡­you don''t understand anything."


    As Kurenai hangs her head down on the table. Another female voice comes and says. "Hey whatcha all going?"


    "Oh hey Anko, it''s just that Kurenai doesn''t know how to get in contact with Yami." Says Gay, explaining to her the situation as Anko just sits down next to Kurenai.


    "Hmmm¡­ can''t she just go and ask to meet him?" Suggests Anko.


    "That is what I said." Inputs Guy.


    "But that will make me seem desperate." Explains Kurenai, in a sad mood.


    "But you are desperate." Says Anko, as she too orders some food for herself.


    "Hey! I am not desperate." W.h.i.n.es Kurenai.


    Anko just shrugs at this. "Whatever makes you sleep at night¡­ but, doesn''t Hokage -sama have like the Daimyo''s daughter as a wife and Tsume as his lover? Or is she his concubine?... side chick? What even is she."


    Kurenai''s mood immediately flops down when she hears that. "Ugh! Don''t remind me of that."


    "Yep, you are delusional. You can''t see reality. I work in the T&I Devision and I must say that Hokage -sama might also have something going on with that hot secretary of his." Informs Anko, with a devilish smile on her face. "Also, one time I heard strange m.o.a.ns when I was outside of the Hokage''s Office, and when I opened it, the secretary had disheveled hair and was breathing heavily,... they were definitely¡­ you know."


    "Agh! Don''t tell me that. I don''t wanna know it." Says Kurenai, getting more anxious and annoyed the more Anko talks.


    Anko decides to add fuel to the fire by saying. "Also¡­ going after a married man? Never took you for that kind of girl, Kurenai."


    Kurenai just looks sad at this, she seems genuinely sad. That makes Anko cringe a little. She didn''t want it to go this far, she just wanted to tease Kurenai a little.


    "Yami, always treats me like a kid. I am nineteen now. But whenever we meet he still treats me like I am half my age."  W.h.i.n.es Kurenai, as a certain sadness is apparent in her eyes.


    ¡­.


    On the other hand Yami, who is still in his office. Is thinking of something else.


    ¡­.


    -Yami POV-


    The Uchiha Clan, they don''t really act against me. But¡­ they are dangerous, I absolutely fear their power. Any Uchiha with a Mangekyo Sharingan is one Uchiha too much.


    After all, when the next person gets Kotoamatsukami he might not be as stupid as Shisui to tell other people his ability. That would be too dangerous for me, it could ruin my plans. I already have  Sharingan Farm with the Uchiha that I clone.


    Danzo is dead so I will need someone else. Hmmm... I will also need to discreetly  manipulate Konoha''s population to have a more negative opinion on the Uchiha. That will push the Uchiha over the edge and then they will most likely plan a coup de ate, and try to overthrow me.


    But at the same time my reputation will work against me. The Uchiha wouldn''t dare go against me, they know that I can single handedly crush the whole clan with  low difficulty.


    Hmmm¡­ I will need to plan around many things¡­ but one thing is for sure, an unstable factor like the Uchiha has to go.


    ¡­.


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    Anko is age 15


    Also we see that the MC has decided to kill the Uchiha Clan. He doesn''t hate them, nor have they gone against Yami in any way. They are simply too dangerous for Yami to let them live, the danger of a Mangekyo like Kotoamatsukami or something strong like that appearing is VERY dangerous to Yami, so he is planning to take care of this problem.

 Chapter 192 - Say my name...

    Chapter 192


    Title: Say my name...


    ¡­.


    Two months pass after Yami comes to the conclusion that the Uchiha should be eliminated. During this time the only noteworthy event that happened was that Zabuza failed the Coup in Kiri, he tried to make changes but he failed, that is when people who are weak try to do something big. So he became a missing-nin, to be hunted for the rest of his life.


    Inside of the Uchiha Clan Compound, in the clan head''s home. With Fugaku doing his work on the police force, Mikoto looks at her son, Itachi as he is sleeping on the porch. With Sasuke also sleeping next to him. Even though Itachi was tired from his work he still helped his little brother train.


    ''Seems like being Yami''s bodyguard is quite tiring it seems.'' Thinks Mikoto, as her mind wanders she can''t help but think about Yami. More specifically she is remembering something that they did when they were younger. To this day that is something that she extremely regrets. She remembers how EMBARRA.S.SING it was to have Yami at her wedding. Him having a polite smile on his face during the wedding but when she looked at his eyes once, she could see the endless amus.e.m.e.nt that Yami was feeling at that moment.


    ¡­..


    ....


    Just like this a couple of months pass and in one of the training grounds Guy is sparring with Yami. Kurenai is there too, she is just watching them¡­ but she can''t follow either of them clearly. Yami was in his base form and his strong body is easily able to keep up with a 6th Gate Guy.


    As they are engaging in close-quarters combat. In a split second Guy jumps back and he starts punching the air until heat is produced by the speed and slowly fireballs are created from it and start going towards Yami.


    <Morning Peac.o.c.k>


    The sky is covered in hundreds of little fireballs.


    Kurenai sees this and decides to make an earth wall around her. Just in case any fireballs jump through to her. But she still keeps an open part in her defenses so she can see Yami.


    Yami on the other hand is completely calm as he sees the sea of fire coming towards him.  His leg muscles just swell twice their normal size, and he does a strong wide kick towards the fire, creating a giant gust of wind.


    <Leaf Whirlwind>


    *FWOOOSH*


    The wind hits the fire and due to the strong wind, the fire changes direction. Yami has an amused smirk on his face as he loudly says. "Let''s see how you handle this Guy."


    Guy on the other hand also has a calm look on his face. After all, Yami has always taught him that he must act calm during battle. Other things become secondary¡­ he must have 100% concentration on the battle.


    ''I am currently midair, how do I solve this.'' Thinks Guy as he tries to come up with something¡­ but he can''t come up with anything. That is when he remembers that Yami always told him that if you can''t come up with something, then brute-forcing your way out of the situation is better than doing nothing.


    <7th Gate: Gate of Wonder OPEN>


    Frosh chakra starts rummaging through his body. Guy can feel the massive pain but he doesn''t let it distract him. His sweat immediately evaporates, creating a blue aura around him. He knows that punching air in this gate is possible, so he gets ready to obliterate the fire but¡­ he suddenly stops and thinks.


    ''If punching air is possible, the leg is 3x stronger than the arms so¡­ what about kicking¡­'' As Guy thinks this¡­ he kicks once¡­ he didn''t feel anything. But as he does so again he can feel a resistance, and as the fire gets closer to him, instead of fear, a smile appears on his face, his teeth shining in the light.


    The third time he kicks the air...


    *pow*


    Yami still has his smirk on his face. "I see¡­ that is interesting Guy. So now you can manoeuvre through air."


    Guy who is now upside down he adjusts his body and¡­


    *pow*


    It sounds like a gunshot as he kicks the air, this time he just hovers by constantly kicking the air. He looks excited as he looks towards Yami.


    "Sensei look¡­ this is my new technique. What do you think I should name it?" Asks Guy as he looks at his sensei with amazement, he still can''t believe that he is flying¡­ well kinda flying.


    Yami thinks for a little and says. "How about Sky Walk."


    Guy smiles at this. "Sensei, you are really good at naming things¡­ sometimes."


    Yami narrowed his eyes at that. "What is ''sometimes'' supposed to mean."


    Guy just looks around nervously, he sees Kurenai and gives her a look telling her to say something.  She just shakes her head saying ''This is your problem, deal with it on your own.''


    Guy looks at Yami uncomfortably. "Uhhhhh¡­"


    Yami just cracks his knuckles as he looks at Guy.


    ¡­.


    ¡­.


    One year passes fast like this. Yami continues to manipulate things behind the scenes. The Uchiha Clan''s reputation plummeted during this time, and different rumours started floating around, raising the suspicion that the Uchiha controlled the nine tails. Obviously the smart people know that is unlikely, but the people with the mob mentality followed the rumours and the village started to shun the Uchiha Clan.


    ¡­.


    -Itachi POV-


    I contemplate the events happening as of late as I walk down the dark hallway of the Anbu building, I go towards a section where the Hokage''s Guards have their meetings.


    As the Hokage''s personal guard I have a general idea of what is happening. Yami -sama has ordered Shisui to use his Kotoamatsukami on the Uchiha Clan, Shisui is willing to do so... I know that should be the end of it but.. there is another unstable factor in this.


    I arrive at a metal door at the end of the hallway. I open the door and inside there is dim lighting on the inside. In the room there is just a man sitting in the middle of the room with a table in front him. Even though I know he is a ninja, one would never assume that the man is wearing a fedora and normal civilian clothing, the weirdest thing though is the sunglasses he is wearing even indoors and in such a poor lighted room.


    He is the absolutely loyal subordinate and one of Yami''s closest advisors. He is also who is rumoured to have abounded his family to be a full time Anbu. He does Yami''s dirty work¡­ he is also suggesting that the Uchiha be killed, but even though Yami disagreed with that. The man said that he will take care of the Uchiha as soon as they show signs of a coup.


    He is someone extremely dangerous¡­ his name is Heisenberg¡­ the man willing to give his life to Yami.


    When he looks at me I notice that like always I can''t figure out what he is thinking¡­ with those sunglasses on him.


    ¡­..


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    SAY MY NAME¡­ ????


    This is obviously someone created by Yami so he can do his dirty work.


    THIS IS THE BONUS CHAPTER


    P.S: Like always, you get +1 chapter for that day if the story reaches 1000 power stones.


    P.P.S: Have exams currently so I usually have to make time and sometimes can''t post the bonus chapters immediately. Sorry about that... but don''t worry I always will post the bonus chapters.


    pa treon.com/HolyJoker


    (23 chapters in advance)


    JOIN THE DISCORD: discord.gg/M9hghrm

 Chapter 193 - Uchiha Clan...

    Chapter 193


    Title: Uchiha Clan..


    ¡­.


    -General POV-


    Itachi looks at Heisenberg, he can''t help but be a little intimidated by him. There are no public files on him so that means that Heisenberg is most likely not his real name.


    ''But one thing is for sure¡­ he has most likely killed so many people that the whole Uchiha Clan wouldn''t even make that much of a difference on his body count.'' Analyses Itachi as he looks at the man in front of him.


    "In case that Shisui''s plan doesn''t work I think that poisoning is the best idea. Of course we will save your brother as long as you agree to take the blame." Says Heisenberg, his body language is absolutely cold, not expressing anything.


    And he is terrifyingly smart, there are rumours of him killing people with poisons and chemical weapons.


    How Yami can have someone like him under his thumb, just shows to the people who know of Heisenberg''s existence, that Yami is a strong Hokage. He doesn''t allow any of his subordinates to stray away, like the 3rd Hokage did.


    At least that is in Itachi''s view, the 3rd Hokage (Hiruzen) has approached him to join some type of secret organisation. But he obviously refused, Yami isn''t someone you wanna cause trouble for.


    His Clan is already so close to being exterminated and he doesn''t want to take the risk of angering Yami. Because he knows that Yami will exterminate the Uchiha Clan if even one of them steps out of line¡­ look at what happened with Danzo and the Shimura Clan.


    ¡­..


    ....


    Just like this two months pass, and during this time Shisui is getting ready to use his Kotoamatsukami, and gathering his chakra, after all to put such a huge number of ninja under the effect of a Mangekyo ability isn''t that easy.


    So today Shisui has been called by Heisenberg to meet up with him. So that is where he is going, to the meeting place outside of Konoha. As Shisui is walking at the meeting place, he notices that there are a lot of ninja hiding around him.


    ''Heisenberg isn''t stupid enough to assassinate me. That could spell civil war within Konoha... he KNOWS we can''t have that.'' Contemplates Shisui, but still he gets ready just in case Heisenberg does something.


    After all, Konoha is in a tense situation, really the only thing stopping the Uchiha from attacking is the Hokage Yami Inuzuka¡­ some of the Uchiha clan members are absolutely terrified of him, so they are thinking if they should really go with the Coup. Most of the elders are against it, but a dozen reckless people and everything is over.


    As he gets closer to the meeting destination, the more nervous Shisui feels nervous. He knows that people who know of his Mangekyo''s ability, look at him differently¡­ but he still hopes that doesn''t cloud Heisenberg''s judgement.


    ¡­.


    He finally arrives at the old shrine on the side of the Hokage mountain. There was no one there until suddenly out of the shadows comes Heisenberg, with his signature sunglasses and fedora hat. He is also wearing civilian clothes like usual.


    "Shisui¡­"


    "Heisenberg¡­"


    *fwosh*


    Before Shisui could even say anything Heisenberg rushed towards him. He was about to react when¡­


    *baam*


    He felt an electrical current behind his back¡­


    ¡­.


    -Yami POV-


    I am currently in the trees as I see my shadow clone go behind Shisui and knock him out. Pretty easily, but I still had to be careful because of Kotoamatsukami.


    After that, I have my clone pull out both of Shisui''s eyes as I get closer, doing dozens of checks  to make sure I am not under a Genjutsu.


    As I get close my clone named ''Heisenberg'' dispels himself. I will make another one soon. I do need someone to take the blame for bad things happening, in a way I need a scapegoat that won''t resist or anything like that. And THAT is who Heisenberg is¡­ my little pet Danzo, who actually listens to me.


    Anyway I modify Shisui''s memory, making it seem like Heisenberg only took one of his eyes and he was able to escape Heisenberg and his Anbu.


    Pretty much making it like it was in the canon timeline, but instead of the dead Danzo, I make it Heisenberg. This way I can predict his actions¡­ and I also take some of his blood. To make me some Kotoamatsukami Clones¡­ hehehehehe¡­


    ¡­.


    -General POV-


    One week later¡­ this night the moon is red. Mikoto is there with her husband, Sasuke is at the Academy¡­ so she should find relief in that. She and her husband know what is going to happen¡­ more specifically they know what is already happening.


    As she thinks of this, she can''t help but cry at this. "Why¡­ why is this happening to us."


    Fugaku on the other hand is calm. He looks at his wife with a pitiful look on his eyes. "We¡­ no¡­ I took a gamble and it seems like it didn''t work. But who would have thought that Yami would do something like this¡­ put our own child against us."


    Even more tears swell in Mikoto''s eyes. Fugaku sees this, he can''t help but sigh inside of his heart. "Mikoto, we will need to be strong in front of Itachi. We don''t want us being in despair, the last image Itachi sees of us."


    Mikoto takes a deep breath and uses her ninja training to stop herself from crying. ''Yami¡­ was what we had nothing important to you. I guess it was just me then, waiting for you to come and save me. I guess¡­ I was just your plaything then wasn''t I¡­ How could I be so stupid and naive!''


    On the other hand, Yami is in his house. Tonight they are having a celebration, everyone of his family is there from his mother, Kiba , Hana, Tsume, Yoruichi, Shiori and his last child with Shiori¡­ Nari Inuzuka. He is the same age as Kiba. Nari has straight black hair and blue eyes, he also looks very girly¡­ which is¡­ weird, but whatever.


    Kiba is running around with his puppy, Akamaru. Nari on the other hand is reading a medical book. He wants to be a medical ninja just like his father Yami.


    ¡­.


    -Yami POV-


    I drink a little sweet orange juice with my kids. The Uchiha massacre is at the back of my mind. I have clones all over that place, so it isn''t a problem if the Massacre will succeed or not. Obito also made contact with Itachi¡­ so Itachi will be my spy against the Akatsuki.


    I really don''t respect Itachi at all. The guy who betrayed his family, someone like that is beyond trash to me. Hmm.. I really am hypocritical. But if someone asked me to kill my family in my first world, the first thing I am doing to that guy is r*peing his daughter, wife, mother and sister in front of him. Then I would brutally torture them all in front of him¡­ but that wouldn''t be the end, as I would dig into his balls with a rusty spoon.


    But I guess Itachi didn''t really love his family as much as he thinks. He loves a village who shuns him, more than his family¡­ what a dumbass¡­ no wonder people use him as a tool. Because he IS one.


    I just take another sip out of my orange juice.


    Then again, I am glad that not a lot of people are like me¡­ or I would have to kill them. So in the end I am thankful to Itachi for sacrificing his family so I can feel safe.


    This is some good juice...


    ¡­.


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    We see that the MC doesn''t respect Itachi at all. He thinks that someone killing his family is trash. But really he just sees a lot of himself in Itachi, with a little brother who is not as good as him. But as expected of Yami¡­ he is as hypocritical as they come.????


    P.S: In the last part it was during the time the Uchiha Clan was getting massacred and I wanted to show you how Yami is feeling towards it¡­ he is drinking orange juice.????


    Check Out My P.A.T.R.E.O.N


    pa treon.com/HolyJoker


    (23 chapters in advance)


    JOIN THE DISCORD: discord.gg/M9hghrm

 Chapter 194 - Years pass by...

    Chapter 194


    Title: Years pass by...


    ¡­.


    Next day, after having a very nice breakfast with my family, I just go towards my office for my Hokage duties¡­ well honestly I am just going there so I can have some nice time with my lover. Ah cheating on my wife has a certain thrill to it.


    My clones already took care of everything after the Uchiha Massacre, I people will most likely think that I was up all night taking care of everything. But in actuality my shadow clones took care of everything and I had a nice sleep and even fu*ked my wife with no problem while the Uchiha Clan was being massacred. Thankfully Shiori is still beautiful enough, as soon as her physical appearance starts deteriorating¡­ I will kill her and find me a new wife. Honestly we have a very good s*x life, and she is a moderately happy wife (most of the unhappiness comes from me cheating on her repeatedly)... but her looks are the only reason I didn''t kill her after I got a son. She finished her job, I got the son who will replace the current Daimyo and be the leader of the Land of Fire¡­ with me pulling the strings obviously.


    I walk into the hospital ''alone''... I was surrounded by my anbu guards. Who are around me most of the time, I honestly don''t need them. I could kill them all in less than a second. But whatever, they are mostly here as an aesthetic.


    I arrive in front of the hospital rooms. I open the door and see the kid Sasuke with dull eyes looking in front of him.


    Yep, soon the emo will develop. I mean fans of the Anime in my first world used to say that Sasuke was just emo, but I mean he had his whole family killed in front of him by his brother.


    Anyway, gotta say something comforting.


    "Sasuke¡­" I call out to him. He doesn''t seem to listen. But I know that he is listening. Me being the best medical ninja isn''t just a title. I can easily tell something like when a patient is listening or not.


    "What Itachi did was unforgivable. I can''t say that I understand your pain or something like that¡­ but I can promise you that Itachi will be hunted like a dog. Though I can''t predict his motive or if he had someone to help him." As I say that I notice that Sasuke comes out of it. He looks at me.


    "He had no definite motive." Says Sasuke with a broken voice. "He just said that¡­ he wanted to test himself¡­ he also let me live because he wants to see if I will be a challenge in the future and then he..."


    Oh wow¡­ he just starts to tell me his whole life story and how what Itachi did all along was just an act. Ohhh¡­ this is gonna be a long story isn''t it.  I guess I will just make a shadow clone and have it listen to him. No way am I listening to this sh*t. I don''t care about his life story or his relationship with Itachi.


    ¡­.


    So two years passed since the Uchiha Massacre, and here I am. In my office relaxing. Time passes really fast when you are relaxing, being Hokage isn''t that hard really. It''s just that somehow ninjas forget to use the shadow clone to do their paperwork.


    Honestly that is like most of them have high intelligence but no wisdom.


    Suddenly as I reminiscing about this, out of the shadows one of my shadow clones comes out and gives me a doc.u.ment.


    I read it and it''s just Kakashi leaving Anbu. Not that big of a deal really. Anyway, I better be at my daughter''s academy graduation. I didn''t let either of them graduate before being twelve years old. I trained them as good as I could, so at the age of twelve, Hana is about Chunin level, Yoruichi is at low level Jounin. Kiba is still in the Academy, and my other son Nari is studying in the Fire Capital¡­ though I use Hiraishin to bring him back home every day.  Nari is gonna be the Daimyo soon, so that is why he isn''t in the Ninja Academy.


    ¡­.


    I look at my daughters after their graduation, I just wave at them when I see them with their headbands.


    "Yo! Dad." Says Yoruichi casually, and points towards her headband. "Looks cool right? Except the whole shining which pretty much says ''Come Kill Me'', I don''t even know why they make them like this."


    I just smile at this and pat her head. "C''mon now Yoruichi don''t be so mean. But this is like another test to see that when they become Genin if they dull their headbands. That is actually why most Genin don''t make it to Chunin, it''s like the secret criteria."


    Hana just walks with her three puppy wolves like ninken. "Dad, isn''t that kinda mean."


    When we arrive at home  Yoruichi just shrugs and says. "Well you have to be smart to be a ninja. If they die because of that then they die. As long as it isn''t family why should we care for anyone else."


    I smirk when she says that, but Hana seems a little angry. "Hey! Don''t say things like that. What about our ninken and the nice people of Konoha."


    Yoruichi yawns at this. "Yeah, ninken are just dogs. And the other Konoha citizens are simply strangers. I could care less about any of them."


    When I hear that I burst into a full out laughter. "Hahahaha¡­ Yoruichi you truly are my daughter."


    Then I look at Hana and pat her head. "Hana, never forget. Family is everything, these people will turn your back on you as soon as it suits them."


    ¡­.


    -General POV-


    Two months later, the news of the Daimyo and almost all of his successors died. It was a family gathering dinner, but an accident happened with some explosion tags being transported and everyone on the Daimyo''s Castle was killed. It was a tragedy of the highest calibre..


    ¡­


    ¡­


    Shiori Inuzuka is just having an average day. Watering the flowers in her garden as  Wondering how much her husband has cheated today, and that is when the news paper kid drops the newspaper.


    Shiori decides to open and read the paper like usual¡­ but her eyes widen once she sees the front page.


    ''T -This¡­'' She looks at the first headline. ''Daimyo and his family are dead due to an explosion accident.''


    Her mind is going through countless memories of her family, her father, mother, sisters and brothers. Though she and her family didn''t always have the best relationship, to her they were still family.


    Suddenly she stops¡­ ''Who will be the next Daimyo the.'' Finally like a lightning bolt it hits her.


    ''YAMI DID THIS.'' Madly thinks Shiori¡­ immediately she turns around, and goes towards the mansion, her face filled with rage.


    ¡­


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    Shiori isn''t stupid so she figured the likely culprit of the ''accident'' when she came to the conclusion that her son will actually is gonna be the next Daimyo.


    P.S: Sorry about the late updates lately, I am currently having some Exams to take in College.

 Chapter 195 - Shiori... forever beautiful...

    Chapter 195


    Title: Shiori... forever beautiful...


    ¡­.


    Immediately Shiori goes inside the house, no one is inside, Tsume was on a mission and Yoruichi and Hana have taken their brothers to the park.


    But Yami was inside, Shiori due to her rage didn''t notice how conveniently the house is empty during this time.


    As she enters the luxurious living room she sees Yami, just putting some fruits in a blender to make a smoothie.


    When Shiori saw the carefree way he was acting, she immediately shouted at Yami. "YOU JUICE DRINKING PIECE OF SH*T!"


    Yami suddenly stopped and looked at Shiori with wide eyes. "Woah! You kiss your mother with that mouth."


    At the mention of her family, Shiroi gets even angrier as her eyes become bloodshot and tears flow out of it. "You killed them!"


    Yami seems confused at this. "What? Killed, whom?"


    Shiori for a split second almost thinks that Yami truly doesn''t know what is going on, but then she remembers how good of an actor he is, so she blows upon him again. "You killed my family, didn''t you. Just so you can put our son on the throne. You fu*ker, I will have the whole Land of Fire hunting you down."


    Yami looked truly bewildered by this. "Wait, what? Killed your family? What the hell are you talking about."


    Shiori just throws the newspaper in her hand at Yami, she throws it with full force, intending to hit him in the head but Yami casually catches it.


    "You BASTARD!" Screams Shiori in rage, as she rushes towards Yami in anger. Due to her rage forgetting that she can easily be killed by an Academy Student, not to mention someone like Yami.


    "Dear, don''t you know that I have been in the house all day long." Says Yami, seemingly trying to justify himself, as he easily dodges Shiori''s pathetic attacks. She even goes to take a kitchen knife and attack him.


    "I KNOW THAT YOU DID IT." Screams Shiori as she suddenly falls to her knees in despair. "I know how you are! You kill anyone who isn''t useful to you or is in your way! You are a monster, never thinking of other people as if the whole world is your plaything!  You kill fathers, sons, daughters, and mothers."


    Finally, she looks up and sees Yami with a shocked face, she gets a smile of victory and points a finger towards him. "You never think about who you kill or how you might ruin someone''s life¡­ you never love anyone¡­ the world could burn for all you care."


    As she says that she looks at Yami who has wide eyes and is breathing hard. She saw no flaw in his act, she herself almost believed it. "Can you stop it for once Yami¡­ and be yourself."


    Suddenly Yami''s hands and body stopped shaking, his face from one of panic and uncertainty turned into a cold face¡­ and then a malicious smile as he looks at Shiori.


    "You really are too smart for your own good aren''t you¡­" Says Yami as an amused look settles upon his face. "Well, maybe not that smart. You did after all come here to confront me with that information."


    Shiori is filled with despair as she hears Yami''s playful voice. "I really married a monster didn''t I."


    "Hahahahahaha¡­" Yami laughs when he hears what Shiori says. After the laugh, he gets close to Shiori and cusps her chin. "No dear, you are married to someone worse than a monster¡­ you married a human."


    His smile widens even more. "Do you know why monsters don''t come out? It is because they are afraid of humans. Do you know why the devils stay in hell? Because they are afraid of humans¡­ DO YOU  KNOW WHY GOD STAYS IN HEAVEN? Because even he¡­ is afraid of his own creation¡­ don''t you think so dear?"


    Shiori has a dull look on her face as she looks at the ground. "Are you finished?"


    "Hm?" Yami seems confused by what she is saying.


    "Don''t say sh*t that not even you believe in¡­" Says Shiori, her voice null of any emotion. "You don''t even believe in God¡­ and why are you even acting like some madman? Is this all a game to you."


    Yami''s malicious smile settles down into a calm calculated smirk. "Honestly¡­ I am just bored. Nothing interesting has been going on lately."


    Shiori just sighs at this. Yami suddenly looks serious as he decides to ask. "Anyway, how did you even figure me out?"


    ''What am I even doing? Talking with my family''s killer.'' Thinks Shori as a chuckle escapes her as she suddenly says.


    "Woman''s intuition."


    Yami chuckles at this too. "Hahaha, smart. But really though, I will torture you to insanity if you don''t talk."


    Shiori''s whole body shivers and she immediately starts talking. "As you said¡­ look at someone''s past and you can determine who they are no matter how good at acting they are."


    "Hmmm¡­" Yami just hums at this. "Ok, I believe you¡­ but just to be sure."


    Yami''s hand goes towards Shiori''s head and suddenly¡­ Shiori''s eyes dull and she starts drooling.


    ''Yep, she was telling the truth.'' Think Yami, as he looks at his now brain dead wife. "Go and slip down the stairs, and break your neck."


    Says Yami casually as he gets up and goes to finishing his smoothie. While his wife ''accidentally'' dies.


    ''She could have lived a little longer if she didn''t confront me. After all, her beauty hasn''t deteriorated at all.'' Thinks Yami, as he yawns a little and pours his smoothie in a glass.


    As he hears his wife fall down the stairs.


    He still has a nonchalant look on his face. ''Guess I now get to have my son as the Daimyo. Hmmm¡­ now I can implement some policies that allow me for some¡­ forceful expansion.''


    Yami then takes a sip of his smoothie.


    ''Yogurt and garlic is a nice combination. I wonder if Tsume and my cute secretary Inami might agree to a threesome, just to cheer up their Hokage after his wife''s death.''


    ¡­.


    ¡­.


    It was later announced that while Yami was in the Hokage tower, the news reached him that his wife had an accident. For the first time, some people saw that their perfect Hokage, shed a tear at her funeral, with his children all around him crying.


    ¡­


    But the next day, he was back to work¡­ and as powerful as ever.


    ¡­.


    ¡­.


    ¡­.


    And so just like this, five years pass. Yami is still Hokage and the Land of Fire is more prosperous than ever before. He was currently in his office, with his real body and not a shadow clone. He also had Guy in his office doing pushups.


    ¡­.


    -Yami POV-


    I look at my green jumpsuit wearing student. He is doing pushups in my office, which I allow while we are talking. He is getting older and he is afraid that his body will deteriorate if he doesn''t work out, so he is mostly always working out. After all, the S Rank Ninja with the name of Konoha''s Green Beast is not gonna be weak. He is also known as the strongest Taijutsu specialist in the world and even has a statue in a village he once saved.


    He is really moving up in the world.


    "Anyway, Yami -sensei, you should have seen his youthfulness. He is training so hard, he reminds me of a young me." Says Guy, now starting to do some sit-ups.


    "I know Guy, you already told me about your new student. What about the others, do you plan to have them take a C Rank Mission soon?" I ask him, already knowing the answer.


    Guy does a thumb up towards me as he smiles. "Yep, that will be so YOUTHFUL."


    I just smile in amus.e.m.e.nt at his antics, he is quite entertaining.


    ¡­.


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    Except during combat, Guy acts normally like he did during canon. Soon we will see how much has changed due to the MC''s presence in this world.


    Check Out My P.A.T.R.E.O.N


    pa treon.com/HolyJoker


    (23 chapters in advance)


    JOIN THE DISCORD: discord.gg/M9hghrm

 Chapter 196 - Yoruichi...

    Chapter 196


    Title: Yoruichi...


    ¡­..


    -Yami POV-


    As Guy goes away, I think back on the changes I have made in this world. I mean they aren''t anything major, but they are still pretty big. For example, Guy is an S Rank Ninja. Kurenai and Asuma are Elite Ninja with the power of around low S Rank level.


    My power has been rising considerably and my son is the Daimyo now. Usually child Daimyo are manipulated by their advisors, but they obviously didn''t dare to do that with my son. They don''t want to piss of the best killer Konoha has, that would be extremely dumb of them.


    Also in the Land of Rice, it seems like Orochimaru has started building the Hidden Sound Village. And I also passed a new legislation during these last years, it is that everyone in the Hyuga Clan must get the modified caged bird seal that I made. So their eyes can''t be stolen by the enemy, no matter if it''s a branch or main family member.


    Of course the Hyuga Clan tried to refuse, I didn''t even need to use Kotoamatsukami on them. I went for the diplomatic approach, and a voting process attended by all of the Hyuga Clan. Of course the Branch Family outnumbers the Main. So now the latter gets the caged bird seal too.


    I mean if someone outside of the Hyuga is gonna have a Byakugan it''s got to be me¡­ and only me. I like monopoly over magical eyes like the Sharingan and Byakugan. These little eyeballs are too precious and dangerous to let out into the world.


    Suddenly as I am deep into my thoughts, the door to my office opens and a girl with purple hair and dark skin pops her head in. "Dad, you busy?"


    I just smile at her, she has grown up now. She is seventeen years old and has grown, her busty womanly figure has started showing and her beauty has become famous all over the land.


    But my reaction was calm and collected¡­ I just burned their letters and usually burnt their Noble houses to the ground too. Arrogant nobles have been living for too long, so the Land of Fire is purged of them, and the money has started flowing back to the people. And going to those that deserve it, those with innovative ideas and such¡­ I have no need for money anymore. I have a whole country''s economy behind my back so there is no need to even manage my companies anymore. So ''Heisenberg'' manages them now.


    Anyway I look at my daughter and nod towards her. "No, no I am free. Why? Did some boy come to bother you? I can kill him and make it seem like an accident if you want."


    Yoruichi pouts when I say that to her. "C''mon now dad. I am your daughter, you don''t need to assume that I want someone killed just from visiting you."


    I smiled at her. She actually asked me to kill one someone who used to undermine her due to her suspected Kumo heritage. It was just your usual civilian bully kid¡­ and I easily killed him. I don''t like people messing with my kids.


    "Anyway, dad, why is Hana so moody lately? And I mean more than her usual self. Like she is actually mad. Did some boy reject her because they liked the prettier sister a.k.a me." Says Yoruichi smugly. She is wearing her Jonin uniform, which wasn''t made to show the feminine form but Yoruichi still does poses to show off.


    She became a Jonin pretty early, at the age of fourteen while her sister (Hana) is still a Chunin.


    "C''mon now Yoru, don''t insult your sister like that. She is beautiful in her own right. Also didn''t you just finish an A Rank mission? You should go and rest." I advise her, with an undertone of actually ordering her.


    Yoruichi just sits on the chair in front of me and asks as if she didn''t listen to my ''suggestion''. "Anyway, dad, did you do anything fun lately. I heard some rumours that you might find a new wife soon. Is that true?"


    I just shrugged. "Yep. Also try to have a better spy next time. Hora is a nice lady and an amazing intern, she also makes some good tea. But I will fire her if she acts so obvious when trying to spy."


    Yoruichi seems embarrassed at this, as she blushes a little. "U -Uhh¡­ she is new to her job."


    I just rise an eyebrow at this. "She went through no training process at all?... Then no wonder s.u.c.k.e.d so much."


    Yoruichi just looks a little uncomfortable when I say that. "By s.u.c.k.i.n.g you don''t mean¡­"


    My face morphs from an amused look to a serious one when I hear her say that. "...No¡­"


    "O -Oh¡­" Says Yoruichi uncomfortable. "...Uhhh¡­ I don''t have the conversational skills to continue this conversation anymore."


    Heh, but by saying that she just defused the situation and she actually DOES have the skills to get out of a conversation like that. But that is unimportant as I suggest to Yoruichi. "You know, if you are so desperate you can use my spy network."


    She pouts again at this. "But they will report to you, a spy network managed by you isn''t gonna look for my interests."


    Well your current spy network also reports to me¡­ but I won''t say that to her. Better let her figure it out by herself.


    "Well to manage a spy network, you need a building and training equipment. Plus the food for the spies and their daily needs while training will have to be managed by you. So its not just having people loyal to you, its harder than that to create a spy organisation¡­ or any organisation for that matter." I say as out of the shadows without Yoruichi noticing a hot cup of tea comes and I start drinking it.


    Yoruichi seems to contemplate what I said, and she finally says. "Sooo¡­. Dad¡­ I know that you have a lot of money. Soooo¡­ maybe you can give me a small loan of¡­ lets say a hundred million Ryo?"


    I lool at her bewildered. "You have no sense for money do you?... and no¡­ I won''t give you money. Make it yourself."


    She seems a little disappointed at that, but she perks up and asks again. "How about I marry some rich guy of your choosing."


    Well she is my daughter that us for sure. But I still shake my head. "No, I know that you will kill the man and most likely create a shadow clone transformed as him to take his place while ''he'' uses his money to fuel your fledgling spy network."


    She goes back to being disappointed again. "Ugh! This sucks, you make it seem so easy having so many spy networks."


    "Well because it is." I say to her smugly.


    *slurp!*


    As I drink tea loudly. She seems a little confused at where the tea came from and seems like she wants to ask me but stops herself.


    "So anyway ¡­ dad¡­ who is your new wife?" Asks Yoruichi trying to change the subject.


    ¡­..


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    We see that Yami actually has a nice relationship with Yoruichi, unlike Hachi who he¡­ didn''t have a bad relationship with him buy neither could you call it good.


    P.S: Neji''s personality is different¡­ we will see how different in the furture. ????

 Chapter 197 - Canon...

    Chapter 197


    Title: Canon...


    ¡­.


    When she asks me who my new wife will be. I just smile at her. "Well, she is currently a runaway working as an actress. She is the rightful ruler of the Land of Snow."


    Yoruichi laughs out loudly at this. "Hahaha¡­ dad, you really make it sound like some type of fairytale, so will you be her knight in shining armor?"


    I just laugh at her joke and insinuation. She knows that I manipulate people, she does it too. Out of all of my children, Hachi, Hana, Kiba and Nari¡­ none of them really act like me. Even Nari, who seems like a planner, doesn''t have my coldness¡­ but Yoruichi, she is like a mini me running around. And I know best how to manipulate me. I can be easily manipulated from birth, just like I developed feelings for my first family (and hold them to this day) Yoruichi also has the same feelings about me. The world could turn to ashes and she wouldn''t care are long as me and the rest of her siblings were okay.


    Though she doesn''t have my greed. Which is¡­ okay¡­ but after a couple of decades I will leave everything to her as I will try to figure out how to get out of this world. I have already learned tens of thousands of jutsu from all over the world. I have no need for the ninja world anymore. So it¡­ should just go away¡­ as soon as I get the most benefits out of it of course.


    ¡­.


    Me and Yoruichi talk about an hour, and her clone even brings us some vanilla ice cream. After eating the ice cream she goes away and as she walks away I look at her back¡­


    ¡­.


    ¡­..


    Two days later Guy comes in with his team looking for a C Rank mission. I of course oblige.


    I also notice the admiring look on his face that Nenji has while looking at me. Well he still has his father and there isn''t really any distinction between the Branch and Main family, they all have an invisible seal on them that I created. It will seal the Byakugan of the user when he dies.


    Anyway, I have been observing him a lot. Due to him being a change in the Canon story. But everything has been within expectations. Canon has definitely changed and I can easily accept that. Especially now that my spy network spans all over the world. I literally know everything that EVERYONE does. With the help of thousands of my shadow clones and the mosquitoes/ flies I have worked a type of minor surface omnipresence. Knowing everything that everyone does, though my brain usually exploded in the beginning. But as I have already immortalized my mind it doesn''t matter as it heals back and I suck the information out of it.


    *sigh* I also have my eyes on Obito and what he has been to. I have to say though, Obito really isn''t as smart as he acts like. He is just following Madara''s already pre prepared plans and following them religiously as he should. Surprisingly getting access to the plans wasn''t hard, I just stealthily mind r*ped a White Zetsu underground and looked if there was anything that I didn''t know about.


    There was a little bit I didn''t know, and that wasn''t shown in the anime or something that I didn''t already know from my spy network. But really though¡­ I know that White Zetsu acts like a good spy network and Madara had confidence in him¡­ well look where letting his guard down and allowing a being like White Zetsu get information like that.


    ¡­.


    -General POV-


    So like this one year passed, Konoha had already reached its peak for growth at its current time, skyscr.a.p.ers are all over the village. It looks more like a modern city than a ninja village. The other Hidden Villages haven''t been able to keep up with Konoha''s growth at all. Konoha alone have stronger economical strength than the whole Land of Wind¡­ not just the Hidden Sand Village, but the whole Land of Wind was overtaken by a village (city) like Konoha.


    A Ninja Village usually gets its economical income from missions. But Konoha it''s different. Even though ninja missions are bountiful in Konoha, it still doesn''t make even 1% of the overall income. Even when the Daimyo of the Land of Wind decided to send missions to Konoha, the mission income didn''t surpass 1% of the overall income.


    Though later on a deal between the 5th Hokage Yami and the 4th Kazekage Rasa was worked out. The contents of the deal are confidential, to even the S Rank ninjas of the village. But it is rumoured that both Yami and Rasa came out of it satisfied.


    ..


    Currently on the Hokage mountain where all of the Hokage''s faces were carved. A certain yellow haired child was painting over the faces of the four hokage, strangely the fifth face was left clean and no paint was applied upon the structure.


    Suddenly the yellow haired child was painting some snot on the 3rd Hokage''s face when some chunin yelled out loudly at him. "Hey you there what are you doing!"


    Immediately the child looked at the one who yelled at him, he saw that it was a chunin with another one just came as he looked.


    He immediately jumped off the mountain and  climbed down as the chunin chased after him. "Don''t think that you will be escaping this time Naruto!"


    He was chased through the roofs of the houses and skyscr.a.p.ers but he was able to escape as he went down amongst the dense population and transformed into a trashcan at the side of the road. The chunin walked straight past Naruto, without even noticing that he was there.


    But suddenly as Naruto transformed back, another chunin with a scar above his nose, was right behind him. "Naruto, what did you do this time?"


    Said the Chunin a little annoyed but then a tick mark appeared on his forehead as he yelled. "BUT MOST IMPORTANTLY WHY AREN''T YOU AT CLA.S.S."


    Naruto seems unsure of what to say so in the end he just blurs out. "Iruka -sensei¡­ I wasn''t the one who painted on the Hokage''s faces."


    "Ohhhh I see¡­" Says Iruka with a pissed off look on his face.


    ¡­.


    In the end Naruto is brought back to his class, and tells them to do the Transformation Jutsu. All of the students do it. Everyone transformed into Iruka, except Kiba Inuzuka who transformed into his father, the Hokage Yami Inuzuka.


    ¡­.


    After class, Iruka has Naruto clean up the mess up in the Hokage mountain.


    As Iruka looks at Naruto, he sees his past self. Trying to act outrageously in front of others, until they pay attention to him. He even remembers his crush back in the Academy. Guren Inuzuka, the now famed Crystal Flower of Konoha. An Elite Jounin forever out of his reach.


    Iruka sighs as such depressing thoughts come to his head. So he decides to call out to Naruto. "Naruto, when you finish this, I will treat you to some ramen at Ichiraku."


    When Naruto hears this he cheers loudly. "Hell yeah! I am gonna finish this in no time."


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    Canon just came...????


    Check Out My P.A.T.R.E.O.N


    pa treon.com/HolyJoker


    (23 chapters in advance)


    JOIN THE DISCORD: discord.gg/M9hghrm


    (I usually post pics of the characters, how they look and some of their reactions)

 Chapter 198 - Scroll of Sealings...

    Chapter 198


    Title: Scroll of Sealings...


    ¡­.


    After Naruto cleans the four Hokage faces, he and Iruka go to Ichiraku Ramen and sit down. Iruka decides to ask. "So, not that I am complaining. But why didn''t you vandalize the 5th Hokage''s face on the mountain."


    Iruka is truly curious about this, due to Naruto ever vandalizing the 5th Hokage''s Face on the Hokage Mountain.


    Naruto has a look on his face that is full of conviction.


    "I know that the Hokage earned their names." Says Naruto calmly, while stirring his ramen bowl. Then he looks at Iruka with a confident smile on his face. "But I will surpass them all."


    Iruka just raises an eyebrow at this. "How will you do that?. Plus why didn''t you still didn''t tell me the reason you don''t vandalize the 5th Hokage''s face."


    Naruto looks annoyed at this. "Well, if I did something like that Yoruichi -nee would hunt me down and beat me up. And she always finds me super easily, unlike the other Chunin."


    Iuka looks confused at this. "So she stops you from vandalizing the 5th''s face but doesn''t care about the others?"


    As Iruka says that Naruto just shrugs his shoulders. "I am not really sure of that. But she only appears when I am close to uncle Yami''s monument."


    Iruka smiles at this as if already knowing something that Naruto has no idea about.


    ''It is most likely a Genjutsu that is cast when one is in the proximity of the statue.'' Contemplates Iruka, as he comes to his conclusion. Though that sounds like something impossible. Yoruichi is the daughter of the debated strongest Genjutsu User Konoha has ever had. Even Kurenai is only recognized as strong before she uses Yami Inuzuka''s signature Genjutsus.


    ¡­.


    The next day comes around and this time it is the Genin Exam. Naruto is waiting outside of the class for his final examination. One by one, the students enter, when they come outside, they either have happy or sad faces. Initiating if they passed or if they failed the exam. When others asked the kids, they all gave different answers about what the exam was about. Some said that it was one of the three basic jutsus learned in the academy. Some others said that their test consisted of throwing Kunai or Shuriken or so.


    Naruto immediately gets nervous at this, if it''s the Transformation Jutsu, he can easily do it. But if it''s the Clone or Substitution Jutsu, if it''s the latter he might¡­ probably pass. But if it''s the Clone jutsu, he knows that the chances of passing are slim to none.


    "Naruto Uzumaki, come in." Comes the voice from the inside of the room. The voice belongs to Mizuki, he is Iruka''s colleague in teaching the young Academy Students.


    Naruto nervously goes in, and immediately Iruka asks. "Okay now, Naruto, do the Clone Jutsu."


    Immediately an unknown heaviness settles over Naruto''s heart.


    ''C''mon now, I can do this I just gotta believe in myself.'' Thinks Naruto as he tries to encourage himself.


    He gathers his chakra and does the tiger handsign, trying to summon a clone.


    *poof*


    And in a cloud of smoke appears next to him. Naruto still is nervous as he looks at his creation and sees¡­ the clone¡­ who looks more like a blow up doll.


    Iruka just shakes his head at this. "Sorry Naruto, but it seems like you will have to wait for one more year."


    Naruto looks down and walks away from the classroom, dejected by the answer that he got. This is his third failure, has tried two previous times for early graduation, he took the test¡­ but he still failed.


    ¡­.


    In the afternoon as Naruto was walking around dejected, he hears someone call out to him. "Hey! Naruto!"


    When he turns back to look, he sees that it is one of his teachers, it is Mizuki. He smiles at Naruto and as he gets close to him he says. "I know of a way that you can become a Genin¡­ it is called the secret exam."


    Naruto''s face immediately brightens up when he hears this. "Really, so that means that I didn''t fail and won''t have to repeat another year right?"


    Mizuki nods at this. "Yep, this is like a ninja mission. After all, a ninja has to look underneath, the underneath. You must look at things from an outside perspective and think outside the box."


    Naruto''s face brightens at this. "Tell me the super secret test. I promise that I will complete it."


    ¡­.


    That day, in the evening inside the Hokage''s office. It was dark and there seems to be no one.


    Suddenly the window opens and a figure wearing all yellow comes inside. It is Naruto, he has come inside the office and is looking around. He finally saw the giant scroll that Mizuki told him to get, in order to pass the secret exam.


    ''Yes I found it. Now I can become a Genin for real.'' Thinks Naruto, as he has a wide smile on his face. He immediately runs away from the scene jumping out of the window.


    But suddenly, back in the Hokage''s office two figures appear out of the darkness. It was Yami and Yoruichi. They both had malicious smiles on their faces.


    Yami just whispers to his daughter. "You know what to do now."


    Yoruichi nods and answers with a simple. "Yep!" As lightning  curses through her skin, forming a cat tail and ears made out of lightning.


    She immediately disappears from her location going towards a certain location that she can sense a certain dumb Chunin.


    ''Dad really knows how to amuse himself. As expected of the person with the most free time in Konoha.'' Thinks Yoruichi as she blitzes from building to building, travelling at breakneck speeds.


    ¡­.


    On the other side of the village, Naruto just looks at Iruka, who has a giant shuriken lodged into his back, while he still says. "Naruto isn''t the Nine Tailed Fox. He is Naruto of Konoha."


    Naruto cries at this and as Iruka falls down on the ground he looks at Mizuki with a furious look on his face. His whiskers become more pronounced and his eyes reddened, turning into slits. A growl comes out of his throat as he says. "You dare hurst Iruka -sensei¡­ I will kill you."


    When Mizuki sees this, he isn''t intimidated at all. After all, he knows that no matter how much chakra he has. Naruto is useless at being a ninja and can''t even throw a shuriken straight. He has been teaching him for years so he is specially inclined to know of Naruto''s progress.


    But suddenly Naruto makes his fingers in a cross sign and says. "Shadow Clone Jutsu."


    *POOOF*


    Immediately a huge gust of smoke appears on the surroundings as hundreds of clones appear. This is when Mizuki looks a little afraid at this bit then¡­


    *baaam*


    Bashes a kick on his head, and out of the lighting a female voice comes out saying. "Hello there sh*tty spy¡­"


    It is Yoruichi, clad in a skin tight dark full body suit, kicking Mizuki in the face, with just enough power to knock him out. But even while he was being electrocuted, Mizuki couldn''t help but admire the person kicking him.


    "H -How beautiful." Says Mizuki as he falls into unconsciousness.


    *plop!* and falls on the ground. Yoruichi on the other hand has a sadistic smile on her face as she kicks an unconscious Mizuki.


    "You m.a.s.o.c.h.i.s.tic creep. You are too ugly, weak and insecure for you to even think about me that way."


    .....


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    THIS IS THE BONUS CHAPTER... I know that it took two days late. But I had exams during that time. Hope ya can understand.????????


    pa treon.com/HolyJoker


    (23 chapters in advance)


    JOIN THE DISCORD: discord.gg/M9hghrm


    (I have the video of a guy getting f*cked by a pig if ya wanna see.... know that if you join you have to see it. It''s like a whole rite of acceptance.. also I sometimes act crazy in there... just ignore that.????


    Also there are pics of characters and plans for future stories on discord.????????

 Chapter 199 - His Children...

    Chapter 199


    Title: His Children...


    ¡­.


    When Naruto sees Yoruichi one shot Mizuki. He can''t help but look at Yoruichi in a different light. She is always messing around and listens only to her father.


    ''She is strong¡­ and pretty.'' Thinks Naruto as a blush appears on his face.


    When Yoruichi sees this she just narrows her eyes. "What are you looking at, whiskers brat."


    Naruto immediately looks away. Yoruichi just sighs at this. "Brat, the anbu will soon be here. So calm yourself down and when they come, clearly explain to them what happened."


    ¡­.


    So as the Anbu came Naruto and Yoruichi explained to them what happened and how it went along. Yoruichi just sighs once more at this. "Well, I will inform my father of the happenings here¡­"


    That is when Iruka, who is being healed by an Anbu who knows medical ninjutsu, as he opens his eyes he looks around and sees some of the Naruto clones who are just running around.


    "Naruto... you are officially a Genin now, since you can use clone jutsu." As Iruka says that Naruto turns around and says.


    "Iruka -sensei, you are awake!" Says Naruto, overjoyed as he goes in for a hug.


    ¡­.


    Later on Yoruichi just goes away, getting out of the forest and back into the lights of the city (Konoha) as she jumps atop the high buildings from one to another. Suddenly she stops atop one of the skyscr.a.p.ers and looks around suspiciously.


    "Dad, are you around?" Asks Yoruichi, a little confused.


    Suddenly out of the shadows Yami comes out, wearing his casual clothes, which consists of white pants and a black t-shirt with the word ''wolf'' written on it in white.


    Yami looks at Yoruichi amusedly. "I see that you have gotten better at sensing someone''s presence."


    Yoruichi feels uncomfortable when her father says that to her. She didn''t actually feel anything and just called out randomly¡­ and as expected¡­ her father was around.


    Yami looks at Yoruichi and suddenly his eyes widen in realisation. "Ohhh¡­ that is silly."


    Yoruichi smiles at this. "Yeah¡­ I always know that you are around so¡­ I just thought that if I just call you out you would show up. You are like the boogie man, but you only need to be called once. Hahaha."


    Yami laughs along with her too. "Hahaha, that truly was ridiculous."


    Suddenly this time Yoruichi''s eyes widened in realisation. "Wait¡­ dad¡­ did you just manipulate me so you wouldn''t have to tell me how you predicted perfectly what would happen with Naruto."


    Yami just looks to the side, and sarcastically says. "Nooo~ of course not. That would make me seem like a manipulative person. And I am not like that at all."


    Yoruichi smiles sarcastically. "Yeah very funny dad."


    Yami smirks at this. "Do you know why you don''t see elephants hiding in trees?"


    As Yami says that Yoruichi notices that her father is going into one of his psychological moods so she listens.


    "Because they are good at it." Says Yami snickering, as if it was an inside joke.


    Yoruichi looks at her father in confusion. "What was with that lame joke dad?"


    Yami''s snickers turn into a full blown laugh. "Hahahaha¡­ yeah you could call it a dad joke."


    Yoruichi seems more confused than ever by this. "What is that even supposed to mean."


    Yami laughs even louder. "C''mon Yoruichi, it''s getting late, you should be asleep."


    He then starts jumping from building to building and Yoruichi follows him. They look at the amazing views of Konoha, looking down from the hight of the skyscr.a.p.ers.


    As Yoruichi catches up to Yami. She looks at her father and says. "I am an a.d.u.l.t, dad and-"


    But before she can continue Yami interrupts her by saying. "Hey there A.d.u.l.t, I am dad."


    Yoruichi, still confused by Yami''s behaviour, frowns. Suddenly she feels a hand on her head as they are midair. She sees that it is her father petting her. He has a sad look on his eyes, something that Yoruichi never truly saw, and she knows that this time he isn''t acting.


    "Yoruichi¡­ if one day I were to disappear out of nowhere. I want you to continue your life like nothing happened. I don''t want you to grieve for me or look for me." Says Yami with an unusually serious voice. Making Yoruichi surprised at this, but she dismisses the notion. ''Dad is a good actor, he can easily trick me. This might be one of his jokes.''


    But still Yoruichi still seriously answers. "Don''t worry dad, I am likely to die before you so I don''t need to be worried about something like this."


    Suddenly Yami looks at her with a wide eyed look on his face. "Hm! I would be sad if that were to happen¡­ so I would like you to not die too young Yoruichi."


    Suddenly Yami''s eyes turn cold shadowed by his hair, even Yoruichi feels a certain chill on her spine when she sees that.


    But Yami says in an unusually cold voice. "No¡­ I won''t allow you to die too young Yoruichi. I will never allow something like that. If I have all of this power and can''t protect my own daughter then¡­"


    Suddenly Yami comes out of his trace and looks at Yoruichi, his face back to normal and his eyes have that warm energy in them. "Sorry daughter, it seems like the older I get the more my mind wanders. I will be going home first."


    *fwosh*


    And in a dark flash Yami disappeared, leaving Yoruichi confused beyond matter. ''What is going on inside your head father¡­ you have everything. You say that family is everything¡­ but why do you yourself seem so confused? Haven''t you already figured out everything, the way you usually speak, walk and eat is of someone who has everything figured out. Why do you seem so unsure father?''


    As Yoruichi thinks that, she is left contemplating what her father is thinking. Ever since young, she has never been able to figure out what her father is thinking. She only knew that her father is terrifyingly smart and always had an answer to any question.


    ''Father¡­ why do you seem so lonely?''


    While she was thinking this, she completely forgot about asking her father how he predicted something like this¡­


    On the other hand, at Yami''s mansion in the Inuzuka Clan compound. Inside the mansion is his luxurious living room, a woman is sitting in one of the couches while reading the book Romeo and Juliet. She has long black hair with bangs that swept on each side of her face and violet-blue eyes. Her name is Koyuki Kazahana, and the current leader of the Land of Snow¡­ and Yami Inuzuka''s current wife.


    She used to be a novice actress, that is before her current husband found her and completely destroyed her uncle who had taken over the Land of Snow.


    She can''t help it that every time she thinks about her homeland, she thinks about her husband¡­ or more specifically his power. What she saw that day terrified her¡­ while at the same time made her fall in love. She used to always be worried that her uncle would find her and kill her. But in less than one hour after finding her¡­ her husband obliterated her uncle.


    She used to think that physical power is limited in comparison to political power and it falls short to the second. After all, ninja still listen to the Daimyo.


    But then she met Yami, he conjured what can only be something godly. A giant humanoid figure with a dark hue to it, and simply obliterated the castle that her uncle used to live, together with him and his whole army with only one swing of its sword.


    That made the people think that the gods are mad, so they appointed her to leadership position again.


    That day she understood something simple but critical about the world¡­ violence is the ultimate power and everything can be solved by it.


    Suddenly in a dark flash, her husband appears and when he looks at her, it makes her heart flutter as if they met up for the first time. When his coal black eyes meet her violet-blue ones, it makes her shudder.


    "Y -Yami¡­ you are back." She asks him nervously with a blush on her face.


    ''Though I am sixteen years older than her. I am 37 years old and she is 21¡­ but really though. My power shocked her so hard that she has withdrawal and a little stockholm syndrome symptoms. Spending her life running away in fear of her uncle and I just come around obliterating him, has broken her a little mentally. She sees me as someone undefeatable and my power is infinite.'' Contemplates Yami, while looking at his wife. He now has control of the Land of Snow, so he uses that place as a place of technological development before they come to Konoha.


    Yami then just walks towards his wife and picks her up in a princess carre. "C''mon now, let''s go and have some fun my beautiful wife."


    Koyuki blushes at this. "O -Of course my husband."


    Yami smiles at this and¡­


    *fwosh*


    He teleports to his bedroom¡­


    ¡­.


    ¡­.


    Tomorrow Yami is back to the Hokage Tower, inside his office looking at Naruto in front of him and the photo he has for his ninja doc.u.ment, the latter has Naruto full of paint all around him. He picks up the photo and shows it to Naruto.


    "Sooo¡­ what is this?" Asks Yami with a completely serious look on his face.


    Naruto just gives Yami a thumbs up. "That is me looking cool on my photo."


    Yami just nods at this. "Ok¡­ then go and retake the photo under one hour and bring it here, the photo needs a clear image of your face, so no paint, masks or anything like that"


    Naruto''s mood goes down when he hears this.


    "Ohhh¡­ c''mon I look so cool on that." Complains Naruto.


    Yami just nods again and says. "If you don''t bring the photo back here in under an hour you will have to repeat another year in the academy."


    Naruto''s eyes widen and a shocked look appears on his face.


    "NOOO!" He screams as he immediately jumps out of the window. "I WILL BRING IT BACK IMMEDIATELY HOKAGE -sama."


    Yami doesn''t react to this at all, he just pushes the doc.u.ment and calls the next in line. "Kiba Inuzuka¡­"


    The door is opened and Kiba comes inside. "Yo! Dad whatcha doing."


    Yami just narrows his eyes at Kiba. "Don''t Yo! me. Did you look at your graduation grades, they were horrible."


    He looks uncomfortable at this. "H -Hey c''mon now dad¡­ don''t be like that. I did pretty good."


    Yami just sighs at that. "By ''pretty good'' you mean only better than Naruto. And that makes you the second last. In my opinion¡­ I think you should go back to the academy."


    Kiba''s eyes widen at this and he immediately bows down to his waist. "Please dad, c''mon don''t do that. I am your son. I promise to study harder when I become a Genin."


    Yami then decides to deploy his best tactic by saying. "Your sisters both had top grades in the academy. And look at them now, they have such successful careers now."


    ¡­.


    And after Yami bully- teaching his son the lessons of life, he reviews the other graduates and Naruto finally brings another photo. After that Yami gets up and¡­


    *poof*


    ''Yami'' dispels himself, showing that it was a clone all along.


    ¡­.


    The real Yami is in his office, drawing a DBZ character from his last life. With him having so much free time, he has got different hobbies now.


    When he gets the memories of his clones he just smiles. ''It seems like the plan continues along.''


    ¡­.


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    We see that Yami has different dynamics with his children and even though he won''t say it out loud¡­ he just like every other parent has a favourite child. ????


    (His favourite child is Yoruichi due to her being the most like him)


    P.S: That scene with Yami and Yoruichi, where he seems unsure, it is in 3rd person and we don''t see Yami''s real thoughts. So you can make your own assumptions.


    Check Out My P.A.T.R.E.O.N


    pa treon.com/HolyJoker


    (23 chapters in advace)


    JOIN THE DISCORD: discord.gg/M9hghrm


    (COME AND VOTE your favorite story in which I should publish next in . Also as you can check the first chapters of these stories at My Other Stories -By HolyJoker (It is a separate story of mine with the dist chapter of every one of my stories, here and on Patre¨°n)

 Chapter 200 - Shiros Strip Club...

    Chapter 200


    Title: Shiro''s Strip Club...


    ¡­.


    The next day that is when the new batch of Genin graduate. Classroom A was filled to the max. Everyone was sitting down and waiting for Iruka to arrive, there was one in here who was nervous in this room instead of being excited. It is Kiba Inuzuka, he has a nervousness in his heart.


    His whole life he has been compared with his father or his sisters. His father is the legendary Yami Inzuka, some consider him the strongest ninja Konoha has ever produced. Though some fans of the other Hokage argue that. But still, everyone knows him as only the Hokage''s son.


    His sisters were talented and graduated at the top of their class, but he was almost the last of his class.


    Kiba clenches his hand into a fist. ''I will make father proud. Once I become a Genin I will show him that I am worthy of being his son.''


    Suddenly he is brought off his stupor when he hears Iruka call out. "Team 8 will be Kiba Inuzuka, Hinata Hyuga and Shino Aburame. You Jonin Teacher will be Kurenai Yuhi."


    ''Ugh¡­ it will Kurenai -neechan too. She will try and talk to me about dad¡­ that will be annoying.'' Complains Kiba.


    ¡­.


    On the other hand, Yami who is currently inside his office is just drawing something when Yoruichi comes in from the window.


    "Yo! Dad today we will throw a party for Kiba''s team assignment." She notices that her father is doing something and she gets curious. She gets close and sees what her father is drawing. "What is that?"


    Yami stops and looks at Yoruichi with a smile on his face. "This is my new creation. I call it a manga."


    "Manga?" Says Yoruichi, trying to say the weird saying word. ''Dad has way too much free time on his hands.''


    In the end she just shrugs. "Anyway dad, what do you plan to get Kiba."


    Yami stops drawing and looks at Yoruichi. "Hmmm¡­ when you graduated I created an S Rank Technique just for you <The Lightning Furry Armor>.."


    When Yoruichi hears the name, she cringes a little. "Dad! Don''t call it like that¡­ I told you, the name is <Lightning Goddess Mode>."


    Yami looks at Yoruichi with a calm look. "I created it¡­ I name it. Plus the lightning takes the form of cat tails and cat ears, that is why I call it Furry Armor. I mean it is logical."


    "No, it sounds weird and lame." W.h.i.n.es Yoruichi.


    Yami just shrugs as if he doesn''t care about it. "Well, you can call it whatever you want but it is registered as Lightning Furry Armor."


    Yoruichi pouts. "C''mon dad, I never ask for anything so please just do this for me. I don''t wanna go down in history books as the S Rank ninja who used something like Furry Armor."


    *sigh* "It took quite some time to think of this name. I put real work into this technique and I don''t even get to name it. Sure¡­ whatever¡­ I will change the official name." Says Yami, a little saddened on the outside. But on the inside, he doesn''t plan to change the official name at all. This will be his little joke on Yoruichi. "But Yoruichi¡­ Kiba won''t be able to use an S Rank technique. So what do you think I should give him."


    Yoruichi thinks for a little. "Uhhh.. Kiba is kinda weak in the chakra category. Maybe something that will help him in a critical situation."


    Yami nods at this, he thinks of the thousands of the possible techniques that could be useful to Kiba. He closes his eyes and thinks¡­ using his vast knowledge of jutsu and his physical brain who now is like a supercomputer. A second later Yami opens his eyes and looks at Yoruichi. "I have just the technique for him. It will be perfect for him."


    ¡­.


    ¡­.


    One month passes and so Team 7 is just going toward another location to do a D Rank mission. Kakshi is just walking with one hand in his pocket. While Naruto, Sakura and Sasuke were talking about something.


    "So Kakashi-sensei, will this mission be at least interesting or will it be just another fence painting mission." Asks Naruto, sighing out loudly in boredom.


    Kakashi stops for a second. He then looks at them, putting his book down. "Well, this¡­ person is associated with the 5th Hokage. Back in the day they used to be as close as brothers and people say that he has saved the Hokage''s life on multiple occasions."


    That immediately gets their attention, even Sasuke seems interested in this. He knows that Yami is regarded as the greatest Hokage. Even back in the  Academy there are countless books on Yami and his early life.


    Kakashi takes the lead, mentioning them to follow him as he walks into an alley.


    ¡­.


    Ten minutes later and they arrive at¡­ a surprisingly luxurious strip club. Naruto, Sasuke and Sakura give Kakshi a nasty side glance.


    Naruto is the one to address the elephant in the situation. "Kakashi -sensei, you didn''t bring here just so you can go and mess around did you?"


    Kakashi just sighs at this. "You kids are really newbies."


    He then points toward the sign in front of the Strip Club, it reads Shiro''s Strip Club.


    "This is the best strip club in Konoha and¡­ also the leader is the best informant in Konoha." Says Kakashi, surprising his students. Making them think that they truly shouldn''t judge a book by its cover.


    As soon as they enter the loud music beats on their ears and the strange sights shock the Genin. They see females with cat ears and tails, then there are muscular women wearing tight leather suits and one of them looks at Sasuke while l.i.c.k.i.n.g her lips. When Sasuke notices this he feels a chill go down his spine.


    Suddenly a cat girl waitress wearing a skimpy bikini comes over with a couple of drinks comes in front of them and asks. "Oh hey there ~nya. Business or p.l.e.a.s.u.r.e nya~"


    Kakashi has a blush on his face looking at the b.r.e.a.s.ts of the cat girls. Until Naruto wakes him up by scolding. "Hey! Pervy Sensei, stop acting so shameless."


    Kakashi finally comes of his trace and says. "O- Oh! Yeah, I mean Business is my p.l.e.a.s.u.r.e."


    The cat girl''s smile doesn''t move an inch from her face but she still mentions towards a hallway outside of the public. "This way please ~nya."


    Kakashi and the rest of team 7 follow the cat girl.


    ¡­.


    As they walk away from the loud music, the cat girl leads them to a private booth where the music isn''t so loud.


    That is when the cat girl says. "By the way, master Shiro is busy at the moment. Don''t worry in a couple of minutes he should be gone. Can I get you anything during that time¡­ ~nya."


    "Can you get us some chicken fingers and KFC." Asks Kakashi, Sasuke, Naruto and Sakura immediately look at him with a strange look on their faces.


    Kakashi sees this, but he just shrugs and says. "Hey! It''s good food. You will be surprised how good they make it."


    Then he turns towards the waitress and pulls something out of his pocket. "I have a regular customer card, does that extend to friends and family too?"


    The can girl just looks at the card for a split second before she nods.  "Of course ~nya."


    And then she walks off closing the door. Kakashi pulls out his book again and starts reading it. Not paying attention to the looks his Genin sent him.


    ¡­.


    It doesn''t take long for the food to come, only Kakashi was eating¡­ and his students didn''t touch the food made in the Strip Club. Kakshi was eating it, but it seems like as his students tried to get a look at his face. They couldn''t see anything¡­ every time, for a split second they looked away and he had already eaten it all.


    Suddenly the door opens, they look towards the door and see a¡­ dog? It looked more like a short human covered in furr, while walking on two legs, it also had a dog''s head.


    This is Shiro, the owner of the stip club. But strangely he has a dangerous presence about him, Sasuke is the first one to be affected by it. Kakshi didn''t care and Naruto nor Sakura were skilled enough to notice the dangerous presence the weird looking dog released.


    Shiro just casuall closed the door behind him and he waves at them. "Yo! Sh*tty humans."


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    Check Out My P.A.T.R.E.O.N


    pa treon.com/HolyJoker


    (23 chapters in advance)


    JOIN THE DISCORD: discord.gg/M9hghrm


    (Don''t forget to vote on discord, the poll is open for only another six days. The vote is for which story I should publish in next, you can find the first chapters for free in here at My Other Stories -By Holy Joker)

 Chapter 201 - No Rivals or Enemies...

    Chapter 201


    Title: No Rivals or Enemies...


    ¡­.


    -Yami POV-


    I am currently in my office with my eyes closed. Look through the eyes of one of the bugs, and see Shiro manhandle Team Seven. He isn''t my dog for nothing, he has learned from me on how to make people listen to you and how leadership works.


    Of course, I know that Shiro is known as the best informant in Konoha. But actually it''s just him borrowing my spy network. Nothing in Konoha is out of my control, but I can''t be publicly known as having my personal spy network. After all, at the end of the day the Hokage is a leader first and ninja second. A leader must seem like he can do no wrong. Just like in my first world, the president wasn''t the leader of the spy network or that would put people on edge. So he has an organization that does it for him, well¡­ more like a scapegoat.


    But truly though, their current D Rank mission is to find a lost dog and Konoha has grown huge under my rule. Even for a ninja that would take days to find an animal in Konoha. So they did the smart thing and went to ask Shiro. Now do I know where the lost dog for an irrelevant D Rank mission is¡­ that would be a waste of time to know something like that¡­ and I do know where the dog is. Who knows, that dog could be an unstable factor, or a white Zetsu disguised as a dog. Of course that isn''t the truth due to the mosquitoes already having a blood sample from the dog. So I truly do control everything in Konoha.


    Even about the hiding criminal organizations.


    ¡­.


    It takes four hours for Team Seven to complete the mission, and Shiro traumatized the kids. But still, as they are walking towards the Hokage tower. I act like I am working and have a huge pile of paperwork beside my desk.


    Also the bridge builder is here currently, but obviously Naruto doesn''t talk to me like he would talk to the 3rd Hokage, acting so disrespectful against me is a big no, no.


    Really though, the 3rd Hokage really tries to stop my growing power. Sheesh, can''t that old guy just chill. He acts like a cucked husband stalking his wife''s boyfriend. But really though, his organization is a joke. I control 70% of the members from the inside, Hiruzen is weak, he can''t just kill the members who refuse him. So he listens to their reasons and such, and that is why he will never really be a nail in my way. I mean his organization is helping me figure out who the people who don''t like me are and who should ''accidentally'' die in a mission.


    I really have no enemies or rivals. No one can threaten me, Kaguya could escape from the moon right now and I still wouldn''t say that she is a threat to my life. True, she is dangerous, but the only thing she has is raw power. She can''t use something like the Reaper''s Death Seal on me, and I can''t really be killed by raw power. You can obliterate my physical body, but I would just reform it into a new one around my soul. My power is immeasurable¡­ but I want MORE.


    With a swipe of my hand I could splatter their brains. But I wouldn''t do that for nothing, they are after all my kids. I even think about Hachi sometimes, I couldn''t be a father to him. His life was truly tragic if you look at it from his perspective. It''s sad that he had to go and die¡­


    But I still don''t let my guard down, but I have recognised the true fact¡­ that none of my children will ever reach even 5% of my power.


    ..


    As I am thinking this, I hear the door open and team seven come in. I of course act like I am working, this is the ultimate technique for someone like me who lets my clones do all the work¡­ well now technically I am working¡­


    "Hokage -sama." Calls out Kakashi, taking me out of my thought process. I just look at him in the eyes and nod.


    "It seems like another successful D Rank mission for Team Seven." I say that with a teasing tone. Pising off Naruto and his teammates, but they didn''t say anything.


    I smile at that. "Anyway, Kakshi, so you think that your Genin are ready for C Rank missions? After all, they did just complete the mandatory amount of D Ranks needed before taking a C Rank."


    Kakashi catches on my hidden message and decides to tease his students too by saying. "Hmmm¡­ I do wonder about that. They sometimes can be quite annoying."


    As he says that he looks at Naruto, meaning that even though he said ''they'' he actually meant that Naruto was annoying.


    On the other hand Naruto just clasps his hands together saying. "Kakashi -sensei. I promise I will be good from now on. Just please don''t let us take another D Rank. I mean if I have to talk to Shiro one more time¡­"


    As he thinks that, Naruto''s face becomes green as if he is about to throw up. Hope he doesn''t actually throw up in my office. That would be gross.


    In the end Kakashi seems to come to a decision and says. "Ok, ok¡­ I guess that they can be considered to be ready for a C Rank mission."


    I just nod. "Ok then, I want you to meet¡­-"  a quick check on my memories about the name of the person. "-Tazuna The Bridge Builder. You will escort him to the Land of Waves."


    Tazuna, unlike canon, he doesn''t come in here drunk but more orderly and looks at me and nods. I nod back and give Kakshi a look, he nods too, understanding my hidden message.


    ¡­


    After some goodbyes, they go away and I am left back to my thoughts. This will be quite a bit of emotional development for Naruto and the others. It will help them grow into useful tools for me.


    Hmmm¡­ now I have free time again. I wonder if that intern of ours is single. Who am I joking, I don''t care even if she is dating someone and is sixteen years younger than me. (Yami is 37 years old)


    I look through my memories and look through her life story¡­ oh wait she actually used to be in the Inuzuka Orphanage. Well that just makes things easier on how to manipulate her.


    ¡­.


    You know¡­ watching dad flirting with a girl around my age is extremely awkward. I can see him smile at her and give her compliments. That is when he looks at me, since I am transformed into a black cat and have even hidden my chakra, it would be hard for even S Rank Sensor ninja to notice me. But this is dad, so he immediately notices me and waves.


    Sh*t¡­ nothing really escapes him does it¡­


    ¡­.

 Chapter 202 - No Rivals or Enemies...

    Chapter 201


    Title: No Rivals or Enemies...


    ¡­.


    -Yami POV-


    I am currently in my office with my eyes closed. Look through the eyes of one of the bugs, and see Shiro manhandle Team Seven. He isn''t my dog for nothing, he has learned from me on how to make people listen to you and how leadership works.


    Of course, I know that Shiro is known as the best informant in Konoha. But actually it''s just him borrowing my spy network. Nothing in Konoha is out of my control, but I can''t be publicly known as having my personal spy network. After all, at the end of the day the Hokage is a leader first and ninja second. A leader must seem like he can do no wrong. Just like in my first world, the president wasn''t the leader of the spy network or that would put people on edge. So he has an organization that does it for him, well¡­ more like a scapegoat.


    But truly though, their current D Rank mission is to find a lost dog and Konoha has grown huge under my rule. Even for a ninja that would take days to find an animal in Konoha. So they did the smart thing and went to ask Shiro. Now do I know where the lost dog for an irrelevant D Rank mission is¡­ that would be a waste of time to know something like that¡­ and I do know where the dog is. Who knows, that dog could be an unstable factor, or a white Zetsu disguised as a dog. Of course that isn''t the truth due to the mosquitoes already having a blood sample from the dog. So I truly do control everything in Konoha.


    Even about the hiding criminal organizations.


    ¡­.


    It takes four hours for Team Seven to complete the mission, and Shiro traumatized the kids. But still, as they are walking towards the Hokage tower. I act like I am working and have a huge pile of paperwork beside my desk.


    Also the bridge builder is here currently, but obviously Naruto doesn''t talk to me like he would talk to the 3rd Hokage, acting so disrespectful against me is a big no, no.


    Really though, the 3rd Hokage really tries to stop my growing power. Sheesh, can''t that old guy just chill. He acts like a cucked husband stalking his wife''s boyfriend. But really though, his organization is a joke. I control 70% of the members from the inside, Hiruzen is weak, he can''t just kill the members who refuse him. So he listens to their reasons and such, and that is why he will never really be a nail in my way. I mean his organization is helping me figure out who the people who don''t like me are and who should ''accidentally'' die in a mission.


    I really have no enemies or rivals. No one can threaten me, Kaguya could escape from the moon right now and I still wouldn''t say that she is a threat to my life. True, she is dangerous, but the only thing she has is raw power. She can''t use something like the Reaper''s Death Seal on me, and I can''t really be killed by raw power. You can obliterate my physical body, but I would just reform it into a new one around my soul. My power is immeasurable¡­ but I want MORE.


    I am nowhere near omnipotent or omnipresent. I can destroy the world with just a thought and then remake it with another thought. I have even started caring about my children in this world. Why? Because I know that even if they decide to betray me I can easily get rid of them.


    With a swipe of my hand I could splatter their brains. But I wouldn''t do that for nothing, they are after all my kids. I even think about Hachi sometimes, I couldn''t be a father to him. His life was truly tragic if you look at it from his perspective. It''s sad that he had to go and die¡­


    But I still don''t let my guard down, but I have recognised the true fact¡­ that none of my children will ever reach even 5% of my power.


    ..


    As I am thinking this, I hear the door open and team seven come in. I of course act like I am working, this is the ultimate technique for someone like me who lets my clones do all the work¡­ well now technically I am working¡­


    "Hokage -sama." Calls out Kakashi, taking me out of my thought process. I just look at him in the eyes and nod.


    "It seems like another successful D Rank mission for Team Seven." I say that with a teasing tone. Pising off Naruto and his teammates, but they didn''t say anything.


    I smile at that. "Anyway, Kakshi, so you think that your Genin are ready for C Rank missions? After all, they did just complete the mandatory amount of D Ranks needed before taking a C Rank."


    Kakashi catches on my hidden message and decides to tease his students too by saying. "Hmmm¡­ I do wonder about that. They sometimes can be quite annoying."


    As he says that he looks at Naruto, meaning that even though he said ''they'' he actually meant that Naruto was annoying.


    On the other hand Naruto just clasps his hands together saying. "Kakashi -sensei. I promise I will be good from now on. Just please don''t let us take another D Rank. I mean if I have to talk to Shiro one more time¡­"


    As he thinks that, Naruto''s face becomes green as if he is about to throw up. Hope he doesn''t actually throw up in my office. That would be gross.


    In the end Kakashi seems to come to a decision and says. "Ok, ok¡­ I guess that they can be considered to be ready for a C Rank mission."


    I just nod. "Ok then, I want you to meet¡­-"  a quick check on my memories about the name of the person. "-Tazuna The Bridge Builder. You will escort him to the Land of Waves."


    Tazuna, unlike canon, he doesn''t come in here drunk but more orderly and looks at me and nods. I nod back and give Kakshi a look, he nods too, understanding my hidden message.


    ¡­


    After some goodbyes, they go away and I am left back to my thoughts. This will be quite a bit of emotional development for Naruto and the others. It will help them grow into useful tools for me.


    Hmmm¡­ now I have free time again. I wonder if that intern of ours is single. Who am I joking, I don''t care even if she is dating someone and is sixteen years younger than me. (Yami is 37 years old)


    I look through my memories and look through her life story¡­ oh wait she actually used to be in the Inuzuka Orphanage. Well that just makes things easier on how to manipulate her.


    ¡­.


    -Yoruichi POV-


    Sh*t¡­ nothing really escapes him does it¡­


    ¡­.

 Chapter 202 - Demon Brothers...

    Chapter 202


    Title: Demon Brothers...


    ¡­.


    As Naruto and the rest of team seven, together with the bridge builder go  outside of the village. They are all just walking at normal speed, with no one talking about anything. Well at least that is until Naruto couldn''t help it anymore and asked. "Hey Tazuna, how is it in the Land of Waves anyway."


    Tazuna just takes a flask from his jacket and takes a sip. "Well it is different from Konoha, that is for sure."


    "Woah! Really? Then why didn''t your ninja come and escort you too?" Curiously asks Naruto.


    At this time, the bridge builder doesn''t need to say anything as Sakura intervenes by saying. "Actually the Land of Waves doesn''t have neither a ninja village or a Kage. It''s natural sea defense has made the Land of Waves not need them."


    This time even Kakashi has a little to input. "Yes, you are right Sakura, but due to those natural defenses, they sometimes become a double edged sword. For example, there is not a lot of trade going in that place, after all most sh.i.p.s will wreck themselves and there is not any tourism due to the same reason."


    As they make some more small talk, Naruto asks again. "So you don''t have a leader, like a Kage."


    "The leader of a Land isn''t the Hokage, Naruto." Says Kakshi.


    But Naruto is confused by this. "But doesn''t uncle Yami lead the Land of Fire."


    Kakashi simply answers. "No, the Daimyo leads the Land of Fire."


    But even as he says that, Kakashi can''t help but think inside his head. ''At least on the surface. Every jonin worth it''s rank knows who really rules the Land of Fire behind the scenes. Yami does, it''s almost common knowledge.''


    Sasuke when he hears Naruto ask these questions he looks at him with a calm mocking gaze.


    "Didn''t you pay attention in the Academy Naruto?... this is some basic stuff that any six year old knows." Says Sasuke as he looks at Naruto.


    "Hey! Don''t look at me with those annoying eyes Teme!" Says Naruto as he points toward Sasuke. Who just turns his head the other way, completely ignoring Naruto.


    But in the end everyone is looking at Naruto, even Kakashi wonders how Naruto passed the Academy like this.


    ''I guess having someone like Naruto with such monstrous chakra reserves get stuck another year would be such a waste of potential¡­ or maybe Iruka really was being biased when he let Naruto pass. Well I guess this is more work for me then. Teaching him some basic stuff.'' As Kakashi contemplates that he sees a puddle of water at the side of the road. ''Amateurs, on a clear day like this, they make a puddle of water as their hiding spot. They are definitely from the hidden mist, most likely Chunin, but with their intelligence I bet that a Genin could beat them.''


    Still he doesn''t do anything and just keeps reading his book as they pass the puddle. Suddenly out of the puddle the Demon Brothers come out and spiked chains come out of their giant gauntlets, surrounding Kakashi.


    Who acts like a little panicked, but he is already out of there and is substituted towards a tree.


    Kakashi looks at the ''battle'' going on below and seeing that their target is the Bridge Builder. He can''t help but sigh a little, the Hokage signaled him to expect the mission to be above C Rank and that the Bridge Builder is lying about the mission.


    As Kakshi sees that the battle is in its climax¡­


    *fwosh*


    He appears behind the brothers and¡­


    *baam*


    Holds them in place by a chokehold. Completely immobilizing them.


    Kakashi just looks at his students with an eye smile while casually saying. "Yo!"


    ¡­.


    A little while later, he has gotten all of the information he needs and tied the Demon Brothers to a tree. Now this is just a show to his students, but in actuality he already killed them. Konoha wouldn''t waste their time on useless prisoners like them and Kakashi knows that he should just kill them. But he did summon his dog and sent it towards Konoha with a message.


    He then looks towards the bridge builder and says. "Well now¡­ wasn''t that interesting, it seems like Tazuna¡­ you are the target. Could you explain that to me?"


    Though Kakashi said that like a question, the look on his eye made it clear that Tazuna should talk or else¡­


    So Tazuna immediately spilled the beans, about Gato, the Land of Waves and all that.


    "Who is Gato?" Asks Naruto, perplexed by this. And this time it wasn''t a dumb question either, due to both Sakura and Sauke not knowing about it.


    Kakashi just sighs at this. "Well¡­ Gato is the 2nd Ric.h.e.s.t man in the world. With a shipping empire that is¡­ moderately successful. But he is mostly overlooked due to the Ric.h.e.s.t man in the world taking all of the spotlight."


    "Who is the ric.h.e.s.t man in the world? We never learned about that in the Academy." Asks Sakura, but Tazuna is the one to answer by saying.


    "Well that title would belong to your Hokage, Yami Inuzuka, he has been considered the ric.h.e.s.t man in the world for almost two decades now. Earning the title at the age of twenty."


    The Genins are surprised at this. But Kakashi adds some input by saying. "Yep, that is the truth. Yami Inuzuka was already Konoha''s Hero and showed excellence before he even became Hokage. He didn''t get famous by becoming Hokage, he became Hokage because he was famous and loved amongst the people."


    Naruto seems gobsmacked by that. "I have to be like that to become Hokage!!"


    Kakashi just nods at this. "Uhuh, you need to be at his level at least. He is considered the best Hokage since the founding of Konoha. It can be said that Konoha is the greatest Hidden Village because of the 5th Hokage."


    Naruto clenched his hand forming it into a fist, while resolutely saying. "I will be the best Hokage, surpassing even Yami!"


    Kakashi  sees this and his eyes widened. "Uhhh... Naruto, if you clench your fist like that the poison might spread faster."


    Immediately Naruto is panicked. "What!??! Noooo I am gonna die."


    ¡­.


    On the other hand in Konoha, Yami was in his office. With Yoruichi in her Jonin uniform in front of him.


    "I need you to go and assist Kakashi." Orders Yami.


    Yoruichi nods at this. "Of course father. Do I need to follow any procedures or anything like that."


    Yami nods. "Don''t interfere unless one of them is dying or close to death. Also you can freely interfere if Naruto starts using the nine tails chakra."


    Yoruichi nods at this and¡­


    *fwosh*


    ''Gato huh¡­ the only reason he even is alive is because he has this role to play. After that, I am killing all of his men and taking over his meager business.'' Thinks Yami, completely relaxed at this. He has taken counter measures for everything. So everything will go according to his plan.


    ¡­.


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    As we can see Yami commands a certain respect from others. He isn''t at all like Hiruzen or his predecessors. He is an absolute power, both politically and physically. He has played all of his cards right. Also he is going to interfere with the Canon Timeline soon. He doesn''t need to keep it straight anymore. He already has everything under control.????


    P.S; Man, writing the ending part of this story is so hard. I wanna end it good, I had to delete half a chapter today and rewrite it again.???? But I liked the end result. The end of this story must be... as Yami says it... PERFECT...

 Chapter 203 - The Chunin Exams ..

    Chapter 203


    Title: The Chunin Exams ..


    ¡­.


    A couple of weeks later and the 2nd confrontation with Zabuza happens. When Haku dies from Kakashi''s Chidori, Naruto can''t help but yell at Zabuza for being a cold monster.


    Zabuza on the other hand seems completely calm on the outside  even as Gato kicks Haku''s dead body¡­ at least until tears come out of his eyes.


    "Kid¡­" He calls to naruto. "Can you let me borrow one of your kunai."


    Naruto seems surprised at this. But he complies and throws one of his kunai towards Zabuza, who grabs it with his teeth.


    *fwosh*


    He immediately starts running towards Gato, who cowers back¡­ "K -Kill him."


    As Gato is running he screams in terror. "What the hell is wrong with Konoha always getting in my way. That bastard Hokage of yours and now you. Always getting in my way, never letting me develop, I had no way. How can a killer ninja be so good at business, why can''t he just keep to his killer way and stay in his own lane."


    But even though injured, Zabuza easily cuts through his men like butter and gets critically injured while at the same time he kills Gato by slashing at his throat. While Gato stumbles and falls off the bridge, he has a terrified look on his face. ''


    "What we aren''t getting paid by Gato anymore! Hell, we will rob this place." Says one of Gato''s goons. But as they are about to say something more.


    A figure covered in lightning runs through them, shocking their hearts and killing them all. This surprised everyone, even Kakashi, as even with his sharingan out he could barely keep up with the figure.


    It all happened in a split second, no one could react¡­


    ***plop***


    As the bodies of Gato''s goons all fall on the ground, some with foam coming out of their mouths. That is when the lightning is dispelled and a purple hair beauty is seen, by team seven. It is Yoruichi, she looks at them and waves. "Yo! Brats, hope I am not late."


    That is when she sees Sasuke lying on the ground covered in senbon. "Uhhh¡­ is he dead?"


    Naruto immediately rushes towards Sasuke and Sakura does the same too. But Yoruichi already knows that he is not dead, after all she was hiding all along, looking at the battle for a long time. But she decided to follow her father''s orders and not interfere, though she might not be a medical ninja like her father, she knows her stuff. So she already noticed that Sasuke wasn''t hit in any vital point by  Haku.


    ¡­..


    -Yami POV-


    I look through the files of the Chunin Exam participants. Hmmm¡­ it seems like quite some people want to apply for Chunin. Well I guess I will accept them all, they should already know the risks involved.


    ¡­.


    ¡­.


    So just like this one months  passes and here I am. Looking through the eyes of my mosquitoes and spying in the Chunin Exam. Yoruichi is in my office, just messing around. I need her here for something about when I give her the order.


    ¡­.


    After they finish the written portion of the exam. I open my eyes and look at Yoruichi, who is just playing chess¡­ with her shadow clone¡­ that is just sad. Doesn''t she have friends?


    Oh! Right, she actually doesn''t have any friends. Still I ordered heri. "Yoruichi, go and stop Orochimaru when he attacks. Let him battle Sasuke and bite him. Giving him the curse mark, after that you appear and chase Orochimaru away."


    She just turns to look at me and nods. Dispelling her clone and going away. I know that Orochimaru will immediately run away and never come back here for years if I appear. But if it''s my daughter, that would make him stay and continue his plan.


    As Yoruichi is about to jump off the window, I look at her and warn her. "Be careful."


    She stops for a second and looks at me. I usually never say this, so it most likely took her by surprise. Still she just smirked. "Don''t worry dad, I am your daughter after all."


    I just nod at that. "That is true."


    I know that there is no way of her dying, or being so easily defeated by Orochimaru.


    ¡­.


    -General POV-


    Sakura looks shocked as Orochimaru''s neck extends towards Sasuke at extreme speeds¡­ and he bites down.


    "*aaaghh*" Screams Sasuke as he feels like lava is going through his veins, going from his neck through his body.


    Orochimaru smiles at this. "Come and seek me Sasuke. When you want power you will come to me. I know you will."


    As Orochimaru says that, Sasuke falls unconscious on the giant tree trunk. She looks at Orochimaru and with tears in her eyes says. "Sasuke will never join you.


    Orochimaru smirks creepily at that. "Oh, I wouldn''t be so sure abou-"


    As he was about to talk more¡­


    Yoruichi, covered in lightning, appears next to Orochimaru and before he even has time to react.


    <DYNAMIC ENTRY>


    *BOOOM*


    Yoruichi hits Orochimaru on the face¡­ his body flies away like a ragdoll. Going through several trees.


    Yoruichi immediately follows him, leaving the Genin behind. And around 200 meters away, she sees Orochimaru on the ground. But as she gets close, he turns into mud.


    *tch* ''He escaped.'' Thought Yoruichi, looking at the mud substitution technique. She can''t even sense him anymore. Though she is sure that the one she kicked was the real Orochimaru.


    ''He must have used substitution midair.'' Contemplates Yoruichi, coming to her conclusion. But still keeping her guard up, just in case. Also her hearing and sense of smell is enhanced by her using different Jutsu, one belonging to the Inuzuka and the other to the bat summons. He can''t hide his presence perfectly after all, especially while moving close by.


    ¡­.


    Orochimaru on the other hand is already underground, quite far away from Yoruichi.


    ''As expected of Yami''s daughter. She is truly fierce. I wanted to see Yami''s son, but that would be too dangerous.'' Contemplates Orochimaru. ''Especially now that Yami most likely knows of my presence.''


    ¡­.


    What Orochimaru didn''t know was that Yami already knew exactly where he was. What he is doing, his future plans and things about himself that even Orochimaru didn''t know. Though Orochimaru never underestimates Yami, he can never be at his level of understanding anymore. So Yami''s plans are beyond Orochimaru''s schemes.


    ¡­.


    Yoruichi just checks around and in the end she does as her father told her to. Now that she finished what she needed to do, she has to go back and look over Kiba. ''Father predicted that Orochimaru might go after Kiba. And even though a Hokage isn''t supposed to be biased. Dad always says that family is everything, even if the whole world hates you, your family will always love you.''


    ¡­.


    ¡­.


    One week later and Yami is in the Preliminaries looking at the genin, he stands in front of them. The genin all feel a certain  invisible pressure, as if they MUST listen to the Hokage. They all assume that this is the feeling of being in front of what is considered the best Kage in history. Even some of the other lands have to grudgingly admit that Yami as a Kage is effective. Though they still keep propaganda around, about the evilness of Yami Inuzuka.


    So Yami goes high up in his seat and looks around for any disguised Orochimaru¡­ and nope there isn''t one. Though there is one of the Sound 4, Tayuya, she is acting as the Jonin teacher of the Sound Genin team.


    The first fight was..


    Zaku vs. Shino, Shino won.


    ''Shino truly is something else. Might look to have him in the Anbu, that cruelty needed to cripple an opponent for life is something else.'' Contemplates Yami.


    Misumi vs. Kankuro, Kankuro won


    Sakura vs. Ino, tie/both got eliminated from the tournament.  ''Now talk about trash level Genin, they would definitely belong in the Genin corps.'' Judges Yami.


    Tenten vs. Temari, Temari won. ''Hmmm¡­ Tenten is good enough for a Genin, but Temari is not only a counter to her abilities but at the same time, she is a high Chunin level of power already.''


    Shikamaru vs. Kin, Shikamaru won. ''Smart, as expected of a Nara.''


    Then comes the fight of Kiba vs Naruto¡­ Kiba just looks at his father high on the pedestal while thinking.  ''I will prove that I am worthy of being your son¡­''


    ¡­..


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    Didn''t wanna waste time on some useless fight that you have already seen, so I just gave Yami''s thoughts as a side comment to refresh your memory.????


    P.S: Extremely boring for me to write canon moments, so I will just give an overview of what happend just yo jog your memory of the events.

 Chapter 204 - Kiba vs Naruto...

    Chapter 204


    Title: Kiba vs Naruto...


    ¡­.


    Kiba just gives a side glance towards his father. His body shivers a little, he is nervous beyond belief. He has so many regrets, he was never really good enough to compare to his siblings. Yoruichi is Konoha''s Ace and an S Rank ninja, she and Itachi used to be in the same class and if not for Yami stopping her from graduating early she wouldn''t have fallen short of the Uchiha Itachi, the Clan Slayer. Then there is Hana, his sister,  she is already an Elite Ninja at the young age of eighteen, she is also studying under Tsunade, as she will take over when the Slug Sannin retires as the Head of Medical Staff in Konoha.


    ''Then there is my brother.'' Contemplates Kiba. His brother, though seemingly not that talented in the ninja arts, he was always the intelligent one and he is now the Daimyo. Even at twelve years old, his reign is already considered revolutionary.


    ''I need to prove to father and¡­ myself that I am worthy of being Yami Inuzuka''s son. I will make him proud.'' Thinks Kiba, he doesn''t ridicule Naruto or anything like that. If he did it, he knows that his father would look down on him. He always says that an enemy must NEVER be underestimated.


    He puts Akamaru down from the hood of his hoodie, Kiba then gets down on his four limbs.


    <Four Legged Technique>


    His canine lingthen, his eyes turn into slits and his nails become sharper.


    *fwosh*


    He disappears from the eyes of the Genin and Naruto can''t see him at all. When Kakashi sees this, he turns to Kurenai, who has a smirk on her face as she looks at Kiba.


    "It seems like Kiba will get the Chunin promotion this time." Says Kakshi, his lone eye staring deeply at Kurenai. Who looked at him and had a mocking smile.


    "True, ever since he became a Genin, Kiba has been training eight hours a day. I just train him like Yami -sensei used to train us. It seems like that has quite the effect." As Kurenai says that, she gives Yami a split second look.


    On the other hand when Sakura hears this, she gets a little excited. "Woah! So you were trained by the Hokage?"


    Kurenai smiles at this. "Yep. It isn''t widely known, but back in the day me, Guy and Asuma used to be in the same team."


    Guy picks up on this and gives Kurenai a thumbs up while loudly exclaiming. "YEAH! THAT WAS SUCH A YOUTHFUL TIME. We having each other''s backs while surrounded by enemies. It truly brings back happy memories."


    Asuma just sighs at this. "That was fun for you? We almost died on multiple occasions. It was terrifying, there were even some people who wanted to hurt Yami -sensei emotionally so they hunted us."


    Kurenai just chuckles at this. "It was definitely dangerous, but I think that at the same time. We found comrades and friends for life at those difficult moments."


    The Genin just look at the interactions between the three with wide eyes. Never knowing that some of their teachers were teammates back in the day and they even studied under the 5th Hokage.


    On the other hand, in the battle down below. Kiba had pinned Naruto down on the ground and was punching him on the face repeatedly.


    "Give up." Says Kiba, with a cold look on his eyes.


    "Never." Says Naruto, even as his face was all black and purple.


    *bam*


    Kiba just punches again, this time in the mouth. Knocking out a few of Naruto''s teeth.


    "Give up."


    "Newer." Says Naruto, unable to form straight words with his teeth knocked off.


    Kiba nods at this. "I understand."


    He then just...


    **pow**


    Slaps Naruto''s ears with his palms, with the power behind the hit rapturing his eardrums as blood starts coming out of Naruto''s ears. While his eyes go dull as he sinks into unconsciousness, Kiba then gets up and let''s go of Naruto''s hands that he had trapped with his legs. He didn''t even allow Naruto to use any Jutsu at all.


    The referee sees this and says. "Naruto Uzumaki is knocked out the winner is Kib-"


    ¡­.


    But as he is about to say that, inside Naruto''s mind. He opens his eyes and looks around. He is in front of a giant cage.


    "Where am I?" Asks Naruto, confused by the situation. "I was just fighting Kiba."


    Suddenly a harsh and malicious voice comes from the surroundings. "If you can even call that a fight."


    Naruto looked around confused. "W -Who are you?"


    "Since that man is out there I can''t come outside. But I can give you my chakra, and you will defeat the son of that man." Says the voice, Naruto looks around and finally he notices the giant red eye inside the dark cage.


    Naruto couldn''t help but ask. "Who-"


    But before he could finish, he felt his conscience return back to his body.


    ¡­..


    As soon as red chakra starts coming out of Naruto''s body. The Konoha Jonin immediately are about to go and stop Naruto but an invisible pressure stops them all.


    They look at the source and see that it was the Hokage who stopped them.


    "What¡­ is that?" Asks Sakura as she can feel the heavy and malicious chakra coming out of Naruto.


    *fwosh*


    But Naruto disappears from his view as¡­


    *pow*


    He feels a tremendous pain on his stomach, he coughs out of blood. Suddenly he can feel hundreds of punches hit him. ''W -What¡­ is this really that loser Naruto. What the hell, that is cheating. Where did this malicious chakra even come from.''


    As blows rain down on Kiba, he is slammed into the walls and he grabs Kiba by the hair.


    *baam*


    And bashes his head on the floor. The Jonin and the referee wanted tk stops this but Yami calmly signals them not to do so.


    Naruto then keeps bashing Kiba''s head on the ground until his face is unrecognizable, his nose is bloody and twisted. But he was still conscious, and as he was about to fall unconscious and his head is pulled up by Naruto, he caught sight of his father. Yami like always just had a calm look on his face.


    Akamaru on the other hand¡­


    Jumped towards Naruto, but the puppy was just easily bashed aside and thrown into a wall. Kiba sees this and wants to.get up and fight but he can''t. He feels as if his whole body is broken, he isn''t far from the truth as his ribs and arms are broken.


    ''So it seems like I can''t win father.'' Thinks Kiba, as he gives up. He can''t help but remember what his father told him when he graduated.


    ¡­..


    *flashback*


    Kiba looks at his father. "So dad, Yoruichi told me that you have a gift for me for graduation. What is it?"


    Yami smiles at this and ruffles Kiba''s hair. "Remember son, losers are losers, so you must NEVER lose to someone. No matter who they are. Once a loser will always be a loser, unless you are born blessed that is."


    Kiba seems confused at this, but in the end he smiles. "Don''t worry dad¡­ I will never lose to someone."


    He gives his father a thumbs up while saying that. Yami just laughs at this and gets close to Kiba. "Then this will be your gift from me son."


    ¡­.


    ¡­.


    ''I DON''T WANT TO LOSE.'' Thinks Kiba agitated. ''I WILL NEVER LOSE.''


    His hand moves and grasps Naruto''s wrist. "I WILL NEVER LOSE, TO NO ONE. I am Kiba Inuzuka, I can NEVER lose."


    Such a simple ideology, that was all he wanted to not lose so he wouldn''t shame his father.


    *crack*


    Naruto''s wrists break under Kiba''s grasp as dark tattoos start appearing all over Kiba''s body.


    Every Jonin''s eyes widen at this.


    "He can already use it?" Asks Kurenai in bewilderment.


    Slowly Kiba''s skin is covered by tattoos and his hair starts growing behind his back.


    <Inuzuka Secret Technique: Werewolf Mode>


    ¡­.


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    Really having a hard time writing the ending of this story of patre¨°n. I know what and how to write it obviously, this ending has been planned ever since the beginning of the story. Though it changed and it got more detail along the way... I feel a little sad...????????????????


    Check Out My P.A.T.R.E.O.N


    pa treon.com/HolyJoker


    (23 chapters in advance)


    JOIN THE DISCORD: discord.gg/M9hghrm


    (I post pictures of different characters and such)

 Chapter 205 - Chunin Exams Come at an Abrupt End...

    Chapter 205


    Title: Chunin Exams Come at an Abrupt End...


    ¡­.


    Kiba''s curse mark spreads all over his body, his hair grows long, his nails grow like spikes. His eyes turn black with yellow slits, his skin darkens as Fuinjutsu markings spread all over his body. His face slowly extends out of his head turning into a wolf''s head, his body also bucks up a little, and dark fur grows all over his body.


    Kurenai immediately looks at this panicked. "He immediately entered the 2nd Stage, that is dangerous. Only Elite Jonin of the Inuzuka Clan can enter and control that mode."


    She looks towards Yami, but she sees that he still has that calm look on his face and hasn''t interfered. So she calms down, completely trusting Yami.


    Kakashi pulls up his headband and looks at Kiba. "His chakra is moving uncontrollably all over his body. Unlike the Elite Jonin like Aki or such, Kiba won''t be able to control himself. This technique isn''t something that can be just learned by any Inuzuka."


    *fwosh*


    Kiba, like a beast, with no technique at all, descents upon Naruto. Naruto''s red eyes with slits on them widen in surprise. As Kiba appears below him and¡­


    *pow*


    Naruto is kicked in the air, due to the strong hit Naruto coughed blood. Kiba in his Werewolf form jumps up and is about to catch up to Naruto, but that is when the latter does one handsign.


    *POOOF*


    A huge cloud of smoke surrounds him as dozens of clones appear around him. Pushing him out of Kiba''s way, the clones not only move him out of the way, they also push Naruto on the ground to land.


    *baam*


    As soon as Naruto lands on the ground he does another shadow clone handsign and¡­


    *POOOOF*


    The whole stadium is covered with smoke as hundreds of Naruto clones appear all over the place.


    Kiba, though currently unable to think clearly, his animalistic instincts felt a threat from Naruto.


    "I will not lose."  Comes the growling voice of Kiba from his throat.


    "I WILL NEVER LOSE." Screams Kiba, creating a shockwave, causing most of the spectators to close their ears.


    But this was also in a way an attack, using his loud sound to hurt Naruto''s closens as they all go...


    *POOOF*


    Dispelling themselves, Kiba due to being midair can''t do anything. But he finally reaches the roof. He just flips and stands upside down¡­


    *booom*


    He immediately jumps down, creating a small crater in the thick roof, his power accelerated by gravity. Moving at flashing speeds, Naruto was unable to dodge as¡­


    *BAM*


    An animalistic fist sinks in his stomach. But Naruto is not idle as he grabs Kiba by the throat trying to choke him.


    *bam*


    *bam*


    *bam*


    *bam*


    *bam*


    *bam*


    *bam*


    *bam*


    *bam*


    They start punching each other, covering themselves in blood.


    When the others saw this, they couldn''t help but think. ''This is not a fight between Genin any longer, they fight like wild animals.''


    But in the end, with a thundering blow.


    *BAAAM*


    Straight to Naruto''s head, banging his head on the ground and knocking him out. Kiba''s werewolf mouth opens and is about to bite Naruto''s neck. Kakashi is about to interfere but Yami is faster as he says. "Kiba."


    In instinct Kiba answers to his name being called. When he looks at Yami¡­


    *growl*


    He growls like an animal. But suddenly, Kiba stops, as soon as he looks at Yami''s eyes. His instincts immediately understood the difference in power between the two.


    "Stop. That is enough." Yami repeats himself, his face completely calm and he is sitting quite a distance from the current Kiba''s position. But his eyes had a different look in them, as soon as Kiba saw this, he...


    *w.h.i.n.e*


    W.h.i.n.es like a dog, falling on his back. Slowly his fur starts falling, and he starts returning back to normal. But as soon as Kiba does¡­ a feeling of extreme fatigue runs through his body. His body immediately shuts down, and his conscience slips away. Falling into deep sleep.


    The referee sees this and says. "Winner, Kiba Inuzuka."


    Kakashi immediately appears at Naruto''s side, and when he sees the blood and damage. Naruto''s face was full of blood, his front teeth are missing. His arms are twisted in weird angles.


    But suddenly, without Kakashi even sensing anything, like wind. Yami appears beside him, his instincts or anything didn''t warn Kakashi. Yami just casually walked past him.


    ''W -What¡­ I didn''t notice anything. Not even the wind made noise.'' He looks at the other Jonin and sees that they too are surprised. ''No one even saw him move. He truly is monstrous, he hasn''t gotten rusty at all.''


    Yami just puts his hand on Naruto''s c.h.e.s.t and green Chakra flows from his hand and surrounds Naruto''s body.


    Slowly bone crack sounds are heard, it is as if watching time moving backwards as Naruto is healed.


    Even the Jonin were surprised by it, they have never seen something like this.


    ''So the Mystic Palm can be taken to such a level. Even Naruto''s teeth regrew.'' This is something monstrous, they could all agree on something like that at least.


    ¡­.


    Yami healed both Naruto and Kiba, so he just ordered the medics to let them rest and they will be okay.


    Gara, just looked at all of this with a calm look on his face. He wasn''t feeling Shikaku''s screams for the first time in quite a while. The best was screaming when he saw the nine tails chakra, but as soon as Yami appeared. He became silent.


    The next fight is Neji vs Hinata.


    Neji has a smile on his face as he faces Hinata. "Yo! Hinata, give it your best."


    Hinata immediately becomes embarrassed at this. "Y -You too, Neji -niisan."


    Immediately they take the Hyuga Gentle Fist forms, they start fighting each other. But as they fight it is noticeable who has the advantage. That is Neji as he is completely just playing with Hinata, he even advises her as they fight.


    "Be more fluid Hinata. No need to be so nervous. Just imagine the people around us don''t exist and give it your all."


    ¡­..


    In the end Hinata decides to give up after a couple of minutes, seeing how Neji wasn''t even trying against her.


    Next fight was Lee vs Gaara, in the end the winner is Gaara,but only barely and even that was only because Shikaku was strangely cooperative. Yami easily heals Lee''s injuries and he does the same with Gaara.


    And so the preliminaries are decided. Yami just gives another announcement that the next fights will be after one month from today.


    The fights will be decided by ''random'' draws.


    ¡­.


    After that, Yami smirks at this as soon as they go away. Suddenly out of the shadows, Yoruichi comes out and says. "So dad, I see that you seem to be truly happy today."


    He just snickers. "You wouldn''t understand, Yoruichi."


    She just pouts at this. "You and your secret plans. I am going to find Hana and play chess with her."


    Yami while still smiling just looks at her. "C''mon now Yoruichi, don''t go and bother you sister."


    "I am not bothering her."


    ¡­.


    ¡­.


    So just like this, one month passes and the final part of the Chunin exam comes.


    Neji vs Kiba comes as the 1st fight, the winner is Kiba. Due to Neji giving up in the middle of the fight, knowing that he would eventually lose and he didn''t want Kiba to exhaust himself again him and then be unable to fight at full capacity again guys like Gaara.


    Next fight was Temari vs Shikanaru, he lost the battle but won the war.


    Then comes the fight against Sasuke and Gaara. The fight is intense until feathers start falling from the sky.


    Yami just looks up and says to the ''Kazekage'' to his side. "So¡­ what do you think about this¡­. Orochimaru."


    ¡­.

 Chapter 206 - The Five Minute War...

    Chapter 206


    Title: The Five Minute War...


    ¡­.


    Yami looks at Orochimaru, who just smirks at Yami and¡­ pulls off his skin, who looked like it was Rasa but Orochimaru''s face came from under the skin.


    "Aren''t you perfect like always Yami¡­ never making even the smallest mistakes." Says Orochimaru, as his long tongue moves around his face.


    Yami on the other hand just stays sitting down and doesn''t get up at all even though Orochimaru does so. Orochimaru takes off his Kazekage outfit.


    That just earns a bored side glance from Yami as he is just lying back on his seat. He then looks forward as he sees sound and sand ninja start fighting Konoha ninja.


    "Hehehe, Yami, I know that no matter how relaxed you act. You are shocked by this." Says Orochimaru. "You don''t need to hide it."


    Yami on the other hand just sighs, even as the Sound Four come and form the barrier all around him. To stop him from escaping and stop people from interfering in the battle.


    Yami still has a bored look on his face. Even as Orochimaru does some handsigns and a crazy smile appears on his face.


    <Summoning: Edo Tensei>


    Slowly, the three coffins are summoned.


    "Let''s see if the rumors of you being the best Hokage is true." Says Orochimaru as the three coffins opened. Revealing the 1st, 2nd and¡­ 3rd Hokage.


    Yami just looks at this.


    "So you killed Hiruzen huh¡­ you probably did it by using poison. You are too weak to kill him quietly otherwise." States Yami, already knowing the truth and that Kabuto actually poisoned Hiruzen.


    "You were poisoned by Orochimaru old man." Says Yami to Hiruzen, who nods at this, on his face is a calm look. Most likely an Edo Tensei side effect.


    Hashirama looks at Yami and when he sees his uniform, he says. "Oh so you must be the current Hokage."


    Yami just nods, turning towards Hashirama. "You are quite powerful 1st Hokage. But it seems like your current form is too far away from your peak. You can''t even seem to be in control of your own body."


    "Yes." Says Hashirama as his hands clasped together.


    <Wood Style: Deep Forest Emergence>


    Yami then says. "That''s a shame then. Because in your current forms¡­"


    *Fwosh*


    In a dark flash¡­


    *BAAM*  *BAAM* *BAAM*


    The upper bodies of the three previous Hokage are obliterated in a split second. Orochimaru doesn''t even have time to react as Yami grabs him by the throat.


    *crack*


    Breaking it immediately with no difficulty. But out of Orochimaru''s mouth a white snake jumps towards Yami''s face.


    *fwosh*


    But Yami easily catches the snake and gives it and gives it a powerful squeeze.


    Pop!


    Popping the snake like a balloon, killing it.


    Yami looks at his uniform and sees a couple of pieces of blood at the bottom of it. He just takes them off, and under it is a dark version of the Jonin uniform.


    The sound four who are holding the purple barrier look at Yami. They are absolutely terrified of him, Yami just looks at them. "I think that you should give up."


    They look at Orochimaru''s body once more and they dispel the barrier. He just smiles at them.


    And decapitates them in a split second.


    That is when the Anbu arrive on the roof, but when they see Orochimaru''s dead body and everyone else''s they are a little surprised.


    Yami just looks at them. "You guys are too slow. I already took care of the enemy."


    Yami then looks at the Konoha below him fighting. "Go and look around, Orochimaru planned to use a chemical poison to kill all of Konoha. So go and see if it was activated."


    The ninja immediately go away. And it is true Orochimaru did do that, his plan was to threaten Yami and all that.


    Suddenly next to him another person in anbu mask appears next to Yami, but unlike the other anbu he has a dark cloak around him. "What are your orders Yami -sama."


    Yami just says calmly. "Orochimaru isn''t dead yet, keep spying on him. Also try and convince Sasuke to run away from Konoha just like Orochimaru planned."


    The figure nods and disappears like the wind.


    Fwosh!


    And in under five minutes the battle was over.


    That is until a giant sand racon appears in the outskirts of Konoha. But even then¡­


    ¡­.


    Yoruichi looks at the beast in front of her.


    The giant tanuki looks at her. "So you are Yami''s daughter huh¡­"


    Yoruichi doesn''t answer at all. She just appears above the beast''s head where Gaara was sleeping.


    "No time to be sleeping, little brat." Says Yoruichi as she just uses a little lightning chakra..


    *bzzt*


    Shocking Gaara awake and the sand dispelling. Yoruichi grabs Gaara in a princess carry and..


    Jumps off the sand. Gaara just looks at her strangely, his eyes are full of conflicting emotions. In the end he can only ask. "W -Why?"


    "Hm!" Yoruichi looks at Gaara, she then makes an annoyed face and says. "Shut up kid, be glad I saved you. As the victim you don''t have a say in it when I rescue you."


    ¡­.


    ¡­.


    And just like that, the Five Minute War was concluded¡­ in the end, Orochimaru was used as the scapegoat of the whole thing was solved by Konoha and Suna having an arranged marriage between the Kages families. The marriage was between Temari of the Sand and Kiba Inuzuka.


    ...


    The funeral for the 3rd Hokage was held. Even Jiraiya returned back, he was sad at the outcome of it, a lot of Konoha''s citizens are mourning during this period.


    And during the funeral, Yami gets close to Jiraiya and says. "I think that you should train Naruto. Now that Hiruzen is gone, the little super secret boy band that you made to stop my power from growing will fall over now that Hiruzen is gone."


    Jiraiya''s eyes widen in shock at this as he looks at Yami. Who just shrugs. "You thought I didn''t know? This is my village, I know everything that goes on inside."


    Jiraiya wants to ask Yami if he had any involvement with Hiruzen''s death, but he stops himself. He knows how  dangerous Yami can be, he has already lost a finger.


    As Jiraiya starts walking away Yami says to him. "Oh! By the way, I suggest that you finish training Naruto quickly. After all you did conspire against the Hokage and I would usually execute you for that¡­ but I think that you would be more useful in a suicide mission. Give your life for Konoha, and if you survive, your sins will be forgotten."


    Jiraiya winces a little at this but in the end he just nods. Yami smiles and waves at him. "Bye~ Bye~"


    ¡­.


    ¡­.


    -Yami POV-


    One month after that day and here I am in my office, trying to whistle the game of thrones tune, and that is when Naruto barges in my office.


    "We need to save Sasuke!"


    I just look at him. "Get in line and come back later. Other people need to be saved too."


    I casually dismiss him. But I see that Naruo gets angry and screams. "Listen here Yami! WE NEED TO GO AND SAVE SASUKE!"


    When he talks to me that way I stop playing around and release a little bit of killing intent. "I think that you should be careful about the way that you talk to your Hokage, Naruto."


    ¡­.


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    Yep... this story is almost over now...????????????... like one chapter away from over...

 Chapter 207 - The Tune...

    Chapter 207


    Title: The Tune...


    ¡­..


    -General POV-


    Naruto''s body trembles when he feels Yami''s dangerous vibe. Yami then looks at Naruto in the eyes. "Next time ask me nicely, and by next time I mean one hour from now."


    Naruto seems like he wants to refute this but the look on Yami''s eyes promised something bad would happen. So Naruto listens to his instincts and goes outside.


    As soon as he does Yami smirks. ''I am not someone who can just let people talk to me like that. I am the Hokage, I need to seem like above everyone else.''


    ''Anyway sadly I only have around twenty years to stay in power. By then people will be more educated and will see the uselessness of having a Hokage or even a Daimyo. By then njnja will just be turned to soldiers and the Hokage will just be the stronger soldier.'' Contemplates Yami, he knows that the control he has over the world will just continue to slip away. Right now is the peak of his political power. He could kill anyone he wants and there would be no public persecution or anything like that.


    ''But this isn''t the absolute power I want. After all, The God doesn''t need the permission of anyone to do anything. He can destroy the world... and the other beings can do nothing but accept their fate. So political power to me is just a tool. I don''t even really need it. Power is only absolute when it is Omnipotent and Omnipresent.'' Thinks Yami, as his eyes have a glossy look in them. He wonders what he will feel when he sits on that empty ''throne''. He knows that he will never be able to find someone to truly love in this world. Everyone he looks at seems like it will break and wither away as soon as he touches it.


    He knows that he can''t allow anyone else to be immortal like him. They will betray him with 100% certainty. He doesn''t want that, even if he in a way cares for Yoruichi, he can let her go and die without a shock to him. After all, it is just the cycle of life, his first family will die too¡­


    He winces a little as he thinks of that. But he takes a deep breath. He understands what he has been and is currently doing. He will kill children and sleep like a baby the next day with no problem. He is selfish, greedy, cruel, hypocritical, l.u.s.tful, gluttonous and every other sin someone can think of. And he knows that.


    ''It seems like I will be a little lonely if¡­ no WHEN I reach the top.'' Thinks Yami, completely confident in himself. He knows that he will be either obliterated from the universe or reach Godhood. These are only two possible alternatives for him. But he has 100% confidence in himself for he can''t allow his heart to waver.


    ¡­.


    One hour later Naruto comes in, he has an angry look in his eyes. But this time he speaks with a respectful tone. "Sasuke has been kidnapped. We need to have a team to go and get him back."


    Yami just nods his head. "I know, I have already sent Anbu after him. It has been discovered that he has gone with them willingly. If there is a confirmation of this, he will be killed, we can''t allow the Uchiha Clan to be revived out of Konoha."


    Naruto is shaking in anger at this. "What! How can you say that?"


    Yami just looks at him calmly. "You think that just because you open your mouth you will be Hokage? That isn''t how the world works Naruto, you will never be Hokage if you support a missing ninja. Konoha already suffered when a weak Hokage was sitting in this chair. Another one and  Konoha might not even survive."


    Naruto seems conflicted at this. "But Sasuke is from Konoha. This village should help its ninja."


    Yami sighs at this. "As I said, if Sasuke was really kidnapped, we will obviously help him. If he went willingly he will be eliminated."


    "B -But.." Stammers Naruto, not knowing what to say.


    "But what?" Says Yami as his voice becomes harsher. "By the look on your face you seem to not believe in Sasuke. And seem to know that he went by his own violation. If that is the case then you know what will happen. We can''t sacrifice the many for the few, how many Konoha ninja do you think will die if an Uchiha Clan is developed outside of Konoha. It will be in the thousands¡­ and all of that blood will be in your hands. A Hokage must make hard decisions like this, not be unsure and stamper around like a headless chicken. As a Hokage it is my responsibility to look out for Konoha, not Sasuke Uchiha."


    Naruto seems downcast by this. But Yami''s eyes glint in a scheming light as he says. "But I will give you a chance."


    "Really?" Asks Naruto with a joyful look on his eyes.


    "Yes really." Says Yami, then he takes a scroll and throws it towards Naruto. "This is your mission, bring back Sasuke Uchiha, low difficulty A Rank Mission. If you can do that, Sasuke will only have his chakra pathways destroyed and won''t receive the death penalty. If you can''t do this, he will be hunted down just like every other missing ninja."


    Naruto nods at this and goes outside with a heavy look on his face. Yami on the other hand smirks at this.


    ¡­.


    -Yami POV-


    During my first life, I always wondered how someone like Naruto can exist. But now it makes perfect sense really. He isn''t Naruto at all, he is just a child with a mask on his face. And that mask took him over, Naruto acted nice to everyone, he lied to himself¡­ and now the lies have become the truth.


    His mask took him over, Naruto used this mask too much and he now IS that mask. People trying to be nice become really nice when the mask takes over. This is the danger of the perfect act. Even I would be tricked by it if I didn''t know the truth.


    So in a way the whole "Talk no Jutsu" that naruto gives is simply¡­ a lie.


    It works in a way like I work, I give people hope due to my power and absolute certainty on what I do, so people like to rely on me. The same is with Naruto, people accept him and hive in his talks due to them all wanting to depend on someone like Naruto, who believes¡­ no he KNOWS of a better world. But what they all believe in is all just another giant lie, a lie that they tell to themselves so much until it becomes the truth.


    It seems like the crown for the best ''actor'' in Konoha goes to Naruto. The child who will never be, someone who can''t even be considered a person anymore. He is just simply an ideal¡­ of a child.


    I know that Naruto can be dangerous to me in the future¡­ but he is also useful. He is someone who isn''t wise or smart at all. So in general he is easily controlled. If I can control Naruto I can¡­


    A smirk appears on my face¡­


    Let''s see how this goes then. I have already put counter measures against something like that. Plus I have Kotoamatsukami¡­ and I have used it on multiple people already. I used to be just another scared Inuzuka, who was too afraid for his life¡­ but now I  am the man who has this world in his palm, and so the world dances to my tune, just like a monkey.


    ¡­..


    ¡­..


    -General POV-


    Naruto immediately goes, chasing after the one who ''kidnapped'' Sasuke and he had a dog in his hands. Or more specifically he is currently carrying a ninken that Shiro gave him. This will help him track sasuke easier.


    ''Wait for me Sasuke, I WILL BRING YOU BACK.''


    ¡­.


    THIS STORY IS FINISHED ON PATRE¨°N...


    Check Out My P.A.T.R.E.O.N


    pa treon.com/HolyJoker


    JOIN THE DISCORD: discord.gg/M9hghrm

 Chapter 208 - Sasuke vs...

    Chapter 208


    Title: Sasuke vs...


    ¡­.


    As Naruto is chasing after Sasuke, Shiro takes this moment to grumpily say. "I am just a simple dog with a strip club. I am not that strong."


    Naruto nods at this. "No need to worry, I only need you to track Sasuke."


    Shiro yawns at this. "Sure, just go 12km forward from here and you will meet him¡­ it seems like he together with his companion have stopped running."


    Naruto nods and keeps jumping from tree to tree, suddenly he looks at Shiro in curiosity. "You can even tell so much with just your  sense of smell¡­ how does that even work?"


    Shiro looks annoyed at this. "Don''t ask stupid questions or I am jumping off from here."


    "You really are like the Hokage Yami, no wonder you were his ninken." Says Naruto.


    Shiro doesn''t say anything, he just positions himself on top of Naruto''s head.


    ''Stupid brat, as if someone like you can ever comprehend someone like Yami. He is an entity that cannot be understood by anyone in this world. In comparison to him we are all just stupid idiots.'' Thinks Shiro, full of conviction. He knows how Yami is, he hates it when a brat like Naruto even dares to think that he can understand Yami.


    ¡­.


    It doesn''t take long for Naruto and Shiro to catch up to Susuke and the other guy had red hair and he had horns on his head. Shiro looks at the giant sealed urn next to the guy and says. "Sasuke is inside that urn, but we must fight this guy first, he doesn''t seem like someone to just let us go."


    Naruto nods at this and he makes a shadow clone and puts out his hand with his clone scratching the air around his palm and...


    Slowly a rasengan is formed in his palm.


    "Take this!" Screams Naruto as he charges towards the person who has a smirk on his face and charges towards Naruto as slowly straight lines spread all over his body. Turning his skin red and the horns on the top of his head extend and he charges towards Naruto.


    But as soon as he sees that Naruto is close by, he smirks and¡­ his body shines red. Shiro sees this and his eyes widen a little. ''It''s a suicide bomber.''.


    *BOOOOOOOOM*


    Both Shiro and Naruto are enveloped by the explosion.


    ¡­.


    Sasuke is woken up by the sound and he breaks out of the giant urn. With dark energy all around him, he looks at his hand who nor has a dark gray colour.


    ''This¡­ this power. It''s amazing.'' Thinks Sasuke, totally in a trace as he looks at his hand. ''If I continue growing like this, I will finally be able to kill Itachi soon.''


    ''So that mutt protected the dobe and will die out soon.'' Thinks Sasuke as he looks at this coldly. He then turns around and starts walking away.


    But then he suddenly¡­ as soon as he turned around he felt a coldness in the air. His body is fully covered in cold sweat.


    ''W -What.'' As he turns his head to look behind him, his body freezes in fear. A giant red eye looks at him.


    It is a giant dark wolf looking down on him, steam is rising out of the creature''s mouth and a dark chakra leaks out of its body.


    "Who said that you could run?" Says the creature, its voice terrifying, but it had a trait of a voice who was familiar to Sasuke.


    "S- Shiro?!?!" Exclaims Sasuke absolutely terrified.


    The now giant dog''s smile turns malicious. "Bingo."


    Sasuke immediately jumps back, and while midair.


    Shiro smiles at him mockingly."Rookie."


    *PEW*


    A giant beam of darkness is shot towards Sasuke.


    *fwosh*


    He suddenly discovered that he could fly using his giant hands on his back. ''That was close.''


    Shiro just smiles at this. "So you can fly? Well I can easily take care of that."


    Pints his claw towards Sasuke.


    <Squirt Shot>


    Immediately hundreds of dark beams are shot towards Sasuke''s direction.


    ¡­.


    It doesn''t take long for Sasuke to be easily immobilized by Shiro. He is currently looking at the downed Sasuke who has half his belly missing and one of his legs missing. He is on the ground bleeding out, with tears on his eyes as he looks at Shiro.


    Shiro on the other hand has an apathetic look on his face. "You think that its easy becoming a missing ninja? You must really consider the Hokage as someone dumb? Pathetic, you are a shame to the Uchiha Clan."


    Then he brings his claw down to crush Sasuke. But suddenly Sasuke is swallowed by a snake and¡­


    *poof*


    Reverse summoned, Shiro just looks at this. ''Damn¡­ really¡­ no one can comprehend Yami. How the hell did he know this would happen. He makes me feel stupid.''


    He then goes towards Naruto and puts him on his back. ''I really made a good decision by opening a strip club, a killer''s life really isn''t for me. I would rather spend my time on ho*kers and c*caine than this sh*t.''


    ¡­.


    On the other hand in Orochimaru''s base Kabuto was experimenting with a test subject. As it is on the medical table, the test subject has a curse mark in the middle of his c.h.e.s.t, Kabuto runs some chakra through the curse mark and does one handed handsigns.


    "*UGH*" Secreams the person on the table, but he is under certain drugs so he can''t really scream except heave his body shake in pain and small sounds try to come out of his throat.


    Slowly as his skin turns dark red due to the transition to the 2nd stage of the curse mark. Slowly his body starts convulsing and out of his curse mark the head of a big white serpent appears, the serpent looks around and it opens its mouth.


    Slowly a man with pale skin and dark hair comes out. It is Orochimaru, as he opens his eyes and looks at Kabuto. His eyes narrow. "You brought me back?"


    Kabuto nods at this. "Yes, lord Orochimaru."


    Orochimaru nods at this. "It seems like I was easily defeated by Yami. But I am not surprised at the defeat, I am more surprised at his power. Yami has definitely grown stronger."


    Kabuto pushes his glasses up, reflecting on the light. "Yes it would seem to be so. Also somehow he got a hold of our plans. It seems like we have a leak from the inside."


    Orochimaru looks at Kabuto when he mentions this rhetorically asking him. "I wonder who it is."


    Kabuto frowns in thoughts. "We need to do a clearing of all the people in here. It could be someone from Hidden Sand, but we must be sure of this."


    Orochimaru''s gaze becomes even more intense as he looks at Kabuto. "I think I already know who it is."


    Kabuto seems surprised at this. "Oh, you do? Well I guess it is expected of you lord Orochimaru."


    *burst*


    Orochimaru''s hand pierces through Kabuto''s c.h.e.s.t.


    Kabuto coughs blood at this, looking down at the hand unbelieving.


    "You are the spy." Says Orochimaru simply. "Yami really infiltrated deep, he had spy right under my nose and I never noticed. As expected of someone like him. Well I can play at that too."


    As Orochimaru says as he looks at Kabuto''s dead body. Orochimaru notices that Kabuto has something on his body. He pulls something from his ninja pouch and sees that it is a scroll.


    He frowns at this and opens it. But he is immediately irritated to no end at what he sees written inside it.


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    Game Accepted Snakey


    -By the one and only Dark Kage (? ?¡ã ??? ?¡ã)?


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    Orochimaru rips the paper in anger. ''That fu*ker. He already predicted that I would kill Kabuto. He fu*king thinks that I am one of his little pawns¡­ I WILL SHOW THAT BA*TARD.''


    ¡­.


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    Yami, already 100 steps ahead of his enemies. He has been solidifying his control in the world for decades now.


    P.S: Like always, you get +1 chapter for that day if the story reaches 1000 power stones.


    THIS STORY IS FINISHED ON PATRE¨°N...


    Check Out My P.A.T.R.E.O.N


    pa treon.com/HolyJoker


    JOIN THE DISCORD: discord.gg/M9hghrm

 Chapter 209 - Dolls...

    Chapter 209


    Title: Dolls...


    ....


    I just yawn a little, seeing that Orochimaru killed my spy on him. I mean he took someone who was known to spy for Konoha under his wing, what did he expect? I am not as incompetent as Danzo, Kabuto truly was my spy. He was really talented too¡­ but at the same time he was disposable so it doesn''t really matter anyway.


    Anyway, Naruto was brought to a hospital too. What a loser, he didn''t even get to fight Sasuke and would have actually died from the explosion if Shiro wasn''t there. Talk about recklessness, anyway, Sasuke is a missing ninja and Orochimaru is training him at an abandoned temple in the Land of Rice.


    Funny, Orochimaru thinks that he can escape from my schemes and be more than a pawn. He doesn''t understand that ever since he escaped Konoha he has been my pawn, Kabuto would make sh*t up about a person and Orochimaru would kill them, he was the perfect scapegoat. But now he is lying low to give the rest of the world the illusion that he is already dead.


    I put a B Rank difficulty on capturing Sasuke, but I put an A Rank bounty because of his valuable bloodline. But that is for show mostly.


    Orochimaru isn''t the only one who marked Sasuke. He is Indra''s reincarnation, of course I have countermeasures against him. Plus I have tracking fuinjutsu along his spine, the inside of his skull and at the bottom of his heart. Also countless poison and explosive seals all along his body. I didn''t go easy on him. Orochimaru won''t notice this stuff too due to my advanced Fuinjutsu making my markings invisible. Even the Hiraishin mark on Sasuke.


    ¡­.


    Some time later, Shiro and then Tsunade come into my office. Shiro is in his miniature puppy form, and is just snoring at the side of the room.


    Tsunade on the other hand comes and reports something to me. "Jiraya asked me to take one Sakura Haruno under my wing."


    As she said that she sits down on the chair in front of me.  Her ample b.r.e.a.s.ts giving me a good view of her cleavage.


    But I still just sigh at this. "You can take her as a student if you want. I am not stopping you."


    Though I say that casually Tsunade narrows her eyes at me. "So she won''t ''suddenly'' die in a mission."


    "Don''t worry I won''t kill her. I am not that vain or controlling just because you got a student that I will kill her."


    "I am quite unsure about that, you could just kill her because you decided that Jiraya might be up to something by doing this."


    I just shrug at this and casually say. "Oh no it isn''t that at all. It was just Naruto begging him to try and convince you to take Sakura as your student."


    Tsunade seems a little amused when she hears this. "You just admitted to spying on very private conversations."


    "No I didn''t admit to anything like that. I just told you that I know of this."


    "And how do you know of this?"


    "By using my brain."


    "You are thirty seven years old now, but you still act like a kid sometimes."


    "Mah, you worry too much about age. When in reality it''s just a number."


    So me and Tsunade joke around for another half an hour while Shiro just gives us a glance every now and then, due to waking up from our laughters.


    But as soon as Tsuande is outside, Shiro just looks at me and says. "You wanna f.u.c.k that big titty milf you just don''t wanna admit it."


    I look at him laying on his back, he really even talks like a trashy person.


    *sigh* Sometines I wonder where did I go wrong raising this dog...


    ¡­.


    ¡­.


    One week after that and here I am, in one of my bars, except some waitresses there is no one here.  Tsunade is drinking some whisky, I am sitting next to her.


    So I just look at her as she drinks and seems sad. I understand that she must be thinking about her dead family.


    Jiraya and Naruto were allowed by me to go on their little training trip.


    -General POV-


    Yami puts a comforting arm around Tsunade. She seems surprised by this and looks at him with wide eyes, in the end she just leans on him.


    "Is this our punishment for our sins?" Asks Tsunade.


    Yami perks up at this. "No." He answers. "It isn''t a punishment, because god doesn''t exist. If he did exist, allowing things like this to happen¡­ don''t you think that he would be a cruel god then."


    Tsunde looks surprised at this. "That is a pretty depressing outlook in life that you have Yami."


    As Tsunade says that, she is no longer talking to Yami as her student or as a child. Not even as her leader. She is talking to him as a friend and someone who she can rely on.


    "Depressing but true." Says Yami. "To keep people from desperation, that is why god was created. Even of he exists, then he must be pretty afraid of his creation as he never visits."


    Tsunade smiles at this. "So god is like a deadbeat dad huh¡­"


    Yami shrugs at this. "Well¡­ he doesn''t exist. There is no proof of him. But religion does help some people keep a calm state of mind as death closes by."


    Tsunade smirks at this. "But sadly, death is a fate we will all have to accept. Even that fool Orochimaru, in his quest for immortality, he doesn''t know that in the end, everyone will die. When the sun explodes or when this world ceases to exist."


    Yami nods at this. "Yep, everyone will one day die."


    But even while he says that, on the inside he also added. ''Except me that is.''


    Tsunade stops leaning on him and looks at Yami, in his dark emotionless eyes. "We will all die and our lifes will all be unimportant in the end."


    Yami smirks but he shakes his head. "That is not exactly correct, after all-"


    But as Yami is about to continue he is stopped by Tsuande''s lips landing on his. She then withdraws and looks at Yami. "Surprised you didn''t I."


    Yami''s surprised face¡­ morps into a gentle smile, he shakes his head at this. "You are a really needy woman you know that. Sleeping with a married man."


    She smiles at this. "As if I don''t know that you have already fu*ked, your own student, your secretary, some Jonin women and even your dog walker. If you weren''t cheating with me, you would definitely be cheating with someone else."


    Yami smirks at this. "Yes and if I keep this up. My wife might become an alcoholic like you."


    Tsunde looks at his eyes as she just gets up and sits on his l.a.p facing him. "As if you care."


    Seeing the look on Tsuande''s face Yami''s smile turns malicious. "You are really evil aren''t you."


    Even though he says that, he knows the real mental state of Tsunade. He can see her flushed face and heavy panicked breathing.


    ''She is having an existential crisis. But then again¡­ I didn''t even have to try that hard to get results. Manipulating someone as mentally fickle as Tsunade is truly easy.'' Concludes Yami, Tsunade seems about to come and give him another kiss. But as he grabs her by the back of her head, pulling her for a kiss and his other hand starts exploring her body, and unbuttoning some things, while taking off some others.


    ¡­.


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    THIS STORY IS FINISHED ON PATRE¨°N...


    Check Out My P.A.T.R.E.O.N


    pa treon.com/HolyJoker


    JOIN THE DISCORD: discord.gg/M9hghrm


    P.S: Like always, you get +1 chapter for that day if the story reaches 1000 power stones.

 Chapter 210 - Kazekage Rescue Mission...

    Chapter 210


    Title: Kazekage Rescue Mission


    ¡­.


    While Yami was having an affair with Tsunade. Yoruichi was at home, just looking at her step mother who is only a few years older than her.


    Koyuki, Yami''s second wife just looks at the clock, it''s 3AM. Yoruichi cringes a little at this. They are both in the living room, Tsume and Hana have already gone to sleep. But Yoruichi is staying with Koyuki, not wanting her step mother to be alone while waiting for her father.


    In the walls of the living room there are photos of the family being all happy with each other.


    ''On the surface, our family seems like a perfect family. But under that, we are a family who is¡­ very chaotic.'' Thinks Yoruichi. She sees that Koyuki pulls out a flask and starts drinking from it.


    Yoruichi cringes at this even more. ''She drinks to forget father''s infidelity, he will sleep with another woman every night. Is this really worth it father? Ruining your family just because of your l.u.s.t.''


    As Yoruichi thinks her hands shake, she doesn''t know how to comfort her mother. She knows her father is a terrible man, lying to herself about this is useless. But Yami is still her father and the person who would burn down the world for her, she knows this much, she will never go against him. That is sure of her. But¡­ sometimes she can''t help but question her father. Going around sleeping with other women when he has a beautiful wife here back home. He even has Tsume.


    ''You are truly greedy, father, aren''t you¡­'' Yoruichi looks down at the ground, not having the face to even look at her step mother as she drinks.


    ¡­.


    Tomorrow morning, Yoruichi and her step mother had fallen asleep.


    When she opens her eyes, she looks around confused for a second but she sees that she is in her room.


    ''Oh yeah, yesterday dad worked too long and step mom was worried. So I decided to wait together with her.'' Recalls Yoruichi, "remembering" the last night.


    As she gets up, she goes back in the kitchen and there she sees Kiba messing around like always, and her father is there too. He seems to be cooking, when he sees her he just smiles. "Good morning sleepy head, sorry I was too busy yesterday and it required my personal attention so I couldn''t come back home."


    Yoruichi sees her step mom sending her father a certain look. ''Ugh¡­ so they did it last night or something. Damn it¡­ now I have images on my head of my parents having s*x.''


    ..


    Yami just looks at his family with a smile on his face. ''Well, manipulating memories with the Yamanaka technique and my own techniques has amazing results. I have a stable family because of that. Honestly though, this is quite amazing. I can cheat on my wife as much as I can, with whomever I want, it''s like in college and still come back to a happy family, what could a father wish for more.''


    As Yami contemplates stuff like this, he smells that it''s the perfect time to take out the bacon.


    "Hmmm, now that is a nice aroma." Says Yami as he divides food to each plate.


    Kiba immediately digs in. "This is amazing dad."


    Yami smiles at this. "The main ingredient is¡­ love."


    The others smile a little at this. To them, Yami is truly the perfect husband and father.


    ¡­.


    Just like this three years pass, a big number of the genin in the Konoha 12 are now chunin.


    Naruto and Jiraya return to Konoha, they don''t see any change in it. Except maybe a dozen or so skyscr.a.p.ers added.


    They go towards the Hokage''s tower, which seems to have gotten bigger. There also seems to be some new travelling methods called trains.


    "This is so cool." Exclaims Naruto, looking around and the new machines who he hasn''t seen anywhere else during his travels with Jiraiya.


    His mentor, Jiraiya on the other hand just smiles a little as he sees Naruto still act like a child even when he is fifteen now.


    "C''mon Naruto, we must go and meet the 5th Hokage, you know how he can be punctual about time like this." Says Jiraiya casually, he knows that no matter how harsh and controlling Yami is. He wouldn''t punish them harshly for just being late.


    ¡­.


    As they enter Yami''s office, they see him to be singing a stack of doc.u.ments and throwing them at one of the anbu hidden in the shadows. Who takes them and goes outside by using the window. Yami goes back to writing, not paying any attention to Naruto and Jiraiya in front of him.


    Jiraiya and Naruto seem uncomfortable at this. Not knowing how to act, so Jiraiya decides to just fake cough.


    *cough*


    Yami doesn''t stop writing, but he just says. "The Akatsuki have become more active, I want you to investigate this Jiraiya. Naruto I need you, Sakura, Kakashi to go and rescue the Kazekage Gaara, he has been kidnapped by the Akatsuki. Alaso Yamato Inuzuka, and Sai Inuzuka will be accompanying you."


    They both nod at this and immediately say. "We are ready."


    Yami nods at this. "Also Naruto, Kakashi will explain the details to you. But you will be meeting Sai and Yamato later on in the mission."


    As they exit the door and go outside. Yami stops writing and throws his paperwork towards the shadows. His face morphs into a smile, he has this perfect little scheme going on.


    ¡­.


    After some days Naruto, Kakashi and Sakura go to the land of sand. Temri was in Konoha to meet them too. As tehy see he Naruyo waves. "Yo! Temari, you are here too."


    She smiles at him and nods. "Yep, I live with my fiance now."


    Naruto''s eyes almost pop out of his head when he heard this. "W -What FIANCE!?!?!"


    "Yep, I am engaged to Kiba Inuzuka now." Says Temari, shocking Naruto even more.


    ¡­.


    After Naruto''s shock, they started traveling, Temari started explaining to them the sitution. Kiba is also already in the Sand Village and since he is already a Jonin and was sent to Hidden Sand in order to help Konoha''s ally.


    Naruto scrunched his face even more. "Kiba is a Jonin?!?!?"


    Kakshi intervenes at this by saying. "Yes, he became one at fifteen years old. He is the only one of your generation to become Jonin. It''s considered quite impressive for his age."


    ¡­.


    After a day of travelling like this Naruto tells Sakura and Temari, that he is the Nine Tails Jinchuriki. Sakura noded at this and promised herself that she would protect Naruto from the Akatsuki who is hunting there tailed beast down.


    Temari was thankful that there was finally someone who could understand Gaara. Still they continued their journey toward hidden sand.


    ¡­.


    After arriving at Sunagakure, Team Kakashi learned of the attack on Kankur¨­. Despite the failed attempt by the medics on-hand, Sakura cured Kankur¨­, thus demonstrating her skill with medical techniques. Sakura also developed several portable antidotes rather quickly.


    ¡­


    During this time team Guy was also sent as backup by  Yami.


    ¡­


    As team Guy were traveling, they met Kisame. Guy immediately goes into serious mode when he sees who it is.


    <7th Gate Open>


    Before ''Kisame'' could even react.


    *pow*


    His side was destroyed. Guy immediately said. "Let''s continue on."


    As he said that his team was completely surprised by this. When Guy saw this he just said. "I don''t think that he is the real Kisame, he is too weak to be an S Rank ninja¡­ so be careful."


    They all nod at this.


    ¡­.


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    I skipped some of the things that we already saw from the anime. Due to there being no need since you have already seen the scenes. I just explained them over all, no need to extend this journey in three chapters needlessly with only minor changes to the story. So I told you what changes happened and the story over all.


    THIS STORY IS FINISHED ON PATRE¨°N...


    pa treon.com/HolyJoker


    JOIN THE DISCORD: discord.gg/M9hghrm


    P.S: Like always, you get +1 chapter for that day if the story reaches 1000 power stones.

 Chapter 211 - Kiba... the Son Of Yami Inuzuka...

    Chapter 211


    Title: Kiba... the Son Of Yami Inuzuka...


    ¡­.


    As Guy killed ''Kisame'' the real one was in the Akatsuki hideout helping the other members to extract the one tails from Gaara. The hideout was in a dark place, with a strange statue with two giant hands in cuffs. The only members here are Sasori and Deidara, the others were all just projections.


    Kisame''s projection looks at the other members and says. "It seems like my puppet was destroyed by Konoha''s Green Beast."


    Pain looks at him and says. "It doesn''t matter, we have enough time to make the extraction process happen. Even if he came here you two don''t need to fight the Green Beast, I will reverse summon myself to your place."


    Sasori and Deidara nod, but Kisame is the one who points out something by saying. "That wouldn''t be smart, allowing the Green Beast in here you might be able to defeat him. But if the Hokage decides to use the Hiraishin, Pain¡­ you will be slaughtered by him."


    Pain looks at Kisame and shakes his head. "Yami Inuzuka might be strong¡­ but even he can''t fight against god."


    Sasori takes this time to interfere by saying. "It wouldn''t be smart to attack someone like Yami, we do need to hide from someone like him. He is the one most likely to destroy our plans, if we somehow get the power of all the tailed beasts and gain the ultimate weapon, maybe then attacking him first would be an option. I know your power Pain, but you haven''t seen Yami Inuzuka''s power, they say that he is the most powerful shinobi to ever live."


    Even Sasori''s scorpion puppet''s voice that hides his real body which has a harsh voice everyone can sense the hidden trace of fear behind the cold surface.


    Pain just looks at Sasori. "Neither do any of you know my real power¡­ but anyway, time to begin now. We must extract the One Tails."


    Kisame still seems unconvinced by this. He knows that anyone who ever wants to become a Ninja Swordsman of the Mist must learn about Yami Inuzuka and escape plans against him. Especially made for him. He is beyond dangerous and even if the Seven Swordsman are together they are to avoid a confrontation with Yami.


    They immediately start the sealing process¡­


    ¡­.


    After some time Team Guy arrives at the hideout but Nenji has his Byakugan activated and warns his team. "There is a barrier around this place, there are also four tags that seem to be the ''keys'' to it."


    Guy nods at this. "That might be a trap too, but one we will have to take. So be careful, we must save the Kazekage as fast as we can, before it''s too late."


    That is when Kakashi, Naruto, Chiyo and Sakura arrive and Guy explains to them the situation. But suddenly out of the shadow of the trees another person comes out, he is wearing an all black Jounin uniform. It is Kiba Inuzuka, he has a serious look on his face as he says. "They are currently inside the barrier, I can smell the two of them."


    Chiyo looks at Kiba and can''t help but think with a small smile on her face. ''You truly are Yami''s son, Kiba Inuzuka, I will leave Temari in your hands.''


    Kiba, Chiyo and team seven decide to go in while team Guy coordinates the extraction of the seal and while triggering any traps that might be there, because they don''t have time to slowly break the seal. So they must do this.


    ¡­.


    After this happens, Team Guy activates a seal that makes them fight clones mirroring their power. But Guy immediately recognises the seal. ''This is a seal that even Yami -sensei can''t easily make. But they must have used the cursed method of seal placing by making sacrifices. Damn this will be a little troublesome.''


    ¡­.


    But while this is happening, Kakashi, Naruto, Sakura, Chiyo and Kiba arrive at a cave where they see Gaara''s dead body lying on the ground while Deidara is sitting on it.


    Sasori is inside his scorpion/human like puppet. He looks at the people in front of him and breathes a sigh of relief. "It seems like the Green Beast isn''t here."


    Deidara smiles at this. "You worry too much Sasori. The Green Beast is no Yami, no need to piss your pants over something like this."


    "Shut up Deidara, you are stupid, also¡­ it seems like we have his son in here." Says Sasori, as he looks at Kiba.


    Deidara seems a little surprised at this, but then in the end he laughs at it. "Hahahahaha, I was surprised for a bit, but he doesn''t seem like anything special."


    Naruto on the other starts leaking red malicious chakra out of his body. He looks at Deidara sitting on Gaara''s dead body. "Get up from Gaara!"


    Deidara smiles smiles at this. "Come make me kid."


    As he says a bird made out of white clay takes Gaara''s body and flies away with Natuto immediately giving chase to him. Kakashi follows them too. "Stop! Naruto don''t act reckless."


    Kiba seems undecided by this for a split second. But in the end he decides to stay. ''Guy will help Kakashi, I need to stay here to help Sakura and Chiyo against Sasori.''


    ¡­.


    -Kiba POV-


    Looking at the S Rank ninja in front of me I can''t help but contemplate if I should go into Werewolf mode immediately. But that would be dangerous, I currently can''t keep the technique active more than twenty minutes. After that, my stamina and chakra will be drained and I will be useless in this fight¡­ this is a hard decision to make.


    I get on my fours, I can feel Akamaru on my kunai pouch, he is transformed into a kunai, in case I need it for a sneak attack.


    <Four Legged Technique>


    I can feel my eyes turn into slits as my nails lengthen and my claws become more pronounced. This will be the first time I will be fighting an S Rank ninja seriously. I will need to see the distance between me and him first¡­


    *fwosh*


    I move at extreme speeds as the ground below me cracks. I doubt that someone like Sakura can even follow my movements anymore as I form my hand into a claw and tun chakra through it, giving it like the form of a claw.


    I see that Sasori doesn''t seem to react to me as his eyes don''t follow me at all. I immedia go for the guy''s neck¡­


    *clank*


    But I see that it is somehow clocked by a wooden construct that looks like some type of scorpion tail.


    Immediately I go under it and ho for his neck. He turns to face me and I can see that he opens his mouth.


    Immediately I can hear some type of mechanism shooting something at me. I can barely dodge sideways and not get hit when.


    *crack*


    I hear wood cracking and see that Sakura has stoped the wooden scorpian tail from attacking me. Chiyo immediately yells at me. "Be careful brat, don''t try to take him on your own."


    I nod at this and jump back. I tried to see if a surprise attack might work, but it seems like that wasn''t the case. Well it doesn''t matter, I simply need to keep attacking him until I can read his rhythm. His most dangerous weapon should be his poison, but dad already made sure that I am immune to tens of thousands of poisons. I trust in dad that this poison won''t work on me too, I mean someone like Sakura can make an antidote against this, I definitely know that dad can do something 100x better than it.


    "It seems like I will have to come out and fight you for real now." Says Sasori, as his ''body'' breaks appart. Revealing a young, redheaded man. He gives Chiyo and Sakura a glance but his eyes stare at me. "You know, if it was your father at your age, I wouldn''t dare to approach him at all. He was terrifying, I could count the ninja that would have the courage to do so in one hand, but even then, I would have some fingers leftover."


    I keep a calm face when he says this. I know what he is doing. He is trying to rile me up or something like that. Sadly for him, I know better than to fall for petty tricks like this.


    *fwosh*


    I immediately rush him again, maybe I can destroy him this time. As I approach him, he looks at me and smiles.


    "Bad move little dog." I can hear Sasori say ad suddenly a puppet comes from underground, it has shoulder length spiky dark blue hair¡­ suddenly out of the ground I feel something grab into my leg. Stopping me from advancing at all.


    What!!! How can he do that, only close members of the Kazekage''s family can. Suddenly I am all surrounded by Iron Sand and I can feel it coming at me to squish me to death.


    ¡­..


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    As we see Yami is someone that almost everyone is scared of. They know that someone like him is dangerous and Orochimaru was in the Akatsuki so he told them of Yami and how dangerous he can be. Also some of them have their own personal experiences with Yami''s influence and power¡­ like Itachi¡­ whose Clan¡­ you know...


    P.S: Like always, you get +1 chapter for that day if the story reaches 1000 power stones.


    THIS STORY IS FINISHED ON PATRE¨°N...


    Check Out My P.A.T.R.E.O.N


    pa treon.com/HolyJoker


    JOIN THE DISCORD: discord.gg/M9hghrm

 Chapter 212 - Sasori of the Red Sand...

    Chapter 212


    Title: Sasori of the Red Sand... (BONUS CHAPTER)


    ¡­.


    -Kiba POV-


    I can feel my body starting to get crushed by  the iron sand. Immediately chakra runs through my body and I am covered in black markings all over my body, only activating stage one of the <Werewolf Mode>.


    *boom*


    I easily break through the Iron Sand and try to immediately go on attack, I see that Sasori is frowning when I do that. So he isn''t panicking at all, then a direct attack on his body would most likely be useless just like the previous times¡­ so¡­


    *fwosh*


    I go for his arm and rip it off. But I immediately feel something weird, the arm is¡­ I look down at it¡­ sh*t, is his whole body a puppet.


    I see that his hand drops off and a hidden knife appears from the arm that I ripped off, and the blade comes towards my head. I immediately jump back with a frown on my face.


    I give Chiyo a side glance and see that she and Sakura are fighting the puppet who seems to be able to somehow have the Kekkei Genkai for Iron Sand control.


    Sasori is fighting all three of us without high difficulty¡­ even if I win like this¡­ can this be called a true win. I know that as I am right now, I can''t defeat someone like Sasori head on. But¡­ I will never lose!


    Not to someone like Sasori, nor to anyone else. I can''t lose, once I lose I will never be able to stop losing, dad always said that and he has never lost. I want to be just like my father, so I too¡­ WILL NEVER LOSE!!!!


    My curse mark enters stage two¡­


    <Inuzuka Jutsu: Werewolf Mode>


    Immediately I can feel my senses sharpen and an instinctual rise, but I easily suppress both of them.


    I look at the S Rank Ninja in front of me¡­ I can instinctively feel it. This is not enough. I need MORE!!!


    *bark*


    I stop as I hear Akamaru. I look at him and see the worried look on his face. I smile at this. "Don''t worry Akamaru, I will never lose."


    He barks one more time. I stop for a split second and answer to him. "You are right Akamaru, you are my ninken¡­ so help me never lose."


    <Beast Man Transformation: Giant¡­>


    I am surrounded by a huge cloud of smoke and my senses go into overdrive. I can feel my senses starting to slip away¡­ NO!! I will control this power perfectly.


    <Giant Werewolf Mode>


    ¡­.


    -General POV-


    Sasori''s eyes widen at the¡­ thing in front of him. He immediately starts to summon his army of puppet but¡­


    He feels a huge gust of wind behind him, which pushes his hair up. He hears a creepy voice behind him say. "I will win. ORA!"


    He punches Sasori and before he can react he is plummeted into the ground breaking his body to pieces. But Kiba''s attacks don''t stop. "Ora!Ora!Ora!Ora!Ora!Ora!."


    *BOOOM*


    Creating a giant crater below him¡­ Chiyo and Sakura look at this, surprised at Kiba''s and his attitude.


    ..


    But it doesn''t take long as ten seconds later.


    *poof*


    The giant Werewolf mode is dispelled and Kiba together with Akamaru are in the ground. Kiba is almost unconscious just like his ninken, but before he slips into unconsciousness due to chakra exhaustion he puts his hand up. "I¡­-I won."


    And he immediately slips into unconsciousness.


    "Yes, you did." Says a voice belonging to neither Sakura or Chiyo. They look and see the head of Sasori, it has cracks all around and it seems all broken. "It seems like I was defeated¡­ that kid is truly something isn''t he."


    Chiyo takes this time to get close to him and she looks at her grandson with a sad look in her eyes. "Sasori¡­"


    Though Sasori can''t see anything anymore and this is only a piece of his resident chakra talking through the head. As his weak point is already destroyed by Kiba''s rampage.


    "Don''t worry grandma Chiyo." Says Sasori. "I have already made my choice."


    He then ''looks'' at the sky as he thinks of his parents. "Though I never planned on dying this way¡­"


    Chiyo doesn''t say anything as she uses her chakra strings to manipulate the two puppets who look like Sasori''s parents¡­ they go and hug Sasori''s head. When he feels that his face morphs into a smile. "Tell the kid that he has a long way before he can even look at his father''s shadow."


    Chiyo looks down sadly. But Sasori can''t see this so he just says. "By the way, I heard that you are looking for Orochimaru. I have a trade meeting with him in Tenchi Bridge in the Land of Grass."


    His chakra starts leaking away until it all of his chakra dissipates, but not before he whispers. "Can you believe it the guy didn''t even dare enter the Land of Fire¡­"


    ¡­.


    During the time of the fight with Sasori, Naruto and Kakashi were chasing after Deidara. Kakashi activated his own version of the Mangeky¨­ Sharingan and aimed to use it to take Deidara''s head. However, it was difficult to aim, and all he managed to remove was his arm. Deidara tried to retreat, but Naruto destroyed his clay bird with Rasengan and retrieved Gaara''s body.


    Enraged and powered by the Nine Tail''s


    powers, Naruto seemed to be defeating Deidara with Rasengan, but it turned out to be a Clay Clone. Still enraged, Naruto started to appear feral as he transformed into his two-tailed form. Kakashi recognised the bad sign and used a seal tag he had received from Jiraiya to stop the transformation from proceeding any further. Naruto subsequently reverted back to his normal form.


    As the rest of Team Kakashi and Team Guy caught up with Naruto and Kakashi, Deidara found himself unable to escape. He swallowed some clay, turning himself into a human bomb.


    Neji sees this and tells everyone to get away. Deidara then swelled up and detonated. As the dust settled, Kakashi collapsed from exhaustion, explaining that he used his Mangeky¨­ Sharingan to send the explosion to another dimension. With Naruto carrying Gaara''s body, the two teams headed back to Sunagakure.


    ¡­.


    ¡­.


    Stopping in a grassy field near the village, Sakura checked on Gaara and pronounced him dead, making Naruto very upset. Chiyo moved towards Gaara and tried to use her reincarnation technique, but didn''t have enough life force left to bring Gaara back to life. Naruto gladly lent his own chakra, and Chiyo was able to revive Gaara at the cost of her own life while the shinobi of Suna watched.


    While this happens Kiba is still unconscious due to his extreme chakra exhaustion.


    ¡­.


    But during this time at the battlefield where ''Deidara'' suicide exploded himself. The ground moves a little and someone comes out from underground.


    Suddenly out of the trees two people wearing Akatsuki clothing appear. One of them is wearing a spiral orange mask with the only opening in one eye of the mask, this is Tobi. The other seems like he is half fused with the tree and half of it seems like made out of darkness while the other half is pale. This is Zetsu.


    Tobi looks at Deidara''s pitiful state and he cheerfully says. "Yo! I am Tobi. So you were pitifully defeated huh¡­"


    Deidara seems annoyed at this. "Who the hell are you bastard."


    "He is your new partner." Says Zetsu.


    "Yep! It is I, the most powerful ninja¡­ Tobi."


    Deidara frowns at this. "I don''t need this clown as my partner."


    Zetsu just melts into the tree. "Sure, solve this amongst yourselves. Just do it quick or Yami Inuzuka will flood this place with his mosquitoes and you will both be dead then."


    *tch* Deidara is annoyed but he still listens to Zetsu and starts walking away.


    "Ohhh¡­ Deidara -sempai¡­ you don''t have any arms, I just noticed. Wow, you really got beat up like a weakling."


    A tick mark appears on Deidara''s forehead. "Why you!!!"


    ¡­..


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    Orochimaru already told the Akatsuki about Yami''s spy network and different spy methods. Also everyone is cautious of Yami as it can be seen.


    P.S: When Kiba fought Sasori he had no information on Sasori. So he went clueless in the fights, except knowing that he was a good puppeteer. That is why several times he was surprised by Sasori''s abilities.


    P.P.S: Orochimaru and the Akatsuki don''t have a bad relationship, even though Orochimaru left the Organization and still keeps his Akatsuki ring around. They have the same bigger enemy¡­ Yami. This is a change from canon, because of Yami''s presence, and even though he tries to stop too many deviations, Yami still couldn''t control everything.


    Like always, you get +1 chapter for that day if the story reaches 2000 power stones.

 Chapter 213 - Tenchi Bridge Battle...

    Chapter 213


    Title: Tenchi Bridge Battle...


    ¡­.


    -Yami POV-


    I smile as I see that Kiba has finally reached his potential. The giant Werewolf Mode is something that none of the Inuzuka Elite Jonin have been able to do yet. If they were able to do that and hold the technique for some time that immediately puts them in the S Class Power.


    My son, you have come quite far, at the age of fifteen (soon to be sixteen) you have defeated an S Rank ninja. You are quite ahead of everyone in your age group, but sadly you will be surpassed by Naruto and Sasuke soon. I can''t allow you to grow to their level son, you are my child and I care about you Kiba. But sadly you have a paranoid father like me, so you will never grow at their level. But at least you aren''t a loser yet, so don''t worry son...


    ¡­.


    Eighteen hours later, Naruto and Sakura are in front of me.


    "Orochimaru will appear at Tenichi Bridge. We want the chance to¡­ try the Sasuke retrieval Hokage -sama." Says Naruto with a respectful tone in his voice, he also has a nervous look on his face. Even Sakura seems to be nervous.


    I look at them with a serious look on my face. I will let them leave and do that, but I want to make it seem like this is the last time they can pull this bullsh*t. In all honesty, they can do it as much as they want. Currently¡­ the Hokage position is no longer that beneficial to me. I could have the same results if I put someone who has my best interests in their mind, so I am planning to do that soon.


    I worked hard for the Hokage position, raising my political power and all that. But the time has come for me to leave this behind, of course I will only do this at a later date. Once the 4th Ninja War is over. That is the best time when I can try and dedicate all of my time in research and a way to true Omnipotence and Omnipresence.


    In the end I just say to Sakura and Naruto with a harsh tone. "This is the last time I will allow a capture, the next time you meet him¡­ I need you to go for the kill."


    I see them shudder a little when they hear me say that, but he knows better than to refute me to my face.


    "Also you two will have two new teammates, because Kakashi is unavailable due to using the Mangekyo Sharingan against Deidara, and Kiba is in Chakra Exhaustion. Your new teammates will meet you tomorrow, they are Yamato and Sai, two Jonin. One of them can also handle Naruto if he decides to become troublesome if he uses the Nine Tails Chakra."


    Naruto looks down in shame when he hears me say that. He knows that he must get a control over his chakra or else he will only be a bother to everyone of his teammates and hold them down.


    ¡­.


    Tomorrow early morning, Naruto and Sakura are at Konoha''s East Gate. After all, even though Konoha now is a big city with Skywalkers, it''s still surrounded by a wall and a barrier.


    "I wonder who our new teammates will be." Wonders Naruto aloud.


    That is when in a shunshin two figures appear. They are both wearing Jonin uniforms, one of them is a pale guy around Naruto''s age, the other seems like a man around his twenties with a slight tan and spiky brown hair. They are Sai and Yamato.


    Yamato looks at them and nods with a small smile on his face. "Hello Yamato Inuzuka here. I am your new squad leader. This guy next to me is Sai Inuzuka, another Konoha Jonin."


    Sai smiles and waves at them. "Yo! I heard a lot about you from Kiba."


    Naruto and Sakura smile respectfully too. "Nice to meet you, Yamato, Sai."


    Yamato''s smile brightens at this. "Well, okay now guys, time to go and fight Orochimaru."


    "Don''t worry we will kick his as? and bring Sasuke back to Konoha." Says Sai, encouraging Naruto. "Though we might have to kick his as? a little too. Hahahaha¡­"


    Naruto smiles at this, to him it seems like Yamato and Sai are both good guys who seemed hopeful at getting Sasuke back.


    Yamato then pulls out two pills and gives them each to Sakura and Naruto. "There are some tree seeds that will allow me to track you in case we get separated while looking for Sasuke. Sai has already eaten one like that. Don''t worry this will be digested in 72 hours so I won''t be able to track you forever."


    Naruto and Sakura nod at this. Tomorrow they will possibly fight Orochimaru, they must be prepared in every way and they know that.


    ¡­.


    Ten hours later and they are still travelling at top speeds.


    ¡­.


    Two hours later and they are close enough to the meeting place for tomorrow. They set up camp, as they take turns being the lookout. When it''s Naruto''s turn, Sai wakes up and sits next to Naruto. The latter doesn''t say anything, they just stay in comfortable silence. Until Sai says. "You know¡­ I don''t know how you feel. But I too have a brother. If he did something like Sasuke did, I too would be willing to do anything to get him back."


    He then nudges Naruto''s shoulder and says again. "So don''t worry, we will do everything within our powers to get Sasuke back."


    Naruto nods at this absentmindedly. "Thanks¡­ Sai."


    Sai just smiles and goes back to sleep again.


    ¡­.


    *fwosh*


    That is when Orochimaru appears on the other side of the bridge. He has a smile on his face as he looks at the person in front of him. "Hmmm¡­ so Yami isn''t here personally is he?"


    Immediately Yamato understood that he had already been found out. Immediately Naruto, Sakura and Sai appear next to him.


    Orochimaru''s smirk widens even more when he sees this. "Did Yami send you guys to your death or something like this. I mean he is smart enough to know that you can''t defeat me in any way. Or maybe he will use Hiraishin to teleport here?"


    Yamato looks a little nervous at this on the inside. Though he is an S Rank Ninja in his own right. Even he isn''t sure if he can win against someone tricky like Orochimaru.


    Orochimaru looks at Naruto who has started leaking a little red chakra.


    "Hmmm¡­ I wonder who is stronger? You or Sasuke." Says Orochimaru as he mocks Naruto. The latter immediately roars out loud.


    *ROOOOAR*


    With that simple roar, he blows Orochimaru away. Yamato gives Naruto a side glance and contemplates. ''If I let him weaken Orochimaru¡­  then I can use my wood style to easily suppress him, my wood style being a direct counter against him. But Orochimaru has no way to deal with Naruto¡­''


    When Naruto sees this he immediately goes into the three tails state. Chasing after Orochimaru and clawing at his face.


    *BOOOM*


    Orochimaru is slapped away through the forest. His body rummaging through trees. Naruto immediately goes to chase after him, breaking the bridge they were standing on at the same time.


    Yamato sees that they are about to fall so he grabs both Sai and Sakura while he lumos away.


    Sakura has a mortified look on her face.


    While Sai looks a little nervous at this, he glances at Yamato and says. "Will we even be able to handle Naruto?"


    Yamato nods confidently at this. "Don''t worry, as long as he doesn''t go at the six tails form, I can safely purge the nine tails chakra out of him."


    Sai nods at this. "Then I will go to the hideout and look for Sasuke."


    Sakura seems confused at this. "What?"


    "We know of one of Orochimaru''s hidden close by. If he is here it means that there is a high chance Sasuke is there too." Answers Yamato.


    Sakura looks amazed at this. "Sai, let me come with you."


    Sai shakes his head at this. "I am specialized in stealth and you are not. I can go in stealthily and find Sasuke safely. Sorry Sakura but I will have to go alone, it''s safer this way."


    Sai says that and pulls out a scroll, drawing a bird on it. The bird comes to life and Sai climbs up on his back flying away.


    Sakura just looks at this, her eyes filled with sadness. Yamato brings her out of her daydreaming by saying. "Sakura, let''s go, we need to help Naruto against Orochimaru."


    ¡­..


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    As if can be seen, Sai and Yamato are different from how they were during canon. Yamato is an A Rank ninja and Sai is a Jonin and at the same time is a cheerful person, his brother is also alive.


    THIS STORY IS FINISHED ON PATRE¨°N...


    Check Out My P.A.T.R.E.O.N


    JOIN THE DISCORD: discord.gg/M9hghrm

 Chapter 214 - Orochimaru vs...

    Chapter 214


    Title: Orochimaru vs...


    ¡­.


    Immediately as Sai flies towards Orochimaru''s hideout, Yamato looks at Sakura and says. "Stay here, don''t approach the dangerous situation, I will look for an opening to take out Orochimaru while he is fighting Naruto."


    She wants to refuse this, after all to her it seems like they are using Naruto like a weapon and beast, not like a human. But she thinks back on how this will help them save Sasuke so in the end she didn''t say anything.


    ¡­.


    On the other hand, in the battle between Orochimaru and Naruto. The latter has already gone into four tails chakra mode. His skin is being burned by the chakra, while at the same time regenerating, creating a constant process of healing and injury. This increases cell division in order to activate the healing so by doing this Naruto is constantly losing lifespan.


    Orochimaru sees this and smiles. Someone like him knows perfectly well how a Tailed Beast cloak  works when someone doesn''t have control over it. Suddenly out of Naruto''s body, countless dark and light balls of condensed chakra are released. Confusing Orochimaru at why he is doing this.


    ''Is he going to create a tailed beast bomb or is each of these chakra balls a miniature beast bomb. If it''s the latter it won''t really be a threat to me¡­ as expected, the nine tails Jinchuriki has turned into a beast with no logical fighting skills.'' Thinks Orochimaru as he sees that Naruto in his tailed beast cloak pointed his tails toward his mouth, gathering the chakra balls that he spewed out from his body.


    ''So he is creating a tailed beast bomb¡­ while it seems like this is an inferior way of creating one. The 4th Mizukage, Yagura. He can create a tailed beast bomb in seconds.'' Calculates Orochimaru, and he sees that the chakra is concentrated so much that it causes a crater to appear around Naruto.


    When he sees it, he immediately comes to the conclusion that the nine tails beast bomb is much stronger than the three tails and even he can sense that the Triple Rashomon wouldn''t be able to stop the bomb, but only redirect it.


    So he waves through some handsigns and clasps his hands on the ground.


    <Edo Tensei>


    Slowly out of the ground two coffins appear, they have the numbers 1 and 2 written on them.


    "Let''s see how you deal with Wood Style, Naruto -kun." Says Orochimaru with a creepy voice. This enrages Naruto in the four tails Jinchuriki cloak, so he immediately throws the tailed beast bomb towards Orochimaru, who still has a smirk on his face as the two coffins are about to open.


    But before they can open, wood comes out of the ground, sealing the coffins shut. Yamato, who was quite a distance away smirks at this.


    Orochimaru''s eyes widened at this as he saw the tailed beast bomb heading toward him. He knew that he didn''t have time to wave more than five handsigns. Before he can even think of what Jutsu to use his body already has started waving through the handsigns.


    <Summoning Jutsu>


    *pooof*


    He put half of his chakra into the jutsu and his body is surrounded by dozens of giant snakes, slithering around him in a protective way.


    *BOOOOOOM*


    Orochimaru could feel the heat of the explosion, and in one second that the snakes bought him he waves some more handsigns and..


    <Reverse Summoning Jutsu>


    *poof*


    He disappears in a puff of smoke,  but he still wasn''t quite fast enough as reverse summoning is slower than summoning so the right part of his body was completely obliterated.


    ¡­.


    Yamato frowns at this as he feels Orochimaru going away. *tch* "Seems like I couldn''t kill him, even when I waited for the right moment."


    He then looks at Naruto and sees him rampaging around. "Well, time for you to go to sleep Naruto."


    He goes through a couple handsigns and giant wood hands appear below Naruto.


    Squishing his body, making him unable to move. Yamato immediately appeared next to him, and even as Naruto cracked the wood and was about to break through Yamato clasped his hands together and trees started growing around the giant hands that clasp Naruto''s four tailed form, as the nine tails chakra was being drained. Then Yamato does a few more handsigns and the kanji for "sit" appears on his hand.


    <Hokage-Style Sixty-Year-Old Technique ¡ª Kakuan Entering Society with Bliss-Bringing Hands>


    He then touches Naruto''s forehead and jumps back, a line of chakra connecting his hand and Naruto as the latter''s Jinchuriki chakra is slowly suppressed.


    *ROOOAAAARRR*


    And the roars slowly turned into Naruto''s scream. When Yamato sees Naruto with his burned skin fall on the ground he winces a little and makes a wood clone to go and call over Sakura so she can heal him.


    "Damn¡­ this is quite tiring." Yamto complains out loud.


    ¡­.


    While during the same time Sai had found Orochimaru''s hideout and as soon as he entered it. He opens his giant scroll and instantly draws dozens of snakes who become animate creatures. They immediately go through the different tunnels, searching for Sasuke.


    ¡­.


    *booom*


    An explosion is heard by him, he immediately goes of where the sound came from.


    ..


    When he reaches the place, it was just a scorched room with some black ink on the ground.


    ''So one of my snakes found someone, possibly Sasuke, and that person attacked immediately.'' Thinks Sai as he comes to his own logical conclusion. ''It seems like he in no longer here.''


    He turns around, but as soon as he does so he comes in comtact with a pair of Sharingan looking straight to his eyes.


    <Sharingan: Genjutsu>


    ''S -Sh*t¡­'' Is Sai''s last though as his eyes got dull and he plummeted to the ground, unconscious, falling under a genjutsu.


    Sasuke comes out of the shadows and frowns when he sees the Konoha headband on Sai. ''So they have discovered this hiding place too.'' Comtemplates Sasuke as he starts walking away.


    On Yamato''s side, Naruto has woken up and he was a little tired after being healed by Sakura. But they immediately started going towards Orochimaru''s base.


    "Sai is already there searching for Sasuke." Informs Yamato. "I can sense from the tree seed in his stomach that he is still alive and well so no need to worry about him."


    Naruto takes this moment to apologize by saying. "Sorry Yamato -sensei, I only became a bother and didn''t help with anything during this whole mission."


    Yamato smiles at this and looks at him. "Naruto, don''t worry about such small things, is Konoha ninja always look out for each other no matter what. So don''t stress about such a small matter. Plus the Hokage did send me specifically for in case something like that happens. My wood style can supress your tailed beast chakra so don''t worry."


    ¡­.


    After some time they arrived at the entrance of Orochimaru''s hideout, which was just a temple which seems to go underground.


    As they walk down the stairs, Yamto signals Naruto and Sakura to be cautious, there might be traps around here.


    .


    When they arrive at the botom of the stairs they are in a dark lit tunnel, with only sme cadles at the side of the walls as the only source of light. Yamato crouched down and put a finger on the ground, sending a chakra wave with it. Sensing the surroundings all around them, this is the sensory technique used by the 2nd Hokage so it had a very wide range, easily encompassing the whole underground hideout.


    Yamato frons for a second and starts running forward.  "Sai is on the ground, he might be injured or in critical condition."


    Immediately Naruto and Sakura follow begind him with haste. Worried that Sai might have gotten injured.


    ''Sai, you better not be dead. Yami doesn''t allow any Inuzuka to die without his permission.'' Thinks Yamato worriedly.


    ¡­.


    When they arrive at Sai''s location, they see that he is on the ground unharmed, making them release a breath of relief. Yamato notices that he has only been put under a genjutsu.


    He breaks him out and Sai immediately opens his eyes and says. "It was Sasuke, I know here he is going. I put some tracking ink on him as I was about to fall into unconsciousness."


    Naruto seems conflicted at this. "So.. Sasuke was the one who put you under the genjutsu."


    Sai nods at this. "Yes, but don''t worry I was only caught by surprise, it won''t happen again. This time we can beat his as? and bring him back to Konoha." Says Sai in order to cheer up Naruto and not let his guilt get in the way when the battle comes.


    Immediately Sai starts chasing after where he sensed that Sasuke was. The others all followed him from behind.


    ¡­.


    Two minutes later and they reach an open ground and can see the sky, they look around and see that they are inside of a crater.


    Naruto''s eyes land on someone in front of him. Someone that he hasn''t seen in a long time.


    ¡­.


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    Orochimaru still has his hands so he can use Edo Tensei and the bunch of other Jutsu that he wasn''t able to do during this time during Canin timeline.


    THIS STORY IS FINISHED ON PATRE¨°N...


    Check Out My P.A.T.R.E.O.N


    pa treon.com/HolyJoker


    JOIN THE DISCORD: discord.gg/M9hghrm

 Chapter 215 - Akatsuki Suppression...

    Chapter 215


    Title: Akatsuki Suppression...


    ¡­.


    As Naruto and Sakura see Sasuke standing on top of the crater and looking down at them. They can''t help but feel overjoyed.


    "S -Sasuke¡­" Whispers Sakura to herself as a tear rolls down her face.


    Naruto on the other hand is more aggressive in his approach as he screams at Sasuke. "Sasuke!! That day when I was knocked out¡­ why didn''t you try to kill me? Is this the way that you separate bonds?"


    When Sasuke hears that he has no reaction to it. But on the inside, he wines at the memory. He remembers how Shiro almost killed him and if it wasn''t for Orochimaru sending a snake to bring Sasuke back he would have died that day. But he is too proud to admit that. So in the end he just says. "I have my own reasons¡­"


    *fwosh*


    He appears right next to Naruto and he puts his arm in front of his throat and as he pulls out his sword he says. "But today, on a whim have decided to kill you."


    *fwosh*


    Sai appears and grabs Sasuke''s hand.


    "Time for round two." Says Sai as he takes a deep breath and¡­


    *pwish*


    Spews out black ink towards Sasuke at point blank range. But Sasuke immediately jumps back and cuts the wave of ink in half, he frowns when suddenly.


    Wood comes from underground.


    <Wood Style: Wood Dome Jutsu>


    Immediately a dome of wood locks Sasuke inside and he has to run chakra through his blade and jump out but immediately hundreds of vines appear from the ground and chase after him.


    <Fire Style: Great Inferno>


    Orochimaru appears next to Sasuke, who is generating chakra into the air and his hand has a huge concentration of chakta. But Orochimaru appears next to him and catches Sasuke''s hand. "This is not the time to do this, Yami''s Anbu are nearby."


    Sasuke calmly nods calmly at this and disappears together with Orochimaru in a shunshin.


    Yamato sees that a lot of smoke has appeared around them. He waves through some handsigns and...


    <Water Style: Great Waterfall>


    He spews a huge amount of water out of his mouth and gets rid of the fires. Sai on the other hand frowns at this. "It seems like this mission is a failure."


    ¡­..


    On the other hand in Konoha, Yami has a frown on his face. He recently hasn''t been able to track some of Akatsuki''s members movements, that is Obito and Zetsu, he has always had problems tracking the latter. But he has always had an eye on Obito, but now that he has joined Deidara as Tobi, he has changed¡­ they are flying as a method of travel and killing any bug that got too close to them. He can obviously tell their location, but to someone like Yami who would like to know everything about everyone he doesn''t like not knowing something.


    Currently Obito and Deidara are fighting the three tails, so he finally gets up from his Hokage''s seat like it was a throne and made a clone temporarily replace him.


    ''It seems like I myself must act.'' Thinks Yami as he sighs a little at this.


    <Kamui>


    His body disappears in a spiral space ripple.


    ¡­..


    At this time Didara sees Tobi messing around by swimming next to the Three Tails. Deidara throws some C4 clay bombs to knock out the four tails and that is when suddenly a space ripple appears in front of him and his eyes widened as..


    *fwosh*


    A hand with unimaginable speed grabs his throat as another spacial hole appears and a strange looking sharingan appears out of it.


    <Kotoamatsukami>


    Suddenly Deidara''s eyes go dull for a split second and the person who attacked him disappears as soon as he came. Deidara finally comes to his senses.


    He looks around strangely and thinks. ''Right, I should report to Yami about the recent events.''


    Yami returns back to Konoha and dispels his clone sitting back on the Hokage chair as if it was a throne.


    ''Now I feel comfortable again.'' Thinks Yami as a relieved smile appears on his face.


    ¡­.


    Two weeks later news of the two and three tails getting captured by the Akatsuki appears and Yami decides to make an Akatsuki suppression mission. Giving it to Asuma and his team. He looks as they are in his office and sees Choji, Ino and Shikamaru who are already Chunin.


    He looks at Auma, who has a serious look on his face as he reads his S Rank mission. In the end he just nods. "Hokage¡­ no Yami -sensei, how hard do you think this mission is."


    Yami smiles and says. "Well it''s actually more like three S Rank missions in one. But I have absolute trust in you Asuma. Why do you want to leave it to someone else?"


    Asume smiles back. "No way, these bastards recently just killed one of my friends. I couldn''t wait to get a mission like this."


    A dense chakra comes out of Asuma, making it seem windy even though they are inside. His team looks at him surprised, they have never seen their teacher enraged  before. He is usually nice and kinda soft.


    ¡­.


    <Wind Style: Great Breakthrough>


    *BOOOM*


    A giant gust of wind came towards them, Kakuzu dodged to the side but Hidan was thrown up by the wind.


    Suddenly like a shadow Asuma with a cold look in his eyes appears behind Hidan and he has a kunai in his hand as..


    *fwish*


    He decapitated Hidan, and Asuma then uses his body as a foothold to jump towards Kakuzu. His kunai is coated in wind chakra as he goes towards Kakuzu like a wild beast.


    But the latter waves through some handsigns.


    <Fire Style: Fireball>


    Throwing a giant fireball towards Asuma who smiles at this as he is consumed by the fire.


    *swish*


    Asume stabs Kakuzu in the back, and he falls on the ground.


    Asuma''s eyes widen as he feels someone behind him, he jumps forward as he sees that the one that he decapitated is now up and running with only some dark stitches around his throat. He is a little surprised at this but he immediately calms down and looks at Kakuzu lying on the ground.


    ''It would be safe to assume that that guy isn''t dead then.'' Thinks Aluma he then sighs a little and screams. "SHIKAMARU NOW."


    Suddenly two shadow tendrils come towards Hidan and Kakuzu locking them in place.


    Asuma winces at this. "I hate using this Jutsu but whatever, the best time to use it is now."


    As he says that, he summons a rasengan in his hand. He then infuses a huge amount of wind chakra in it. Then the technique takes the form of a giant wind shrunken making a wind cutting noise and throws it to the now restrained Akatsuki who had no time to dodge at all.


    <<RASENSHURIKEN>>


    *Booom*


    The two of them are shredded to bits and Asuma starts breathing heavily as soon as he throws the technique. But he still looks at them as they get shredded to pieces.


    "Ino, do you sense them?" Calls out Asuma loudly.


    "No." Answers a voice from inside a tree.


    Asuma nods and he makes an earth clone and as the Rasenshuriken settles down he checks them and the clone nods at him. Immediately he uses a fire Jutsu, burning the bodies, just like Yami had ordered him.


    Suddenly out of three, Ino, Shikamaru and Choji come out. They are all surprised at his quickly Asuma took out two S Rank ninja. He even made it look easy.


    "Wow¡­ you are so strong Asuma -sensei!" Exclaims Choji in surprise.


    Asuma looks at them in annoyance. "What, did you assume that I was a weak jonin or something?"


    Ino smiles at this and uncomfortably says. "Well¡­ you spend most of your time playing Shogi with Shikamaru sooo¡­"


    An angry tick mark appears on Asuma''s forehead. "What the hell! You brats, we will have triple training today¡­"


    ¡­.


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    Asuma is way stronger than he was during the canon timeline. Also as we see he has a little of Yami''s fighting style, to strike at the best opportunity.


    P.S: We also see that whe Yami decides to act, nothing can stop him as he now has another informant from inside the Akatsuki.

 Chapter 216 - Kotoamatsukami...

    Chapter 216


    Title: Kotoamatsukami...


    ¡­.


    During the end of November, in one of Orochimaru''s bases, a sixteen-year-old Sasuke is in deep meditation, wondering about a decision that he should make lately.


    He knows that soon Orochimaru will try to take over his body. In no way he will accept that, so he can either escape Orochimaru or kill him.


    But what he doesn''t notice is the space behind him crack behind him and a hand appears and grabs his head.


    His eyes widen and he attempts to go for his sword, but before he can do anything of the sort. His eyes go dull for a split second and the hand retreats back into the space crack and it disappears as if it never happened to begin with.


    When Sasuke comes back to his senses, he frowns a little and thinks. ''If I can''t defeat someone like Orochimaru, how can I ever hope to kill Itachi.''


    In Konoha Yami looks at the man in front of him, Jiraiya is in Yami''s office. He is sitting in front of Yami, with his posture completely relaxed.


    "I need you to go to that suicide mission I told you about." Says Yami, calmly and leaving no room for discussion.


    Jiraiya doesn''t seem startled about this, he just sighs in resignation. His eyes are empty as he looks Yami on the eyes. "Yami¡­ can I ask you something?"


    Yami nods when he hears this. "Yeah, sure, I don''t see why not."


    Jiraya interlocks his finger and winces a little when he sees his missing pinky finger that was cut off by him in order to appease Yami.


    "Yami¡­ why does someone like you get everything in life. You have Tsunade in one arm and other women in the other. During my whole life, I have been the best man I could be. I tried to fix the world however little I could. Tell me¡­ why?... why does someone as terrible as you get everything I ever wanted."


    Jirays clenches his fingers. "I hate it¡­ I am so jealous of you. Your power, women, money, and¡­ Tsunade. Why? Why does someone like you get to live happily?"


    Jiraiya speaks his heart out to Yami. Expressing his envy towards Yami and his lifestyle. His clan and his fame.


    Yami on the other hand listened to this with a calm look on his face. He could definitely see where Jiraiya was coming from. He didn''t say anything when he was called evil by Jiraiya straight to his face. Because even though Yami doesn''t see himself as evil, he knows that he has done and continues to do horrible things for his own benefits.


    He doesn''t hate anyone that he has killed because at first hating a dead person is stupid to him. And second, he doesn''t lie to himself in order to console himself, yes he is mostly killing killers (except some innocent children and clans). But even then they too are people and he has accepted that he doesn''t have the illusion of being a good person.


    In the end, Yami thinks for a second on what to say to Jiraiya, in the end, he just says. "I am not saying that you doing good actions has anything to do with it. Nor do my so-called evil actions have to do anything with this. It''s just simple, I am powerful, that is all that there is to it. Power is just power, I have everything because of it. If you have power but don''t have something else, then that means that you just don''t have enough power. Does that answer your question?"


    Jiraiya looks at Yami wide eyes full of shock¡­ in the end, he smiles a little and sighs. "I see¡­"


    He then gets up and walks away, Yami smiles at this as he sees Jiraiya''s back.


    ''It seems like quite some people must disappear from Konoha''s history.'' Thinks Yami, he has already manipulated the books by educating the children that Yami is the best Hokage. The a.d.u.l.ts already see the improvements that Yami has made so they don''t need to be convinced. This whole generation of people in the Land of Fire is in Yami''s palm.


    ¡­.


    ¡­.


    Weeks later, the news of Jiraiya''s death comes. Naruto is devastated by this, and his recent failure,...


    ¡­


    Month''s later, the news of Sasuke killing Orochimaru came soon after that news of him killing Deidara and Itachi Uchiha. He still hadn''t returned to Konoha¡­


    When the news of Sasuke joining Akatsuki became public. Naruto fell to the pit of despair and was instructed by Yami to go and train some more in Mount Myoboku with the Toad Sage.


    During this time Sasuke was filled full of rage. He couldn''t help but blame Konoha for Itachi''s pain¡­ and also the person named Haizenberg¡­ together with the Hokage, Yami Inuzuka.


    ¡­.


    It was a new year, in January, that is when outside of Konoha. Five people with orange hair and one of them looking like a cyborg. They all have the Rinnegan as they look at the giant skyscr.a.p.er buildings that Konoha had all around it.


    Pain narrows his eyes as he sees the barrier around Konoha.


    ''That will be hard to break through.'' Thinks Nagato, as he looks through the eyes of all of the pains. ''It would be smarter if we sneaked in and then attacked. There are no mosquitos or any other bugs, not even animals around. Signifying that there is no way Yami Inuzuka can know of our attack, and even if he did, he wouldn''t know the exact time.''


    ¡­.


    At this time Yami is in his office, not working or anything like that. He looks at the woman below him as he impaled her with his rod.


    "Oh! Yes, Yami." M.o.a.ns Tsunade, she was lying on her back Yami grabs her b.r.e.a.s.ts and starts pounding her.


    Tsunade howled as the p.l.e.a.s.u.r.e that had rapidly built up in her loins finally became uncontainable and bucked as she climaxed explosively. Simultaneously, the pulsating member of Yami erupted within her, which escalated the bliss that was driving all thought from her head.


    Their entwined bodies pulsed again, and again, each wave of p.l.e.a.s.u.r.e slamming into Tsunade like a tsunami, draining her of energy. It felt as if her very life force was being s.u.c.k.e.d out of her through the depths of her clenching loins, their very exodus fueling the intense p.l.e.a.s.u.r.e she was feeling.


    Tsunade let her head roll back, going completely limp as she surrendered herself to the embrace of the arms that held her. All thought of resistance, of how wrong this p.l.e.a.s.u.r.e was, momentarily driven from her mind, she didn''t care that Yami has a wife and children of his own and that if this affair of theirs was made public it would ruin both of their reputations.


    ¡­.


    At the same time, the Pains decided to transform into some travelers who were supposed to come to Konoha, they killed the six travelers.


    Nagato also dropped their level of chakra supply, making them at the level of the normal civilians.


    ''No technology, no bugs, animals, or humans spying on us.'' Thinks Nagato as he goes towards one of Konoha''s security, the Chunin just waves them to pass them through.


    Nagato smiles at this. ''No matter where humans will always let their sloth take over at boring jobs like this.''


    He immediately claimed to one of Konoha''s high skyscr.a.p.ers. When he is up there, there are a lot of other tourists around them.


    <ALL MIGHTY PUSH>


    .....


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    Sorry for the late update I just went to take an STD test today... (Just to be sure, you never know... I just had a wild college year and just wanted to be sure if I got anything... thankfully I always used rubber so my results came back as okay. Ya boy ain''t got no aids.)


    THIS STORY IS FINISHED ON PATRE¨°N...


    Check Out My P.A.T.R.E.O.N


    pa treon.com/HolyJoker


    JOIN THE DISCORD: discord.gg/M9hghrm

 Chapter 217 - Yami vs Nagato...

    Chapter 217


    Title: Yami vs Nagato...


    ¡­.


    <ALL MIGHTY PUSH>


    An invisible wave of gravity was released from Pain''s hands. The power within it is enough to easily topple Konoha.


    ''Yami Inuzuka, our biggest threat to our plans. You have to die for my vision of the world to come true.'' Thinks Nagato, as he has a cold look on his eyes¡­ knowing that today he will have to slaughter the hundred of thousands of innocent people that live in Konoha.


    But suddenly the invisible force is stopped as a secondary green barrier is erected all around the invisible force, locking it in, and even though the barrier cracks, no power escapes it.


    Pain looks at this calmly, they already know that for them it would be almost impossible for Yami to not notice their presence inside Konoha. But they still came here, they know that Yami is greedy and they will have an advantage here as Yami doesn''t want any collateral damage.


    They know that he won''t be able to protect a giant city while at the same time fighting them. They think that they have him in checkmate, it doesn''t matter if they die fighting Yami. If they destroy Konoha that is enough for them. It will send everyone a message, and even if Yami is enraged, what is he gonna do? Nothing¡­ because he can do nothing...


    ¡­.


    Conan is next to him as she looks at him with sadness in her eyes. She can see that as he uses his chakra Nagato is slowly dying. A single tear comes out of her eye, remembering the countless sacrifices they have made to come here. Their dream of world peace is so close, only the Nine-Tails is left and then they will have enough power to stop the world from fighting anymore.


    ''Let''s see of Yami can stop Konoha from being destroyed by me.'' Thinks Nagato, as he uses more chakra to use another All Might Push.


    But suddenly out of nowhere a hand grabs Konan by the back of her throat and Yami appeared out of her shadow. Nagato''s eyes widen at this.


    Yami has a cold look in his eyes and says. "One more attack on Konoha and I will have my way with her right in front of you."


    Nagato''s eyes are full of fury as he looks at Yami. But Yami simply positions himself and uses Konan as his meat shield.


    "I will r*pe her right in front of you. Maybe I will even use some clones and make this a gangbang, don''t mess with me¡­" Says Yami as his cold aura intensifies.


    "Y -Youuuuu¡­." Nagato''s eyes fill with fury when he listens to what Yami said.


    "Me? Me what?... You are about to kill hundreds of thousands of people for nothing." Criticizes Yami, as if he has the moral high ground.


    Nagato''s chakra intensifies and he seems ready to attack Yami immediately. But Yami squeezes his hand, making Konan scream in pain as she feels electricity running through his neck and all over her body.


    "I might decide to torture her too if you keep this sh*t up." Says Yami casually as if talking about the weather.


    Nagato clenches his teeth in anger. "You bastard¡­ what do you want?"


    Yami smiles when he sees that Nagato''s chakra calms down. "That is good¡­ I want you to pull the five Pains out of Konoha. You have five seconds¡­ 5¡­ 4...3¡­"


    Immediately Nagato pulls his hands out of the weird tube machines that he has his hands in. He does some hand signs and slams his hand in the ground.


    *cough*


    He coughs blood as the five pains appear, Nagato breaths heavily at this. But he still looks at Yami.


    But suddenly Yami disappears in a dark flash¡­ immediately decapitating the Six Paths of Pain.


    He goes in front of Nagato and in half a second Yami''s hair retreats back into his skull and he becomes bald. Suddenly eyes appear on the top of his head and one of the eyes looks at Nagato.


    <Kotoamatsukami>


    Konan looks terrified at Yami''s appearance. One of the eyes in the back of his head looks at her too.


    <Kotoamatsukami>


    I then grab Nagato''s neck and¡­


    *crack*


    Breaks it killing him, as his eyes are still dull and he disappears out of there in a space swirl.


    ''I could have killed him in the beginning or used Kotoamatsukami immediately. But he might have noticed me gathering chakra and ordered his Pains attack. So I took the best possible action, I lied to him and took care of him¡­. This is how it is when you have a weakness¡­ Konan was his undoing. Damn, I am all hor?y now, I was in the middle of fu*king Tsunade when these goofballs decided to attack.'' Thinks Yami, then his mind wanders towards Konan, if he should have his way with her in the end just another Kotoamatsukami and it will make her willing. ''Nah, Konan with her piercings is too much for me.''


    He just took out a syringe and got some DNA sample from the Rinnegan and disappears in a dark flash...


    ¡­.


    ¡­.


    In the end, Yami went and had his clones throw a dozen or so S Rank Fire Jutsu towards Konoha and he used his barriers to fight them.


    He looks at flames as they lick the walls of Konoha, but he just pulls out huge Water Walls. He yawns a little as he completely wrecks the outside of Konoha.  He knows that he needs to make it seem like a great battle went on outside.


    Four hours later and Yami is on top of the Hokage tower and his clones order people around, helping the civilians go into the shelters around Konoha in case Akatsuki attacks again. Yami already said loudly enough that Konoha was attacked by Akatsuki''s Leader and that he already killed him. But the latest of the Akatsuki might attack so it''s better for them to go to a shelter.


    ''Manipulating news and the people''s perspective like this is really easy when you have control over information. And using fear to control people is the best way to make them comply.'' Thinks Yami, trying to learn something from this experience. He doesn''t consider himself an amazing leader and he likes to advance. He is chasing after godhood and god is perfect in every way, so he must be the best leader.


    Suddenly he senses a chakra signature appears in Konoha. It was Naruto, who just finished learning Sage Jutsu, he returned from Mount Myoboku.


    *fwosh*


    Yami disappeared in a black flash and appeared next to Naruto. Surprisingly, Naruto immediately turns to look at Yami as he can sense him due to Naruto being in his Perfect Sage Mode.


    "The Akatsuki leader is dead. So no need to worry." Says Yami with a smile on his face. He can see a relieved look appear on Naruto''s face. He looks at Naruto and says amusingly. "What? You think Konoha is in such a bad position that it needs a kid to save it¡­"


    Naruto smiles when he hears Yami''s amused voice. "You know, Hokage -sama, I guess I still have a long way to go before I can become a Hokage."


    Yami laughs out loud at this. "Hahaha, yep."


    He then looks at Naruto with a fond look on his face. "Naruto¡­ it seems like you are strong enough to know about your family now..."


    Naruto''s eyes widen in shock once he hears Yami say that.


    ¡­.


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    Even while he is powerful, Yami doesn''t play around. He takes the most efficient way towards his goals. He didn''t take a chance at all to try and fight Nagato. He threatened Nagato and used his weak point (Konan) against him. Some people say that having someone you care about makes you stronger¡­ yeah¡­ tell that to Yami.????


    THIS STORY IS FINISHED ON PATRE¨°N...


    Check Out My P.A.T.R.E.O.N


    pa treon.com/HolyJoker


    JOIN THE DISCORD: discord.gg/M9hghrm

 Chapter 218 - Five Kage Meeting...

    Chapter 218


    Title: Five Kage Meeting...


    ¡­.


    Yami looks Naruto in the eyes and says. "Your parents¡­ I knew them quite well."


    Naruto looks at Yami with a shocked look on his face. Yami has never really said anything to Naruto about his parents, even the Previous Konoha Elder, Hiruzen only told Naruto that his parents died during the Nine Tails Attack.


    Naruto is intently staring at Yami, waiting for him to at least say a name. "Your mother was Kushina Uzuamaki. The previous Jinchuriki of the Nine-Tails."


    That hits Naruto like a lightning bolt, shocking him to his core. But Yami doesn''t stop there as he continues saying. "And your father was Minato Namikaze, the 4th Hokage."


    That shocks Naruto even more. "W -What¡­"


    Yami smiles when he sees Naruto''s shocked face. "And we were all best friends, I even studied Fuinjutsu with them."


    ¡­.


    After a while Naruto starts asking Yami a bunch of questions about his parents and Yami answers semi-truthfully, editing some of the histories and downplays some of Minato''s deeds just like he did in history books. In order to make himself seem greater.


    In the end, he got bored and stealthily changed places with one of his shadow clones.


    ¡­.


    ¡­.


    After that whole ordeal, one-month passes, and Konoha recovers it''s almost nonexistent damage that it suffered due to Pain''s attack. And so the next meeting of the Kage from the five great villages comes about.


    The Five Kage come to an agreement to have this Gokage (Five Kage) meeting in the Land of Iron.


    ¡­.


    So two weeks later and the meeting is held in an undisclosed building in a half-circular meeting table, with Mifune, the leader of the Land of Iron as the neutral party in the middle of the half-circular table. The meeting hasn''t started yet due to a certain Kage not arriving yet.


    Currently, in the room, there were the Raikage A and his bodyguards, the Kazekage Gaara and his siblings/bodyguards, the Tsuchikage Onoki with his child and grandchild as bodyguards, and the last was Mei Terumi with her bodyguards. She is new at the meetings and this is the first one she has ever attended, and actually, the meeting should have started twenty minutes ago but the Hokage hadn''t arrived yet.


    She still remembers that time, many years ago when she was captured by Yami, she knows that the current Hokage isn''t a bad guy. He didn''t even treat a prisoner like her bad.


    ..


    The Tsuchikage saw the look on Mei''s eyes and said. "Don''t worry about the Hokage. He always does this. Coming late is his way of saying that he isn''t someone who needs to follow the rules. It''s his own little game of power play."


    The Raikage also snorts in annoyance at this and that is the moment when the door is opened and Yami in his Hokage uniform comes in. He also had his two bodyguards, Yoruichi and Guy, who had a calm smile except for Yami who had a smirk on his face.


    "Yo! Guys, how have you been. Haven''t seen you in years and it seems like we have two new members. We seem to all be doing well don''t we? I hope your villages have been advancing as fast as Konoha has been." As Yami says that, he has a completely serious look on his face as he sits on his own seat between Mei and Gara. Still, everyone in the room can see that Yami is simply flaunting Konoha''s advancements on everyone''s faces.


    The host of this Kage meeting, Mifune doesn''t say anything against Yami. No one does really, they just clench their teeth in annoyance. What are they going to do anyway, attack him? That would just start a war that they would lose and in the end, Yami would just carve territories from them. He definitely won''t be polite about it either.


    "Okay, now that everyone is here. I, Mifune, use my authority given to me by the Five Kage to declare this meeting officially started." Declares Mifune and immediately Yami starts the discussion, as his expression goes from playful to absolutely calm.


    "I plan on raising the tariffs of the foreign merchants traveling in the Land of Fire." Declares Yami, the other Kage looks at him with narrowed eyes. They know that he wants something in return for him not doing that.


    Onoki and A share a split-second glance. Coming to an anonymous decision between themselves.


    "Only the Daimyo of the Land of Fire has the power to do something like that." Says A, looking at Yami intently.


    Yami on the other hand just looks at him with a side-glance as he puts his feet on the table. "Oh, yeah, I mean that I will ask the Daimyo of course. But I am pretty confident that he will agree with me."


    Everyone in the room looks at Yami with a strange look on their faces.


    ''You couldn''t be more obvious, you just said that you will ask the Daimyo, it''s most likely the other way around. The Daimyo, who is conveniently your son, asking for YOUR permission to do something.'' Every one of the other Kage and their bodyguards had that train of thoughts.


    But in the end, Yami smiles as he sees the other Kage''s expressions. "Anyway, if our relationship was to get closer I wouldn''t-... I mean the Daimyo wouldn''t do something like that. Let''s say that we, for example, helped each-other hunt down some Akatsuki members, that would for sure bring us all together. Like a very dysfunctional family¡­ I take dibs on being the drunk dad."


    The Raikage, contrary to his usual hate towards Yami. He agrees with Yami, not on the last sentence of what he said but everything else. His brother was recently kidnapped by Sasuke Uchiha, which is with the Akatsuki now, so he is definitely willing to work with someone like Yami to help get his brother back, or in the worst case, at last avenge him.


    ¡­..


    After some discussions, and snubbing at each-other... that is when suddenly a White Zetsu appears in the middle of the room and yells out loud. "SASUKE UCHIHA IS HERE!!! I wonder where he could be hiding right now. Can you guess?"


    Fwosh!


    The Raikage immediately takes action and grabs the White Zetsu by his neck. "Tell me where Sasuke Uchiha is."


    The White Zetsu smiles at this. "How about a gam-"


    The Raikage immediately breaks the White Zetsu''s neck when he sees that the thing is just stalling for time.


    A turns towards his bodyguards and says. "C, Darui, let''s go!"


    Boom!


    He breaks a wall and goes outside, searching for Sasuke.


    Yami has a smirk on his face during the whole thing. "Isn''t this nice, it seems like a certain little Uchiha traitor has come here."


    Onoki looks at Yami when he says that. "You aren''t going to look for him then?"


    Yami gives a side glance towards Onoki. "Why would I look for him, when he will come to find me."


    ¡­.


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    THIS STORY IS FINISHED ON PATRE¨°N...


    Check Out My P.A.T.R.E.O.N


    pa treon.com/HolyJoker


    JOIN THE DISCORD: discord.gg/M9hghrm

 Chapter 219 - Yami Sits Up From His Throne...

    Chapter 219


    Title: Yami Sits Up From His Throne...


    ¡­.


    "Why would I look for him when he will come to find me by himself." Says Yami, with still a casual look on his face.


    Onoki borrows his eyes at what Yami says. ''He doesn''t see Sasuke as a threat at all. Did he get overly arrogant while sitting on his throne or something like that?'' Contemplates Onoki, trying to decipher what Yami is thinking and what he is planning. He knows that whatever Yami has planned, is most likely won''t be good for them. But he doesn''t say anything, he knows how someone like Yami can be.


    Yami still has a confident smile on his face as he covered his forehead with his hair by tilting his head down, and activated his Byakugan, making veins appear all over his forehead.


    With a weak genjutsu on his forehead just to be safe and no one notices anything, as he just saw Sasuke''s jaw crack open as Ay just karate chopped Sasuke''s Susanoo. Yami smirks a little and stops using the Byakugan.


    He then looks at the other Kage who are all silent, in the end, his eyes settle on Onoki''s granddaughter, Kurotsuchi. She has short dark hair and black pupilless eyes.


    Onoki notices Yami seizing up his granddaughter, he frowns at this and addresses Yami about this. "Oy! Hokage, don''t look at my granddaughter like that, you know that you are more than twice her age. Your daughter is literally older than her."


    Yami just shrugs at this and decides to look at Mei, or more specifically, he is looking at her bust¡­ for an uncomfortable amount of time until she blushes and covers her cleavage in embarrassment.


    Yoruichi was confused about why her father would do something like this. But then it clicked to her. ''It seems like he is doing this as a form of entertainment, but that is not the case. He already got crucial information from only this small exchange. Like the Tsuchikage caring for his granddaughter very deeply and being protective of her¡­ and also Mei Terumi portraying a strong front while she is actually just a little insecure on the inside. As expected of father, he is getting under people''s skins and learning highly critical information about the other villages.''


    Yami just smiles at them all¡­ but then all of the Kage look towards the entrance as a figure moves as fast as the wind and¡­


    Fwish!


    Cuts of all of the Hidden Village Banners behind the Kage. The Kage, none of them were concerned, and every one of them noticed that the Rookie Sasuke was low on chakra, after all someone like him doesn''t get off scot free from a fight against Gaara and the Raikage.


    Sasuke then stands upside down in front of the meeting room. His eyes are full of malice as he looks at them. Guy, who is next to Yami, seemed like he wanted to act but was stopped by Yami waving his hand. Sending Guy to fight Sasuke is just overkill, the boy would be crushed to paste by just one of Guy''s kicks.


    But that didn''t stop Sasuke as he comes towards Yami with the intent to kill. His sword slashes towards Yami who still has his legs on the table and his hands behind his head, he is completely relaxed and has a small smile on his face.


    "You are not yet ready for this stage Sasuke." Says Yamk sarcastically. Sasuke seems confused for a second until¡­ he feels an attack heading for his stomach, he immediately activates his Susanoo in skeleton form in less than half a second.


    Bam!


    His Susanoo is hit by a heavy kick and..


    Crack!


    Cracks appear all around it, Sasuke looks at his attacker and sees Yoruichi looking at him with a certain familiar coldness that can sometimes be seen in Yami''s eyes.


    Fwosh!


    Sasuke flies backwards.


    Breaking through the wall and going at the corridor, Yoruichi is about to give chase but Mei gets up and says. "No need sweetie, I will take care of this."


    Then she goes towards the hallway where Sasuke is and she covers the hole made by him when he was kicked away by Yoruichi.


    Yami still has a smile on his face. "Interesting isn''t it? That Mangekyo has amazing powers but soon¡­ he will go blind."


    He then looks at Onoki and asks. "Who do you think will win?"


    Onoki snorts in annoyance. "You really like your games Yami, but do be careful, playing too much is harmful."


    "Hahahaha¡­" Laughs Yami out loudly. "That is true, but.."


    His expression turned into a ferocious one. "When I play, I am always 100% sure of my victory."


    Onoki shakes his head at this.


    "Then how about a bet?" Asks Yami, catching the curiosity of Onoki when he says that.


    "And what would the bet entail?" Inquires Onoki.


    Yami smiles mysteriously at that. "Well¡­ it will be a little bit of this and a little but of that. But anyway, I bet that Sasuke will somehow escape her. If I win you will have to try to kill Sasuke personally. If you win, I will give you Ten Billion Ryo."


    "Deal." Answers Onoki without even missing a beat. He has nothing to lose in this, plus ten billion Ryo is a giant sum of money. Onoki gives Yami a side-glance again, he can''t help but think. ''For him it''s mostly pocket change though.''


    He wasn''t wrong about that, he knows that even though Yami''s wealth is not public knowledge, it is estimated to be close to One Trillion Ryo.


    Boom!


    As Onoki was thinking that, he sees Sasuke breaking through the wall, breathing heavily and some scorch marks along his arms. ''Damn, guess I lost the bet¡­ this pisses me off.''


    He floats form his seat and criticizes Sasuke. "You are too arrogant brat."


    And as he says that he clasps his hands a small shining cube appears between them.


    The cube then quickly grows in size and surrounds Sasuke as he tries to jump back.


    <Atomic Dismantling Jutsu>


    Boom!


    Then as if on cue, the Raikage comes through a wall and screams. "Where is Sasuke Uchiha?!?!"


    Gaara with his siblings and Ay''s bodyguards also come from the hole that the Raikage made.


    But Onoki, while still floating, looks at Ay and answers nonchalantly. "I killed him."


    The Raikage becomes enraged at this. "What! You had no right to do that Tsuchikage! After what he did to Bee, Sasuke was mine to kill."


    "Maybe you will have another chance." Says a strange voice seemingly out of nowhere. When everyone turns to look where the voice came from, they see a man with an orange swirly mask and Akatsuki cloak. "Well hello there¡­ my name is Madara Uchiha."


    As he says that Sasuke is s.u.c.k.e.d away in a space swirl. "And I would like to tell you about my Eye of the Moon Plan."


    That is when Yami finally gets up and says. "So you say that you are Madara Uchiha?"


    Obito''s lone eye looks at Yami and when he sees that Yami has gotten up. "So, Yami Inuzuka, it seems like you have decided to sit up from your throne when you heard my name."


    Yami smirks at this. "You stupid or something? Obviously not, I was just surprised that someone as weak as you calls himself Madara Uchiha¡­"


    Fwosh!


    And he moves in a dark flash towards Obito¡­


    ¡­..


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    A lot of changes from Canon. Karin wasn''t there at all, and Zetsu didn''t spread his pores around the Kage Meeting Room, due to Yami being in there.????


    Anyway, now that Yami has finally sat up, means that he has finally decided to act.

 Chapter 220 - Yami and Regrets...

    Chapter 220 (BONUS CHAPTER)


    Title: Yami and Regrets...


    ¡­..


    As soon as Obito sees Yami come towards him in a dark flash, he uses Kamui to turn himself intangible.


    Immediately around Obito dark flashes appear all over.


    Fwosh!


    Yami then appears next to the Kage and¡­


    Poof!


    Two shadow clones appear next to him and they immediately also disappear in a dark flash and keep attacking Obito.


    Yami just coldly looks at Obito and says to the other Kage. "He is intangible, but if that is so, then he can''t keep this up forever. Also, poison won''t work, I have already poisoned the air around him. Meaning that this is most likely a space-time technique where he teleports his body somewhere else and leaves behind just a half mirage. But don''t worry he too can''t attack us at all."


    Obito immediately looks at Yami with a resolute look. "Yami Inuzuka¡­ you are truly dangerous. Figuring out my ability in seconds. But even if you know of it, my ability has no weakness."


    When Yami hears that he smirks. "Except that you can''t keep it active for an extended period of time and it is most likely a Mangekyo Sharingan ability."


    Obit frowns at this under his mask. ''He is dangerous¡­ better get out of here or he might actually find a way to kill me for real. Though unlikely, Yami Inuzuka is very familiar with space-time techniques.''


    "Anyway, I only came here to announce that I, Madara Uchiha, declare that the 4th Ninja War has BEGUN!!." Says Obito slowly from his right eye a suction force is made and his body starts disappearing.


    Yami''s eyes narrow at this.


    Fwosh!


    And he throws a kunai with his full strength, it easily breaks the sound barrier and it goes towards the hole in space where Obito suddenly his Kamui stopped functioning for a split second and that is when Yami appears in front. His face is in front of Obito''s vision, he can see Yami''s cold dark eyes.


    ''Sh*t.'' Is the last thing Obito things as he feels his own body starting to be ripped apart.


    Burst!


    Obito''s body explodes in bloody chunks spreading all over the room. Yami just looks at this with cold eyes as his fist is slightly smoking.


    "It seems like this Madara Uchiha is really nothing big." Says Yami, as he looks at the body parts of Obito littering the room.


    The other Kage are shocked at this. Yami on the other hand has a smirk on his face as he thinks. ''True Kamui has no weakness¡­ unless it is another Kamui that is. Disrupting it then is very easy.''


    But suddenly Obito''s body starts disappearing. Yami''s eyes widen slightly at this. ''Izanagi¡­ so he had another eye that allowed him to use it. Just like he did against Konan.''


    ''Well, I guess he will get to live for a little bit more.'' Thinks Yami, not really seeing it as a surprise, he already saw this as a possible outcome. He could go into Kamui Dimension and kill Obito there but decided to keep that as his hidden card for a little more.


    The Kages just look around and Oniki asks. "Genjutsu?!?!?"


    Yami shakes his head slightly. "Not quite, it is Izanagi. A type of Genjutsu of the Uchiha which allows one to temporarily rewrite reality to their advantage, so anything like injury or even death becomes just a Genjutsu."


    "So this Madara guy is still alive then?" Asks the Raikage, his enmity towards Yami is completely not shown. They are ninja, they have control over their feelings, even if Yami did kill his father. He knows that they have a bigger problem in front of them.


    Yami then turns around and looks at all of the Kage and their bodyguard in front of him, even Mifune, the leader of the Land of Iron. Yami''s eyes shine red for a split second before he says. "Now¡­ I suggest that we should create something like The Allied Shinobi Forces."


    The other Kages nod at this. Onoki then suggests. "I know that this might come as contradictory because of our negative relationship, but I think that you should be the leader of this alliance Hokage."


    Yami nods at this with a smirk on his face. "But of course, I will humbly accept this position of mine."


    But on the inside, he couldn''t help but think. ''Kotoamatsukami really is something scary isn''t it¡­ glad that I already killed all of the Uchiha so I don''t have to worry about it appearing ever again.''


    ¡­.


    ¡­.


    The Alliance was announced all over the Elemental Nations, the 4th Ninja War has begun and the enemy¡­ is the Akatsuki¡­


    The Ninja Alliance is 100,000 strong. All of the five great Elemental Nations grouped together, even some minor hidden villages and samurai joined together. The army was 100% financed by Yami Inuzuka personally, no one needed to pay anything. Making some people make the joke that Yami is so rich that he must sh*t gold.


    There were many meetings with the strategic teams of each village. But as this all was happening, Yami''s clone was truly managing the War efforts. While Yami''s real body is currently in the Blood Swamp, where his summons live. Every Sage Chakra user within the swamp could feel that the whole Nature Chakra was going like a whirlpool towards Yami who was just meditating atop a tree.


    Slowly over time, Yami''s skin starts turning pale, as if all of the blood in his body is leaving. Immediately Yami opens his eyes and sees that it''s evening. He takes a deep breath and gets up, he can feel that his senses are currently all in hyperdrive. He can feel his body''s strength¡­ though this is only a temporary transformation, Yami knows that currently, even if the whole current world teamed together they wouldn''t be able to beat him.


    He then sinks his hand on his c.h.e.s.t and pulls out the Evolution Cube, the thing that keeps continuously evolving his body.


    ''But it still can''t evolve me from anything.'' Contemplates Yami, this Cube pales in comparison to something like the Hogyoku, which can evolve something from nothing. ''But soon¡­ I shall reach the heavens and sit down upon that throne.''


    He then makes a hand sign and¡­


    POOOOF!


    Thousands of clones appear all around him, they all immediately sit down and go into meditation and a scene that terrified all of the Blood Swamp inhabitants happens. They don''t feel Nature Chakra anymore as immediately as it is created within the surroundings, the clones suck it up.


    Yami smiles at this, all of the parts to his plan are in place. He then uses wind chakra to rip off the clothes that he is wearing and he is covered by smoke, he is wearing some blue ninja pants with a blue t-shirt, and the Hokage cloak on his shoulders, the Hokage hat is on his side.


    He immediately disappears in a dark flash¡­


    ¡­


    He can''t help but think about his family¡­ and this time it wasn''t the one in a whole new world but the one in here.


    ''My children, Kiba, Hana, Nari¡­ and Yoruichi. I want you to know that I truly care and¡­ yes I love you, my children. But I will never be able to see you again. So sorry¡­ but I¡­ I can''t give up my dream for my family again. I am going to be selfish this time. So¡­ I will ask forgiveness for you, become I never could be a father to any of you.'' As he thinks these thoughts, he puts two fingers in his forehead and immediately four translucent white light balls appear to fly on four different locations. Those were a copy of Yami''s memory and feelings in that last moment.


    He can''t help it as a tear rolls down his eyes as he keeps looking at Konoha down below him. ''I truly love this world and have enjoyed every second I have lived here.''


    Even as a tear falls down his eye, Yami still has a smile on his face.


    (GO TO DISCORD TO SEE THE IMAGE)


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    Yami is for the first time showing his true feelings now. He is grateful and left his last thoughts to his children. His clones will also knock out his children so they don''t participate in the war.


    P.S: Don''t worry, Yami won''t suddenly be nice, he is just feeling melancholic. And yes, he does care for his children, enough to not allow any of them to participate in the war. Though none of them are his weakness... he still cares for them...


    THIS STORY IS FINISHED ON PATRE¨°N...


    pa treon.com/HolyJoker


    JOIN THE DISCORD: discord.gg/M9hghrm

 Chapter 221 - Things Brewing in the Dark...

    Chapter 221


    Title: Things Brewing in the Dark...


    ¡­.


    Yami in the end sighs and suppresses his feelings of melancholy. His eyes harden as he sends his clones knock out his children and take them to safety.


    He takes a deep breath and disappears in a dark flash.


    ¡­.


    But while Yami was going to join the Allied Shinobi Forces, in a dark cave with only a simmering candle as a source of light. In the darkness was a man leaning against the walls of the cave. He has long dark hair, snake-like eyes with purple eye-shadower, and very pale skin.


    It is Orochimaru, he is alive and healthy. He was ''killed'' by Sasuke. But he too learned something from Yami. You must always have at least five countermeasures for any situation, he never predicted that Sasuke would betray him. Well, at least not at that time. ''But I guess I never knew Sasuke 100%.... well it doesn''t matter anymore.''


    Suddenly a swirl appears on the space in front of Orochimaru, he doesn''t react at all as Obito comes through it. "Well¡­ I never expected you to be alive Orochimaru, I for sure thought that you were dead."


    Orochimaru chuckles at this. "Huhuhu... true, because that is what a certain man to be thinking. I haven''t been out of this cave ever since I was revived."


    As Orochimaru says that Obito doesn''t joke around at all either. He knows that against Yami you can never be too sure.


    "Why did you call me here Orochimaru? I am currently in the middle of a war. I don''t exactly have a lot of free time." Says Obito, his lone Sharingan behind his orange mask staring straight at Orochimaru. His late experience with death at Yami''s hands has made him smarter and not to arrogantly think himself invincible when intangible. But he knows best that Orochimaru is nowhere near Yami, and that isn''t him being careless, he is just simply stating a fact.


    "I am not asking you to trust me. I am just saying that we have a common enemy who is stopping us from reaching our goal." Says Orochimaru, his snake-like eyes get a cold light on them when he says. "Yami Inuzuka has to die, he is too dangerous and¡­ I can give you the tools to defeat him."


    Obito seems intrigued by Orochimaru when he says that. "Hmmm¡­ and what would that be?"


    Orochimaru''s face morphs into a creepy smile. "When I fought against the nine tails Jinchuriki, I summoned the three previous Hokage¡­ but due to a sneak attack I couldn''t open them and the bodies are currently in Konoha."


    <Edo Tensei>


    Poof!


    And a coffin appears...


    Clank!


    The coffin opens and it reveals someone inside. Obito''s eyes widen at this. Orochimaru sees and an arrogant smirk appears on his face and he then goes through dozens of more hand-signs.


    <Summoning Jutsu: Edo Tensei>


    Poof!...


    Dozens of more coffins appear and they each open up revealing certain people. Orochimaru then looks at Obito and says. "How does this seem, I spent the last month gathering these all¡­ do you think that this will be enough to deal with Yami?"


    Under Obito''s mask, a smile adorns his face. "Yes¡­ YES, IT IS!!!"


    While this was happening, Yami on the other hand. Had teleported on the front lines and saw the ninja fighting against tens of thousands of White Zetsu. What seems to be troubling them is Zetsu''s ability to copy the look of ninja and even their chakra signatures.


    He sees that Naruto, Kakashi, and many others are fighting against Zetsu. But even they are having difficulty as the Zetsu disguise as their allies and none of them can sense anything.


    Yami on the other hand just looks at this and shakes his head in disappointment. ''It seems like I should interfere.''


    <Byakugan>


    Veins appear on his forehead¡­ immediately he can see everything within fifty kilometers (~31 miles) but not only did he see them, but he also in a way can ''see''  their feelings. Immediately he notices the Zetsus¡­


    <Dark Lightning Armor>


    Yami''s body is surrounded by dark lightning and he disappears. Immediately he takes the heads of thousands of Zetsus within seconds. His natural speed amplified with dark lightning armor pushes his speed to something that is not comprehended by any ninja in this battlefield. Even the Raikage couldn''t see anything.


    But that didn''t last long as the one minute mark was hit, all of the Zetsu''s had already died by Yami''s hand. He looks at the army and sees their surprised looks¡­ he doesn''t say anything. Usually, he would try to get some glory for himself to raise his reputation or something like that. But Yami didn''t care about such things anymore.


    "What are you looking at, go and prepare for the next battle!!" Orders Yami, leaving no room for questioning. They immediately scamper away and Yami teleports next to Naruto in a flash. "Naruto¡­ I need to talk to you."


    He puts a hand on Naruto''s shoulder and disappears in a dark flash together with him.


    ¡­.


    They are teleported back to Yami''s private Hokage tent. Naruto looks around confused by all of this. But Yami has a no-nonsense look on his face. "Naruto¡­ I need you to get control over the nine tails¡­ or else you are pretty much useless in this war."


    Naruto seems confused by this and he is about to ask Yami a question but as he looks up he sees two strange patterned Sharingan looking back at him.


    "Yes Yami, I will do it. Don''t worry¡­" Says Naruto, not questioning Yami anymore as he makes a shadow clone one of his, which will help Naruto learn how to take control of the Nine-Tails, while the Oroiginal is away.


    ¡­.


    ¡­.


    Just like this tomorrow comes, Yami didn''t get a wink of sleep because first, he doesn''t really need to sleep with his immortalized conscience, and second, he has many things to take care of. His natural reserves dropped to below 50% as he was up all night making shadow clones in order for them to take care of some things. But even though the chakra cost was high, he was able to make tens of thousands of shadow clones, each of them with its own mission.


    Yami himself was also in his own little super-secret mission. A certain mission that only he himself could do, he couldn''t leave such delicate things on the hands of his clones.


    But as he was teleporting around¡­


    Poof!


    In a giant poof of smoke, dozens of coffins opened open up. Revealing dozens of strong people, previous Jinchuriki, the four previous Kage from different villages, some members of the Akatsuki, and even the previous seven ninja swordsmen were here. Yami looks around him and asks. "Well now¡­ it seems like I am quite popular with so many people coming to party with me."


    They were all Edo Tensei of some of the strongest people this world has seen.


    Yami tries to see if hiraishin worked¡­ but it didn''t¡­


    Yami can''t help but contemplate. ''Someone really smart must be up to this¡­ someone was actually able to create a Fuinjutsu formula to stop my Hiraishin. Well now¡­''


    .


    .


    .


    .


    THIS STORY IS FINISHED ON PATRE¨°N...


    Check Out My P.A.T.R.E.O.N


    pa treon.com/HolyJoker


    JOIN THE DISCORD: discord.gg/M9hghrm

 Chapter 222 - Yami goes full out...

    Chapter 222


    Title: Yami goes full out...


    ¡­.


    -Yami POV-


    I look at the people around me. Hmmm¡­ this combination is actually dangerous. Especially since one of them has something like particle release and that can definitely destroy my body, if I lose my strong body, my strength pretty much plummets.


    The others just need to restrain me for one second and I am pretty much done if I don''t go all out. There is actually Nagato amongst them too, so he could actually kill my soul with his Rinnegan by using one of the six paths powers.


    The 3rd Raikage looks at me and says. "Why Yam-"


    I don''t even let him talk, I don''t care about his philosophical talk or sh*t like that. I don''t have the time currently. I just make three hand-seals and summon a bunch of clones who do their own hand-seals and cast countless barriers with privacy seals so no one from the outside can look on the inside.


    Immediately in half a second my hair falls down, and the countless Sharingan and one Byakugan at the back of my head, covering the Byakugan''s blind spot.


    Immediately three of my Sharingan transform and change form in the Mangekyo, I input huge amounts of chakra in them. I guess it''s time I stop playing around and hiding my power.


    <Kotoamatsukami>


    Immediately all of the Edo Tensei stop and look around weirdly, I smile at them. Immediately black tendrils come out of my body and immediately piece all of them. They don''t dodge obviously, slowly I smile as I can feel all of their chakra get absorbed by me as curse marks start spreading all over their bodies. Anyway, it seems like Kotoamatsukami doesn''t work after death, I did put Nagato under Kotoamatsukami before I killed him, but he wasn''t under my control when Edo Tensei was used on him.


    But still it doesn''t matter since when I get serious and immediately go full power I can''t easily be stopped. I look at them all and look at Nagato. "Take their souls now."


    I take out my tendrils as I absorbed their power and chakra. But suddenly I sense bile rise at the back of my throat.


    Cough!


    I look around me and see Kisame as he dissipates and a dead body falls down. It is the ninja who was used as the sacrifice for his revival. I look at Samehada sitting on the ground¡­ and the other seven swords. I bet Orochimaru thought that I had some type of weakness, or something like that. Like having such a huge group of people with different dangerous abilities in one place coming to fight me. Sadly for him, I have no weakness whatsoever, I didn''t waste decades trying to perfect myself just to be taken down by a weak attack that can counter me.


    Anyway I pull out the red cube from my c.h.e.s.t and put it down next to the Samehada. Even the sword who has a little intelligence fell under my Kotoamatsukami and it doesn''t resist as the cube absorbers it. I then bring the rest of the seven ninja weapons and slowly each of them get absorbed. I immediately put the cube back on my c.h.e.s.t.


    Immediately I use the Evolution Cube to manually. Devour some of my overflowing chakra and temporarily stop my DNA crash down. My cells will soon change anyway, just lasting two more days is enough, my body can definitely hold on for at least a month. But¡­ it doesn''t matter, I am already prepared anyway¡­ I can only use Kotoamatsukami only once more today. I have four Kotoamatsukami eyes on my skull. Two Kamui, one Amatarasu, one Tsukuyomi and two Teleportation.


    I take a deep breath as I see that all of the Edo Tensei start dispelling. Sigh, it seems like I was correct, this is a new Jutsu created by me when I was studying the first three Edo Tensei Hokage who are sealed in Konoha. I have learned a lot of things and how it works. It truly is fascinating and kinda scary actually, it defied the law of nature itself to bring someone dead to life. Death isn''t something mysterious to me, I understand what it happens.


    In this world it is simply a passing of spirit as the body cannot hold it anymore. That is the over simplified version of it.


    After this, I use my eyes to get out of this ''No Hiraishin'' zone.


    ¡­..


    During this time too, in another part of the battlefield. Many Reanimated ninja were fighting against the Shinobi Alliance''s troops. Of course the high level reanimated ninja were being fought by other high level ninja. Hanzo the Salamander was one of these, he is slaughtering some Konoha ninja when suddenly he feels the air above him shift slightly and he immediately jumps back.


    Booom!


    A figure crashes down punching the ground and creating a giant crater. Hanzo looks at the figure and he has a calm look on his face as he says. "I see¡­ so you are that woman from back then¡­"


    As the dust clears up it shows a blonde woman with a giant bust.


    "You are one of the Sanin, Tsunade Senju. I must say¡­ back then when I gave you those nicknames I never thought they would become such a big thing. But then again, you still all got overshadowed by that other kid." Says Hanzo, at the end kinda mocking her. Due to his time of death, he never understood what really happened with Yami later on the years.


    "Don''t talk as if you are all high and mighty. Everyone got overshadowed by him." Tsunade didn''t take the bait as she just calmly looked at Hanzo as she said that. "I never got the chance to ever redem myself after that fight with you. It seems like this will be the right time for me to defeat you and show you that the Sanin aren''t someone who should be knows for only surviving a battle with Hanzo the Salamander."


    Tsunade powerfully kicks of the ground creating a crater behind her as she charges at Hanzo. The latter looks calmly at her, he can''t help but wonder about the future world.


    "Then let me ask you something, Tsunade Senju." Says Hanzo as he jumps back dodging another one of Tsunade''s punches. "Has war finally stopped, and I have seen some ninja from different villages fighting together. Is this some type of alliance, is this the last war? The war that will end them all?"


    Tsunade frowns at this and and simply says. "No, wars will always continue, that is human  nature. But that still doesn''t mean that there is no peace."


    As Tsunade says that she high kicks the ground with her full power.


    Booom!!!


    The ground shakes and Hanzo looses his footing for a split second. That is all she needed as Hanzo was midair she punched towards his head.


    Completely obliterating it. She then gives a sideglance behind her and orders. "Sealing squad, come and seal Hanzo the Salamander."


    ¡­.


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    The MC has always hidden his cards and doesn''t have a weakness in an ability. He can easily fight without his Hiraishin. After all, Yami isn''t strong because of the Hiraishinm¡­ Yami is strong because¡­ well¡­ he is Yami.????????????????


    Also remember that Reanimated corpses are usually weaker, they have infinite chakra which in some cases, someone like Itachi would become stronger due to no longer having to deal with his sickness.


    P.S: When this story reaches 1000 Power Stones, it will get +1 Bonus Chapter that day.


    THIS STORY IS FINISHED ON PATRE¨°N...


    Check Out My P.A.T.R.E.O.N


    pa treon.com/HolyJoke

 Chapter 223 - Yami goes full out...

    Chapter 222


    Title: Yami goes full out...


    ¡­.


    -Yami POV-


    I look at the people around me. Hmmm¡­ this combination is actually dangerous. Especially since one of them has something like particle release and that can definitely destroy my body, if I lose my strong body, my strength pretty much plummets.


    The others just need to restrain me for one second and I am pretty much done if I don''t go all out. There is actually Nagato amongst them too, so he could actually kill my soul with his Rinnegan by using one of the six paths powers.


    The 3rd Raikage looks at me and says. "Why Yam-"


    I don''t even let him talk, I don''t care about his philosophical talk or sh*t like that. I don''t have the time currently. I just make three hand-seals and summon a bunch of clones who do their own hand-seals and cast countless barriers with privacy seals so no one from the outside can look on the inside.


    Immediately in half a second my hair falls down, and the countless Sharingan and one Byakugan at the back of my head, covering the Byakugan''s blind spot.


    Immediately three of my Sharingan transform and change form in the Mangekyo, I input huge amounts of chakra in them. I guess it''s time I stop playing around and hiding my power.


    <Kotoamatsukami>


    Immediately all of the Edo Tensei stop and look around weirdly, I smile at them. Immediately black tendrils come out of my body and immediately piece all of them. They don''t dodge obviously, slowly I smile as I can feel all of their chakra get absorbed by me as curse marks start spreading all over their bodies. Anyway, it seems like Kotoamatsukami doesn''t work after death, I did put Nagato under Kotoamatsukami before I killed him, but he wasn''t under my control when Edo Tensei was used on him.


    But still it doesn''t matter since when I get serious and immediately go full power I can''t easily be stopped. I look at them all and look at Nagato. "Take their souls now."


    I take out my tendrils as I absorbed their power and chakra. But suddenly I sense bile rise at the back of my throat.


    Cough!


    And I cough, I look on the ground and see that I actually coughed blood¡­ I see my body is approaching its limit again and my my DNA is shutting down, unable to handle the countless Kekkei Genkai that I have within myself.


    I look around me and see Kisame as he dissipates and a dead body falls down. It is the ninja who was used as the sacrifice for his revival. I look at Samehada sitting on the ground¡­ and the other seven swords. I bet Orochimaru thought that I had some type of weakness, or something like that. Like having such a huge group of people with different dangerous abilities in one place coming to fight me. Sadly for him, I have no weakness whatsoever, I didn''t waste decades trying to perfect myself just to be taken down by a weak attack that can counter me.


    Anyway I pull out the red cube from my c.h.e.s.t and put it down next to the Samehada. Even the sword who has a little intelligence fell under my Kotoamatsukami and it doesn''t resist as the cube absorbers it. I then bring the rest of the seven ninja weapons and slowly each of them get absorbed. I immediately put the cube back on my c.h.e.s.t.


    Immediately I use the Evolution Cube to manually. Devour some of my overflowing chakra and temporarily stop my DNA crash down. My cells will soon change anyway, just lasting two more days is enough, my body can definitely hold on for at least a month. But¡­ it doesn''t matter, I am already prepared anyway¡­ I can only use Kotoamatsukami only once more today. I have four Kotoamatsukami eyes on my skull. Two Kamui, one Amatarasu, one Tsukuyomi and two Teleportation.


    I take a deep breath as I see that all of the Edo Tensei start dispelling. Sigh, it seems like I was correct, this is a new Jutsu created by me when I was studying the first three Edo Tensei Hokage who are sealed in Konoha. I have learned a lot of things and how it works. It truly is fascinating and kinda scary actually, it defied the law of nature itself to bring someone dead to life. Death isn''t something mysterious to me, I understand what it happens.


    In this world it is simply a passing of spirit as the body cannot hold it anymore. That is the over simplified version of it.


    After this, I use my eyes to get out of this ''No Hiraishin'' zone.


    ¡­..


    During this time too, in another part of the battlefield. Many Reanimated ninja were fighting against the Shinobi Alliance''s troops. Of course the high level reanimated ninja were being fought by other high level ninja. Hanzo the Salamander was one of these, he is slaughtering some Konoha ninja when suddenly he feels the air above him shift slightly and he immediately jumps back.


    Booom!


    A figure crashes down punching the ground and creating a giant crater. Hanzo looks at the figure and he has a calm look on his face as he says. "I see¡­ so you are that woman from back then¡­"


    "You are one of the Sanin, Tsunade Senju. I must say¡­ back then when I gave you those nicknames I never thought they would become such a big thing. But then again, you still all got overshadowed by that other kid." Says Hanzo, at the end kinda mocking her. Due to his time of death, he never understood what really happened with Yami later on the years.


    "Don''t talk as if you are all high and mighty. Everyone got overshadowed by him." Tsunade didn''t take the bait as she just calmly looked at Hanzo as she said that. "I never got the chance to ever redem myself after that fight with you. It seems like this will be the right time for me to defeat you and show you that the Sanin aren''t someone who should be knows for only surviving a battle with Hanzo the Salamander."


    Tsunade powerfully kicks of the ground creating a crater behind her as she charges at Hanzo. The latter looks calmly at her, he can''t help but wonder about the future world.


    "Then let me ask you something, Tsunade Senju." Says Hanzo as he jumps back dodging another one of Tsunade''s punches. "Has war finally stopped, and I have seen some ninja from different villages fighting together. Is this some type of alliance, is this the last war? The war that will end them all?"


    Tsunade frowns at this and and simply says. "No, wars will always continue, that is human  nature. But that still doesn''t mean that there is no peace."


    As Tsunade says that she high kicks the ground with her full power.


    Booom!!!


    The ground shakes and Hanzo looses his footing for a split second. That is all she needed as Hanzo was midair she punched towards his head.


    Pow!


    Completely obliterating it. She then gives a sideglance behind her and orders. "Sealing squad, come and seal Hanzo the Salamander."


    ¡­.


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    The MC has always hidden his cards and doesn''t have a weakness in an ability. He can easily fight without his Hiraishin. After all, Yami isn''t strong because of the Hiraishinm¡­ Yami is strong because¡­ well¡­ he is Yami.????????????????


    Also remember that Reanimated corpses are usually weaker, they have infinite chakra which in some cases, someone like Itachi would become stronger due to no longer having to deal with his sickness.


    P.S: When this story reaches 1000 Power Stones, it will get +1 Bonus Chapter that day.


    THIS STORY IS FINISHED ON PATRE¨°N...


    Check Out My P.A.T.R.E.O.N


    pa treon.com/HolyJoker


    JOIN THE DISCORD: discord.gg/M9hghrm

 Chapter 223 - Minato and Kushina...

    Chapter 223


    Title: Minato and Kushina...


    ¡­.


    After a couple more hours, Naruto who is currently in an unspecified underground place, it was a white room with no exit out of it and with a lot of Fuinjutsu writings on the wall. Yami''s clone was there meditating and Naruto was doing the same too.


    Yami''s Clone finally opens his eyes and looks at Naruto.


    "You ready?" Asks the clone with a calm look on his eyes.


    Naruto opens his eyes too, and it can be seen that he has entered Sage Mode.


    "Yes." He answers with a resolute look on his eyes. He was meditating as Yami told him, he needs to get rid of his negative energy before he can even attempt to try and fight the nine tails, or else he will just simply be influenced by the malicious chakra that the nine tails releases.


    "Okay then, get ready, I will open the seal for you. Usually we would need to go and get the seal from the Toad Sage, but sadly we can''t waste anymore time. The Nine Tails power is needed in this war." Says Yami''s clone, while on the inside he actually has another thought inside his mind. ''I know that Jiraya might have left a message for Naruto, thinking that I wouldn''t be able to open the Eight Diagram Seal without the key. After all, not anyone can open a seal made by the Shinigami¡­ but I can. I didn''t just study the concept of death as an abstract thing for nothing.''


    As the clone thinks that, he extends his fist towards Naruto and they both bump fists. Immediately Naruto feels something strange as his conscience is pulled inside his mental space and he is in front of a cage. He sees the Nine Tailed fox looking at him intently and steam coming out of the beast''s mouth.


    But suddenly the nine tails looks behind Naruto and says. "So you are here too¡­"


    The nine tails voice sends chills down Naruto''s spine as he looks at the beast who for some reason has a strange look on its face and Naruto could swear that it almost seemed like it was fear.


    Naruto also turns around to look behind himself and sees Yami''s clone in his Jonin uniform standing behind him. The clone is also looking straight at the Nine Tails eyes and has no fear in them. "I am going to open it now Naruto. After this, I can no longer help you in any way."


    Naruto nods at this and the clone then walks forward and floats in front of the giant cage. He rips out the paper holding the seal together and points his palm towards the seal¡­ dark energy extends from his hand and slowly the cage shakes and the water down there is turbulent as the cages slowly open. The nine tails and Naruto are all concentrated and ready to fight each-other as Yami''s clone fades away from Naruto''s Mindscape.


    But still as the clone got out of here, he looked below him and when he saw the ''water''  he couldn''t help but contemplate. ''Is that the Nine Tails urine or something¡­''


    ¡­.


    As soon as he is on the outside world, the clone gets up and puts his hand on Naruto''s head and slowly dark chakra flows through his hand as he does that.


    ¡­


    On the inside, Naruto looks at the nine tails, neither of them made a move when Yami''s clone was here, but as soon as he is gone. The nine tails gathers his chakra and opens its mouth as chakra quickly gathers towards it forming a giant Tailed Beast bomb, the nine tails compresses the bomb and aims it toward Naruto.


    ''Sh*t, I am gonna die.'' Thinks Naruto, as he glances at the blast who has almost engulfed him.


    Fwosh!


    But suddenly a dark wall appears in front of him, no not a dark wall. More like a dark box as it surrounded the Tailed Beast Blast and seals it¡­


    Poof!


    And then the box disappears in a puf of smoke. Naruto immediately turns back and breaths a sigh of relief.


    ''That was most likely Yami helping me. I can''t allow the Kyuubi (Nine Tails) to use a Tailed Beat Bomb or I will be instantly killed.'' Contemplates Naruto and as he thinks of this he remembers Yami''s words enters Sage Mode since technically he is standing still.


    He immediately turns around and does the shadow clone handsign.


    POOOF!


    Immediately dozens of shadow clones appear and they all gather chakra into their hands and with another clone''s support they make a Rasengan and then put even more chakra into it mixed with Narutre Chakra.


    <Odama Rasengan>


    And each clone jumps up with giant rasengans in each of their hands slamming it at the nine tails.


    BOOM!


    But as that happens the Nine Tails swings its tails wildly and destroys a huge number of the shadow clones, it gets up and immediately starts gathering chakra again. Naruto can''t move quite fast enough to stop it, but suddenly..


    Cling!


    Chains come out of the water and grab the Nine Tails by its foot toweling it over and suddenly a yellow flash moves around and¡­


    Bam!


    A rasengan is slammed in the Kyuubi''s face.


    Naruto looks at the two figures and he is surprised to see them. "Mom?... Dad?..."


    ¡­.


    On the outside the clone Yami had a small smile on his face. He knew that Minato and Kushina left some of their chakra with Naruto, since Naruto hadn''t fought against Nagato, he didn''t see his father when he was about to release the nine tails during canon timeline. But this time he hot to see them both when he broke the seal, and Yami''s clone simply used this to his advantage.


    Putting Minato and Kushina¡­ well more like shadow clones of them, under a genjutsu and as they explain things to Naruto they will manipulate him to have an even better opinion of Yami and that he was instructed by Kushina that he has to be strict to Naruto.


    When Naruto heard that he remembers all of the times Yami has been harsh on him and how even when Yami reprimanded him, Yami still protected Naruto.


    ¡­.


    Twenty minutes later and Naruto opened his eyes, and he sees Yami''s (clone) face. He can see a slight worried look on the clones face and Naruto smiles at him. "You are really nice on the inside aren''t you uncle Yami."


    Immediately the clowns face become annoyed. "What are you talking about kid?... Anyway did you take some of the Kyuubi''s power?."


    Naruto nods at this. "Yep uncle Yami."


    "Don''t call me that."


    "Whatever you say uncle Yami."


    Yamk''s clone just grabs Naruto by the shoulder and both of them teleport away from here.


    "Tch! Little brat." Says Yami''s clone with a fond look on his face. "So you did meet them¡­ Minato and Kushina¡­"


    Naruto smiles at that brightly as they are teleported on a forest. "Yep, they said a lot of good things about you."


    The clone just looks to the side a little embarrassed and says. "Whatever brat."


    Poof!


    And so the clone dispels himself. With his last thoughts being. ''Hook, line and sinker. The plan continues. Naruto can now sense emotions but we have been able to do the same for decades. So we also have a counter measure against it and fabricate emotions. The original will be pleased to hear this.''


    ¡­..


    In another place Sasuke opens his eyes¡­ with fully m.a.t.u.r.ed Eternal Mangekyo Sharingan in them.


    ¡­


    AUTHOR NOTE;


    What!??!? Where is Yami and what is he doing?? Well¡­ you will find out in the next chapter of Naruto: Dream to Immortality. ????????


    Check Out My P.A.T.R.E.O.N


    pa treon.com/HolyJoker


    JOIN THE DISCORD: discord.gg/M9hghrm

 Chapter 224 - The Two Meet...

    Chapter 224


    Title: The Two Meet... (BONUS CHAPTER)


    ¡­.


    As Sasuke opens his eyes he can clearly see around him, even with the bandages blocking his vision, he can still see through them. He looks around and sees that there are multiple White Zetsu''s around him.


    He slowly takes off his bandages and his fully developed Eternal Mangekyo Sharingan appears.


    Fwosh!


    The upper body of his Susanoo appears behind him.


    Baam!


    He crushes all of the Zetsu around him before they can even react. They aren''t strong and many half-decent Genin could defeat a Zetsu in a straight-out fight. So Sasuke easily kills them all, even the so-called ''original'' is killed easily.


    Sasuke looks around again and notices that even in the darkness he can see so clearly that he doesn''t think that he has ever seen so good in his life. But somehow he was confused¡­ he understood something when he fought Yami. He can''t do it, he can''t even come close to touching the Hokage. He knows that Yami defeated even Tobi, or as he likes to call himself as Madara.  But¡­ he isn''t even sure what he wants anymore.


    ''I know that Heisenberg is already dead. Killed and tortured in a mission gone wrong. I can''t even say that Yami was in the wrong in doing what he did¡­ what do I even do anymore?'' Contemplates Sasuke, unsure where he should go and what he should do now.


    He looks at the cave around him. "I better get out of here then."


    The Susanoo then starts punching the ceiling.


    ¡­.


    Soon he is back into the open and sees that around him is just a forest. He looks around and by the position of the stars, he can tell where he is and what time it is. He immediately decides to go towards Konoha¡­ but as soon as he starts jumping from tree to tree a man in a red cloak walks past him.


    Sasuke immediately notices this and he especially notices the man''s hair that is spilling out of his cloak.


    ''Itachi!?!?!?'' Thinks Sasuke shockingly, completely confused by this turn of events.


    ¡­.


    -Yami POV-


    I just look at the cave around me and can''t help but smile. I just revived Itachi and put him under Kotoamatsukami again. This time he will ''coincidentally'' run into Sasuke. They will then go and kill Orochimaru, well Itachi will have him release the Edo Tensei and then he will seal him with his Totsuka Blade. Anyway, I understand that the Totsuka Blade and Yamata Mirror are spiritual weapons, but I already have them now. Of course, as soon as Itachi finishes his job, I will get back the Totsuka blade. I just cut off a part of his soul and got rid of its memories and made it ''pure'' and then I fused it with my own.


    It wasn''t that hard really, though sadly as a consequence Itachi won''t remember specific moments about his life. Well, that is okay for me, I don''t really care about it. I just didn''t wanna get influenced by his memories, that is the only reason I purified his soul.


    Orochimaru has really been a nice pawn, he played into my hands. When you know what someone wants, they can be very predictable, especially with my future knowledge. He is VERY predictable to me, he has been dancing on my palm ever since he left Konoha. It isn''t that he wasn''t smart or anything like that, it''s just that he didn''t know about my hidden cards, he didn''t know that Sasuke was already under the influence of Kotoamatsukami before he left Konoha. Then Sasuke got Kotoamatsukami used on him before he ''killed'' Orochimaru, and he got Kotoamatsukami used on him again as he wanted to fight me during the Kage Summit. Every time they were only very specific commands, I can after all use Kotoamatsukami quite often and even if I can''t. I can just easily change my eyes with some Shisui clones who have their Kotoamatsukami charged up.


    Anyway, now the next phase of the plan begins. Orochimaru will die and the Edo Tensei will be released¡­ that is when the hard part comes. Madara¡­ he will be infinitely troublesome, not even Kaguya can be considered as dangerous as him. She just throws power around, but he will learn with every confrontation we will have.


    It seems like I will have to be extra careful about this or it could spell trouble for me. Because I must let Madara live long enough till Kaguya is summoned and then¡­ I win.


    A small smile appears on my face as I think of this. Future knowledge really is my biggest blessing in this world. It allows me to make plans that no one can follow or predict.


    -General POV-


    On another side of the battlefield, after almost all of the Zetsu were killed, hundreds of Edo Tensei Shinobi, Samurai, and monks come back to life-fighting against the Allied Shinobi forces. But even with that huge number, the Allied Shinobi forces numbered at a hundred thousand, so they easily took care of the undead troops and sealed them.


    That is when one of the Edo Tensei stops moving and his movements become rigid as he just slams his hand on the ground.


    [Summoning Jutsu]


    Poof!


    And a coffin appears, and as it opens, a man with long spiky hair comes out. He has two fully developed Sharingan and a calm look on his face.


    He looks around and then looks at the one who summoned him.


    "It seems like I have been brought back from the dead to fight a new war." Says the man as he looks at the Edo Tensei puppet who summoned him. No¡­ he is looking even beyond that¡­ and he is looking straight into Orochimaru''s eyes. Which immediately unnerved the latter, it all seemed like he had already seen through him.


    Orochimaru then talks through the Edo Tensei that he is manually controlling. "I must say, I am quite pleased to meet a man like you¡­ Madara Uchiha."


    Madara just snorts in annoyance at this. He already knows what is happening and Orochimaru is trying to butter him up. So Madara only half listens to him as Orochimaru starts bragging on how Madara is now beyond even his prime and that the Hashirama Cells inside Madara''s newly created body will allow him to use Wood Style.


    "-and that is how you are now stronger than even in your prime. Your body is now a combination between you and your rival, Hash-"


    "Are you done now.." Says Madara, not really asking at all. He just informed Orochimaru that he is done listening to him now.


    "Ah! Sorry I get a little excited when talking about my experiments and yo-"


    Baam!


    A giant skeletal arm appears and crushes the Edo Tensei puppet that Orochimaru was talking through. Madara looks at the puppet and says. "I am not your experiment little man. I will show you something that you can never reach, a power so out of your understanding that you will worship as a god."


    Orochimaru smiled at this. "Oh, I can''t wait¡­ hehehehe."


    Madara doesn''t say anything as he summons his Susanoo and he does some hand signs, while his two-faced Susanoo does the same.


    ..


    Suddenly within the battlefield, a shadow descends, and the Shinobi Alliance members who have high morale due to being on the overwhelmingly winning side suddenly stop and look upwards.


    "W -What the hell man¡­"


    "Is this¡­ is this the power of a god.."


    "Hahaha¡­ what the hell man.. am I dreaming or something."


    Fwosh!


    The clouds make way as the giant meteor comes towards the ground.


    But as everyone''s spirits are full of despair. A dark flash flies up towards the meteor and touches it¡­


    Fwosh!


    And just like that, it is gone. Everyone looks at him wide-eyed, even Orochimaru, but he didn''t look for long as Sasuke and Itachi just arrived at his base.


    The only one who wasn''t surprised was Madara. He looked at Yami and had a calm look on his eyes.


    ''Yami Inuzuka¡­ it seems like you have grown even more.'' Contemplates Madara as he looks at Yami, who has crow-like wings on his back and stays in there, midair while looking down at Madara.


    The two of them, both have cam faces as they look upon each-others eyes. Even as they are far away from each other, due to their strong Dojutsu, they can see the other perfectly clearly.


    ¡­.


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    Next is¡­ the Yami vs Madara fight, it MUST BE A MASTERPIECE. I must spend more time thinking about it. I must write the perfect fight¡­ I need to get in both Madara''s and Yami''s heads and write the fight slowly and not rush it as I want them both to use strategies and such.


    THIS STORY IS FINISHED ON PATRE¨°N...


    Check Out My P.A.T.R.E.O.N


    pa treon.com/HolyJoker


    JOIN THE DISCORD: discord.gg/M9hghrm

 Chapter 225 - Madara vs Yami...

    Chapter 225


    .


    (A/N: Totally forgot to say that I have two other stories on too, HxH: A Sefish Wish, and One Piece: Reborn as a Fishman)????


    Title: Madara vs Yami...


    ¡­.


    As Yami and Madara look at each-other, the latter has a small smirk on his face. "It seems like you are quite strong. I was wrong in thinking that only me and Hashirama had reached that level of power."


    Yami on the other hand just looked at him calmly. He didn''t say anything at all as he just observed Madara.


    On the other hand, Madara had a different thought. ''He used Flying Thunder God to teleport the meteor away. His chakra reserves are definitely massive. He has definitely grown stronger¡­ too strong¡­ he grew so strong, during the 3rd Ninja ha was weak when we were observing him.''


    Yami''s eyes just coldly look at Madara in the eyes and then he narrows them.


    "KAGE!!!" Calls out Yami, not leaving any room for discussion as next he says. "Retreat! Leave Madara Uchiha to me, I can take care of him."


    Immediately everyone instinctively nods, even the other Kage as they order the other ninja to retreat.


    "You got those weaklings out of here, now you can fight at your full power¡­ Yami Inuzuka." Says Madara, he still has a smirk on his face as he says that. He knows full well how Yami is and how he generally acts. But what he didn''t expect is for Yami to just look at him with emotionless eyes, not saying anything.


    Yami is extremely careful around Madara, he doesn''t say anything to him. He doesn''t want to give Madara anything to work.


    When Madara sees this he smiles again as his Sharingan looks at Yami. "You want to hide something, don''t you? Well¡­ it doesn''t matter, you can keep your secrets for now. My Sharingan will soon easily see right through them."


    "I see." Answers Yami simply.


    Fwosh!


    Immediately in a dark flash, he appears in front of Madara. Who doesn''t seem surprised by Yami''s speed at all as his eyes follow him.


    [Fire Style: Majestic Flame Destroyer]


    A gigantic tsunami of fire comes towards Yami, who also only makes one handsign.


    <Water Style: Giant Water Wave>


    Fwosh!


    A giant wave of water goes towards Madara, meeting his fire and covering the whole battlefield in mist. Which would normally obstruct someone''s view, neither Yami nor Madara were really bothered about it. Yami even went through some more handsigns.


    <Water Style: Hidden Mist Jutsu>


    Immediately the battlefield is surrounded with heavy mist filled with Yami''s chakra. It makes it difficult for even Madara''s sharingan to see through it. But he isn''t necessarily worried either since if Yami gets close to him or uses a Jutsu, he will definitely notice him. Slowly around Madara, the Susanoo ribcage appears around him.


    ''His strength is dangerous, one punch and he will immobilize me. So I mustn''t get directly punched even once or it''s pretty much over.'' As Madara thinks that¡­


    Bang!


    ''Tch! With this body, I can''t feel the slight movements in the air. I have lost all instincts and such things. I am definitely too weak in this form.'' Contemplates Madara, as he knows that even though he has a limitless amount of Chakra he doesn''t have even 50% of the power he had when he was alive. He has already analyzed the limits of his body, but against Yami limitless regeneration is useless because he will obliterate the whole body with one punch and as the body comes back together Yami can just seal Madara.


    Madara then gets up above earth and he just clasps his hands together. ''I need to make the battlefield to my advantage.''


    [Wood Style: Deep Forest Emergence]


    Immediately giant tree roots come from the ground and just like giant snake tails search around the mist trying to find Yami who has blended his chakra with the mist.


    Madara frowns a little as he can''t find Yami, in the end he goes through a couple of hand-signs again and takes a deep breath.


    [Wind Style: Great Breakthrough]


    Fwosh!


    Immediately a giant typhoon pushes Yami''s mist away. That is when Madara conjures his full body Susanoo and he looks at Yami who is just there standing up, he was being touched by the Wood Style roots, but there is no reaction from them, immediately Madara comes to the conclusion that he too must have Hashirama Cells and can use Wood Style.


    "Yami Inuzuka, be glad, as I, Madara Uchiha recognize you as the strongest living ninja. And I shall also use my full power against you." Says Madara as his Susanoo grows giant and he then whispers. "Settle."


    Immediately the gigantic Susanoo draws his sword and attacks Yami who still has a calm look on his face. The sword moves at incredible speed as at less than a second the sword is in front of Yami and he still has a calm look on his face, he clenches his fist and a dark bird-like gauntlet appears on his hand¡­ and he then punches the Susanoo''s sword.


    BOOOOM!


    As they clash the ground around them trembles as if a high-level earthquake hit this place. The mountain tops around are all cut off and the hills are all settled down.


    Madara looks down at the figure below him, Yami has a frown on his face as he looks at his cut off arm. The Susanoo''s sword cut his arm like tofu with no problem whatsoever. Though Yami''s arm had already regenerated and looked brand new, the old arm turned into a black goo-like substance.


    ''I can''t fight his Susanoo with only my body head-on.'' Thinks Yami as he notices how this resulted. ''I guess expecting a punch to win against a sword was obviously not a thought of mine. But I did test out how strong his Susanoo is.''


    In the end, Madara swings the Susanoo''s sword toward Yami, intending to cut him in half but Yami just clasped his hand and as the sword was about to reach him.


    BOOOM!


    <Guanyin Buddhivatsva>


    And as that happened Yami jumped up and clasped his hands again, this time his body is surrounded by golden chakra, and a giant golden construct of a buddha with 100 hands appears below him and he stands on top of its head. The construct is just as big as the perfect Susanoo.


    <100 Type Guanyin Bodhisattva>


    When Madara sees this he frowns at it, after all, this reminds him of one of Hashirama''s finishing moves.


    Immediately that split-second reaction of Madara''s, Yami noticed and decided to take advantage of it, as his Guanyin Bodhisattva attacks with palms, punches, and chops towards Madara''s Susanoo. The latter frowns at this and his Mangekyo Sharingan starts changing¡­ slowly transforming into a Rinnegan. He then points his palms towards Yami...


    [Shinra Tensei]


    **BOOOOOM!**


    ¡­.


    As this was happening, on the other side of the battlefield. Obito was fighting Guy, Naruto, Kakashi and Kurenai when they all felt a sudden tremor and then they look towards the source of where it came from, immediately their eyes widen as they see a giant mushroom cloud where Yami and Madara were supposed to be fighting.


    ¡­.


    Took a long time to write this chapter, I had to make everything gradually evolve as the fight got higher leveled. Now obviously having infinite chakra is an advantage, but Edo Tensei definitely weakened Madara. Remember that time when the Rasengan that Yami used against the Raikage like Naruto did, it didn''t work for Yami while it worked against the Edo Tensei Raikage, well it was because the latter didn''t have that instincts that a living body has.


    THIS STORY IS FINISHED ON PATRE¨°N...


    Check Out My P.A.T.R.E.O.N


    pa treon.com/HolyJoker


    JOIN THE DISCORD: discord.gg/M9hghrm


    (For images of scenes and such things.)

 Chapter 226 - Not Enough...

    Chapter 226


    Title: Not Enough...


    ¡­.


    While this happened and everyone looked at the giant cloud mushroom with widened eyes. But the Kyuubi inside Naruto had another thought process. ''That Chakra¡­ it is definitely Madara¡­ he is here now.''


    The first seeds of doubt start appearing within the Nine Tails mind. He doesn''t know what he should do next, he personally knows how strong Madara is and he alone can never fight someone like Madara. ''But what about¡­.''


    His mind begins to wander on different possibilities, he is willing to do almost anything, just so he doesn''t have to be under Madara''s control anymore.


    ¡­.


    At the same time in the battlefield between Yami and Madara. The latter was in his Susanoo governing above ground as he looked at the giant crater below him. Yami was sprawled in the middle of the giant crater. His face is completely calm and he has no injuries in his body.


    "That was quite strong." Says Yami calmly, annoying Madara a little due to his disregard for his power. He could see it in Yami''s eyes, he wasn''t worried at all during this fight.


    "Are you looking down on me?" Asks Madara rehoritically, already knowing the answer to his own question.


    Yami just shrugs while looking at Madara. "Was I that obvious?"


    Madara''s eyes turn cold again. "I see¡­"


    Immediately he goes through some handsigns again.


    [Wood Style: Wood Dragon Jutsu]


    Boom!


    Right from below Yami, a giant wooden dragon with its mouth open appears, and it''s about to engulf Yami, but he just brings his fist back and¡­


    Baam!


    He punches the Wood Dragon.


    Crack!


    Booom!


    He easily destroys it. His eyes never left Madara even as he did that, he then smiles at Madara. "You are quite interesting for an old relic of the past."


    Madara looks at Yami with a little fury in his eyes. But even though he was angry, they would never affect his actions or act reckless, he is too experienced to have something like anger cloud his judgment. In the end he just clasps his hands together and when he separates them a black ball appears between his hands, he throws it towards Yami.


    Who just looks at the ball indifferently. His eyes cold as always. Yami already knows what the ball does so there is no need to be panicked, scared or anything like that.


    ''I should go on the attack too now.'' Thinks Yami.


    Fwosh!


    Black wings appear behind him and he moves so fast that he seems like a dark blur towards Madara. Completely disregarding the dark sphere as it starts getting a suction force and the earth is going around it, starting to form a meteor. But Yami didn''t care about it as he was in front of Madara who is inside his Perfect Susanoo.


    Bam!


    Yami punches the Perfect Susanoo with full power.


    Crack!


    The perfect Susanoo cracks, surprising Madara a little. ''What monstrous strength... He is actually toppling over the Perfect Susanoo.''


    BOOOM!


    The Perfect Susanoo falls due to Yami using his full power against it. But he doesn''t stop there as he immediately goes towards the downed Susanoo and starts punching.


    Bam! Bam! Bam! Bam!....


    Countless hits descended upon the Susanoo, but Madara wasn''t docile rather as the [Chubaku Tensei] had created a giant meteoric structure.


    The giant Meteor comes towards them as Madara was protected by the Susanoo but Yami had nothing to protect him as he punched, but he wasn''t worried about it at all.


    Yami simply disappears in a dark flash as the meteor is about to hit him.


    ¡­.


    He teleports away from the meteor.


    BOOOOM!


    He sees the giant meteor crash into Madara.


    But immediately Yami realizes something...


    ¡­.


    -Yami POV-


    Damn¡­ he did that on purpose. I actually knew that he couldn''t defeat me as he was like that. Currently I can''t sense him¡­ hmmm¡­ so he must be regenerating. Well it doesn''t matter anymore, I had my battle with him and saw the difference between us. I was winning against him, he had no way to kill me. True, the Rinnegan does have the abilities to kill me¡­ but he can''t kill me, he can''t catch me off guard and he saw that even if we fought for days, in the end he would be the one to slip up and die.


    Well I better get ready for the next stage....


    Suddenly I feel some blood gather at the back of my throat.


    Cough! Cough!


    I caught out some black oil-like blood. Damn¡­ soon¡­ this body will actually get destroyed from the inside if I keep this sh*t up. I will actually start to weaken in two days, thankfully I don''t even need to wait for that much time.


    ¡­.


    ¡­.


    -General POV-


    Twenty minutes later and the Edo Tensei technique is released. Dispelling all of the ninja summoned by it except Madara. This also signified Orochimaru''s death.


    He was killed by Itachi who was controlled by Yami¡­ Orochimaru had no longer anyone to revive into, Yami''s clones killed them all and took care of all of Orochimaru''s revival methods¡­ effectively killing him.


    At the same time, Obito''s mask was broken off showing his true identity, and that is when Madara appeared and screamed out loudly.


    "OBITO!!! DO IT NOW."


    Obito was surprised by what Madara said, by his tone it pretty much said that he must be revived now or the plan might actually fail. Immediately Black Zetsu wraps himself around half of Obito''s body and they clasped their hands together. Obito has one of his eyes which allows him to use Kamui and the other one of his eyes is Madara''s Rinnegan which allows him to use...


    [Rinne Rebirth]


    Immediately Steam started coming out of Madara''s Edo Tensei body and slowly his skin started to turn from Edo Tensei pale and clay like to a healthy colour.


    "HAHAHAHAHAH!!!" Laughs Madara, shocking the people around him. Which consisted of Gai, Naruto, Kakashi and Kurenai. The latter looked at Madara with eyes filled with rage. She didn''t even care that Madara just revived himself.


    "Where is he?" Asks Kurenai with a deadly look in her natural red eyes.


    Madara has a smile on his face as he notices this. "Hm?"


    "I ASKED YOU WHERE IS YAMI!!!" Screams Kurenai, her face full of rage.


    Madara''s smile widens at this. "Oh, that guy¡­ how can I say this¡­ well he is¡­"


    Immediately tears appeared on Kurenai''s face as she looked at Madara in the eyes.


    <Genjutsu: Restricting Tree>


    As she uses that Genjutsu, she immediately rushes towards Madara with a kunai in her hand.


    Madara just looks at this with a disappointed look on his face, he only has one Rinnegan on his eyes but his power is somewhere where not even Kurenai can hope to dream of catching up to. "Stupid woman."


    A skeletal arm with a sword appears and stabs towards Kurenai¡­


    ¡­.


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    Yami is away again, he is preparing something else. As we can see, even though Yami can''t one-shot Madara, he can still defeat him in his Edo Tensei form. Anyway, Yami is preparing something...????


    P.S: Sorry if these chapters come a little late, but I am trying to write it perfectly, I litterally deleted half a chapter because I didn''t like it when I read it.????


    P.S: When this story reaches 1000 Power Stones, it will get +1 Bonus Chapter that day.


    THIS STORY IS FINISHED ON PATRE¨°N...


    Check Out My P.A.T.R.E.O.N


    pa treon.com/HolyJoker


    JOIN THE DISCORD: discord.gg/M9hghrm

 Chapter 227 - Ten Tails Jinchuriki...

    Chapter 227


    ANNOUNCEMENT: GO VOTE IN THE DISCORD SERVER FOR WHICH WILL BE THE NEW STORY FOR .


    Title: Ten Tails Jinchuriki...


    ¡­.


    As Kurenai sees the skeletal arm with the sword about to stab her. She isn''t even thinking straight as she rushed Madara, Guy is about to go and stop her but before he can do so.


    Yami appears in a dark flash and grabs her in a princess carry. As Kurenai sees this she is overwhelmed by emotions, seeing him all good and fine. But Yami just looks at Kurenai as if looking at a stupid person and says. "Baka¡­ you are a Jonin and a grown woman so don''t act like this. Keep your feelings under control."


    As Yami says that, he then¡­


    Fwosh!


    He throws Kurenai far away, as if he didn''t care. But he knew that the battle between him and Madara would continue once more to fight and Kurenai would have a head start to run away from here.


    Immediately, Madara used this time to signal Obito, who used Kamui and appeared next to Madara he then gives him his other Rinnegan. Madara takes it and plucks it into his eyes¡­


    He then looks at Yami, whose eyes widen as suddenly.


    Bam!


    He feels something hit in the head. He frowns at this, he felt nothing at this, but he immediately has a theory of what hit him. ''Must be a Limbo Clone.''


    Madara immediately summons the Gedo Mazo below him and he moves in front of Naruto as Yami is occupied fighting an enemy that he can''t see or sense at all.


    ¡­.


    -Yami POV-


    I can''t sense anything, literally nothing as I feel a hit towards where a normal human''s kidneys would be.


    With my Byakugan, I can see Madara go towards Naruto as he kicks Kakashi and Guy away. Immediately he sinks his fingers into Naruto''s stomach, pulling out the Nine Tails out of him.


    But me, I extens microscopic chakra strings all around my body, three centimetres above my skin. Suddenly I feel something hit the chakra strings.


    Gotcha...


    Immediately my chakra strings go around the invisible Limbo Clone and Fuinjutsu markings appear all over it.


    By the time I had this confrontation with this clone, Madara had already gotten the nine tails and Naruto fell in the ground, also Bee seems to have gotten killed too. And immediately Madara touches the ten tails with his right hand.


    "RUN!!!" I yell at Guy and Kakashi. "I will hold him back."


    "Sensei!" Says Guy, as he let''s Kakashi run away with Naruto.


    I just shake my head. "This is an order from your Hokage¡­ Have some trust on me Guy."


    Guy has a serious on his face, just like I taught him. Never panic in front of an enemy. He seems unsure of something, but then he turns around and contrary to my expectations he takes off his Konoha headband and says. "I am going against Hokage''s orders and am now a missing ninja, so sorry sensei¡­ but I won''t be listening to you this time."


    I am surprised by this¡­ but in the end a smile appears on my face as I look towards Madara, who is still absorbing the Ten Tails and tell Guy. "I really raised a good student¡­"


    Immediately a clone appears next to me and hits Guy''s neck knocking him out immediately and picking him up and running away together with Kakashi.


    As soon as that is done, I rush towards Obito and before he could even move.


    Squelch!


    I sink my fingers into his eye socket, pulling out his Kamui. I can''t allow Madara to get his one, I then look at Kakshi as he takes Naruto away and before he even notices.


    Squelch!


    I then looked at Madara who just finished absorbing the Ten Tails, head of white hair and pale skin, and he became enveloped by a cloak of chakra that stabilised into physical clothing: a full-bodied black garment with black pants, gloves, and boots, over which he wore a flowing white robe with six black magatama markings across his c.h.e.s.t and the familiar pattern of a black Rinnegan and nine black magatama markings in rows of three on his back. A grey horn-like protrusions grew out of his left temple and overlapped his forehead akin to a protector with an upward-curve on the right temple, giving him an overall appearance very similar to that of the Sage of the Six Paths.


    I could perfectly see his appearance and chakra with my Byakugan.


    Madara looks at me and says. "I commend you for your bravery, letting your comrades escape even when you yourself know that you could never hope to defeat me."


    I don''t say anything, let him keep thinking that. But he is kinda right though, I can no longer fight him head on or I will litterally die no matter.


    Well better enter Kamui¡­ but as I am about to do so. I immediately sense six exact hits on my chakra pathways system.


    Sh*t it''s the Limbo Clones¡­ even more of them now¡­


    Buy before I could even enter Kamui I see a hand appear in front of my face and¡­ I see black¡­


    SH*T¡­.


    ¡­..


    Madara uses his truth seeking balls to create a wall and just blast Yami''s body out of existence. Madara looks at him and doesn''t say anything¡­ mocking an already dead enemy is extremely shameful in his eyes.


    So he looks towards the horizon where Kakshi went.


    ¡­.


    As Yami''s clone who was carrying Guy frowns a little and looks at Kakshi and says. "The original is dead."


    Kakashi''s eyes widen at this. "W -What¡­ Yami is dead?!?!"


    ¡­.


    In another place, Sasuke''s corpse was laying on the ground, with no one around him as his heart was stabbed by his own sword. He died in extremely strange circ.u.mstances¡­ also since Yami changed the timeline so much. There was no one around him, no Karin, Jugo or Suigetu¡­ he was all alone¡­ bleeding to death¡­ he had gone to Konoha to release the Hokage previously summoned by Orochimaru, but he only found the 4th Hokage who acted strangely, he was killed by him and Minato is currently teleporting towards Naruto. But Minato also had a strange look in his eyes...


    ¡­.


    But during this time, in a whole different plane of existence, Naruto wakes up surrounded by a watery surface. He looks around and wonders out loudly. "Am I dead?"


    "That would be by what you mean by ''death''." Says a deep elderly voice that surprises Naruto turns around and sees an elderly man floating in front of him, he had the Rinnegan¡­ he is the Sage of Six Paths.


    Then Naruto asks who this person is, and the figure reveals himself to be none other than Hagoromo ¨­tsutsuki, the Sage of Six Paths himself.


    Naruto recognises the name as he had previously heard it from Jiraiya and Nagato, and states he is the one who created ninjutsu, Hagoromo corrects him however by saying he did not create ninjutsu, but ninsh¨±, stating his creation was to inspire peace, while ninjutsu was made to create war. Following this revelation, Hagoromo begins telling him about his history, including his mother, brother, and how his two sons fought. Hagoromo reveals to Naruto that he is the reincarnation of his younger son Asura ¨­tsutsuki. He completes his explanation and he was simultaneously speaking with Sasuke too. He gave them both the Sage of Six paths power¡­


    ¡­.


    Both Naruto and Sasuke open their eyes in the real world again. Both alive and stronger than ever.


    ¡­.


    But in the other realm where the Sage of Six Paths was floating. Behind him a strange shadow appears. He is completely covered in darkness and he walks out if the Six Path''s shadow.


    "Seem like the one I sent here just died." Says the strange shadow, its voice cold and unfeeling.


    The Sage of Six paths looked at the ''thing'' with a cautious look on his face. "It would seem so..."


    But the a wide smile appears on the shadow. "But is he dead tho?"


    When he sees that Haguromo seems to be waiting for his answer the Shadow doesn''t say anything and a dark portal opens in front of him. "Well, I guess my job is done here¡­ the rest is up to him. I am a very busy person."


    And he just walks in the portal and closes it behind him. As a weird chuckle overtakes the shadow¡­ "Hehehehe¡­ Yami¡­ that truly sounds like a strange name when I say it."


    .


    As the shadow walks away the Sage of Six paths breaths out a breath of relief. The first time he met the creature was forty years ago, even he doesn''t know what it is. But it is definitely dangerous, also it seems to have "brought" Yami Inuzuka here, whatever that means.


    ''Anyway now that the creature is gone. I can observe the two chosen ones and allow them to seal Kaguya.'' Thinks Haguromo, putting the dark shadows existence at the back of his mind. Even he himself didn''t notice that he dismissed something like that, it was completely strange.


    ¡­.


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    As we all know Yami is alive, I won''t even let you wait for the next chapter to hear that. It was pretty obvious in this chapter.


    P.S: Yep, that ''shadow'' is the thing who brought Yami here. It will be revealed what it is soon.


    P.P.S: When this story reaches 1000 Power Stones, it will get +1 Bonus Chapter that day.


    THIS STORY IS FINISHED ON PATRE¨°N...


    Check Out My P.A.T.R.E.O.N


    pa treon.com/HolyJoker


    JOIN THE DISCORD: discord.gg/M9hghrm


    (You can become part of the votes if you join Discord, and I also share pictures of the different characters)

 Chapter 228 - Gate of Death…

    Chapter 228


    Title: Gate of Death¡­


    ¡­.


    A couple minutes before Naruto opened his eyes, Kakashi together with the ''dead'' Naruto on his shoulder and Yami''s clone who has Guy on his other shoulder arrived at the moment. They arrive at where the rest of the Allied Shinobi Forces are.


    ¡­


    Madara on the other hand, as he travelled towards Kakashi and the others, he let the ten tails appear on its tree form and spread its roots when he saw that there were a bunch of Shinobi. He will just wait for it to grow to its full capacity as it absorbs the chakra of the people around him, then he can use the Infinite Tsukuyomi.


    He saw that a lot of people ran forward to protect Naruto and fight him. Yami''s clone also ordered them. "Fight! Fight him! We need only some time till our plan comes to fruition."


    When the ninja heard that, they were refueled with new vigor. They went towards Madara to try and fight him, but the giant tree that had grown now to a gigantic one and it seemed to almost sprout like a flower. Its roots moved and as it touched the ninja and s.u.c.k.e.d their chakra dry, immediately killing them and s.u.c.k.i.n.g their chakra.


    ¡­.


    Thousands of Ninja sacrifice themselves before¡­.


    Out of nowhere a wind blast appears and destroys all of the roots. Madara looks towards the figure and sees a man, with red vapor like chakra coming out of him and with tears coming out of his face.


    "Damn it¡­ Yami -sensei¡­ you always said that one must be calm when fighting an enemy¡­ BUT I CAN''T STAY CALM IN A SITUATION LIKE THIS!!!" Screams guy his voice full of anguish as his body goes past his limits, space around him seems to bend as he moves. Madara immediately recognizes the danger that Guy is to him.


    Pow!


    Guy kicks the air once and appears in front of Madara and kicks his midsection.


    Baam!


    Immediately Madara''s body is separated in two as it is blown away.


    ''This bastard¡­ his power is dangerous.'' Thinks Madara as he feels that every one of Guy''s movements is deadly. Guy, due to being trained by Yami, he is now way stronger than his original self ever was, so Madara is completely overwhelmed by him. But at the same time, Madara is stronger than he was originally supposed to be too, since he has the Eight Tails too, and only half of the nine tails is missing.


    So as Guy rained countless hits on Madara, destroying his body countless times.


    Guy appears to Madara''s side¡­


    Like a countless mirage, Guy''s punches hit Madara''s body, splattering it around except  his head and Madara protect his head¡­ but Madara''s body, and every piece of his blood connects together. Madara was using his Limbo Clones to put his parts together quickly and as Guy is about to hit Madara''s now exposed head he screams. "Die!! MADARAAAA!!!!"


    Squelch!


    But suddenly, out of Guy''s back, a dark arm appears, a shadow moves along its body as its hand runs through Guy''s body. Instantly killing him, as his body slowly turns to ash¡­


    ''Damn it¡­ Yami -sensei¡­ damn it¡­ I couldn''t even kill your killer. Damn it¡­ if only I was stronger.'' Thinks Guy as his mind is slowly surrounded by darkness and his body is fully turned to ash¡­ and he died¡­


    Naruto hadn''t woken up yet to do anything like save him. During the original timeline, Guy only survived because of luck. This time Naruto wasn''t there to save him at all¡­ so he simply died.


    ..


    Ten seconds seconds later and Naruto opens his eyes, and as he senses Guy''s chakra disappearing a tear drops down his face.


    ¡­.


    On the other side Neji looks as Guy''s body turns to ash. "Guy -sensei¡­"


    Lee was currently unconscious, he had overused the gates before in one of the fights against an Edo Tensei ninja, so he wasn''t here to witness Guy''s death.


    Ten Ten was in a whole battlefield and she wasn''t anywhere close by.


    ¡­.


    Madara sees this and he doesn''t say anything. He just looks at Guy''s ashes as they fall to the ground.


    "I apologize to you warrior of the Eight Gates, but I couldn''t give you the death that you deserved." Says Madara, his voice full of respect, he understood how strong the resolve of an Eight Gate user has to be in order to Open the Eighth Gate.


    But in the end, he is a ninja, and playing dirty as a ninja is no big deal to him. So he just looks towards Naruto as he senses something weird from him¡­


    But Madara''s eyes widen as he senses an attack from behind him.


    Fwosh!


    A giant purple Susanoo sword attacked him he used his truth seeking orbs to block it.


    He sees Sasuke, who now has a Mangekyo Sharingan and a RinneSharingan.


    But as he blocks Sasuke''s attack, he senses Naruto again somehow teleport behind him.


    <Lava Style: Rasenshuriken>


    Boom!


    That hits Madara in the back and it pushes him towards the Ten Tails Tree. And as his back hits the tree, the Lava Rasenshuriken cuts him in two and it even cuts the tree behind him.


    His lower body all regenerates again in an instant. Madara analyzes the situation immediately coming to a conclusion. ''Hmmm¡­ some chakra gathered at the kid''s Rinnegan before the Blonde kid was teleported. Meaning that Sasuke Uchiha has a Teleportation ability.''


    He then feels a sword teleport to his abdomen and pierce him. Madara cringes at this. ''His teleportation seems, more like replacement of space, meaning that he can change positions with something. But the Blong Hair brat was teleported behind me¡­ it means that cene air can be used as a Teleportation replacement.''


    Madara immediately realizes Sasuke''s new power just by observing his power twice. Showing his bountiful experience in fighting and suddenly he hears a strange voice on his head. {Absorb me¡­}


    Madara looks around and strangely sees no one who said that. He then looks at the tree. ''Is it the Shinju Tree? Does this mean¡­ that it''s ready to activate the Infinite Tsukuyomi.''


    While Madara was thinking this he immediately goes towards the tree and Naruto and Sasuke try to stop him, but Madara summons his Limbo Clones which hold them back for a couple seconds¡­ and that is all that he needed, as he goes and touches the Shinju Tree that was toppling over.


    Immediately the Tree starts to be absorbed into his body¡­


    ¡­.


    During in another place all together, in a certain place, there is just a puddle of blood. This is the place where Yami died¡­ suddenly his blood disappears as if it didn''t exist even to begin with.


    And out of nowhere, Yami and his body being fully okay appears.


    <Izanagi>


    One of the countless Sharingan on his skull turns blind and closes, and a cold look is on his face.


    ¡­.


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    Yami is BACK...


    (Author Notes are old... already finished the story...)


    THIS STORY IS FINISHED ON PATRE¨°N...


    Check Out My P.A.T.R.E.O.N


    pa treon.com/HolyJoker


    JOIN THE DISCORD: discord.gg/M9hghrm


    (You can become part of the votes if you join Discord, and I also share pictures of the different characters)

 Chapter 229 - The Final Battle...

    Chapter 229 (BONUS CHAPTER)


    Title: The Final Battle...


    ¡­.


    -Yami POV-


    That Madara¡­ he was really smart using his Libo Clones like that. I could have entered Kamui, but I would have brought the Limbo Clones with me too as I put my body in the Kamui dimension and that is dangerous as my plans go along.


    So I let him kill me. Honestly I was outclassed by him so it doesn''t matter anyway, also my Kamui must remain a secret till the last moment. No one yet knows that I have Kamui and Kotoamatsukami, there is a reason why I haven''t been overusing them after all.


    I immediately connect to a Hiraishin mark that I have had on Sasuke and Naruto, welp let''s see what is going on in there then.


    <Byakugan>


    Immediately I can see up to fifty kilometers (~30 miles), I can immediately see what Madara, Naruto and Sasuke are doing. I also see what is going on with the Shinju Tree. I see Madara absorbing the tree and his power rising up again.


    Welp, it seems like plan 2A it is. Plan A will still continue and it seems like there will be no need to go to plan B at all.


    Hmmm¡­ okay so¡­ this is it then. I look up and see the moon start to redden. Madara is casting Infinite Tsukuyomi. I immediately close my eyes and surround myself with earth so the Genjutsu doesn''t reach me. I then enter the Kamui dimensions too, as I know that escaping the Infinite Tsukuyomi isn''t quite easy.


    ¡­.


    Ten seconds later and I come back, I can see with the help of my Byakugan that Madara has been stabbed on the back by Zetsu. Welp, this is my chance then¡­


    ¡­.


    I then immediately see Madara facing towards me, Naruto and Sasuke are both looking at Madara''s transformation.


    Welp, time to work then. I make a one-handed handsign, immediately both Naruto and Sasuke freeze as countless curse-marks spread around their bodies, paralyzing and blinding them. I have had so much time to modify their bodies¡­ I obviously did so. I was prepared for a scenario like this, and plan A is still at play here, but it seems like Plan G will have to be eliminated. That is the plan where Naruto and Sasuke defeat Kaguya like in the Canon Timeline.


    I see that Madara looks back at Zetsu and then at me. "You backstabbing bastards."


    I don''t pay attention to a dying dog like him. Instead I go towards Naruto and Sasuke, I use Kotoamatsukami on them and stop them from acting up. Then slowly, my smile widens as I touch their heads, I immediately delete every single memory from them. The nine tails inside Naruto wanted to say something about this, but just a Kotoamatsukami on it and it''s back to being the docile pet that he should be.


    I have planned for this, for way too long and have thought of every possible scenario. I am as prepared as I can be. After deleting their memories.


    Squelch!


    A disgusting sound is made as I sink my fingers in Naruto''s and Sasuke''s brains.


    <Chimera Technique>


    ¡­.


    -General POV-


    As the liquid and now dead Naruto and Sasuke flow towards Yami, he just opens his mouth and the liquid flows in.


    Immediately his chakra amount skyrocketed, he could feel Naruto''s and Sasuke''s souls inside his belly, he immediately started destroying them and devouring them both. He then took a deep breath and¡­


    Spit!


    He spits out an orange ball and the ball slowly transforms into a giant nine tailed fox, it was Kurama, who stays completely still. The Souls of Naruto and Sasuke got destroyed now. He had already modified the Chimera technique and with his knowledge of souls, he knew how to devour souls.


    This was the time when Kaguya fully took form and Madara''s half dead body fell to the ground.


    Yami now had Sasuke''s Rinnegan on the middle of his forehead. He looked at Kaguya and said. "Well now¡­ good morning¡­ Kaguya."


    She just looked at Yami with tears in her eyes. As her hair extends towards him, Yami just looks at Kaguya and¡­


    He appears behind Kaguya, who in response opens a portal with an Ash Bone coming toward Yami and all of her hair gathering together to attack him.


    But he has a smile on his face as¡­ the hair and the bone attack passes right through him.


    <Kamui>


    Yami reveals his trump card as he easily passes through Kaguya''s attacks and on his palms there is a sun & moon symbol. He materializes his hands and touches Kaguya, immediately Kaguya looks at Yami in despair as she knows what will happen next.


    But contrary to her expectations what is on Yami''s face is just a smile. Kaguya''s eyes strangely widen, this time not in surprise but a strange trace of recognition to them. But Yami doesn''t let her finish as countless black tendrils come out of his body and stab into Kaguya.


    <Chimera Technique>


    Kaguya is someone who uses raw power to fight, so she never understood the way Yami fought, nor could she come up with a way to counter him. She tried to teleport to another dimension but she couldn''t, she tried everything she could but she couldn''t even move anymore. The Black Zetsu under her sleeve tried to move but suddenly another arm has reconstructed at Yami''s stomach and caught Zetsu.


    "W -What the hell are you." Said Zetsu, but Yami didn''t answer at all. He knows how fragile really the situation is and he might actually mess it all up. He isn''t someone that gloats at his enemies or anything like that. So he easily kills the Black Zetsu, ripping him apart by using his Kamui. As Yami''s hair falls out and countless eyes appear on his skull.


    Looking around wildly¡­


    Slowly a shadow encompasses Kaguya''s body, she can''t even say anything as she is easily overwhelmed by Yami.


    Yami doesn''t smile or celebrate this. He doesn''t scream in joy or anything. He knows that currently his plan is at its ending phase, Kagya''s body is painfully morphed into liquid and it flows towards Yami as it is absorbed through his skin. Immediately his skin turns white and his hair turns silver, his new Otsutsuki bloodline easily encompassing the other bloodlines and absorbing them.


    Yami then immediately activates his evolution cube inside his body, the evolution energy running through him as it evolves his body completely. Slowly but surely¡­ his body is coming closer and closer to it''s ''perfect'' form.


    ¡­


    Two minutes later and Kaguya is defeated¡­ Yami just has an empty look in his eyes as he looks at his hands. Tears drop from his eyes one by one¡­ it wasn''t tears of sadness. It was tears of joy and gratitude as he destroyed Kaguya''s souls inside his body.


    If he said the battle was hard fought¡­ that would not be true. It actually went almost exactly to plan, he didn''t even have to go to plan B, C, D, E and F¡­


    He is glad that it ended like this. He doesn''t want to have some epic battle, he actually hates fighting. He doesn''t want to fighting someone stronger than him¡­ he hates doing that too. Yami even hates manipulating people, he only loves absolute power. He doesn''t find p.l.e.a.s.u.r.e uncertainty, not knowing if he will live or die. He hates that...


    "Hahahahaha." A small laugh rings through this now empty and silent world. For the first time in countless years, Yami can finally express his emotions without the need to hold them back. The look of pure joy that appeared on his face was mesmerizing and¡­ terrifying too.


    He is grateful¡­ he is grateful to himself for staying true to its goals and dreams and just like he wanted.


    <Byakugan>


    Yami felt something that he has never felt before¡­ the range of his current Byakugan is¡­ is the whole surface of the planet. He can feel it¡­ he can feel his first step towards Omnipresence, he knows that his journey will most likely never be over. He knows that he still has that greed in his heart and he now wants more, he ''looks'' towards  the earth and senses something strange.


    ''Hmmm¡­ so there was another Otsutsuki one earth? I didn''t know of that¡­'' Thinks Yami and..


    Next Yaimi does someone that should be impossible, he uses his Teleportation Mangekyo Sharingan, which allows him to teleport to anywhere within his vision.


    Fwosh!


    Immediately he appears next to a ''human'' who is in the middle of the woods and strangely he isn''t under the effects of the Infinite Tsukuyomi.


    The man is a fairly tall and of light complexion. He sports a shaved head, apart from a long mohawk of black hair tied in a long ponytail style reaching his lower-back, pronounce eye ridges void of brows, a broad nose, and large red eyes. He also has a diamond tattoo on his chin and the Roman numeral "¢ô" tattooed below his left eye.


    But Yami immediately knows what is wrong, as he looks through the man''s ear and sees the miniature Otsutsuki¡­ he bore the telltale features of the ¨­tsutsuki clan, including pale skin, and a long, curving horn which grew from his left brow and wrapped around the back of his skull before jutting outward from his right temple, resembling a crown. The iris and pupil of his right eye is yellow with a black wheel-like pattern with eight spokes coming out of the centre, while his left eye was a Byakugan.


    Yami moves at unimaginable speeds as he easily kills and destroys the surprisingly strong Otsutsuki. He also absorbs his power all together¡­


    ¡­..


    Yami didn''t have any glorious battle, he hates that, he hates having to struggle against someone. He planned of everything¡­ him having a hard battle would be illogical, in another two or three chapters this story will be over and we will see how Yami''s story will end. ????????????


    He had future knowledge and knew the powers of his enemies. Him losing this battle and how he hid his power. He maximised his chances of winning.


    P.S: THIS STORY IS NOT OVER YET.????


    THIS STORY IS FINISHED ON PATRE¨°N...


    Check Out My P.A.T.R.E.O.N


    pa treon.com/HolyJoker


    JOIN THE DISCORD: discord.gg/M9hghrm

 Chapter 230 - Back Again...

    Chapter 230


    Title: Back Again...


    ¡­.


    After absorbing the now named Isshiki Otsutsuki. Yami clenches his fist and is a little surprised by the power boost he got from him. He then takes his memories it its raw form and destroys their emotions connected to the memory and he starts watching it like a movie.


    ¡­


    In the end Yami just frowns disappointedly at this. ''What a dumbass, he got betrayed by Kaguya when they landed on earth. Welp, what a loser¡­ all this power and in the end, his arrogant personality was the thing that stopped him from greatness.''


    Well in the end to him it doesn''t matter. What matters is that he has now learned where the other Otsutsuki and their clan are. Well now this is interesting to Yami¡­ quite interesting indeed¡­


    He then controls his Byakugan''s vision as he¡­


    Fwosh!


    In an instant he is teleported at the end of the earth''s atmosphere and almost reaching into space. His Byakugan now reaches to the moon, and he immediately teleports to where some of the Otsutsuki Clan Branch members live. Before they could even react, he just absorbed them and then he immediately puts even more chakra into his evolution cube to optimize his genes.


    ''It feels like there is no ending to the growth of the Otsutsuki Genes.'' Contemplates Yami, as he doesn''t even feel the DNA collapse or anything like it. Though he currently needs to go into a cooldown and strengthen his soul a little bit more before absorbing some more Otsutsuki. ''They will make some nice prey for me.''


    ''Hmmm¡­ guess I should make my own Eye on the Moon Plan.'' At the side of Yami''s skull an eye appears, more specifically a Kotoamatsukami eye.


    <Infinte Kotoamatsukami>


    Them slowly another eye appears, it was a clone of Itachi''s eye and Yami''s right eye socket, a RinneSharingan appears.


    <Infinite Tsukuyomi>


    On the moon, the image of the Tsukuyomi and Kotoamatsukami are reflected. Madara and Kaguya wanted for a type of eternal peace for the people in their dreams. Yami cares none about that, he used his Tsukuyomi to modify everyone''s dream and make it a perfect copy of reality. Even the laws of physics are the same. Next he used the Kotoamatsukami to put the idea in people''s head that they must create as many new ninjutsu in their ''lives''.


    Then Yami makes a handsign and¡­


    POOOOOOF!


    A whole part of the planet is surrounded by smoke as around one million shadow clones appear. They immediately go down there to where the people in the Infinite Tsukuyomi are being held.


    They will do daily inspection on them from today till eternity. Also there was another order¡­ give his children¡­ legitimate and illegitimate ones their own lives and how they would like it to be. ''Yami''... their father will always be there for them. This is Yami''s last gift to his children¡­ an eternity in happiness. This is his heaven for them, as he knows that a real heaven doesn''t really exist now.


    He knows that he can visit them whenever he wants in their ''lives''... this is his way of protecting them. For he will never take them with him, he knows how it will end if he does something like that, he will be betrayed by them. Eternity is a very long time...


    -Yami POV-


    I look at the beautiful earth below me as I am currently in space. I see that everyone, or more correctly¡­ everything on earth is under my control now. Also the smartest people on the planet will be working for me and developing techniques for eternity¡­ for me. Geniuses at the level of Orochimaru all around the world¡­ working just for me. I wonder what they will be able to come up with. But in this way, just like Humanity, I will always continue to evolve.


    But still¡­ I want some more. Well then¡­ time to go some Otsutsuki hunting.


    .....


    .....


    ¡­.


    -General POV-


    Since that day three years have passed. The Otsutsuki were already exterminated by Yami¡­ all of them¡­ devoured by him. His body, chakra, jutsu and everything else is at the limit. He has gained so many abilities, form the ability to read fate, see the future, erase time, even enter different dimensions. Ever since he gained the ability to travel to different dimensions, he also has the ability to see where one comes from from one of the countless Otsutsuki that he has devoured. And that is what is confusing him¡­ because when he opens a portal¡­ Yami can see a ''string'' that can teleport him to a certain place¡­ which definitely isn''t Konoha.


    ''So¡­ I can return home now huh¡­'' Thinks Yami, as he has a little conflicted look on his face. But in the end he comes to his decision. ''What should be done must be done. I can''t cower out of it once more. But I still have some things to take care of here.''


    ''Time Travel¡­ has been acquired.'' Thinks Yami as he then opens a portal in front of him. ''This is the 2nd Dimension¡­ or also known as Limbo or the place where Hagoromo, Shinigami, Jashin, etc should be.''


    Yami has a smirk on his face as he is  confident in taking them down too. As soon as he walks through the portal.


    ¡­


    He sees that he is in a gray world with water below him. Nothing makes sense in here as Yami immediately notices that not even the laws of the world are different. But when he activates his Byakugan, he sees something that absolutely shocks him.


    ''What the hell is that¡­'' Thinks Yami, his face full of shock at what he sees in front of him. The Shinigami, Haguromo and countless other dead beings nailed to another already giant dead being who seems like a fish with countless hands made out of darkness¡­ they are also all ''dead'' too. ''Also that dark being with the hands made out of darkness¡­ is that the being who was attempting to grab me as I was getting reborn here???''


    ¡­.


    -Yami POV-


    I also see something else written on the body of the dark fish-like being with hands of darkness attached to it. The writings say..


    [Catch Me If You Can]


    It is the thing who reincarnated me. I have always had a most likely theory for who the being that reincarnated me is, let''s see if this is real then.


    I open a portal back to my original world and¡­ I step through it.


    ¡­.


    Immediately I am in outer space, I am already invisible so no satellite or anything like that can see me. I see my beautiful original earth. The countless satellites around it and¡­ with my Byakugan I can see something that brings me a little despair.


    Forty three years have passed in here since my death too. I immediately just teleport towards my apartment where me and my family used to live. When I entered I saw two old men chatting together happily¡­ one was a brown eyes dirty blond haired old man who looked around his fifties. This is someone I am very familiar with and even if I didn''t see him for forty years I recognize him¡­ he is my little brother.


    Next to him¡­ it is another old man, this one seems around his sixties as his hair is all white from old age and he too has brown eyes¡­ that old man¡­


    .


    .


    .


    ...that old man¡­ is me¡­


    ¡­


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    TUN... TUN.... TUUUUUNNNN


    P.S: ONE MORE CHAPTERS TILL ITS OVER


    I will post the chapter today too, the same with my Epilogue of my HxH story

 Chapter 231 - THE END...

    Chapter 231


    Title: THE END...


    ¡­.


    When I see an old version of me¡­ I am completely shocked. How is this possible? I died forty years ago, this shouldn''t be possible. I can''t understand what is even going on here, what is happening, why it is happening and how it happened. I can see that the me in here is healthy and normal, he has no chakra in his system or anything weird.


    What is going on here? Am I just a copy of him or something. I can see that he has the same look in his eyes that I have.


    Suddenly as if lightning hit me I came to a realization¡­


    Oh¡­ I think I get it now¡­


    I immediately teleport away from this place and go into a secluded underground, undiscovered cave. While in there I just open a portal, this portal isn''t your average portal and takes quite a lot of chakra to activate. It looks like a dark blackhole.


    This¡­ this is a portal to the past¡­


    I immediately walk through it, and by the chakra I put into it I can calculate the date I go back into. This should exactly be the perfect time¡­


    I just calmly walk through the portal.


    ¡­.


    Immediately I come back to a place where I will never forget. This is that fateful day that I died. I see that the sun is up and it''s quite hot outside. The sun is shining and a black haired, brown eyed young man is walking on the side of the road with a calm look on his face.


    He is wearing a white short-sleeved t-shirt and black jeans, with also black and white sneakers. He has a red and black backpack too. That¡­ that is the past me. I don''t even need to analyze his facial expressions to know what he is thinking, because I already know. He is planning on how he will go to college and build some connections there and after that he will screw over the company that he will work with and make enough money for himself so he can retire at thirty. He then plans to use that money so he and his family can have vacations, they can enjoy the rest of their lives.


    Pretty good plan, but it obviously has countless flaws that I just couldn''t see back then.


    I see a guy in a red sports car drive as the past me is just walking on the sidewalk. This is it¡­ this is the moment where past me will die.


    Brrr!


    The car roars as she gets close to past me and¡­


    Fwosh!


    It just drives right past him¡­ and past me just walks normally, not even paying attention to the car that walked past him¡­. What?... How is this possible? I know that I died. Did someone mess with my memories?


    ¡­.I know¡­ I know¡­ I know what happened. My theory was always correct, it''s just that I didn''t want to admit it. Damn it¡­


    I make another time portal and travel thirty seconds to the past.


    ¡­.


    I see the red sports car driving again. I just extend one chakra string towards the car''s tires and..


    BOOOM!


    The car rolls, killing the driver in impact as the car rolls towards the past me. The past me can''t even dodge as immediately caving in his c.h.e.s.t and past me chokes on his own blood and¡­ dies¡­ his brown eyes wide open. Humans truly are fragile creatures. Thankfully the whole universe could explode and I would still be okay, well there is the thing that people could go to the past and kill me when I was weaker, but sadly for them, the hundreds of millions of clones in the Naruto world would notice them as soon as someone entered that world.


    Welp, now I know who reincarnated me at least¡­ I reincarnated myself¡­


    I grab my pasts fragile soul and revive my body, bringing it back to life and awakening it. Also giving it my past selves memories and creating a small normal soul and keeping the conscience all together.


    I then travel back to the future where I see the future me talking with my brother and¡­


    I still have my past soul with me and I open a portal to travel back to the Naruto world.


    As I do so, I just walk through the portal and surround myself in darkness, making me appear as just a dark creature made of shadows.


    ¡­.


    When I go back to that world, I immediately have my Byakgan active and search for a certain unborn baby¡­ Yami Inuzuka¡­


    And I set my soul upon him. My soul starts travelling towards the body by following the ''light'' but immediately dark hands appear from the 2nd Dimension and try to grab him. They are the creatures who can sense an intruder that appears on this world.


    Fwosh!


    I cut the hands off and looked towards the now live giant fish-like creature with dark like hands all over its body. It tried to grab my previous selves soul. But I didn''t allow it¡­


    I immediately entered the 2nd Dimension and looked at all of the creatures in there. A third eye appears on my head and¡­


    <Infinite Kotoamatsukami>


    Immediately all of the creatures in here, even Haguromo easily comes under my control. I literally absorbed all of the Otsutsuki, and those things could enter the 2nd Dimension too. Well 2nd Dimension is called Limbo by them¡­ but whatever¡­ I don''t care. I am stronger so I can name sh*t as I like now. What are they gonna even do about it? Nothing¡­ because they can''t do anything against me. I am not scared of any of them now, I could sh*t down their throats and they could do nothing but swallow.


    Anyway, I will have to stay here and protect the past me against anyone, like a time traveler from the future, the shinigamis or something like that. He can deal with the mortals and grow at his own pace while I take care of the godly beings from staring him to shreds immediately.


    ¡­


    ¡­


    ¡­


    ¡­


    ¡­


    ¡­


    ¡­


    ¡­


    ¡­


    Forty two years pass as I just start absorbing the power of all of the beings here in the 2nd Dimension.


    I also nail them to the giant fish-like being and write on it.


    [Catch me if you can]


    Welp, now here I go.


    I use all of my abilities to create a crack on the dimension where I am currently.


    Also surprisingly immediately as I transferred it changed something, the young baby whose soul was being devoured by the past me, it writhed in pain and kicked the mother in the stomach. So Tsume''s father saw that and decided to not have a baby yet¡­ so actually Tsume was born a couple of years later than she was supposed to


    Anyway, I now have gained quite a lot of power. I can literally see everything in the Naruto world and know its past ever since its creation, I even know the origin of Chakra.


    Anyway, this world now has no more benefits for me. Except my clones which manage the people under the Infinite Tsukuyomi.


    Anyway this portal in front of me, is a new ability of mine. I can now enter the 3rd Dimension. Or more correctly known as the multiverse, I also immediately sent countless clones to travel at the infinite Naruto and get rid of all of the time travel devices, they will continue doing this for eternity since the alternate universes are endless.


    Thankfully, there is no alternative me running around since I already isolated this Naruto universe, it can''t create alternatives at all. So no me coming to kill me or something like that. Anyway, now I can use the 3rd Dimension to travel to other anime or media worlds.


    I immediately enter the portal again¡­ I can''t tell which world I will travel to, because unlike my own previous world which I had a ''tie'' with. I have no connection to any of the worlds.


    ¡­.


    As I step through the portal I am in a the outskirts of a universe surrounded with stars and such things. My senses immediately spread all over the universe and I realize where I am¡­ HxH universe¡­ that is cool.


    I immediately try to enter it but immediately I felt resistance and¡­ what? This world is resisting me and stopping me from entering it.


    I decide to push a little harder and..


    BOOOOM!


    That universe is destroyed¡­ it used its ''power'' to try and resist me...


    Ups¡­


    Anyway, I go to an alternate version of this universe of HxH¡­ and this time I don''t try to do anything like that and try to actually think of how to enter this universe. I obviously know one way, which is to make my soul ''pure''... it pretty much means that I have to give up all of my power and then I can confuse this world''s ''natural system'' into thinking that I was created here. Just like I kinda tricked the Naruto World to put in my previous world soul¡­


    Anyway¡­ it seems like I will have to think of something and analyze this.


    Better just enter the 4th Dimension, that place is where nothing even exists and at the same time everything exists. It is an imaginary plane created by the thought process of every living being''s in the multiverse.


    ¡­.


    I go there and after thinking for a couple of decades I come to a conclusion¡­


    I just wave my hand and a giant medieval city is created. I just sit there and smile¡­ I have figured it out¡­ I just rebirth alternate versions of myself into these new worlds. I can then copy their powers after they gain enough power to meet me, I will leave them an opening to this place¡­


    Hmmm¡­ what should I call this place. Oh I know¡­ I will call it The Citadel. Anyway, I am nowhere near Omnipotence and Omnipotence¡­ so my journey will have to continue¡­


    HAHAHAHAHAHAHAHAHAHAAHA


    When I get lonely I will visit my family, I will go to the past or something like that. This is perfect now. I am so happy, I am ecstatic, I can do whatever I want, I can act whatever I want. I can r*pe, kill and everything that I want.


    Anyway, I will just have to keep rebirthing alternate versions of me and then I will have to copy their powers. Also I am now strong so I can let them live in this city so it doesn''t get too lonely.


    ¡­.


    I grab the soul of an alternate version of myself and put him under a genjutsu so he sees some strange scary things. I then throw him towards the HxH world¡­ hope he isn''t reborn as a girl¡­ I am new at this so I don''t have the precision to make him be reborn as who I want as.


    Anyway, now I should get and watch some anime from my world. Go into the future of my world, get the finished one piece and start reading the manga¡­ hmmm¡­ or should I watch the anime¡­ hahahaha¡­.


    ...


    THE END¡­.


    AUTHOR NOTE:


    Damn¡­ this is over now¡­ ?????¡á? thank you for following me. It''s been a ride, I am in college at the end of the first year now and when I started writing this was around when I had the college exams. Damn¡­ time passes so fast.


    Anyway, I will probably write another Naruto story again in the future too. But this MC will be during Naruto''s generation¡­ and now we know who will reincarnate him. The R.O.B will be Yami.


    We also saw how Yami''s personality drastically changed as he became so powerful now. He is no longer really cautious, he doesn''t need to be, he will be spending his time watching anime and reading manga as the others finish their lives. Also other worlds who consider him as an ''intruder'' try to ''fight'' him as he tries to enter them, so they then self-destruct.


    Also I realized that Tsumes age was wrong during the beginning so now that plot hole is fixed.


    Also this is why I didn''t write the Epilogue of HxH: A Selfish Wish¡­ because he will meet Yami¡­ that will be another thing that I have had planned for a long time.


    Anyway. THANK YOU FOR READING THIS. I  had difficulty writing the ending because it felt as if I was literally ending an integral part of my life. I have spent so much time thinking about this story and now it feels surreal that I won''t have to think about it anymore. HOPE YOU ALSO READ MY OTHER STORIES AND THE ONES THAT I WILL CONTINUE TO WRITE FOR YEARS TO COME.


    SEE YA~ on one of my other stories bros¡­


    P.S: I didn''t reread the chapter¡­ I couldn''t...I don''t know. It just felt surreal. So if you see any grammar mistake just write me on the comments or on Discord...


    P.P.S: Yep, Yami reincarnated himself... and that dark figure that we saw a couple of chapters ago was the future Yami....


    VOTE FOR THE NEXT STORY THAT WILL BE ON ... ALSO CHECK OUT MY ONE PIECE FISHMAN STORY TOO!!!!

 Chapter 232 - Update

    Oh yeah, I have an Original Story out by the way. Called: The Game of a Blood Mage


    Also have a One Piece Story


    Called: One Piece: Reborn as a Fishman


    P.S: I usually don''t do promotions (because I forget) but some people were commenting that I should do it. So here it is.?????